Vol 4

US Army Corps of Engineers Savannah District
Fort Stewart Georgia
Solicitation Number W912HN-12-R-0003 ADAL Winn Army Community Hospital, Phase II Volume 4 of 4 - Technical Divisions 26 through 34 FY-10 PN 72292
March 2012
U.S. ARMY ENGINEER DISTRICT, SAVANNAH CORPS OF ENGINEERS 100 WEST OGLETHORPE AVENUE SAVANNAH, GEORGIA 31401-3640
This page was intentionally left blank for duplex printing.
Winn Army Community Hospital Addition/Alteration
12R03
PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 11 14 20 22 30 33 33 35 42 45 45 45 50 52 56 57 57 57 57 57 58 62 73 74 78 78 91 00 00 00.00 00.00 00 00 29 26 00 00.00 00.10 35 00 13 50 16 19.00 19.11 20.00 23 00 35 19 19 00 23 13 SUMMARY OF WORK WORK RESTRICTIONS PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES LEED(TM) DOCUMENTATION GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS SOURCES FOR REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS QUALITY CONTROL QUALITY CONTROL SYSTEM (QCS) SPECIAL INSPECTION FOR SEISMIC-RESISTING SYSTEMS TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND CONTROLS TEMPORARY OFFICE TRAILERS INFECTIONS CONTROL PROCEDURES TEMPORARY PEST CONTROL TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS INDOOR AIR QUALITY (IAQ) MANAGEMENT ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION TEMPORARY STORM WATER POLLUTION CONTROL PROJECT IDENTIFICATION RECYCLED/RECOVERED MATERIALS INSTALLATION OF GOVERNMENT-FURNISHED MEDICAL EQUIPMENT CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
20 10
10 10
20 11 10
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 02 02 02 41 82 83 84 00 14.00 10 13.00 20 16 DEMOLITION *3 ASBESTOS HAZARD CONTROL ACTIVITIES *3 LEAD IN CONSTRUCTION *3 HANDLING OF LIGHTING BALLASTS AND LAMPS CONTAINING PCBs AND MERCURY
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 03 03 03 03 30 45 45 48 00 00 33 14 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE PRECAST PRESTRESSED STRUCTURAL CONCRETE PRECAST CONCRETE BOLLARDS
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY 04 20 00 MASONRY
DIVISION 05 - METALS 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 12 30 40 50 51 23 00 00 00 13 00 WELDING, STRUCTURAL STRUCTURAL STEEL STEEL DECKS COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS METAL STAIRS PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1
12R03
05 51 33 05 52 00 05 53 05
METAL LADDERS METAL RAILINGS WELDED STEEL BAR GRATING
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 06 06 06 10 18 41 61 00 00 16.00 10 16 ROUGH CARPENTRY GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION LAMINATE CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CASEWORK SOLID POLYMER (SOLID SURFACING) FABRICATIONS
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 08 11 13 14 18 21 21 22 26 42 42 54 55 60 61 72 81 84 92 95 00 16 53 00 13 13 16 00 30 13 63 23 50 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 ENVELOPE COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS CEMENTITIOUS WATERPROOFING ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING PEDESTRIAN TRAFFIC COATINGS SUBGRADE RIGID INSULATION MINERAL FIBER BLANKET INSULATION ROOF AND DECK INSULATION SPRAY POLYURETHANE FOAM INSULATING AIR BARRIER SYSTEM METAL WALL PANELS MANUFACTURED WALL PANEL THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING (TPO) VEGETATED ROOF COMPONENTS FLASHING AND SHEET METAL COPPER ROOF SYSTEM ROOF ACCESSORIES SPRAY-APPLIED FIREPROOFING FIRESTOPPING JOINT SEALANTS EXPANSION CONTROL
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 08 11 11 14 32 33 41 42 44 70 71 81 81 87 91 13 16 00 13 00 23 43 00 00 00 00 17 16 00 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES WOOD DOORS ALUMINUM SLIDING GLASS DOORS ROLLING COUNTER SHUTTERS FIRE RATED GLASS AND FRAMING SYSTEMS INTENSIVE CARE UNIT AND CRITICAL CARE UNIT ENTRANCE CURTAIN WALL AND GLAZED ASSEMBLIES FINISH HARDWARE DOOR HARDWARE GLAZING FIRE-RATED GLASS FRAGMENT RETENTION FILM FOR GLASS METAL WALL LOUVERS
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 09 09 09 09 09 09 06 22 27 29 30 51 90 00 00 00 00 00 COLOR SCHEDULE SUPPORTS FOR PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD GYPSUM BOARD ACCESSORIES GYPSUM BOARD CERAMIC TILE, QUARRY TILE, AND PAVER TILE ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 2
12R03
09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09
51 54 65 66 66 68 83 90
13 60 00 16 23 00 13 00
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS METAL PANEL CEILINGS RESILIENT FLOORING PRECAST TERRAZZO TREADS RESINOUS TERRAZZO FLOORING CARPET TILE PERFORATED ACOUSTICAL WOOD WALL PANELS PAINTS AND COATINGS
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 14 14 20 21 21 22 26 28 44 51 56 56 00 01 02 00 13 23.16 26.33 13 13 16 13 13 27 VISUAL COMMUNICATIONS SPECIALTIES EXTERIOR SIGNAGE INTERIOR SIGNAGE EXTERIOR WATER FEATURE TOILET COMPARTMENTS CUBICLE TRACK AND HARDWARE FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS WALL AND CORNER GUARDS TOILET ACCESSORIES FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS METAL LOCKERS STEEL SHELVING MOBILE STORAGE SHELVING UNITS
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 05 06 12 13 41 41 42 44 46 47 70 72 72 40 40.13 00 00 05 11 00 00 00 00 00 13 21 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE *3 PARKING/BARRIER GATE OPERATOR *3 AUTOMATIC BOLLARD EQUIPMENT PORTABLE AND MODULAR KITCHEN REFRIGERATED AND FROZEN FOOD STORAGE EQUIPMENT FOOD PREPARATION EQUIPMENT FOOD COOKING EQUIPMENT FOOD DISPENSING EQUIPMENT ICE MACHINES GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MEDICAL EQUIPMENT MEDICAL EQUIPMENT, MISCELLANEOUS CEILING LIFT
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 12 24 13 12 48 13.13 12 50 00 12 93 00 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS *4 FURNITURE SYSTEMS THIS SECTION IS INCLUDED FOR INFORMATION ONLY NOT IN CONTRACT SITE FURNISHINGS
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13 34 19 13 48 00.00 10 13 48 00 *3 GLAZED SPECIALTY STRUCTURES SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT 14 21 23 14 92 00 ELECTRIC TRACTION PASSENGER ELEVATORS PNEUMATIC-TUBE SYSTEM PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 3
12R03
DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 12 00 21 13 13.00 10 STANDPIPE SYSTEMS WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM, FIRE PROTECTION
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING 22 22 22 22 22 00 05 08 14 60 70 48.00 20 00 29 70 PLUMBING, HEALTHCARE FACILITIES MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION, AND SEISMIC CONTROL COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS SUMP PUMPS GAS AND VACUUM SYSTEMS FOR HEALTHCARE FACILITIES
DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 23 05 48 23 23 23 23 23 05 07 08 08 09 93 00 00.00 10 00 23 AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS *3 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS *3 DELETED DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL FOR HVAC AND OTHER LOCAL BUILDING SYSTEMS FACILITY GAS PIPING REFRIGERANT PIPING FORCED HOT WATER HEATING SYSTEMS USING WATER AND STEAM HEAT EXCHANGERS CHILLED WATER PIPING SYSTEMS UNITARY HEATING AND COOLING EQUIPMENT
23 11 25 23 23 00 23 57 10.00 10 23 64 26 23 82 02.00 10
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 05 08 08 20 23 29 32 48.00 10 00 01 00 00 23 33.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS *3 DELETED INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM SWITCHBOARDS VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEMS UNDER 600 VOLTS UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) SYSTEM ABOVE 15 KVA CAPACITY LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM INTERIOR LIGHTING
26 41 01.00 10 26 51 00
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 05 08 10 21 41 51 52 54 28.36 00 00 00.00 00.00 16 32.00 00.00 40 CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS COMMUNICATION COMMISSSIONING REQUIREMENTS BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEM NURSE CALL AUDIO-VISUAL (NCAV) SYSTEM RADIO AND PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS NURSE CALL TONE-VISUAL (NCTV) SYSTEM COMMUNITY ANTENNA TELEVISION (CATV) SYSTEMS
40 10 10 20
DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 08 00 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 4
12R03
28 16 01.00 10 28 20 01.00 10 28 31 76
SMALL INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEM ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEM INTERIOR FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM
DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK 31 31 31 31 00 11 31 32 00 00 16 11 EARTHWORK CLEARING AND GRUBBING SOIL TREATMENT FOR SUBTERRANEAN TERMITE CONTROL SOIL SURFACE EROSION CONTROL
DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 05 11 11 12 16 16 16 17 35 84 92 92 93 33 16.16 24 16 13 15 20 24.00 10 00 23 19 23 00 LANDSCAPE ESTABLISHMENT SUBBASE COURSE FOR PERVIOUS PAVING GRADED CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE FOR FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT HOT-MIX ASPHALT (HMA) FOR ROADS CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND CURBS AND GUTTERS CONCRETE BLOCK PAVEMENTS PERMEABLE INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVEMENT PAVEMENT MARKINGS SCREENING DEVICES UNDERGROUND SPRINKLER SYSTEMS SEEDING SODDING EXTERIOR PLANTS
DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES 33 33 33 33 33 33 11 30 34 40 70 82 00 00 00 00 02.00 10 00 WATER DISTRIBUTION SANITARY SEWERS FORCE MAINS AND INVERTED SIPHONS; SEWER STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, UNDERGROUND TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTSIDE PLANT (OSP)
DIVISION 34 - TRANSPORTATION 34 71 13.19 *4 DELETED
-- End of Project Table of Contents --
PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 5
W912HN-12-R-0003
SECTION 26 05 48.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 10/06 PART 1 1.1 GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION (AISC) AISC 325 (2005) Manual of Steel Construction ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM E 580/E 580M (2009) Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels in Areas Requiring Moderate Seismic Restraint
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD) UFC 3-310-04 (2007; Change 1) Seismic Design for Buildings
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) UL 1598 1.2 1.2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION General Requirements (2008; Reprint Jan 2010) Luminaires
The requirements for seismic protection measures described in this section shall be applied to the electrical equipment and systems listed below. Structural requirements shall be in accordance with Section 13 48 00 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT. 1.2.2 Electrical Equipment
Electrical equipment shall include the following items to the extent required on the drawings or in other sections of these specifications: Control Panels Light Fixtures Transformers 1.2.3 Electrical Systems Panelboards Switchboards (Floor Mounted)
The following electrical systems shall be installed as required on the drawings and other sections of these specifications and shall be seismically protected in accordance with this specification: For the Clinic: a. Electrical components required for life-safety following an SECTION 26 05 48.00 10 Page 1
W912HN-12-R-0003
earthquake. b. Electrical components containing hazardous materials. For the Central Utility Plant: a. Electrical components required for life-safety following an earthquake. b. Electrical components containing hazardous materials. c. Electrical components that DO NOT have flexible connections or floor-mounted having a weight greater than 400 pounds. d. Ceiling hung electrical components having a weight greater than 20 pounds (equipment) or 5 lbs/ft. 1.2.4 Contractor Designed Bracing
The Contractor shall design the bracing in accordance with UFC 3-310-04 and additional data furnished by the Contracting Officer. Resistance to lateral forces induced by earthquakes shall be accomplished without consideration of friction resulting from gravity loads. UFC 3-310-04 uses parameters for the building, not for the equipment in the building; therefore, corresponding adjustments to the formulas shall be required. Loadings determined using UFC 3-310-04 are based on strength design; therefore, AISC 325 shall be used for the design. 1.2.5 Conduits Requiring No Special Seismic Restraints
Seismic restraints may be omitted from electrical conduit less than 2-1/2 inches trade size and flexible by definition. All other interior conduit, shall be seismically protected as specified. 1.3 1.3.1 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS Rigidly Mounted Equipment
The following specific items of equipment to be furnished under this contract shall be constructed and assembled to withstand the seismic forces specified in UFC 3-310-04. Each item of rigid electrical equipment shall be entirely located and rigidly attached on one side only of a building expansion joint. Piping, electrical conduit, etc., which cross the expansion joint shall be provided with flexible joints that are capable of accommodating displacements equal to the full width of the joint in both orthogonal directions. Transformers Switchboards Free Standing Electric Motors 1.4 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-02 Shop Drawings Lighting Fixtures in Buildings Equipment Requirements
SECTION 26 05 48.00 10
Page 2
W912HN-12-R-0003
Detail drawings along with catalog cuts, templates, and erection and installation details, as appropriate, for the items listed. Submittals shall be complete in detail; shall indicate thickness, type, grade, class of metal, and dimensions; and shall show construction details, reinforcement, anchorage, and installation with relation to the building construction. SD-03 Product Data Lighting Fixtures in Buildings Equipment Requirements; G, AE Copies of the design calculations with the detail drawings. Calculations shall be stamped by a registered engineer and shall verify the capability of structural members to which bracing is attached for carrying the load from the brace. Contractor Designed Bracing; G, AE Copies of the Design Calculations with the Drawings. Calculations shall be approved, certified, stamped and signed by a Registered Professional Engineer. Calculations shall verify the capability of structural members to which bracing is attached for carrying the load from the brace. PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORTS
Lighting fixtures and supports shall conform to UL 1598. 2.2 SWAY BRACING MATERIALS
Sway bracing materials (e.g. rods, plates, rope, angles, etc.) shall be as specified in Section 13 48 00 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT. PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION SWAY BRACES FOR CONDUIT
Conduit shall be braced as for an equivalent weight pipe in accordance with Section 13 48 00.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT. 3.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES IN BUILDINGS
Lighting fixtures and supports shall conform to the following: 3.2.1 Pendant Fixtures
Pendant fixtures shall conform to the requirements of UFC 3-310-04. 3.2.2 3.2.2.1 Ceiling Attached Fixtures Recessed Fluorescent Fixtures
Recessed fluorescent individual or continuous-row mounted fixtures shall be supported by a seismic-resistant suspended ceiling support system built in accordance with ASTM E 580/E 580M and Section 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL SECTION 26 05 48.00 10 Page 3
W912HN-12-R-0003
CEILINGS. Seismic protection for the fixtures shall conform to the requirements of UFC 3-310-04. Recessed lighting fixtures not over 56 pounds in weight may be supported by and attached directly to the ceiling system runners using screws or bolts, number and size as required by the seismic design. Fixture accessories, including louvers, diffusers, and lenses shall have lock or screw attachments. 3.2.2.2 Surface-Mounted Fluorescent Fixtures
Surface-mounted fluorescent individual or continuous-row fixtures shall be attached to a seismic-resistant ceiling support system built in accordance with ASTM E 580/E 580M and Section 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS. Seismic protection for the fixtures shall conform to the requirements of UFC 3-310-04. 3.2.3 Assembly Mounted on Outlet Box
A supporting assembly, that is intended to be mounted on an outlet box, shall be designed to accommodate mounting features on 4 inch boxes, plaster rings, and fixture studs. 3.2.4 Wall-Mounted Emergency Light Unit
Attachments for wall-mounted emergency light units shall be designed and secured for the worst expected seismic disturbance at the site. 3.2.5 Lateral Force
Structural requirements for light fixture bracing shall be in accordance with Section 13 48 00 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 26 05 48.00 10
Page 4
W912HN-12-R-0003
SECTION 26 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 1.1 GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS AND REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 33 29 LEED DOCUMENTATION for additional LEED requirements. *3 Section 01 80 0001 91 13 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION *3 Refer to SectIon 01 80 00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS for the description of commissioning. In some instances, terminology differs between the Contract and the Commissioning Standard primarily because the intent of this Section is to use the industry standards specified, along with additional requirements listed herein to produce optimal results. The following table of similar terms is provided for clarification only. Contract requirements take precedent over the corresponding ACG, NEBB, or TABB requirements where differences exist. SIMILAR TERMS Contract Term Commissioning Standard ACG ACG Commissioning Guideline NEBB Procedural Standards for Building Systems Commisssioning NEBB Qualified Commissioning Administrator
Commissioning Agent Specialist for the Government CxG Commissioning Agent for Design CxD Commissioning Agent for Construction CxC
ACG Certified Commissioning Agent
ACG Certified Commissioning Agent ACG Certified Commissioning Agent
NEBB Qualified Commissioning Administrator NEBB Qualified Commissioning Administrator
1.2.1
General
Perform Commissioning in accordance with the requirements of the standard under which the Commissioning Firms' qualifications are approved, i.e., ACG Commissioning Guideline, NEBB Commissioning Standard, unless otherwise stated herein. Consider mandatory all recommendations and suggested practices contained in the Commissioning Standard. Use the Commissioning SECTION 26 08 00 Page 1
W912HN-12-R-0003
Standard for all aspects of Commissioning, including qualifications for the CxC and calibration of Commissioning instruments. Where the instrument manufacturer calibration recommendations are more stringent than those listed in the Commissioning Standard, the manufacturer's recommendations shall be adhered to. All quality assurance provisions of the Commissioning Standard such as performance guarantees shall be part of this contract. For systems or system components not covered in the Commissioning Standard, Commissioning procedures shall be developed by the Commissioning Agent having jurisdiction, CxA, CxD, or CxC. Where new procedures, requirements, etc., applicable to the Contract requirements have been published or adopted by the body responsible for the Commissioning Standard used (ACG or NEBB), the requirements and recommendations contained in these procedures and requirements shall be consi-dered mandatory. 1.2.2 Energy
Formal LEED certification is targeted. The Contractor is required to provide documentation that meets the LEED Energy & Atmosphere (EA) Prerequisite 1, Fundamental Commissioning. This section includes commissioning process requirements for Electrical systems, assemblies, and equipment, including low voltage systems. (See Section 26 08 00 and 27 08 00.) *3 Related Sections: Section 01 80 0001 91 13 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS for general commissioning process requirements. 1.3 DESCRIPTION *3 Refer to 01 80 00Section 01 91 13 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS for the description of commissioning. *3 1.4 DEFINITIONSDELETED Refer to Section 01 80 00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS for definitions. 1.5 SUBMITTALSDELETED
Refer to Section 01 80 00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS for CxC's role. Refer to Section 01 80 00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS for specific requirements. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Test Equipment Calibration Requirements: Contractors will comply with test manufacturer's calibration procedures and intervals. Recalibrate test instruments immediately after instruments have been repaired resulting from being dropped or damaged. Affix calibration tags to test instruments. Furnish calibration records to CxC upon request. *3 1.7 COORDINATIONDELETED Refer to Section 01 80 00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS for requirements pertaining to coordination during the commissioning process.
SECTION 26 08 00
Page 2
W912HN-12-R-0003
PART 2 2.1
PRODUCTS TEST EQUIPMENT
All standard testing equipment required to perform startup, initial checkout and functional performance testing shall be provided by the Contractor for the equipment being tested. For example, the Electrical Contractor shall ultimately be responsible for all standard testing equipment for the electrical systems and controls systems. A sufficient quantity of two-way radios shall be provided by each contractor. Special equipment, tools and instruments (specific to a piece of equipment and only available from vendor) required for testing shall be included in the base bid price to the Government and left on site, except for stand-alone data logging equipment that may be used by the CxC. Proprietary test equipment and software required by any equipment man-ufacturer for programming and/or start-up, whether specified or not, shall be provided by the manufacturer of the equipment. Manufacturer shall provide the test equipment, demonstrate its use, and assist in the commissioning process as needed. Proprietary test equipment (and software) shall become the property of the Government upon completion of the commissioning process. Data logging equipment and software required to test equipment will be provided by the CxC, but shall not become the property of the Government. All testing equipment shall be of sufficient quality and accuracy to test and/or measure system performance with the tolerances specified in the Specifications. If not otherwise noted, the following minimum requirements apply: Temperature sensors and digital thermometers shall have a certified calibration within the past year to an accuracy of 0.5 F and a resolution of + or - 0.1 F. Pressure sensors shall have an accuracy of + or - 2.0% of the value range being measured (not full range of meter) and have been calibrated within the last year. PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION GENERAL DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS
The CxD will prepare Pre-Functional Checklists for all commissioned components, equipment, and systems. 3.1.1 1. Red-Lined Drawings The contractor will verify all equipment, systems, instrumentation, wiring and components are shown correctly on red-lined drawings. Preliminary red-lined drawings must be made available to the Commissioning Team for use prior to the start of Functional Performance Testing. Changes, as a result of Functional Testing, must be incorporated into the final as-built drawings, which will be created from the red-lined drawings. The contracted party, as defined in the Contract Documents will create the as-built drawings.
2.
3.
4.
SECTION 26 08 00
Page 3
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.1.2 1.
Operation and Maintenance Data Contractor will provide a copy of O&M literature within 45 days of each submittal acceptance for use during the commissioning process for all commissioned equipment and systems. The CxC will review the O&M literature once for conformance to project requirements. The CxC will receive a copy of the final approved O&M literature once corrections have been mad by the Contractor. Demonstration and Training Contractor will provide demonstration and training as required by the specifications. A complete training plan and schedule must be submitted by the Contractor to the CxC four weeks (4) prior to any training. A training agenda for each training session must be submitted to the CxC one (1) week prior the training session. The CxC shall be notified at least 72 hours in advance of scheduled tests so that testing may be observed by the CxC and Contracting Officer. Copies of the test record shall be provided to the CxC and Contracting Officer. Engage a Factory-authorized service representative to train Government's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain specific equipment. Train Government's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping, trouble shooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment. Review data in O&M Manuals. System Manual Requirements The Systems Manual is intended to be a usable information resource containing all of the information related to the systems, assemblies, and Commissioning Process in one place with indexes and cross references. The GC shall include final approved versions of the following information for the Systems Manual: a. b. c. d. e. f. As-Built System Schematics. Verified Record Drawings. Test Results (not otherwise included in Cx Record). Periodic Maintenance Information for computer maintenance management system. Recommendations for recalibration frequency of sensors and actuators. A list of contractors, subcontractors, suppliers, architects, and engineers involved in the project along with their contact information. Training Records, Information on training provided, attendees SECTION 26 08 00 Page 4
2.
3.
3.1.3 1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7. 3.1.4 1.
2.
g.
W912HN-12-R-0003
list, and any on-going training. 3. This information shall be organized and arranged by building system, such as fire alarm, chilled water, heating hot water, etc. 4. Information should be provided in an electronic version to the extent possible. Legible, scanned images are acceptable for non-electronic documentation to facilitate this deliverable. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
3.2
Perform commissioning tests at the direction of the CxC. Attend construction phase controls coordination meetings. Participate in Electrical systems, assemblies, equipment, and component maintenance orientation and inspection as directed by the CxC. Provide information requested by the CxC for final commissioning documentation. Include requirements for submittal data, operation and maintenance data, and training in each purchase order or sub-contract written. Prepare preliminary schedule for Electrical system orientations and inspections, operation and maintenance manual submissions, training sessions, equipment start-up and task completion for Contracting Officer. Distribute preliminary schedule to commissioning team members. Update schedule as required throughout the construction period. During the startup and initial checkout process, execute the related portions of the prefunctional checklists for all commissioned equipment. Assist the CxC in all verification and functional performance tests. Provide measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data, and provide data acquisition equipment to record data for the complete range of testing for the required test period. Gather operation and maintenance literature on all equipment, and assemble in binders as required by the specifications. Submit to CxC 45 days after submittal acceptance. Coordinate with the CxC to provide 48-hour advance notice so that the witnessing of equipment and system start-up and testing can begin. Notify the CxC a minimum of two weeks in advance of the time for start of the testing and balancing work. Attend the initial testing and balancing meeting for review of the official testing and balancing procedures. Participate in, and schedule vendors and contractors to participate in the training sessions. Provide written notification to the GC and CxC that the following work has been completed in accordance with the contract documents, and that the equipment, systems, and sub-system are operating as required. 1. Electrical equipment including switchgear, panel boards, motor SECTION 26 08 00 Page 5
W912HN-12-R-0003
2. 3. 4. 5.
control centers, lighting, receptacles, dimmers and all other equipment furnished under this Division. Emergency generators, ATS switches and emergency power systems. Fire alarm system. Lightning protection. UPS systems.
The equipment supplier shall document the performance of his equipment. Provide a complete set of red-lined drawings to the CxA prior to the start of Functional Performance Testing. Provide training of the Government's operating staff using expert qualified personnel, as specified. Equipment Suppliers: 1. Provide all requested submittal data, including detailed start-up procedures and specific responsibilities of the Government, to keep warranties in force. Assist in equipment testing per agreements with contractors. Provide information requested by CxC regarding equipment sequence of operation and testing procedures.
2. 3.
*3 Refer to Section 01 80 00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS for additional Contractor responsibilities *3 3.3 GOVERNMENT'S RESPONSIBILITIESDELETED Refer to Section 01 80 00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS for Government's Responsibilities. 3.4 DESIGN PROFESSIONAL'S RESPONSIBILITIESDELETED
Refer to Section 01 80 00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS for Design Professional's Responsibilities. 3.5 CxA'S RESPONSIBILITIESDELETED
Refer to Section 01 80 00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS for CxD's, CxC's and CxA's Responsibilities. 3.6 TESTING PREPARATION
Certify in writing to the CxC that Electrical systems, subsystems, and equipment have been installed, calibrated, and started and are operating according to the Contract Documents. Certify in writing to the CxC that Electrical instrumentation and control systems have been completed and calibrated, that they are operating according to the Contract Documents, and that pretest set points have been recorded. Certify in writing that testing procedures have been completed and that testing reports have been submitted, discrepancies corrected, and corrective work approved. Place systems, subsystems, and equipment into operating mode to be tested (e.g., normal shutdown, normal auto position, normal manual position, SECTION 26 08 00 Page 6
W912HN-12-R-0003
unoccupied cycle, emergency power, and alarm conditions). Inspect and verify the position of each device and interlock identified on checklists. Check safety cutouts, alarms, and interlocks with smoke control and life-safety systems during each mode of operation. Testing Instrumentation: Install measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data as directed by the CxA. 3.7 GENERAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS
Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to perform commissioning test at the direction of the CxC. Scope of Electrical testing shall include the entire Electrical installation, from the incoming power equipment throughout the distribution system. Testing shall include measuring, but not limited to resistance, voltage, and amperage of system(s) and devices. Test all operating modes, interlocks, control responses, and responses to abnormal or emergency conditions, and verify proper response of building automation system controllers and sensors. The CxC along with the Electrical contractor and other contracted subcontractors, including the fire alarm Subcontractor shall prepare detailed construction-phase testing plans, procedures, and checklists for Electrical systems, subsystems, and equipment. Tests will be performed using design conditions whenever possible. Simulated conditions may need to be imposed using an artificial load when it is not practical to test under design conditions. Before simulating conditions, calibrate testing instruments. Provide equipment to simulate loads. Set simulated conditions as directed by the CxC and document simulated conditions and methods of simulation. After tests, return settings to normal operating conditions. The CxC may direct that set points be altered when simulating conditions is not practical. The CxC may direct that sensor values be altered with a signal generator when design or simulating conditions and altering set points are not practical. If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the Electrical system, document the deficiency and report it to the Contracting Officer. After deficiencies are resolved, reschedule tests. If the testing plan indicates specific seasonal testing, complete appropriate initial performance tests and documentation and schedule seasonal tests. 3.8 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS, SUBSYSTEMS, AND EQUIPMENT TESTING PROCEDURES
Equipment Testing and Acceptance Procedures: Testing requirements are specified in individual Division 26 sections. Provide submittals, test data, inspector record, and certifications to the CxC.
SECTION 26 08 00
Page 7
W912HN-12-R-0003
Fire Detection and Alarm System Testing: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools and equipment to test performance of designated systems and devices at the direction of the CxA. The CxA shall determine the sequence of testing and testing procedures for each equipment item and pipe section to be tested. Electrical Distribution System Testing: Provide technicians, load banks, infrared cameras, instrumentation, tools and equipment to test performance of designated systems and devices at the direction of the CxA. The CxA shall determine the sequence of testing and testing procedures for each equipment item and pipe section to be tested. Vibration and Sound Tests: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test performance of vibration isolation and seismic controls. The work included in the commissioning process involves a complete and thorough evaluation of the operation and performance of all components, systems and sub-systems. The following equipment and systems shall be evaluated: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. Lighting Control System Circuit Breaker Current Transformer Disconnect Switches Dry-Type Transformers Ground-Resistance Panel Metal-Clad Switchgear Metering and Instrumentation Pad-Mounted Switchgear Protective Relays Switchboard Assemblies Switchgear Variable Frequency Drives
*3 3.9 DELETEDDEFICIENCIES/NON-CONFORMANCE, COST OF RETESTING, FAILURE DUE TO MANUFACTURER DEFECT Refer to Section 01 80 00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS for requirements pertaining to deficiencies/non-conformance, cost of retesting, or failure due to manufacturer defect. 3.10 APPROVALDELETED
Refer to Section 01 80 00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS for approval procedures. 3.11 DEFERRED TESTINGDELETED
Refer to Section 01 80 00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS for requirements pertaining to deferred testing. 3.12 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALSDELETED
The Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall conform to Contract Documents requirements as stated in Section 01 80 00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS.
SECTION 26 08 00
Page 8
W912HN-12-R-0003
Refer to Section 01 80 00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS for the A/E and CxA roles in the Operation and Maintenance Manual contribution, review and approval process. 3.13 TRAINING OF GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL *3 Refer to Section 01 80 00 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS for requirements pertaining to training. Electrical Contractor. The electrical contractor shall have the following training responsibilities: 1. Provide the CxC with a training plan two weeks before the planned training. Provide designated Government personnel with comprehensive training in the understanding of the systems and the operation and maintenance of each major piece of commissioned electrical equipment or system. Training shall start with classroom sessions, if necessary, followed by hands on training on each piece of equipment, which shall illustrate the various modes of operation, including startup, shutdown, fire/smoke alarm, power failure, etc. During any demonstration, should the system fail to perform in accordance with the requirements of the O&M manual or sequence of operations, the system will be repaired or adjusted as necessary and the demonstration repeated. The appropriate trade or manufacturer's representative shall provide the instructions on each major piece of equipment. This person may be the start-up technician for the piece of equipment, the installing contractor or manufacturer's representative. Practical building operating expertise as well as in-depth knowledge of all modes of operation of the specific piece of equipment are required. More than one party may be required to execute the training. The training sessions shall follow the outline in the Table of Contents of the operation and maintenance manual and illustrate whenever possible the use of the O&M manuals for reference. Training shall include: a. b. Use the printed installation, operation and maintenance instruction material included in the O&M manuals. Include a review of the written O&M instructions emphasizing safe and proper operating requirements, preventative maintenance, special tools needed and spare parts inventory suggestions. The training shall include start-up, operation in all modes possible, shut-down, seasonal changeover and any emergency procedures. Discuss relevant health and safety issues and concerns. Discuss warranties and guarantees. Cover common troubleshooting problems and solutions. Explain information included in the O&M manuals and the location of all plans and manuals in the facility. Discuss any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
c. d. e. f. g.
SECTION 26 08 00
Page 9
W912HN-12-R-0003
8.
Hands-on training shall include start-up, operation in all modes possible, including manual, shut-down and any emergency procedures and preventative maintenance of all pieces of equipment. The electrical contractor shall fully explain and demonstrate the operation, function and overrides of any local packaged controls, not controlled by the central control system.
9.
10. Training shall occur after functional testing is complete, unless approved otherwise by the Contracting Officer.
SECTION 26 08 00
Page 10
W912HN-12-R-0003
APPENDIX A PRE-FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST CHECKLISTS
SECTION 26 08 00
Page 11
W912HN-12-R-0003
Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - LIGHTING CONTROLS ITEM ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CHECK Devices installed per manufacturer's instructions and specifications Devices installed agrees with drawings and specifications Lighting control system installed per plans, specifications and manufacturer's recommendations Verify mounting, location and clearances are per plans and specifications Switches, dimmers and occupancy sensors installed at correct height and have correct cover / escutcheon plate All zone circuits and inputs are correctly wired, circuits labeled Communications interconnection / interface is connected A M INITIALS AND DATE E T C O
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
OPERATIONAL CHECKS Specified sequences of operation and operating schedules have been provided with all variations documented Lighting control processor powered and battery backup operation checked. Lighting control communications interconnect checked Lighting control processor diagnostics performed
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
SECTION 26 08 00
Page 12
W912HN-12-R-0003
Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - OCCUPANCY SENSORS ITEM ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CHECK Coordinate Quantity and location of sensors with factory representative. A M INITIALS AND DATE E T C O
___
___
___
___
Coordinate Quantity and location of switchpack with factory representative. ___ Occupancy sensor locations as shown on the lighting drawings. Switchpacks are installed ahead of (in series with) the switches Switches, dimmers and occupancy sensors installed at correct height and have correct cover / escutcheon plate All zone circuits and inputs are correctly wired, circuits labeled Communications interconnection / interface is connected OPERATIONAL CHECKS
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
All switchpacks and sensors control lighting control in each zone Sensors should be set at the code-maximum of 30 minutes Are the photoelectric controls installed downstream from occupancy sensors
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
SECTION 26 08 00
Page 13
W912HN-12-R-0003
Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - TRANSFORMERS ITEM ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CHECK Transformer Enclosure / Cabinetry Transformer installed per manufacturer's instructions and specifications Equipment installed agrees with drawings and specifications Verify mounting, location and clearances are per plans and specifications Inspect for physical, electrical and mechanical condition of equipment and cabinet no damage evident Equipment labels permanently affixed A ___ M X INITIALS AND DATE E ___ T X C ___ O ___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___ ___
X X
___ ___
X X
___ ___
___ ___
Verify the application of manufacturer recommended torque values applied to bolted connections ___
___
___
___
Verify that ground bus is properly bonded to enclosure, enclosure is grounded and resistance to ground meets grounding specifications. No physical damage Transformer installed nameplate matches specified and approved transformer Inspect metering transformer cables and connections for defects or physical damage Verify metering transformer connections are correct per the single line Verify all grounding and shorting connections for the metering transformer are in place
___ ___
X X
___ ___
X X
___ ___
___ ___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
SECTION 26 08 00
Page 14
W912HN-12-R-0003
Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist (contd) - TRANSFORMERS ITEM ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CHECK A M INITIALS AND DATE E T C O
Verify correct fusing for the metering transformer primary and secondary ___ Verify the metering transformer taps are in accordance with the manufacturer's nameplate and specifications Verify the vents and air inlets are free and unobstructed. Clean air filters installed (if required)
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
SECTION 26 08 00
Page 15
W912HN-12-R-0003
Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - GROUNDING & BONDING ITEM ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CHECK Size and type of grounding and bonding conductors are in accordance with the drawings and specifications Grounding electrodes have been installed in accordance with drawings and Specifications Connections to grounding electrodes have been made in accordance with manufacturer's specifications Grounding conductors have been properly terminated at the service equipment or separately derived source. Bonding conductors have been installed as required Resistance of the grounding system has been measured and recorded. Provide method of measurement. Test wells are accessible and clearly marked. Review ground test results. A M INITIALS AND DATE E T C O
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___ ___
X X
___ ___
X X
___ ___
___ ___
SECTION 26 08 00
Page 16
W912HN-12-R-0003
Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - PANELS ITEM ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CHECK Distribution Panel Enclosure / Cabinetry Equipment installed per manufacturer's instructions and specifications Equipment installed agrees with drawings and specifications Verify mounting, location and clearances are per plans and specifications Inspect for physical, electrical and mechanical condition of equipment and cabinet no damage evident Equipment labels permanently affixed Inspect panels and doors for proper fit and alignment Verify that ground bus is properly bonded to enclosure, enclosure is grounded and resistance to ground meets grounding specifications. No physical damage Panel is clean and clear of dust or dirt Neutral bus isolated from cabinet Seismic anchoring installed and functional where applicable (non-short circuiting) Verify the application of manufacturer recommended torque values applied to bolted connections A M INITIALS AND DATE E T C O
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___ ___
X X
___ ___
X X
___ ___
___ ___
___
___
___
___
___ ___
X X
___ ___
X X
___ ___
___ ___
___ ___
X X
___ ___
X X
___ ___
___ ___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
SECTION 26 08 00
Page 17
W912HN-12-R-0003
Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist (cont) - PANELS ITEM ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CHECK Verify that all manufacturer control wiring between shipping splits is properly connected per manufacturer's drawings and specifications Verify correct circuit breaker sizes and types per the specifications and manufacturer's drawings Inspect insulators, barriers and shields for damage or contamination Verify three or four wire configuration Megger test of bus - phase to phase and phase to ground. Test voltage per manufacturer's recommendations Verify voltage, AIC and current rating of circuit breaker are per plans and Specifications Verify breakers are mounted securely and operates smoothly Breakers installed per manufacturer's instructions, plans and specifications A M INITIALS AND DATE E T C O
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
SECTION 26 08 00
Page 18
W912HN-12-R-0003
Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - SWITCHGEAR ITEM ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CHECK Switchgear Enclosure / Cabinetry Equipment installed per manufacturer's instructions and specifications Equipment installed agrees with drawings and specifications Verify mounting, location and clearances are per plans and specifications Inspect for physical, electrical and mechanical condition of equipment and cabinet no damage evident Equipment labels permanently affixed Inspect panels and doors for proper fit and alignment Verify that ground bus is properly bonded to enclosure, enclosure is grounded and resistance to ground meets grounding specifications. No physical damage Panel is clean and clear of dust or dirt Seismic anchoring installed and functional where applicable (non-short circuiting) Verify the application of manufacturer recommended torque values applied to bolted connections Verify that all manufacturer control wiring between shipping splits is properly connected per manufacturer's drawings and specifications A ___ M X INITIALS AND DATE E ___ T X C ___ O ___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___ ___
X X
___ ___
X X
___ ___
___ ___
___
___
___
___
___ ___
X X
___ ___
X X
___ ___
___ ___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
SECTION 26 08 00
Page 19
W912HN-12-R-0003
Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist (contd) - SWITCHGEAR ITEM ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CHECK Verify correct circuit breaker sizes and types per the specifications and manufacturer's drawings A M INITIALS AND DATE E T C O
___
___
___
___
Inspect insulators, barriers and shields for damage or contamination Verify three or four wire configuration Megger test of bus - phase to phase and phase to ground. Test voltage per manufacturer's recommendations
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
SECTION 26 08 00
Page 20
W912HN-12-R-0003
Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - EMERGENCY GENERATOR ITEM ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CHECK Equipment installed per manufacturer's instructions and specifications Equipment installed agrees with drawings and specifications Verify mounting, location and clearances are per plans and specifications Seismic anchoring installed and functional where applicable (non-short circuiting) Verify interconnection to other systems complete Verify fuel spill containment systems installed per plans and specifications Verify neutral low resistance grounding resistor installed and connecter per plans, specifications and manufacturer's recommendations (for 5kV and above rated generators) Verify motor / generator alignment Verify gen set is anchored and grouted Verify muffler / exhaust system is installed per plan, specifications and manufacturer's instructions OPERATIONAL CHECKS Specified sequences of operation and operating schedules have been provided with all variations documented Specified point-to-point checks have been completed and documentation record submitted for this system A M INITIALS AND DATE E T C O
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___ ___
X X
___ ___
X X
___ ___
___ ___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
SECTION 26 08 00
Page 21
W912HN-12-R-0003
Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist (contd) - EMERGENCY GENERATOR ITEM ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CHECK Generator control panel powered, interconnection diagnostics performed Multi-generator control / synchronizing control system installed, powered and diagnostics performed START-UP TEST Radiator Fan Discharge Vibration & Noise Level Acceptable Motor Voltage 230 - 480 KW Capacity OK Rated 208 / ___ ___ X X ___ ___ X X ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ X X ___ ___ ___ ___ A M INITIALS AND DATE E T C O
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
SECTION 26 08 00
Page 22
W912HN-12-R-0003
Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM ITEM DISTRIBUTION PANEL ENCLOSURE / CABINETRY Equipment installed agrees with shop drawings and specifications Equipment installed per manufacturer's instructions and specifications A INITIALS AND DATE M E T C O
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
Verify mounting, location and clearances are per plans and specifications ___ Inspect for physical, electrical and mechanical condition of equipment and cabinet no damage evident Panel is clean and clear of dust or dirt Inspect panels and doors for proper fit and alignment BATTERIES Installed per drawings and specifications No corrosion or leakage Verify tightness of all connections CONTROL PANEL Mounted in accordance with plans, specifications and manufacturer's Instructions Adequate service access provided Verify smoke detector at panel POWER SUPPLY CONNECTED Communications interface/interconnect terminated per manufacturer's Instructions Panel grounded in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and code
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___ ___ ___
X X X
___ ___ ___
X X X
___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___
X X X
___ ___ ___
X X X
___ ___ ___
___ ___ ___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
SECTION 26 08 00
Page 23
W912HN-12-R-0003
Pre-Functional Performance Test Checklist (contd)- FIRE ALARM SYSTEM ITEM DISTRIBUTION PANEL ENCLOSURE / CABINETRY OPERATIONAL CHECKS Specified sequences of operation and operating schedules have been provided with all variations documented Specified point-to-point checks have been completed and documentation record submitted for this system - End of Appendix A A INITIALS AND DATE M E T C O
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
SECTION 26 08 00
Page 24
W912HN-12-R-0003
APPENDIX B FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTS CHECKLISTS
SECTION 26 08 00
Page 25
W912HN-12-R-0003
Functional Performance Test Checklist - LIGHTING CONTROLS ITEM OPERATIONAL CHECKS ELECTRICAL PERFORMANCE CHECK Specified sequences of operation and operating schedules have been provided with all variations documented Lighting control processor powered and battery backup operation checked. Lighting control communications interconnect checked Lighting control processor diagnostics performed A M E T C O INITIALS AND DATE
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
SECTION 26 08 00
Page 26
W912HN-12-R-0003
Functional Performance Test Checklist - OCCUPANCY SENSORS ITEM OPERATIONAL CHECKS ELECTRICAL PERFORMANCE CHECK All switchpacks and sensors control lighting control in each zone Sensors should be set at the codemaximum of 30 minutes Are the photoelectric controls installed downstream from occupancy sensors A M E T C O INITIALS AND DATE
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
SECTION 26 08 00
Page 27
W912HN-12-R-0003
Functional Performance Test Checklist - CIRCUIT BREAKERS ITEM OPERATIONAL CHECKS ELECTRICAL PERFORMANCE CHECK Verify phase to phase on each multiwire breaker with a volt meter. With all conditions met with the transformer voltages, you should read across any two Phases 208, or 460-480 volts without a load. Phase to ground you should read 120, 277 volts. Tests all ground fault breakers by pushing the test button on the device or using a ground fault testing device downstream of the breaker. A M E T C O INITIALS AND DATE
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
SECTION 26 08 00
Page 28
W912HN-12-R-0003
Functional Performance Test Checklist - DISCONNECT SWITCH ITEM OPERATIONAL CHECKS ELECTRICAL PERFORMANCE CHECK Visually check for discolored areas and/or hot spots on equipment. Check For cracking or buzzing sounds Verify all cover screws and latches are installed and tight. A M E T C O INITIALS AND DATE
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
SECTION 26 08 00
Page 29
W912HN-12-R-0003
Functional Performance Test Checklist - DRY TYPE TRANSFORMER ITEM OPERATIONAL CHECKS ELECTRICAL PERFORMANCE CHECK A M E T C O INITIALS AND DATE
Verify primary and secondary voltage on the transformer taps Verify the ratio of the to be 2.3/1 if taps are correctly (Example: 480 = 2.3-------460 / 208 = voltages made / 208 2.21 ratio
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
SECTION 26 08 00
Page 30
W912HN-12-R-0003
Functional Performance Test Checklist - GROUNDING & BONDING ITEM OPERATIONAL CHECKS ELECTRICAL PERFORMANCE CHECK Test all grounding and bonding to all electrical related equipment and system To show "0.2" ohms or less impedance between metallic the parts. Test all ground fault receptacles with a listed checking device with a Ground Fault test button. Confirm Ground rods will be 25 ohms or between rod and electrical equipment A M E T C O INITIALS AND DATE
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
SECTION 26 08 00
Page 31
W912HN-12-R-0003
Functional Performance Test Checklist - INTERIOR ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION PANELS ITEM OPERATIONAL CHECKS ELECTRICAL PERFORMANCE CHECK Visually check for discolored areas and/or hot spots on equipment. Check for cracking or buzzing sounds Verify all cover screws and latches are installed and tight. A M E T C O INITIALS AND DATE
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
SECTION 26 08 00
Page 32
W912HN-12-R-0003
Functional Performance Test Checklist - METAL CLAD SWITCHGEAR ITEM OPERATIONAL CHECKS ELECTRICAL PERFORMANCE CHECK Proved a certified performance test (Ground Fault Test) from the manufacture or a certified independent testing firm trained in performing this test before power is applied to the main service. Perform a ground fault test after power has been supplied to the main. Verify breakers to be VCP-W vacuum type. Confirm all live parts are compartmentalized. Confirm compartments are isolated from each other. Confirm bus and primaries are insulated. Confirm switching and interrupting devices are drawout mounted. A M E T C O INITIALS AND DATE
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
SECTION 26 08 00
Page 33
W912HN-12-R-0003
Functional Performance Test Checklist - METERING & INSTRUMENTATION ITEM OPERATIONAL CHECKS ELECTRICAL PERFORMANCE CHECK Nothing to test on testing equipment. Follow installation instructions. A M E T C O INITIALS AND DATE
___
___
___
___
SECTION 26 08 00
Page 34
W912HN-12-R-0003
Functional Performance Test Checklist - PADMOUNT SWITCHGEAR ITEM OPERATIONAL CHECKS ELECTRICAL PERFORMANCE CHECK Confirm switches and fuses are enclosed in a metal compartment for personal safety and prevents entrance of foliage and contamination. Verify fuse access doors are positively latched in the closed position and mechanically interlocked with the 200A elbows preventing access until the Elbows have been disconnected. Verify construction meets ANSI standards C57.12.28 for padmounted equipment enclosure integrity Verify fuse accessibility only when the fuse access doors have been disconnected and pivoted to the open "service" position. A M E T C O INITIALS AND DATE
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
SECTION 26 08 00
Page 35
W912HN-12-R-0003
Functional Performance Test Checklist - PROTECTIVE RELAYS ITEM OPERATIONAL CHECKS ELECTRICAL PERFORMANCE CHECK Perform testing with the relay disconnected from the power and trip the circuit. This method is standard yearly. Test across the secondary of the current transformer with the primary de-energized (Called secondary injection). This includes checking the operation of the circuit breaker, presence of energy To trip the breaker, introduces the current voltage at the secondary terminals of instrument transformer, and relay connections. Primary injection: Shut down power to the primary and secondary voltage. This test simultaneously checks current transformers, ratio, secondary wiring, polarity, relay operation and identity of each phase on the Switch Board. A M E T C O INITIALS AND DATE
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
SECTION 26 08 00
Page 36
W912HN-12-R-0003
Functional Performance Test Checklist - SWITCHBOARD ASSEMBLY ITEM OPERATIONAL CHECKS ELECTRICAL PERFORMANCE CHECK Verify nameplate on equipment showing the correct voltage, type of enclosure AIC rating and ampacity rating. Verify than the enclosure is rated as "Suitable for use as service equipment." Verify that all parts have come with the equipment to be properly installed. Verify all cover screws, bolts, supporting braces, bonding equipment and latches are installed and tight. A M E T C O INITIALS AND DATE
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
SECTION 26 08 00
Page 37
W912HN-12-R-0003
Functional Performance Test Checklist - SWITCHGEAR ITEM OPERATIONAL CHECKS ELECTRICAL PERFORMANCE CHECK Proved a certified performance test (Ground Fault Test) from the manufacture or a certified independent testing firm trained in performing this test before power is applied to the main service. Perform a ground fault test after power has been supplied to the main. Visually check for discolored areas and/or hot spots on equipment. Check For cracking or buzzing sounds. Verify all cover screws and latches are installed and tight. A M E T C O INITIALS AND DATE
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
SECTION 26 08 00
Page 38
W912HN-12-R-0003
Functional Performance Test Checklist - VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVER ITEM PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION TESTS ELECTRICAL PERFORMANCE CHECK A M E T C O INITIALS AND DATE
Verify that the input circuit breaker has a minimum of 10,000 AIC and door interlocked external operation. Verify the converter stage per UL 508C changes fixed voltages, fixed frequency, ac line power to a fixed dc voltage Verify that the VFD is capable of supplying 120% of rated full load current for one minute at maximum ambient temperature. Confirm inverter stage changes fixed dc voltage to variable frequency,variable voltage, ac for application to a standard NEMA design B squirrel cage motor. Confirm inverter to be switched in a manner to produce a sine Coded pulse width modulated (PWM) output waveform. Endurance Test: Immediately upon completion of the performance Verification test, the endurance test shall be commenced. Confirm the system will operate at varying rates for not less than 192 consecutive hours, at an average effectiveness level of .9998. - End of Appendix B -- End of Section --
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
SECTION 26 08 00
Page 39
W912HN-12-R-0003
SECTION 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM PART 1 1.1 GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM B 1 (2001; R 2007) Standard Specification for Hard-Drawn Copper Wire (2004) Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft (2001; R 2007) Laminated Thermosetting Materials
ASTM B 8
ASTM D 709
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE) IEEE C2 IEEE Std 100 (2012) National Electrical Safety Code (2000) The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms (1983) Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System (Part 1)Normal Measurements
IEEE Std 81
INTERNATIONAL ELECTRICAL TESTING ASSOCIATION (NETA) NETA ATS (2009) Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA) NEMA 250 (2008) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) (2008) Electric Meters; Code for Electricity Metering (2005) Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC) (2005) Standard for Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) (2002; R 2007) Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses (2000; R 2005; R 2008) Standard for SECTION 26 20 00 Page 1
NEMA C12.1
NEMA C80.1
NEMA C80.3
NEMA FU 1 NEMA ICS 1
W912HN-12-R-0003
Industrial Control and Systems: General Requirements NEMA ICS 2 (2000; R 2005; Errata 2008) Standard for Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays Rated 600 V (2005) Industrial Control and Systems: Terminal Blocks (1993; R 2011) Enclosures (2001; R 2006) Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum) (2009) Motors and Generators (2001; R 2007) Energy Management Guide for Selection and Use of Fixed Frequency Medium AC Squirrel-Cage Polyphase Induction Motors (1977; R 2007) Energy Management Guide for Selection and Use of Single Phase Motors (2005) Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit (1992; R 1997) Standard for Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications (2003) Standard for Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit (2004) Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride PVC Fittings for Use With Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing (2002) Guide for Determining Energy Efficiency for Distribution Transformers (2009) Standard for Metallic Cable Tray Systems (1999; R 2005) Standard for General Requirements for Wiring Devices (2002; R 2008) Standard for Wiring Devices - Dimensional Requirements (2007; Errata 2007) Product Safety Signs and Labels
NEMA ICS 4
NEMA ICS 6 NEMA KS 1
NEMA MG 1 NEMA MG 10
NEMA MG 11
NEMA RN 1
NEMA ST 20
NEMA TC 2
NEMA TC 3
NEMA TP 1
NEMA VE 1
NEMA WD 1
NEMA WD 6
NEMA Z535.4
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) NFPA 70 (2011; TIA 11-1; Errata 2011; TIA 11-2; SECTION 26 20 00 Page 2
W912HN-12-R-0003
TIA 11-3; TIA 11-4) National Electrical Code NFPA 70E (2009; Errata 2009) Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace (2007) Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION (TIA) TIA J-STD-607-A (2002) Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications (2009) Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard (1998; Addenda 2000, 2001) Commercial Building Standards for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces
NFPA 780
TIA-568-C.1
TIA/EIA-569-A
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA) 29 CFR 1910.147 Control of Hazardous Energy (Lock Out/Tag Out)
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) UL 1 (2005; Rev thru Jul 2007) Standard for Flexible Metal Conduit (2006) Standard for Safety Machine-Tools Wires and Cables (2006; Rev thru Jul 2007) Standard for Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit -Steel (2006; Rev thru Sep 2009) Surge Protective Devices (1999; Rev thru Sep 2005) Dry-Type General Purpose and Power Transformers (2004; Rev thru Jan 2005) Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit (2003; Rev thru Oct 2007) Mine-Duty Fuses (2000 ; Rev thru Dec 2008) Standard for General-Use Snap Switches (2009; Rev thru Jun 2009) Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit (2005; Rev thru Nov 2005) (2007) Grounding and Bonding Equipment SECTION 26 20 00 Page 3
UL 1063
UL 1242
UL 1449
UL 1561
UL 1660
UL 198M UL 20
UL 360
UL 44 UL 467
W912HN-12-R-0003
UL 486A-486B UL 486C
(2003; R 2010) Wire Connectors (2004; Rev thru Apr 2009) Standard for Splicing Wire Connectors (2009; Reprint Jun 2011) Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures (2001; Rev thru Jul 2009) Attachment Plugs and Receptacles (2007) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-environmental Considerations (2000; Rev thru May 2006) Standard for Specialty Transformers (1999; Rev thru Sep 2008) Standard for Industrial Control Equipment (2005; Reprint Apr 2008) Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene and Rubber Insulating Tape (1993; Rev thru Jan 2008) Fuseholders (2004; Rev thru Oct 2009) Standard for Metallic Outlet Boxes (2004; Rev thru Aug 2007) Standard for Conduit, Tubing and Cable Fittings (2007) Standard for Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel (2005; Rev thru May 2007) Standard for Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings (2009) Standard for Panelboards (2007) Standard for Electrical Metallic Tubing -- Steel (2008) Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables (2006) Reference Standard for Service Equipment (1995; Rev thru Jul 2003) Standard for Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings (2006; Rev thru Feb 2008) Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters
UL 489
UL 498
UL 50
UL 506
UL 508
UL 510
UL 512 UL 514A
UL 514B
UL 6
UL 651
UL 67 UL 797
UL 83
UL 869A
UL 870
UL 943
SECTION 26 20 00
Page 4
W912HN-12-R-0003
UL 984
(1996; Rev thru Sept 2005) Hermetic Refrigerant Motor-Compressors
1.2
DEFINITIONS
Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, shall be as defined in IEEE Std 100. 1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-02 Shop Drawings Panelboards Transformers Cable trays Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown to ensure a coordinated installation. Wiring diagrams shall identify circuit terminals and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnection between each item of equipment. Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment devices. Wireways Marking strips drawings SD-03 Product Data Receptacles Circuit breakers Switches Transformers Enclosed circuit breakers Motor controllers Combination motor controllers Manual motor starters Telecommunications Grounding Busbar SECTION 26 20 00 Page 5
W912HN-12-R-0003
Surge protective devices Submittals shall include performance and characteristic curves. SD-06 Test Reports 600-volt wiring test; G, RO Grounding system test; G, RO Transformer tests; G, RO Ground-fault receptacle test; G, RO SD-07 Certificates Fuses SD-09 Manufacturer's Field Reports Transformer factory tests SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Electrical Systems, Data Package 5 Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 23, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein. 1.4 1.4.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE Fuses
Submit coordination data as specified in Paragraph FUSES, below. 1.4.2 Regulatory Requirements
In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated. 1.4.3 Standard Products
Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the SECTION 26 20 00 Page 6
W912HN-12-R-0003
products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section. 1.4.3.1 Alternative Qualifications
Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is furnished. 1.4.3.2 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date
Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used, unless specified otherwise. 1.5 1.5.1 MAINTENANCE Electrical Systems
Submit operation and maintenance manuals for electrical systems that provide basic data relating to the design, operation, and maintenance of the electrical distribution system for the building. This shall include: a. b. Single line diagram of the "as-built" building electrical system. Schematic diagram of electrical control system (other than HVAC, covered elsewhere). Manufacturers' operating and maintenance manuals on active electrical equipment.
c.
1.6
WARRANTY
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract. 1.7 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS
Seismic details shall conform to Section 26 05 48.00 10, SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Materials, equipment, and devices shall, as a minimum, meet requirements of UL, where UL standards are established for those items, and requirements of NFPA 70. 2.2 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
Shall conform to the following: 2.2.1 2.2.1.1 Rigid Metallic Conduit Rigid, Threaded Zinc-Coated Steel Conduit
NEMA C80.1, UL 6. SECTION 26 20 00 Page 7
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.2.2
Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit
PVC Type EPC-40, and EPC-80 in accordance with NEMA TC 2,UL 651. 2.2.3 Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC)
UL 1242, zinc-coated steel only. 2.2.4 Electrical, Zinc-Coated Steel Metallic Tubing (EMT)
UL 797, NEMA C80.3. 2.2.5 Plastic-Coated Rigid Steel and IMC Conduit
NEMA RN 1, Type 40( 40 mils thick). 2.2.6 UL 1. 2.2.6.1 UL 360. 2.2.7 Fittings for Metal Conduit, EMT, and Flexible Metal Conduit Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit, Steel Flexible Metal Conduit
UL 514B. Ferrous fittings shall be cadmium- or zinc-coated in accordance with UL 514B. 2.2.7.1 Fittings for Rigid Metal Conduit and IMC Split couplings unacceptable.
Threaded-type. 2.2.7.2
Fittings for EMT
Steel compression type. 2.2.8 Fittings for Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit
NEMA TC 3 for PVC, and UL 514B. 2.2.9 Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit
UL 1660. 2.3 CABLE TRAYS
NEMA VE 1. Cable trays shall form a wireway system, and shall be of nominal size as indicated. Cable trays shall be constructed of steel that has been zinc-coated after fabrication. Trays shall include splice and end plates, dropouts, and miscellaneous hardware. Edges, fittings, and hardware shall be finished free from burrs and sharp edges. Fittings shall have not less than load-carrying ability of straight tray sections and shall have manufacturer's minimum standard radius. Provide factory kits for splices, elbows, offsets and transitions.
SECTION 26 20 00
Page 8
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.3.1
Basket-Type Cable Trays
Provide width size as indicated and 4 inch depth with maximum wire mesh spacing of 2 by 4 inch. 2.4 OUTLET BOXES AND COVERS
UL 514A, cadmium- or zinc-coated, if ferrous metal. 2.4.1 Floor Outlet Boxes
Boxes shall be wiremold RFB4-C1 series for slab on grade or wiremold RFB4-SS for the upper floor. Each outlet shall consist of cast-metal body with threaded openings, or sheet-steel body with knockouts for conduits, adjustable ring, and cover plate. Telecommunications outlets shall consist of aluminum or stainless steel frame with RJ-45 jacks, as specified, and one inch bushed side opening. Receptacle outlets shall consist of flush aluminum or stainless steel housing with duplex-type receptacle as specified herein. Provide gaskets where necessary to ensure watertight installation. Cover shall be die cast aluminum with brushed aluminum finish and cutouts for tile/carpet inserts. 2.4.2 Outlet Boxes for Telecommunications System
Provide standard type 4 11/16 inches square by 2 1/8 inches deep. Depth of boxes shall be large enough to allow manufacturers' recommended conductor bend radii. 2.5 CABINETS, JUNCTION BOXES, AND PULL BOXES
Volume greater than 100 cubic inches, UL 50, hot-dip, zinc-coated, if sheet steel. 2.6 WIRES AND CABLES
Wires and cables shall meet applicable requirements of NFPA 70 and UL for type of insulation, jacket, and conductor specified or indicated. Wires and cables manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used. 2.6.1 Conductors
Conductors No. 8 AWG and larger diameter shall be stranded. Conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller diameter shall be solid, except that conductors for remote control, alarm, and signal circuits, classes 1, 2, and 3, shall be stranded unless specifically indicated otherwise. Conductor sizes and capacities shown are based on copper. All conductors shall be copper. 2.6.1.1 Minimum Conductor Sizes
Minimum size for branch circuits shall be No. 12 AWG; for Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits, No. 14 AWG; for Class 2 low-energy, remote-control and signal circuits, No. 16 AWG; and for Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm and signal circuits, No. 22 AWG. 2.6.2 Color Coding
Provide for service, feeder, branch, control, and signaling circuit conductors. Color shall be green for grounding conductors and white for SECTION 26 20 00 Page 9
W912HN-12-R-0003
neutrals; except where neutrals of more than one system are installed in same raceway or box, other neutrals shall be white with a different colored (not green) stripe for each. Color of ungrounded conductors in different voltage systems shall be as follows: a. 208/120 volt, three-phase (1) (2) (3) b. Phase A - black Phase B - red Phase C - blue
480/277 volt, three-phase (1) (2) (3) Phase A - brown Phase B - orange Phase C - yellow
2.6.3
Insulation
Unless specified or indicated otherwise or required by NFPA 70, power and lighting wires shall be 600-volt, Type THWN/THHN conforming to UL 83, except that grounding wire may be type TW conforming to UL 83; remote-control and signal circuits shall be Type TW or TF, conforming to UL 83. 2.6.4 Bonding Conductors
ASTM B 1, solid bare copper wire for sizes No. 8 AWG and smaller diameter; ASTM B 8, Class B, stranded bare copper wire for sizes No. 6 AWG and larger diameter. 2.6.4.1 Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB)
Provide a copper conductor TBB in accordance with TIA J-STD-607-A. The TBB shall be a minimum No. 6 AWG and be sized at 2 kcmil per linear foot of conductor length up to a maximum size of 3/0 AWG. 2.6.4.2 Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications
Provide a copper conductor Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications between the telecommunications main grounding busbar (TMGB) and the electrical service ground in accordance with TIA J-STD-607-A. The bonding conductor for telecommunications shall be sized the same as the TBB. 2.7 SPLICES AND TERMINATION COMPONENTS
UL 486A-486B for wire connectors and UL 510 for insulating tapes. Connectors for No. 10 AWG and smaller diameter wires shall be insulated, pressure-type in accordance with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C (twist-on splicing connector). Provide solderless terminal lugs on stranded conductors. 2.8 DEVICE PLATES
Provide UL listed, one-piece device plates for outlets to suit the devices installed. For metal outlet boxes, plates on unfinished walls shall be of SECTION 26 20 00 Page 10
W912HN-12-R-0003
zinc-coated sheet steel or cast metal having round or beveled edges. For nonmetallic boxes and fittings, other suitable plates may be provided. Plates on finished walls shall be nylon or lexan, minimum 0.03 inch wall thickness. Plates shall be same color as receptacle or toggle switch with which they are mounted. Plates on unfinished walls shall be sheet steel, minimum 0.03 inch thick. Screws shall be machine-type with countersunk heads in color to match finish of plate. Sectional type device plates will not be permitted. Plates installed in wet locations shall be gasketed and UL listed for "wet locations." 2.9 2.9.1 SWITCHES Toggle Switches
NEMA WD 1, UL 20, single pole, three-way, and four-way, totally enclosed with bodies of thermoplastic or thermoset plastic and mounting strap with grounding screw. Handles shall be ivory thermoplastic. Wiring terminals shall be screw-type, side-wired. Contacts shall be silver-cadmium and contact arm shall be one-piece copper alloy. Switches shall be rated quiet-type ac only, 120/277 volts, 20 amp, with number of poles indicated. 2.9.2 Switch with Red Pilot Handle
NEMA WD 1. Provide pilot lights that are integrally constructed as a part of the switch's handle. The pilot light shall be red and shall illuminate whenever the switch is closed or "on". The pilot lighted switch shall be rated 20 amps and 120 volts or 277 volts as indicated. Provide the circuit's neutral conductor to each switch with a pilot light. 2.9.3 Disconnect Switches
NEMA KS 1. Provide heavy duty-type switches. Fused switches shall utilize Class R fuseholders and fuses, unless indicated otherwise. Switches serving as motor-disconnect means shall be horsepower rated. Provide switches in NEMA 1 (indoors) or 3R (outdoors), enclosures per NEMA ICS 6. 2.10 FUSES set of fuses for each fusible switch. curves of fuses serving motors or connected in shall be coordinated for proper operation. approval. Fuses shall have voltage rating not
NEMA FU 1. Provide complete Time-current characteristics series with circuit breakers Submit coordination data for less than circuit voltage. 2.10.1 Fuseholders
Provide in accordance with UL 512. 2.10.2 Cartridge Fuses, Current Limiting Type (Class R) Associated fuseholders shall be Class
UL 198M, Class RK-1 time-delay type. R only. 2.11 RECEPTACLES
UL 498, hard use, heavy-duty, UL 498, hospital grade (in patient areas), grounding-type. Ratings and configurations shall be as indicated. Bodies shall be of ivory as per NEMA WD 1. Face and body shall be thermoplastic supported on a metal mounting strap. Dimensional requirements shall be per SECTION 26 20 00 Page 11
W912HN-12-R-0003
NEMA WD 6. Provide screw-type, side-wired wiring terminals. Connect grounding pole to mounting strap. The receptacle shall contain triple-wipe power contacts and double or triple-wipe ground contacts. 2.11.1 Weatherproof Receptacles
Provide in cast metal box with gasketed, weatherproof, cast-metal cover plate and gasketed cap over each receptacle opening. Provide caps with a spring-hinged flap. Receptacle shall be UL listed for use in "wet locations with plug in use." 2.11.2 Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles
UL 943, duplex type for mounting in standard outlet box. Device shall be capable of detecting current leak of 6 milliamperes or greater and tripping per requirements of UL 943 for Class A GFI devices. Provide screw-type, side-wired wiring terminals or pre-wired (pigtail) leads. 2.11.3 Special Purpose Receptacles Furnish one matching plug with each
Provide as indicated on Drawings. receptacle. 2.11.4 Plugs
Provide heavy-duty, rubber-covered three-, four-, or five-wire cord of required size, install plugs thereon, and attach to equipment. Plugs shall be UL listed with receptacles, complete with grounding blades. Where equipment is not available, turn over plugs and cord assemblies to the Government. 2.11.5 Range Receptacles
NEMA 14-50 configuration, flush mounted for housing units, rated 50 amperes, 125/250 volts. Furnish one matching plug with each receptacle. 2.11.6 Dryer Receptacles Furnish one
NEMA 14-30 configuration, rated 30 amperes, 125/250 volts. matching plug with each receptacle. 2.11.7 Tamper-Resistant Receptacles
Provide duplex receptacle with mechanical sliding shutters that prevent the insertion of small objects into its contact slots. 2.12 PANELBOARDS
UL 67 and UL 50 having a short-circuit current rating as indicated, but not less than 10,000 amperes symmetrical minimum. Panelboards for use as service disconnecting means shall additionally conform to UL 869A. Panelboards shall be circuit breaker-equipped. Design shall be such that individual breakers can be removed without disturbing adjacent units or without loosening or removing supplemental insulation supplied as means of obtaining clearances as required by UL. "Specific breaker placement" is required in panelboards to match the breaker placement indicated in the panelboard schedule on the drawings. Use of "Subfeed Breakers" is not acceptable unless specifically indicated otherwise. Main breaker shall be "separately" mounted "above" or "below" branch breakers. Where "space SECTION 26 20 00 Page 12
W912HN-12-R-0003
only" is indicated, make provisions for future installation of breakers. Directories shall indicate load served by each circuit in panelboard. Directories shall also indicate source of service to panelboard (e.g., Panel PA served from Panel MDP). Provide new directories for existing panels modified by this project as indicated. Type directories and mount in holder behind transparent protective covering. Panelboards shall be listed and labeled for their intended use. Panelboard shall have nameplates in accordance with paragraph FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES. 2.12.1 Enclosure
Enclosures shall meet the requirements of UL 50. All cabinets shall be fabricated from sheet steel of not less than No. 10 gauge if flush-mounted or mounted outdoors, and not less than No. 12 gauge if surface-mounted indoors, with full seam-welded box ends. Cabinets mounted outdoors or flush-mounted shall be hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication. Cabinets shall be painted in accordance with paragraph PAINTING. Front edges of cabinets shall be form-flanged or fitted with structural shapes welded or riveted to the sheet steel, for supporting the panelboard front. All cabinets shall be so fabricated that no part of any surface on the finished cabinet shall deviate from a true plane by more than 1/8 inch. Holes shall be provided in the back of indoor surface-mounted cabinets, with outside spacers and inside stiffeners, for mounting the cabinets with a 1/2 inch clear space between the back of the cabinet and the wall surface. Flush doors shall be mounted on hinges that expose only the hinge roll to view when the door is closed. Each door shall be fitted with a combined catch and lock, except that doors over 24 inches long shall be provided with a three-point latch having a knob with a T-handle, and a cylinder lock. Two keys shall be provided with each lock, and all locks shall be keyed alike. Finished-head cap screws shall be provided for mounting the panelboard fronts on the cabinets. 2.12.2 Panelboard Buses
Support bus bars on bases independent of circuit breakers. Main buses and back pans shall be designed so that breakers may be changed without machining, drilling, or tapping. Provide isolated neutral bus in each panel for connection of circuit neutral conductors. Provide separate ground bus identified as equipment grounding bus per UL 67 for connecting grounding conductors; bond to steel cabinet. 2.12.3 Circuit Breakers
UL 489, thermal magnetic-type having a minimum short-circuit current rating equal to the short-circuit current rating of the panelboard in which the circuit breaker shall be mounted. Breaker terminals shall be UL listed as suitable for type of conductor provided. Series rated circuit breakers and plug-in circuit breakers are unacceptable. 2.12.3.1 Multipole Breakers
Provide common trip-type with single operating handle. Breaker design shall be such that overload in one pole automatically causes all poles to open. Maintain phase sequence throughout each panel so that any three adjacent breaker poles are connected to Phases A, B, and C, respectively. 2.12.3.2 Circuit Breaker With GFCI Provide with "push-to-test" button, visible indication SECTION 26 20 00 Page 13
UL 943 and NFPA 70.
W912HN-12-R-0003
of tripped condition, and ability to detect and trip on current imbalance of 6 milliamperes or greater per requirements of UL 943 for Class A GFCI devices, for personnel protection, and 20 milliamperes or greater per requirements of UL 943 for Class B GFCI per equipment protection. 2.12.3.3 Circuit Breakers for HVAC Equipment
Circuit breakers for HVAC equipment having motors (group or individual) shall be marked for use with HACR type and UL listed as HACR type. 2.13 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
UL 489. Individual molded case circuit breakers with voltage and continuous current ratings, number of poles, overload trip setting, and short circuit current interrupting rating as indicated. Enclosure type as indicated. Provide solid neutral. 2.14 MOTOR SHORT-CIRCUIT PROTECTOR (MSCP)
Motor short-circuit protectors, also called motor circuit protectors (MCPs); shall conform to UL 508 and UL 489 and shall be provided as shown. MSCPs shall consist of an adjustable instantaneous trip circuit breaker used only in conjunction with a combination motor controller which provides coordinated motor branch-circuit overload and short-circuit protection. MSCPs shall be rated in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70. 2.15 TRANSFORMERS
NEMA ST 20, general purpose, dry-type, self-cooled, ventilated. Provide transformers in NEMA 1 enclosure. Transformer shall have 220 degrees C insulation system for transformers 15 kVA and greater, and shall have 180 degrees C insulation for transformers rated 10 kVA and less, with temperature rise not exceeding 80 degrees C under full-rated load in maximum ambient of 40 degrees C. Transformer of 80 degrees C temperature rise shall be capable of carrying continuously 130 percent of nameplate kVA without exceeding insulation rating. Transformers shall be quiet type with maximum sound level at least 3 decibels less than NEMA standard level for transformer ratings indicated. 2.15.1 Specified Transformer Efficiency
Transformers, indicated and specified with: 480V primary, 80 degrees C temperature rise, kVA ratings of 37.5 to 100 for single phase or 30 to 500 for three phase, shall be energy efficient type. Minimum efficiency, based on factory test results, shall not be less than NEMA Class 1 efficiency as defined by NEMA TP 1. 2.15.2 Transformers With Non-Linear Loads
Transformer insulation shall be a UL recognized 220 degrees C system. Neither the primary nor the secondary temperature shall exceed 220 degrees C at any point in the coils while carrying their full rating of non-sinusoidal load. Transformers are to be UL listed and labeled for K-4 in accordance with UL 1561. Transformers evaluated by the UL K-Factor evaluation shall be listed for 80 degrees C average temperature rise only. K-Factor rated transformers shall have an impedance range of 3 percent to 5 percent, and shall have a minimum reactance of 2 percent to prevent excessive neutral current when supplying loads with large amounts of third harmonic. SECTION 26 20 00 Page 14
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.16
MOTORS
NEMA MG 1; hermetic-type sealed motor compressors shall also comply with UL 984. Provide the size in terms of HP, or kVA, or full-load current, or a combination of these characteristics, and other characteristics, of each motor as indicated or specified. Determine specific motor characteristics to ensure provision of correctly sized starters and overload heaters. Motors for operation on 208-volt, 3-phase circuits shall have terminal voltage rating of 200 volts, and those for operation on 480-volt, 3-phase circuits shall have terminal voltage rating of 460 volts. Motors shall be designed to operate at full capacity with voltage variation of plus or minus 10 percent of motor voltage rating. Unless otherwise indicated, motors rated 1 HP and above shall be continuous duty type. Where fuse protection is specifically recommended by the equipment manufacturer, provide fused switches in lieu of non-fused switches indicated. 2.16.1 High Efficiency Single-Phase Motors
Single-phase fractional-horsepower alternating-current motors shall be high efficiency types corresponding to the applications listed in NEMA MG 11. In exception, for motor-driven equipment with a minimum seasonal or overall efficiency rating, such as a SEER rating, provide equipment with motor to meet the overall system rating indicated. 2.16.2 Premium Efficiency Polyphase Motors
Polyphase motors shall be selected based on high efficiency characteristics relative to typical characteristics and applications as listed in NEMA MG 10. In addition, continuous rated, polyphase squirrel-cage medium induction motors shall meet the requirements for premium efficiency electric motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1, including the NEMA full load efficiency ratings. In exception, for motor-driven equipment with a minimum seasonal or overall efficiency rating, such as a SEER rating, provide equipment with motor to meet the overall system rating indicated. 2.16.3 Motor Sizes
Provide size for duty to be performed, not exceeding the full-load nameplate current rating when driven equipment is operated at specified capacity under most severe conditions likely to be encountered. When motor size provided differs from size indicated or specified, make adjustments to wiring, disconnect devices, and branch circuit protection to accommodate equipment actually provided. Provide controllers for motors rated 1-hp and above with electronic phase-voltage monitors designed to protect motors from phase-loss, undervoltage, and overvoltage. Provide protection for motors from immediate restart by a time adjustable restart relay. 2.16.4 Wiring and Conduit
Provide internal wiring for components of packaged equipment as an integral part of the equipment. Provide power wiring and conduit for field-installed equipment, as specified herein. Power wiring and conduit shall conform to the requirements specified herein. Control wiring shall be provided under, and conform to the requirements of the section specifying the associated equipment.
SECTION 26 20 00
Page 15
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.17
MOTOR CONTROLLERS
UL 508, NEMA ICS 1, and NEMA ICS 2,. Controllers shall have thermal overload protection in each phase and shall have one spare normally open and one spare normally closed auxiliary contact. Provide controllers for motors rated 1-hp and above with electronic phase-voltage monitors designed to protect motors from phase-loss, undervoltage, and overvoltage. Provide protection for motors from immediate restart by a time adjustable restart relay. Combination motor controllers shall employ molded case circuit breaker for branch circuit protection. Circuit breakers for comibnation controllers shall be thermal magnetic. Combination magnetic-type motor controllers shall have undervoltage protection when used with momentary-contact pushbutton stations or switches and shall have undervoltage release when used with maintained-contact pushbutton stations or switches. When used with pressure, float, or similar automatic-type or maintained-contact switch, controller shall have hand/off/automatic selector switch. Connections to selector switch shall be such that only normal automatic regulatory control devices are bypassed when switch is in "hand" position. Safety control devices, such as low and high pressure cutouts, high temperature cutouts, and motor overload protective devices, shall be connected in motor control circuit in "hand" and "automatic" positions. Control circuit connections to hand/off/automatic selector switch or to more than one automatic regulatory control device shall be made in accordance with indicated or manufacturer's approved wiring diagram. For each motor not in sight of controller or where controller disconnecting means is not in sight of motor location and driven machinery location, controller disconnecting means shall be capable of being locked in open position. Overload protective devices shall provide adequate protection to motor windings; be thermal inverse-time-limit type; and include manual reset-type pushbutton on outside of motor controller case. Cover of combination motor controller and manual switch or circuit breaker shall be interlocked with operating handle of switch or circuit breaker so that cover cannot be opened unless handle of switch or circuit breaker is in "off" position. Minimum short circuit withstand rating of combination motor controller shall be 22,000 rms symmetrical amperes. 2.17.1 Control Wiring
All control wire shall be stranded tinned copper switchboard wire with 600-volt flame-retardant insulation Type SIS meeting UL 44, or Type MTW meeting UL 1063, and shall pass the VW-1 flame tests included in those standards. Hinge wire shall have Class K stranding. Current transformer secondary leads shall be not smaller than No. 10 AWG. The minimum size of control wire shall be No. 14 AWG. Power wiring for 480-volt circuits and below shall be of the same type as control wiring and the minimum size shall be No. 12 AWG. Special attention shall be given to wiring and terminal arrangement on the terminal blocks to permit the individual conductors of each external cable to be terminated on adjacent terminal points. 2.17.2 Control Circuit Terminal Blocks
NEMA ICS 4. Control circuit terminal blocks for control wiring shall be molded or fabricated type with barriers, rated not less than 600 volts. The terminals shall be removable binding, fillister or washer head screw type, or of the stud type with contact and locking nuts. The terminals shall be not less than No. 10 in size and shall have sufficient length and space for connecting at least two indented terminals for 10 AWG conductors to each terminal. The terminal arrangement shall be subject to the SECTION 26 20 00 Page 16
W912HN-12-R-0003
approval of the Contracting Officer and not less than four (4) spare terminals or 10 percent, whichever is greater, shall be provided on each block or group of blocks. Modular, pull apart, terminal blocks will be acceptable provided they are of the channel or rail-mounted type. The Contractor shall submit data showing that the proposed alternate will accommodate the specified number of wires, are of adequate current-carrying capacity, and are constructed to assure positive contact between current-carrying parts. 2.17.2.1 Types of Terminal Blocks
a. Short-Circuiting Type: Short-circuiting type terminal blocks shall be furnished for all current transformer secondary leads and shall have provision for shorting together all leads from each current transformer without first opening any circuit. Terminal blocks shall meet the requirements of paragraph CONTROL CIRCUIT TERMINAL BLOCKS, above. b. Load Type: Load terminal blocks rated not less than 600 volts and of adequate capacity shall be provided for the conductors for NEMA Size 3 and smaller motor controllers and for other power circuits, except those for feeder tap units. The terminals shall be of either the stud type with contact nuts and locking nuts or of the removable screw type, having length and space for at least two indented terminals of the size required on the conductors to be terminated. For conductors rated more than 50 amperes, screws shall have hexagonal heads. Conducting parts between connected terminals shall have adequate contact surface and cross-section to operate without overheating. Each connected terminal shall have the circuit designation or wire number placed on or near the terminal in permanent contrasting color. 2.17.3 Control Circuits
Control circuits shall have maximum voltage of 120 volts derived from control transformer in same enclosure. Transformers shall conform to UL 506, as applicable. Transformers, other than transformers in bridge circuits, shall have primaries wound for voltage available and secondaries wound for correct control circuit voltage. Size transformers so that 80 percent of rated capacity equals connected load. Provide disconnect switch on primary side. Provide fuses in each ungrounded primary feeder. One secondary lead shall be fused; other shall be grounded. 2.17.4 Enclosures for Motor Controllers
NEMA ICS 6. 2.18 MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS (MOTOR RATED SWITCHES)
Single pole designed fo flush or surface mounting with overload protection. 2.19 LOCKOUT REQUIREMENTS
Provide disconnecting means capable of being locked out for machines and other equipment to prevent unexpected startup or release of stored energy in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.147. Mechanical isolation of machines and other equipment shall be in accordance with requirements of Division 23, "Mechanical."
SECTION 26 20 00
Page 17
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.20
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
Provide system of telecommunications wire-supporting structures (pathway), including: outlet boxes, conduits with pull wires, cable trays, and other accessories for telecommunications outlets and pathway in accordance with TIA/EIA-569-A and as specified herein. Additional telecommunications requirements are specified in Section 27 10 00, BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM. 2.21 COMMUNITY ANTENNA TELEVISION (CATV) SYSTEM
Additional CATV requirements are specified in Section 27 54 00.00 10, COMMUNITY ANTENNA TELEVISION (CATV) SYSTEMS. 2.21.1 Backboards
Provide void-free, fire rated interior grade plywood, 3/4 inch thick, as indicated. Do not cover the fire stamp on the backboard. Coordinate CATV backboard requirements with telecommunications backboard requirements as specified in Section 27 10 00, BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING. 2.22 2.22.1 GROUNDING AND BONDING EQUIPMENT Ground Rods
UL 467. Ground rods shall be copper-clad steel, with minimum diameter of 3/4 inch and minimum length of 10 feet. 2.22.2 Ground Bus
A copper ground bus shall be provided in the electrical equipment rooms as indicated. 2.22.3 Telecommunications and CATV Grounding Busbar
Provide corrosion-resistant grounding busbar suitable for indoor installation in accordance with TIA J-STD-607-A. Busbars shall be electro-tin-plated for reduced contact resistance. Provide a telecommunications main grounding busbar (TMGB) in the telecommunications entrance facility and a (TGB) in all other telecommunications rooms and equipment rooms. The telecommunications main grounding busbar (TMGB) and the telecommunications grounding busbar (TGB) shall be sized in accordance with the immediate application requirements and with consideration of future growth. Provide telecommunications grounding busbars with the following: a. Predrilled copper busbar provided with holes for use with standard sized lugs, Minimum dimensions of 0.25 in thick x 4 in wide for the TMGB and 2 in wide for TGBs with length as indicated; Listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory.
b.
c. 2.23
MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE
Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be SECTION 26 20 00 Page 18
W912HN-12-R-0003
acceptable. 2.24 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES
ASTM D 709. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified or as indicated on the drawings. Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function and, when applicable, the position. Nameplates shall be melamine plastic, 0.125 inch thick, white with black center core. Surface shall be matte finish. Corners shall be square. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be one by 2.5 inches. Lettering shall be a minimum of 0.25 inch high normal block style. 2.25 WARNING SIGNS
Provide warning signs for flash protection in accordance with NFPA 70E and NEMA Z535.4 for switchboards, panelboards, industrial control panels, and motor control centers that are in other than dwelling occupancies and are likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized. Provide field installed signs to warn qualified persons of potential electric arc flash hazards when warning signs are not provided by the manufacturer. The marking shall be clearly visible to qualified persons before examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance of the equipment. 2.26 FIRESTOPPING MATERIALS
Provide firestopping around electrical penetrations in accordance with Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING . 2.27 WIREWAYS
UL 870. Material shall be steel epoxy painted 16 gauge for heights and depths up to 6 by 6 inches, and 14 gauge for heights and depths up to 12 by 12 inches. Provide in length required for the application with hinged-cover NEMA 1 enclosure per NEMA ICS 6. 2.28 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
Provide parallel type surge protective devices which comply with UL 1449 at the service entrance main switchboard. Provide surge protectors in a NEMA 1 enclosure per NEMA ICS 6. Provide the following modes of protection: FOR SINGLE PHASE AND THREE PHASE WYE CONNECTED SYSTEMSEach phase to neutral ( L-N ) Neutral to ground ( N-G ) Phase to ground ( L-G ) Surge protective devices at the service entrance shall have a minimum surge current rating of 80,000 amperes per mode minimum. The maximum line to neutral (L-N) Suppressed Voltage Rating (SVR) shall be: 900V for 480Y/277V, three phase system The minimum MCOV (Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage) rating shall be: 600/320V for 480Y/277V, three phase system EMI/RFI filtering shall be provided for each mode with the capability to SECTION 26 20 00 Page 19
W912HN-12-R-0003
attenuate high frequency noise. 2.29 FACTORY APPLIED FINISH
Minimum attenuation shall be 20db.
Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance test and the additional requirements as specified herein. Interior and exterior steel surfaces of equipment enclosures shall be thoroughly cleaned and then receive a rust-inhibitive phosphatizing or equivalent treatment prior to painting. Exterior surfaces shall be free from holes, seams, dents, weld marks, loose scale or other imperfections. Interior surfaces shall receive not less than one coat of corrosion-resisting paint in accordance with the manufacturer's standard practice. Exterior surfaces shall be primed, filled where necessary, and given not less than two coats baked enamel with semigloss finish. Equipment located indoors shall be ANSI Light Gray, and equipment located outdoors shall be ANSI Light Gray. Provide manufacturer's coatings for touch-up work and as specified in paragraph FIELD APPLIED PAINTING. 2.30 2.30.1 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL Transformer Factory Tests
Submittal shall include routine NEMA ST 20 transformer test results on each transformer and also contain the results of NEMA "design" and "prototype" tests that were made on transformers electrically and mechanically equal to those specified. PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION INSTALLATION
Electrical installations, including weatherproof and hazardous locations and ducts, plenums and other air-handling spaces, shall conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 and to requirements specified herein. 3.1.1 Underground Service
Underground service conductors and associated conduit shall be continuous from service entrance equipment to outdoor power system connection. 3.1.2 Service Entrance Identification
Service entrance disconnect devices, switches, and enclosures shall be labeled and identified as such. 3.1.2.1 Labels
Wherever work results in service entrance disconnect devices in more than one enclosure, as permitted by NFPA 70, each enclosure, new and existing, shall be labeled as one of several enclosures containing service entrance disconnect devices. Label, at minimum, shall indicate number of service disconnect devices housed by enclosure and shall indicate total number of enclosures that contain service disconnect devices. Provide laminated plastic labels conforming to paragraph FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES. Use lettering of at least 0.25 inch in height, and engrave on black-on-white matte finish. Service entrance disconnect devices in more than one enclosure, shall be provided only as permitted by NFPA 70.
SECTION 26 20 00
Page 20
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.1.3
Wiring Methods
Provide insulated conductors installed in rigid steel conduit, IMC, rigid nonmetallic conduit, or EMT, except where specifically indicated or specified otherwise or required by NFPA 70 to be installed otherwise. Grounding conductor shall be separate from electrical system neutral conductor. Provide insulated green equipment grounding conductor for circuit(s) installed in conduit and raceways. Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2 inch in diameter for low voltage lighting and power circuits. Vertical distribution in multiple story buildings shall be made with metal conduit in fire-rated shafts. Metal conduit shall extend through shafts for minimum distance of 6 inches. Conduit which penetrates fire-rated walls, fire-rated partitions, or fire-rated floors shall be firestopped in accordance with Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING. 3.1.3.1 Pull Wire
Install pull wires in empty conduits. Pull wire shall be plastic having minimum 200-pound force tensile strength. Leave minimum 36 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. 3.1.4 Conduit Installation
Unless indicated otherwise, conceal conduit under floor slabs and within finished walls, ceilings, and floors. Keep conduit minimum 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot water pipes. Install conduit parallel with or at right angles to ceilings, walls, and structural members where located above accessible ceilings and where conduit will be visible after completion of project. 3.1.4.1 a. b. Restrictions Applicable to EMT Do not install underground. Do not encase in concrete, mortar, grout, or other cementitious materials. Do not use in areas subject to severe physical damage including but not limited to equipment rooms where moving or replacing equipment could physically damage the EMT. Do not use outdoors. Do not use when the enclosed conductors must be shielded from the effects of High-altitude Electromagnetic Pulse (HEMP). Restrictions Applicable to Nonmetallic Conduit
c.
d. e.
3.1.4.2
PVC Schedule 40 and PVC Schedule 80: a. Do not use in areas where subject to severe physical damage, including but not limited to, mechanical equipment rooms, electrical equipment rooms, hospitals, power plants, missile magazines, and other such areas. b. Do not use in hazardous (classified) areas. c. Do not use in penetrating fire-rated walls or partitions, or fire-rated floors. SECTION 26 20 00 Page 21
W912HN-12-R-0003
d. Do not use above grade, except where allowed in this section for rising through floor slab or indicated otherwise. e. Do not use when the enclosed conductors must be shielded from the effects of High-altitude Electromagnetic Pulse (HEMP). 3.1.4.3 Restrictions Applicable to Flexible Conduit
Use only as specified in paragraph FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS. Do not use when the enclosed conductors must be shielded from the effects of High-altitude Electromagnetic Pulse (HEMP). 3.1.4.4 Service Entrance Conduit, Underground
PVC, Type-EPC 40, galvanized rigid steel or steel IMC. Underground portion shall be encased in minimum of 3 inches of concrete and shall be installed minimum 18 inches below slab or grade. 3.1.4.5 Underground Conduit Other Than Service Entrance
Plastic-coated rigid steel; plastic-coated steel IMC; PVC, Type EPC-40. Plastic coating shall extend minimum 6 inches above floor. 3.1.4.6 Conduit for Circuits Rated Greater Than 600 Volts
Rigid metal conduit or IMC only. 3.1.4.7 Conduit Installed Under Floor Slabs
Conduit run under floor slab shall be located a minimum of 12inches below the vapor barrier. Seal around conduits at penetrations thru vapor barrier. 3.1.4.8 Conduit Through Floor Slabs
Where conduits rise through floor slabs, curved portion of bends shall not be visible above finished slab. 3.1.4.9 Conduit Installed in Concrete Floor Slabs
Rigid steel; steel IMC; fiberglass, or PVC, Type EPC-40. Locate so as not to adversely affect structural strength of slabs. Install conduit within middle one-third of concrete slab. Do not stack conduits. Space conduits horizontally not closer than three diameters, except at cabinet locations. Curved portions of bends shall not be visible above finish slab. Increase slab thickness as necessary to provide minimum one inch cover over conduit. Where embedded conduits cross building and/or expansion joints, provide suitable watertight expansion/deflection fittings and bonding jumpers. Expansion/deflection fittings shall allow horizontal and vertical movement of raceway. Conduit larger than one inch trade size shall be parallel with or at right angles to main reinforcement; when at right angles to reinforcement, conduit shall be close to one of supports of slab. 3.1.4.10 Stub-Ups
Provide conduits stubbed up through concrete floor for connection to free-standing equipment with adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs, set flush with finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment in rigid steel conduit, except that flexible metal conduit may be used 6 inches SECTION 26 20 00 Page 22
W912HN-12-R-0003
above floor. Where no equipment connections are made, install screwdriver-operated threaded flush plugs in conduit end. 3.1.4.11 Conduit Support
Support conduit by pipe straps, wall brackets, hangers, or ceiling trapeze. Fasten by wood screws to wood; by toggle bolts on hollow masonry units; by concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete or brick; and by machine screws, welded threaded studs, or spring-tension clamps on steel work. Threaded C-clamps may be used on rigid steel conduit only. Do not weld conduits or pipe straps to steel structures. Load applied to fasteners shall not exceed one-fourth proof test load. Fasteners attached to concrete ceiling shall be vibration resistant and shock-resistant. Holes cut to depth of more than 1 1/2 inches in reinforced concrete beams or to depth of more than 3/4 inch in concrete joints shall not cut main reinforcing bars. Fill unused holes. In partitions of light steel construction, use sheet metal screws. In suspended-ceiling construction, run conduit above ceiling. Do not support conduit by ceiling support system. Conduit and box systems shall be supported independently of both (a) tie wires supporting ceiling grid system, and (b) ceiling grid system into which ceiling panels are placed. Supporting means shall not be shared between electrical raceways and mechanical piping or ducts. Installation shall be coordinated with above-ceiling mechanical systems to assure maximum accessibility to all systems. Spring-steel fasteners may be used for lighting branch circuit conduit supports in suspended ceilings in dry locations. Support exposed risers in wire shafts of multistory buildings by U-clamp hangers at each floor level and at 10 foot maximum intervals. Where conduit crosses building expansion joints, provide suitable expansion fitting that maintains conduit electrical continuity by bonding jumpers or other means. For conduits greater than 2 1/2 inches inside diameter, provide supports to resist forces of 0.5 times the equipment weight in any direction and 1.5 times the equipment weight in the downward direction. 3.1.4.12 Directional Changes in Conduit Runs
Make changes in direction of runs with symmetrical bends or cast-metal fittings. Make field-made bends and offsets with hickey or conduit-bending machine. Do not install crushed or deformed conduits. Avoid trapped conduits. Prevent plaster, dirt, or trash from lodging in conduits, boxes, fittings, and equipment during construction. Free clogged conduits of obstructions. 3.1.4.13 Locknuts and Bushings
Fasten conduits to sheet metal boxes and cabinets with two locknuts where required by NFPA 70, where insulated bushings are used, and where bushings cannot be brought into firm contact with the box; otherwise, use at least minimum single locknut and bushing. Locknuts shall have sharp edges for digging into wall of metal enclosures. Install bushings on ends of conduits, and provide insulating type where required by NFPA 70. 3.1.4.14 Flexible Connections
Provide flexible steel conduit between 3 and 6 feet in length for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for motors. Install flexible conduit to allow 20 percent slack. Minimum flexible steel conduit size shall be 1/2 inch diameter. Provide liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit in wet and damp locations for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, SECTION 26 20 00 Page 23
W912HN-12-R-0003
movement or motors. connections. 3.1.4.15
Provide separate ground conductor across flexible
Telecommunications and Signal System Pathway
Install telecommunications pathway in accordance with TIA/EIA-569-A. a. Horizontal Pathway: Telecommunications pathways from the work area to the telecommunications room shall be installed and cabling length requirements in accordance with TIA-568-C.1. Size conduits, and cable trays in accordance with TIA/EIA-569-A and as indicated. b. Backbone Pathway: Telecommunication pathways from the telecommunications entrance facility to telecommunications rooms, and, telecommunications equipment rooms (backbone cabling) shall be installed in accordance with TIA/EIA-569-A. Size conduits and cable tray for telecommunications risers in accordance with TIA/EIA-569-A and as indicated. 3.1.4.16 Community Antenna Television (CATV) System Conduits
Install a system of CATV wire-supporting structures (pathway), including: outlet boxes, conduits with pull wires, cable trays, and other accessories for CATV outlets and pathway in accordance with TIA/EIA-569-A. Distribution system shall be star topology with empty conduit and pullwire from each outlet box to the tele communications headend equipment and empty conduit and pullwire from each telecommunications room to the headend equipment location. 3.1.5 Cable Tray Installation
Install and ground in accordance with NFPA 70. In addition, install and ground telecommunications cable tray in accordance with TIA/EIA-569-A, and TIA J-STD-607-A. Install cable trays parallel with or at right angles to ceilings, walls, and structural members. Support in accordance with manufacturer recommendations but at not more than 6 foot intervals. Contact surfaces of aluminum connections shall be coated with an antioxidant compound prior to assembly. Adjacent cable tray sections shall be bonded together by connector plates of an identical type as the cable tray sections. For grounding of cable tray system provide No. 2 AWG bare copper wire throughout cable tray system, and bond to each section, except use No. 1/0 aluminum wire if cable tray is aluminum. Terminate cable trays 10 inches from both sides of smoke and fire partitions. Conductors run through smoke and fire partitions shall be installed in 4 inch rigid steel conduits with grounding bushings, extending 12 inches beyond each side of partitions. Seal conduit on both ends to maintain smoke and fire ratings of partitions. Penetrations shall be firestopped in accordance with Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING. Provide supports to resist forces of 0.5 times the equipment weight in any direction and 1.5 times the equipment weight in the downward direction. Basket type cable tray splices, elbows, offsets, and transitions shall be accomplished using factory kits. Cuts shall be made using manufacturer approved angular offset cutters or manufacturer approved non-burr flush cutter. 3.1.6 Boxes, Outlets, and Supports
Provide boxes in wiring and raceway systems wherever required for pulling of wires, making connections, and mounting of devices or fixtures. Boxes for metallic raceways shall be cast-metal, hub-type when located in wet SECTION 26 20 00 Page 24
W912HN-12-R-0003
locations, when surface mounted on outside of exterior surfaces, and when specifically indicated. Boxes in other locations shall be sheet steel. Each box shall have volume required by NFPA 70 for number of conductors enclosed in box. Boxes for mounting lighting fixtures shall be minimum 4 inches square, or octagonal, except that smaller boxes may be installed as required by fixture configurations, as approved. Boxes for use in masonry-block or tile walls shall be square-cornered, tile-type, or standard boxes having square-cornered, tile-type covers. Provide gaskets for cast-metal boxes installed in wet locations and boxes installed flush with outside of exterior surfaces. Provide separate boxes for flush or recessed fixtures when required by fixture terminal operating temperature; fixtures shall be readily removable for access to boxes unless ceiling access panels are provided. Support boxes and pendants for surface-mounted fixtures on suspended ceilings independently of ceiling supports. Fasten boxes and supports with wood screws on wood, with bolts and expansion shields on concrete or brick, with toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, and with machine screws or welded studs on steel. In open overhead spaces, cast boxes threaded to raceways need not be separately supported except where used for fixture support; support sheet metal boxes directly from building structure or by bar hangers. Where bar hangers are used, attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of box, and support raceway with approved-type fastener maximum 24 inches from box. When penetrating reinforced concrete members, avoid cutting reinforcing steel. 3.1.6.1 Boxes
Boxes for use with raceway systems shall be minimum 1 1/2 inches deep, except where shallower boxes required by structural conditions are approved. Boxes for other than lighting fixture outlets shall be minimum 4 inches square, except that 4 by 2 inch boxes may be used where only one raceway enters outlet. Telecommunications outlets shall be a minimum of 4 11/16 inches square by 2 1/8 inches deep. Mount outlet boxes flush in finished walls. 3.1.6.2 Pull Boxes
Construct of at least minimum size required by NFPA 70 of code-gauge aluminum or galvanized sheet steel, except where cast-metal boxes are required in locations specified herein. Provide boxes with screw-fastened covers. Where several feeders pass through common pull box, tag feeders to indicate clearly electrical characteristics, circuit number, and panel designation. 3.1.6.3 Extension Rings
Extension rings are not permitted for new construction. Use only on existing boxes in concealed conduit systems where wall is furred out for new finish. 3.1.7 Mounting Heights
Mount panelboards, enclosed circuit breakers, motor controller and disconnecting switches so height of operating handle at its highest position is maximum 78 inches above floor. Mount lighting switches and handicapped telecommunications stations 48 inches above finished floor. Mount receptacles and telecommunications outlets 18 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. Wall-mounted telecommunications outlets shall be mounted at height 60 inches above finished floor. Mount other devices as indicated. Measure mounting heights of wiring devices and SECTION 26 20 00 Page 25
W912HN-12-R-0003
outlets in non-hazardous areas to center of device or outlet. 3.1.8 Conductor Identification
Provide conductor identification within each enclosure where tap, splice, or termination is made. For conductors No. 6 AWG and smaller diameter, color coding shall be by factory-applied, color-impregnated insulation. For conductors No. 4 AWG and larger diameter, color coding shall be by plastic-coated, self-sticking markers; colored nylon cable ties and plates; or heat shrink-type sleeves. Identify control circuit terminations in accordance with Section 23 09 23, DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL FOR HVAC AND OTHER LOCAL BUILDING SYSTEMS. Provide telecommunications system conductor identification as specified in Section 27 10 00, BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEMS. 3.1.8.1 Marking Strips
White or other light-colored plastic marking strips, fastened by screws to each terminal block, shall be provided for wire designations. The wire numbers shall be made with permanent ink. The marking strips shall be reversible to permit marking both sides, or two marking strips shall be furnished with each block. Marking strips shall accommodate the two sets of wire numbers. Each device to which a connection is made shall be assigned a device designation in accordance with NEMA ICS 1 and each device terminal to which a connection is made shall be marked with a distinct terminal marking corresponding to the wire designation used on the Contractor's schematic and connection diagrams. The wire (terminal point) designations used on the Contractor's wiring diagrams and printed on terminal block marking strips may be according to the Contractor's standard practice; however, additional wire and cable designations for identification of remote (external) circuits shall be provided for the Government's wire designations. Prints of the marking strips drawings submitted for approval will be so marked and returned to the Contractor for addition of the designations to the terminal strips and tracings, along with any rearrangement of points required. 3.1.9 Splices
Make splices in accessible locations. Make splices in conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller diameter with insulated, pressure-type connector. Make splices in conductors No. 8 AWG and larger diameter with solderless connector, and cover with insulation material equivalent to conductor insulation. 3.1.10 Covers and Device Plates
Install with edges in continuous contact with finished wall surfaces without use of mats or similar devices. Plaster fillings are not permitted. Install plates with alignment tolerance of 1/16 inch. Use of sectional-type device plates are not permitted. Provide gasket for plates installed in wet locations. 3.1.11 Electrical Penetrations
Seal openings around electrical penetrations through fire resistance-rated walls, partitions, floors, or ceilings in accordance with Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.
SECTION 26 20 00
Page 26
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.1.12
Grounding and Bonding
Provide In accordance with NFPA 70 and NFPA 780. Ground exposed, non-current-carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment, metallic raceway systems, grounding conductor in metallic and nonmetallic raceways, telecommunications system grounds, and neutral conductor of wiring systems. Make ground connection at main service equipment, and extend grounding conductor to point of entrance of metallic water service. Make connection to water pipe by suitable ground clamp or lug connection to plugged tee. If flanged pipes are encountered, make connection with lug bolted to street side of flanged connection. Supplement metallic water service grounding system with additional made electrode in compliance with NFPA 70. Make ground connection to driven ground rods on exterior of building. Interconnect all grounding media in or on the structure to provide a common ground potential. This shall include lightning protection, electrical service, telecommunications system grounds, as well as underground metallic piping systems. Interconnection to the gas line shall be made on the customer's side of the meter. Use main size lightning conductors for interconnecting these grounding systems to the lightning protection system. In addition to the requirements specified herein, provide telecommunications grounding in accordance with TIA J-STD-607-A. Where ground fault protection is employed, ensure that connection of ground and neutral does not interfere with correct operation of fault protection. 3.1.12.1 Ground Rods
Provide cone pointed ground rods. The resistance to ground shall be measured using the fall-of-potential method described in IEEE Std 81. The maximum resistance of a driven ground shall not exceed 25 ohms under normally dry conditions. If this resistance cannot be obtained with a single rod, install additional rods not less than 6 feet on centers. In high-ground-resistance, UL listed chemically charged ground rods may be used. If the resultant resistance exceeds 25 ohms measured not less than 48 hours after rainfall, notify the Contracting Officer who will decide on the number of ground rods to add. 3.1.12.2 Grounding Connections
Make grounding connections which are buried or otherwise normally inaccessible, by exothermic weld or compression connector. a. Make exothermic welds strictly in accordance with the weld manufacturer's written recommendations. Welds which are "puffed up" or which show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable. Mechanical connectors are not required at exothermic welds. Make compression connections using a hydraulic compression tool to provide the correct circumferential pressure. Tools and dies shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. An embossing die code or other standard method shall provide visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on the ground wire. Ground Bus
b.
3.1.12.3
A copper ground bus shall be provided in the electrical equipment rooms as indicated. Noncurrent-carrying metal parts of transformer neutrals and other electrical equipment shall be effectively grounded by bonding to the ground bus. The ground bus shall be bonded to both the entrance ground, SECTION 26 20 00 Page 27
W912HN-12-R-0003
and to a ground rod or rods as specified above having the upper ends terminating approximately 4 inches above the floor. Connections and splices shall be of the brazed, welded, bolted, or pressure-connector type, except that pressure connectors or bolted connections shall be used for connections to removable equipment. 3.1.12.4 Resistance
Maximum resistance-to-ground of grounding system shall not exceed 5 ohms under dry conditions. Where resistance obtained exceeds 5 ohms, contact Contracting Officer for further instructions. 3.1.12.5 Telecommunications System
Provide telecommunications grounding in accordance with the following: a. Telecommunications Grounding Busbars: Provide a telecommunications grounding busbar (TGB) in all telecommunications rooms and telecommunications equipment rooms. The TGB shall be as close to the telecommunications room panelboard as practicable, when equipped. Where a panelboard for telecommunications equipment is not installed in the telecommunications room, the TGB shall be located near the backbone cabling and associated terminations. In addition, the TGB shall be placed to provide for the shortest and straightest routing of the grounding conductors. Where a panelboard for telecommunications equipment is located within the same room or space as a TGB, that panelboards alternating current equipment ground (ACEG) bus (when equipped) or the panelboard enclosure shall be bonded to the TGB. Telecommunications grounding busbars shall be installed to maintain clearances as required by NFPA 70 and shall be insulated from its support. A minimum of 2 inches separation from the wall is recommended to allow access to the rear of the busbar and the mounting height shall be adjusted to accommodate overhead or underfloor cable routing. Telecommunications Bonding Conductors: Provide a telecommunications bonding backbone (TBB) that originates at the TMGB extends throughout the building using the telecommunications backbone pathways, and connects to the TGBs in all telecommunications rooms and equipment rooms. The TBB conductors shall be installed and protected from physical and mechanical damage. The TBB conductors should be installed without splices and routed in the shortest possible straight-line path. The bonding conductor between a TBB and a TGB shall be continuous. Where splices are necessary, the number of splices should be a minimum and they shall be accessible and located in telecommunications spaces. Joined segments of a TBB shall be connected using exothermic welding, irreversible compression-type connectors, or equivalent. All joints shall be adequately supported and protected from damage. Whenever two or more TBBs are used within a multistory building, the TBBs shall be bonded together with a grounding equalizer (GE) at the top floor and at a minimum of every third floor in between. The TBB and GE shall not be connected to the pathway ground, except at the TMGB or the TGB. Telecommunications Grounding Connections: Telecommunications grounding connections to the TGB shall utilize listed compression two-hole lugs, exothermic welding, suitable and equivalent one SECTION 26 20 00 Page 28
b.
c.
W912HN-12-R-0003
hole non-twisting lugs, or other irreversible compression type connections. All metallic pathways, cabinets, and racks for telecommunications cabling and interconnecting hardware located within the same room or space as the TGB shall be bonded to the TGB respectively. In a metal frame (structural steel) building, where the steel framework is readily accessible within the room; each TGB shall be bonded to the vertical steel metal frame using a minimum No. 6 AWG conductor. Where the metal frame is external to the room and readily accessible, the metal frame shall be bonded to the TMGB with a minimum No. 6 AWG conductor. When practicable because of shorter distances and, where horizontal steel members are permanently electrically bonded to vertical column members, the TGB may be bonded to these horizontal members in lieu of the vertical column members. All connectors used for bonding to the metal frame of a building shall be listed for the intended purpose. 3.1.13 Equipment Connections
Provide power wiring for the connection of motors and control equipment under this section of the specification. Except as otherwise specifically noted or specified, automatic control wiring, control devices, and protective devices within the control circuitry are not included in this section of the specifications but shall be provided under the section specifying the associated equipment. 3.1.14 Elevator
Provide circuit to line terminals of elevator controller, and disconnect switch on line side of controller, outlet for control power, and work light and outlet receptacle in elevator pit. 3.1.15 Government-Furnished Equipment
As identified on the Drawings. 3.1.16 Repair of Existing Work
Repair of existing work, demolition, and modification of existing electrical distribution systems shall be performed as follows: 3.1.16.1 Workmanship
Lay out work in advance. Exercise care where cutting, channeling, chasing, or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, or other surfaces is necessary for proper installation, support, or anchorage of conduit, raceways, or other electrical work. Repair damage to buildings, piping, and equipment using skilled craftsmen of trades involved. 3.1.16.2 Existing Concealed Wiring to be Removed
Existing concealed wiring to be removed shall be disconnected from its source. Remove conductors; cut conduit flush with floor, underside of floor, and through walls; and seal openings. 3.1.16.3 Removal of Existing Electrical Distribution System
Removal of existing electrical distribution system equipment shall include equipment's associated wiring, including conductors, cables, exposed conduit, surface metal raceways, boxes, and fittings, back to equipment's SECTION 26 20 00 Page 29
W912HN-12-R-0003
power source as indicated. 3.1.16.4 Maintain circuits but were restored 3.1.17 Continuation of Service continuity of existing circuits of equipment to remain. Existing of equipment shall remain energized. Circuits which are to remain disturbed during demolition shall have circuits wiring and power back to original condition.
Watthour Meters
NEMA C12.1. 3.1.18 Surge Protective Devices
Connect the surge protective devices in parallel to the power source, keeping the conductors as short and straight as practically possible. 3.2 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE MOUNTING
Provide number, location, and letter designation of nameplates as indicated. Fasten nameplates to the device with a minimum of two sheet-metal screws or two rivets. 3.3 WARNING SIGN MOUNTING
Provide the number of signs required to be readable from each accessible side. Space the signs in accordance with NFPA 70E. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Furnish test equipment and personnel and submit written copies of test results. Give Contracting Officer 5 working days notice prior to each test. 3.4.1 Devices Subject to Manual Operation
Each device subject to manual operation shall be operated at least five times, demonstrating satisfactory operation each time. 3.4.2 600-Volt Wiring Test
Test wiring rated 600 volt and less to verify that no short circuits or accidental grounds exist. Perform insulation resistance tests on wiring No. 6 AWG and larger diameter using instrument which applies voltage of approximately 500 volts to provide direct reading of resistance. Minimum resistance shall be 250,000 ohms. 3.4.3 Transformer Tests
Perform the standard, not optional, tests in accordance with the Inspection and Test Procedures for transformers, dry type, air-cooled, 600 volt and below; as specified in NETA ATS. Measure primary and secondary voltages for proper tap settings. Tests need not be performed by a recognized independent testing firm or independent electrical consulting firm. 3.4.4 Ground-Fault Receptacle Test
Test ground-fault receptacles with a "load" (such as a plug in light) to verify that the "line" and "load" leads are not reversed. SECTION 26 20 00 Page 30
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.4.5
Grounding System Test
Test grounding system to ensure continuity, and that resistance to ground is not excessive. Test each ground rod for resistance to ground before making connections to rod; tie grounding system together and test for resistance to ground. Make resistance measurements in dry weather, not earlier than 48 hours after rainfall. Submit written results of each test to Contracting Officer, and indicate location of rods as well as resistance and soil conditions at time measurements were made. 3.4.6 Watthour Meter a. Visual and mechanical inspection (1) Examine for broken parts, shipping damage, and tightness of connections. (2) Verify that meter type, scales, and connections are in accordance with approved shop drawings. b. Electrical tests (1) (2) Determine accuracy of meter. Calibrate watthour meters to one-half percent.
(3) Verify that correct multiplier has been placed on face of meter, where applicable. 3.5 COORDINATION
Coordination of all disciplines and shop drawings is required. All disciplines shall meet and come to agreement as to location of equipment and space above ceiling, wall chases, and mechanical and electrical rooms. Pipes and other equipment foreign to the electrical equipment shall not be located in, enter, or pass through electrical and communication rooms.
SECTION 26 20 00
Page 31
W912HN-12-R-0003
SECTION 26 23 00 SWITCHBOARDS PART 1 1.1 GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM A 123/A 123M (2009) Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products (2009) Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware (2009a) Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process (2001; R 2006) Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings (2008) Specifying Color by the Munsell System (2001; R 2007) Laminated Thermosetting Materials
ASTM A 153/A 153M
ASTM A 653/A 653M
ASTM A 780/A 780M
ASTM D 1535
ASTM D 709
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE) IEEE C2 IEEE C37.90.1 (2012) National Electrical Safety Code (2002; Errata 2003; Errata 2004) Surge Withstand Capability (SWC) Tests for Relays and Relay Systems Associated with Electric Power Apparatus (2005) Standard for Pad-Mounted Equipment - Enclosure Integrity (2000) The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms (1983) Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System (Part 1)Normal Measurements
IEEE C57.12.28
IEEE Std 100
IEEE Std 81
SECTION 26 23 00
Page 1
W912HN-12-R-0003
INTERNATIONAL ELECTRICAL TESTING ASSOCIATION (NETA) NETA ATS (2009) Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA) NEMA C12.1 (2008) Electric Meters; Code for Electricity Metering (1998) Industrial Laminated Thermosetting Products (2006) Deadfront Distribution Switchboards (2007) General Instructions for Proper Handling, Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Deadfront Distribution Switchboards Rated 600 Volts or Less
NEMA LI 1
NEMA PB 2 NEMA PB 2.1
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) NFPA 70 (2011; TIA 11-1; Errata 2011; TIA 11-2; TIA 11-3; TIA 11-4) National Electrical Code UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) UL 467 UL 489 (2007) Grounding and Bonding Equipment (2009; Reprint Jun 2011) Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures (2005) Dead-Front Switchboards
UL 891 1.2 DEFINITION
Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications and on the drawings shall be as defined in IEEE Std 100. 1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-02 Shop Drawings Switchboard Drawings Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown to ensure a coordinated installation. Wiring diagrams SECTION 26 23 00 Page 2
W912HN-12-R-0003
shall identify circuit terminals and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnection between each item of equipment. Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment devices. Submittals shall include the nameplate data, size, and capacity. Submittals shall also include applicable federal, military, industry, and technical society publication references. SD-03 Product Data Switchboard SD-06 Test Reports Switchboard design tests; G, RO Switchboard production tests; G, RO Acceptance checks and tests; G, RO SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Switchboard Operation and Maintenance, Data Package 5 SD-11 Closeout Submittals Assembled Operation and Maintenance Manuals Equipment Test Schedule Request for Settings; G, AE 1.4 1.4.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE Switchboard Product Data
Each submittal shall include manufacturer's information for each component, device and accessory provided with the switchboard including: a. Circuit breaker type, interrupting rating, and trip devices, including available settings Manufacturer's instruction manuals and published time-current curves (on full size logarithmic paper) of the main secondary breaker and largest secondary feeder device. Switchboard Drawings
b.
1.4.2
Drawings shall include, but are not limited to the following: a. b. One-line diagram including breakers, current transformers, and meters Outline drawings including front elevation, section views, footprint, and overall dimensions Bus configuration including dimensions and ampere ratings of bus bars Markings and NEMA nameplate data
c. d.
SECTION 26 23 00
Page 3
W912HN-12-R-0003
e.
Circuit breaker type, interrupting rating, and trip devices, including available settings Three-line diagrams and elementary diagrams and wiring diagrams with terminals identified, and indicating prewired interconnections between items of equipment and the interconnection between the items. Manufacturer's instruction manuals and published time-current curves of the main secondary breaker and largest secondary feeder device. These shall be used by the designer of record to provide breaker settings that will ensure protection and coordination are achieved. Regulatory Requirements
f.
g.
1.4.3
Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section. 1.4.4.1 Alternative Qualifications
Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used, unless specified otherwise. 1.5 1.5.1 MAINTENANCE Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Data
Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA. 1.5.2 Assembled Operation and Maintenance Manuals
Manuals shall be assembled and bound securely in durable, hard covered, SECTION 26 23 00 Page 4
W912HN-12-R-0003
water resistant binders. The manuals shall be assembled and indexed in the following order with a table of contents. The contents of the assembled operation and maintenance manuals shall be as follows: a. Manufacturer's O&M information required by the paragraph entitled "SD-10, Operation and Maintenance Data". Catalog data required by the paragraph entitled, "SD-03, Product Data". Drawings required by the paragraph entitled, "SD-02, Shop Drawings". Prices for spare parts and supply list. Information on metering Design test reports Production test reports WARRANTY
b. c. d. e. f. g. 1.6
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract. PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS PRODUCT COORDINATION
Products and materials not considered to be switchboards and related accessories are specified in Section 33 70 02.00 10 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, UNDERGROUND, and Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. 2.2 SWITCHBOARD
NEMA PB 2 and UL 891. 2.2.1 Ratings rating of the switchboard shall be 480Y/277 volts AC, 4-wire 3 continuous current rating of the main bus shall be as The short-circuit current rating shall be as indicated. The shall be UL listed and labeled as service entrance equipment.
The voltage phase. The indicated. switchboard 2.2.2
Construction
Switchboard shall consist of vertical sections bolted together to form a rigid assembly and shall be rear aligned. All circuit breakers shall be front accessible. Rear aligned switchboards shall have front accessible load connections. Compartmentalized switchboards shall have vertical insulating barriers between the front device section, the main bus section, and the cable compartment with full front to rear vertical insulating barriers between adjacent sections. Where indicated, "space for future" or "space" shall mean to include bus, device supports, and connections. Provide insulating barriers in accordance with NEMA LI 1, Type GPO-3, 0.25 inch minimum thickness. Apply moisture resistant coating to all rough-cut edges of barriers. Switchboard shall be completely factory engineered and assembled, including protective devices and equipment indicated with SECTION 26 23 00 Page 5
W912HN-12-R-0003
necessary interconnections, instrumentation, and control wiring. 2.2.2.1 Enclosure
The switchboard enclosure shall be a NEMA 1 Type. Enclosure shall be bolted together with removable bolt-on side and rear covers. Front doors shall be provided with padlockable vault handles with a three point catch. Base channels of enclosure shall be corrosion resistant and shall be fabricated of galvanized steel. Base shall include any part of enclosure that is within 1.5 inches of concrete pad. Galvanized steel shall be ASTM A 123/A 123M, ASTM A 653/A 653M G90 coating, and ASTM A 153/A 153M, as applicable. Galvanize after fabrication where practicable. Paint enclosure, including bases, ASTM D 1535 light gray No. 61 or No. 49. Paint coating system shall comply with IEEE C57.12.28 for galvanized steel. 2.2.2.2 Bus Bars
Make bus connections and joints with hardened steel bolts. The through-bus shall be rated at the full ampacity of the main throughout the switchboard. Provide minimum one-quarter by 2 inch copper ground bus secured to each vertical section along the entire length of the switchboard. The neutral bus shall be rated 100 percent of the main bus continuous current rating. 2.2.2.3 Main and Tie Sections
The main and tie sections shall consist of individually mounted draw out electronic trip molded-case circuit breakers. 2.2.2.4 Distribution Sections
The distribution sections shall consist of molded-case circuit breakers. 2.2.2.5 Auxiliary Sections
Auxiliary sections shall consist of indicated instruments, as indicated. 2.2.2.6 Handles
Handles for individually mounted devices shall be of the same design and method of external operation. Label handles prominently to indicate device ampere rating. Identify ON-OFF indication by handle position and by prominent marking. 2.2.3 Protective Device
Provide main and branch protective devices as indicated. 2.2.3.1 Molded-Case Circuit Breaker - MDPA and MDPB
UL 489. UL listed and labeled, 100 percent rated, stationary, manually operated, low voltage molded-case circuit breaker, with a short-circuit current rating as indicated at 480 volts. Breaker frame size shall be as indicated. Series rated circuit breakers are unacceptable. 2.2.3.2 A. Draw Out Electronic Trip Circuit Breaker - MSB
Two-step stored energy electronic trip molded case circuit breaker(s)
SECTION 26 23 00
Page 6
W912HN-12-R-0003
1. Circuit protective devices shall be two-step stored energy type circuit breakers. 2. Circuit breaker trip system shall be a microprocessor-based true rms sensing design with sensing accuracy through the thirteenth (13th) harmonic. 3. The integral trip system shall be independent of any external power source and shall contain no less than industrial grade electronic components. 4. Circuit breakers shall be equipped with back-up thermal and magnetic trip system. 5. The ampere rating of the circuit breaker shall be determined by the combination of an interchangeable rating plug, the sensor size and the long-time pickup adjustment on the circuit breaker. The sensor size, rating plug and switch adjustments shall be clearly marked on the face of the circuit breaker. Circuit breakers shall be UL Listed to carry 100% of their ampere rating continuously when applied in UL 891switchboards. 6. The following time/current response adjustments shall be provided. Each adjustment shall have discrete settings and shall be independent from all other adjustments. Long Time Pickup & Long Time Delay Short Time Pickup & Short Time Delay (It IN & It OUT) Instantaneous Pickup Ground Fault Pickup & Ground Fault Delay (It IN & It OUT) 7. A means to seal the rating plug and trip unit adjustments in accordance with NEC Section 240-6(b) shall be provided. 8. Local visual trip indication for overload, short circuit and ground fault trip occurrences shall be provided. 9. An ammeter to individually display all phase currents flowing through the circuit breaker shall be provided. Indication of inherent ground fault current flowing in the system shall be provided on circuit breakers with integral ground fault protection. All current values shall be displayed in True rms with 2% accuracy. 10. Long Time Pickup indication to signal when loading approaches or exceeds the adjusted ampere rating of the circuit breaker shall be provided. 11. The trip system shall include a Long Time memory circuit to protect against intermittent overcurrent conditions above the long time pickup point. Means shall be provided to reset Long Time memory circuit during primary injection testing. 12. Circuit breaker trip system shall be equipped with an externally accessible test port for use with a Universal Test Set. Provide one (1) Universal Equipment Test Set for this project job for final inspection. This test set shall be suitable for testing all electric circuit breakers specified for this project. No disassembly of the circuit breaker is required for testing. 13. Communications capabilities for remote monitoring of circuit breakers trip system, to include phase and ground fault currents, pre-trip alarm indication, switch settings and trip history information shall be provided. 14. True two-step stored energy mechanism with five (5) cycle closing time shall be provided. All circuit breakers shall have multiple CHARGE/CLOSE provisions allowing the following sequence: CHARGE, CLOSE, RECHARGE, OPEN/CLOSE/OPEN 15. Local control pushbuttons to OPEN and CLOSE circuit breaker shall be provided. Color coded visual indication of contact position (OPEN or CLOSED) shall be provided on the face of the circuit breaker. Local manual charging following CLOSE operation shall be provided. Color coded visual indication of mechanism CHARGED and DISCHARGED position SECTION 26 23 00 Page 7
W912HN-12-R-0003
shall be provided on the face of the circuit breaker. Visual indicator shall indicate CHARGED only when closing springs are completely charged. 16. Each circuit breaker shall be electrically operated to permit remote CHARGE, CLOSE, and OPEN capabilities. Electrically operated circuit breaker shall be equipped with charge contact switch for remote indication of mechanism charge status. 17. All circuit breakers shall be equipped with electrical accessories as noted on drawings. 18. Provide the following interlocking capabilities: a. cell door interlock b. key interlock for main-tie-main c. lock off 19. Equipment Ground Fault Protection a. Circuit breaker(s) shall be provided with integral equipment protection for grounded systems. b. The ground fault system shall be of the residual type. 20. Terminations a. All lugs shall be UL Listed to accept solid and/or stranded copper conductors only. b. All circuit breakers shall be UL Listed to accept field installable/removable mechanical type lugs. B. Individually drawout mounted through 5000 A 1. Main circuit breaker shall be individually drawout mounted. 2. Sturdy drawout rails shall be permanently attached to the sides of the breaker compartment and retract into the compartment when not in use. 3. When fully withdrawn, the circuit breaker shall permit access for inspection and testing. Circuit breaker(s) shall also be removable from the rails completely. 4. When the circuit breaker is in the Connected, Test, or Disconnected positions, or when the circuit breaker is removed from the compartment, the compartment door shall be able to be fully closed and secured. 5. A removable crank shall be supplied with each Drawout Switchboard for racking the circuit breaker between the Connected, Test, or Disconnected positions. 2.2.3.3 Automatic Throw-Over System
A. Main-Tie-Main 1. Standard functions shall include the following: a. Automatic Transfer to Alternate Source, Automatic Re-transfer to Normal Source for Main-Tie-Main b. Open Transition with control program interlocking to prevent paralleling c. Bypass of Retransfer delay if alternate source fails d. Electrically Interlocked e. Manual Circuit Breaker Close Buttons Inhibited f. Time Delay On Transfer 5 seconds g. 2 Second Time Delay On Retransfer, Closed Transition h. Source Stabilization Before Retransfer 10 seconds i. Undervoltage sensing on Both Sources (27 Device), 10% differential, strap adjustable with local LED indication j. Phase Sequence( reverse phase) Sensing on Both Sources(47 SECTION 26 23 00 Page 8
W912HN-12-R-0003
Device) , 2 cycles with local LED indication k. Phase Loss(47 Device), 68% of nominal with local LED indication l. Phase Imbalance(47 Device) 4% Strap Adjustable with local LED indication m. Auto / Manual Switch with Removable Key and light indication 1) White Light for Auto 2) Blue Light for Manual n. Control Power Transfer Between Sources o. Full Automatic Mode with Drawout Breakers in the Test Position p. Open(Green)/Close(Red) Lighted Push Buttons for Manual Operation of the Circuit Breakers q. Test Switch for Simulating Loss of either Source r. Circuit Breaker Electrical Trip Lockout with Amber Light indication s. Uninterruptible Power Supply for 120Vac Control Power t. UPS Bypass relay u. White Lights for Sources Available v. Operator Interface Panel w. Wire Labels for Control Wiring x. Fused Control Circuits With Individual Blown Fuse Indication 2. Optional Functions shall include the following: a. b. c. d. e. Manual Retransfer to Normal Switch for Main-tie-Main Remote Alarm Contact ( System Inoperative), 5A @ 120Vac Closed Transition on Retransfer Preferred Source Selector Pilot Lights Test Switch
3. Documentation shall include the following: a. b. c. d. e. Wiring diagram of each assembly in system. System schematic diagram. Input/Output listing. Sequence of operation. Test procedures.
4. The manufacturer shall provide a qualified service representative for one day to initialize the automatic throwover system. 2.2.4 2.2.4.1 Watthour and Digital Meters Digital Meters
IEEE C37.90.1 for surge withstand. Provide true rms, plus/minus one percent accuracy, programmable, microprocessor-based meter enclosed in sealed cases with a simultaneous three line, twelve value LED display. Meters shall have 0.56 inch, minimum, LEDs. Watthour meter shall have 0.56 inch, minimum, LEDs. The meters shall accept input from standard 5A secondary instrument transformers and direct voltage monitoring range to 600 volts, phase to phase. Programming shall be via a front panel display and a communication interface with a computer. Password secured programming shall be stored in non-volatile EEPROM memory. Digital communications shall be Modbus protocol via a RS485 serial port and an independently addressable RS485 serial port. The meter shall calculate and store average max/min demand values for all readings based on a user selectable sliding window averaging period. The meter shall have programmable hi/low set limits with two Form C dry contact relays when exceeding alarm conditions. Meter shall provide Total Harmonic Distortion SECTION 26 23 00 Page 9
W912HN-12-R-0003
(THD) measurement to the thirty-first order. Meter shall have capability to communicate with Building Control System via LonWorks protocol and the existing PowerLogic metering system. a. Multi-Function Meter: Meter shall display a selected phase to neutral voltage, phase to phase voltage, percent phase to neutral voltage THD, percent phase to phase voltage THD; a selected phase current, neutral current, percent phase current THD, percent neutral current; selected total PF, kW, KVA, kVAR, FREQ, kVAh, kWh. Detected alarm conditions include over/under current, over/under voltage, over/under KVA, over/under frequency, over/under selected PF/kVAR, voltage phase reversal, voltage imbalance, reverse power, over percent THD. The meter shall have a Form C KYZ pulse output relay. Meter Fusing
2.2.5
Provide a fuse block mounted in the metering compartment containing one fuse per phase to protect the voltage input to voltage sensing meters. Size fuses as recommended by the meter manufacturer. 2.2.6 Terminal Boards
Provide with engraved plastic terminal strips and screw type terminals for external wiring between components and for internal wiring between removable assemblies. Terminal boards associated with current transformers shall be short-circuiting type. Terminate conductors for current transformers with ring-tongue lugs. Terminal board identification shall be identical in similar units. External wiring shall be color coded consistently for similar terminal boards. 2.2.7 Wire Marking
Mark control and metering conductors at each end. Provide factory-installed, white, plastic tubing, heat stamped with black block type letters on factory-installed wiring. On field-installed wiring, provide white, preprinted, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) sleeves, heat stamped with black block type letters. Each sleeve shall contain a single letter or number, shall be elliptically shaped to securely grip the wire, and shall be keyed in such a manner to ensure alignment with adjacent sleeves. Provide specific wire markings using the appropriate combination of individual sleeves. Each wire marker shall indicate the device or equipment, including specific terminal number to which the remote end of the wire is attached. 2.3 MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE
Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable. This nameplate and method of attachment may be the manufacturer's standard if it contains the required information. 2.4 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES
ASTM D 709. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each switchboard, equipment enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified in this section or as indicated on the drawings. Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function and, when applicable, the position. Nameplates shall be melamine plastic, 0.125 inch thick, white with black center core. SECTION 26 23 00 Page 10
W912HN-12-R-0003
Provide red laminated plastic label with white center core where indicated. Surface shall be matte finish. Corners shall be square. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be one by 2.5 inches. Lettering shall be a minimum of 0.25 inch high normal block style. 2.5 2.5.1 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL Equipment Test Schedule
The Government reserves the right to witness tests. Provide equipment test schedules for tests to be performed at the manufacturer's test facility. Submit required test schedule and location and notify the Contracting Officer 30 calendar days before scheduled test date. Notify Contracting Officer 15 calendar days in advance of changes to scheduled date. Test Instrument Calibration: (1) The manufacturer shall have a calibration program which assures that all applicable test instruments are maintained within rated accuracy. (2) The accuracy shall be directly traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology. (3) Instrument calibration frequency schedule shall not exceed 12 months for both test floor instruments and leased specialty equipment. (4) Dated calibration labels shall be visible on all test equipment. (5) Calibrating standard shall be of higher accuracy than that of the instrument tested. (6) Keep up-to-date records that indicate dates and test results of instruments calibrated or tested. For instruments calibrated by the manufacturer on a routine basis, in lieu of third party calibration, include the following: (a) Maintain up-to-date instrument calibration instructions and procedures for each test instrument. (b) Identify the third party/laboratory calibrated instrument to verify that calibrating standard is met. 2.5.2 Switchboard Design Tests
NEMA PB 2 and UL 891. 2.5.2.1 Design Tests
Furnish documentation showing the results of design tests on a product of the same series and rating as that provided by this specification. a. b. c. Short-circuit current test Enclosure tests Dielectric test SECTION 26 23 00 Page 11
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.5.3
Switchboard Production Tests
NEMA PB 2 and UL 891. Furnish reports which include results of production tests performed on the actual equipment for this project. These tests include: a. b. c. d. PART 3 3.1 60-hertz dielectric tests Mechanical operation tests Electrical operation and control wiring tests Ground fault sensing equipment test EXECUTION INSTALLATION
Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and to the requirements specified herein. 3.2 GROUNDING
NFPA 70 and IEEE C2, except that grounds and grounding systems shall have a resistance to solid earth ground not exceeding 25 ohms. 3.2.1 Grounding Electrodes
Provide driven ground rods as specified in Section 33 70 02.00 10 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, UNDERGROUND. Connect ground conductors to the upper end of the ground rods by exothermic weld. Provide compression connectors at equipment end of ground conductors. 3.2.2 Equipment Grounding
Provide bare copper cable not smaller than No. 4/0 AWG not less than 24 inches below grade connecting to the indicated ground rods. When work in addition to that indicated or specified is directed to obtain the specified ground resistance, the provision of the contract covering "Changes" shall apply. 3.2.3 Connections
Make joints in grounding conductors and loops by exothermic weld or compression connector. Where connections occur underground or in non-accessible areas, only exothermic welds are acceptable with the exception of test wells where the connection shall be easily removable. Exothermic welds and compression connectors shall be installed as specified in Section 33 70 02.00 10 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, UNDERGROUND. 3.2.4 Grounding and Bonding Equipment
UL 467, except as indicated or specified otherwise. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND ASSEMBLIES
Install and connect equipment furnished under this section as indicated on project drawings, the approved shop drawings, and as specified herein. SECTION 26 23 00 Page 12
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.3.1
Switchboard
NEMA PB 2.1. 3.3.2 Meters and Instrument Transformers
NEMA C12.1. 3.3.3 Field Applied Painting
Where field painting of enclosures is required to correct damage to the manufacturer's factory applied coatings, provide manufacturer's recommended coatings and apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3.4 Galvanizing Repair
Repair damage to galvanized coatings using ASTM A 780/A 780M, zinc rich paint, for galvanizing damaged by handling, transporting, cutting, welding, or bolting. Do not heat surfaces that repair paint has been applied to. 3.3.5 Field Fabricated Nameplate Mounting
Provide number, location, and letter designation of nameplates as indicated. Fasten nameplates to the device with a minimum of two sheet-metal screws or two rivets. 3.4 3.4.1 FOUNDATION FOR EQUIPMENT AND ASSEMBLIES Interior Location
Mount switchboard on concrete slab. Unless otherwise indicated, the slab shall be at least 4 inches thick. The top of the concrete slab shall be approximately 4 inches above finished floor. Edges above floor shall have 1/2 inch chamfer. The slab shall be of adequate size to project at least 8 inches beyond the equipment. Provide conduit turnups and cable entrance space required by the equipment to be mounted. Seal voids around conduit openings in slab with water- and oil-resistant caulking or sealant. Cut off and bush conduits 3 inches above slab surface. Concrete work shall be as specified in Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Contractor shall submit request for settings of breakers to the Contracting Officer after approval of switchboard and at least 30 days in advance of their requirement. 3.5.1 Performance of Acceptance Checks and Tests
Perform in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and include the following visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests, performed in accordance with NETA ATS. 3.5.1.1 a. Switchboard Assemblies
Visual and Mechanical Inspection 1. Compare equipment nameplate data with specifications and approved shop drawings. SECTION 26 23 00 Page 13
W912HN-12-R-0003
2. 3.
Inspect physical, electrical, and mechanical condition. Confirm correct application of manufacturer's recommended lubricants. Verify appropriate anchorage, required area clearances, and correct alignment. Inspect all doors, panels, and sections for paint, dents, scratches, fit, and missing hardware. Verify that circuit breaker sizes and types correspond to approved shop drawings. Inspect all bolted electrical connections for high resistance using low-resistance ohmmeter, verifying tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method, or performing thermographic survey. Confirm correct operation and sequencing of electrical and mechanical interlock systems.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9. Clean switchboard. 10. Inspect insulators for evidence of physical damage or contaminated surfaces. 11. Verify correct barrier installation. 12. Exercise all active components. 13. Inspect all mechanical indicating devices for correct operation. 14. Verify that vents are clear. 15. Test operation, alignment, and penetration of instrument transformer withdrawal disconnects. 16. Inspect control power transformers. b. Electrical Tests 1. 2. 3. Perform insulation-resistance tests on each bus section. Perform overpotential tests. Perform insulation-resistance test on control wiring; Do not perform this test on wiring connected to solid-state components. Perform control wiring performance test. Perform primary current injection tests on the entire current circuit in each section of assembly. Circuit Breakers
4. 5.
3.5.1.2
Low Voltage Molded Case
SECTION 26 23 00
Page 14
W912HN-12-R-0003
a.
Visual and Mechanical Inspection 1. Compare nameplate data with specifications and approved shop drawings. Inspect circuit breaker for correct mounting. Operate circuit breaker to ensure smooth operation. Inspect case for cracks or other defects. Inspect all bolted electrical connections for high resistance using low resistance ohmmeter, verifying tightness of accessible bolted connections and/or cable connections by calibrated torque-wrench method, or performing thermographic survey. Inspect mechanism contacts and arc chutes in unsealed units.
2. 3. 4. 5.
6. b.
Electrical Tests 1. 2. 3. Perform contact-resistance tests. Perform insulation-resistance tests. Perform Breaker adjustments for final settings in accordance with Government provided settings. Perform long-time delay time-current characteristic tests Current Transformers
4. 3.5.1.3 a.
Visual and Mechanical Inspection 1. Compare equipment nameplate data with specifications and approved shop drawings. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify correct connection. Verify that adequate clearances exist between primary and secondary circuit. Inspect all bolted electrical connections for high resistance using low-resistance ohmmeter, verifying tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method, or performing thermographic survey. Verify that all required grounding and shorting connections provide good contact.
2. 3. 4.
5.
6.
b.
Electrical Tests 1. Perform resistance measurements through all bolted connections with low-resistance ohmmeter, if applicable. Perform insulation-resistance tests. Perform polarity tests. SECTION 26 23 00 Page 15
2. 3.
W912HN-12-R-0003
4. 3.5.1.4 a.
Perform ratio-verification tests. Metering and Instrumentation
Visual and Mechanical Inspection 1. Compare equipment nameplate data with specifications and approved shop drawings. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of electrical connections.
2. 3. b.
Electrical Tests 1. Determine accuracy of meters at 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent of full scale. Calibrate watthour meters according to manufacturer's published data. Verify all instrument multipliers. Electrically confirm that current transformer and voltage transformer secondary circuits are intact. Grounding System
2.
3. 4.
3.5.1.5 a.
Visual and Mechanical Inspection 1. Inspect ground system for compliance with contract plans and specifications.
b.
Electrical Tests 1. IEEE Std 81. Perform ground-impedance measurements utilizing the fall-of-potential method. On systems consisting of interconnected ground rods, perform tests after interconnections are complete. On systems consisting of a single ground rod perform tests before any wire is connected. Take measurements in normally dry weather, not less than 48 hours after rainfall. Use a portable ground testing megger in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to test each ground or group of grounds. The instrument shall be equipped with a meter reading directly in ohms or fractions thereof to indicate the ground value of the ground rod or grounding systems under test. Submit the measured ground resistance of each ground rod and grounding system, indicating the location of the rod and grounding system. Include the test method and test setup (i.e., pin location) used to determine ground resistance and soil conditions at the time the measurements were made.
2.
3.5.2
Follow-Up Verification
Upon completion of acceptance checks, settings, and tests, the Contractor shall show by demonstration in service that circuits and devices are in good operating condition and properly performing the intended function. SECTION 26 23 00 Page 16
W912HN-12-R-0003
Circuit breakers shall be tripped by operation of each protective device. Test shall require each item to perform its function not less than three times. As an exception to requirements stated elsewhere in the contract, the Contracting Officer shall be given 5 working days advance notice of the dates and times for checks, settings, and tests.
SECTION 26 23 00
Page 17
W912HN-12-R-0003
SECTION 26 29 23 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEMS UNDER 600 VOLTS 04/06 PART 1 1.1 GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE) IEEE C62.41.1 (2002; R 2008) Guide on the Surges Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits (2002) Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits (1992; Errata 2004) Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electrical Power Systems
IEEE C62.41.2
IEEE Std 519
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA) NEMA 250 (2008) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) (2000; R 2005; R 2008) Standard for Industrial Control and Systems: General Requirements (1997; R 2003) Industrial Control and Systems: Handling, Storage and Installation Guide for AC General-Purpose Medium Voltage Contactors and Class E Controllers, 50 and 60 Hertz (1993; R 2011) Enclosures (2006) Industrial Control and Systems: Adjustable-Speed Drives
NEMA ICS 1
NEMA ICS 3.1
NEMA ICS 6 NEMA ICS 7
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) NFPA 70 (2011; TIA 11-1; Errata 2011; TIA 11-2; TIA 11-3; TIA 11-4) National Electrical Code U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD) MIL-STD-461 (Rev F) Requirements for the Control of Electromagnetic Interference Characteristics of Subsystems and Equipment
SECTION 26 29 23
Page 1
W912HN-12-R-0003
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA) 47 CFR 15 Radio Frequency Devices
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) UL 489 (2009; Reprint Jun 2011) Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures (2002; Rev thru Feb 2008) Power Conversion Equipment
UL 508C
1.2
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
Section 26 20 00 DISTRIBUTION WIRING SYSTEM apply to this section with additions and modifications specified herein. 1.3 1.3.1 1.3.1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Performance Requirements Electromagnetic Interference Suppression
Computing devices, as defined by 47 CFR 15, MIL-STD-461 rules and regulations, shall be certified to comply with the requirements for class A computing devices and labeled as set forth in part 15. 1.3.1.2 Electromechanical and Electrical Components
Electrical and electromechanical components of the Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) shall not cause electromagnetic interference to adjacent electrical or electromechanical equipment while in operation. 1.3.2 1.3.2.1 Electrical Requirements Power Line Surge Protection
IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, IEEE Std 519 Control panel shall have surge protection, included within the panel to protect the unit from damaging transient voltage surges. Surge arrestor shall be mounted near the incoming power source and properly wired to all three phases and ground. Fuses shall not be used for surge protection. 1.3.2.2 Sensor and Control Wiring Surge Protection
I/O functions as specified shall be protected against surges induced on control and sensor wiring installed outdoors and as shown. The inputs and outputs shall be tested in both normal mode and common mode using the following two waveforms: a. A 10 microsecond by 1000 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of 1500 volts and a peak current of 60 amperes. An 8 microsecond by 20 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of 1000 volts and a peak current of 500 amperes.
b.
SECTION 26 29 23
Page 2
W912HN-12-R-0003
1.4
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-02 Shop Drawings Schematic diagrams Interconnecting diagrams Installation drawings Submit drawings for government approval prior to equipment construction or integration. Modifications to original drawings made during installation shall be immediately recorded for inclusion into the as-built drawings. SD-03 Product Data Variable frequency drives; G, AE Wires and cables Equipment schedule Include data indicating compatibility with motors being driven. SD-06 Test Reports VFD Test Performance Verification Tests Endurance Test SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions Installation instructions SD-09 Manufacturer's Field Reports VFD Factory Test Plan; G, AE Factory test results SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Variable frequency drives, Data Package 4 Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAITNENANCE DATA. Provide service and maintenance information including preventive maintenance, assembly, and disassembly procedures. Include electrical drawings from electrical general sections. Submit additional information necessary to provide complete operation, repair, and maintenance information, detailed SECTION 26 29 23 Page 3
W912HN-12-R-0003
to the smallest replaceable unit. Include copies of as-built submittals. Provide routine preventative maintenance instructions, and equipment required. Provide instructions on how to modify program settings, and modify the control program. Provide instructions on drive adjustment, trouble-shooting, and configuration. Provide instructions on process tuning and system calibration. 1.5 1.5.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE Schematic Diagrams
Show circuits and device elements for each replaceable module. Schematic diagrams of printed circuit boards are permitted to group functional assemblies as devices, provided that sufficient information is provided for government maintenance personnel to verify proper operation of the functional assemblies. 1.5.2 Interconnecting Diagrams
Show interconnections between equipment assemblies, and external interfaces, including power and signal conductors. Include for enclosures and external devices. 1.5.3 Installation Drawings Indicate
Show floor plan of each site, with V.F.D.'s and motors indicated. ventilation requirements, adequate clearances, and cable routes. 1.5.4 Equipment Schedule
Provide schedule of equipment supplied. Schedule shall provide a cross reference between manufacturer data and identifiers indicated in shop drawings. Schedule shall include the total quantity of each item of equipment supplied. For complete assemblies, such as VFD's, provide the serial numbers of each assembly, and a sub-schedule of components within the assembly. Provide recommended spare parts listing for each assembly or component. 1.5.5 Installation instructions
Provide installation instructions issued by the manufacturer of the equipment, including notes and recommendations, prior to shipment to the site. Provide operation instructions prior to acceptance testing. 1.5.6 Factory Test Results
Document test results and submit to government within 7 working days after completion of test. 1.6 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be stored with protection from the weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. 1.7 WARRANTY
The complete system shall be warranted by the manufacturer for a period of SECTION 26 29 23 Page 4
W912HN-12-R-0003
one year, or the contracted period of any extended warrantee agreed upon by the contractor and the Government, after successful completion of the acceptance test. Any component failing to perform its function as specified and documented shall be repaired or replaced by the contractor at no additional cost to the Government. Items repaired or replaced shall be warranted for an additional period of at least one year from the date that it becomes functional again, as specified in the FAR CLAUSE 52.246-21. 1.8 1.8.1 MAINTENANCE Spare Parts
Manufacturers provide spare parts in accordance with recommended spare parts list. 1.8.2 Maintenance Support
During the warranty period, the Contractor shall provide on-site, on-call maintenance services by Contractor's personnel on the following basis: The service shall be on a per-call basis with 36 hour response. Contractor shall support the maintenanc e of all hardware and software of the system. Various personnel of different expertise shall be sent on-site depending on the nature of the maintenance service required. Costs shall include travel, local transportation, living expenses, and labor rates of the service personnel while responding to the service request. The provisions of this Section are not in lieu of, nor relieve the Contractor of, warranty responsibilities covered in this specification. Should the result of the service request be the uncovering of a system defect covered under the warranty provisions, all costs for the call, including the labor necessary to identify the defect, shall be borne by the Contractor. PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFD)
Provide frequency drive to control the speed of induction motor(s). The VFD shall include the following minimum functions, features and ratings. a. Input circuit breaker per UL 489 with a minimum of 10,000 amps symmetrical interrupting capacity and door interlocked external operator. A converter stage per UL 508C shall change fixed voltage, fixed frequency, ac line power to a fixed dc voltage. The converter shall utilize a full wave bridge design incorporating diode rectifiers. Silicon Controlled Rectifiers (SCR) are not acceptable. The converter shall be insensitive to three phase rotation of the ac line and shall not cause displacement power factor of less than .95 lagging under any speed and load condition. An inverter stage shall change fixed dc voltage to variable frequency, variable voltage, ac for application to a standard NEMA design B squirrel cage motor. The inverter shall be switched in a manner to produce a sine coded pulse width modulated (PWM) output waveform. The VFD shall be capable of supplying 120 percent of rated full load current for one minute at maximum ambient temperature.
b.
c.
d.
SECTION 26 29 23
Page 5
W912HN-12-R-0003
e.
The VFD shall be designed to operate from a 480 volt, + or - 10 percent, three phase, 60 Hz supply, and control motors with a corresponding voltage rating. Acceleration and deceleration time shall be independently adjustable from one second to 60 seconds. Adjustable full-time current limiting shall limit the current to a preset value which shall not exceed 120 percent of the controller rated current. The current limiting action shall maintain the V/Hz ratio constant so that variable torque can be maintained. Short time starting override shall allow starting current to reach 175 percent of controller rated current to maximum starting torque. The controllers shall be capable of producing an output frequency over the range of 3 Hz to 60 Hz (20 to one speed range), without low speed cogging. Over frequency protection shall be included such that a failure in the controller electronic circuitry shall not cause frequency to exceed 110 percent of the maximum controller output frequency selected. Minimum and maximum output frequency shall be adjustable over the following ranges: 1) Minimum frequency 3 Hz to 50 percent of maximum selected frequency; 2) Maximum frequency 40 Hz to 60 Hz. The controller efficiency at any speed shall not be less than 96 percent. The controllers shall be capable of being restarted into a motor coasting in the forward direction without tripping. Protection of power semiconductor components shall be accomplished without the use of fast acting semiconductor output fuses. Subjecting the controllers to any of the following conditions shall not result in component failure or the need for fuse replacment: (1) Short circuit at controller output (2) Ground fault at controller output (3) Open circuit at controller output (4) Input undervoltage (5) Input overvoltage (6) Loss of input phase (7) AC line switching transients (8) Instantaneous overload (9) Sustained overload exceeding 115 percent of controller rated current (10) Over temperature (11) Phase reversal SECTION 26 29 23 Page 6
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
W912HN-12-R-0003
m.
Solid state motor overload protection shall be included such that current exceeding an adjustable threshold shall activate a 60 second timing circuit. Should current remain above the threshold continuously for the timing period, the controller will automatically shut down. A slip compensation circuit shall be included which will sense changing motor load conditions and adjust output frequency to provide speed regulation of NEMA B motors to within + / - 0.5 percent of maximum speed without the necessity of a tachometer generator. The VFD shall be factory set for manual restart after the first protective circuit trip for malfunction (overcurrent,undervoltage, overvoltage or overtemperature) or an interruption of power. The VFD shall be capable of being set for automatic restart after a selected time delay. If the drive faults again within a specified time period (adjustable 0-60 seconds), a manual restart will be required. The VFD shall include external fault reset capability. All the necessary logic to accept an external fault reset contact shall be included. Provide critical speed lockout circuitry to prevent operating at frequencies with critical harmonics that cause resonant vibrations. The VFD shall have a minimum of three user selectable bandwidths. Provide the following operator control and monitoring devices mounted on the front panel of the VFD: (1) Manual speed potentiometer. (2) Hand-Off-Auto ( HOA ) switch. (3) Power on light. (4) Drive run power light. (5) Local display.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
Provide properly sized NEMA rated by-pass and isolation contactors to enable operation of motor in the event of VFD failure. Mechanical and electrical interlocks shall be installed between the by-pass and isolation contactors. Provide a selector switch and transfer delay timer.
2.2
ENCLOSURES
Provide equipment enclosures conforming to NEMA 250, NEMA ICS 7, NEMA ICS 6. 2.3 WIRES AND CABLES
All wires and cables shall conform to NEMA 250, NEMA ICS 7, NFPA 70.
SECTION 26 29 23
Page 7
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.4
NAMEPLATES
Nameplates internal to enclosures shall be manufacturer's standard, with the exception that they must be permanent. 2.5 2.5.1 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL VFD Factory Test Plan
To ensure quality, each VFD shall be subject to a series of in-plant quality control inspections before approval for shipment from the manufacturer's facilities. Provide test plans and test reports. PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION INSTALLATION
Per NEMA ICS 3.1, install equipment in accordance with the approved manufacturer's printed installation drawings, instructions, wiring diagrams, and as indicated on project drawings and the approved shop drawings. A field representative of the drive manufacturer shall supervise the installation of all equipment, and wiring. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Specified products shall be tested as a system for conformance to specification requirements prior to scheduling the acceptance tests. Contractor shall conduct performance verification tests in the presence of Government representative, observing and documenting complete compliance of the system to the specifications. Contractor shall submit a signed copy of the test results, certifying proper system operation before scheduling tests. 3.2.1 VFD Test
A proposed test plan shall be submitted to the contracting officer at least 28 calendar days prior to proposed testing for approval. The tests shall conform to NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 7, and all manufacturer's safety regulations. The Government reserves the right to witness all tests and review any documentation. The contractor shall inform the Government at least 14 working days prior to the dates of testing. Contractor shall provide video tapes, if available, of all training provided to the Government for subsequent use in training new personnel. All training aids, texts, and expendable support material for a self-sufficient presentation shall be provided, the amount of which to be determined by the contracting officer. 3.2.2 Performance Verification Tests
"Performance Verification Test" plan shall provide the step by step procedure required to establish formal verification of the performance of the VFD. Compliance with the specification requirements shall be verified by inspections, review of critical data, demonstrations, and tests. The Government reserves the right to witness all tests, review data, and request other such additional inspections and repeat tests as necessary to ensure that the system and provided services conform to the stated requirements. The contractor shall inform the Government 14 calendar days prior to the date the test is to be conducted.
SECTION 26 29 23
Page 8
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.2.3
Endurance Test
Immediately upon completion of the performance verification test, the endurance test shall commence. The system shall be operated at varying rates for not less than 192 consecutive hours, at an average effectiveness level of .9998, to demonstrate proper functioning of the complete PCS. Continue the test on a day-to-day basis until performance standard is met. During the endurance test, the contractor shall not be allowed in the building. The system shall respond as designed. 3.3 3.3.1 DEMONSTRATION Training
Coordinate training requirements with the Contracting Officer. 3.3.1.1 Instructions to Government Personnel
Provide the services of competent instructors who will give full instruction to designated personnel in operation, maintenance, calibration, configuration, and programming of the complete control system. Orient the training specifically to the system installed. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with the subject matter they are to teach. The Government personnel designated to attend the training will have a high school education or equivalent. The number of training days of instruction furnished shall be as specified. A training day is defined as eight hours of instruction, including two 15-minute breaks and excluding lunch time; Monday through Friday. Provide a training manual for each student at each training phase which describes in detail the material included in each training program. Provide one additional copy for archiving. Provide equipment and materials required for classroom training. Provide a list of additional related courses, and offers, noting any courses recommended. List each training course individually by name, including duration, approximate cost per person, and location of course. Unused copies of training manuals shall be turned over to the Government at the end of last training session. 3.3.1.2 Operating Personnel Training Program
Provide one 2 hour training session at the site at a time and place mutually agreeable between the Contractor and the Government. Provide session to train 4 operation personnel in the functional operations of the system and the procedures that personnel will follow in system operation. This training shall include: a. b. c. d. e. f. System overview General theory of operation System operation Alarm formats Failure recovery procedures Troubleshooting
SECTION 26 29 23
Page 9
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.3.1.3
Engineering/Maintenance Personnel Training
Accomplish the training program as specified. Training shall be conducted on site at a location designated by the Government. Provide a one day training session to train 4 engineering personnel in the functional operations of the system. This training shall include: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. System overview General theory of operation System operation System configuration Alarm formats Failure recovery procedures Troubleshooting and repair Maintenance and calibration System programming and configuration
SECTION 26 29 23
Page 10
W912HN-12-R-0003
SECTION 26 32 33.00 10 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) SYSTEM ABOVE 15 KVA CAPACITY 10/07 PART 1 1.1 GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE) IEEE C57.110 (1998; Errata 2002; R 2004) Recommended Practice for Establishing Transformer Capability When Supplying Nonsinusoidal Load Currents (2002; R 2008) Guide on the Surges Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits (2002) Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits (2002; Errata 2004; INT 2005) Recommended Practice for Maintenance, Testing, and Replacement of Vented Lead-Acid Batteries for Stationary Applications (1997; R 2003; INT 2008) Recommended Practice for Sizing Lead-Acid Batteries for Stationary Applications
IEEE C62.41.1
IEEE C62.41.2
IEEE Std 450
IEEE Std 485
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA) NEMA PE 1 (2003; R 2003) Uninterruptible Power Systems -- Specification and Performance Verification
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) NFPA 70 (2011; TIA 11-1; Errata 2011; TIA 11-2; TIA 11-3; TIA 11-4) National Electrical Code
1.2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Provide a a continuous duty, three-phase, solid state, static UPS system consisting of UPS module, battery system, battery protective device, system cabinet, maintenance bypass cabinet, static bypass transfer switch, controls and monitoring. Connect input ac power to the normal source ac input of the UPS module. The battery shall be connected to the dc input of the UPS module through the battery protective device. The ac output of the SECTION 26 32 33.00 10 Page 1
W912HN-12-R-0003
UPS system shall be connected to the critical loads. Active electronic devices shall be solid state. Semiconductor devices shall be sealed. Relays shall be dust-tight. 1.2.1 UPS Module and Battery System
UPS module shall contain required input isolation transformer, rectifier/charger unit, inverter unit and controls, battery protective device, and any other specified equipment/devices. The UPS shall utilize an N+1 redundant, scalable array Architecture. The system power train shall be comprised of hot swappable/Owner-replaceable 10kW/10kVA power modules, which shall operate in parallel, and shall be configured for N+1 redundant operation at rated load. Each 10 kVA/10 kW power module shall contain a full rated input rectifier/boost converter, full rated output inverter, and 10 percent battery charging circuit. The system shall also be comprised of a user-replaceable continuous duty bypass static switch module, hot swappable/user-replaceable battery modules, redundant control modules, redundant logic power supplies, and LCD interface display. System static switch shall be capable of being fed from the same input as the rectifier or a separate input. 1.2.2 UPS System Devices
The UPS system shall include the system cabinet, static bypass transfer switch, system protective devices, monitoring and controls, means of isolating the system from the critical load, and remote monitoring interfaces. 1.2.3 1.2.3.1 Design Requirements Semiconductor Fusing
Power semiconductors shall be fused to prevent cascaded or sequential semiconductor failures. Indicator lamp denoting blown fuse conditions shall be readily observable by the operator without removing panels or opening cabinet doors. 1.2.3.2 Interchangeability
The subassemblies in one UPS module shall be interchangeable with the corresponding modules within the same UPS, and from one UPS system to another of identical systems. 1.2.3.3 Control Power
Control power shall be derived from two sources, input and output, with automatic selective control. The control power circuit shall have suitable protection, appropriately marked and located in the immediate vicinity of the input protective device. 1.2.3.4 EMI/RFI Protection
The components and the system shall be designed to minimize the emission of electromagnetic waves that may cause interference with other equipment. 1.2.3.5 Wiring
Wiring practices, materials, and coding shall be in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70 and other applicable standards. Wire runs shall be SECTION 26 32 33.00 10 Page 2
W912HN-12-R-0003
protected in a manner which separates power and control wiring. Control wiring shall be minimum No. 16 AWG extra-flexible stranded copper. Logic-circuit wiring may be smaller. Ribbon cables shall be minimum No. 22 AWG. Control wiring shall have permanently attached wire numbers. 1.2.3.6 Terminations
Terminals shall be supplied for making power and control connections. Terminal blocks shall be provided for field wiring terminals. Terminal blocks shall be heavy-duty, strap-screw type. Terminal blocks for field wiring shall be located in one place in each module and in the system cabinet. Control wiring shall be extended to the terminal block location. No more than two wires shall land on any terminal point. Where control wiring is attached to the same point as power wiring, a separate terminal shall be provided. If bus duct is used, bus stubs shall be provided where bus duct enters cabinets. 1.2.3.7 Internal Assembly
The subassemblies shall be mounted in pull-out and/or swing-out trays where feasible. Cable connections to the trays shall be sufficiently long to allow easy access to all components. Where not feasible to mount subassemblies in pull-out or swing-out trays, they shall be firmly mounted inside the enclosure. Test points or logic indicators shall be labeled and located on the front edge of the control logic cards, if used. 1.2.3.8 Cabinet Structure
UPS system shall be installed in cabinets of heavy-duty structure meeting the NEMA PE 1 standards for floor mounting. UPS module cabinet shall be structurally adequate for forklift handling or lifting. Removable lifting eyes shall be provided on top of each cabinet. UPS module cabinet shall have hinged and lockable doors on the front only, with assemblies and components accessible from the front. Doors shall be key lockable. Operating controls shall be located outside the locked doors. Input, output, and battery cables shall be installed through the top or bottom of the cabinet. 1.2.3.9 Cabinet Finish
Equipment cabinet shall be cleaned, primed and painted in the manufacturer's standard colors, in accordance with accepted industry standards. 1.2.3.10 Mimic Bus
If painted, mimic bus and other front-panel markings (such as those showing circuit breakers or switches and fuses) shall be painted with durable acrylic-based paint. 1.2.3.11 Live Parts (300 Volts and Above)
Live parts (300 volts and above) that are exposed when front access doors are open shall be adequately protected or covered to minimize the chance of accidental contact. 1.2.3.12 Drawout Assemblies
Drawout assemblies weighing 50 lbs or more shall be provided with a means SECTION 26 32 33.00 10 Page 3
W912HN-12-R-0003
of lifting, either an overhead device or a hoisting device. 1.2.3.13 Safety
UPS shall be equipped with instruction plates including warnings and cautions, suitably located, describing any special or important procedures to be followed in operating and servicing the equipment. 1.2.4 1.2.4.1 Performance Requirements Normal Operation
The UPS module rectifier/charger shall convert the incoming ac input power to dc power for the inverter and for float charging the battery. The inverter shall supply ac power continuously. Inverter output shall be synchronized with the bypass ac power source, provided that the bypass ac power source is within the specified frequency range. The UPS system shall supply ac power to the critical loads. 1.2.4.2 Loss of ac Input Power
The battery shall supply dc power to the inverter so that there is no interruption of ac power to the critical load whenever the ac input power source deviates from the specified tolerances or fails completely. The battery shall continue to supply power to the inverter for the specified protection time. At the same time, an alarm shall sound to alert operating personnel, allowing startup of a secondary power source or orderly shutdown of the critical load. 1.2.4.3 Return of ac Input Power Source
The rectifier/charger shall start and assume the dc load from the battery when the ac input power source returns. The rectifier/charger shall then simultaneously supply the inverter with dc power and recharge the battery. This shall be an automatic function and shall cause no disturbance to the critical load. 1.2.4.4 Failure of ac Input Power to Return
Should the ac input power fail to return before the battery voltage reaches the discharge limit, the UPS system shall disconnect from the critical load to safeguard the battery. 1.2.4.5 Failure of a Module
In a redundant configuration, failure of one module shall cause that module to be disconnected from the system critical load bus by its internal protective devices and its individual output protective device. The remaining module shall continue to carry the load. Upon restoration of the failed module, it shall be possible to reconnect the failed module to the critical load bus to resume redundant operation without disruption of the critical load. 1.2.4.6 Transfer to Bypass ac Power Source
When the static bypass switch senses an overload, two or more inverter shutdown signals, or degradation of the inverter output, the bypass switch shall automatically transfer the critical load from the inverter output to the bypass ac power source without an interruption of power only if the SECTION 26 32 33.00 10 Page 4
W912HN-12-R-0003
connected load exceeds the capacity of the remaining on-line modules. If the bypass ac power source is out of normal tolerance limits, the UPS and the critical load shall shut down. 1.2.4.7 Retransfer to Inverter
The static bypass switch shall be capable of automatically retransferring the load back to the inverter output after the inverter output has returned to normal conditions. Retransfer shall not occur if the two sources are not synchronized. 1.2.4.8 UPS Module Servicing
UPS modules shall be capable of manual disconnection from the critical load bus for maintenance without disturbing the critical load bus. 1.2.4.9 UPS System Servicing
Manual closure of the maintenance bypass switch shall transfer the critical load from the inverter output to the bypass ac power source without disturbing the critical load bus. UPS module shall be capable of manual return to normal operation after completion of maintenance. 1.2.4.10 Battery Servicing
The battery protective device shall provide the means of disconnecting the battery from the rectifier/charger and inverter for maintenance. The UPS module shall continue to function and meet the performance criteria specified except for the battery function. 1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-02 Shop Drawings UPS System Installation Detail drawings consisting of a complete list of equipment and materials, manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature, battery sizing calculations according to IEEE Std 485, installation instructions, single-line diagrams, ladder-type schematic diagrams, elevations, layout drawings, and details required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will function properly as a unit. SD-03 Product Data Performance Requirements Pertinent performance data for the UPS system, using a copy of the data sheets supplied with this specification. Data sheets shall be certified by a responsible officer of the UPS manufacturer. SECTION 26 32 33.00 10 Page 5
W912HN-12-R-0003
Spare Parts Spare parts data, as specified. Field Training; G, SO Lesson plans and training manuals for the training phases, including type of training to be provided and proposed dates, with a list of reference materials. SD-06 Test Reports Factory Testing Field Supervision, Startup and Testing A detailed description of proposed factory test and field test procedures, including proposed dates and steps outlining each test, how it is to be performed, what it accomplishes, and its duration, not later than 2 months prior to the date of each test. Factory and field test reports in booklet form tabulating factory and field tests and measurements performed, upon completion and testing of the installed system. Factory and field test reports shall be signed by an official authorized to certify on behalf of the manufacturer of the UPS system that the system meets specified requirements. The reports shall be dated after the award of this contract, shall state the Contractor's name and address, shall name the project and location, and shall list the specific requirements which are being certified. SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Operating and Maintenance Manuals Six complete copies of operation manuals for the UPS System outlining the step-by-step procedures required for system startup, operation and shutdown shall be provided. The instructions shall include the manufacturer's name, equipment model number, service manual, parts list, and brief description of equipment and its basic operational features. Six complete copies of maintenance manuals listing routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and troubleshooting guides shall be provided. Corrective maintenance procedures shall identify the most probable failures and the appropriate repairs. Test measurement levels shall be referenced to specific test points on the installed equipment. Operation and maintenance manuals may be either combined or separate. 1.4 1.4.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE Reliability
UPS shall have a minimum acceptable system Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF) of 100,000 hours. A failure is defined as any interruption to or degradation of the UPS output. Automatic switching to bypass due to a problem with the UPS system does not constitute a failure, provided that the critical load is not disturbed.
SECTION 26 32 33.00 10
Page 6
W912HN-12-R-0003
1.4.2
Maintainability
UPS shall have a maximum acceptable system Mean Time To Repair (MTTR) of 30 minutes. Repair time is defined as the clock time from the arrival of the service technician to the time when the UPS is restored to service either by repair or substitution of the failed component. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Equipment placed in storage shall be protected from humidity and temperature variations, dirt, dust, or other contaminants. 1.6 1.6.1 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS Environmental Requirements
The UPS and battery system shall be capable of withstanding any combination of the following external environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating characteristics. a. Operating altitude: Sea level to 4,000 feet. (Systems applied at higher altitudes shall be derated in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions). b. c. Non-operating altitude: Sea level to 40,000 ft. 32 to 104 degrees F. Minus 4 to
Operating ambient temperature range:
d. Non-operating and storage ambient temperature range: plus 140 degrees F. e. 1.6.2 Sound load, unit, level 1.7 Operating relative humidity:
0 to 95 percent, without condensation.
Sound Pressure Levels pressure levels produced by the UPS, when operating under full rated at a distance of 5 feet in any direction from the perimeter of the shall not exceed dB as measured on the A scale of a standard sound meter at slow response.
EXTRA MATERIALS
Provide one set of special tools, calibration devices, and instruments required for operation, calibration, and maintenance of the equipment. Submit spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment specified, not later than the date of beneficial occupancy, including a complete list of parts and supplies with current unit prices and source of supply and an itemized price breakdown of spare parts recommended for stocking. The recommended spare parts selected shall be those which, in the manufacturer's judgment, will be involved in the majority of maintenance difficulties encountered. PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS STANDARD PRODUCTS a. Provide materials and equipment which are the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and that essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use SECTION 26 32 33.00 10 Page 7
W912HN-12-R-0003
for at least 2 years prior to bid opening. Equipment shall be supported by a service organization that is, in the opinion of the Contracting Officer, reasonably convenient to the site. b. Parts and materials comprising the UPS system shall be new, of current manufacture, of a high grade and free of defects and imperfections, and shall not have been in prior service except as required during aging and factory testing. 2.2 NAMEPLATES
Each major item of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address, type or style, model or serial number, and catalog number on a plate secured to the item of equipment. 2.3 LOAD PROFILE
The UPS system shall be compatible with the load characteristics defined in the LOAD PROFILE TABLE below and load configuration shown. Provide compensation for UPS/load interaction problems resulting from nonlinear loads or transformer and motor inrush. LOAD PROFILE TABLE a. b. 2.4 Type of load: Size of load: Data proccessing equipment. 60KW/60KVA.
UPS SYSTEM RATINGS
Unless stated otherwise, the parameters listed are under full output load at 1.0 power factor, with batteries fully charged and floating on the dc bus and with nominal input voltage. 2.4.1 System Capacity
Overall 80 kVA, 80 kW, N+1 redundant, at 40 degrees C. 2.4.2 Module Capacity
10 kVA, 10 kW. 2.4.3 Battery Capacity
Discharge time to end voltage: 15 minutes, at 77 degrees F. Battery shall be capable of delivering 125 percent of full rated UPS load at initial start-up. 2.4.4 Static Switch
Provide Static Switch with ratings sized per manufacturer recommendations. 2.4.5 System Bus Bracing
Braced for 30,000 amperes symmetrical interrupting capacity. 2.4.6 ac Input a. Voltage 480 volts line-to-line. SECTION 26 32 33.00 10 Page 8
W912HN-12-R-0003
b.
Number of phases:
3-phase, 3-wire, plus ground.
c. Voltage Range: Plus 10 percent, minus 15 percent, without affecting battery float voltage or output voltage. d. e. Frequency: 60 Hz, plus or minus 5 percent. 20 percent to 100 percent over 15 to 24 seconds.
Power walk-in:
f. Total harmonic current distortion (THD) reflected into the primary line: 6 percent maximum for a 100% load. g. 2.4.7 Transformer sub-cycle inrush: 4 to 8 times full load rating.
ac Output a. b. c. Voltage 208 volts line-to-line, 120 volts line-to-neutral. Number of phases: Voltage regulation: (1) Balanced load: Plus or minus 1.0 percent. Plus or minus 2 3-phase, 4-wire, plus ground.
(2) 50 percent load imbalance, phase-to-phase: percent. (3) No-load voltage modulation:
Plus or minus 1 percent.
(4) Voltage drift: Plus or minus 1 percent over any 30 day interval (or length of test) at stated ambient conditions. d. e. f. Voltage adjustment: Frequency: 60 Hz. Plus or minus 0.1 percent. Plus or minus 5 percent manually.
Frequency regulation:
g. Frequency drift: Plus or minus 0.1 percent over any 24 hour interval (or length of test) at stated ambient conditions when on internal oscillator. h. Harmonic content (RMS voltage): 3 percent single harmonic, maximum; 5 percent total maximum with linear load. Voltage THD shall be less than 7 percent with up to 50 percent nonlinear load and a crest factor of less than 3 to 1. i. j. Load power factor operating range: Phase displacement: (1) Balanced load: Plus or minus 1 degree of bypass input. Plus or minus 3 1.0 to 0.8 lagging.
(2) 50 percent load imbalance phase-to-phase: degrees of bypass input. k. Wave-form deviation factor:
5 percent at no load.
SECTION 26 32 33.00 10
Page 9
W912HN-12-R-0003
l.
Overload capability (at full voltage) (excluding battery): (1) (2) 125 percent load for 10 minutes. 150 percent load for 30 seconds.
(3) 300 percent load for one cycle after which it shall be current limited to 150 percent until fault is cleared or UPS goes to bypass. m. Load sharing of parallel modules: average load per module. 2.4.8 2.4.8.1 Transient Response Voltage Transients Plus or minus 8 Plus or minus 5 percent of
a. 50 percent load step/0 percent to 50 percent load: percent. b. 50 percent load step/50 percent to 100 percent load: 8 percent. c. d. Loss or return of ac input:
Plus or minus
Plus or minus 1 percent.
Loss or return of redundant module: (1) (2) Manually: Plus or minus 8 percent. Plus or minus 8 percent. Plus or minus 4
Automatically:
e. Automatic transfer of load from UPS to bypass: percent. f. Manual retransfer of load from bypass to UPS: percent.
Plus or minus 4
g. Response time: Recovery to 99 percent steady-state condition within 50 milliseconds after any of the above transients. 2.4.8.2 a. b. 2.4.9 Frequency Transients: Slew Rate: Plus or minus 0.5 Hz maximum. 1.0 Hz maximum per second.
Efficiency a. b. Minimum Single-Module Efficiency: Minimum System Efficiency: 90 percent at full load kW.
89 percent at full system load kW.
2.5 2.5.1
UPS MODULE General Description
UPS module shall consist of a rectifier/charger unit and a 3-phase inverter unit with their associated transformers, synchronizing equipment, protective devices and accessories as required for operation. SECTION 26 32 33.00 10 Page 10
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.5.2
Rectifier/Charger Unit
Rectifier/charger unit shall be solid state and shall provide direct current to the dc bus. 2.5.2.1 Input Protective Device
Rectifier/charger unit shall be provided with an input protective device. The protective device shall be sized to accept simultaneously the full-rated load and the battery recharge current. The protective device shall be capable of shunt tripping and shall have 30,000 amperes symmetrical interrupting capacity. The protective device shall have provision for locking in the "off" position. A surge suppression device shall be installed at the UPS input to protect against lightning and switching surges. 2.5.2.2 Power Transformer
A dry-type, isolated-winding power transformer shall be used for the rectifier unit and as necessary to step the input voltage down to the rated output voltage. It shall be K-13 rated for higher non-linear load losses as described in IEEE C57.110. The transformer's hottest spot winding temperature shall not exceed the temperature limit of the transformer insulation material when operating at full load. The transformer insulation shall be Class H, 150 degrees C rise. Transformer connections shall be accessible from the front. 2.5.2.3 Power Walk-In
Rectifier/charger unit shall be protected by a power walk-in feature such that when ac power is returned to the ac input bus, the total initial power requirement will not exceed 20 percent of the rated full load current. This demand shall increase gradually to 100 percent of the rated full load current plus the battery charging current over the specified time interval. 2.5.2.4 Sizing
Rectifier/charger unit shall be sized for the following two simultaneous operating conditions: a. Supplying the full rated load current to the inverter.
b. Recharging a fully-discharged battery to 95 percent of rated ampere-hour capacity within ten times the discharge time after normal ac power is restored, with the input protective device closed. 2.5.2.5 Battery Charging Current
a. Primary current limiting: Battery-charging current shall be voltage regulated and current limited. The battery-charging current limit shall be separately adjustable from 2 percent to 25 percent of the maximum discharge current. After the battery is recharged, the rectifier/charger unit shall maintain the battery at full float charge until the next operation under input power failure. Battery charger shall be capable of providing equalizing charge to the battery. b. Second step current limiting: The rectifier/charger unit shall also have a second-step battery current limit. This second-step SECTION 26 32 33.00 10 Page 11
W912HN-12-R-0003
current limit shall sense actual battery current and reduce the input power demand for battery recharging to 50 percent (adjustable from 30 percent to 70 percent) of the normal rate without affecting the system's ability to supply full-rated power to the connected load. The second-step current-limit circuit shall be activated by a dry contact signal from the generator set controls and shall prevent normal rate battery recharging until utility power is restored. 2.5.2.6 Output Filter
Rectifier/charger unit shall have an output filter to minimize ripple current supplied to the battery; the ripple current into the battery shall not exceed 3 percent RMS. 2.5.2.7 dc Voltage Adjustment
Rectifier/charger unit shall have manual means for adjusting dc voltage for battery equalization, to provide voltage within plus 10 percent of nominal float voltage. 2.5.2.8 Battery Isolation Protective Device isolate the module from the and interrupting rating shall incorporate a shunt trip as device shall have provision for
Module shall have a dc protective device to battery system. The protective device size be as required by system capacity and shall required by circuit design. The protective locking in the "off" position. 2.5.3 Inverter Unit
Inverter unit shall be a solid-state device capable of accepting power from the dc bus and providing ac power within specified limits. 2.5.3.1 Output Overload
The inverter shall be able to sustain an overload as specified across its output terminals. The inverter shall not shut off, but shall continue to operate within rated parameters, with inverse-time overload shutdown protection. 2.5.3.2 Synchronism
The inverter shall normally operate in phase-lock and synchronism with the bypass source. Should the bypass source frequency deviate beyond 60 Hz by more than 0.5 Hz, the internal frequency oscillators contained in the power module shall be used to derive the new frequency reference. Upon restoration of the bypass source within the required tolerance, the inverter shall resynchronize with that source at a slew rate not exceeding the specified rate. The oscillator shall be temperature compensated and shall be manually adjustable. The design of the oscillator and synchronizing circuits shall be such that failure of any associated component, connector pin, terminal lead wire or dc power source in either the open or shorted mode shall affect only one inverter leg. Such failure shall not cause transient disturbance of the critical load in excess of the stated limits. 2.5.3.3 Phase Balance
Electronic controls shall be incorporated to provide individual phase SECTION 26 32 33.00 10 Page 12
W912HN-12-R-0003
voltage compensation to obtain phase balance. 2.5.3.4 Modular Construction
Each control logic printed circuit board shall be electrically and physically packaged on an individual plug-in module with separate indication and adjustments. 2.5.3.5 Output Protective Device
The output protective device shall be capable of shunt tripping and shall have interrupting capacity as specified. Protective device shall have provision for locking in the "off" position. 2.5.3.6 Modular Inverter Isolation
Each inverter in the UPS system shall have fault sensing and static isolation as well as an output protective device, to remove a faulted module from the system without affecting the critical load bus beyond the stated limits. 2.5.4 External Protection
UPS module shall have built-in self-protection against undervoltage, overvoltage, overcurrent and surges introduced on the ac input source and/or the bypass source. The UPS system shall sustain input surges without damage in accordance with IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2. The UPS shall also have built-in self-protection against overvoltage and voltage surges introduced at the output terminals by paralleled sources, load switching, or circuit breaker operation in the critical load distribution system. 2.5.5 Internal Protection
UPS module shall be self-protected against overcurrent, sudden changes in output load and short circuits at the output terminals. UPS module shall be provided with output reverse power detection which shall cause that module to be disconnected from the critical load bus when output reverse power is present. UPS module shall have built-in protection against permanent damage to itself and the connected load for predictable types of failure within itself and the connected load. At the end of battery discharge limit, the module shall shut down without damage to internal components. 2.5.6 Parallel Operation
For parallel operation, the protection system shall have control logic capable of isolating only the faulted module, and shall not shut down the entire UPS system upon a fault in one module. Open protective devices shall be indicated by an alarm and indicator light. 2.6 STATIC BYPASS TRANSFER SWITCH
Provide a static bypass transfer switch as an integral part of the UPS consisting of a static switch and a bypass protective device or bypass switch. The control logic shall contain an automatic transfer circuit that senses the status of the inverter logic signals and alarm conditions and provides an uninterrupted transfer of the load to the bypass ac power source, without exceeding the transient limits specified herein, when a SECTION 26 32 33.00 10 Page 13
W912HN-12-R-0003
malfunction occurs in the UPS or when an external overload condition occurs. The power section of the static bypass transfer switch shall be provided as a plug-in type assembly to facilitate maintenance. The static bypass transfer switch shall be used to connect the bypass ac power source or the UPS inverter output to the critical load when required, and shall have the following features: 2.6.1 Uninterrupted Transfer
The static bypass transfer switch shall automatically cause the bypass ac power source to assume the critical load without interruption when the bypass control logic senses one of the following conditions and the UPS inverter output is synchronized to the bypass ac power source: a. b. c. 2.6.2 Inverter overload exceeds unit's rating. Battery protection period is expired and bypass is available. Inverter failure.
Interrupted Transfer
If an overload occurs and the UPS inverter output is not synchronized to the bypass ac power source, the UPS inverter output shall current-limit for 200 milliseconds minimum. The inverter shall then turn off and an interrupted transfer to the bypass ac power source shall be made. If the bypass ac power source is beyond the conditions stated below, an interrupted transfer shall be made upon detection of a fault condition: a. Bypass voltage greater than plus or minus 10 percent from the UPS rated output voltage. b. Bypass frequency greater than plus or minus 0.5 Hz from the UPS rated output frequency. c. Phase differential of ac bypass voltage to UPS output voltage greater than plus or minus 3 degrees. 2.6.3 Manual Transfer
It shall be possible to make a manually-initiated static transfer from the system status and control panel by turning the UPS inverter off. 2.6.4 Automatic Uninterrupted Forward Transfer
The static bypass transfer switch shall automatically forward transfer, without interruption after the UPS inverter is turned "on", or after an instantaneous overload-induced reverse transfer has occurred and the load current has returned to less than the unit's 100 percent rating. 2.6.5 Forced Transfer
The control logic circuitry shall provide the means of making a forced or reverse transfer of the static bypass transfer switch on an interrupted basis. Minimum interruption shall be 200 milliseconds when the UPS inverter is not synchronized to the bypass ac power source.
SECTION 26 32 33.00 10
Page 14
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.6.6
Overload Ratings
The static bypass transfer switch shall withstand the following overload conditions: a. b. c. 2.6.7 2000 percent of UPS output rating for two cycles. 200 percent of UPS output rating for 5 minutes. 125 percent of UPS output rating for 10 minutes.
Static Switch Disconnect
A static switch disconnect shall be incorporated to isolate the static bypass transfer switch assembly so it can be removed for servicing. The switch shall be equipped with auxiliary contacts and provision for padlocking in either the "on" or "off" position. 2.7 2.7.1 MAINTENANCE BYPASS SWITCH General
Provide a maintenance bypass switch as an integral part of the UPS located within the UPS module. The maintenance bypass switch shall provide the capability to continuously support the critical load from the bypass ac power source while the UPS is isolated for maintenance. The maintenance bypass switch shall be housed in an isolated compartment inside the UPS cabinet in such a way that service personnel will not be exposed to electrically live parts while maintaining the unit. Switch shall contain a maintenance bypass protective device and a module isolation protective device. 2.7.2 Load Transfer
The maintenance bypass switch shall provide the capability of transferring the critical load from the UPS static bypass transfer switch to maintenance bypass and then back to the UPS static bypass transfer switch with no interruption to the critical load. 2.7.3 Load Bank Protective Device
A load bank protective device shall be provided to allow the UPS system to be tested using a portable load bank. The load bank protective device shall be connected on the line side of the maintenance bypass switch isolation protective device. 2.8 MODULE CONTROL PANEL
The UPS module shall be provided with a control/indicator panel. The panel shall be on the front of the UPS module. Controls, meters, alarms and indicators for operation of the UPS module shall be on this panel. 2.8.1 2.8.1.1 Module Meters Monitored Functions
The following functions shall be monitored and displayed: a. Input voltage, phase-to-phase (all three phases). SECTION 26 32 33.00 10 Page 15
W912HN-12-R-0003
b. c. d. e.
Input current, all three phases. Input frequency. Battery voltage. Battery current (charge/discharge).
f. Output voltage, phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral (all three phases). g. h. i. j. Output current, all three phases. Output frequency. Output kilowatts. Elapsed time meter to indicate hours of operation, 6 digits.
k. Bypass voltage, phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral (all three phases). l. m. 2.8.1.2 Output kilovars. Output kilowatt hours, with 15-minute demand attachment. Meter Construction
Meters shall have 1 percent accuracy and shall be digital type (minimum 4 significant digits). 2.8.2 Module Controls
Module shall have the following controls: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. 2.8.3 Lamp test/reset pushbutton. Alarm test/reset pushbutton. Module input protective device trip pushbutton, with guard. Module output protective device trip pushbutton, with guard. Battery protective device trip pushbutton, with guard. Emergency off pushbutton, with guard. dc voltage adjustment potentiometer, with locking guard. Control power off switch. UPS/bypass transfer selector switch. Static bypass transfer switch enable/disable selector switch.
Module Alarm Indicators Any one of
Module shall have indicators for the following alarm items. SECTION 26 32 33.00 10 Page 16
W912HN-12-R-0003
these conditions shall turn on an audible alarm and the appropriate summary indicator. Each new alarm shall register without affecting any previous alarm. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q. r. s. t. u. v. w. x. y. z. aa. bb. Input ac power source failure. Input protective device open. Output protective device open. Overload. Overload shutdown. dc overvoltage. dc ground fault. Low battery. Battery discharged. Battery protective device open. Blower failure. Input transformer overtemperature. Inverter transformer overtemperature. Equipment overtemperature. Operating on internal oscillator. Fuse blown. Control power failure. Charger off. Inverter off. Emergency off. UPS on battery. Critical load on static bypass. Static bypass transfer switch disabled. Inverter output overvoltage. Inverter output undervoltage. Inverter output overfrequency. Inverter output underfrequency. Bypass source overvoltage. SECTION 26 32 33.00 10 Page 17
W912HN-12-R-0003
cc. dd. ee. ff. 2.8.4
Bypass source undervoltage. Bypass source overfrequency. Bypass source underfrequency. Bypass source to inverter out of synchronization.
Module Mimic Panel
UPS module shall have a mimic panel in the format of a module single-line diagram, with status indicators for input, output, battery protective devices, and battery disconnect switch. Each protective device shall have indicators for open (green) and closed (red), to give positive indication. The mimic panel shall provide indication of the following additional functions: a. b. c. d. 2.8.5 Charger on (functional). UPS on-line (inverter furnishing load power). UPS on-bypass (static switch operating). System alarm (flashes for abnormalities, minor or major faults).
Module Emergency Off Button
Pressing the emergency off button shall cause the affected module to be disconnected from the system, via its input protective device, output protective device, and battery protective device. Activation of this button shall not affect the operation of the remainder of the system. 2.9 2.9.1 SYSTEM CONTROL CABINET General Description
The multi-module UPS system shall be provided with a separate control cabinet for system output, summary monitoring, and control. This unit shall contain; bus bar connections to collect the output from each module, the static switch and its bypass breaker, the UPS system output protective device, and the UPS output switchgear. 2.9.2 UPS Output Switchgear of a main protective device feeding bus, a load bank protective device protective device), a maintenance feeder protective devices for the
The UPS output switchgear shall consist the UPS output switchgear critical load (connected on the line side of the main bypass protective device and associated critical loads. 2.9.2.1 Interlocking
The main protective device and the load bank protective device shall be interlocked to prevent both being closed at the same time. The maintenance bypass protective device shall be interlocked with the UPS system output protective device and the static bypass switch. The maintenance bypass protective device shall not be capable of closing until the static bypass switch is closed and the UPS system output protective device is open. Once SECTION 26 32 33.00 10 Page 18
W912HN-12-R-0003
the maintenance bypass protective device is closed, the UPS output switchgear main protective device shall be capable of opening to isolate the critical loads from the UPS output. The load bank protective device as well as the UPS system output protective device shall then be capable of closing to permit load bank testing. 2.9.3 System Control Panel
A separate control panel shall be provided for the overall UPS system. The panel shall be on the front surface of the system cabinet. The controls, meters, alarms and indicators for operation of the UPS system shall be on this panel. 2.9.3.1 System Meters
Meters shall have 1 percent accuracy and shall be digital type (minimum 4 significant digits). ac voltages shall be measured as true RMS voltages. The following functions shall be monitored: a. Output voltage, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground (all three phases). b. c. Output current, all three phases. Output frequency.
d. Bypass voltage, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground (all three phases). e. f. g. h. Output kilowatts. Output kilovars. Output kVA. Output kilowatt-hours, with demand attachment.
i. Maintenance bypass voltage, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground (all three phases). 2.9.3.2 System Controls
The system cabinet shall include the following controls: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Lamp test/reset. Alarm test/reset. Voltage adjustment potentiometer. Emergency off pushbutton with protective cover. UPS/bypass transfer selector switch. Static switch enable/disable selector switch. Control power off switch.
SECTION 26 32 33.00 10
Page 19
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.9.3.3
System Alarm Indicators
The system control panel shall contain indicators for the following additional alarm items. Any one of these alarm conditions shall also activate the audible alarm. Each new alarm shall register without affecting previous alarms. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q. 2.9.3.4 Module summary alarm, one for each UPS module. UPS on battery. Low battery voltage. Critical load on bypass. Static switch disable. Output overvoltage. Output undervoltage. Output overfrequency. Output underfrequency. Overload. Bypass source overvoltage. Bypass source undervoltage. Bypass source overfrequency. Bypass source underfrequency. Bypass source to inverter out of synchronization. Equipment overtemperature. Control power failure. System Mimic Panel
The system control panel shall contain a mimic panel in the format of a single-line diagram, with status indicators for the following items: a. Module on-line, one per UPS module.
b. UPS output protective device status, one for closed (red), one for open (green), and one for withdrawn (amber). c. Static bypass protective device status, one for closed (red), one for open (green), and one for withdrawn (amber). d. Static switch status, one for connected (red), and one for disconnected (green).
SECTION 26 32 33.00 10
Page 20
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.9.3.5
Emergency Off
Pressing the emergency off button shall cause the module input, output, and battery circuit breakers to open, completely isolating the UPS system from sources of power. The critical load shall be transferred to the bypass source when this occurs. 2.10 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC CIRCUITS
The control logic shall include status indicators for trouble-shooting the control circuits. These indicators shall be mounted on the circuit card edge or face such that they will be visible without repositioning the card, and shall be labeled with the function name. 2.11 REMOTE MONITORING PANEL The
A remote monitoring panel shall be provided to monitor system status. panel shall be designed for wall mounting near the critical load. 2.11.1 Indicators
Minimum display shall include the following indicators: a. b. c. d. e. Load on UPS. Load on battery. Load on bypass. Low battery. Summary alarm.
f. New alarm (to alert the operator that a second summary alarm condition has occurred). 2.11.2 Audible Alarm
Any single indicator shall also turn on the audible alarm. An audible alarm test/reset button and lamp test/reset button shall be included. This reset button shall not affect nor reset the alarm on the module or on the system cabinet. 2.12 COMMUNICATIONS AND DATA ACQUISITION PORT
An RS 232C communications and data acquisition port shall be provided. This port shall allow the system parameters, status, alarm indication and control panel functions specified to be remotely monitored and controlled. 2.13 2.13.1 TEMPERATURE CONTROL General
Cabinet and enclosure ventilation shall be adequate to ensure that components are operated within their ratings. Forced-air cooled rectifier, inverter, and control unit will be acceptable. The cooling fans shall continue operation if UPS input power is lost. Redundancy shall be provided so that failure of one fan or associated circuit breaker will not cause an overheat condition. Cooling air shall enter the lower front of SECTION 26 32 33.00 10 Page 21
W912HN-12-R-0003
the cabinets and exhaust at the top. Blower power failure shall be indicated as a visual and audible alarm on the control panel. Air inlets shall have filters that can be replaced without opening the cabinet doors. 2.13.2 Blower Power Source
Blower power source shall be internally derived from the input and output sides of UPS module, with automatic transfer arrangement. 2.13.3 Temperature Sensors
Temperature sensors shall be provided to monitor the air temperature. Separate sensors shall monitor the temperature of rectifier and inverter heat sinks. Separate sensors shall also monitor the transformer temperature. Critical equipment overtemperature indication shall start a timer that shall shut down the UPS system if the temperature does not return below the setpoint level in time period as determined by the facility. 2.14 2.14.1 BATTERY SYSTEM General
A storage battery with sufficient ampere-hour rating to maintain UPS output at full capacity for the specified duration shall be provided for each UPS module. The battery shall be of heavy-duty, industrial design suitable for UPS service. The cells shall be provided with flame arrestor vents, intercell connectors and cables, cell-lifting straps, cell-numbering sets, and terminal grease. Intercell connectors shall be sized to maintain terminal voltage within voltage window limits when supplying full load under power failure conditions. Cell and connector hardware shall be stainless steel of a type capable of resisting corrosion from the electrolyte used. 2.14.2 a. b. c. d. e. 2.14.3 Battery Ratings Type: Valve Regulated Lead Acid (VRLA). 1.215.
Specific gravity when fully charged: End voltage 1.67 volts per cell. Float voltage:
2.17 to 2.26 volts per cell. 2.33 to 2.38 volts per cell.
Equalizing voltage: Battery Construction
The battery shall be of the valve-regulated, sealed, non-gassing, recombinant type. It shall be of modular construction made up of Owner-replaceable, hot-swappable, fused, battery modules. Each battery module shall be monitored for voltage and temperature for use by the UPS battery diagnostic, and temperature compensated charger circuitry. The UPS system shall incorporate a battery management system to continuously monitor the health of each removable battery module. This system shall notify the Owner in the event that a failed or weak battery module is found.
SECTION 26 32 33.00 10
Page 22
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.14.4
Battery Cabinet
The battery pack assembly shall be furnished in a battery cabinet matching the UPS cabinet. The battery cabinet shall be designed to allow for checking the torque on the connections in the battery system and to provide adequate access for annual housekeeping chores. External wiring interface shall be through the bottom or top of the assembly. A smoke and high temperature alarm shall annunciate detection of either smoke or high temperature within the battery cabinet. 2.14.5 Battery Disconnect
Each battery pack assembly shall have a fused disconnect switch provided in a NEMA 1 enclosure, finished with acid-resistant paint and located in line with the assembly. Switch shall be complete with line side and load side bus bars for connection to battery cells. Switch shall be rated 2 X 250V dc, 2 X 250 amperes, 3-pole with interrupting rating as required by system capacity, and shall have an external operator that is lockable in the "off" position. 2.14.6 Seismic Requirements
The battery support system shall conform to UFC 3-310-04 SEISMIC DESIGN FOR BUILDINGS and Sections 13 48 00 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT, 13 48 00.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT, AND 26 05 48.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT . 2.14.7 Battery Monitor At a
A battery monitor shall be provided for each battery pack assembly. minimum, this device shall monitor the following parameters: a. b. Total system voltage. Ambient room temperature.
c. Total battery discharge cycles with a duration of greater than 30 seconds but less than 5 minutes. The monitor shall also record the total accumulated discharge minutes and accumulated battery system discharge kW hours. 2.15 FACTORY TESTING
The UPS system shall be factory tested to meet the requirements specified using a test battery (not the battery to be supplied with the system). UPS module shall be factory load tested as an independent assembly with 3-phase ac input power and with battery power for a minimum of 8 hours, with meter readings taken every 30 minutes. Load shall be balanced at rated kVA and rated power factor. Factory tests for the UPS module shall be run under full load, and will be witnessed by the Government. Should a malfunction occur, the problem shall be corrected and the test shall be repeated. As a minimum, the factory tests shall include the parameters described in paragraphs ac Input, ac Output, Transient Response and Efficiency. The tests shall encompass all aspects of operation, such as module failure, static bypass operation, battery failure, input power failure and overload ratings. Notify the Government in writing at least 2 weeks before testing. Factory-test time shall not be used for system debugging and/or checkout. Such work shall be done prior to notifying the Government that SECTION 26 32 33.00 10 Page 23
W912HN-12-R-0003
the system is ready for testing. Factory tests shall be performed during normal business hours. The system shall be interconnected and tested for an additional 8 hours to ensure proper wiring and performance. 2.15.1 Transient Tests
Transient tests shall be conducted using high-speed oscillograph type recorders to demonstrate the operation of the components to the satisfaction of the Government. These tests shall include 50 percent to 100 percent load changes, manual transfer, manual retransfer, low dc bus initiated transfer and low ac output bus transfer. A recording instrument equipped with an event marker shall be used. 2.15.2 Efficiency Tests
Testing for efficiency shall be performed at zero output up to 100 percent of stated kVA output in 25 percent steps, 1.0 power factor, with battery fully charged and floating on the dc bus, with nominal input voltage, and with modules connected to the system to represent actual operating conditions. 2.16 INSPECTION
Inspection before shipment is required. The manufacturer shall notify the Government at least 2 weeks before shipping date so that an inspection can be made. PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION EXAMINATION
After becoming familiar with details of the work, verify dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing the work. 3.2 INSTALLATION
The UPS system shall be set in place, wired and connected in accordance with the approved shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions. The UPS battery shall be shipped to the site dry. 3.3 FIELD SUPERVISION, STARTUP AND TESTING
The services of a manufacturer's representative who is experienced in the installation, adjustment, and operation of the equipment specified shall be provided. The representative shall supervise the installation, adjustment and testing of the equipment. The representative shall check the wiring between equipment, start up the system, and field test the functions, interlocks and protective devices to ensure that the total system is functioning according to the intent of the design. The field tests shall be performed under the supervision of a factory-trained representative of the equipment manufacturer and witnessed by the Government. The Government shall be given 2 weeks written advance notice of the date and time when testing will be conducted. 3.3.1 Field Tests
As a minimum, the startup and field test procedures shall include the following: SECTION 26 32 33.00 10 Page 24
W912HN-12-R-0003
a.
Ensure that shipping members have been removed.
b. Check for damage (dents, scratches, frame misalignment, damage to panel devices, etc). c. Ensure that interiors are free of foreign materials, tools and dirt.
d. Attach a phase rotation meter to the UPS input, output and bypass buses, and observe proper phase sequences. e. Torque test bus connections at shipping splits. battery connections. f. g. h. Also torque test
Check each electrical bus for proper phasing and identification. Check and test selector switches and meters for proper operation. Check doors for proper alignment and operation.
i. Check and test each protective device for proper mechanical and electrical operation. j. k. l. Check protective device overcurrent trip settings. Check and test indicating lights for proper operation and color. Perform onsite field test procedures.
m. Demonstrate to the Government that the specified functions and interlocks have been implemented. n. Provide IEEE Std 450 battery installation certification.
o. Check key interlock key numbers, if used, to ensure agreement with interlocking scheme. 3.3.2 Load Test a continuous 24 hour period shall be continuously tested and full load for 8 hours. be connected to UPS equipment be recorded every half hour
The installed system shall be load tested for by means of resistive load banks. The system at 1/2 load for 8 hours, 3/4 load for 8 hours Load banks will be available onsite and shall by the Contractor. Instrument readings shall for the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
Input voltage (all three phases, for each module). Input current (all three phases, for each module). Input frequency. Battery voltage for each module. Output voltage (all three phases, for each module). Output current (all three phases, for each module). Output kilowatts for each module. SECTION 26 32 33.00 10 Page 25
W912HN-12-R-0003
h. i. j. k. 3.3.3
Output frequency. Output voltage (all three phases - system output). Output current (all three phases - system output). Output kilowatts (system output).
Full Load Burn In Test
The installed system shall undergo an additional full load burn-in period of 24 continuous hours. If a failure occurs during the burn-in period, the tests shall be repeated. Instrument readings shall be recorded every half hour as above. During the burn-in period, the following tests shall be performed: a. With the UPS carrying maximum continuous design load and supplied from the normal source, switch 100 percent load on and off a minimum of five times within the burn-in period. b. With from the step a. into the the UPS carrying maximum continuous design load and supplied emergency source, repeat the switching operations described in Also, verify that the UPS module rectifier charger unit(s) go second-step current limit mode.
c. With the UPS carrying maximum continuous design load and operating on battery power, repeat the switching operations described in step a above. d. Continue operation on battery power for 1 minute, then restore normal power. Furnish a high-speed dual trace oscillograph to monitor ten or more cycles of the above tests at the ON and OFF transitions and two typical steady-state periods, one shortly after the load is energized (at 30 to 60 seconds) and one after operation has stabilized (at 8 to 10 minutes). Four copies of the traces shall be delivered to the Contracting Officer. 3.3.4 Battery Discharge Test
With the battery fully charged, the system shall undergo a complete battery discharge test to full depletion and a recharge to nominal conditions. Instrument readings shall be recorded every minute during discharge for the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Battery voltage for each module. Battery current for each module. Output voltage (all three phases) for each module. Output current (all three phases) for each module. Output kilowatts for each module. Output voltage (all three phases - system output). Output current (all three phases - system output). SECTION 26 32 33.00 10 Page 26
W912HN-12-R-0003
h. i. 3.4
Output kilowatts (system output). Output frequency.
POSTING FRAMED DATA AND INSTRUCTIONS
Framed data and instructions containing wiring and control diagrams under glass or in laminated plastic shall be posted where directed. Condensed operating instructions, prepared in typed form, shall be framed as specified above and posted beside the diagrams. The framed instructions shall be posted before acceptance testing of the system. 3.5 FIELD TRAINING
Provide a field training course, for designated operating and maintenance staff members, for a total period of 12 hours of normal working time starting after the system is functionally complete but prior to final acceptance test. Field training shall cover the items contained in the operating and maintenance manuals. Divide the 12 hours into two sessions of 6 hours each. Each session shall be conducted on a different day. Field training shall be videotaped and the tape shall be left with the Contracting Officer.
SECTION 26 32 33.00 10
Page 27
W912HN-12-R-0003
UPS SYSTEM PERFORMANCE DATA SHEET SHEET 1 OF 6 _______________________________________________________________________________ ITEM SPECIFIED SUBMITTED _______________________________________________________________________________ SYSTEM OPERATION PARALLEL REDUNDANT _______________________________________________________________________________ NUMBER OF SYSTEMS 1 _______________________________________________________________________________ G NUMBER OF MODULES PRESENT 6+1 E IN EACH SYSTEM FUTURE 2 N _________________________________________________________________ E SYSTEM CAPACITY: R PRESENT 60 kW/60 kVA A FUTURE 80 kW/80 kVA, N+1 L _________________________________________________________________ BATTERY ONE PER MODULE _________________________________________________________________ MTBF (SYSTEM) _________________________________________________________________ MTTR _________________________________________________________________ MODULE RATING 10 kW/10 kVA M _________________________________________________________________ O DC VOLTAGE WINDOW 2 X 205-230 Vdc D _________________________________________________________________ U INPUT/OUTPUT L PROTECTIVE DEVICE 30,000 A SYM. E INTERRUPT. RATING _______________________________________________________________________________ MANUFACTURER __________ _________________________________________________________________ TYPE LEAD-CALCIUM
B A T T E R Y
_________________________________________________________________ DISCHARGE TIME TO END VOLTAGE AT 15 MINUTES FULL LOAD _________________________________________________________________ END VOLTAGE 1.67 V/CELL _________________________________________________________________ SPECIFIC GRAVITY 1.215 _________________________________________________________________ FLOAT VOLTAGE 2.17 to 2.26 V/CELL _________________________________________________________________
SECTION 26 32 33.00 10
Page 28
W912HN-12-R-0003
______________________________________________________________________________ UPS SYSTEM PERFORMANCE DATA SHEET SHEET 2 OF 6
______________________________________________________________________________ ITEM SPECIFIED SUBMITTED ______________________________________________________________________________ B HYDROGEN A GENERATION ___________ T _________________________________________________________________ T RECHARGE TIME TO 95 percent CAPACITY 10 X DISCHARGE _______________________________________________________________________________ S C PROTECTIVE DEVICE Circuit Breaker Y A _________________________________________________________________ S B MANUFACTURER ____________ T I _________________________________________________________________ E N INTERRUPTING RATE 30,000 A SYM. M E _________________________________________________________________ T STATIC SWITCH 300 A _______________________________________________________________________________ VOLTS, LINE/LINE 480 V _________________________________________________________________ PHASES 3-PHASE, 3-WIRE _________________________________________________________________ A VOLTAGE RANGE + 10 percent, - 15 percent C _________________________________________________________________ FREQUENCY 60 Hz I _________________________________________________________________ N FREQUENCY RANGE +/- 5 percent P _________________________________________________________________ U POWER WALK-IN T 20 TO 100 percent LOAD 15 - 24 SECONDS _________________________________________________________________ TOTAL HARMONIC DISTORTION 5 percent MAX (CURRENT) REFLECTED-PRIMARY _________________________________________________________________ ORDER OF HARMONIC ______ PERCENTAGE OF TOTAL 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th (FILL IN AS REQUIRED) _________________________________________________________________ TRANSFORMER SUBCYCLE INRUSH 6 x FULL LOAD _________________________________________________________________ POWER FACTOR 1.0 _______________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________ SECTION 26 32 33.00 10 Page 29
W912HN-12-R-0003
UPS SYSTEM PERFORMANCE DATA SHEET SHEET 3 OF 6 _______________________________________________________________________________ ITEM SPECIFIED SUBMITTED _______________________________________________________________________________ VOLTAGE, LINE-LINE 208/120 V _________________________________________________________________ PHASES 3-PHASE, 4-WIRE _________________________________________________________________ POWER FACTOR 1.0 _________________________________________________________________ VOLTAGE REGULATION BALANCED LOAD +/- 1.0 percent ______________________________________________ 50 percent IMBALANCE +/- 2.0 percent BETWEEN PHASES ______________________________________________ NO-LOAD MODULATION
A C O U T P U T
+/- 1.0 percent ______________________________________________ DRIFT (30 DAYS) +/- 1.0 percent _________________________________________________________________ VOLTAGE ADJUST. +/- 5.0 percent MANUALLY _________________________________________________________________ FREQUENCY 60 Hz _________________________________________________________________ REGULATION +/- 0.1 percent ______________________________________________ DRIFT (24 HRS.) +/- 0.1 percent _________________________________________________________________ HARMONIC CONTENT TOTAL (50% NON-LINEAR LOAD) 7.0 percent MAX. TOTAL (LINEAR LOAD) 5.0 percent MAX. SINGLE HARMONIC (LINEAR LOAD) 3.0 percent MAX. _________________________________________________________________ PHASE DISPLACEMENT BALANCED LOAD
+/- 1.0 DEG. OF BYPASS ______________________________________________ 50 percent IMBALANCE +/- 3.0 DEG. OF BYPASS _________________________________________________________________ WAVE FORM DEVIATION FACTOR 5.0 perent (NO LOAD) _________________________________________________________________ OVERLOAD CAPACITY 125 percent 10 MINUTES ______________________________________________ 150 percent 30 SECONDS ______________________________________________ 300 percent MOMENTARY _______________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 26 32 33.00 10
Page 30
W912HN-12-R-0003
_______________________________________________________________________________ UPS SYSTEM PERFORMANCE DATA SHEET SHEET 4 OF 6 _______________________________________________________________________________ ITEM SPECIFIED SUBMITTED _______________________________________________________________________________ LOAD SHARING +/- 5.0 percent OF AVERAGE LOAD AMONG MODULES _________________________________________________________________ VOLT. TRANSIENT RESPONSE 50% STEP LOAD 0 to 50 percent 50% STEP LOAD 50 to 100% LOSS OR RETURN OF INPUT LOSS OR RETURN OF A REDUNDANT MODULE AUTOMATICALLY MANUALLY A C O U T P U T AUTO TRANSFER, AT FULL LOAD, FROM UPS TO BYPASS MANUAL TRANSFER, AT FULL LOAD, FROM BYPASS TO UPS RECOVERY TIME TO 99% STEADYSTATE COND.
+/- 8.0 percent ______________________________________________ +/- 8.0 percent ______________________________________________ +/- 1.0 percent ______________________________________________
+/- 8.0 percent ______________________________________________ +/- 8.0 percent ______________________________________________
+/- 4.0 percent ______________________________________________
+/- 4.0 percent ______________________________________________
50 MILLISECONDS ______________________________________________
FREQUENCY TRANS+/- 0.5 Hz IENT RESPONSE _________________________________________________________________ SLEW RATE 1.0 Hz/SECOND _______________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 26 32 33.00 10
Page 31
W912HN-12-R-0003
_______________________________________________________________________________ UPS SYSTEM PERFORMANCE DATA SHEET SHEET 5 OF 6 _______________________________________________________________________________ ITEM SPECIFIED SUBMITTED _______________________________________________________________________________ A O C U EFFICIENCY @ FULL T LOAD P MODULE 90 percent U ______________________________________________ T SYSTEM 90 percent _______________________________________________________________________________ SYSTEM NOISE GEN. LEVEL @ 6 FT. FROM EQUIPMENT 71 DBA _________________________________________________________________ OPERATING AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 32 to 104 DEG. F _________________________________________________________________ STORAGE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE -4 to +140 DEG. F. _________________________________________________________________ E BATTERY ROOM N AMBIENT TEMP. 77 DEG. F NOMINAL V _________________________________________________________________ I RELATIVE HUMIDITY R (NON-CONDENSING) 0 - 95 percent O _________________________________________________________________ N BAROMETRIC PRESM SURE (ALTITUDE) E N OPERATING 0 - 10,000 FT. T A NON-OPERATING 0 - 40,000 FT. L _________________________________________________________________ HEAT REJECTION ______ MODULE SYSTEM _______________________________________________________________________________ P H MODULE ______ Y S SIZE I WEIGHT C _________________________________________________________________ A L SYSTEM CABINET ______ D A T A SIZE WEIGHT
SECTION 26 32 33.00 10
Page 32
W912HN-12-R-0003
____________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________ UPS SYSTEM PERFORMANCE DATA SHEET SHEET 6 OF 6 _______________________________________________________________________________ ITEM SPECIFIED SUBMITTED _______________________________________________________________________________ P D H A Y T BATTERY ______ S A I SEISMIC PARAMETERS C RACKS SIZE A WEIGHT L CELLS SIZE WEIGHT DISCON- SIZE NECT WEIGHT _______________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________ -- End of Section --
SECTION 26 32 33.00 10
Page 33
W912HN-12-R-0003
SECTION 26 41 01.00 10 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM PART 1 1.1 GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE) IEEE C135.30 (1988) Zinc-Coated Ferrous Ground Rods for Overhead or Underground Line Construction
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) NFPA 70 (2011; TIA 11-1; Errata 2011; TIA 11-2; TIA 11-3; TIA 11-4) National Electrical Code (2007) Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) UL 467 UL 96 (2007) Grounding and Bonding Equipment (2005) Standard for Lightning Protection Components (2007) Standard for Installation Requirements for Lightning Protection Systems (2009) Electrical Construction Equipment Directory
NFPA 780
UL 96A
UL Electrical Constructn
1.2
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-02 Shop Drawings Detail Drawings Detail drawings, as specified. SD-07 Certificates UL Master Label Certification
SECTION 26 41 01.00 10
Page 1
W912HN-12-R-0003
Materials Proof of compliance with requirements of UL, where material or equipment is specified to comply. The label of or listing in UL Electrical Constructn will be acceptable evidence. In lieu of the label or listing, a written certificate from an approved nationally recognized testing organization equipped to perform such services, stating that the items have been tested and conform to the requirements and testing methods of Underwriters Laboratories may be submitted. Submit a letter of findings certifying UL inspection of lightning protection systems provided. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Submit detail drawings consisting of a complete list of material, including manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature, catalog cuts, drawings, and installation instructions. Detail drawings shall demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will function as a unit. Drawings shall show proposed layout and mounting and relationship to other parts of the work. PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS STANDARD PRODUCTS
Proide a system consisting of the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of lightning protection systems and which is the manufacturer's latest UL approved design. The lightning protection system shall conform to NFPA 70 and NFPA 780, UL 96 and UL 96A, except where requirements in excess thereof are specified herein. The system shall be a UL Master Labeled system. 2.2 2.2.1 MATERIALS General Requirements
Do not use any combination of materials that form an electrolytic couple of such nature that corrosion is accelerated in the presence of moisture, unless moisture is permanently excluded from the junction of such metals. Where unusual conditions exist, which would cause corrosion of conductors, use conductors with protective coatings or oversize conductors. Where a mechanical hazard is involved, increase the conductor size to compensate for the hazard or protect the conductors by covering them with molding or tubing made of wood or nonmagnetic material. When metallic conduit or tubing is used, the conductor shall be electrically connected at the upper and lower ends. 2.2.2 Main and Secondary Conductors
Conductors shall be in accordance with NFPA 780 and UL 96 for Class I, Class II, or Class II modified materials as applicable. 2.2.2.1 Copper
Copper conductors used on nonmetallic stacks shall weigh not less than 375 pounds/thousand feet, and the size of any wire in the cable shall be not less than No. 15 AWG. The thickness of any web or ribbon used on stacks shall be not less than No. 12 AWG. Counterpoise shall be copper conductors not smaller than No. 1/0 AWG. SECTION 26 41 01.00 10 Page 2
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.2.2.2
Aluminum
Aluminum shall not contact the earth nor shall it be used in any other manner that will contribute to rapid deterioration of the metal. Appropriate precautions shall be observed at connections with dissimilar metals. Aluminum conductors for bonding and interconnecting metallic bodies to the main cable shall be at least equivalent to strength and cross-sectional area of a No. 4 AWG aluminum wire. When perforated strips are provided, strips that are much wider than solid strips shall be. A strip width that is at least twice that of the diameter of the perforations shall be used. Aluminum strip for connecting exposed water pipes shall be not less than No. 12 AWG in thickness and at least 1-1/2 inch wide. 2.2.3 Air Terminals
Terminals shall be in accordance with UL 96 and NFPA 780. The tip of air terminals on buildings used for manufacturing, processing, handling, or storing explosives, ammunition, or explosive ingredients shall be a minimum of 2 feet above the ridge parapet, ventilator or perimeter. On open or hooded vents emitting explosive dusts or vapors under natural or forced draft, air terminals shall be a minimum of 5 feet above the opening. On open stacks emitting explosive dusts, gases, or vapor under forced draft, air terminals shall extend a minimum of 15 feet above vent opening. Air terminals more than 24 inch in length shall be supported by a suitable brace, with guides not less than one-half the height of the terminal. 2.2.4 Ground Rods
Rods made of copper-clad steel shall conform to UL 467 and galvanized ferrous rods shall conform to IEEE C135.30. Ground rods shall be not less than 3/4 inch in diameter and 10 feet in length. Ground rods of copper-clad steel, stainless steel, galvanized ferrous, and solid copper shall not be mixed on the job. 2.2.5 Connectors
Clamp-type connectors for splicing conductors shall conform to UL 96, class as applicable, and, Class 2, style and size as required for the installation. Clamp-type connectors shall only be used for the connection of the roof conductor to the air terminal and to the guttering. All other connections, bonds and splices shall be done by exothermic welds or high compression fittings. The exothermic welds and high compression fittings shall be listed for the purpose. Use only exothermic welds for underground or non-accessible connections, with the exception of test wells which must be easily removable. The high compression fittings shall be the type which require a hydraulically operated mechanism to apply a minimum of 10,000 psi. 2.2.6 Lightning Protection Components
Lightning protection components, such as bonding plates, air terminal supports, chimney bands, clips, and fasteners shall conform to UL 96, classes as applicable. PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION EXAMINATION
After becoming familiar with all details of the work, verify all dimensions SECTION 26 41 01.00 10 Page 3
W912HN-12-R-0003
in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing the work. No departures shall be made without the prior approval of the Contracting Officer. 3.2 3.2.1 INTEGRAL SYSTEM General Requirements
Provide a lightning protection system consisting of air terminals, roof conductors, down conductors, ground connections, and grounds, electrically interconnected to form the shortest distance to ground. All conductors on the structures shall be exposed except that down conductors shall be concealed in protective sleeves hidden in the outside walls. Secondary conductors shall interconnect with grounded metallic parts within the building. Interconnections made within side-flash distances shall be at or above the level of the grounded metallic parts. 3.2.1.1 Air Terminals
Air terminal design and support shall be in accordance with NFPA 780. Terminals shall be rigidly connected to, and made electrically continuous with, roof conductors by means of pressure connectors or crimped joints of T-shaped malleable metal and connected to the air terminal by a dowel or threaded fitting. Air terminals at the ends of the structure shall be set not more than 2 feet from the ends of the ridge or edges and corners of roofs. Spacing of air terminals 2 feet in height on ridges, parapets, and around the perimeter of buildings with flat roofs shall not exceed 25 feet. In specific instances where it is necessary to exceed this spacing, the specified height of air terminals shall be increased not less than 2 inch for each foot of increase over 25 feet. On large, flat or gently sloping roofs, as defined in NFPA 780, air terminals shall be placed at points of the intersection of imaginary lines dividing the surface into rectangles having sides not exceeding 50 feet in length. Air terminals shall be secured against overturning either by attachment to the object to be protected or by means of a substantial tripod or other braces permanently and rigidly attached to the building or structure. Metal projections and metal parts of buildings, smokestacks, and other metal objects that do not contain hazardous materials and that may be struck but not appreciably damaged by lightning, need not be provided with air terminals. However, these metal objects shall be bonded to the lightning conductor through a metal conductor of the same unit weight per length as the main conductor. Where metal ventilators are installed, air terminals shall be mounted thereon, where practicable. Any air terminal erected by necessity adjacent to a metal ventilator shall be bonded to the ventilator near the top and bottom. Where metal ventilators are installed with air terminals mounted thereon, the air terminal shall not be more than 24 inch away from the farther edge or corner. If the air terminal is farther than this distance, an additional air terminal shall be added in order to meet this requirement. Where metal ventilators are installed with air terminals mounted adjacent, the air terminal shall not be more than 24 inches away from the farther edge or corner. If the air terminal is farther than this distance, an additional air terminal shall be added in order to meet this requirement. 3.2.1.2 Roof Conductors
Roof conductors shall be connected directly to the roof or ridge roll. Sharp bends or turns in conductors shall be avoided. Necessary turns shall have a radius of not less than 8 inch. Conductors shall preserve a SECTION 26 41 01.00 10 Page 4
W912HN-12-R-0003
downward or horizontal course and shall be rigidly fastened every 3 feet along the roof and down the building to ground. Metal ventilators shall be rigidly connected to the roof conductor at three places. All connections shall be electrically continuous. Roof conductors shall be coursed along the contours of flat roofs, ridges, parapets, and edges; and where necessary, over flat surfaces, in such a way as to join each air terminal to all the rest. Roof conductors surrounding tank tops, decks, flat surfaces, and flat roofs shall be connected to form a closed loop. 3.2.1.3 Down Conductors
Down conductors shall be electrically continuous from air terminals and roof conductors to grounding electrodes. Down conductors shall be coursed over extreme outer portions of the building, such as corners, with consideration given to the location of ground connections and air terminals. Each building or structure shall have not less than two down conductors located as widely separated as practicable, at diagonally opposite corners. On rectangular structures having gable, hip, or gambrel roofs more than 110 feet long, there shall be at least one additional down conductor for each additional 50 feet of length or fraction thereof. On rectangular structures having French, flat, or sawtooth roofs exceeding 250 feet in perimeter, there shall be at least one additional down conductor for each 100 feet of perimeter or fraction thereof. On an L- or T-shaped structure, there shall be at least one additional down conductor; on an H-shaped structure, at least two additional down conductors; and on a wing-built structure, at least one additional down conductor for each wing. On irregularly shaped structures, the total number of down conductors shall be sufficient to make the average distance between them along the perimeter not greater than 100 feet. On structures exceeding 50 feet in height, there shall be at least one additional down conductor for each additional 60 feet of height or fraction thereof, except that this application shall not cause down conductors to be placed about the perimeter of the structure at intervals of less than 50 feet. Additional down conductors shall be installed when necessary to avoid "dead ends" or branch conductors ending at air terminals, except where the air terminal is on a roof below the main protected level and the "dead end" or branch conductor is less than 16 feet in length and maintains a horizontal or downward coursing. Down conductors shall be equally and symmetrically spaced about the perimeter of the structure. Down conductors shall be protected by placing in pvc conduit for a minimum distance of 72 inch above finished grade level. 3.2.1.4 Interconnection of Metallic Parts
Metal doors, windows, and gutters shall be connected directly to the grounds or down conductors using not smaller than No. 6 copper conductor, or equivalent. Conductors placed where there is probability of unusual wear, mechanical injury, or corrosion shall be of greater electrical capacity than would normally be used, or shall be protected. The ground connection to metal doors and windows shall be by means of mechanical ties under pressure, or equivalent. 3.2.1.5 Ground Connections
Ground connections comprising continuations of down conductors from the structure to the grounding electrode shall securely connect the down conductor and ground in a manner to ensure electrical continuity between the two. All connections shall be of the clamp type. There shall be a ground connection for each down conductor. Metal water pipes and other SECTION 26 41 01.00 10 Page 5
W912HN-12-R-0003
large underground metallic objects shall be bonded together with all grounding mediums. Ground connections shall be protected from mechanical injury. In making ground connections, advantage shall be taken of all permanently moist places where practicable, although such places shall be avoided if the area is wet with waste water that contains chemical substances, especially those corrosive to metal. 3.2.1.6 Grounding Electrodes
A grounding electrode shall be provided for each down conductor located as shown. A driven ground shall extend into the earth for a distance of not less than 10 feet. Ground rods shall be set not less than 3 feet, nor more than 8 feet, from the structures foundation. Provide a counterpoise, consisting of No. 1/0 copper cable or equivalent material having suitable resistance to corrosion, laid around the perimeter of the structure in a trench not less than 2 feet deep at a distance not less than 3 feet nor more than 8 feet from the nearest point of the structure. All connections between ground connectors and grounds or counterpoise, and between counterpoise and grounds shall be electrically continuous. The complete installation shall have a total resistance to ground of not more than 25 ohms. Ground rods shall be tested individually prior to connection to the system and the system as a whole shall be tested not less than 48 hours after rainfall. When the resistance of the complete installation exceeds the specified value or two ground rods individually exceed 25 ohms, the Contracting Officer shall be notified immediately. 3.2.2 Metal Roofs
Wood-Frame, Wall-Bearing Masonry or Tile Structure with Metallic Roof and Nonmetallic Exterior Walls, or Reinforced Concrete Building with Metallic Roof: Metal roofs which are in the form of sections insulated from each other shall be made electrically continuous by bonding. Air terminals shall be connected to, and made electrically continuous with, the metal roof as well as the roof conductors and down conductors. Ridge cables and roof conductors shall be bonded to the roof at the upper and lower edges of the roof and at intervals not to exceed 100 feet. The down conductors shall be bonded to roof conductors and to the lower edge of the metal roof. Where the metal of the roof is in small sections, the air terminals and down conductors shall have connections made to at least four of the sections. All connections shall have electrical continuity and have a surface contact of at least 3 square inch. 3.2.3 Metal Roofs With Metal Walls
Wood-Frame Building With Metal Roof and Metal Exterior Walls: The metal roof and the metal walls shall be bonded and made electrically continuous and considered as one unit. The air terminals shall be connected to and made electrically continuous with the metal roof as well as the roof and down conductors. All connections shall have electrical continuity and have a surface contact of at least 3 square inch. 3.2.4 Steel Frame Building
The steel framework shall be made electrically continuous. Electrical continuity may be provided by bolting, riveting, or welding steel frame, unless a specific method is noted on the drawings. The air terminals shall be connected to the structural steel framework at the ridge. Short runs of conductors shall be used as necessary to join air terminals to the metal framework so that proper placing of air terminals is maintained. Separate SECTION 26 41 01.00 10 Page 6
W912HN-12-R-0003
down conductors from air terminals to ground connections are not required. Where a grounded metal pipe water system enters the building, the structural steel framework and the water system shall be connected at the point of entrance by a ground connector. Connections to pipes shall be by means of ground clamps with lugs. Connections to structural framework shall be by means of nut and bolt or welding. All connections between columns and ground connections shall be made at the bottom of the steel columns. Ground connections to grounding electrons or counterpoise shall be run from not less than one-half of all the columns distributed equally around the perimeter of the structure at intervals averaging not more than 60 feet. 3.2.5 Ramps
Lightning protection for covered ramps (connecting passageways) shall conform to the requirements for lightning protection systems for buildings of similar construction. A down conductor and a driven ground shall be placed at one of the corners where the ramp connects to each building or structure. This down conductor and driven ground shall be connected to the counterpoise or nearest ground connection of the building or structure. Where buildings or structures and connecting ramps are clad with metal, the metal of the buildings or structures and metal of the ramp shall be connected to ensure electrical continuity, in order to avoid the possibility of a flash-over or spark due to a difference in potential. 3.3 INTERCONNECTION OF METAL BODIES
Metal bodies of conductance shall be protected if not within the zone of protection of an air terminal. Metal bodies of conductance having an area of 400 square inch or greater or a volume of 1000 cubic inch or greater shall be bonded to the lightning protection system using main size conductors and a bonding plate having a surface contact area of not less than 3 square inch. Provisions shall be made to guard against the corrosive effect of bonding dissimilar metals. Metal bodies of inductance shall be bonded at their closest point to the lightning protection system using secondary bonding conductors and fittings. A metal body that exceeds 5 feet in any dimension, that is situated wholly within a building, and that does not at any point come within 6 feet of a lightning conductor or metal connected thereto shall be independently grounded. 3.4 FENCES
Except as indicated below, metal fences that are electrically continuous with metal posts extending at least 2 feet into the ground require no additional grounding. Other fences shall be grounded on each side of every gate. Fences shall be grounded by means of ground rods every 1000 to 1500 feet of length when fences are located in isolated places, and every 500 to 750 feet when in proximity ( 100 feet or less) to public roads, highways, and buildings. The connection to ground shall be made from the post where it is of metal and is electrically continuous with the fencing. 3.5 INSPECTION
The lightning protection system will be inspected by the Contracting Officer to determine conformance with the requirements of this specification. No part of the system shall be concealed until so authorized by the Contracting Officer.
SECTION 26 41 01.00 10
Page 7
W912HN-12-R-0003
SECTION 26 41 01.00 10
Page 8
W912HN-12-R-0003
SECTION 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING 07/07 PART 1 1.1 GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM A 1008/A 1008M (2010) Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardened (2008) Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Wire (2009a) Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire (2009a) Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process (2003; R 2008) Standard Specification for Nickel-Copper Alloy Rod, Bar, and Wire (2007) Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel
ASTM A 580/A 580M
ASTM A 641/A 641M
ASTM A 653/A 653M
ASTM B 164
ASTM B 633
GREEN SEAL (GS) GC-12 (1997) Occupancy Sensors ILLUMINATING ENGINEERING SOCIETY OF NORTH AMERICA (IESNA) IESNA HB-9 (2000; Errata 2004; Errata 2005) IES Lighting Handbook
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE) IEEE C2 IEEE C62.41.1 (2012) National Electrical Safety Code (2002; R 2008) Guide on the Surges Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits (2002) Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits SECTION 26 51 00 Page 1
IEEE C62.41.2
W912HN-12-R-0003
IEEE Std 100
(2000) The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA) NEMA 250 (2008) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) (2007) Standard for Electric Lamps Single-Ended Metal-Halide Lamps (1998) Electric Lamps - 250-Watt, 70 Watt, M85 Metal-Halide Lamps (2005) Electric Lamps - Double-capped Fluorescent Lamps Dimensional and Electrical Characteristics (2005) Electric Lamps - Single Base Fluorescent Lamps Dimensional and Electrical Characteristics (2002) High-Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts (2002) Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge and Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type) (1997; R 2002) Procedures for Linear Fluorescent Lamp Sample Preparation and the TCLP Extraction
NEMA ANSLG C78.43
NEMA C78.1381
NEMA C78.81
NEMA C78.901
NEMA C82.11
NEMA C82.4
NEMA LL 1
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) NFPA 101 NFPA 70 (2009; TIA 09-1; TIA 09-2) Life Safety Code (2011; TIA 11-1; Errata 2011; TIA 11-2; TIA 11-3; TIA 11-4) National Electrical Code U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA) Energy Star (1992; R 2006) Energy Star Energy Efficiency Labeling System
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) UL 1029 (1994; Rev thru Nov 2009) Standard for Safety High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts (2008; Reprint Jan 2010) Luminaires (2006; Rev thru Oct 2009) Standard for Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment (2001; Rev thru Nov 2009) Standard for SECTION 26 51 00 Page 2
UL 1598 UL 924
UL 935
W912HN-12-R-0003
Fluorescent-Lamp Ballasts 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
Materials not considered to be lighting equipment or lighting fixture accessories are specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Lighting fixtures and accessories mounted on exterior surfaces of buildings are specified in this section. 1.3 a. DEFINITIONS Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, shall be as defined in IEEE Std 100. Average life is the time after which 50 percent will have failed and 50 percent will have survived under normal conditions. Total harmonic distortion (THD) is the root mean square (RMS) of all the harmonic components divided by the total fundamental current. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Lighting Control System
b.
c.
1.4 1.4.1
Provide lighting control system as indicated. Lighting control equipment shall include, if indicated: control modules, power packs, dimming ballasts, occupancy sensors, and light level sensors. 1.5 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only or as otherwise designated. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: Data, drawings, and reports shall employ the terminology, classifications, and methods prescribed by the IESNA HB-9, as applicable, for the lighting system specified. SD-03 Product Data Fluorescent lighting fixtures Fluorescent electronic ballasts Fluorescent lamps High-intensity-discharge (HID) lighting fixtures HID ballasts Metal-halide lamps Dimmer switch Exit signs SECTION 26 51 00 Page 3
W912HN-12-R-0003
Emergency lighting equipment Occupancy sensors Electronic dimming ballast Dimming ballast controls Light Level Sensor SD-06 Test Reports Operating test Submit test results as stated in Paragraph FIELD QUALITY CONTROL. SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Lighting Control System, Data Package 5; G, AE Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein, showing all light fixtures, control modules, control zones, occupancy sensors, light level sensors, power packs, dimming ballasts, schematic diagrams and all interconnecting control wire, conduit, and associated hardware. 1.6 1.6.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE Fluorescent Electronic Ballasts
Submit ballast catalog data as required in the paragraph entitled "Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Ballasts" contained herein. As an option, submit the fluorescent fixture manufacturer's electronic ballast specification information in lieu of the actual ballast manufacturer's catalog data. This information shall include published specifications and sketches, which covers the information required by the paragraph entitled "Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Ballasts" herein. This information may be supplemented by catalog data if required, and shall contain a list of vendors with vendor part numbers. 1.6.2 Regulatory Requirements
Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year SECTION 26 51 00 Page 4
W912HN-12-R-0003
period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section. 1.6.3.1 Alternative Qualifications
Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used, unless specified otherwise. 1.6.3.3 Energy Efficiency
Comply with National Energy Policy Act and Energy Star requirements for lighting products. Submit data indicating lumens per watt efficiency and color rendition index of light source. 1.7 WARRANTY
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract. 1.7.1 Electronic Ballast Warranty
Furnish the electronic ballast manufacturer's warranty. The warranty period shall not be less than 5 years from the date of manufacture of the electronic ballast. Ballast assembly in the lighting fixture, transportation, and on-site storage shall not exceed 12 months, thereby permitting 4 years of the ballast 5 year warranty to be in service and energized. The warranty shall state that the malfunctioning ballast shall be exchanged by the manufacturer and promptly shipped to the using Government facility. The replacement ballast shall be identical to, or an improvement upon, the original design of the malfunctioning ballast. PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS FLUORESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURES Fluorescent fixtures shall have electronic ballasts.
UL 1598. 2.1.1
Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Ballasts
The electronic ballast shall as a minimum meet the following characteristics: a. Ballast shall comply with UL 935, NEMA C82.11 and NFPA 70 unless specified otherwise. Ballast shall be 100% electronic high frequency type with no magnetic core and coil components. Ballast shall provide SECTION 26 51 00 Page 5
W912HN-12-R-0003
transient immunity as recommended by IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2. Ballast shall be designed for the wattage of the lamps used in the indicated application. Ballasts shall be designed to operate on the voltage system to which they are connected. b. c. Power factor shall be 0.95 (minimum). Ballast shall operate at a frequency of 25,000 Hertz (minimum). In addition, the inverters of fluorescent fixture electronic ballasts shall not operate in the 32 KHz to 39 KHz or above the 60 KHz range due to interference. Ballast shall be compatible with and not cause interference with the operation of occupancy sensors or other infrared control systems. Ballast shall have light regulation of plus or minus 10 percent lumen output with a plus or minus 10 percent input voltage regulation. Ballast shall have 10 percent flicker (maximum) using any compatible lamp. Ballast factor shall be between 0.85 (minimum) and 1.00 (maximum). For T8 lamps, ballast factor shall be 1.0. Current crest factor shall be 1.7 (maximum). Ballast shall be UL listed Class P with a sound rating of "A." Ballast shall have circuit diagrams and lamp connections displayed on the ballast. Ballasts shall be programmed start unless otherwise indicated. Programmed start ballasts may operate lamps in a series circuit configuration. Provide series/parallel wiring for programmed start ballasts where available. Ballasts for compact fluorescent fixtures shall be programmed start. Ballasts for T-5 and smaller lamps shall have end-of-life protection circuits as required by NEMA C78.81 and NEMA C78.901 as applicable. Ballast shall be capable of starting and maintaining operation at a minimum of 0 degrees F unless otherwise indicated. Electronic ballast shall have a full replacement warranty of 5 years from date of manufacture as specified in paragraph entitled "Electronic Ballast Warranty" herein. T-8 Lamp Ballast Shall be 20 percent (maximum).
d.
e.
f. g.
h.
i. j.
k.
l.
2.1.1.1 a. b.
Total harmonic distortion (THD): Input wattage. (1) (2) (3)
32 watts (maximum) when operating one F32T8 lamp 62 watts (maximum) when operating two F32T8 lamps 92 watts (maximum) when operating three F32T8 lamps
e.
A single ballast may be used to serve multiple fixtures if they are continuously mounted and factory manufactured for that installation SECTION 26 51 00 Page 6
W912HN-12-R-0003
with an integral wireway. 2.1.1.2 a. b. 2.1.2 F17T8 Lamp Ballast Shall be 25 percent (maximum).
Total harmonic distortion (THD): Input wattage:
34 watts (maximum) when operating two F17T8 lamps.
Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Dimming Ballast
The electronic ballast shall as a minimum meet the following characteristics: a. Ballast shall comply with NEMA C82.11, UL 935, and NFPA 70, unless specified otherwise. Ballast shall provide transient immunity as recommended by IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2. Ballast dimming capability range shall be from 100 to 5 percent (minimum range) of light output, flicker free. Ballast shall start lamp at any preset light output setting without first having to go to full light output. Ballast shall be designed for the wattage of the lamps used in the indicated application. Ballasts shall be designed to operate on the voltage system to which they are connected. Power factor shall be 0.95 (minimum) at full light output, and 0.90 (minimum) over the entire dimming range. Ballast shall operate at a frequency of 25,000 Hertz (minimum). In addition, the inverters of fluorescent fixture electronic ballasts shall not operate in the 32 KHz to 39 KHz or above the 60 KHz range due to interference. Ballast shall be compatible with and not cause interference with the operation of occupancy sensors or other infrared control systems. Ballast factor at full light output shall be between 0.85 (minimum) and 1.00 (maximum). Current crest factor shall be 1.7 (maximum). Ballast shall be UL listed Class P with a sound rating of "A". Ballast shall have circuit diagrams and lamp connections displayed on the ballast. Ballast shall be programmed start. Ballast may operate lamps in a series circuit configuration. Provide series/parallel wiring for programmed start ballasts where available. Ballasts for compact fluorescent fixtures shall be programmed start. Ballast shall be capable of starting and maintaining operation at a minimum of 0 degrees F unless otherwise indicated. Total harmonic distortion (THD): the entire dimming range. Shall be 20 percent (maximum) over
b.
c.
d.
e. f.
g.
h. i.
j.
k.
Ballasts for T-5 and smaller lamps shall have end-of-life protection circuits as required by NEMA C78.81 and NEMA C78.901 as applicable. T-8 Lamp Ballast
2.1.2.1
Input wattage, for indicated lamp quantity shall be: SECTION 26 51 00 Page 7
W912HN-12-R-0003
a. b. c. 2.1.3
35 watts (maximum) when operating one F32T8 lamp. 70 watts (maximum) when operating two F32T8 lamps. 104 watts (maximum) when operating three F32T8 lamps. Dimming Ballast Controls
The dimming ballast controls shall be a slide dimmer switch with on/off control. The slide dimmer shall be compatible with the ballast and control the ballast light output over the full dimming range. Dimming ballast controls shall be approved by the ballast manufacturer. 2.1.4 Light Level Sensor
UL listed. Light level sensor shall be capable of detecting changes in ambient lighting levels, shall provide a dimming range of 20 percent to 100 percent, minimum, and shall be designed for use with dimming ballast and voltage system to which they are connected. Sensor shall be capable of controlling 40 electronic dimming ballast, minimum. Sensor light level shall be adjustable and have a set level range from 10 to 100 footcandles, minimum. Sensor shall have a bypass function to electrically override sensor control. 2.1.5 a. Fluorescent Lamps T-8 instant start lamps shall be rated 32 watts (maximum), 3100 initial lumens (minimum), CRI as indicated, color temperature as indicated, and an average rated life of 36,000 hours. Low mercury lamps shall have passed the EPA Toxicity Characteristic Leachate Procedure (TCLP) for mercury by using the lamp sample preparation procedure described in NEMA LL 1. Compact fluorescent lamps shall be: CRI as indicated, color temperature as indicated, 10,000 hours average rated life, and as follows: (1) (2) T-4, twin tube, rated as indicated. T-4, double twin tube, as indicated.
b.
Average rated life is based on 3 hours operating per start. 2.1.6 Compact Fluorescent Fixtures
Compact fluorescent fixtures shall be manufactured specifically for compact fluorescent lamps with ballasts integral to the fixture. Fixtures shall use lamps as indicated, with a CRI as indicated. 2.2 HIGH-INTENSITY-DISCHARGE (HID) LIGHTING FIXTURES
UL 1598. Provide HID fixtures with tempered glass lenses when using metal-halide lamps. 2.2.1 HID Ballasts
UL 1029 and NEMA C82.4 and shall be constant wattage autotransformer (CWA) or regulator, high power factor type (minimum 90%). Provide single-lamp SECTION 26 51 00 Page 8
W912HN-12-R-0003
ballasts which shall have a minimum starting temperature of minus 30 degrees C. Ballasts shall be: a. b. Designed to operate on the voltage system to which they are connected. Designed for installation in a normal ambient temperature of 109 degrees F. Constructed so that open circuit operation will not reduce the average life. Metal-Halide Lamps Double-ended, 70 watt, conforming to NEMA C78.1381 Single-ended, wattage as indicated, conforming to NEMA ANSLG C78.43 RECESS- AND FLUSH-MOUNTED FIXTURES
c.
2.2.2 a. b. 2.3
Provide type that can be relamped from the bottom. Access to ballast shall be from the bottom. Trim for the exposed surface of flush-mounted fixtures shall be as indicated. 2.4 SUSPENDED FIXTURES
Provide hangers capable of supporting twice the combined weight of fixtures supported by hangers. Provide with swivel hangers to ensure a plumb installation. Hangers shall be cadmium-plated steel with a swivel-ball tapped for the conduit size indicated. Hangers shall allow fixtures to swing within an angle of 45 degrees. Brace pendants 4 feet or longer to limit swinging. Single-unit suspended fluorescent fixtures shall have twin-stem hangers. Multiple-unit or continuous row fluorescent fixtures shall have a tubing or stem for wiring at one point and a tubing or rod suspension provided for each unit length of chassis, including one at each end. Rods shall be a minimum 0.18 inch diameter. 2.5 2.5.1 SWITCHES Toggle Switches
Provide toggle switches as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. 2.6 EXIT SIGNS Exit signs shall be as indicated on
UL 924, NFPA 70, and NFPA 101. Drawings. 2.7
EMERGENCY LIGHTING EQUIPMENT
UL 924, NFPA 70, and NFPA 101. Provide lamps in wattage indicated. Designated lighting fixtures are connected to emergency circuits as indicated on the Drawings. 2.8 OCCUPANCY SENSORS
UL listed. Comply with GC-12. Occupancy sensors and power packs shall be designed to operate on the voltage indicated. Sensors and power packs shall have circuitry that only allows load switching at or near zero SECTION 26 51 00 Page 9
W912HN-12-R-0003
current crossing of supply voltage. Occupancy sensor mounting as indicated. Sensor shall have an LED occupant detection indicator. Sensor shall have adjustable sensitivity and adjustable delayed-off time range of 5 minutes to 15 minutes. Ceiling mounted sensors shall be white. Ceiling mounted sensors shall have 360 degree coverage unless otherwise indicated. 2.9 2.9.1 SUPPORT HANGERS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES IN SUSPENDED CEILINGS Wires
ASTM A 641/A 641M, galvanized regular coating, soft temper, 0.1055 inches in diameter (12 gage). 2.9.2 Wires, for Humid Spaces
ASTM A 580/A 580M, composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel 0.1055 inches in diameter (12 gage). ASTM B 164, UNS NO4400, annealed nickel-copper alloy 0.1055 inches in diameter (12 gage). 2.9.3 Straps
Galvanized steel, one by 3/16 inch, conforming to ASTM A 653/A 653M, with a light commercial zinc coating or ASTM A 1008/A 1008M with an electrodeposited zinc coating conforming to ASTM B 633, Type RS. 2.9.4 Rods
Threaded steel rods, 3/16 inch diameter, zinc or cadmium coated. 2.10 2.10.1 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION Manufacturer's Nameplate
Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable. 2.10.2 Labels
Provide labeled luminaires in accordance with UL 1598 requirements. All luminaires shall be clearly marked for operation of specific lamps and ballasts according to proper lamp type. The following lamp characteristics shall be noted in the format "Use Only _____": a. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12), tube configuration (twin, quad, triple), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for HID luminaires. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires.
b.
c.
d.
SECTION 26 51 00
Page 10
W912HN-12-R-0003
e.
Correlated color temperature (CCT) and color rendering index (CRI) for all luminaires.
Markings related to lamp type shall be clear and located to be readily visible to service personnel, but unseen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place. Ballasts shall have clear markings indicating multi-level outputs and indicate proper terminals for the various outputs. 2.11 FACTORY APPLIED FINISH
Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance test. PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION INSTALLATION
Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and to the requirements specified herein. 3.1.1 Lamps
Lamps of the type, wattage, and voltage rating indicated shall be delivered to the project in the original cartons and installed just prior to project completion. Lamps installed and used for working light during construction shall be replaced prior to turnover to the Government if more than 15 percent of their rated life has been used. Lamps shall be tested for proper operation prior to turn-over and shall be replaced if necessary with new lamps from the original manufacturer. Provide 10 percent spare lamps of each type from the original manufacturer. 3.1.2 Lighting Fixtures
Set lighting fixtures plumb, square, and level with ceiling and walls, in alignment with adjacent lighting fixtures, and secure in accordance with manufacturers' directions and approved drawings. Installation shall meet requirements of NFPA 70. Mounting heights specified or indicated shall be to the bottom of fixture for ceiling-mounted fixtures and to center of fixture for wall-mounted fixtures. Obtain approval of the exact mounting for lighting fixtures on the job before commencing installation and, where applicable, after coordinating with the type, style, and pattern of the ceiling being installed. Recessed and semi-recessed fixtures shall be independently supported from the building structure by a minimum of four wires per fixture and located near each corner of each fixture. Ceiling grid clips are not allowed as an alternative to independently supported light fixtures. Round fixtures or fixtures smaller in size than the ceiling grid shall be independently supported from the building structure by a minimum of four wires per fixture spaced approximately equidistant around the fixture. Do not support fixtures by ceiling acoustical panels. Where fixtures of sizes less than the ceiling grid are indicated to be centered in the acoustical panel, support such fixtures independently and provide at least two 3/4 inch metal channels spanning, and secured to, the ceiling tees for centering and aligning the fixture. Provide wires for lighting fixture support in this section. Lighting fixtures installed in suspended ceilings shall also comply with the requirements of Section 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS.
SECTION 26 51 00
Page 11
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.1.3
Suspended Fixtures
Suspended fixtures shall be provided with 45 degree swivel hangers so that they hang plumb and shall be located with no obstructions within the 45 degree range in all directions. The stem, canopy and fixture shall be capable of 45 degree swing. Pendants, rods, or chains 4 feet or longer excluding fixture shall be braced to prevent swaying using three cables at 120 degree separation. Suspended fixtures in continuous rows shall have internal wireway systems for end to end wiring and shall be properly aligned to provide a straight and continuous row without bends, gaps, light leaks or filler pieces. Aligning splines shall be used on extruded aluminum fixtures to assure hairline joints. Steel fixtures shall be supported to prevent "oil-canning" effects. Fixture finishes shall be free of scratches, nicks, dents, and warps, and shall match the color and gloss specified. Pendants shall be finished to match fixtures. Aircraft cable shall be stainless steel. Canopies shall be finished to match the ceiling and shall be low profile unless otherwise shown. Maximum distance between suspension points shall be 10 feet or as recommended by the manufacturer, whichever is less. 3.1.4 3.1.4.1 Ballasts Remote Ballasts
Remote type ballasts or transformers, where indicated, shall be mounted in a well ventilated, easily accessible location, within the maximum operating distance from the lamp, as designated by the manufacturer. 3.1.4.2 Electronic Dimming Ballasts
All electronic dimming ballasts controlled by the same controller shall be of the same manufacturer. All fluorescent lamps on electronic dimming ballast control shall be seasoned or burned in at full light output for 100 hours before dimming. 3.1.5 Exit Signs and Emergency Lighting Units
Wire exit signs and emergency lighting units as indicated on the Drawings. 3.1.5.1 Exit Signs
Wire exit signs on separate circuits and serve from an emergency panel. Signs shall have only one control, which shall be the circuit breaker in the emergency panel. Paint control device red and provide lockout. 3.1.6 Occupancy Sensor
Provide quantity of sensor units indicated as a minimum. Provide additional units to give full coverage over controlled area. Full coverage shall provide hand and arm motion detection for office and administration type areas and walking motion for industrial areas, warehouses, storage rooms and hallways. Locate the sensor(s) as indicated and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations to maximize energy savings and to avoid nuisance activation and deactivation due to sudden temperature or airflow changes and usage. Set sensor "on" duration to 30 minutes. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Upon completion of installation, verify that equipment is properly SECTION 26 51 00 Page 12
W912HN-12-R-0003
installed, connected, and adjusted. Conduct an operating test to show that equipment operates in accordance with requirements of this section. 3.2.1 Electronic Dimming Ballast Observe for visually detectable
Test for full range of dimming capability. flicker over full dimming range. 3.2.2 Occupancy Sensor
Test sensors for proper operation. area being covered.
Observe for light control over entire
SECTION 26 51 00
Page 13
W912HN-12-R-0003
SECTION 27 05 28.36 40 CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 11/08 PART 1 1.1 GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM A 1008/A 1008M (2010) Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardened
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA) NEMA VE 2 (2006) Cable Tray Installation Guidelines
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) NFPA 70 (2011; TIA 11-1; Errata 2011; TIA 11-2; TIA 11-3; TIA 11-4) National Electrical Code
1.2 1.3
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-02 Shop Drawings Fabrication Drawings Installation Drawings SD-03 Product Data Submit manufacturer's product data for the following items: Cable Trays Supports SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions Submit Manufacturer's Instructions for cable trays in accordance with paragraph entitled, "Manufacturer's Instructions," of this SECTION 27 05 28.36 40 Page 1
W912HN-12-R-0003
section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Comply with NEMA Standards Publication Number VE1, "Cable Tray Systems" Comply with NEC, as applicable to construction and installation of cable tray and cable channel systems (Article 392 NEC) Provide products that are UL-classified and labeled. PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS CABLE TRAYS
Provide ladder cable trays consisting of two longitudinal side members connected by individual transverse members. See Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM for cable tray outside of Telecom Room. 2.2 MATERIAL AND FABRICATION
Provide cable trays constructed of steel in accordance with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M with a zinc coating applied after fabrication. Submit Fabrication drawings for cable trays consisting of fabrication and assembly details to be performed in the factory. Prior to assembly, coat contact surfaces of trays with an antioxidant compound. Finish edges, fittings, and hardware free from burrs and sharp edges. Include splice and end plates, dropouts, and miscellaneous hardware. All cable tray compenents including verical and horizontal transition pieces shall be factory made. 2.3 SUPPORTS
Permit both vertical and horizontal adjustment, where possible on supports and hangers. Provide an adequate bearing surface for the tray on the horizontal and vertical tray supports and have provisions for holddown clamps or fasteners. Provide a secure means other than friction for fastening cable trays to supports. Support cable trays at not more than 5-foot intervals. Place supports for horizontal-elbow tray fittings within 2 feet of each fitting extremity and as recommended by the cable-tray manufacturer. When supported at 5-foot intervals, the cable trays shall be capable of carrying not less than 150 pounds per linear foot. Tray fittings shall have not less than the load-carrying ability of straight tray sections and have the manufacturer's minimum standard radius. PART 3 EXECUTION
Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray installation. 3.1 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
Submit manufacturer's instructions for Cable Trays including special provisions required to install equipment components and system packages. Detail impedances, hazards and safety precautions. SECTION 27 05 28.36 40 Page 2
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.2
INSTALLATION DRAWINGS
Thirty calendar days prior to shipment, submit installation drawings to the Contracting officer for approval. Coordinate drawings with all other work in the immediate area that could come in conflict with the installation. Include layout of cable tray work and details of both horizontal and vertical supports as specified in paragraph entitled, "Supports," of this section. 3.3 GROUNDING
Properly grounded cable trays by means of a low-resistance conductor of sufficient capacity, but in no case smaller than No. 1/0 AWG copper. Bond grounding conductor to cable-tray sections and fittings by compatible bolted connections. Consider cable tray sections in tandem assembly as having electrical continuity when these sections are bonded with appropriate high-strength bolts. Provide permanent and continuous effective grounding with an impedance sufficiently low to limit the potential above ground and to facilitate operation of overcurrent devices in the circuit. Provide grounding and bonding of cable trays in accordance with NFPA 70. -- End of Section --
SECTION 27 05 28.36 40
Page 3
W912HN-12-R-0003
SECTION 27 08 00 COMMUNICATION COMMISSSIONING REQUIREMENTS PART 1 1.1 GENERAL COMMISSIONING DEFINITION
Commissioning is a systematic process of ensuring that all the building's Communications related systems are installed and calibrated, and perform interactively according to the design intent and the owner's project requirements and operational needs. This is achieved by beginning at the design phase with documented design and operating intent and continuing through construction and acceptance with actual verification of performance. 1.2 1. COMMISSIONING OBJECTIVE To verify that Communications Systems are installed in accordance with project drawings and specifications. To verify and document proper functioning of Communications Systems. To verify that proper project close out documentation is submitted by the contractor to the Government. To verify that Government's operating personnel is properly trained. TEST EQUIPMENT Contractor shall provide test equipment to the CxC during verification process. Contractor's test equipment shall have current factory calibration. Documentation of the calibration shall be submitted to the CxC before the testing commences. CxC may use test equipment different from that of contractor's for verification purposes if necessary. QUALIFICATIONS OF PERSONNEL The following are the minimum qualifications for the Construction Contractor Commissioning personnel: a) Minimum of 5-year of experience in the related field; b) Industry training in the related field is mandatory; c) Industry certifications in the related field are highly desired; d) Minimum of 2-year college degree is required, but can be substituted by additional 5 years of experience. The following are the minimum qualifications for the contractor testing personnel: a) Minimum of 3-year of experience in the related field; b) Industry training in the related field is mandatory; c) Industry certifications in the related field are highly desired. The following are the minimum qualifications for the Construction Contractor training personnel: a) Minimum of 5-year of experience in the related field; b) Industry training in the related field; c) Industry certifications in the related field; d) Minimum of 2-year SECTION 27 08 00 Page 1
2. 3.
4. 1.3 1.
2.
3.
1.4 1.
2.
3.
W912HN-12-R-0003
college degree. 1.5 TECHNOLOGY SYSTEMS TO BE COMMISSIONED
The list of communication systems which shall be commissioned is outlined below. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 1.5.1 1. Telephone Switching System Installation-wide Data Network Premises Distribution System Intercom System Radio and Public Address System Entertainment and Training Television System EMS Recorder System Cable Trays Communications Room Systems Descriptions TELEPHONE SWITCHING SYSTEM
The new telephone switching system will be provided under another project. Coordinate commissioning requirements (if any) with Government. 2. INSTALLATION-WIDE DATA NETWORK
Refer to TS-series drawings for conduit requirements and TN-series riser diagrams for installation requirements as well as specification section 33 82 00. CxC shall verify that all cables and conduits are installed according to these documents. 3. PREMISES DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
Refer to Telecommunications drawings for installation requirements as well as specification section 27 10 00. CxC shall verify that all cables are installed according to these documents. 4. INTERCOM SYSTEM
Refer to Telecommunications/Security drawings for installation requirements as well as specification sections 28 20 01. 00 10 and 27 21 00.00 40. CxC shall verify that the system is installed according to these documents. 5. PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM
Refer to Telecommunications/Security drawings for installation requirements as well as specification section 27 51 16. CxC shall verify that the system is installed according to these documents. 6. ENTERTAINMENT AND TRAINING TELEVISION SYSTEM *3 This is a complete TV system consisting of a head-end component and a distribution component. Refer to Telecommunications/Security drawings for installation requirements as well as specification section 27 54 00.00 20. CxC shall verify that the system is installed according to these documents.
SECTION 27 08 00
Page 2
W912HN-12-R-0003
7.
EMS RECORDER SYSTEM
A 10+1 channel EMS recorder system will be furnished to record communications on selected telephone lines and EMS Radios. CxC shall verify that the system is installed in accordance with manufacturer instructions and functions adequately for intended use. 8. CABLE TRAYS *3 A cable tray system is a unit or assembly of units, or sections and associated fittings, forming a rigid structural system used to securely fasten or support cables and raceways. Refer to Telecommunications drawings for installation requirements as well as specification section 27 05 28.36 40. CxC shall verify that all cable trays are installed according to these documents. 9. COMMUNICATIONS ROOM *3 The Communications Room is the heart of communications network and is the origination point for all communications services. Refer to Telecommunications drawings for installation requirements. CxC shall verify that all equipment is installed according to these documents. PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used. PART 3 3.1 1. EXECUTION COMMISSIONING PROCESS Commissioning Process shall commence with a meeting/conference call conducted by Commissioning agent for construction/Commissioning Specialist (CxC), where the commissioning process is reviewed with Installing contractor and commissioning team members. CxC shall perform a thorough visual inspection of the Communications Systems installed by contractor at the strategic project milestones and issue a report outlining the observations. Strategic milestones include, but not necessarily limited to the following: a. b. c. 3. Initial equipment installation Substantial completion Final completion
*3 2.
Testing shall be performed by contractor in accordance with the latest industry standards. CxC may be witnessing portions of testing process. Test results shall be submitted by contractor to CxC as described in the Submittals section. CxC shall review 100% of the test results. After testing is complete and test results are submitted and reviewed, CxC shall perform test verification of Communications Systems. Installing contractor may be directed by CxC to be present during verification. SECTION 27 08 00 Page 3
4.
5. 6.
W912HN-12-R-0003
7.
CxC shall issue a Pass/Fail correction report outlining findings and proposed action items. Contractor shall resolve all the problems. Contractor shall properly train Government's personnel. Contractor shall issue to the Government close out documentation including, but not necessarily limited to: a. b. c. As-built drawings Warranty certificates Test results indicating all prior deficiencies being corrected
8. 9. 10.
*3 11. Deleted Sign-off documentation shall be issued upon final completion and acceptance. The sign-off documentation shall contain the certification that tested system meets requirements indicated on the drawings and in the specifications. The sign-off documentation shall be signed by the following personnel: a. b. c. d. e. 3.2 1. Commissioning agent for construction/Commissioning Specialist CxC Contractor's representative Design agency representative Contracting agency representative Using agency representative
PROBLEM RESOLUTION Contractor shall resolve all the problems outlined in CxC reports. CxC may recommend the solution to the problems found, however, the burden of responsibility to resolve and correct the problems/deficiencies is with the contractor. SUBMITTALS Each test shall be documented by a test report. A printed test report bound in a three ring binder shall be provided by contractor to the CxC. The binder shall contain summary of the test reports as well. Test reports with the summary in the electronic format shall be provided by the contractor. If special software is required to read a report, the contractor shall provide such software. COORDINATION, NOTIFICATION AND SCHEDULING Contractor shall notify CxC in writing at least two weeks in advance before testing commences. -- End of Section --
3.3 1.
2.
3.4 1.
SECTION 27 08 00
Page 4
W912HN-12-R-0003
SECTION 27 10 00 BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM 01/08 PART 1 1.1 GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM D 709 (2001; R 2007) Laminated Thermosetting Materials
CONSUMER ELECTRONICS ASSOCIATION (CEA) CEA-310-E (2005) Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE) IEEE Std 100 (2000) The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms
INSULATED CABLE ENGINEERS ASSOCIATION (ICEA) ICEA S-83-596 (2001) Fiber Optic Premises Distribution Cable (2006; R 2008) Category 3, 5, & 5e Individually Unshielded Twisted Pair Indoor Cables for Use in General Purpose and LAN Communications Wiring Systems Technical Requirements
ICEA S-90-661
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA) NEMA WC 66 (2001; Errata 2003) Performance Standard for Category 6 and Category 7 100 Ohm Shielded and Unshielded Twisted Pairs (2005) Twisted Pair Premise Voice and Data Communications Cables
NEMA WC 63.1
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) NFPA 70 (2011; TIA 11-1; Errata 2011; TIA 11-2; TIA 11-3; TIA 11-4) National Electrical Code TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION (TIA) TIA J-STD-607-A (2002) Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications SECTION 27 10 00 Page 1
W912HN-12-R-0003
TIA-492CAAA
(1998; R 2002) Detail Specification for Class IVa Dispersion-Unshifted Single-Mode Optical Fibers (2002; R 2008) OFSTP-7 Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Single-Mode Fiber Cable Plant (2009) Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard (2009; Errata 2010) Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cabling and Components Standards (2008; Corrections 2008) Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard (1998; Addenda 2000, 2001) Commercial Building Standards for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces (2004) Commercial Building Standards for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces (2005c) Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding (2005) Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding (2000) Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standard (FOCIS), Type SC and SC-APC, FOCIS-3 (2002a; Errata 2007; R 2007; Adm 1 2008) Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure (2009) Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard (2004) Customer-owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Cabling Standard
TIA-526-7
TIA-568-C.1
TIA-568-C.2
TIA-568-C.3s
TIA/EIA-569-A
TIA/EIA-569-B
TIA/EIA-598 TIA/EIA-598-B TIA/EIA-604-3A
TIA/EIA-606
TIA-568-C.1
TIA/EIA-758-A
U.S. FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION (FCC) FCC Part 68 Connection of Terminal Equipment to the Telephone Network (47 CFR 68)
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) UL 1286 UL 1666 (2008; Reprint Sep 2011) Office Furnishings (2007) Test for Flame Propagation Height of Electrical and Optical-Fiber Cables Installed Vertically in Shafts (2004; R 2008) Communication Circuit Accessories SECTION 27 10 00 Page 2
UL 1863
W912HN-12-R-0003
UL 444
(2008; R 2008; R 2010) Communications Cables (2007) Grounding and Bonding Equipment (2007) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-environmental Considerations (1996; R 1998 - R 2009) Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes, and Covers (1998) Test for Flame-Propagation and Smoke-Density Values for Electrical and Optical-Fiber Cables Used in Spaces Transporting Environmental Air (1995; Reprint Nov 2008) Standard for Marking and Labeling Systems U.S. ARMY INFORMATION SYSTEMS ENGINEERING COMMAND (USAISEC)
UL 467 UL 50
UL 514C
UL 910
UL 969
I3A
(2010; Rev thru Feb 2010) Technical Criteria for the Installation Information Infrastructure Architecture RELATED REQUIREMENTS
1.2
Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM and Section 33 82 00 TELECOMMUNICATIONS, OUTSIDE PLANT, apply to this section with additions and modifications specified herein. 1.3 DEFINITIONS
Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in this specification shall be as defined in TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2, TIA-568-C.3, TIA/EIA-569-B,TIA/EIA-606, TIA/EIA-758-A , and IEEE Std 100 and herein. 1.3.1 Campus Distributor (CD)
A distributor from which the campus backbone cabling emanates. (International expression for main cross-connect (MC).) 1.3.2 Building Distributor (BD)
A distributor in which the building backbone cables terminate and at which connections to the campus backbone cables may be made. (International expression for intermediate cross-connect (IC).) 1.3.3 Floor Distributor (FD)
A distributor used to connect horizontal cable and cabling subsystems or equipment. (International expression for horizontal cross-connect (HC).) 1.3.4 Telecommunications Room (TR)
An enclosed space for housing telecommunications equipment, cable, terminations, and cross-connects. The room is the recognized cross-connect SECTION 27 10 00 Page 3
W912HN-12-R-0003
between the backbone cable and the horizontal cabling. 1.3.5 Entrance Facility (EF) (Telecommunications)
An entrance to the building for both private and public network service cables (including antennae) including the entrance point at the building wall and continuing to the entrance room or space. 1.3.6 Entrance Room (ER) (Telecommunications)
A centralized space for telecommunications equipment that serves the occupants of a building. Equipment housed therein is considered distinct from a telecommunications room because of the nature of its complexity. 1.3.7 Open Cable
Cabling that is not run in a raceway as defined by NFPA 70. This refers to cabling that is "open" to the space in which the cable has been installed and is therefore exposed to the environmental conditions associated with that space. 1.3.8 Open Office
A floor space division provided by furniture, moveable partitions, or other means instead of by building walls. 1.3.9 Pathway
A physical infrastructure utilized for the placement and routing of telecommunications cable. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The building telecommunications cabling and pathway system shall include permanently installed backbone and horizontal cabling, horizontal and backbone pathways, service entrance facilities, work area pathways, telecommunications outlet assemblies, conduit, raceway, and hardware for splicing, terminating, and interconnecting cabling necessary to transport telephone and data (including LAN) between equipment items in a building. The horizontal system shall be wired in a star topology from the telecommunications work area to the floor distributor or campus distributor at the center or hub of the star. The backbone cabling and pathway system includes intrabuilding and interbuilding interconnecting cabling, pathway, and terminal hardware. The intrabuilding backbone provides connectivity from the floor distributors to the building distributors or to the campus distributor and from the building distributors to the campus distributor as required. The backbone system shall be wired in a star topology with the campus distributor at the center or hub of the star. The interbuilding backbone system provides connectivity between the campus distributors and is specified in Section 33 82 00, TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTSIDE PLANT. Provide telecommunications pathway systems referenced herein as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. 1.5 SUBMITTALS approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control When used, a designation following the "G" designation the office that will review the submittal for the Government. SECTION 27 10 00 Page 4
Government submittals approval. identifies
W912HN-12-R-0003
The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-02 Shop Drawings Telecommunications drawings; G; G, RE Telecommunications Space Drawings; G; G, RE In addition to Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, provide shop drawings in accordance with paragraph SHOP DRAWINGS. SD-03 Product Data Telecommunications cabling (backbone and horizontal); G; G, RE Patch panels; G; G, RE
Telecommunications outlet/connector assemblies; G; G, RE Equipment support frame; G; G, RE Connector blocks; G; G, RE Spare Parts; G; G, RE Submittals shall include the manufacturer's name, trade name, place of manufacture, and catalog model or number. Include performance and characteristic curves. Submittals shall also include applicable federal, military, industry, and technical society publication references. Should manufacturer's data require supplemental information for clarification, the supplemental information shall be submitted as specified in paragraph REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS and as required in Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. SD-06 Test Reports Telecommunications cabling testing; G; G, RE SD-07 Certificates Telecommunications Contractor Qualifications; G; G, RE Key Personnel Qualifications; G; G, RE Manufacturer Qualifications; G; G, RE Test plan; G; G, RE SD-09 Manufacturer's Field Reports Factory reel tests; G; G, RE SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Telecommunications cabling and pathway system Data Package 5; G; G, RE SECTION 27 10 00 Page 5
W912HN-12-R-0003
SD-11 Closeout Submittals Record Documentation; G; G, RE 1.6 1.6.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE Shop Drawings
In exception to Section 01 33 00, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, submit shop drawings a minimum of 14 by 20 inches in size using a minimum scale of 1/8 inch per foot, except as specified otherwise. Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown to ensure a coordinated installation. Wiring diagrams shall identify circuit terminals and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnection between each item of equipment. Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment devices. Submittals shall include the nameplate data, size, and capacity. Submittals shall also include applicable federal, military, industry, and technical society publication references. 1.6.1.1 Telecommunications Drawings
Provide registered communications distribution designer (RCDD) approved, drawings in accordance with TIA/EIA-606. The identifier for each termination and cable shall appear on the drawings. Drawings shall depict final telecommunications installed wiring system infrastructure in accordance with TIA/EIA-606. The drawings should provide details required to prove that the distribution system shall properly support connectivity from the EF telecommunications and ER telecommunications, CD's, BD's, and FD's to the telecommunications work area outlets. Provide a plastic laminated schematic of the as-installed telecommunications cable system showing cabling, CD's, BD's, FD's, and the EF and ER for telecommunications keyed to floor plans by room number. Mount the laminated schematic in the EF telecommunications space as directed by the Contracting Officer. The following drawings shall be provided as a minimum: a. T1 - Layout of complete building per floor - Building Area/Serving Zone Boundaries, Backbone Systems, and Horizontal Pathways. Layout of complete building per floor. The drawing indicates location of building areas, serving zones, vertical backbone diagrams, telecommunications rooms, access points, pathways, grounding system, and other systems that need to be viewed from the complete building perspective. T2 - Serving Zones/Building Area Drawings - Drop Locations and Cable Identification (IDS). Shows a building area or serving zone. These drawings show drop locations, telecommunications rooms, access points and detail call outs for common equipment rooms and other congested areas. T4 - Typical Detail Drawings - Faceplate Labeling, Firestopping, Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Safety, Department of Transportation (DOT). Detailed drawings of symbols and typicals such as faceplate labeling, faceplate types, faceplate population installation procedures, detail racking, and raceways.
b.
c.
SECTION 27 10 00
Page 6
W912HN-12-R-0003
1.6.1.2
Telecommunications Space Drawings
Provide T3 drawings in accordance with TIA/EIA-606 that include telecommunications rooms plan views, pathway layout (cable tray, racks, ladder-racks, etc.), mechanical/electrical layout, and rack, backboard and wall elevations. Drawings shall show layout of applicable equipment including incoming cable stub or connector blocks, building protector assembly, outgoing cable connector blocks, patch panels and equipment spaces and cabinet/racks. Drawings shall include a complete list of equipment and material, equipment rack details, proposed layout and anchorage of equipment and appurtenances, and equipment relationship to other parts of the work including clearance for maintenance and operation. Drawings may also be an enlargement of a congested area of T1 or T2 drawings. 1.6.2 Telecommunications Qualifications
Work under this section shall be performed by and the equipment shall be provided by the approved telecommunications contractor and key personnel. Qualifications shall be provided for: the telecommunications system contractor, the telecommunications system installer, and the supervisor (if different from the installer). A minimum of 30 days prior to installation, submit documentation of the experience of the telecommunications contractor and of the key personnel. 1.6.2.1 Telecommunications Contractor
The telecommunications contractor shall be a firm which is regularly and professionally engaged in the business of the applications, installation, and testing of the specified telecommunications systems and equipment. The telecommunications contractor shall demonstrate experience in providing successful telecommunications systems within the past 3 years. Submit documentation for a minimum of three and a maximum of five successful telecommunication system installations for the telecommunications contractor. 1.6.2.2 Key Personnel
Provide key personnel who are regularly and professionally engaged in the business of the application, installation and testing of the specified telecommunications systems and equipment. There may be one key person or more key persons proposed for this solicitation depending upon how many of the key roles each has successfully provided. Each of the key personnel shall demonstrate experience in providing successful telecommunications systems within the past 3 years. Supervisors and installers assigned to the installation of this system or any of its components shall be Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI) Registered Cabling Installers, Technician Level. Submit documentation of current BICSI certification for each of the key personnel. In lieu of BICSI certification, supervisors and installers assigned to the installation of this system or any of its components shall have a minimum of 3 years experience in the installation of the specified copper and fiber optic cable and components. They shall have factory or factory approved certification from each equipment manufacturer indicating that they are qualified to install and test the provided products. Submit documentation for a minimum of three and a maximum of five successful telecommunication SECTION 27 10 00 Page 7
W912HN-12-R-0003
system installations for each of the key personnel. Documentation for each key person shall include at least two successful system installations provided that are equivalent in system size and in construction complexity to the telecommunications system proposed for this solicitation. Include specific experience in installing and testing telecommunications systems and provide the names and locations of at least two project installations successfully completed using optical fiber and copper telecommunications cabling systems. All of the existing telecommunications system installations offered by the key persons as successful experience shall have been in successful full-time service for at least 18 months prior to the issuance date for this solicitation. Provide the name and role of the key person, the title, location, and completed installation date of the referenced project, the referenced project owner point of contact information including name, organization, title, and telephone number, and generally, the referenced project description including system size and construction complexity. Indicate that all key persons are currently employed by the telecommunications contractor, or have a commitment to the telecommunications contractor to work on this project. All key persons shall be employed by the telecommunications contractor at the date of issuance of this solicitation, or if not, have a commitment to the telecommunications contractor to work on this project by the date that the bid was due to the Contracting Officer. Note that only the key personnel approved by the Contracting Officer in the successful proposal shall do work on this solicitation's telecommunications system. Key personnel shall function in the same roles in this contract, as they functioned in the offered successful experience. Any substitutions for the telecommunications contractor's key personnel requires approval from The Contracting Officer. 1.6.2.3 Minimum Manufacturer Qualifications
Cabling, equipment and hardware manufacturers shall have a minimum of 3 years experience in the manufacturing, assembly, and factory testing of components which comply with TIA-568-C.1and TIA-568-C.3. 1.6.3 Test Plan
Provide a complete and detailed test plan for the telecommunications cabling system including a complete list of test equipment for the UTP and optical fiber components and accessories 60 days prior to the proposed test date. Include procedures for certification, validation, and testing. 1.6.4 Regulatory Requirements
Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers SECTION 27 10 00 Page 8
W912HN-12-R-0003
regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section. 1.6.5.1 Alternative Qualifications
Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used, unless specified otherwise. 1.7 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Provide protection from weather, moisture, extreme heat and cold, dirt, dust, and other contaminants for telecommunications cabling and equipment placed in storage. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Connecting hardware shall be rated for operation under ambient conditions of 32 to 140 degrees F and in the range of 0 to 95 percent relative humidity, noncondensing. 1.9 WARRANTY
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract. 1.10 1.10.1 MAINTENANCE Operation and Maintenance Manuals
Commercial off the shelf manuals shall be furnished for operation, installation, configuration, and maintenance of products provided as a part of the telecommunications cabling and pathway system. Submit operations and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 23, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein not later than 2 months prior to the date of beneficial occupancy. In addition to requirements of Data package 5, include the requirements of paragraphs TELECOMMUNICATIONS DRAWINGS, TELECOMMUNICATIONS SPACE DRAWINGS, and RECORD DOCUMENTATION. 1.10.2 Record Documentation
Provide T5 drawings including documentation on cables and termination hardware in accordance with SECTION 27 10 00 Page 9
W912HN-12-R-0003
TIA/EIA-606. T5 drawings shall include schedules to show information for cut-overs and cable plant management, patch panel layouts and cover plate assignments, cross-connect information and connecting terminal layout as a minimum. T5 drawings shall be provided in hard copy format. Provide the following T5 drawing documentation as a minimum: a. Cables - A record of installed cable shall be provided in accordance with TIA/EIA-606. The cable records shall include the required data fields for each cable and complete end-to-end circuit report for each complete circuit from the assigned outlet to the entry facility in accordance with TIA/EIA-606. Include manufacture date of cable with submittal. Termination Hardware - A record of installed patch panels, cross-connect points, distribution frames, terminating block arrangements and type, and outlets shall be provided in accordance with TIA/EIA-606. Documentation shall include the required data fields as a minimum in accordance with TIA/EIA-606. Spare Parts
b.
1.10.3
In addition to the requirements of Section 01 78 23, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA, provide a complete list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply, and a list of spare parts recommended for stocking. PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS COMPONENTS
UL or third party certified. Where equipment or materials are specified to conform to industry and technical society reference standards of the organizations, submit proof of such compliance. The label or listing by the specified organization will be acceptable evidence of compliance. In lieu of the label or listing, submit a certificate from an independent testing organization, competent to perform testing, and approved by the Contracting Officer. The certificate shall state that the item has been tested in accordance with the specified organization's test methods and that the item complies with the specified organization's reference standard. Provide a complete system of telecommunications cabling and pathway components using star topology. Provide support structures and pathways, complete with outlets, cables, connecting hardware and telecommunications cabinets/racks. Cabling and interconnecting hardware and components for telecommunications systems shall be UL listed or third party independent testing laboratory certified, and shall comply with NFPA 70 and conform to the requirements specified herein. 2.2 TELECOMMUNICATIONS PATHWAY
Provide telecommunications pathways in accordance with TIA/EIA-569-B and as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Provide system furniture pathways in accordance with UL 1286. 2.3 TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING
Cabling shall be UL listed for the application and shall comply with TIA-568-C.1 , TIA-568-C.2, TIA-568-C.3 and NFPA 70. Provide a labeling system for cabling as required by TIA/EIA-606 and UL 969. Ship cable on reelsor in boxes bearing manufacture date for UTP in accordance with ICEA SECTION 27 10 00 Page 10
W912HN-12-R-0003
S-90-661 and optical fiber cables in accordance with ICEA S-83-596 for all cable used on this project. Cabling manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of installation shall not be used. 2.3.1 2.3.1.1 Backbone Cabling Backbone Copper
ICEA S-90-661, TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2, NEMA WC 63.1 and UL 444, copper backbone cable shall be solid conductor, 24 AWG, 100 ohm, multi-pair UTP (Unshielded twisted pair), formed into 25 pair binder groups covered with a gray thermoplastic jacket. Cable shall be imprinted with manufacturers name or identifier, flammability rating, gauge of conductor, transmission performance rating (category designation) at regular intervals not to exceed 3.3 feet. The word "FEET" or the abbreviation "FT" shall appear after each length marking. Provide communications general purpose (CM or CMG), communications plenum (CMP) or communications riser (CMR) rated cabling in accordance with NFPA 70. Type CMP and CMR may be substituted for type CM or CMG and type CMP may be substituted for type CMR in accordance with NFPA 70. Color coding shall comply with industry standards for 25 pair cables. Where installed underground or underslab provide water-resistent compound in jacket. 2.3.1.2 Backbone Optical Fiber
Provide in accordance with ICEA S-83-596, TIA-568-C.3, UL 1666 and NFPA 70. Cable shall be imprinted with fiber count, fiber type and aggregate length at regular intervals not to exceed 40 inches. Hybrid fiber optic cable marking shall comply with TIA/EIA-598. Provide in accordance with TIA-492CAAA a single-mode, 8/125-um diameter, 0.10 numerical aperture, tight buffered fiber optic cable. Provide nonconductive optical fiber general purpose cable (OFN or OFNG), and nonconductive optical fiber riser cable (OFNR) rated cable in accordance with NFPA 70 and UL 910. Type OFNP or OFNR may be substituted for type OFN or OFNG and type OFNP may be substituted for type OFNR in accordance with NFPA 70. The cable cordage jacket, fiber, unit, and group color shall be in accordance with TIA/EIA-598-B. Where installed underground or under slab provide outdoor rated cable.
2.3.2
Horizontal Cabling
Provide horizontal cable in compliance with NFPA 70 and performance characteristics in accordance with TIA-568-C.1. 2.3.2.1 Horizontal Copper
Provide horizontal copper cable in accordance with TIA-568-C.2, UL 444, NEMA WC 66, ICEA S-90-661 UTP (unshielded twisted pair), 100 ohm. Provide four each individually twisted pair, 23 AWG conductors, Category 6, with a blue for data and white for voice thermoplastic jacket. Cable shall be imprinted with manufacturers name or identifier, flammability rating, gauge of conductor, transmission performance rating (category designation) at regular intervals not to exceed 3.3 feet. The word "FEET" or the abbreviation "FT" shall appear after each length marking. Provide communications general purpose (CM or CMG) rated cabling in accordance with NFPA 70. Type CMP and CMR may be substituted for type CM or CMG in accordance with NFPA 70. SECTION 27 10 00 Page 11
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.4
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SPACES
Provide connecting hardware and termination equipment in the telecommunications entrance facility and telecommunication equipment rooms to facilitate installation as shown on design drawings for terminating and cross-connecting permanent cabling. Provide telecommunications interconnecting hardware color coding in accordance with TIA/EIA-606. 2.4.1 Backboards
Provide void-free, interior grade plywood 3/4 inch thick 4 by 8 feetas indicated. Backboards shall be fire rated. Backboards shall be provided as indicated on drawings and on a minimum of two walls in the telecommunication spaces. Do not cover the fire stamp on the backboard. 2.4.2 Equipment Support Frame
Provide in accordance with CEA-310-E and UL 50. a. Racks, floor mounted modular type, 11 gauge aluminum construction, minimum, treated to resist corrosion. Provide rack with vertical and horizontal cable management channels, top and bottom cable troughs, grounding lug and a surge protected power strip with 6 duplex 20 amp receptacles. Rack shall be compatible with 19 inches panel mounting. Cabinets (ServerRoom)-1G05 (1) 23.8 inches wide x 47.2 inches deep x 78.7 inches high nominal enclosed cabinet capable of rejecting 6KW of heat load. (2) Front and rear doors shall be fully vented, hinged and lockable and removeable. Dual rear doors with a single latch mechanism, reversable front door (3) "EIA" style rails shall be at the front and rear of the cabinet with cage bolt openings. (4) (2) sets of vertical rails shall be 19-inches wide, adjustable from front to rear. (5) Rails shall be installed for installing equipment at front and rear. (6) Rear vertical air damming brushes in the ceiling. (7) Full height vertical cable management fingers on both sides in the rear. (8) Ground lugs located in the bottom rear. (9) Removable outside side panels. Provide end of row panels and a single panel between each cabinet. (10) Color shall be black. (11) Bottom to be open. (12) Adjustable feet (no casters). (13) Provide (2) vertical PDU power strips, 208V, 30A with power meter, IEC outlets, L6-30P plug (14) Provide (2) horizontal PDU power strips, 120V, 30A, with power meter, L5-20P plug. (15) PDU Units shall have SMNP management. (16) 32 U's of Blanking Panels. (17) Style shall match existing Dell 4220 series.
b.
2.4.3
Connector Blocks
Provide insulation displacement connector (IDC) Type 110 for Category 6 and SECTION 27 10 00 Page 12
W912HN-12-R-0003
higher systems. Provide blocks for the number of horizontal and backbone cables terminated on the block plus 25 percent spare. 2.4.4 Surge Protection
Provide protector modules in accordance with Section 33 82 00 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTSIDE PLANT (OSP) FOR CABLES ROUTED UNDERGROUND BETWEEN BUILDINGS. 2.4.5 Cable Guides
Provide cable guides specifically manufactured for the purpose of routing cables, wires and patch cords horizontally and vertically on 19 inches equipment racks and telecommunications backboards. Cable guides of ring or bracket type devices mounted on racks for horizontal cable management and individually mounted for vertical cable management. Mount cable guides with screws, and nuts and lockwashers. 2.4.6 Patch Panels
Provide ports for the number of horizontal and backbone cables terminated on the panel plus 25 percent spare. Provide pre-connectorized optical fiber and copper patch cords for patch panels. Provide patch cords, as complete assemblies, with matching connectors as specified. Provide fiber optic patch cables with crossover orientation in accordance with TIA-568-C.3. Patch cords shall meet minimum performance requirements specified in TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2 and TIA-568-C.3 for cables, cable length and hardware specified. 2.4.6.1 Modular to 110 Block Patch Panel
Provide in accordance with TIA-568-C.1 and TIA-568-C.2. Panels shall be third party verified and shall comply with EIA/TIA Category 6 requirements. Panel shall be constructed of 0.09 inches minimum aluminum and shall be rack mounted and compatible with an CEA-310-E 19 inches equipment rack. Panel shall provide 48 non-keyed, 8-pin modular ports, wired to T568A. Patch panels shall terminate the building cabling on Type 110 IDCs and shall utilize a printed circuit board interface. The rear of each panel shall have incoming cable strain-relief and routing guides. Panels shall have each port factory numbered and be equipped with laminated plastic nameplates above each port. 2.4.6.2 Fiber Optic Patch Panel
Provide panel for maintenance and cross-connecting of optical fiber cables. Panel shall be constructed of 11 gauge aluminum minimum and shall be rack mounted and compatible with a CEA-310-E 19 inches equipment rack. Each panel shall provide 12 single-mode adapters as duplex SC in accordance with TIA/EIA-604-3A with zirconia ceramic alignment sleeves. Provide dust cover for unused adapters. The rear of each panel shall have a cable management tray a minimum of 8 inches deep with removable cover, incoming cable strain-relief and routing guides. Panels shall have each adapter factory numbered and be equipped with laminated plastic nameplates above each adapter.
SECTION 27 10 00
Page 13
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.5 2.5.1
TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET/CONNECTOR ASSEMBLIES Outlet/Connector Copper
Outlet/connectors shall comply with FCC Part 68TIA-568-C.1, and TIA-568-C.2. UTP outlet/connectors shall be UL 1863 listed, non-keyed, 8-pin modular, constructed of high impact rated thermoplastic housing and shall be third party verified and shall comply with TIA-568-C.2 Category 6 requirements. Outlet/connectors provided for UTP cabling shall meet or exceed the requirements for the cable provided. Outlet/connectors shall be terminated using a Type 110 IDC PC board connector, color-coded for both T568A and T568B wiring. Each outlet/connector shall be wired T568A. UTP outlet/connectors shall comply with TIA-568-C.2 for 200 mating cycles. Colors shall be blue for data and white for voice. 2.5.2 Cover Plates
Telecommunications cover plates shall comply with UL 514C, and TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2 flush design constructed of high impact thermoplastic material to match color of receptacle/switch cover plates specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS. Provide labeling in accordance with the paragraph LABELING in this section. 2.6 GROUNDING AND BONDING PRODUCTS
Provide in accordance with UL 467, TIA J-STD-607-A, and NFPA 70. Components shall be identified as required by TIA/EIA-606. Provide ground rods, bonding conductors, and grounding busbars as specified in Section 26 20 00, INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. 2.7 FIRESTOPPING MATERIAL
Provide as specified in Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING. 2.8 MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE
Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable. 2.9 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES
ASTM D 709. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified or as indicated on the drawings. Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function and, when applicable, the position. Nameplates shall be melamine plastic, 0.125 inches thick, white with black center core. Surface shall be matte finish. Corners shall be square. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be one by 2.5 inches. Lettering shall be a minimum of 0.25 inches high normal block style. 2.10 2.10.1 TESTS, INSPECTIONS, AND VERIFICATIONS Factory Reel Tests
Provide documentation of the testing and verification actions taken by manufacturer to confirm compliance with TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.3, TIA-526-7 for single mode optical fiber cables. SECTION 27 10 00 Page 14
W912HN-12-R-0003
PART 3 3.1
EXECUTION INSTALLATION
Install telecommunications cabling and pathway systems, including the horizontal and backbone cable, pathway systems, telecommunications outlet/connector assemblies, and associated hardware in accordance with TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2, TIA-568-C.3, TIA/EIA-569-A, NFPA 70, and UL standards as applicable. Provide cabling in a star topology network. Pathways and outlet boxes shall be installed as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Install telecommunications cabling with copper media in accordance with the following criteria to avoid potential electromagnetic interference between power and telecommunications equipment. The interference ceiling shall not exceed 3.0 volts per meter measured over the usable bandwidth of the telecommunications cabling. Cabling shall be run with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment. 3.1.1 Cabling
Install Category 6 UTP,and optical fiber telecommunications cabling system as detailed in TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2, TIA-568-C.3. Screw terminals shall not be used except where specifically indicated on plans. Use an approved insulation displacement connection (IDC) tool kit for copper cable terminations. Do not untwist Category 6 UTP cables more than one half inch from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry. Provide service loop on each end of the cable, 10 feet in the telecommunications room, 4 feet at the cable tray, and 12 inches in the work area outlet in a natural non-symmettrical lay. Do not exceed manufacturers' cable pull tensions for copper and optical fiber cables. Provide a device to monitor cable pull tensions. Do not exceed 25 pounds pull tension for four pair copper cables. Do not chafe or damage outer jacket materials. Use only lubricants approved by cable manufacturer. Do not over cinch cables, or crush cables with staples. For UTP cable, bend radii shall not be less than four times the cable diameter. Cables shall be terminated; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Cables shall not be spliced. Label cabling in accordance with paragraph LABELING in this section. 3.1.1.1 Open Cable
Use only where specifically indicated on plans for use in cable trays. Install in accordance with TIA-568-C.1, and TIA-568-C.3. Do not exceed cable pull tensions recommended by the manufacturer. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items. Placement of cable parallel to power conductors shall be avoided, if possible; a minimum separation of 12 inches shall be maintained when such placement cannot be avoided.a. Plenum cable shall be used where open cables are routed through plenum areas. 3.1.1.2 a. Backbone Cable Copper Backbone Cable. Install intrabuilding backbone copper cable, in indicated pathways, between the campus distributor, located in the telecommunications entrance facility or room, the building distributors and the floor distributors located in telecommunications rooms and telecommunications equipment rooms as indicated on drawings. SECTION 27 10 00 Page 15
W912HN-12-R-0003
b.
Optical fiber Backbone Cable. Install intrabuilding backbone optical fiber in indicated pathways. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended bending radii and pull tension. Prepare cable for pulling by cutting outer jacket 10 inches leaving strength members exposed for approximately 10 inches. Twist strength members together and attach to pulling eye. Vertical cable support intervals shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Horizontal Cabling
3.1.1.3
Install horizontal cabling as indicated on drawings between the campus distributor, floor distributors, and the telecommunications outlet assemblies at workstations. 3.1.2 Pathway Installations
Provide in accordance with TIA/EIA-569-B and NFPA 70. Provide building pathway as specified in Section 26 20 00, INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS. 3.1.3 Service Entrance Conduit, Underground
Provide service entrance underground as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS. 3.1.4 Cable Tray Installation
Install cable tray as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS for wire basket tray and 27 05 28.36 40 for Telecom Room Cable Trays. 3.1.5 3.1.5.1 Work Area Outlets Terminations
Terminate UTP cable in accordance with TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2 and wiring configuration as specified. 3.1.5.2 Cover Plates
As a minimum, each outlet/connector shall be labeled as to its function and a unique number to identify cable link in accordance with the paragraph LABELING in this section. 3.1.5.3 Cables
Unshielded twisted pair and fiber optic cables shall have a minimum of 12 inches of slack cable loosely coiled into the telecommunications outlet boxes. Minimum manufacturer's bend radius for each type of cable shall not be exceeded. 3.1.5.4 Pull Cords
Pull cords shall be installed in conduit serving telecommunications outlets that do not have cable installed.
SECTION 27 10 00
Page 16
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.1.6
Telecommunications Space Termination
Install termination hardware required for Category 6 and optical fiber system. An insulation displacement tool shall be used for terminating copper cable to insulation displacement connectors. 3.1.6.1 Connector Blocks
Connector blocks shall be wall mounted in orderly rows and columns. Adequate vertical and horizontal wire routing areas shall be provided between groups of blocks. Install in accordance with industry standard wire routing guides in accordance with TIA/EIA-569-B. 3.1.6.2 Patch Panels
Patch panels shall be mounted in equipment racks with sufficient ports to accommodate the installed cable plant plus 25 percent spares. a. Copper Patch Panel. Copper cable entering a patch panel shall be secured to the panel with velcro ties to prevent movement of the cable. Fiber Optic Patch Panel. in length. Equipment Support Frames Fiber optic cable loop shall be 2 meters
b.
3.1.6.3
Install in accordance with TIA/EIA-569-B: b. Racks, floor mounted modular type. Permanently anchor rack to the floor in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
3.1.7
Electrical Penetrations
Seal openings around electrical penetrations through fire resistance-rated wall, partitions, floors, or ceilings as specified in Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING. 3.1.8 Grounding and Bonding
Provide in accordance with TIA J-STD-607-A, NFPA 70 and as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS. 3.2 3.2.1 LABELING Labels
Provide labeling in accordance with I3A and local IMD requirements. Handwritten labeling is unacceptable. Stenciled lettering for voice and data circuits shall be provided using laser printer. 3.2.2 Cable
Cables shall be labeled using color labels on both ends with identifiers in accordance with TIA/EIA-606. 3.2.3 Termination Hardware
Workstation outlets and patch panel connections shall be labeled using SECTION 27 10 00 Page 17
W912HN-12-R-0003
color coded labels with identifiers in accordance with TIA/EIA-606. 3.3 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING
Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria. Painting shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS. 3.4 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE MOUNTING
Provide number, location, and letter designation of nameplates as indicated. Fasten nameplates to the device with a minimum of two sheet-metal screws or two rivets. 3.5 3.5.1 TESTING Telecommunications Cabling Testing
Perform telecommunications cabling inspection, verification, and performance tests in accordance with TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2, TIA-568-C.3. Perform optical fiber field inspection tests via attenuation measurements on factory reels and provide results along with manufacturer certification for factory reel tests. Remove failed cable reels from project site upon attenuation test failure. 3.5.1.1 Inspection
Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber jacket materials for UL or third party certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations in telecommunications rooms and at workstations to confirm color code for T568A or T568B pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections to confirm compliance with TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2, TIA-568-C.3. Visually confirm Category 6 marking of outlets, cover plates, outlet/connectors, and patch panels. 3.5.1.2 Verification Tests
UTP backbone copper cabling shall be tested for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors, and between conductors and shield, if cable has overall shield. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross-connected. For single-mode optical fiber, perform optical fiber end-to-end attenuation tests in accordance with TIA-568-C.3 and TIA-526-7 using Method A, Optical Power Meter and Light Source. Perform verification acceptance tests. 3.5.1.3 Performance Tests
Perform testing for each outlet as follows: b. Perform Category 6 link tests in accordance with TIA-568-C.1. Tests shall include wire map, length, insertion loss, NEXT, PSNEXT, ELFEXT, PSELFEXT, return loss, propagation delay, and delay skew. Optical fiber Links. Perform optical fiber end-to-end link tests in accordance with TIA-568-C.3.
c.
SECTION 27 10 00
Page 18
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.5.1.4
Final Verification Tests
Perform verification tests for UTP and optical fiber systems after the complete telecommunications cabling and workstation outlet/connectors are installed. a. Voice Tests. These tests assume that dial tone service has been installed. Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Go off-hook and listen and receive a dial tone. If a test number is available, make and receive a local, long distance, and DSN telephone call. b. Data Tests. These tests assume the Information Technology Staff has a network installed and are available to assist with testing. Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Log onto the network to ensure proper connection to the network. -- End of Section --
SECTION 27 10 00
Page 19
W912HN-12-R-0003
SECTION 27 21 00.00 40 INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEM 11/08 PART 1 1.1 GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. ACOUSTICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA (ASA) ASA S3.2 (2009) Method for Measuring the Intelligibility of Speech Over Communication Systems (ASA 85) INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE) IEEE C62.41.1 (2002; R 2008) Guide on the Surges Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits (2002) Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits
IEEE C62.41.2
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) NFPA 70 (2011; TIA 11-1; Errata 2011; TIA 11-2; TIA 11-3; TIA 11-4) National Electrical Code UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) UL 50 (2007) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-environmental Considerations (2007) Standard for Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel (2007) Standard for Electrical Metallic Tubing -- Steel
UL 6
UL 797
1.2
Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, applies to this section, with the additions and modifications specified herein. 1.3 1.3.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Performance Requirement for Type 1 System
Solid state, modular in design, and shall be of the wired type with master and remote stations intermixed. System shall consist of one parking pedistal mounted remote station, two interior master stations with capacity for later expansion to 3 master2 remote stations without SECTION 27 21 00.00 40 Page 1
W912HN-12-R-0003
sacrificing any equipment or feature performance. 1.3.1.1 Sound Reproduction
The intercommunication system shall reproduce at all receiving stations a 30 dB dynamic range of a 40 dB minimum input signal referenced to sound pressure level (SPL) over the frequency range of 300 to 3300 Hz. Unless otherwise specified, SPL shall be 20 micro Pascal (0.00002 Newtons per square meter). The root-mean square (rms) extraneous noise (e.g. hum) level introduced by the intercommunication system shall be at least 30 dB below the nominal signal level. Distortion, including envelope delay, intermodulation, cross talk, and other nonlinear source, shall not exceed 5 percent. 1.3.1.2 System Performance
Provide system with normally acceptable speech intelligibility, defined as a score of at least 75 percent obtained utilizing the phonetically balanced monosyllabic work intelligibility test in accordance with ASA S3.2. 1.3.1.3 System Operation and Service Features
a. Provide the system with a power switch and an associated pilot light for ON and OFF operations. Include a volume switch at each station to regulate listening volume. Unless otherwise specified, operate the system on 120 Vac, single phase, 60 Hz source. b. All master stations shall have a "call-in" switch to provide an audible and visual indication of incoming calls from remote station. Individual visual indication shall identify calling station and status, and remain actuated until a call is answered by a master station. c. In addition to the manufacturer's standard identification plates, provide engraved laminated phenolic identification plates for each component connection and terminal identification labels, and shall be 3-layer black on white on black, engraved to show white letters on black background. Warning or caution labels shall be 3-layers red on white on red, engrave to show white letters on red background. Clearly mark control switches and knobs with their function and status. Locate identification strips for station selector switches to clearly identify remote and master stations and protect by transparent plastic inserts. Lettering shall be a minimum of 1/4 inch high, normal block style. d. At speaker/handset stations, lifting the handset shall automatically cut out the loudspeaker in the station and all conversation shall be carried through handset. 1.4 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-02 Shop Drawings Intercommunication system
SECTION 27 21 00.00 40
Page 2
W912HN-12-R-0003
Submit for overall system and for each major component. Illustrate how each item of equipment will function in the system and include an overall system schematic indicating relationship of intercommunication units on one diagram identifying type, size, and number of wiring, conduits and each major component. SD-03 Product Data Materials and equipment for Type 1 system Cables and raceways Surge protection SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Intercommunication system, Data Package 5 Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA. PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS EQUIPMENT AND COMPONENTS
Equipment and components shall conform to applicable requirements of NFPA 70. Units of the same type of the equipment shall be product of single manufacturer. Units to be mounted outside or subject to inclement conditions shall be weatherproof or to be mounted in weatherproof enclosures. 2.1.1 Type 1 System: Direct Connected Keyed Intercommunication System
Provide master stations and remote stations in the quantities indicated. Each master station shall selectively communicate with any other master station and any remote station by actuating an appropriate selector switch. 2.1.1.1 Master Station
Desk -mounted master stations shall as a minimum conform to the following specifications: a. Capacity: Accommodate a total of 6 stations in any combination of master and remote. Speaker sensitivity: Minimum 40 dB
b. 2.1.1.2
Intercommunication Amplifier
Intercommunication amplifier shall as a minimum conform to the following specifications: a. Output power: 800 mW rms or greater @ 20 ohms for reception and 500 mW rms or greater for transmission. Total harmonic distortion: Less than 5 percent at rated power with a load equivalent to one station connected to output terminals
b.
SECTION 27 21 00.00 40
Page 3
W912HN-12-R-0003
c. d.
Signal-to-noise ratio:
60 dB or greater at rated output Plus or minus 2 dB from 200 Hz to
Frequency response ratio: 10,000 Hz Remote Station
2.1.1.3
Gate pedistal-mounted weather resistant remote station shall have stainless faceplate with temper proof mounting screws and galvanized steel backbox and red mushroom call button. . Remote station shall provide a speaker with a minimum sensitivity of 40 dB for speakers less than 8 inches in diameter and 45 dB for speakers 8 inches or greater. 2.2 CABLES AND RACEWAYS
Cable and raceways shall conform to UL 6 and UL 797. Cabinets and boxes shall conform to UL 50. Cables for use in air plenums shall be UL classified low smoke and low flame in accordance with NFPA 70. 2.2.1 Speaker Cable
Basic cables shall be single twisted pair shielded cables, 22 gage, stranded tinned copper with vinyl insulation aluminum polyester shield, stranded tinned copper wire with overall vinyl jacket. Multi-conductor shielded pair cables conforming to basic speaker cable specifications are acceptable. 2.3 TERMINALS
Terminals shall be solderless, tool-crimped pressure type. 2.4 SURGE PROTECTION
Major components of the system such as master stations, amplifiers, and remote stations, shall have a device, either internal or external, which shall provide protection against voltage spikes and current surges conforming to IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2. 2.5 ENCLOSURES
Enclosures shall be compatible with the equipment specified and shall comply with UL 50 and suitable for location installed. PART 3 3.1 3.1.1 EXECUTION INSTALLATION General
Install all system components and appurtenances in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and as specified herein. 3.1.2 Wiring
Install wiring in rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit, cable tray, or electric metallic tubing as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Wiring for signal circuits shall terminate on identified terminal blocks in cabinets and master station enclosures. Terminate audio circuits on identified terminal blocks in cabinets and SECTION 27 21 00.00 40 Page 4
W912HN-12-R-0003
master stations. 3.1.2.1
Ground cable shield at one end of termination.
Signal Wiring and Control Wiring
Install signal and control circuits in accordance with NFPA 70. Provide type of signal and control wires and number of conductors as recommended by the intercommunication system manufacturer, and as necessary to provide a complete and operable system. 3.1.3 Grounding
NFPA 70. Ground and distribution ground buses shall be solid copper wire with insulating covering. 3.2 3.2.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Acceptance Tests
After installation has been completed, Contractor shall conduct an acceptance test in the presence of the Contracting Officer or its representative, to demonstrate that the equipment operates in accordance with specification requirements. Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer 2 weeks prior to performance of tests. The acceptance tests shall include originating and accepting messages at specified stations, at proper volume levels, without cross-talk or noise from other links or non-designated units. Test shall utilize the phonetically balanced monosyllabic work intelligibility test in accordance with ASA S3.2. In order to be acceptable a score of at least 75 percent must be obtained for each system test. 3.2.2 Retesting
Rectify deficiencies indicated by tests and completely retest work affected by such deficiencies at Contractor's expense. 3.3 INSPECTION
Make observations to verify that units and controls are properly labeled, a nd interconnecting wires and terminals identified.
SECTION 27 21 00.00 40
Page 5
W912HN-12-R-0003
SECTION 27 41 00.00 10 NURSE CALL AUDIO-VISUAL (NCAV) SYSTEM 04/06 PART 1 1.1 GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) NFPA 70 (2011; TIA 11-1; Errata 2011; TIA 11-2; TIA 11-3; TIA 11-4) National Electrical Code (2012) Health Care Facilities Code TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION (TIA) TIA-569-B (2004; Amd 1 2009) Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces
NFPA 99
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) UL 1069 (2007; Reprint Jan 2009) Hospital Signaling and Nurse Call Equipment (2005; Reprint Oct 2011) Uninterruptible Power Systems
UL 1778
1.2 1.2.1
DEFINITIONS General Definitions
The glossary of definitions, abbreviations and acronyms, and units set forth in TIA-569-B and UL 1069 shall apply to this Section, unless otherwise noted. 1.2.2 Additional Acronyms
For the purposes of this Section, the following definitions shall apply. ADT CFR COTS CPU LAN NC Admission, Discharge, and Transfer (Computer Program) Code of Federal Regulations Commercial-Off-The-Shelf (Products) Central Processing Unit Local Area Network Nurse Call (Subsystems) SECTION 27 41 00.00 10 Page 1
W912HN-12-R-0003
NCAV NCTV O&M UON UPS 1.2.3
Nurse Call Audio-Visual (System) Nurse Call Tone-Visual (Systems) Operation and Maintenance (Manuals) Unless Otherwise Noted Uninterruptible Power Supply
Additional Terms
For the purposes of this Section, following definitions shall apply. Attendant Audio Call Station The person that is operating a master station. Stations with voice intercom capability where patients or staff can originate calls. Includes patient stations, staff stations, and duty stations. Communications between patients and caregivers, and among caregivers, that are transmitted through the NCAV System and interconnected supplementary systems. Call communications modes for the NCAV System include alert tones, visual indicators, voice intercom, and digital display of alphanumeric data and text messages. A person who is directly involved in the care of patients. Radio Page Receiver. Operating systems and application programs that enable a computer, or computer-based system, to function as specified. Software shall include the documentation to describe, maintain and use the programs. NCAV System, UON.
Call
Caregiver
Pager Software
System System Application Design
Contractor performed systems engineering to combine and configure a collection of hardware and software components into a functioning system that has been customized and tailored to satisfy the specified and indicated requirements. The system application design shall assure that the configuration and working relationships among all of the components of the system and all interfaces provides the specified capability and performance.
Telecommunications Systems
All low voltage and power limited Communications and Security Systems installed in the facility. This does NOT include Fire Alarm Systems, Environmental Control Systems, and Special Building Alarm Systems.
Telecommunications Rooms
Controlled environment rooms on each floor level that provide the floor and wall space for the mounting of equipment and cable distribution terminations and devices for all telecommunications systems A workplace that is constantly staffed 24 hours per day, SECTION 27 41 00.00 10 Page 2
24x7 Staffed
W912HN-12-R-0003
7 days per week, 365 days per year. 1.3 1.3.1 1.3.1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Design Requirements System Application Design
The system Contractor shall perform the system application design required to provide a NCAV System that complies with and satisfies all of the requirements specified in this Section and indicated on the drawings for this application and project. Provide new NCAV subsystems fully integrated with the existing Jeron provider 680 system for all current functions as well as future reporting, paging, or telephone/wireless and ADT interface. Products shall be manufactured by Jeron Electronics Systems, Inc. or equal. Provide upgrades to existing system as necessary to accomodate the subsystems additions. 1.3.1.2 Minimal Requirements
Specifications are minimal requirements. If the provided system requires enhanced specifications that exceed those specified herein in order to satisfy the specified design, configuration, capability, and performance requirements, then a system with the enhanced specifications shall be provided at no additional cost to the Government. 1.3.1.3 Current State-Of-The-Art Technology
The NCAV System application design and products shall utilize current state-of-the-art computer, networking, and communications technology to provide the enhanced capability and performance specified herein. 1.3.1.4 Continuous Duty Design
All equipment shall be designed for 24 hours per day, 365 days per year continuous 100 percent duty operation. 1.3.1.5 Power Supply Design
a. Power supplies shall provide sufficient power capacity for the worst-case condition of system operation and signaling that could occur in the application environment without any loss or perceptible degradation of signal quality. Design analysis shall include calculations to size power supplies for worst-case conditions, and this calculation shall be included with the design data submittal. b. AC powered equipment shall operate in accordance with specifications over the range of 105V to 130V, 60 Hz, unless otherwise noted. c. All equipment connected to ac power circuits shall be protected from power line transients and surges as likely to be subjected in service from a commercial utility ac power system. Protection shall be integral to the equipment or installed as an accessory item in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. Fuses shall not be used for this protection. SECTION 27 41 00.00 10 Page 3
W912HN-12-R-0003
d. Power distributed over system cables shall be low voltage and power limited in accordance with NFPA 70 and UL 1069. 1.3.1.6 Shielding and Grounding
All products shall be shielded and grounded as required by the system design, Manufacturer's instructions, UL 1069 listing, and regulatory requirements. 1.3.1.7 Station Connectors Stations hardwired to system
All stations shall plug into system cabling. cabling are not acceptable. 1.3.1.8 User Room Numbers and Names
a. Architectural room numbers and names indicated on the contract documents may be used for the initial system application design and installation work. However, in the final system application design, medical facility user room numbers and names that have been designated by the Contracting Officer shall be used for all system functions and as-built documentation. c. User room numbers and names shall be consistent with the room numbers and names used in the medical facility information system ADT program, and on the medical facility signage. d. Programmable assignment of patient room/bed number identification shall provide for up to ten alphanumeric characters for each room/bed. It shall be possible to program any identifying alphanumeric characters to any room or bed in any sequence regardless of the physical location of the patient station. 1.3.2 1.3.2.1 System Capability and Configuration System Capability
The NCAV System shall communicate patient and caregiver calls for assistance and information. The NCAV System capabilities shall include the following: a. Fundamental operation for communication of patient and caregiver calls for assistance and information, medical device alarms, and patient safety and security alarms, from patient care spaces and areas. b. Future capability for supplemental operation, as an enhanced adjunct to the fundamental operation, for communication of patient ADT data, networked call routing, call logging and reporting, and system maintenance. c. Future capability for supplemental enhanced communication of call data and messages to alphanumeric pagers and the messaging capability of wireless telephones carried by appropriate medical facility staff. d. Interface with the Section 27 52 32.00 10 NURSE CALL TONE-VISUAL (NCTV) SYSTEM for integrated use by the NCTV System of the supplemental enhanced operations provided by the NCAV System.
SECTION 27 41 00.00 10
Page 4
W912HN-12-R-0003
1.3.2.2
System Configuration and Major Functional Components
The NCAV System shall be an integrated configuration of the Major Functional Components listed below to provide the required system capability and performance. The capability and configuration of each of these Major Functional Components are defined below. Nurse Call (NC) Subsystems Central Code Annunciator Station Additions Local Area Network (LAN) System Server Supplement
1.3.2.3
NC Subsystems
a. Subsystems. A NC Subsystem shall serve each of the patient care areas listed on drawing TK 001 Medical Communications Legend for the communication of patient and caregiver calls. The telecommunications drawings indicate the location and boundaries of the patient care areas listed. b. Major NC Subsystem Components. (1) The major components listed below shall be provided for the NC Subsystems at locations as indicated on the telecommunications drawings. Code Blue Stations Dome Lights Duty Stations Emergency Push Button Stations Emergency Pull Cord Stations Master Stations Staff Stations Zone Lights Main Terminal/Equipment Panels (2) The major components listed below, which are not indicated on the telecommunications drawings, shall be provided as required by the NC Subsystems design. UPS for ac powered equipment 1.3.2.4 Voice Intercom Network
A voice intercom network shall provide full-duplex voice communications within all NC Subsystems. Voice intercom network components shall be located as required by the system application design. 1.3.2.5 LAN
a. A dedicated NCAV System LAN shall connect all Major Functional Components of the system into an integrated network for system wide data communications for the functions specified in this Section. b. The NCAV System LAN shall be interfaced with the medical facility Information Systems LAN through the Information System Server and the Call Logging Server for functions as specified in this Section. SECTION 27 41 00.00 10 Page 5
W912HN-12-R-0003
c. LAN equipment shall be located as required by the system application design. d. Integrate the NCAV System LAN with the NCTV System LAN for data communications of NCTV System calls to the NCAV System Central Code Annunciator Station. 1.3.2.6 Central Code Annunciator Stations
a. Provide additions to the existing Master Code Annunciation Station for the central annunciation of all Code Blue calls from all NC Subsystems equipped with code blue stations. The Master Code Annunciator Station shall be located at a central 24x7 staffed location as indicated on the telecommunications drawings. 1.3.3 1.3.3.1 a. Performance Requirements NC Subsystems Functions and Features Communication of calls for assistance. (3) Call features shall be as specified herein. 1.3.3.2 Voice Intercom Features
a. Master stations and audio call stations shall be equipped for voice intercom. Audio call stations include staff stations and duty stations. b. Voice intercom shall be full-duplex to provide clear and distinct bi-directional, simultaneous two-way communications between the calling and answering stations throughout the system. Simplex talk/listen intercom systems that utilize voice activated (VOX) or other switching circuits that permit transmission in only one direction at a time, or which may clip portions of a two-way conversation, shall not be permitted. d. Audio Call Stations: These stations shall provide a full-duplex intercom with the serving master station, and with wireless phones interfaced with the system. The audio call station microphone shall be whisper-sensitive capable of picking up very soft-spoken conversations from anywhere in the room. The audio call station speaker shall be of permanent magnet design, of sufficient quality to provide low distortion voice reproduction anywhere in the room at reasonable volume levels. e. Master Stations: Master stations shall be equipped with a telephone style handset with a self-coiling cord and cradle assembly with built-in hookswitch. The handset shall provide a natural, full-duplex, uninterrupted voice intercom with all audio call stations and master stations in the system. No voice activated switching or push to talk circuitry shall be permitted at the master station. The handset earpiece volume shall be adjustable. Master Stations shall include the capability to plug-in and utilize a headset in place of the handset. The headset shall include a noise canceling microphone, ear cushions, and a volume control, and shall provide the same quality natural, full-duplex voice intercom as provided by the handset. The headset shall be fully adjustable to fit the attendant.
SECTION 27 41 00.00 10
Page 6
W912HN-12-R-0003
f. There shall be at least two simultaneous full-duplex voice intercom paths per NC Subsystem to allow voice intercom between a master station and an audio call station while there is a simultaneous voice intercom between a wireless phone and another audio call station. 1.3.3.3 Call Types and Points of Origin
NCAV System shall communicate the call types defined below from the noted points of origin. e. Emergency Call. Patient or caregiver calls for emergency assistance from a patient station, emergency push button station, emergency pull cord station, or staff station that is equipped with an emergency push button. f. Code Blue Call. code blue station. Caregiver calls for code blue assistance from a
m. Voice Intercom Call. A voice intercom call from a staff station or duty station, to the master station handing the calls from the patient care area. Also, a voice intercom call from a master station to any other master station, and to any audio call station within the patient care area served by the master station. p. Failure Alarm Call. Failure alarm calls from all electronically supervised circuits and equipment, and from all failure diagnostic programs throughout the system. 1.3.3.4 Call Annunciation Modes
a. Each call shall annunciate throughout the system by various combinations of visual indications, alert tones, and the digital display of alphanumeric data and text messages. The specific annunciation for each call type shall be as specified herein for each type and source of call. b. When a call is placed from any call station, including code blue stations, emergency stations, duty stations, or staff stations, a call assurance indicator lamp on the station shall illuminate to indicate that the call has been registered on the system. This call assurance lamp shall remain illuminated until the call is cancelled. c. On dome lights and zone lights, a variety of colored lamps with steady or flashing illumination shall provide clear and absolute distinction between call priority levels. Call indications on zone lights shall be absolutely identical to the call indication on dome lights for each call type. The dome light for any patient toilet room that opens into a procedure room shall be equipped with an electronic call alert tone device that shall sound when a call is initiated. d. On master stations: (1) A call alert tone shall sound. (2) The LCD monitor shall digitally display alphanumeric data and text message information identifying the call type and call origination. The user room name/number shall identify the call origination room.
SECTION 27 41 00.00 10
Page 7
W912HN-12-R-0003
(3) Call data, information and status shall remain displayed on the monitor until the call is canceled. e. On code annunciator stations, a visual display shall indicate the call type and call origination patient care area and room, and sound an alert tone. The visual display shall either indicate all calls simultaneously, or scroll through multiple calls that are not simultaneously displayed. The user room name and number shall identify the call origination room. f. On duty stations, LED lamp(s) with steady or flashing illumination shall indicate calls by the call priority level, and sound an alert tone. If multiple call indicator lamps are provided, the call indication patterns shall be identical to the call indication patterns on dome lights. g. Call alert tone signals on dome lights, zone lights, duty stations, master stations, and annunciator stations shall sound at different intermittent pulse rates to provide a clear and absolute distinction between call priorities. The volume level of alert tones shall be adjustable. The actual sound volume level setting for each device in each area shall be adjusted as coordinated with and defined by the medical facility user. i. The alert tones and visual indication displays for all types and priorities of calls shall continue until the call has been answered and canceled. Except for routine calls, all calls shall be canceled at the originating call station. Routine calls can be canceled at either the originating station or the answering master station. j. Tone and light signals for each call type on the NCAV System shall be consistent with the tone and light signals for the same call type on any NCTV System in the same medical facility. 1.3.3.5 Call Annunciation Priorities
a. The annunciation of call types shall be sequenced in a three level priority rank order, from a high of Number 1 to a low of Number 3, as listed below. Priority Level #1 Code #2 Emergency Call Type Code Blue Emergency Failure Alarm Voice Intercom
#3 Priority
b. The system shall simultaneous process all calls regardless of the priority. However, when several different priority calls are present on the system at any one time, the highest priority call shall take precedence over lower priority calls. (1) For annunciation on duty stations, dome lights, and zone lights that use common tone and visual indicators for multiple types of calls, the highest priority call shall override the lower priority call. For example, if dome or zone lights indicate an emergency call by a solid red light and a code blue by a flashing red light, the dome and zone lights shall display a flashing red SECTION 27 41 00.00 10 Page 8
W912HN-12-R-0003
light when there are both an emergency call and a code call at the same time. (2) For master stations that display calls in a list, the displayed list of calls shall be in priority order, with the highest priority calls at the top of the displayed list. Existing lower priority calls shall be displaced in the displayed list by the occurrence of a higher priority call. For example, if a routine call is first in the list and a code call occurs, the code call shall jump ahead of the routine call in the displayed list. (3) When more then one call is being processed at the same time through the radio page server and/or wireless phone server, the highest priority call type shall take precedence and be transmitted ahead of lower priority calls. 1.3.3.6 Call Routing
Call routing throughout the system shall be software programmable to provide the selectable call routing defined below. All patient data and caregiver data associated with any call shall automatically accompany the call routing. a. Call Routing - Dome Lights. All call types from any call station within a patient care room or cubicle shall annunciate on the dome light(s) located outside the entry into the room or cubicle. Calls from patient toilet/shower rooms off of a patient bedroom shall annunciate on the dome light located outside the entry into the patient bedroom. b. Call Routing - Zone Lights (1) Within a patient care area, the routing of any call type from any call station to each zone light shall be programmable to allow annunciation of calls on a zone light from any combination of call stations. Each zone light shall be programmed to present a pattern of illuminated zone lights that the caregiver can follow from any corridor in the patient care area to get to the corridor where a call has been initiated from a patient care room along the corridor. (2) Outside entries to patient care areas that are equipped with code blue stations zone lights are provided to direct code response teams into the patient care area. These zone lights shall be programmed to only indicate code calls. Once the code response team is inside the patient care area, they will then follow the code call indications on the zone lights within the area. (3) The Zone Light Activation Matrices at the end of this Section lists the identification (ID) number of all zone lights indicated on the telecommunications plans, and relates these to the patient care rooms where calls are originated that activate the zone lights. c. Call Routing - Master Stations. Master station features shall provide the attendant with the selectable call routing defined below. This shall include the routing of voice intercom between any master station and any audio call station. SECTION 27 41 00.00 10 Page 9
W912HN-12-R-0003
(1) A default call routing scheme within each patient care area shall be established for calls between each call originating station and the master station(s) in a NC Subsystem. If there is more then one master station in a NC Subsystem, then the default call routing to each master station shall be user defined and approved by the Contracting Officer. (2) Any call from any call originating station can be selectively routed to, and answered from, any master station in any NC Subsystem throughout the entire integrated NCAV System. (3) Any one master station in any NC Subsystem shall be able to handle any combination of calls, or all of the calls, from any call originating station in any NC Subsystem. (4) Any combination of master stations throughout all NC Subsystem can be programmed to operate in a parallel mode. In this parallel mode, all calls that would normally be routed to a master station will now be routed to all master stations in the parallel mode at the same time. The parallel mode can be either a default setting or an attendant selectable mode at any master station. (5) An attendant at any master station shall be able to perform a selective call capture function whereby any call originating station that has been default programmed for call routing to any other master station shall be rerouted to the capturing master station. The attendant shall be able to selectively capture single rooms, groups of rooms, or all the rooms that have been default assigned to another master station. The rerouting of calls from any room shall include all associated patient and caregiver data that has been programmed for the room, including caregiver duty assignments. (6) Master stations that have relinquished reception of calls to another master station via the call capture function shall retain the capability to originate radio and wireless phone pages. (7) An attendant at any master station shall be able to recapture calls from any NC Subsystem or any call station that has been captured by another master station by performing a selectable recapture function. d. Call Routing - Code Annunciator Stations (1) All code blue and infant code blue calls from all NC Subsystems that are equipped with code blue stations shall be routed to the existing central Master Code Annunciation Station in addition to the normal local annunciation on a master station. e. Call Routing - Duty Stations (1) All duty stations shall be equipped to annunciate all call types. (2) Call routing from any call station to each duty station shall be programmable to allow annunciation of calls on a duty station from any combination of call stations within a patient care area.
SECTION 27 41 00.00 10
Page 10
W912HN-12-R-0003
1.3.3.7
Call Processing Rates
a. The total elapsed time between the initiation of a call from a call station to the display of that call on a master station or annunciator station shall not exceed four (4) seconds. b. The total elapsed time between the initiation of a call from a call station to the input of that call to the Radio Paging System or the Wireless Telephone System shall not exceed four (4) seconds. 1.3.3.8 Failure Modes, Alarms and Diagnostics
a. Failure of the LAN shall not affect the functional integrity of any other Major Functional Component connected to the LAN. b. If any master station fails, the dome lights and zone lights shall continue to indicate calls from patient care rooms. c. At a minimum, a failure alarm shall be automatically initiated by a total failure of the NCAV System, by failure of any Major Functional Component of the system, by failure of any power supply, by failure of any supervised circuit, and by failure of any circuit or component monitored by built-in fault diagnostics. d. If the installed system includes any other built-in fault diagnostics designed in by the Manufacturer, there shall be automatic failure alarm indications resulting from these built-in fault diagnostics. e. Failure alarms shall be annunciated locally on the individual Major Functional Component, communicated to the Maintenance Workstation, and transmitted to pagers carried by the medical facility maintenance staff. 1.3.4 Detail Drawings
Submit Coordination Drawings as specified in the Submittals paragraph and detail drawings to scale including: a. System block diagram, LAN diagram and interfaces, voice intercom network diagram, riser diagrams, wiring and schematic diagrams, run sheets including number of conductors and wire number (ID), custom assembly details, and installation details. b. Riser diagrams shall indicate the identification number (ID) for all zone lights as shown on the plan drawings. c. Installation details shall indicate layout and mounting of equipment, equipment relationship to other parts of the work, including clearances required for maintenance and operation, and plan and elevation details that indicate the exact and totally coordinated physical location and size of each individual item of equipment. d. Details for the custom assembly of equipment shall indicate the assembly configuration, elevations and dimensions. Typical custom assembly details include equipment panels, and equipment mounted in a rack or cabinet.
SECTION 27 41 00.00 10
Page 11
W912HN-12-R-0003
1.4
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Qualifications; ; G, AE NCAV System Contractor, Installer, and Manufacturer qualifications. Proposed system information. SD-02 Shop Drawings Detail Drawings; ; G, AE Drawings and diagrams specifically prepared to indicate the work of this project. Coordination Drawings; ; G, AE Coordination drawings indicating the details of all electronic and physical interfaces between the NCAV System and all interfaced telecommunications systems, including the exact point and type of demarcation. As-Built System Drawings; ; G, AE As-built drawings including all approved detail drawings and coordination drawings that have been updated to indicate the final as-built configuration of all equipment and cables as installed. In addition to the architectural room names and numbers, as-built drawings shall indicate the medical facility user room names and numbers for all rooms where equipment has been installed. SD-03 Product Data Material and Equipment; ; G, AE The Manufacturer's product data and specifications, and other information in sufficient detail and scope to verify that each product item is in compliance with requirements of the contract documents. Include a description of the system operating characteristics and individual product data sheets for each item of equipment indicating descriptive and technical data, operating temperature limits, heat dissipated, electrical requirements, dimensions and mounting restrictions. If a product data sheet covers several types or sizes of the product, the sheet shall be marked to indicate the specific item provided. A letter from the Manufacturer, stating that the medical facility will be notified whenever system upgrades and enhancements are available, shall accompany the submittal. Listing of all hardware, software, cables, and materials products arranged in the order of the specification, including the specification paragraph number, name, Manufacturer and model for each item, and a reference to the SECTION 27 41 00.00 10 Page 12
W912HN-12-R-0003
Manufacturer's product data sheet for the item. Warranty; ; G, AE Warranty document indicating the warranty period for the system and all component products. Maintenance Service; ; G, AE For maintenance service after the warranty period, the system Contractor shall submit a service agreement proposal to the medical facility. SD-04 Samples Product Samples; ; G, AE One sample unit of each type of station, light, and cord set for approval. SD-05 Design Data Power Supply Design; ; G, AE a. Analysis and calculations to define power supply requirements for each Major Functional Component of the system in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions, and the worst-case power loading conditions. b. Analysis and calculations to define the type and size of all cables for the system in accordance with Manufacturers instructions and power drop calculations. c. Analysis and supporting result from specified preparation and application items, and all coordination items. Includes definition of all interface protocols. d. AC power consumption and heat dissipation data under both normal and maximum operating conditions. SD-06 Test Reports Acceptance Test Plan; ; G, AE Step-by-step actions and the expected results to demonstrate system compliance with the requirements of this specification and compliance with medical facility user setup requirements. Include tests defined in the Manufacturers installation instructions; list of all test equipment to be used, including data indicating that calibration of the test equipment is current; test data sheets; and names and qualifications of the person(s) who will perform the tests. Acceptance Test Report; ; G, AE Test reports in both electronic media form and hard copy booklet form. Test reports shall indicate all field tests performed to adjust each component and to prove compliance with the specified performance criteria. Each test report shall indicate the final SECTION 27 41 00.00 10 Page 13
W912HN-12-R-0003
position of controls and operating mode of the system, and the Manufacturer, model number, and serial number of the test equipment used in each test. The final acceptance test report shall include a statement that all specified requirements and conditions have been satisfied. SD-07 Certificates Certificates of Compliance; ; G, AE Proof that the items conform to the specified codes or standards, including the requirements of CFR, NFPA, and UL. SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions Installation; ; G, AE Preprinted material from the Manufacturer describing installation requirements and safety precautions. Manufacturer's requirements for the use of specific products. SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Operating and Maintenance Manuals; ; G, AE O&M data in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA, Data Package 5. Reproduced copies of O&M Manuals will not acceptable if a printed manual is available from the Manufacturer. O&M Manuals available from the Manufacturer on a CD shall be submitted in addition to the hard copy manuals. Submit addenda to the O&M Manuals from the Manufacturer that describe any part of the system application design that is either not covered by, or deviates from, the O&M Manuals from the Manufacturer. Software Manuals; G, AE; The software manual describing the functions of all software and including all other information necessary to enable proper loading, setup, testing, and operation. The software manual shall include: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Definition of terms and functions. Use of system and applications software. Procedures for system initialization, start-up and a shutdown. Alarm reports. Reports generation. Database format and requirements for data entry. Directory of all disk files.
h. Description of all communications protocols, including data formats, command characters, and a sample of each type of data transfer. SECTION 27 41 00.00 10 Page 14
W912HN-12-R-0003
Backup Software; G, AE Copy of all operating system and application software, on the type of electronic media acceptable to the Contracting Officer. Ghost copy of all hard disks in the system after all setup procedures have been completed, the system has been programmed for the required user operation, and acceptance tests have been successfully completed. Training Plan; ; G, AE Description of the training programs and materials to be provided. Identification and qualification of training instructors. Instructional schedules for all classes. Submit training materials used as part of the specified training programs including all training media, such as video recordings, CDs, and DVDs, that are available from the Manufacturer. 1.5 1.5.1 1.5.1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE Qualifications General Qualification Requirements
a. The NCAV System Contractor, Installer and Manufacturer shall each have the minimum qualifications specified, related to the type of system specified for this project. b. The Government reserves the right to accept or reject the system Contractor, Installer or Manufacturer based upon qualifications and ability to conform to specified requirements of this Section. System Contractors, Installers and Manufacturers that do not have the specified qualifications will not be acceptable and shall not be allowed to perform the work of this Section. c. The Government will determine the acceptability of any proposed system Contractor, Installer and Manufacturer based on submitted and verified documentation that substantiates that the proposed system Contractor, Installer and Manufacturer have the qualifications specified in this Section. d. The project Electrical Contractor shall not procure or install the system cabling or equipment unless said Electrical Contractor is separately and distinctly qualified as the system Contractor and or Installer in accordance with the qualifications specified in this Section. e. The system Contractor shall submit documented verification of the specified qualifications as part of the Preconstruction qualification submittal. The Government will have the right to request, inspect and verify references and resumes of all technical and managerial personnel assigned to the project. Qualification documentation shall include, but not be limited to the information outlined below. (1) A list of projects performed by the system Contractor and Installer during the last five years explicitly involving the type of system specified in this Section. The list shall include the name of the facility where the work was done, and the name, title, SECTION 27 41 00.00 10 Page 15
W912HN-12-R-0003
address and telephone number of a point of contact for the listed facility that can verify the work done. Lists shall be restricted to the facilities where the type of system delivered and installed are similar to and serve the same purpose as the system specified in this Section. Lists shall explicitly identify the make and model of the systems provided, and the total scope of work done for each and every facility on the list. (2) An organization chart for the system Contractor and Installer project team that will perform the work of this Section. (3) List and resumes of the principal personnel that will be assigned to work on this project and their assigned work responsibility and relationship with the project management structure. This shall include the following personnel: System Project Manager System Application Designer CAD Staff (that will prepare submittal drawings) Installation Technical and Supervisory Personnel Acceptance Testing Personnel Training Personnel For each individual, this shall include his or her education and experience explicitly relevant to their work assignment on this project, and also include the certificate for factory training where this qualification is specified. Experiences with other types of systems unrelated to the type of system specified in this Section are irrelevant and shall not be included. (4) Addresses of the system Contractor and Installer location where the work that is not done on the project site will be performed. This shall include, but not be limited to, the address for the following people, work, and services: principle responsible for this project; system application designer and documentation work; training personnel; repair and maintenance services; repair and maintenance supplies warehouse. (5) Telephone number that will be answered by staff 24 hours per day, 365 days per year, to obtain repair parts and maintenance service. (6) The Manufacturer's qualifications relative to the production of the type of system specified in this Section. (7) A letter from the Manufacturer stating that the system Contractor is an authorized distributor and service organization for the Manufacturer of the provided system. The letter shall also state the length of time that the system Contractor has been an authorized distributor. (8) A letter from the Manufacturer stating that system being provided satisfies all functional and product requirements specified in this Section. (9) A letter from the Manufacturer guaranteeing the availability of parts as specified.
SECTION 27 41 00.00 10
Page 16
W912HN-12-R-0003
1.5.1.2
System Contractor Qualifications
a. The system Contractor shall be regularly engaged in the system application design, documentation, installation, testing, training, and maintenance of the type of system specified in this Section, with a minimum of five years experience providing these services for systems having the same level of features and functions as the system being provided. b. The system Contractor shall be an authorized distributor and service organization for the Manufacturer of the provided systems for a minimum of at least five years. c. System Contractor personnel assigned to this project shall be factory trained or certified for the make and model of systems provided by the system Contractor to satisfy the specifications in this Section and shall have a minimum of five years experience performing the services that they will perform for this project. d. The system Contractor shall maintain a full complement of repair parts for the provided system and shall be able to furnish on-call maintenance service 24 hours per day, 365 days per year as specified herein. 1.5.1.3 Installer Qualifications
a. The Installer shall be regularly engaged in the business of installation of the type of system specified in this Section. b. The installation supervisor that will be assigned to this project shall be factory trained or certified for the make and model of system provided by the system Contractor to satisfy the specifications in this Section and shall have a minimum of five years experience in the installation of the specified types of system equipment and cables. c. Installer personnel that will be assigned to this project shall have a minimum of three years experience in the installation of the types of system equipment and cable specified in this Section. 1.5.1.4 Manufacturer Qualifications
a. The Manufacturer shall have a minimum of five years of experience in producing the type of system specified in this Section. b. The Manufacturer shall produce a system that satisfies all specified functional and product requirements. c. The Manufacturer shall guarantee availability of replacement parts for a minimum of seven years from date of final acceptance of the installed system by the Contracting Officer. 1.5.2 1.5.2.1 Regulatory Requirements UL 1069 Listing System shall be UL 1069 operations of the NCAV devices and operations shall 1069, and shall not in any
Fundamental devices and operations of the NCAV listed and labeled. Supplementary devices and System that enhance the fundamental nurse call be electrically isolated in accordance with UL SECTION 27 41 00.00 10
Page 17
W912HN-12-R-0003
way defeat the UL 1069 listing. 1.5.2.2 Design and Installation Work
All design and installation work shall comply with UL 1069, NFPA 70 NEC, NFPA 99, and TIA-569-B. 1.5.2.3 Electromagnetic Interference (EMI)
a. Installed system shall conform to the EMI standards specified in 47 CFR 15 rules and regulations, for EMI caused by computing devices. b. Within the normal medical facility environment, the installed system shall not generate nor be susceptible to any harmful electromagnetic emission, radiation, or induction that degrades, obstructs, or interrupts the operation of the installed system, and any computer system, life safety system, or patient monitoring system in the facility. c. In the event that any part of the system is subject to CFR technical standards different from those set forth herein, including without limitation the requirement that those computing devices marketed for use in business or industrial environments are certified by the FCC to comply with the Class B limit of the FCC Rules, such CFR standards shall apply in lieu of those set forth herein. d. In the event that, at the time of system acceptance testing, the applicable CFR technical standards shall differ from those set forth above, the system as installed shall conform to such then applicable CFR technical standards. e. In the event of a breach of the representations and warranties contained herein, the system Contractor shall, at their own expense, take all measures necessary to put the offending system into compliance with the applicable CFR technical standards. 1.6 1.6.1 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Protection
Store all products delivered and placed in storage with protection from the weather, humidity and temperature variation, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. 1.6.2 Delivery Coordination
Coordinate deliveries with the Contracting Officer to insure a timely installation. 1.6.3 Loss Liability
The system Contractor is liable for any loss due to delivery and storage problems. 1.6.4 Delivery Restrictions
No products or installation material shall be delivered to the job site more than one month prior to commencement of its installation. System products shall not leave the factory prior to six months before the time SECTION 27 41 00.00 10 Page 18
W912HN-12-R-0003
that the facility is ready for installation of the products. Obtain prior written approval of the shipping date from the Contracting Officer. 1.6.5 Contractor Responsibility
The system Contractor shall be responsible for all handling and control of products provided under this contract. 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING a. Each part of the system shall be installed and phased into operation as required by the project schedule. b. Schedule and coordinate work with all other trades and suppliers whose work is critical to the successful installation of the system. c. Furnish and install all required items for a complete and operating installation so as to cause no delay in work by Others, or completion of the facility project. d. Final inspection and acceptance testing of each system shall be performed after the system installation and commissioning has been completed. 1.8 WARRANTY a. Guarantee the operational and physical integrity of the provided system, including a warranty against all defects in design, equipment, materials, software, workmanship, and improper installation and adjustments, for a period of at least one year from the date that the fully operational system is accepted by the Government after satisfactory completion of final inspection and acceptance tests. This warranty shall not cover any malfunctions or damage caused by misuse, abuse or neglect. If the system Contractor or Manufacturer warranty is for a period longer than one year, the longest warranty period shall govern. The system Contractor shall furnish a warranty document with the Product Data submittal. b. During the warranty period any maintenance, adjustments or repairs shall be made free of charge. Repair service response time shall be as specified herein under Maintenance and Repair Service. Warranty repair of minor malfunctions desired by the Government at other than normal working hours may be charged at current labor rates for the premium portion of time. 1.9 1.9.1 1.9.1.1 MAINTENANCE Extra Materials Off-The-Shelf Maintenance Parts
The system Contractor shall guarantee that a stock of the Manufacturer's parts required for maintenance service shall be available off-the-shelf from the system Contractor or Manufacturer, and can be express delivered to the medical facility if not available locally. Parts that must be ordered from the Manufacturer for the repair of a major malfunction, as defined herein, shall be deliverable within one day after the major malfunction has been identified. Parts that must be ordered from the Manufacturer for the repair of a minor malfunction, as defined herein, shall be deliverable SECTION 27 41 00.00 10 Page 19
W912HN-12-R-0003
within three days after the minor malfunction has been identified. 1.9.1.2 Installation Spare Parts
The system Contractor shall keep an adequate quantity of installation spare parts onsite to preclude work stoppages and to meet other contingencies that might arise prior to the final inspection and acceptance of the system. 1.9.1.3 Post Acceptance Spare Parts
a. After the system has been acceptance tested and turned over to the Government for operation, furnish the minimum type and quantity of onsite spare parts as itemized below. Quantity __2___ __2___ __2___ __1___ Items incandescent lamp bulbs Station Light Terminal/Equipment Panel plug-in modules
Each Each Each Sets
type of type of type of of Main
b. Spare parts shall be maintained onsite by the system Contractor during the warranty period to facilitate quick repair through plug-in module replacement of key system components, then replenished and turned over to the Government at the end of warranty period at no additional cost to the Government. c. The system Contractor shall recommend any additional onsite spare parts deemed necessary by the Manufacturer and or the system Contractor. Furnish to the Contracting Officer the cost of recommended additional spare components as a separate line item. 1.9.1.4 Special Tools and Equipment
Furnish one set of any special tools necessary for the installation or maintenance of any system component. Furnish one set of any special installation or maintenance equipment necessary for the proper setup, programming, and maintenance of any system component or function. This shall include any required setup or diagnostic software programs. Deliver all special tools and equipment to the Government upon successful completion of the final inspection and acceptance testing of the system. 1.9.2 Maintenance Service a. System Contractor shall perform warranty maintenance service on the system using qualified maintenance personnel that have been factory trained for the system being serviced. b. For maintenance service after the warranty period, the system Contractor shall offer a Service Agreement to the medical facility. Include a copy of the proposed Service Agreement with the Product Data submittal. c. As authorized by the medical facility, the system Contractor can utilize medical facility maintenance personnel that have been factory trained for maintenance of the provided system, for the first level of response to a call for service. d. The system Contractor shall provide an on-line diagnostic maintenance support capability as specified herein. SECTION 27 41 00.00 10 Page 20
W912HN-12-R-0003
1.9.3
Service Availability and Response Time a. Maintenance service shall be available on a 24 hour per day, 7 days per week basis for on-premises maintenance service within 4 hours after notification of a major malfunction and within 24 hours after notification of a minor malfunction. b. A 24-hour telephone answering service shall be available to receive after hour maintenance service calls and dispatch on-call service personnel within the required response time. c. Repair of a major malfunction shall be accomplished within 8 hours of the reported failure. The occurrence of any of the following events shall constitute a major malfunction: (1) Complete failure of any Major Functional Component of the system, including: Nurse Call (NC) Subsystems Central Code Annunciator Stations Local Area Network (LAN (2) Failure of a power supply, exclusive of commercial ac power feed. (3) Failure of 20% or more of all stations in any one NC Subsystem to function as specified. (4) Failure of any NC Subsystem master station, code blue or infant code blue station, or emergency station. d. Repair of minor malfunctions shall be completed within 48 hours of the reported failure. A minor malfunction is any failure that does not constitute a major malfunction.
PART 2 2.1
PRODUCTS MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
The system application design shall utilize a standard, UL 1069 listed NCAV System that is the product of a Manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of NCAV Systems, and a system that has been in satisfactory use for at least six months. All products shall be new and free of defects. Modification of products that nullifies the UL listing or other agency approval is not permitted. Products of the same classification shall be identical. This requirement includes all component equipment, modules, assemblies, parts, and materials. The system shall be supported by a service organization that is, in the opinion of the Contracting Officer, reasonably convenient to the medical facility installation site. 2.1.1 Unspecified Products
If the provided system requires additional products that are not specified or indicated on the drawings, in order to satisfy the specified performance requirements for the system, then these additional component products shall be provided at no additional cost to the Government.
SECTION 27 41 00.00 10
Page 21
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.1.2
Nameplates and Equipment Markings
Each major equipment component shall have the Manufacturer's name, model, and serial number on a plate secured to the equipment. Also, all compliance with regulatory requirements, such as UL and CFR, shall be indicated on the nameplate or on adjacent labels. All controls on call stations shall be plainly and permanently labeled with the identification of the function served. Stick on marker tapes is not acceptable. Markings on any exposed surfaces shall not be destroyed by housekeeping solutions normally used in medical facilities. 2.1.3 Mounting Alignment Capability
Wall mounted components shall have an adjustable mounting alignment capability to compensate for improperly aligned backboxes and to insure a plumb, square, and level installation. 2.1.4 Model and Enhancements a. The system and all product components shall be the Manufacturer's latest model, design, version, and quality in production at time of delivery and installation. b. Any product hardware or software enhancement that becomes available after delivery and installation, and up to time of system acceptance, shall be brought to the attention of the Contracting Officer upon announcement by the Manufacturer and shall be made available to the medical facility. If such enhancements customarily are provided at no additional cost, the Government shall automatically be entitled to such enhancements. If such enhancements customarily are provided at additional cost, the Contracting Officer has the option to accept or reject such enhancements. c. Submit a letter to the Contracting Officer from the Manufacturer guaranteeing that the Manufacturer shall inform the Government of, and make available to the Government, all commercially available enhancements to the system hardware or software at the then current price. Include the letter with the product data submittal. d. Substitutions, modifications, or improvements to a system hardware and software are permissible provided that such substitution, modifications, or improvements shall not reduce or degrade the performance or product requirements, nor violate regulatory requirements. No such substitutions, modifications, or improvements shall be made without the written consent of the Manufacturer and Contracting Officer. Such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld or delayed. 2.1.5 Software and License
Provide all software required for the specified capability, configuration, performance, and operation of the system. The Government shall be granted a nonexclusive, fully paid perpetual license to use software provided. The Government receives no title or ownership rights to such Software. Software maintenance that is provided to any or all other customers without charge shall be provided to the Government at no additional cost to the Government.
SECTION 27 41 00.00 10
Page 22
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.1.6
Equipment Design for Wet Areas
All equipment that will be installed in wet areas shall be designed and constructed to withstand the UL 1069 Water Spray Test. 2.2 2.2.1 NC SUBSYSTEMS Emergency Pull Cord Stations a. Flush mount units.
b. An emergency call switch that is activated by pulling a nylon cord attached to the switch. The cord shall have a pendant attached to the end of the cord, and length extended to within 2 inches of the floor. The term "PULL FOR HELP" shall be located directly adjacent to the call switch. c. A call cancel push button switch that is clearly labeled either "CANCEL" or "RESET". Alternatively, the cancel function may be a toggle of the emergency call switch. For stations installed in showers or baths that are located in the same room as a toilet, it is acceptable to have the cancel function for the shower/bath station operated from the adjacent emergency pull cord toilet station. d. An LED call assurance indicator.
e. Stations installed in wet areas shall be water resistant and shall comply with water spray exposure requirements of UL 1069. f. 2.2.2 Waterproof gaskets for stations installed in wet areas.
Emergency Push Button Stations a. Flush mount units.
b. A red color emergency push button call switch that is permanently labeled as an Emergency call switch on or directly adjacent to the call switch. c. A call cancel push button switch that is clearly labeled "CANCEL". Alternatively, the cancel function may be a toggle of the emergency call switch. d. An LED call assurance indicator.
Code Blue Stations
Place flush mount units in independent enclosures. Code blue stations that are physically part of any other call station are not acceptable. Provide a blue color code blue push button call switch with the term "CODE" or "CODE BLUE" located on or directly adjacent to the push button. Furnish a call cancel push button switch that is clearly labeled "CANCEL". Alternatively, the cancel function may be a toggle of the code blue call switch. Provide an LED call assurance indicator. SECTION 27 41 00.00 10 Page 23
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.2.4
Duty Stations a. Flush mount units.
b. Full-duplex voice intercom as specified herein, including microphone and speaker. c. A staff routine call push button switch with the term "CALL" located on or directly adjacent to the push button. d. A call cancel push button switch that is clearly labeled "CANCEL". Alternatively, the cancel function may be a toggle of the staff routine call switch. e. f. g. 2.2.5 An LED call assurance indicator lamp. System monitor LED lamp(s) to indicate calls on the system. An electronic alert tone device.
Dome Lights a. b. Flush mount units Two configurations: Type 1: Light only Type 2: Light with an electronic alert tone device c. Indicator lamps and color filters for each type of call, with heat resistant barriers between multiple lamps. All indicator lamps shall be electronically supervised. d. Where required, the dome lights shall include an electronic alert tone device. The alert tone device may be integral to the dome light or a separate unit mounted within the dome light enclosure. e. The lens covers shall be shatterproof, heat resistant, and snap on and off for changing of lamps without the use of tools. Lens cover shall not deform, yellow, or craze with use or age.
2.2.6
Zone Lights
Provide flush mount units with indicator lamps and color filters for each type of call, with heat resistant barriers between multiple lamps. The lens covers shall be shatterproof, heat resistant, and snap on and off for changing of lamps without the use of tools. Lens cover shall not deform, yellow, or craze with use or age. 2.2.7 Master Stations a. Each master station shall be configured with a LCD touch screen monitor, computer type keyboard, full-duplex voice intercom with handset and plug-in headset, and all software for master station operation as required by the specified performance and the system application design. If the master station is locally ac powered, then a UPS is required.
SECTION 27 41 00.00 10
Page 24
W912HN-12-R-0003
b. Equipped capacity of each master station shall correspond to the maximum system application design capacity of the total system. c. The monitor shall indicate all programming, functional and transaction data. (1) Data shall include call room/bed data, call priority level, calls pending, call reminder data, patient data, call elapsed time, service dispatch data, caregiver duty assignment data, operational mode, patient care area programming data, and system failure diagnostics data. (2) At least 4 calls shall be simultaneously viewable on the monitor screen. All other active calls that are not simultaneously viewable on the monitor screen shall be available for viewing by use of a screen scrolling function. d. At least three full-duplex voice intercom paths as specified herein for voice communications as follow: (1) Non-blocking intercom path for local voice intercom between the master station and all associated audio stations being served by the master station. This shall include all captured call stations. (2) Non-blocking intercom path, with connecting telephone jack, for voice intercom between a wireless phone and associated audio stations being served by the master station. (3) Non-blocking system wide voice intercom network for voice communications among all master stations in the system. e. Attendants operating a local NC Subsystem and any other captured NC Subsystem shall be able to: (1) Program and review patient priority call status of each patient station. (2) Initialize, review and update all programmable system features, variable data, caregiver duty assignment data, pagers and wireless phones assignments, and patient data. (3) Program and select call routing. (4) Bypass the normal call sequence and manually answer calls in any order. (5) Dispatch a patient call with an added service message to pagers and wireless phones. (6) Manually initiate alphanumeric text messages directly to pagers and wireless phones. (7) Have full-dedicated use of all system features and voice intercom paths. (8) Select operating modes. f. Whenever a fault is detected by the built-in fault diagnostics in a SECTION 27 41 00.00 10 Page 25
W912HN-12-R-0003
NC Subsystem, the fault type and location data shall be displayed on the master station video monitor and forwarded to the maintenance workstation. 2.2.8 Main Terminal/Equipment Panels a. Panel cabinets shall be surface mount units with knockouts and a hinged door with keyed lock. Each panel cabinet shall be plainly and permanently labeled with the identification of the function served. b. Any of the logic or programming features specified below for the main terminal/equipment panel may be provided as part of the master station if this is the standard product design of the system. c. Equipment shall provide control, switching, logic, memory, programming, timing, signaling, voice intercom, power and interconnection circuitry as required for the patient care areas served. All functions may be implemented through hardware and/or software. d. Equipment shall be of modular construction with all components as plug-in modules. Equipment components may be housed in one or more cabinets. e. System shall operate at or below 30V level, with overload and electronic short circuit protection for primary and secondary circuits. f. Interruption or loss of ac line power, or the failure of a power supply shall not cause loss of any stored programs that control operation or user programmed features, and any call registered prior to loss of power. When power is restored, all normal operations shall continue and all registered calls and associated signals automatically restored. g. A standby power supply shall automatically provide at least 15 minutes of full load uninterrupted power within 4 milliseconds of an ac power failure. Batteries used in the standby power supply shall be maintenance free, completely sealed, and continuously recharged during normal operation. Power calculations shall be included with the design data submittal to verify power requirements. h. Electronic supervision circuitry shall activate a failure alarm call in the event of a station or line failure, power supply failure, total NC Subsystem failure, and any LAN interface failure. Other diagnostic circuitry that is a standard part of the installed system shall be provided. The failure alarm call shall be communicated to a master station connected to the panel, and to the maintenance station. i. LAN network interface circuitry, software and ports as required to communicate data/information for the central code annunciation functions, call logging functions, maintenance functions, information system interface functions, radio page interface functions, and wireless phone interface functions. j. Failure diagnostic circuitry for remote failure diagnosis.
k. Equipped capacity for each patient care area shall provide for at least a 25 percent expansion in the installed quantity of call points in the patient care area, with a minimum of four expansion call points, SECTION 27 41 00.00 10 Page 26
W912HN-12-R-0003
whichever is greater. These call points shall include all patient stations, staff stations, duty stations and any other type of call station that operates from the panel. 2.3 CENTRAL CODE ANNUNCIATOR STATIONS a. Flush or surface mount units to matching existing.
b. The Central Code Annunciator Station shall annunciate all code blue and infant code blue calls from throughout the entire system until they are canceled at the call origination point. c. Call information displayed shall include the type of call, and the call origination point by patient care area and room number. d. Visual Indicator Display (1) Electronic programmable display panel. Acceptable visual indicator display technologies include LED or LCD digital displays. Incandescent-lamp displays are not acceptable. (2) The font size of the alphanumeric text call information displayed shall be large enough to assure clear readability from the workstations in the area where the annunciator is located. (3) The visual display shall either indicate all calls simultaneously, or scroll through multiple calls that are not simultaneously displayed so that all code calls are visible at least every four seconds. e. An electronic alert tone device. A momentary tone defeat switch shall temporarily silence the current call alert tone, with automatic reset so that the alert tone will again sound when the next call is placed. f. Electronic supervision of the station to assure the annunciation of code calls. 2.4 LAN
The LAN shall be a dedicated network for the system. Except for interface functions as specified herein, use of the medical facility Information System LAN is not acceptable. LAN hardware and software shall be as required by the system Manufacturer and the system application design for the configuration, capability and performance specified in this Section. The LAN shall be fault tolerant and include network administration with alarms that indicate any failures which would prevent the transmission of code calls, and radio and wireless phone paging data. The alarms shall be indicated on the failed LAN hardware and transmitted to the Maintenance Station. 2.5 UPS a. UPS shall be UL 1778 listed, and comply with the requirements of 47 CFR 15. b. UPS Volt-Amp capacity shall be at least 130 percent of the total volt-amp load of the equipment connected to the UPS. Power requirement calculations shall be included with design data submittal to verify SECTION 27 41 00.00 10 Page 27
W912HN-12-R-0003
power requirements. c. Upon an ac power line outage, the UPS shall automatically transfer to battery power within 4.2 milliseconds of sensing ac power line loss, and provide at least 15 minutes of full power for operation of the equipment connected to the UPS. On-battery output voltage shall be 115 VAC, +/- 5 percent. d. The UPS shall use sealed, maintenance free type batteries that have an expected life of at least three years. The batteries shall always be powered from a constant voltage or "float type" battery charger. Recharge time to 90 percent capacity after discharge to 50 percent capacity shall not exceed 10 hours. e. Surge energy rating shall be at least 320 joules. current capability shall be at least 26 ka. Surge peak
f. UPS visual indicators on the UPS front panel shall indicate on-line operation, output overload, low battery, and replace battery. 2.6 SYSTEM CABLING
System cabling shall be of the type, size and specifications as required by: the system Manufacturer; the configuration of the installed equipment that is being interconnected by the cabling; the system application design; interconnecting wiring requirements of UL 1069; and the requirements of NFPA 70 NEC. The size of system power cable wires shall be as calculated using the system Manufacturer's instructions and guidelines, and system power requirements. Calculations shall be included with the design data submittal. PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION EXAMINATION
System Contractor shall perform a site survey to verify all field conditions, become familiar with the details of the work and working conditions, verify dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancies before performing the work. 3.2 3.2.1 PREPARATIONS User Room Numbers and Names
User room numbers and names for the final system application design, all system functions, and indication on as-built drawings, shall be as directed by the Contracting Officer six months prior to the beneficial occupancy date for the medical facility. The system Contractor shall verify that the user room numbers and names used in the system are consistent with the room numbers and names used on the medical facility signage and in the information system ADT program. 3.2.2 Interface with Other Products
Coordinate and define the details of all interfaces and interconnections with other products. This shall include a detailed definition of all electronic and physical interface requirements, interface protocols, and physical demarcation points. Provide details as part of shop drawings and design data submittals. SECTION 27 41 00.00 10 Page 28
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.3 3.3.1
INSTALLATION General a. Installation shall be accomplished as indicated and specified, and in accordance with acknowledged industry and professional standards and practices, and the Manufacturer's instructions. b. Installation shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 70, NFPA 99, and TIA-569-B. c. The Installer as qualified in Paragraph QUALITY ASSURANCE, subparagraph Installer Qualifications, shall install and connect all equipment and system cabling. d. During the entire installation the system Contractor shall maintain onsite a supervisor as qualified in Paragraph QUALITY ASSURANCE, subparagraph Installer Qualifications. e. Provide all tools and equipment needed to install the system.
f. All ac power plugs shall be tightly strapped to the ac power receptacle to prevent accidental unplugging of the ac power. 3.3.2 Equipment Installation a. Appropriate waterproof gaskets shall be used for station installations in wet areas (toilet rooms, showers, etc.). b. Main Terminal/Equipment Panels shall be surface mounted in the telecommunications rooms indicated on the drawings. Mounting of these panels in any other room, area or above finished ceilings shall not be acceptable. Panels shall be marked with the NC Subsystem number and function served. c. The system LAN and UPS equipment housed in telecommunications rooms shall be cabinet mounted. Under no circumstance shall any of this equipment be mounted on the floor. d. Master station equipment that does not require attendant access for programming or call activities (such as the CPU and UPS) shall be wall mounted in a protected area under the counter top at the master station location. If the under counter mounted equipment can be kicked and damaged by staff sitting at the counter, then a protective shield shall be provided for the equipment. e. Mounted equipment shall be firmly secured in place, plumb, square, and level. f. Provide adequate equipment ventilation and adequate equipment accessibility for service and repair. 3.3.3 System Cabling Installation
Installation of system cabling shall be by the qualified Installer. System cables shall be installed without kinks, sharp bends or deformations, in a manner to prevent abrasion. System cabling shall be installed in cable trays, conduits and boxes specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR SECTION 27 41 00.00 10 Page 29
W912HN-12-R-0003
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. 3.3.4 Grounding
Equipment enclosures and all other non-current carrying metal parts of electric equipment shall be grounded. 3.3.5 Related Trades
Coordinate all efforts with those of related trades. In the event of any conflicts, delayed or improper preparatory work by Others, notify the Contracting Officer for resolution. The Contracting Officer decision shall be binding. The Electrical Contractor for the project shall furnish and install all cable trays, conduits, boxes, grounding system and buss bars, and all primary ac power wiring required to accommodate the installation of the system specified in this Section. Coordinate the system cable routing with the cable routing of other systems to assure that there will not be any EMI problems that will adversely affect the performance of this system or any other specified project system. 3.3.6 Infrastructure and Rough-in: Existing Facility a. Installation of the system shall utilize existing cable trays, conduits, boxes, grounding system and buss bars, and all primary power wiring to the maximum extent possible, provided these items accommodate the installation and operation of the system as specified in this Section. b. If the provided system requires any infrastructure or rough-in that is in addition to, or different from, available existing conditions, then the NCAV System Contractor shall provide all such additional infrastructures and rough-in at no additional cost to the Government. The NCAV System Contractor shall be responsible for any costs associated with the installation of these items by Others. c. Provide trim plates as required to adapt faceplates to existing boxes at no additional cost to the Government. d. Completely remove and discard all existing system cabling that is not being reused as part of the NCAV System being installed. e. Completely remove all existing systems equipment that is not being reused as parts of the NCAV System being installed, and dispose of the equipment as directed by the Contracting Officer. 3.4 3.4.1 APPLICATION AC Power Connections
AC power for all equipment shall be circuited to the emergency system critical branch in accordance with NFPA 70 and NFPA 99. 3.4.2 Zone Lights
Zone lights shall be mounted and oriented in each corridor to assure that the zone indicator lamps can be clearly seen anywhere in the corridor by caregivers that need to respond to a call.
SECTION 27 41 00.00 10
Page 30
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.4.3
Installation Setup
Contractor shall make all adjustments and perform all application programming as necessary to setup the system to function in accordance with specific user requirements for the overall system and each patient care area. Coordinate all such setup details with the medical facility users prior to system commissioning, install them as part of the system setup, and include the setup details in the O&M documentation. Examples of installation setup details that require user coordination include the following: a. Sound volume level for alert tone signals that have adjustable settings. b. Time and date setup.
c. Default call routing for patient care areas that have multiple master stations. d. Default settings for system networking, and for interfaces with the medical facility Information System, Radio Paging System, and Wireless Telephone System. e. Preprogrammed pager and wireless phone service messages for each patient care area. f. g. Default duty assignments, including primary and backup assignments. Default pager and wireless phone listing and assignments.
h. Display layout configuration for systems that show a graphic representation of the patient care area floor plan on each master station monitor. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
All specified demonstration and training shall be provided at no additional cost to the Government. This includes all specified onsite training, and factory training at the Manufacturer's facility. 3.5.1 Training Plan
Develop and submit a training plan for approval by the Contracting Officer. The training plan shall include the basic training requirements set forth below. Provide training to the medical facility staff in accordance with the approved training plan. 3.5.2 General Preparations
During the week prior to the start of training for any system, check the system to assure that it has been commissioned and is in full-specified operation condition. 3.5.3 Training Personnel
Furnish qualified factory trained or certified instructors to train designated medical facility staff in the operation and maintenance of the provided system. The Contracting Officer reserves the right to approve the system Contractor's choice of training personnel, and, upon rejection of a SECTION 27 41 00.00 10 Page 31
W912HN-12-R-0003
trainer by the Contracting Officer at any time, the system Contractor shall immediately replace such trainers. Upon request, the system Contractor shall provide the Contracting Officer the opportunity to interview and review the qualifications of each proposed trainer. 3.5.4 Training Instructions
Training instructions shall cover all specified performance and capabilities of the system, and all of the items contained in the operating and maintenance manuals. Maintenance technician training shall also include preventive maintenance, routine maintenance, repair and troubleshooting procedures. Training shall continue until the system Contractor is advised by the Contracting Officer that all training has been satisfactorily completed in accordance with the approved training plan. 3.5.5 Training Materials
Furnish all training materials and handouts. Handouts shall be provided in the quantity needed for all of the medical facility maintenance technicians, operations and user staff that will receive training. 10 copies of all multimedia training and tutorial programs, such as video recordings, CDs, and DVDs, that are available from the Manufacturer shall be furnished to the Contracting Officer at no additional cost to the Government. These programs shall provide for self-instruction on all operational and maintenance aspects of the system. Video recordings of onsite training sessions shall be made and 10 copies furnished to the Contracting Officer. This shall be a coordinated effort between the system Contractor training staff and the medical facility education department staff. 3.5.6 Onsite Training Programs and Requirements
Training shall be provided onsite to all medical facility staff as required throughout the contract and warranty period to train operations and maintenance staff for the provided system. The onsite training program shall include two training courses, one for maintenance technicians, and one for user and operations staff. Each course shall include classroom training and field training. Field training for medical facility staff shall take place in the area where the staff will be working. Multiple instructional units for each onsite course shall be conducted on a three shift, seven days a week basis as required to train all staff during their normal on-duty working hours. The Contracting Officer shall designate qualified personnel to be instructed in the operation and maintenance of each system, schedule instructional sessions, and provide suitable onsite instruction facilities. 3.5.7 User and Operational Staff Training
User and operational staff training shall commence at a time acceptable to the Contracting Officer, near the time the system is scheduled for operational use by the medical facility and shall be a minimum of 2 hour(s) of classroom instructions for all Major Functional Components of the system, and 2 hour(s) of field instructions in each area where equipment is installed. 3.5.8 Technician Training a. Before the system is turned over to the Government for operational use, training shall be provided for 3 maintenance technicians SECTION 27 41 00.00 10 Page 32
W912HN-12-R-0003
designated by the Contracting Officer. b. The onsite technician training course shall provide the number of instructional hours necessary to cover all aspects of system setup, programming, operations, preventive maintenance, routine maintenance, routine repair, and troubleshooting procedures for the system as installed. c. Immediately after the phased installation of each part of the system the technician staff shall be given additional classroom and field instructions as required to advance their training up the latest overall configuration. 3.6 3.6.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Inspection, Checkout and Testing Services a. Furnish required test equipment, tools, consumable supplies, and technically qualified personnel to perform inspections, checkout and tests of installed system. b. Qualified NCAV System Contractor personnel conducting acceptance tests shall be factory trained or certified and shall be completely knowledgeable regarding the system application design, installation, and operation. c. The Contracting Officer reserves the right to approve the system Contractor's choice of testing personnel, and, upon rejection of any testing personnel by the Contracting Officer at any time, the system Contractor shall replace such testing personnel as soon as reasonably possible. Upon request, the system Contractor shall provide the Contracting Officer the opportunity to interview and review the qualifications of each person proposed for testing work. d. The system Contractor shall conduct all testing in accordance with submitted and approved test plans and procedure, and requirements specified herein. e. Notification of any planned testing shall be given to the Contracting Officer at least 15 days prior to any test, and in no case shall notice be given until after the system Contractor has received written Government approval of the test plans and procedures. f. Inspection and testing shall be conducted during normal working hours with prior notice to the Contracting Officer so as not to interfere with orderly work processes. g. System Contractor shall allow inspection of all work and workmanship, and witnessing of system Contractor performed acceptance testing. h. Any work that is enclosed or covered up before being inspected and tested shall be uncovered as required and, after it has been inspected and approved, shall be restored to its original condition at no additional cost to the Government. i. Results of each inspection and test shall be reported in electronic and hard copy form to the Contracting Officer.
SECTION 27 41 00.00 10
Page 33
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.6.2
Periodic Inspection and Testing
All work and workmanship shall be subject to inspection and testing as requested by the Contracting Officer at any and all times during preparation and installation. The Contracting Officer, in his or her sole discretion, may reject defective work and workmanship and require its correction. The Government right to inspect, test, and reject, or its failure to exercise such right, as provided herein, shall in no way diminish the system Contractor's duty to inspect and reject work as necessary to comply fully with the requirements of the contract documents. 3.6.3 System Commissioning
Prior to the start of final inspection and acceptance testing, the system shall be brought into complete working order in full compliance with all specified requirements. This commissioning shall include all necessary programming, adjustments, tuning and testing of the installed system. 3.6.4 Final Inspection and Acceptance Testing a. Acceptance tests of the installed system shall be phased in accordance with the project phasing schedule. b. After installation for each phase has been completed, and the system components installed during the phase have been completely inspected and checked out, the system Contractor shall conduct acceptance tests in accordance with the approved Acceptance Test Plan. c. The system Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer when the installation of a system is completed and operating in accordance with specifications and ready for final inspection and acceptance testing. d. Draft as-built system drawings, and O&M manuals shall be made available by the system Contractor for use during performance of final inspection and acceptance testing. Final inspection or acceptance testing shall not be scheduled nor performed without this documentation. e. The system Contractor shall demonstrate proper installation and performance of each phase of the system in full compliance with all contract documents. f. Final acceptance tests shall demonstrate that the system operates in full accordance with all specified requirements for the system. Each system operating mode shall be demonstrated to perform as specified by operation of each individual system component under simulated normal system loading. g. Upon successful completion of all phased final acceptance tests, and 30 calendar days of consecutive operation in accordance with specified requirements without the occurrence of any major malfunctions, the system Contractor shall submit the final acceptance test report, including certificates of compliance stating that all specified requirements and conditions have been satisfied. The effective date for completion of the final system acceptance shall be the date when the system has satisfied the 30 days of operation without a major malfunction as specified above.
SECTION 27 41 00.00 10
Page 34
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.6.5
Corrective Action for Rejected Work a. All deficiencies shall be corrected at no cost to the Government and another inspection and test performed as required to demonstrate compliance with all specifications to the Contracting Officer. b. All corrective action shall be completed in a reasonable time consistent with project schedules and acceptable to the Contracting Officer. c. If, after 30 calendar days from the start of acceptance testing, the system or any equipment component thereof fails to demonstrate complete and proper performance, the Government shall have the right to return the total system or any equipment component to the system Contractor. The system Contractor shall refund all costs thereof to the Government and shall indemnify the Government from damages, costs, and expenses incurred in connection with such activity. d. The actual date of return of any rejected system or equipment component shall be under the absolute control of the Government. The Government shall have the right to continue to utilize such system and equipment until the actual date of removal.
3.6.6
Warranty Period Inspection and Testing
At the end of 3rd and 7th months of operation, the system Contractor shall, at no cost to Government, observe the system in operation and conduct tests to assure that the system is performing as specified. Include interviews of users to determine if the system is satisfying specified requirements and that training is adequate. This service shall be coordinated with the Contracting Officer and the results reported in writing to the Contracting Officer. During the 11th month of operation an inspection and test of the system shall be conducted by the system Contractor to identify and correct any deficiencies before the end of warranty period. A medical facility representative shall witness this procedure and the system Contractor shall certify that all necessary corrective actions have been taken. Results of each warranty period inspection and test shall be reported in writing to the Contracting Officer. 3.7 PROTECTION
Items that can be easily stolen, such as desktop computer and monitor equipment, shall not be permanently installed until such time as the system Contractor has been notified by the Contracting Officer that the facility is secured. 3.8 3.8.1 SCHEDULES Software
Provide all software programs as required for all specified capabilities and performance, and pertinent software manuals. Include all operating systems, application programs, and a complete set of backup software. Provide Call Logging application software for installation on the medical center Information System terminals and computers.3.8.2 Product Samples Provide one sample unit of each type of station, light, and cord set for approval as part of the Samples submittal.
SECTION 27 41 00.00 10
Page 35
W912HN-12-R-0003
SECTION 27 41 00.00 10
Page 36
W912HN-12-R-0003
SECTION 27 51 16 RADIO AND PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS 04/06 PART 1 1.1 GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE) IEEE C62.41.1 (2002; R 2008) Guide on the Surges Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits (2002) Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits
IEEE C62.41.2
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) NFPA 70 (2011; TIA 11-1; Errata 2011; TIA 11-2; TIA 11-3; TIA 11-4) National Electrical Code UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) UL 1449 (2006; Rev thru Sep 2009) Surge Protective Devices TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION (TIA) TIA-568-C.2 (2009; Errata 2010) Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cabling and Components Standards
1.2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The radio and public address system shall provide general overhead paging across multiple zones throughout facility. Pages will be made using the phone system by dialing into the paging controller. System scope shall include additonal speakers, cabling and power supplies for addition spaces with interconnections to existing Valcom V-Pw48 paging controller. Provide additional zone cards to existing system. Configure existing telephone interface to address existing and new zones. New components shall integrate with the existing system such that existing and new zone access through the telephone system shall be accessible using a single set of access numerals for each zone and there shall be one all call zone for the entire facility. 1.2.1 System Performance
The system shall provide even sound distribution throughout the designated area, plus or minus 3 dB for the 1/1 octave band centered at 4000 Hz. The system shall provide uniform frequency response throughout the designated area, plus or minus 3 dB as measured with 1/3-octave bands of pink noise at SECTION 27 51 16 Page 1
W912HN-12-R-0003
locations across the designated area selected by the Contracting Officer. The system shall be capable of delivering 75 dB average program level with additional 10 dB peaking margin sound pressure level (SPL) in the area at an acoustic distortion level below 5 percent total harmonic distortion (THD). Unless otherwise specified the sound pressure reference level is 20 micro Pascal (0.00002 Newtons per square meter). 1.2.2 Detail Drawings
Submit detail drawings consisting of a complete list of equipment and material, including manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature, performance charts and curves, catalog cuts, and installation instructions. Note that the contract drawings show layouts based on typical speakers. Check the layout based on the actual speakers to be installed and make necessary revisions in the detail drawings. Detail drawings shall also contain complete point to point wiring, schematic diagrams and other details required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will properly function as a unit. Drawings shall show proposed layout of equipment and appurtenances, and equipment relationship to other parts of the work including clearances for maintenance and operation. 1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-02 Shop Drawings Detail Drawings; G,AE Detail drawings as specified. SD-03 Product Data Spare Parts Spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment specified. SD-06 Test Reports Approved Test Procedures; G, AE Test plan and test procedures for the acceptance tests. The test plan and test procedures shall explain in detail, step-by-step actions and expected results to demonstrate compliance with the requirements specified. The procedure shall also explain methods for simulating the necessary conditions of operation to demonstrate system performance. Acceptance Tests Test reports in booklet form showing all field tests performed to adjust each component and to prove compliance with the specified performance criteria, upon completion and testing of the installed SECTION 27 51 16 Page 2
W912HN-12-R-0003
system. The reports shall include the manufacturer, model number, and serial number of test equipment used in each test. Each report shall indicate the final position of controls and operating mode of the system. SD-07 Certificates Components Copies of current approvals or listings issued by UL, or other nationally recognized testing laboratory for all components. SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Radio and Public Address System Submit Data Package 3 in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Equipment placed in storage until installation shall be stored with protection from the weather, humidity and temperature variations, dirt and dust, and other contaminants. 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
Submit spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment specified, after approval of the detail drawings and not later than 2 months prior to the date of beneficial occupancy. The data shall include a complete list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply. PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS STANDARD PRODUCTS
Provide materials and equipment which are the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products, and that essentially duplicate material and equipment that have been in satisfactory use at least 2 years. All components used in the system shall be commercial designs that comply with the requirements specified. Equipment shall be supported by a service organization that is within 50 miles of the site. Products shall be manufactured by Valcom, Inc or equal. 2.1.1 Identical Items
Items of the same classification shall be identical. This requirement includes equipment, modules, assemblies, parts, and components. 2.1.2 Nameplates
Each major component of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address, model and catalog number, and serial number on a plate secured to the equipment. 2.2 POWER SUPPLIES
Switching Power Supplies at a minimum conform to the following SECTION 27 51 16 Page 3
W912HN-12-R-0003
specifications and match existing systen Valcom VP-12124 series: Rated power output: drawings. Output Current: Output voltage: Power Requirement: 2.3 2.3.1 LOUDSPEAKERS Cone Speaker 360 watts RMS or 165 watts RMS as indicated on
12 Amps for 360 watts and 6 amps for 165 watts. 24 Vdc regulated +- 2% 110-125 Vac 60 Hz
The cone speaker shall have integral 2' x 2' housing and shall as a minimum conform to the following specifications and match existing system Valcom V-9022 single input/V9028 dual input series: Application: Lay-in Ceiling 2 ft. x 2 ft.
InPut: Single Input for Paging or Music; Dual Imput for Paging and Music as indicated on drawings Voice Coil Impedance: Magnet: Frequency Response: Output Rating: Signal/Noise Ratio: 2.3.2 Horn Speaker 45 ohms 5 ounces or greater 80 - 15,000 Hz >96 dB @ 4' -70 dB
The horn speaker shall as a minimum conform to the following specifications and match existing system Valcom V-1080-W series: Application: Frequency Response: Output Rating: Signal/Noise Ratio: Dispersion: 2.4 2.4.1 CABLES Speaker Cable Indoor 400 - 14,000 Hz 108 dB @ 4' -70 dB 120 degrees Horizontal and 90 degrees vertical
Cables shall be of the gauge required depending upon the cable run length and power requirements of attached speakers plus 25% minimum spare capactity on each run. In no case shall cable be used which is smaller than 24 AWG. Insulation on the conductors shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or an equivalent synthetic thermoplastic not less than 0.009 inch. Cables shall be jacketed with a PVC The jacket thickness shall be 0.02 inch SECTION 27 51 16 Page 4
W912HN-12-R-0003
minimum. Loudspeaker cables shall be Category 3 or Catgory 5 UTP 4-pair per TIA-568-C.2. 2.4.2 Terminals
Terminals shall be on 66 blocks or Amplenol connectors in Telecom Rooms. 2.5 2.5.1 SURGE PROTECTION Power Line Surge Protection
Major components of the system such as power supplies shall have a device, whether internal or external, which provides protection against voltage spikes and current surges originating from commercial power sources in accordance with IEEE C62.41.1/IEEE C62.41.2 B3 combination waveform and NFPA 70. Fuses shall not be used for surge protection. The surge protector shall be rated for a maximum let thru voltage of 350 Volts ac (line-to-neutral) and 350 Volt ac (neutral-to-ground). Surge protection device shall be UL listed and labeled as having been tested in accordance with UL 1449. 2.5.2 SIGNAL SURGE PROTECTION
Major components of the system shall have internal protection circuits which protects the component from mismatched loads, direct current, and shorted output lines. Communication cables/conductors shall have surge protection installed at each point where it exits or enters a building. 2.6 Paging Controller
Paging controller shall provide one way zoned and all call paging access from telephone to PA system. Paging shall be accomplished by the building telephone system instruments interconnected to the PA system via an interface module to allow telephone dial up access to the paging controller and individual or all-call zones. Interface module shall produce an alert tone in the associated speakers on activation. Zone outputs of paging controller shall feed zone power supply channels. Program additional zones into existing system and existing telephone dialer. Zone paging controller is a Valcom V-PR48 series with V-STX 24 cards located in existing telecom room 1D06. Provide additonal card(s) to cover exactly the additional zones added as part of the project, maintaining existing spare capacity. PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION EXAMINATION
After becoming familiar with the details of the work and working conditions, verify dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancies before performing the work. 3.2 INSTALLATION
Equipment shall be installed as indicated and specified, and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations except where otherwise indicated. Equipment mounted out-of-doors or subject to inclement conditions shall be weatherproofed.
SECTION 27 51 16
Page 5
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.2.1
Wiring
Install wiring in rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, cable trays, or electric metallic tubing as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Wiring for grounding, line level, speaker and power cables shall be isolated from each other by physical isolation and metallic shielding. Shielding shall be terminated at only one end. 3.3 GROUNDING
All grounding practices shall comply with NFPA 70. Equipment shall be grounded to the ground bus bar through a green grounding conductor. Metallic conduits serving the equipment shall be isolated on the equipment end with an insulating bushing to prevent noise from being transferred to the circuit. Equipment racks shall be grounded to the panelboard ground bus utilizing a #8 conductor. Grounding conductor shall be terminated to the rack using connector suitable for that purpose. 3.4 TRAINING
Conduct a training course for 5 members of the operating and maintenance staff as designated by the Contracting Officer. The training course will be given at the installation during normal working hours for a total of 2 hours and shall start after the system is functionally complete but prior to final acceptance tests. The field instructions shall cover all of the items contained in the approved operating and maintenance manuals, as well as demonstrations of routine maintenance operations. Notify the Contracting Officer at least 14 days prior to the start of the training course. 3.5 ACCEPTANCE TESTS
After installation has been completed, conduct acceptance tests, utilizing the approved test procedures, to demonstrate that equipment operates in accordance with specification requirements. Notify the Contracting Officer 14 days prior to the performance of tests. In no case shall notice be given until after the Contractor has received written Contracting Officer approval of the test plans as specified. The acceptance tests shall include originating and receiving messages at specified stations, at proper volume levels, without cross talk or noise from other links or nondesignated units: a. b. Polarity testing of all loudspeaker lines. Overall Hum & Noise test. Perform sweep frequency testing of loudspeakers to check for rattles, buzzing, and/or functional problems. Sweeps shall not exceed the manufacturers rated bandwidth or one-quarter rated power for the device under test. Verification testing to ensure that systems are free from spurious oscillation, RFI or EMI. Tests for audible clicks or pops caused by normal operation of the controls.
c.
d.
SECTION 27 51 16
Page 6
W912HN-12-R-0003
SECTION 27 52 32.00 10 NURSE CALL TONE-VISUAL (NCTV) SYSTEM 10/07 PART 1 1.1 GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) NFPA 70 (2011; TIA 11-1; Errata 2011; TIA 11-2; TIA 11-3; TIA 11-4) National Electrical Code (2012) Health Care Facilities Code TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION (TIA) TIA-569-B (2004; Amd 1 2009) Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces
NFPA 99
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) UL 1069 (2007; Reprint Jan 2009) Hospital Signaling and Nurse Call Equipment (2005; Reprint Oct 2011) Uninterruptible Power Systems
UL 1778
1.2 1.2.1
DEFINITIONS General Definitions
The glossary of definitions, abbreviations and acronyms, and units set forth in TIA-569-B and UL 1069 shall apply to this Section, unless otherwise noted. 1.2.2 Additional Acronyms
For the purposes of this Section, the following definitions shall apply. CFR COTS CPU LAN NC NCAV NCTV O&M Code of Federal Regulations Commercial-Off-The-Shelf (Products) Central Processing Unit Local Area Network Nurse Call (Subsystems) Nurse Call Audio-Visual (System) Nurse Call Tone-Visual (System) Operation and Maintenance (Manuals) SECTION 27 52 32.00 10 Page 1
W912HN-12-R-0003
UON UPS 1.2.3
Unless Otherwise Noted Uninterruptible Power Supply Additional Terms
For the purposes of this Section, following definitions shall apply. 1.2.3.1 Call
Communications between patients and caregivers, and among caregivers, that are transmitted through the NCTV System. Call communications modes for the NCTV System include alert tones, visual indicators, and digital display of alphanumeric messages. 1.2.3.2 Caregiver
A person who is directly involved in the care of patients. 1.2.3.3 Pager
Radio Page Receiver 1.2.3.4 Software
Operating systems and application programs that enable a computer, or computer-based systems, to function as specified. Software shall include the documentation to describe, maintain and use the programs. 1.2.3.5 System
NCTV System, UON 1.2.3.6 System Application Design
Contractor performed systems engineering to combine and configure a collection of hardware and software components into a functioning system that has been customized and tailored to satisfy all specified and indicated requirements. The system application design shall assure that the configuration and working relationships among all of the components of the system and all interfaces provides the specified capability and performance. 1.2.3.7 Telecommunications Systems
All low voltage and power limited Communications and Security systems installed in the facility. This does NOT include Fire Alarm Systems, Environmental Control Systems, and Special Building Alarm Systems. 1.2.3.8 Telecommunications Rooms
Controlled environment rooms on each floor level that provide the floor and wall space for the mounting of equipment and cable distribution terminations and devices for all telecommunications systems. 1.2.3.9 24x7 Staffed
A workplace that is constantly staffed 24 hours per day, 7 days per week, 365 days per year.
SECTION 27 52 32.00 10
Page 2
W912HN-12-R-0003
1.3 1.3.1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Design Requirements System Application Design
1.3.1.1
Perform the system application design required to provide a NCAV System that complies with and satisfies all of the requirements specified in this Section and indicated on the drawings for this application and project. 1.3.1.2 Standard Products
The system application design shall utilize a standard, UL 1069 listed NCTV System that is the product of a Manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of NCTV Systems, and systems that have been in satisfactory use for at least six months. The system shall be supported by a service organization that is, in the opinion of the Contracting Officer, reasonably convenient to the medical facility installation site. The system shall be compatible with the existing Jeron Provider 680 system with interface capabilities to existing system for future reporting, paging or telephone/wireless telephone and ADT interface. Products shall be manufactured by Jeron Electronic Systems, Inc. or equal. 1.3.1.3 Minimal Requirements
Specifications are minimal requirements. If the provided system requires enhanced specifications that exceed those specified herein in order to satisfy the specified design, configuration, capability, and performance requirements, then a system with the enhanced specifications shall be provided at no additional cost to the Government. 1.3.1.4 Current State-Of-The-Art Technology
The NCTV System application design and products shall utilize current state-of-the-art computer, networking, and communications technology to provide the enhanced capability and performance specified herein. 1.3.1.5 Continuous Duty Design
Design all equipment for 24 hours per day, 365 days per year continuous 100 percent duty operation. 1.3.1.6 Power Supply Design
a. Power supplies shall provide sufficient power capacity for the worst-case condition of system operation and signaling that could occur in the application environment without any loss or perceptible degradation of signal quality. Include in the design analysis calculations to size power supplies for worst-case conditions, and these calculations shall be included with the design data submittal. b. AC powered equipment shall operate in accordance with specifications over the range of 105V to 130V, 60 Hz, unless otherwise noted. c. Protect all equipment connected to ac power circuits from power line transients and surges as likely to be subjected in service from a commercial utility ac power system. Protection shall be integral to the equipment or installed as an accessory item in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. Fuses shall not be used for this SECTION 27 52 32.00 10 Page 3
W912HN-12-R-0003
protection. d. Power distributed over system cables shall be low voltage and power limited in accordance with NFPA 70 and UL 1069. 1.3.1.7 Shielding and Grounding
All products shall be shielded and grounded as required by the system design, Manufacturer's instructions, UL 1069 listing, and regulatory requirements. 1.3.1.8 Station Connectors Stations hardwired to system
All stations shall plug into system cabling. cabling are not acceptable. 1.3.1.9 User Room Numbers and Names
Architectural room numbers and names indicated on the contract documents may be used for the initial system application design and installation work. However, the final system application design, annunciator stations, installation, and as-built documentation shall utilize user room numbers and names that have been designated by the Contracting Officer. For patient rooms, these user room numbers and names shall be consistent with the room numbers and names used in the medical facility information system ADT program, and on the medical facility signage. a. User room numbers and names shall be consistent with the room numbers and names used in the medical facility information system ADT program, and on the medical facility signage. b. Programmable assignment of patient room number identification shall provide for up to ten alphanumeric characters for each room. It shall be possible to program any identifying alphanumeric characters to any room in any sequence regardless of the physical location of the patient room. 1.3.2 1.3.2.1 System Capability and Configuration System Capability
The NCTV System capabilities shall include the following: a. Fundamental operation for communication of patient and caregiver calls for assistance from patient care spaces and areas. b. Supplemental operation as an enhanced adjunct to the fundamental operation for networked call routing. c. Interface with existing building Jeron Provider 680 NURSE CALL AUDIO-VISUAL (NCAV) SYSTEM for integrated use by the NCTV System of the supplemental enhanced operations provided by the NCAV System, includingfuture reporting, paging or telephone/wireless telephone and ADT interface, and call logging. 1.3.2.2 System Configuration and Major Functional Components
The NCTV System shall be an integrated configuration of the Major Functional Components listed below to provide the required system SECTION 27 52 32.00 10 Page 4
W912HN-12-R-0003
capability and performance. The capability and configuration of each of these Major Functional Components are defined below. 1.3.2.3 Nurse Call (NC) Subsystems
a. Subsystems. A NC Subsystem shall serve each of the patient care areas listed on drawing TK 001 for the communication of patient and caregiver calls. The telecommunications drawings show the location and boundaries of the patient care areas listed. b. Major NC Subsystem Components. 1) The major components listed below shall be provided for the NC Subsystems at locations as indicated on the telecommunications drawings. Dome (Corridor) Lights Emergency Push Button Stations Emergency Pull Cord Stations Annunciator Stations Zone Lights Main Terminal/Equipment Panels (2) The UPS for ac powered equipment, which is not indicated on the telecommunications drawings, shall be provided as required by the NC Subsystems design. c. Swing Capability (1) Swing Capability - Total Clinics Adjacent clinics that, at various times, may to be operated as independent clinics or as a combined clinic, shall be configured with a Swing Capability that shall allow independent or combined operation from the annunciator stations in each clinic. (2) Swing Capability - Individual Patient Care Rooms or Cubicles Adjacent clinics that, at various times, may share individual patient care rooms or cubicles that are physically located at or near the common boundary of the clinics, shall be configured with a Swing Capability that shall allow operation of the shared spaces from the annunciator stations in each clinic.0 1.3.3 1.3.3.1 Performance Requirements NC Subsystem Functions and Features
a. The NCTV System shall communicate patient and caregiver calls for assistance from patient care spaces and areas in the form of alert tones and visual indicators at locations that are associated with the call station. b. NC Subsystems shall have the same basic feature package for standardization and to simplify maintenance problems. Features not required in a particular patient care area shall not be activated on the NC Subsystem serving the area at the time of installation. However, the medical facility user shall be able to easily program the activation of these inactive features at any time thereafter without any assistance from the system Contractor.
SECTION 27 52 32.00 10
Page 5
W912HN-12-R-0003
1.3.3.2
Call Types and Points of Origin
The NCTV System shall communicate the types of calls defined below from the noted points of origin. a. Emergency Call. Patient or caregiver calls for emergency assistance from an emergency push button station or emergency pull cord station. b. Failure Alarm Call. Failure alarm calls from all electronically supervised circuits and equipment, and from all failure diagnostic programs throughout the system. 1.3.3.3 Call Annunciation Modes
a. Each call shall annunciate throughout the system by various combinations of visual indicators and alert tones, and the digital display of alphanumeric data and messages. The specific annunciation for each call type shall be as specified herein for each call type and source of call. b. When a call is placed from an emergency station a call assurance lamp on the station shall illuminate to indicate that the call has been registered on the system. This call assurance lamp shall remain illuminated until the call is cancelled at the station. c. On dome lights and zone lights, a variety of colored lamps with steady or flashing illumination shall provide clear and absolute distinction between call priority levels and sound an alert tone signal. Call indications on zone lights shall be absolutely identical to the call indication on dome lights for each call type. d. The dome light for any patient toilet room that opens into a procedure room shall be equipped with an electronic alert tone device that shall sound when a call is initiated. e. On annunciator stations within a patient care area, the visual display shall indicate the call type and call origination room, and sound an alert tone. The visual display shall indicate all calls simultaneously. The user room name and number shall identify the call origination room. f. Call alert tone signals on dome lights, zone lights, and annunciator stations shall sound at different intermittent pulse rates to provide a clear and absolute distinction between call priorities. The volume level of alert tones shall be adjustable. The actual sound volume level setting for each device in each area shall be adjusted as coordinated with and defined by the medical facility user. g. The alert tones and visual indication displays for all types and priorities of calls shall continue until the call has been answered and canceled. All calls shall be canceled only at the originating call station. h. Tone and light signals for each call type on the NCTV System shall be consistent with the tone and light signals for the same call type on the Jeron 680 NCAV System in the same medical facility. 1.3.3.4 Call Annunciation Priorities
a. The annunciation of call types shall be sequenced with a capacity of three level priority rank order, from a high of Number 1 to a low of Number SECTION 27 52 32.00 10 Page 6
W912HN-12-R-0003
3; program as listed below. Priority Level #1 Emergency #2 Emergency #3 Call Type Emergency Call Emergency Failure Alarm Future
b. The system shall simultaneously process all calls regardless of the priority. However, when several different priority calls are present on the system at any one time, the highest priority call shall take precedence for annunciation on stations or lights that display all call categories. (1) For annunciation on dome lights, and zone lights that use common tone and visual indicators for multiple types of calls, the highest priority call shall override the lower priority call. For example, if dome or zone lights indicate an emergency failure by a solid red light and an emergency call by a flashing red light, the dome and zone lights shall display a flashing red light when there are both an emergency failure call and an emergency call at the same time. (2) For annunciator stations that display calls in a list, the displayed list of calls shall be in priority order, with the highest priority calls at the top of the displayed list. Existing lower priority calls shall be displaced in the displayed list by the occurrence of a higher priority call. For example, if a emergency failure alarm is first in the list and an emergency call occurs, the emergency call shall jump ahead of the emergency failurecall in the displayed list. This shall be the initial programmed configuration for the system. 1.3.3.5 Call Routing
Call routing throughout the system shall be software programmable to provide the selectable call routing defined below. a. Call Routing - Dome Lights: All call types from any call station within a patient care room or cubicle shall annunciate on the dome light(s) located outside the entry into the room or cubicle. Calls from patient toilet/shower or procedure room entered from another room shall annunciate on the dome light outside the entry to both rooms. b. Call Routing - Zone Lights (1) Within a patient care area, the routing of any call type from any call station to each zone light shall be programmable to allow annunciation of calls on a zone light from any combination of call stations. Each zone light shall be programmed to present a pattern of illuminated zone lights that the caregiver can follow from any corridor in the patient care area to get to the corridor where a call has been initiated from a patient care room along the corridor. (2) The Zone Light Activation Matrices on the drawings lists the identification (ID) number of all zone lights indicated on the telecommunications plans, and relates these to the patient care rooms where calls are originated that activate the zone lights.
SECTION 27 52 32.00 10
Page 7
W912HN-12-R-0003
c.
Call Routing - Patient Care Area Annunciator Stations (1) All calls from within a patient care area shall be routed to an annunciator station in the area.
1.3.3.6
System Call Processing Rates
The total elapsed time between the initiation of a call from a call station to the display of that call on an annunciator shall not exceed four (4) seconds. 1.3.3.7 Failure Modes, Alarms and Diagnostics
a. If any annunciator station fails, the dome lights and zone lights shall continue to indicate calls from patient care spaces. b. At a minimum, a failure alarm shall be automatically initiated by a total failure of the NCTV System, by failure of any Major Functional Component of the system, by failure of any power supply, and by failure of any circuit or component monitored by built-in fault diagnostics. c. Failure alarms shall be annunciated locally on the Major Functional Components including Annunciator Panels and the existing Jeron 680 AVNC system. 1.3.3.8 Call Logging
The system shall be interfaced with existing NURSE CALL AUDIO-VISUAL SYSTEM for logging of call data. 1.3.4 Detail Drawings
Submit Coordination Drawings as specified in the Submittals paragraph and detail drawings to scale including: a. System block diagram, riser diagrams, wiring and schematic diagrams, run sheets including number of conductors and wire number (ID), custom assembly details, and installation details. b. Riser diagrams shall indicate the identification number (ID) for all zone lights as shown on the plan drawings. c. Installation details shall indicate layout and mounting of equipment, equipment relationship to other parts of the work, including clearances required for maintenance and operation, and plan and elevation details that indicate the exact and totally coordinated physical location and size of each individual item of equipment. d. Details of the custom assembly of equipment shall indicate the assembly configuration, elevations and dimensions. Typical custom assembly details include equipment panels, and equipment mounted in a rack or cabinet. 1.4 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in SECTION 27 52 32.00 10 Page 8
W912HN-12-R-0003
accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Qualifications; G, AE NCTV System Contractor, Installer, and Manufacturer qualifications. Proposed system information. SD-02 Shop Drawings Detail Drawings; G, AE Drawings and diagrams specifically prepared to indicate the work of this project. Coordination Drawings; G, AE Coordination drawings indicating the details of all electronic and physical interfaces between the NCTV System and all interfaced telecommunications systems, including the exact point and type of demarcation. As-Built System Drawings; G, AE As-built drawings including all approved detail drawings and coordination drawings that have been updated to indicate the final as-built configuration of all equipment and cables as installed. In addition to the architectural room names and numbers, as-built drawings shall indicate the medical facility user room names and numbers for all rooms where equipment has been installed. SD-03 Product Data Material and Equipment; G, AE The Manufacturer's product data and specifications, and other information in sufficient detail and scope to verify that each product item is in compliance with requirements of the contract documents. Include a description of the system operating characteristics and individual product data sheets for each item of equipment indicating descriptive and technical data, operating temperature limits, heat dissipated, electrical requirements, dimensions, and mounting restrictions. If a product data sheet covers several types or sizes of the product, the sheet shall be marked to indicate the specific item provided. A letter from the Manufacturer, stating that the medical facility will be notified whenever system upgrades and enhancements are available, shall accompany the submittal. Listing of all hardware, software, cables, and materials products arranged in the order of the specification, including the specification paragraph number, name, Manufacturer and model for each item, and a reference to the Manufacturer's product data sheet for the item. Warranty; G, AE Warranty document indicating the warranty period for the system and all component products.
SECTION 27 52 32.00 10
Page 9
W912HN-12-R-0003
Maintenance Service; G, AE For maintenance service after the warranty period, the system Contractor shall submit a service agreement proposal to the medical facility. SD-04 Samples Product Samples; G, AE One sample unit of each type of station and light for approval. SD-05 Design Data Power Supply Design; G, AE a. Analysis and calculations to define power supply requirements for each Major Functional Component of the system in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions, and the worst-case power loading conditions. b. Analysis and calculations to define the type and size of all cables for each system in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions and power drop calculations. c. Analysis and supporting result from specified preparation and application items, and all coordination items. Includes definition of all interface protocols. d. AC power consumption and heat dissipation data under both normal and maximum operating conditions. SD-06 Test Reports Acceptance Test Plan; G, AE Step-by-step actions and the expected results to demonstrate system compliance with the requirements of this specification. Include tests defined in the Manufacturer's installation instructions; list of all test equipment to be used, including data indicating that calibration of the test equipment is current; test data sheets;.and names and qualifications of the person(s) who will perform the tests. Acceptance Test Report; G, AE Test reports in both electronic media form and hard copy booklet form. Test reports shall indicate all field tests performed to adjust each component and to prove compliance with the specified performance criteria. Each test report shall indicate the final position of controls and operating mode of the system, and the Manufacturer, model number, and serial number of the test equipment used in each test. The final acceptance test report shall include a statement that all specified requirements and conditions have been satisfied. SD-07 Certificates Certificates of Compliance; G, AE SECTION 27 52 32.00 10 Page 10
W912HN-12-R-0003
Proof that the items conform to the specified codes or standards, including the requirements of CFR, NFPA, and UL. SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions Installation; G, AE Preprinted material from the Manufacturer describing installation requirements and safety precautions. Manufacturer's requirements for the use of specific products. SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Operating and Maintenance Manuals; G, AE O&M data in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA, Data Package 5. Reproduced copies of O&M Manuals will not be acceptable if a printed manual is available from the Manufacturer. O&M Manuals available from the Manufacturer on a CD shall be submitted in addition to the hard copy manuals. Submit addenda to the O&M Manuals from the Manufacturer that describe any part of the system application design that is either not covered by, or deviates from, the O&M Manuals from the Manufacturer. Software Manuals; G, AE Software manual describing the functions of all software and including all other information necessary to enable proper loading, setup, testing, and operation. The software manual shall include: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Definition of terms and functions. Use of system and applications software. Procedures for system initialization, start-up and shutdown. Alarm reports. Reports generation. Database format and requirements for data entry. Directory of all disk files.
h. Description of all communications protocols, including data formats, command characters, and a sample of each type of data transfer. Backup Software; G, AE Copy of all operating system and application software, on the type of electronic media acceptable to the Contracting Officer. Ghost copy of all hard disks in the system after all setup procedures have been completed, the system has been programmed for the required user operation, and acceptance tests have been successfully completed. SECTION 27 52 32.00 10 Page 11
W912HN-12-R-0003
Training Plan; G, AE Description of the training programs and materials to be provided. Identification and qualification of training instructors. Instructional schedules for all classes. Submit training materials used as part of the specified training programs including all training media, such as video recordings, CDs, and DVDs, that are available from the Manufacturer. 1.5 1.5.1 1.5.1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE Qualifications General Qualification Requirements
a. The NCTV System Contractor, Installer and Manufacturer shall each have the minimum qualifications specified, related to the type of system specified for this project. b. The Government reserves the right to accept or reject the system Contractor, Installer or Manufacturer based upon qualifications and ability to conform to specified requirements of this Section. System Contractors, Installers and Manufacturers that do not have the specified qualifications will not be acceptable and shall not be allowed to perform the work of this Section. c. The Government will determine the acceptability of any proposed system Contractor, Installer and Manufacturer based on submitted and verified documentation that substantiates that the proposed system Contractor, Installer and Manufacturer have the qualifications specified in this Section. d. The project Electrical Contractor shall not procure or install the system cabling or equipment unless said Electrical Contractor is separately and distinctly qualified as the system Contractor and/or Installer in accordance with the qualifications specified in this Section. e. The system Contractor shall submit documented verification of the specified qualifications as part of the Preconstruction qualification submittal. The Government will have the right to request, inspect and verify references and resumes of all technical and managerial personnel assigned to the project. Qualification documentation shall include, but not be limited to the information outlined below. (1) A list of projects performed by the system Contractor and Installer during the last five years explicitly involving the type of system specified in this Section. The list shall include the name of the facility where the work was done, and the name, title, address and telephone number of a point of contact for the listed facility that can verify the work done. Lists shall be restricted to the facilities where the type of systems delivered and installed are similar to and serve the same purpose as the system specified in this Section. Lists shall explicitly identify the make and model of the system provided, and the total scope of work done for each and every facility on the list. (2) An organization chart for the system Contractor and Installer SECTION 27 52 32.00 10 Page 12
W912HN-12-R-0003
project team that will perform the work of this Section. (3) List and resumes of the principal personnel that will be assigned to work on this project and their assigned work responsibility and relationship with the project management structure. This shall include the following personnel: System Project Manager System Application Designer CAD Staff (that will prepare submittal drawings) Installation Technical and Supervisory Personnel Acceptance Testing Personnel Training Personnel For each individual, this shall include his or her education and experience explicitly relevant to their work assignment on this project, and also include the certificate for factory training where this qualification is specified. Experiences with other types of system unrelated to the type of system specified in this Section are irrelevant and shall not be included. (4) Addresses of the system Contractor and Installer location where the work that is not done on the project site will be performed. This shall include, but not be limited to, the address for the following people, work, and services: principle responsible for this project; system application designer and documentation work; training personnel; repair and maintenance service; repair and maintenance supplies warehouse. (5) Telephone number that will be answered by staff 24 hours per day, 365 days per year, to obtain repair parts and service. (6) The Manufacturer's qualifications relative to the production of the type of system specified in this Section. (7) A letter from the Manufacturer stating that the system Contractor is an authorized distributor and service organization for the Manufacturer of the provided system. The letter shall also state the length of time that the system Contractor has been an authorized distributor. (8) A letter from the Manufacturer stating that system being provided satisfies all functional and product requirements specified in this Section. (9) A letter from the Manufacturer guaranteeing the availability of parts as specified. 1.5.1.2 System Contractor Qualifications
a. The system Contractor shall be regularly engaged in the system application design, documentation, installation, testing, training, and maintenance of the type of system specified in this Section, with a minimum of five years experience providing these services for systems having the same level of features and functions as the system being provided. b. The system Contractor shall be an authorized distributor and service organization for the Manufacturer of the provided system for a SECTION 27 52 32.00 10 Page 13
W912HN-12-R-0003
minimum of at least five years. c. System Contractor personnel assigned to this project shall be factory trained or certified for the make and model of the system provided by the system Contractor to satisfy the specifications in this Section and shall have a minimum of five years experience performing the services that they will perform for this project. d. The system Contractor shall maintain a full complement of repair parts for the provided system and shall be able to furnish on-call maintenance service 24 hours per day, 365 days per year as specified herein. 1.5.1.3 Installer Qualifications
a. The Installer shall be regularly engaged in the business of installation of the type of system specified in this Section. b. The installation supervisor that will be assigned to this project shall be factory trained or certified for the make and model of system provided by the system Contractor to satisfy the specifications in this Section and shall have a minimum of five years experience in the installation of the specified types of system equipment and cables. c. Installer personnel that will be assigned to this project shall have a minimum of three years experience in the installation of the types of system equipment and cabling specified in this Section. 1.5.1.4 Manufacturer Qualifications
a. The Manufacturer shall have a minimum of five years of experience in producing the type of system specified in this Section. b. The Manufacturer shall produce a system that satisfies all specified functional and product requirements. c. The Manufacturer shall guarantee availability of replacement parts for a minimum of seven years from date of final acceptance of the installed system by the Contracting Officer. 1.5.2 1.5.2.1 Regulatory Requirements UL 1069 Listing
a. Fundamental devices and operations of the NCTV System shall be UL 1069 listed and labeled. b. Supplementary devices and operations of the NCTV System, that enhance the fundamental nurse call devices and operations, shall be electrically isolated in accordance with UL 1069, and shall not in any way defeat the UL 1069 listing. 1.5.2.2 Design and Installation Work
All design and installation work shall comply with UL 1069, NFPA 70 NEC, NFPA 99, and TIA-569-B.
SECTION 27 52 32.00 10
Page 14
W912HN-12-R-0003
1.5.2.3
Electromagnetic Interference (EMI)
a. The installed system shall conform to the EMI standards specified in 47 CFR 15 rules and regulations, for EMI caused by computing devices. b. Within the normal medical facility environment, the installed system shall not generate nor be susceptible to any harmful electromagnetic emission, radiation, or induction that degrades, obstructs, or interrupts the operation of the installed system, and any computer system, life safety system, or patient monitoring system in the facility. c. In the event that any part of the system is subject to CFR technical standards different from those set forth herein, including without limitation the requirement that those computing devices marketed for use in business or industrial environments are certified by the FCC to comply with the Class B limit of the FCC Rules, such CFR standards shall apply in lieu of those set forth herein. d. In the event that, at the time of system acceptance testing, the applicable CFR technical standards shall differ from those set forth above, the system as installed shall conform to such then applicable CFR technical standards. e. In the event of a breach of the representations and warranties contained herein, the system Contractor shall, at their own expense, take all measures necessary to put the offending system into compliance with the applicable CFR technical standards. 1.6 1.6.1 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Protection
All products delivered and placed in storage shall be stored with protection from the weather, humidity and temperature variation, dirt and dust, or other contaminants. 1.6.2 Delivery Coordination
Coordinate deliveries with the Contracting Officer to insure a timely installation. 1.6.3 Loss Liability
The system Contractor shall be liable for any loss due to delivery and storage problems. 1.6.4 Delivery Restrictions
a. No products or installation material shall be delivered to the job site more than one month prior to commencement of its installation. b. System products shall not leave the factory prior to six months before the time that the facility is ready for installation of the products. Obtain prior written approval of the shipping date from the Contracting Officer.
SECTION 27 52 32.00 10
Page 15
W912HN-12-R-0003
1.6.5
Contractor Responsibility
The system Contractor shall be responsible for all handling and control of products provided under this contract. 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING a. Each part of the system shall be installed and phased into operation as required by the project schedule. b. Schedule and coordinate work with all other trades and suppliers whose work is critical to the successful installation of the system. c. Furnish and install all required items for a complete and operating installation so as to cause no delay in work by others, or completion of the facility project. d. Final inspection and acceptance testing of each system shall be performed after the system installation and commissioning has been completed. 1.8 WARRANTY a. Guarantee the operational and physical integrity of the provided system, including a warranty against all defects in design, equipment, materials, software, workmanship, and improper installation and adjustments, for a period of at least one year from the date the operating system is accepted by the Government after satisfactory completion of final inspection and acceptance tests. This warranty shall not cover any malfunctions or damage caused by misuse, abuse or neglect. If the system Contractor or Manufacturer warranty is for a period longer than one year, the longest warranty period shall govern. The system Contractor shall furnish a warranty document with the Product Data submittal. b. During the warranty period any maintenance, adjustments or repairs shall be made free of charge. Repair service response time shall be as specified herein under Maintenance and Repair Service. Warranty repair of minor malfunctions desired by the Government at other than normal working hours may be charged at current labor rates for the premium portion of time. 1.9 1.9.1 1.9.1.1 MAINTENANCE Extra Materials Off-The-Shelf Maintenance Parts
The system Contractor shall guarantee that a stock of the Manufacturer's parts required for maintenance service shall be available off-the-shelf from the system Contractor or Manufacturer, and can be express delivered to the medical facility if not available locally. a. Parts that must be ordered from the Manufacturer for the repair of a major malfunction, as defined herein, shall be deliverable within one day after the major malfunction has been identified. b. Parts that must be ordered from the Manufacturer for the repair of a minor malfunction, as defined herein, shall be deliverable within SECTION 27 52 32.00 10 Page 16
W912HN-12-R-0003
three days after the minor malfunction has been identified. 1.9.1.2 Installation Spare Parts
The system Contractor shall keep an adequate quantity of installation spare parts onsite to preclude work stoppages and to meet other contingencies that might arise prior to the final inspection and acceptance of the system. 1.9.1.3 Post Acceptance Spare Parts
a. After the system has been acceptance tested and turned over to the Government for operation, furnish the minimum type and quantity of onsite spare parts as itemized below. Quantity 2 2 2 1 Items
Each type of LED lamp bulbs Each type of Station Each type of Light Set of Main Terminal/Equipment Panel plug-in modules
b. Spare parts shall be maintained onsite by the system Contractor during the warranty period to facilitate quick repair through plug-in module replacement of key system components, then replenished and turned over to the Government at the end of warranty period at no additional cost to the Government. c. The system Contractor shall recommend any additional onsite spare parts deemed necessary by the Manufacturer and or the system Contractor. Furnish to the Contracting Officer the cost of recommended additional spare components as a separate line item. 1.9.1.4 Special Tools and Equipment
a. Furnish one (1) set of any special tools necessary for the installation or maintenance of any system component. b. Furnish one (1) set of any special installation or maintenance equipment necessary for the proper setup, programming, and maintenance of any system component or function. This shall include any required computer equipment and any required setup or diagnostic software programs. c. Deliver all special tools and equipment to the Government upon successful completion of the final inspection and acceptance testing of the system. 1.9.2 Maintenance Service a. System Contractor shall perform warranty maintenance service on the system using qualified maintenance personnel that have been factory trained for the system being serviced. b. For maintenance service after the warranty period, the system Contractor shall offer a Service Agreement to the medical facility. Include a copy of the proposed Service Agreement with the Product Data submittal. c. As authorized by the medical facility, the system Contractor can SECTION 27 52 32.00 10 Page 17
W912HN-12-R-0003
utilize medical facility maintenance personnel that have been factory trained for maintenance of the provided system, for the first level of response to a call for service. 1.9.3 Service Availability and Response Time a. Maintenance service shall be available on a 24 hour per day, 7 days per week basis for on-premises maintenance service within 4 hours after notification of a major malfunction and within 24 hours after notification of a minor malfunction. b. A 24-hour telephone answering service shall be available to receive after hour maintenance service calls and dispatch on-call service personnel within the required response time. c. Repair of a major malfunction shall be accomplished within 8 hours of the reported failure. The occurrence of any of the following events shall constitute a major malfunction: (1) Complete failure of any Major Functional Component of the system, including: NC Subsystem
(2) Failure of a power supply, exclusive of commercial ac power feed. (3) Failure of 20% or more of all stations in any one NC Subsystem to function as specified. (4) Failure of any NC Subsystem annunciator station or emergency station. d. Repair of minor malfunctions shall be completed within 48 hours of the reported failure. A minor malfunction is any failure that does not constitute a major malfunction. PART 2 2.1 2.1.1 PRODUCTS MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT New Products
All products shall be new and free of defects. 2.1.2 Unspecified Products
If the provided system requires additional products that are not specified, or indicated on the drawings, in order to satisfy the specified performance requirements for the system, then these additional component products shall be provided at no additional cost to the Government. 2.1.3 Product Modifications
Modification of products that nullifies the UL listing or other agency approval is not permitted.
SECTION 27 52 32.00 10
Page 18
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.1.4
Identical Products
Products of the same classification shall be identical. This requirement includes all component equipment, modules, assemblies, parts, and materials. 2.1.5 Nameplates and Equipment Markings a. Each major equipment component shall have the Manufacturer's name, model, and serial number on a plate secured to the equipment. Also, all compliance with regulatory requirements, such as UL and CFR, shall be indicated on the nameplate or on adjacent labels. b. All controls on call stations shall be plainly and permanently labeled with the identification of the function served. Stick on marker tapes is not acceptable. c. Markings on any exposed surfaces shall not be destroyed by housekeeping solutions normally used in medical facilities. 2.1.6 Mounting Alignment Capability
Wall mounted components shall have an adjustable mounting alignment capability to compensate for improperly aligned backboxes and to insure a level installation. 2.1.7 Model and Enhancements a. The system and all product components shall be the Manufacturer's latest model, design, version, and quality in production at time of delivery and installation. b. Any product hardware or software enhancement that becomes available after delivery and installation, and up to time of system acceptance, shall be brought to the attention of the Contracting Officer upon announcement by the Manufacturer and shall be made available to the medical facility. If such enhancements customarily are provided at no additional cost, the Government shall automatically be entitled to such enhancements. If such enhancements customarily are provided at additional cost, the Contracting Officer has the option to accept or reject such enhancements. c. Submit a letter to the Contracting Officer from the Manufacturer guaranteeing that the Manufacturer shall inform the Government of, and make available to the Government, all commercially available enhancements to the system hardware or software at the then current price. Include the letter with the product data submittal. d. Substitutions, modifications, or improvements to a system hardware and software are permissible provided that such substitution, modifications, or improvements shall not reduce or degrade the performance or product requirements, nor violate regulatory requirements. No such substitutions, modifications, or improvements shall be made without the written consent of the Manufacturer and Contracting Officer. Such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld or delayed. 2.1.8 Software and License a. Provide all software required for the specified capability, SECTION 27 52 32.00 10 Page 19
W912HN-12-R-0003
configuration, performance, and operation of the system. b. The Government shall be granted a nonexclusive, fully paid perpetual license to use software provided. The Government receives no title or ownership rights to such Software. c. Software maintenance that is provided to any or all other customers without charge shall be provided to the Government at no additional cost to the Government. 2.1.9 Equipment Design for Wet Areas
All equipment that will be installed in wet areas shall be designed and constructed to withstand the UL 1069 Water Spray Test. 2.2 2.2.1 NC SUBSYSTEMS Emergency Pull Cord Stations a. Flush mount units.
b. An emergency call switch that is activated by pulling a nylon cord attached to the switch. The cord shall have a pendant attached to the end of the cord, and length extended to within 2 inches of the floor. The term "PULL FOR HELP" shall be located directly adjacent to the call switch. c. A call cancel push button switch that is clearly labeled either "CANCEL" or "RESET". Alternatively, the cancel function may be a toggle of the emergency call switch. For stations installed in showers or baths that are located in the same room as a toilet, it is acceptable to have the cancel function for the shower/bath station operated from the adjacent emergency pull cord toilet station. d. An LED call assurance indicator.
Emergency Push Button Stations a. Flush mount units.
b. A red color emergency push button call switch that is permanently labeled as an Emergency call switch on or directly adjacent to the call switch. c. A call cancel push button switch that is clearly labeled "CANCEL". Alternatively, the cancel function may be a toggle of the emergency call switch. d. An LED call assurance indicator.
e. Stations installed in wet areas shall be water resistant and shall comply with water spray exposure requirements of UL 1069. f. Waterproof gaskets for stations installed in wet areas. SECTION 27 52 32.00 10 Page 20
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.2.3
Annunciator Stations a. Configurations as shown: Type 1: Wall mount
b.
Visual Indicator Display (1) Electronic programmable visual indicator display. Acceptable visual indicator display technologies include LED or LCD digital displays. Incandescent lamp displays are not acceptable. (2) The font size of the alphanumeric text call information displayed shall be large enough to assure clear readability from the workstations in the area where the annunciator is located. (3) The visual display shall either indicate all calls simultaneously, or scroll through multiple calls that are not simultaneously displayed so that all calls are visible at least every four seconds. (4) The visual display capacity shall accommodate at least a 25 percent expansion in the quantity of call stations, or a minimum of 2 expansion stations, whichever is greater.
c. An electronic alert tone device. A momentary tone defeat switch shall temporarily silence the current call alert tone with automatic reset so that the alert tone will again sound when the next call is placed. d. 2.2.4 A system "POWER ON" indicator light.
Dome (Corridor) Lights a. b. Flush mount units Light with an electronic alert tone device
c. LED Indicator lamps and color filters for each type of call, with heat resistant barriers between multiple lamps. d. An electronic alert tone device. The alert tone device may be integral to the dome light or a separate unit mounted within the dome light enclosure. e. The lens covers shall be shatterproof, heat resistant, and snap on and off for changing of lamps without the use of tools. Lens cover shall not deform, yellow, or craze with use or age. 2.2.5 Zone Lights a. b. Flush mount units. Light with an electronic tone device
c. LED Indicator lamps and color filters for each type of call, with heat resistant barriers between multiple lamps.
SECTION 27 52 32.00 10
Page 21
W912HN-12-R-0003
d. An electronic alert tone device. The alert tone device may be integral to the zone light or a separate unit mounted within the zone light enclosure. e. The lens covers shall be shatterproof, heat resistant, and snap on and off for changing of lamps without the use of tools. Lens cover shall not deform, yellow, or craze with use or age. 2.2.6 Main Terminal/Equipment Panels
a. Panel cabinets shall be surface mount units with knockouts and a hinged door with keyed lock. Each panel cabinet shall be plainly and permanently labeled with the identification of the function served. b. Equipment shall provide system logic, control, switching, memory, timing, signaling, and power circuitry as required by system design. Equipment shall be of modular construction with all components as plug-in modules. c. The system shall operate at or below 30V level. Provide overload and electronic short circuit protection for primary and secondary circuits. d. Interruption or loss of ac power, or the failure of a power supply shall not cause the loss of any call registered prior to loss of power. When power is restored, all normal operations shall continue and all registered calls and associated signals shall be automatically restored. e. A standby power supply shall automatically provide at least 15 minutes of full load uninterrupted power within 4 milliseconds of an ac power failure. Batteries used in the standby power supply shall be maintenance free, completely sealed, and continuously recharged during normal operation. Power calculations shall be included with design data submittal to verify power requirements. f. Equipped capacity for each system shall provide at least a 25 percent expansion in the installed quantity of stations and lights, including swing capacity stations and lights, or a minimum of 2 expansion stations, whichever is greater. 2.3 UPS
a. UPS shall be UL 1778 listed, and comply with the requirements of 47 CFR 15. b. UPS Volt-Amp capacity shall be at least 130 percent of the total volt-amp load of the equipment connected to the UPS. Power requirement calculations shall be included with the design data submittal to verify power requirements. c. Upon ac power line outage, the UPS shall automatically transfer to battery power within 4.2 milliseconds of sensing ac power line loss, and provide at least 15 minutes of full power for operation of the equipment connected to the UPS. On-battery output voltage shall be 115 VAC, +/- 5 percent. d. The UPS shall utilize sealed, maintenance free type batteries that have an expected life of at least three years. The batteries shall always be powered from a constant voltage or "float type" battery charger. Recharge time to 90 percent capacity after discharge to 50 percent capacity shall SECTION 27 52 32.00 10 Page 22
W912HN-12-R-0003
not exceed 10 hours. e. Surge energy rating shall be at least 320 joules. capability shall be at least 26 ka. Surge peak current
f. UPS visual indicators on the UPS front panel shall indicate on-line operation, output overload, low battery, and replace battery. 2.4 SYSTEM CABLING
a. System cabling shall be of the type, size and specifications as required by: the system Manufacturer; the configuration of the installed equipment that is being interconnected by the cabling; the system application design; interconnecting wiring requirements of UL 1069; and the code requirements of NFPA 70 NEC. b. The size of system power cable wires shall be as calculated using the system Manufacturer's instructions and guidelines, and system power requirements. Calculations shall be included with the design data submittal. PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION EXAMINATION
System Contractor shall perform a site survey to verify all field conditions, become familiar with the details of the work and working conditions, verify dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancies before performing the work. 3.2 3.2.1 PREPARATIONS User Room Numbers and Names
a. User room numbers and names for the final system application design, all system functions, and indication on as-built drawings, shall be as directed by the Contracting Officer six months prior to the beneficial occupancy date for the medical facility. b. The system Contractor shall verify that the user room numbers and names used in the system are consistent with the room numbers and names used on the medical facility signage and information system ADT program. 3.2.2 Annunciator Stations
The exact display panel configuration and details for all annunciator stations shall be as coordinated with the Contracting Officer and the medical facility user. Submit details as part of the shop drawings. 3.2.3 Interface with Other Products
Coordinate and define the details of all interfaces and interconnections with other products. This shall include a detailed definition of all electronic and physical interface requirements, interface protocols, and physical demarcation points. Provide details as part of shop drawings and design data submittals.
SECTION 27 52 32.00 10
Page 23
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.3 3.3.1
INSTALLATION General
a. Installation shall be accomplished as indicated and specified, and in accordance with acknowledged industry and professional standards and practices, and the Manufacturer's instructions. b. Installation shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 70, NFPA 99, and TIA-569-B. c. The Installer as qualified in Paragraph QUALITY ASSURANCE, subparagrah Installer Qualifications, shall install and connect all equipment and system cabling. d. During the entire installation the system Contractor shall maintain onsite a supervisor as qualified in Paragraph QUALITY ASSURANCE, subparagraph Installer Qualifications. e. Provide all tools and equipment needed to install the system.
f. All ac power plugs shall be tightly strapped to the ac power receptacle to prevent accidental unplugging of the ac power. 3.3.2 Equipment Installation
a. Appropriate waterproof gaskets shall be used for station installations in wet areas (toilet rooms, showers, etc.). b. Main Terminal/Equipment Panels shall be surface mounted in the telecommunications rooms indicated on the drawings. Mounting of these panels in any other room, area or above finished ceilings shall not be acceptable. Panels shall be marked by the NC Subsystem number and function served. c. Emergency Pull Stations, Dome Lights and Zone lights shall be installed in manufacturer's approved backbox and as indicated on drawing legend. d. Mount equipment firmly secured in place, plumb and square.
e. Provide adequate equipment ventilation and adequate equipment accessibility for service and repair. 3.3.3 a. System Cabling Installation Installation of system cabling shall be by the qualified Installer.
b. System cables shall be installed without kinks, sharp bends or deformations, in a manner to prevent abrasion. c. System cabling shall be installed in cable trays, conduits and boxes specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. 3.3.4 Grounding
Equipment enclosures and all other non-current carrying metal parts of electric equipment shall be grounded.
SECTION 27 52 32.00 10
Page 24
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.3.5
Related Trades
a. Coordinate all efforts with those of related trades. In the event of any conflicts, delayed or improper preparatory work by others, notify the Contracting Officer for resolution; the Contracting Officers= decision shall be binding. b. The Electrical Contractor for the project shall furnish and install all cable trays, conduits, boxes, grounding system and buss bars, and all primary power wiring required to accommodate the installation of the system specified in this Section. c. Coordinate the system cable routing with the cable routing of other systems to assure that there will not be any EMI problems that will adversely affect the performance of this system or any other specified project system. 3.4 3.4.1 APPLICATION AC Power Connections
AC power for all equipment shall be circuited to the emergency system critical branch in accordance with NFPA 70 and NFPA 99. 3.4.2 Zone and Dome Lights
Zone and Dome (Corridor) lights shall be mounted and oriented in each corridor to assure that the indicator lamps can be clearly seen anywhere in the corridor by the caregivers that need to respond to a call. See drawings for detailed zoning requirements. 3.4.3 Installation Setup
Contractor shall make all adjustments and perform all application programming as necessary to setup the system to function in accordance with specific user requirements for the overall system and each patient care area. Coordinate all such setup details with the medical facility users prior to system commissioning, install them as part of the system setup, and include the setup details in the O&M documentation. Examples of installation setup details that require user coordination include the following: a. Sound volume level for alert tone signals that have adjustable settings.
b. Default call routing for patient care areas that have multiple annunciator stations. 3.5 3.5.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Inspection, Checkout and Testing Services
a. Furnish required test equipment, tools, consumable supplies, and technically qualified personnel to perform inspections, checkout and tests of installed system. b. Qualified NCTV System Contractor personnel conducting acceptance tests shall be factory trained or certified and shall be completely knowledgeable regarding the system design, installation, and operation.
SECTION 27 52 32.00 10
Page 25
W912HN-12-R-0003
c. The Contracting Officer reserves the right to approve the system Contractor's choice of testing personnel, and, upon rejection of any testing personnel by the Contracting Officer at any time, system Contractor shall replace such testing personnel as soon as reasonably possible. Upon request, the system Contractor shall provide the Contracting Officer the opportunity to interview and review the qualifications of each person proposed for testing work. d. The system Contractor shall conduct all testing in accordance with submitted and approved test plans and procedure, and requirements specified herein. e. Notification of any planned testing shall be given to the Contracting Officer at least 15 days prior to any test, and in no case shall notice be given until after the system Contractor has received written Government approval of the test plans and procedures. f. Inspection and testing shall be conducted during normal working hours with prior notice to the Contracting Officer so as not to interfere with orderly work processes. g. System Contractor shall allow inspection of all work and workmanship, and witnessing of system Contractor performed acceptance testing. h. Any work that is enclosed or covered up before being inspected and tested shall be uncovered as required and, after it has been inspected and approved, shall be restored to its original condition at no additional cost to the Government. i. Results of each inspection and test shall be reported in electronic and hard copy form to the Contracting Officer. 3.5.2 Periodic Inspection and Testing
a. All work and workmanship shall be subject to inspection and testing as requested by the Contracting Officer at any and all times during preparation and installation. b. The Contracting Officer, in his or her sole discretion, may reject defective work and workmanship and require its correction. The Government right to inspect, test, and reject, or its failure to exercise such right, as provided herein, shall in no way diminish the Contractor's duty to inspect and reject work as necessary to comply fully with the requirements of the contract documents. 3.5.3 System Commissioning
Prior to the start of final inspection and acceptance testing, the system shall be brought into complete working order in full compliance with all specified requirements. This commissioning shall include all necessary programming, adjustments, tuning and testing of the installed system. Verify operation of the interface with all specified systems. 3.5.4 Final Inspection and Acceptance Testing
a. Acceptance tests of the installed system shall be phased in accordance with the project phasing schedule. b. After installation for each phase has been completed, and the system SECTION 27 52 32.00 10 Page 26
W912HN-12-R-0003
installed during the phase has been completely inspected and checked out, the system Contractor shall conduct acceptance tests in accordance with the approved Acceptance Test Plan. c. The system Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer when the installation of a system is completed and operating in accordance with specifications and ready for final inspection and acceptance testing. d. Draft as-built system drawings, and O&M manuals shall be made available by the system Contractor for use during performance of final inspection and acceptance testing. Final inspection or acceptance testing shall not be scheduled nor performed without this documentation. e. The system Contractor shall demonstrate proper installation and performance of each phase of each system in full compliance with all contract documents. f. Final acceptance tests shall demonstrate that the system operates in full accordance with all specified requirements for the system including interfaces to other systems. Each system operating mode shall be demonstrated to perform as specified by operation of each individual system component under simulated normal system loading. g. Upon successful completion of all phased final acceptance tests, and 30 calendar days of consecutive operation in accordance with specified requirements without the occurrence of any major malfunctions, the system Contractor shall submit the final acceptance test report, including certificates of compliance stating that all specified requirements and conditions have been satisfied. The effective date for completion of the final system acceptance shall be the date when the system has satisfied the 30 days of operation without a major malfunction as specified above. 3.5.5 Corrective Action for Rejected Work
a. All deficiencies shall be corrected at no cost to the Government and another inspection and test performed as required to demonstrate compliance with all specifications to the Contracting Officer. b. All corrective action shall be completed in a reasonable time consistent with project schedules and acceptable to the Contracting Officer. c. If, after 30 calendar days from the start of acceptance testing, any system or any equipment component thereof fails to demonstrate complete and proper performance, the Government shall have the right to return the total system or any equipment component to the system Contractor. The system Contractor shall refund all costs thereof to the Government and shall indemnify the Government from damages, costs, and expenses incurred in connection with such activity. d. The actual date of return of any rejected system or equipment component shall be under the absolute control of the Government. The Government shall have the right to continue to utilize such system and equipment until the actual date of removal. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
All specified demonstration and training shall be provided at no additional cost to the Government. This includes all specified onsite training, and factory training at the Manufacturer's facility. SECTION 27 52 32.00 10 Page 27
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.6.1
Training Plan
a. Develop and submit a training plan for approval by the Contracting Officer. The training plan shall include the basic training requirements set forth below. b. Provide training to the medical facility staff in accordance with the approved training plan. 3.6.2 General Preparations
During the week prior to the start of training for any system, check the system to assure that it as been commissioned and is in full-specified operation condition. 3.6.3 Training Personnel
a. Furnish qualified factory trained or certified instructors to train designated medical facility staff in the operation and maintenance of the provided system. b. The Contracting Officer reserves the right to approve the system Contractor's choice of training personnel, and, upon rejection of a trainer by the Contracting Officer at any time, the system Contractor shall immediately replace such trainers. Upon request, the system Contractor shall provide the Contracting Officer the opportunity to interview and review the qualifications of each proposed trainer. 3.6.4 Training Instructions
a. Training instructions shall cover all specified features and capabilities of the system, and all of the items contained in the operating and maintenance manuals. b. Maintenance technician training shall also include preventive maintenance, routine maintenance, repair and troubleshooting procedures. c. Training shall continue until the system Contractor is advised by the Contracting Officer that all training has been satisfactorily completed in accordance with the approved training plan. 3.6.5 Training Materials
a. Furnish all training materials and handouts. Handouts shall be provided in the quantity needed for all of the medical facility technicians, operations and user staff that will receive training. b. 10 copies of all standard training media, such as video recordings, CDs, and DVDs, that are available from the Manufacturer shall be furnished to the Contracting Officer at no additional cost to the Government. c. Video recordings of onsite training sessions shall be made and 10 copies furnished to the Contracting Officer. This shall be a coordinated effort between the system Contractor training staff and the medical facility education department staff.
SECTION 27 52 32.00 10
Page 28
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.6.6
Onsite Training Programs and Requirements
a. Training shall be provided onsite to all medical facility staff as required throughout the contract and warranty period to train operations and maintenance staff for the provided system. b. The onsite training program shall include two training courses, one for maintenance technicians and one for user and operations staff. c. Each course shall include classroom training and field training. Field training for medical facility staff shall take place in the area where the staff will be working. d. Instructional units for each onsite course shall be conducted on three separate occasions to train all staff during their normal on-duty working hours. e. The Contracting Officer shall designate qualified personnel to be instructed in the operation and maintenance of each system, schedule instructional sessions, and provide suitable onsite instruction facilities. 3.6.7 User and Operational Staff Training
a. User and operational staff training shall commence at a time acceptable to the Contracting Officer and near the time the system is scheduled for operational use by the medical facility. b. User and operational staff training shall be a minimum of 2 hour(s) of classroom instructions for all Major Functional Components of the system, and 2 hour(s) of field instructions in each area where equipment is installed. 3.6.8 Technician Training
a. Before the system is turned over to the Government for operational use, training shall be provided for 3 maintenance technicians designated by the Contracting Officer on two separate occsions. b. The onsite technician training course shall provide the number of instructional hours necessary to cover all aspects of system setup, programming, operations, preventive maintenance, routine maintenance, routine repair, and troubleshooting procedures for the system as installed. 3.7 PROTECTION
Items that can be easily stolen shall not be permanently installed until such time as the system Contractor has been notified by the Contracting Officer that the facility is secured. 3.8 3.8.1 SCHEDULES NCTV System
a. Provide a complete and operational NCTV System as specified in this Section and indicated on the project drawings. b. Deliver and install all product items as required to comply with the approved installation schedule.
SECTION 27 52 32.00 10
Page 29
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.8.2
Indicated Items
Provide the quantity and type of system components, such as stations, lights, and outlets, as indicated on the project drawings. 3.8.3 Main Terminal/Equipment Panels
The telecommunication drawings indicate space in telecommunications rooms that has been designated for the installation of system main terminal/equipment panels. As required by the system application design, furnish and install the type and quantity of main terminal/equipment panel(s) in these designated locations. 3.8.4 UPS
Provide an UPS for all equipment that operates directly off of ac line power. At locations where the installed equipment includes both a computer and a monitor, the UPS shall be used to power both the computer and the monitor. 3.8.5 Software
Provide all software programs, as required for all specified capabilities and performance, and pertinent software manuals. Include all operating system(s), application programs, and a complete set of backup software. 3.8.6 Product Samples
Provide one sample unit of each type of station and light for approval as part of the Samples submittal. 3.8.7 Zone Lights Activation Matrices
On the telecommunications plan drawings each Zone Light is identified by an ID Number (#). Each Zone Light shall be programmed to indicate calls originating from the patient care Calling Rooms as defined in the Zone Lights Activation Matrix on the drawings for each NC Subsystem serving a patient care area.
SECTION 27 52 32.00 10
Page 30
W912HN-12-R-0003
SECTION 27 54 00.00 20 COMMUNITY ANTENNA TELEVISION (CATV) SYSTEMS 04/06 PART 1 1.1 GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE) IEEE C2 (2012) National Electrical Safety Code NATIONAL CABLE AND TELECOMMUNICATIONS ASSOCIATION (NCTA) NCTA RP (2003) NCTA Recommended Practices for Measurements on Cable Television Systems NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) NFPA 70 (2011; TIA 11-1; Errata 2011; TIA 11-2; TIA 11-3; TIA 11-4) National Electrical Code U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA) 47 CFR 76.605 Technical Standards
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) UL 1666 (2007) Test for Flame Propagation Height of Electrical and Optical-Fiber Cables Installed Vertically in Shafts (1995; Reprint Nov 2008) Standard for Marking and Labeling Systems
UL 969
1.2
Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, applies to this Section with the additions and modifications specified herein. 1.3 1.3.1 DEFINITIONS CATV
Community antenna television (CATV) system, commonly referred to as cable television, is a network of cables, headend, electronic and passive components that process and amplify television (TV) signals for distribution from the headend equipment to the individual television outlets. 1.3.2 Headend
The connection point between CATV system equipment and equipment provided SECTION 27 54 00.00 20 Page 1
W912HN-12-R-0003
by the local CATV company. 1.3.3 Distribution System
Distribution system transports and delivers adequate signals to each receiver. Provides distortion-free signal to TV sets by isolating each receiver from the system and by providing proper amount of signal to each set. 1.3.4 Cable
Trunkcables are low-loss cables used to transport the desired signal from the headend equipment to the communications room in the area to be served. Drop cables are used to transport the desired signal used from the communications room to the wall outlet. 1.4 1.4.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Headend
Contractor shall obtain the CATV signal from the existing CATV headend located in Clinic addition Comm Room 1169. Process the signal as required by this specification and route via Contractor provided Trunk cable through the amplifier and splitter in Comm Room 1109 in the new addition. 1.4.2 Distribution System
Distribution system shall be star topology with each outlet connected to a communications room with a drop cable and each communications room connected to the headend equipment with a trunk cable 1.4.3 Cable
Provide trunk cables to transport the desired signal from the headend equipment to the communications room in the area to be served. Provide drop cables to transport the desired signal from the communications room to the outlet. 1.4.4 System Components
System shall provide high quality TV signals to all outlets with a return path for interactive television and cable modem access. Provide any combination of items specified herein to achieve required performance, subject to approvals, limitations, acceptance test, and other requirements specified herein. System shall include amplifiers, splitters, combiners, line taps, cables, outlets, tilt compensators and all other parts, components, and equipment necessary to provide a complete and usable system. 1.4.4.1 a. b. 1.4.5 System Bandwidth
Downstream: 50-750 MHz minimum. Upstream 5-40 MHz minimum. System Performance
System shall be in compliance with 47 CFR 76.605.
SECTION 27 54 00.00 20
Page 2
W912HN-12-R-0003
1.4.5.1
Receiver Termination Signal Level
Each termination for a TV receiver must have a minimum signal level of 0 decibel millivolts (dBmV) (1000 microvolts) at 55 MHz and of 0 dBmV (1000 microvolts) at 750 MHz and a maximum signal of 9 dBmV or a level not to overload the receiver. 1.4.5.2 Distribution System 4 percent or less hum
a. Modulation distortion at power frequencies: distortion; b. Composite third order distortion for: (1) (2) c. d. CW carriers: 53 dB. 59 dB.
Modulated carriers:
Subscriber terminal isolation:
18 dB or greater. 60 dB.
Carrier to second order beat ratio:
e. Amplitude characteristic shall be within a range of plus or minus 2 decibels from 0.75 MHz to 5.0 MHz above the lower boundary frequency of the cable television channel, referenced to the average of the highest and lowest amplitudes within these frequency boundaries. f. Visual, aural carrier level - 24-hour variation: subpart (a), rules (4), (5), and (6). g. Frequency determination: and (3). 1.4.5.3 47 CFR 76.605,
47 CFR 76.605, subpart (a), rules (1),(2),
All New System Tolerance
The system shall not show a serious loss of carrier to noise when the system levels are lowered 3 dB below normal or a significant distortion when the levels are increased 3 dB above normal, as observed on a TV set located at the far end extremities of the system. 1.5 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-02 Shop Drawings CATV system wiring diagrams and installation details; G, AE CATV system components; G, AE SD-03 Product Data Cables, including trunk and dro Terminators; G, DO SECTION 27 54 00.00 20 Page 3
W912HN-12-R-0003
Splitters/combiners Line Taps Outlets Connectors Tilt compensator Grounding block Submittals for each manufactured item shall be the current manufacturer's descriptive literature of catalog products, equipment drawings, diagrams, performance and characteristics curves, and catalog cuts. SD-05 Design Data CATV System Loss Calculations; G, AE SD-06 Test Reports Operational test plan; G, AE Operational test procedures; G, AE System pretest; G, AE Acceptance tests; G, AE SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions Connector Installation; G, AE 1.6 1.6.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE Wiring Diagrams and Installation Details
Illustrate how each item of equipment functions in the system and include an overall system schematic indicating the relationship of CATV units on one diagram. Drawings shall include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed locations, layout and arrangements, and other items that must be shown to ensure coordinated installation. 1.6.2 CATV System Loss Calculations
Calculations shall verify that the system does not exceed the loss values specified in dBmV at the input of all active devices and the receiver terminations. Provide a drawing displaying all distribution network calculations. The drawing should accurately show taps, splitters, outlets, and the type and length of all trunk and drop cables. The drawing shall show how many taps, splitters, or outlets are served by each tap or splitter.
SECTION 27 54 00.00 20
Page 4
W912HN-12-R-0003
1.6.3
Operational Test Plan
Test plan shall define tests required to ensure that the system meets technical, operational, and performance specifications. Test plan shall be based on NCTA RP and be in accordance with FCC proof of performance requirements. Test plan shall include plan for testing for signal leakage. Provide test requirements and guidelines. 1.6.4 Operational Test Procedures
Use test plan and design documents to develop test procedures. Procedures shall consist of detailed instructions for a test setup, execution, and evaluation of test results. 1.6.5 Connector Installation
Provide manufacturer's instructions for installing connectors. PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT
Electronic components of similar type shall be produced and designed by the same manufacturer as major components of the equipment and shall have the manufacturer's name and model permanently attached. Equipment shall function properly as a complete integrated system. Equipment shall be shielded. The system shall be designed to operate within 5 to 1000 MHz bandwidth using 1000 MHz passive devices and a minimum of 750 MHz active devices. 2.2 2.2.1 DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT Distribution Amplifiers
Distribution amplifiers shall be equipped for 75 ohms input and output impedance. Electronic equipment exposed to weather shall be equipped with weatherproof housings. Amplifiers shall be bidirectional with variable slope and gain control and shall amplify broadband signals from 50 to 750 MHz and provide an amplified return path for signals from 5 to 40 MHz for 75 ohms impedance. 2.2.1.1 Trunk Amplifiers
Trunk amplifiers shall have automatic level and slope control features. 2.2.2 Cables and Associated Hardware
Cabling shall be UL listed for the application and shall comply with NFPA 70. Provide a labeling system for cabling as required by UL 969. Cabling manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of installation shall not be used. 2.2.2.1 Trunk Cable
UL 1666. Provide trunk cable with an NFPA 70 rating of CATVR. Where installed below grade provide flooding compound between jacket and shield. Plenum rated in existing building. a. Provide RG-11 coaxial cable with the following characteristics: SECTION 27 54 00.00 20 Page 5
W912HN-12-R-0003
(1)
#14 AWG copper-clad steel center conductor.
(2) Gas injected foam polyethylene dielectric with nominal 0.28 inches outer diameter. (3) Bonded foil inner-shield and 60 percent aluminum braid or quad shield. (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) 75 ohms impedance. 82 to 85 percent nominal velocity of propagation. Black PVC jacket 100 percent sweep testing from 5 MHz to a minimum of 1000 MHz. Maximum attenuation characteristics: MHz 5 55 300 350 450 500 b. DB/100 ft 0.38 0.96 2.25 2.42 2.86 2.90 MHz 600 750 1000 DB/100 ft 3.18 3.65 4.35
Provide 500 Series cable with an NFPA 70 rating of CATVR and the following characteristics: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Copper-clad aluminum center conductor Seamless aluminum tubing shield Expanded polyethylene dielectric 75 ohms impedance Nominal diameter over outer conductor: 0.500 inches. 2.53
(6) Maximum attenuation at 20 degrees C and 1000 MHz: dB/100 feet
(7) Black medium density polyethylene jacket. For underground applications, flooded polyethylene with water resistant healing compound. For plenum return areas in existing building,PVDF jacket. (8) (9) 2.2.2.2 Nominal 87 percent velocity of propagation 100 percent sweep testing from 5 MHz to a minimum of 1000 MHz.
Drop Cable
UL 1581. Provide RG 6 coaxial cable with an NFPA 70 rating of CATV and with the following characteristics: a. No. 18 AWG copper-clad steel center conductor.
SECTION 27 54 00.00 20
Page 6
W912HN-12-R-0003
b. c. d. e. f. g.
Bonded foil inner-shield and 90 percent aluminum braid. Characteristic impedance of 75 ohms. Gas injected foam polyethylene dielectric Nominal capacitance, conductor to shield, of 16.2 pf per 100 ft . Maximum operating voltage of 350 V RMS. Maximum attenuation: CATV MHz 10 50 100 200 400 500 DB/100 ft 0.81 1.46 2.05 2.83 4.00 4.53 MHz 700 1000 DB/100 ft 6.0 7.3
h. i. 2.2.3
Black polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacket. 100 percent sweep testing from 5 MHz to a minimum of 1000 MHz.
Terminators
Provide terminating resistor caps on unused ports. Terminators shall be rated for 75 ohms and 1/4 watt. 2.2.4 Splitters/Combiners
Use splitters/combiners with characteristics equal to or exceeding the characteristics listed in this paragraph over the entire operating band. All unused outlets must be terminated with 75-ohm terminators. a. b. c. 2.2.5 Peak to Valley: Return loss: Bandwidth: Not to exceed 1 dB across bandwidth of device.
18 dB minimum. 5-1000 Mhz
Line Taps
Line taps shall have 18 dB minimum isolation from each tap to the thru-line. Pressure tapoffs are not permitted. Taps shall be rated from 5 to 1000 MHz and shall have a peak to valley not to exceed 1 dB to 1 GHz. 2.2.6 Outlets
Provide flush mounted, 75-ohm, F-type connector outlets rated from 5 to 1000 MHz in standard electrical outlet boxes with isolation barrier. 2.2.7 Connectors
Provide one piece connectors. Trunk cable connectors shall be pin type. Drop cable connectors shall be feed thru type.
SECTION 27 54 00.00 20
Page 7
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.2.8
Tilt Compensator
Provide tilt compensators as required. 2.3 GROUNDING AND BONDING
Provide ground rods and connections in accordance with Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. 2.3.1 Grounding Block
Provide corrosion-resistant grounding block suitable for indoor installation. 2.4 BACKBOARDS
Provide void-free, fire rated interior grade plywood, 3/4 inch thick, 4 by 8 feet. Backboards shall be painted with a gray, nonconductive fire-resistant overcoat. Do not cover the fire stamp on the backboard. PART 3 3.1 3.1.1 EXECUTION INSTALLATION Distribution System
Distribution system shall conform to requirements specified herein. Installation shall be in accordance with IEEE C2 and NFPA 70. 3.1.1.1 Raceway
Provide cable installed in raceways such as conduit and cable trays in compliance with NFPA 70. Raceway shall comply with Section 26 20 00, INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. 3.1.1.2 Grounding System
Provide the grounding block where indicated on drawings. Ground this device according to the requirements of IEEE C2 and NFPA 70. 3.1.1.3 Trunk and Drop Cable
Provide cable to grounding blocks, to line taps, and to outlets. 3.2 3.2.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL System Pretest
Upon completing installation of the CATV system, the Contractor shall align and balance the system and shall perform complete pretesting. During the system pretest, Contractor, utilizing the approved spectrum analyzer or signal level meter, shall verify that the system is fully operational and meets all the system performance requirements of the specification. Contractor shall test the signal level in dBmV at 55, 151, 547, and 750 MHz. The signal levels shall be 0 dBmV (1000 microvolts), minimum. The signal level shall not exceed 9 dBmV. Any deficiencies found shall be corrected and revalidated by follow up testing. Contractor shall measure and record the video and audio carrier levels at each of the frequency levels specified at each outlet and at each headend and distribution SECTION 27 54 00.00 20 Page 8
W912HN-12-R-0003
amplifier input and output. 3.2.2 Acceptance Tests
Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer of system readiness 10 days prior to the date of acceptance testing. Contractor shall also coordinate with the local CATV provider and allow them to attend witness tests. CATV system shall be tested in accordance with the approved test plan in the presence of the Contracting Officer's representative to certify acceptable performance. System test shall verify that the total system meets all the requirements of the specification and complies with the specified standards. Contractor shall verify that no signal leakage exists in conformance with NCTA RP and 47 CFR 76.605. System leakage shall also be tested at the headend location with signal applied to system. Provide a Time Domain Reflectometer (TDR) test of coax cable. Deficiencies revealed by the testing shall be corrected on the outlets sampled as well as on the outlets not sampled and revalidated by follow-up testing. Contractor shall conduct testing at each outlet and at each headend and distribution amplifier input and output.
SECTION 27 54 00.00 20
Page 9
W912HN-12-R-0003
SECTION 28 08 00 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS PART 1 1.1 GENERAL COMMISSIONING DEFINITION
Commissioning is a systematic process of ensuring that all the building's Security related systems are installed and calibrated, and perform interactively according to the design intent and the owner's project requirements and operational needs. This is achieved by beginning at the design phase with documented design and operating intent and continuing through construction and acceptance with actual verification of performance. 1.2 1. COMMISSIONING OBJECTIVE To verify that Security Systems are installed in accordance with project drawings and specifications. To verify and document proper functioning of Security Systems. To verify that proper project close out documentation is submitted by the contractor to the Government. To verify that Government's operating personnel is properly trained. QUALIFICATIONS OF PERSONNEL The following are the minimum qualifications for the Construction Contractor Commissioning personnel: a) Minimum of 5-year of experience in the related field; b) Industry training in the related field is mandatory; c) Industry certifications in the related field are highly desired; d) Minimum of 2-year college degree is required, but can be substituted by additional 5 years of experience. The following are the minimum qualifications for the contractor testing personnel: a) Minimum of 3-year of experience in the related field; b) Industry training in the related field is mandatory; c) Industry certifications in the related field are highly desired. The following are the minimum qualifications for the Construction Contractor training personnel: a) Minimum of 5-year of experience in the related field; b) Industry training in the related field; c) Industry certifications in the related field; d) Minimum of 2-year college degree. TECHNOLOGY SYSTEMS TO BE COMMISSIONED
2. 3.
4. 1.3 1.
2.
3.
1.4
The list of systems which shall be commissioned is outlined below. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Duress Alarm System Integrated Electronic Security System Access Control System Infant Security System Intrusion Detection System Emergency Medical Service Radio System SECTION 28 08 00 Page 1
W912HN-12-R-0003
7. 8. 9. 1.4.1
Physiological Monitoring System Closed Circuit Television(CCTV) System Radio Transponder System Systems Descriptions
1. DURESS ALARM SYSTEM *3 A Duress Alarm System (often utilizing a 'Panic Button') is designed to allow for response to an alarm condition by signaling a dangerous condition exists, such as an intruder, a violent encounter or life threatening situation. Refer to Telecommunications/Security drawings for installation requirements as well as specification section 28 20 01. 00 10. CxC shall verify that the system is installed according to these documents. 2. INTEGRATED ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEM
Refer to Telecommunications/Security drawings for installation requirements as well as specification section 28 20 01. 00 10. CxC shall verify that the system is installed according to these documents. 3. ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM *3 The Access Control System is an electronic door access system which includes the monitor and control equipment and equipment to produce cards to allow or discontinue access authorization and maintain and provide a listing of current authorized access by individual, location, and time. Refer to Telecommunications/Security drawings for installation requirements as well as specification section 28 20 01. 00 10. CxC shall verify that the system is installed according to these documents. 4. INFANT SECURITY SYSTEM
There are no commissioning requirements for this system under this project. 5. INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEM *3 Intrusion detection (ID) is a security system for protection from intrusion by unauthorized access. The system shall be integrated into the Integrated Electronic Security System. Refer to Telecommunications/Security drawings for installation requirements as well as specification section 28 20 01. 00 10. CxC shall verify that the system is installed according to these documents. 6. EMERGENCY MEDICAL SERVICES RADIO SYSTEM
EMS radio site preparation and antenna connection infrastructure will be upgraded for Government repositioning of the radio to the new facility. CxC shall verify that the system is installed in accordance with manufacturer instructions and functions adequately for intended use. 7. PHYSIOLOGICAL MONITORING SYSTEM
Empty conduit(s) and back box(es) will be installed where required.
SECTION 28 08 00
Page 2
W912HN-12-R-0003
CxC shall verify that these items are installed according to requirements and intended use. 8. CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION (CCTV) SYSTEM
Refer to Telecommunications/Security drawings for installation requirements. CxC shall verify that the system is installed according to these documents. 9. RADIO TRANSPONDER SYSTEM
Coordinate commissioning requirements (if any) with Government. PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used. PART 3 3.1 1. EXECUTION COMMISSIONING PROCESS Commissioning Process shall commence with a meeting/conference call conducted by Commissioning agent for construction/Commissioning Specialist (CxC), where the commissioning process is reviewed with Installing contractor and commissioning team members. CxC shall perform a thorough inspection of the Security Systems installed by contractor at the strategic project milestones and issue a report outlining the observations. Strategic milestones include, but not necessarily limited to the following: a. b. c. 3. Initial equipment installation Substantial completion Final completion
2.
Contractor needs to resolve all the problems outlined in the CxC's report. Contractor shall properly train Government's personnel. Contractor shall issue to the Government close out documentation including, but not necessarily limited to: a. b. c. As-built drawings Warranty certificates Test reports indicating all prior deficiencies being corrected.
4. 5.
*3 6. 6) Sign-off documentation shall be issued upon final completion and acceptance. The sign-off documentation shall contain the certification that tested system meets requirements indicated on the drawings and in the specifications. The sign-off documentation shall be signed by the following personnel: a. b. c. d. e. Commissioning agent for construction/Commissioning Specialist CxC Contractor's representative Design agency representative Contracting agency representative Using agency representative.
SECTION 28 08 00
Page 3
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.2 1.
PROBLEM RESOLUTION Contractor shall resolve all the problems outlined in CxC reports. CxCmay recommend the solution to the problems found, however, the burden of responsibility to resolve and correct the problems/deficiencies is with the contractor. SUBMITTALS Each system test shall be documented by a report. A printed test report bound in a three ring binder shall be provided by contractor to the CxC. The binder shall contain summary of the test reports as well. Test reports with the summary in the electronic format shall be provided by the contractor. COORDINATION, NOTIFICATION AND SCHEDULING Contractor shall notify CxC in writing at least two weeks in advance before system testing commences. -- End of Section --
3.3 1.
2.
3.4 1.
SECTION 28 08 00
Page 4
W912HN-12-R-0003
SECTION 28 16 01.00 10 SMALL INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEM 11/08 PART 1 1.1 GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI) ANSI INCITS 92 (1980; R 2003) Data Encryption Algorithm
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE) IEEE C2 IEEE C62.41.1 (2012) National Electrical Safety Code (2002; R 2008) Guide on the Surges Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits (2002) Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits
IEEE C62.41.2
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA) NEMA 250 (2008) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) (2000; R 2005; R 2008) Standard for Industrial Control and Systems: General Requirements
NEMA ICS 1
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) NFPA 70 (2011; TIA 11-1; Errata 2011; TIA 11-2; TIA 11-3; TIA 11-4) National Electrical Code U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA) 47 CFR 15 Radio Frequency Devices
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) UL 1037 (1999; Reprint Dec 2009) Safety Antitheft Alarms and Devices (1995; Reprint Sep 2010) Proprietary Burglar Alarm Units and Systems (1999; Reprint Jan 2001) Installation and SECTION 28 16 01.00 10 Page 1
UL 1076
UL 681
W912HN-12-R-0003
Classification of Burglar and Holdup Alarm Systems UL 796 1.2 1.2.1 DEFINITIONS Intrusion Alarm (2010) Standard for Printed-Wiring Boards
An alarm resulting from the detection of a specified target and which results in an attempt to intrude into the protected area or when entry into an entry controlled area is attempted without successfully using entry control procedures. 1.2.2 Nuisance Alarm
An alarm resulting from the detection of an alarm stimuli, but which does not represent an attempt to intrude into the protected area. 1.2.3 Environmental Alarm
An alarm during environmental conditions which exceed those specified. 1.2.4 False Alarm
An alarm when there is no alarm stimulus. 1.2.5 Duress Alarm
An alarm condition which results from a set of pre-established conditions such as entering a special code into a keypad or by activating a switch. This alarm category shall take precedence over other alarm categories. 1.2.6 Standard Intruder
Individual that weighs 100 pounds or less and is 5 feet tall or less, dressed in a long-sleeved shirt, slacks and shoes, unless environmental conditions at the site require protective clothing. Standard intruder movement is defined as any movement such as walking, running, crawling, rolling, or jumping through a protected zone in the most advantageous manner for the intruder. 1.3 1.3.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION General
Configure the Intrusion Detection System (IDS) as described and shown, including Government Furnished Equipment (GFE). Computing devices, as defined in 47 CFR 15, shall be certified to comply with the requirements for Class A computing devices and labeled as set forth in 47 CFR 15. 1.3.2 Overall System Reliability Requirement
The system, including all components and appurtenances, shall be configured and installed to yield a mean time between failure (MTBF) of at least 10,000 hours continuous operation.
SECTION 28 16 01.00 10
Page 2
W912HN-12-R-0003
1.3.3
Probability of Detection
Each zone shall have a continuous probability of detection greater than 90 percent and shall be demonstrated with a confidence level of 95 percent. This probability of detecting a standard intruder equates to 49 successful detections out of 50 tests or 98 successful detections out of 100 tests. 1.3.4 Electrical Requirements
Electrically powered IDS equipment shall operate on 120 or 240 volt 60 Hz AC sources as shown. Equipment shall be able to tolerate variations in the voltage source of plus or minus 10 percent, and variations in the line frequency of plus or minus 2 percent with no degradation of performance. 1.3.5 Power Line Surge Protection
Protect equipment connected to alternating current circuits from power line surges. Equipment protection shall withstand surge test waveforms described in IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2. Fuses shall not be used for surge protection. 1.3.6 Sensor Wiring and Communication Circuit Surge Protection
Protect inputs against surges induced on sensor wiring. Outputs shall be protected against surges induced on control and sensor wiring installed outdoors and as shown. All communications equipment shall be protected against surges induced on any communications circuit. All cables and conductors, except fiber optics, which serve as communications circuits from the console to field equipment, and between field equipment, shall have surge protection circuits installed at each end. Protection shall be furnished at equipment, and additional triple electrode gas surge protectors rated for the application on each wireline circuit shall be installed within 3 feet of the building cable entrance. Fuses shall not be used for surge protection. The inputs and outputs shall be tested in both normal mode and common mode using the following two waveforms: a. A 10 microsecond rise time by 1000 microsecond pulse width waveform with a peak voltage of 1500 volts and a peak current of 60 amperes. An 8 microsecond rise time by 20 microsecond pulse width waveform with a peak voltage of 1000 volts and a peak current of 500 amperes. System Reaction
b.
1.3.7
All alarms shall be annunciated on the displays within 1 second of their occurring at a local processor. 1.3.8 System Capacity
The system shall monitor and control the number of inputs and outputs shown and shall include an expansion capability of a minimum of 25 percent. 1.4 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SECTION 28 16 01.00 10 Page 3
W912HN-12-R-0003
SD-03 Product Data Intrusion Detection System; ; G, DO a. System block diagram. b. Console installation, block diagrams, and wiring diagrams. c. Processor installation, typical block, and wiring diagrams. d. Details of connections to power sources, including power supplies and grounding. e. Details of surge protection device installation. f. Sensor detection patterns. g. The qualifications of the Manufacturer, Contractor, and Installer to perform the work specified herein. Key Control Plan; ; G, DO Key control plan including the following: a. Procedures that will be used to log and positively control all keys during installation. b. A listing of all keys and where they are used. c. A listing of all persons allowed entry to the keys. Spare Parts Data lists of spare parts, tools, and test equipment for each different item of material and equipment specified. Manufacturer's Instructions; ; G, DO Printed copies of manufacturer's recommendations for installation of materials prior to installation. Where installation procedures, or any part thereof, are required to be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, installation of the item will not be allowed to proceed until the recommendations are received and approved. Testing; ; G, DO Test plan defining all tests required to ensure that the system meets technical, operational and performance specifications, 60 days prior to proposed test date. The test plan must be approved before the start of any testing. The test plan shall identify the capabilities and functions to be tested, and include detailed instructions for the setup and execution of each test and procedures for evaluation and documentation of the results. Experience Written proof of specified experience requirements. SD-06 Test Reports Performance Verification Test Test reports, in booklet form with witness signatures verifying execution of tests. Reports shall show the field tests to verify compliance with the specified performance criteria. Test reports SECTION 28 16 01.00 10 Page 4
W912HN-12-R-0003
shall include records of the physical parameters verified during testing. Test reports shall be submitted within 14days after completion of testing. SD-07 Certificates Materials and Equipment Where materials or equipment are specified to conform, be constructed or tested to meet specific requirements, certification that the items provided conform to such requirements. Certification by a nationally recognized testing laboratory that a representative sample has been tested to meet the requirements, or a published catalog specification statement to the effect that the item meets the referenced standard, will be acceptable as evidence that the item conforms. Compliance with these requirements does not relieve the Contractor from compliance with other requirements of the specifications. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Submit written proof that the following experience requirements are being met. 1.5.1 Hardware Manufacturer
All system components shall be produced by manufacturers who have been regularly engaged in the production of intrusion detection system components of the types to be installed for at least 3 years. 1.5.2 Software Manufacturer
All system and application software shall be produced by manufacturers who have been regularly engaged in the production of intrusion detection system and application software of similar type and complexity as the specified system for at least 2 years. 1.5.3 System Installer
The system shall be installed by a Contractor who has been regularly engaged in the installation of intrusion detection systems of similar type and complexity as the specified system for at least 2 years. 1.5.4 1.5.4.1 Line Supervision Signal and Data Transmission System (DTS) Line Supervision
All signal or DTS lines between sensors and the alarm annunciation console shall be supervised by the system. The system shall supervise the signal lines by monitoring changes in the direct current that flows through the signal lines and a terminating resistor. The system shall initiate an alarm in response to a current change of 10 percent or greater. The system shall also initiate an alarm in response to opening, closing, shorting, or grounding of the signal and DTS lines. 1.5.4.2 Data Encryption
The intrusion detection system shall incorporate data encryption equipment on data transmission media links as shown. The algorithm used for SECTION 28 16 01.00 10 Page 5
W912HN-12-R-0003
encryption shall be the Data Encryption Standard (DES) algorithm described in ANSI INCITS 92. 1.6 1.6.1 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS Interior, Controlled Environment
All system components, except the console, installed in interior locations having controlled environments shall be rated for continuous operation under ambient environmental conditions of 36 to 122 degrees F dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, noncondensing. 1.6.2 Central Station
All central station equipment shall, unless designated otherwise, be rated for continuous operation under ambient environmental conditions of 60 to 85 degrees F and a relative humidity of 20 to 80 percent. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
Submit spare parts data for each different item of equipment and material specified, after approval of detail drawings and not later than 2months prior to the date of beneficial occupancy. The data shall include a complete list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply, and a list of the parts recommended for stocking PART 2 2.1 2.1.1 PRODUCTS MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT General
Units of the same type of equipment shall be products of a single manufacturer. All material and equipment shall be new and currently in production. Each major component of equipment shall have the manufacturer's model and serial number in a conspicuous place. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for local processors. Each nameplate shall identify the local processor and its location within the system. Laminated plastic shall be 1/8 inch thick, white with black center core. Nameplates shall be a minimum of 1 by 3 inches, with minimum 1/4 inch high engraved block lettering. Attach nameplates to the inside of the enclosure housing the local processor. Other major components of the system shall have the manufacturer's name, address, type or style, model or serial number, and catalog number on a corrosion resistant plate secured to the item of equipment. Nameplates will not be required for devices smaller than 1 by 3 inches. 2.1.2 Enclosures
System enclosures shall be as shown. 2.1.2.1 Interior Sensor
Sensors to be used in an interior environment shall be housed in an enclosure that provides protection against dust, falling dirt, and dripping noncorrosive liquids.
SECTION 28 16 01.00 10
Page 6
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.1.2.2
Interior Electronics
System electronics to be used in an interior environment shall be housed in enclosures which meet the requirements of NEMA 250 Type 12. 2.1.3 2.1.3.1 Locks and Key-Lock Switches Locks
Install locks on system enclosures for maintenance purposes. Locks shall be UL listed, round-key type, with three dual, one mushroom, and three plain pin tumblers orconventional key type lock having a combination of five cylinder pin and five-point three position side bar. Keys shall be stamped "U.S. GOVT. DO NOT DUP". The locks shall be so arranged that the key can only be withdrawn when in the locked position. All maintenance locks shall be keyed alike and only two keys shall be furnished for all of these locks. These keys shall be controlled in accordance with the key control plan. 2.1.3.2 Key-Lock-Operated Switches
All key-lock-operated switches required to be installed on system components shall be UL listed, round-key type, with three dual, one mushroom, and three plain pin tumblers or conventional key type lock having a combination of five cylinder pin and five-point three position side bar. Keys shall be stamped "U.S. GOVT. DO NOT DUP". Key-lock-operated switches shall be two position, with the key removable in either position. All key-lock-operated switches shall be keyed differently and only two keys shall be furnished for each key-lock-operated-switch. These keys shall be controlled in accordance with the key control plan. 2.1.3.3 Construction Locks
If the Contractor requires locks during installation and construction, a set of temporary locks shall be used. The final set of locks installed and delivered to the Government shall not include any of the temporary locks. 2.1.4 Application of System Component
System components shall be designed for continuous operation. Electronic components shall be solid state type, mounted on printed circuit boards conforming to UL 796. Printed circuit board connectors shall be plug-in, quick-disconnect type. Power dissipating components shall incorporate safety margins of not less that 25 percent with respect to dissipation ratings, maximum voltages, and current carrying capacity. Light duty relays and similar switching devices shall be solid state type or sealed electro-mechanical. 2.1.4.1 Maintainability
Components shall be designed to be maintained using commercially available tools and equipment. Components shall be arranged and assembled so they are accessible to maintenance personnel. There shall be no degradation in tamper protection, structural integrity, EMI/RFI attenuation, or line supervision after maintenance when it is performed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. The system shall be configured and installed to yield a mean time to repair (MTTR) of not more than 8 hours. Repair time is the clock time from the time maintenance personnel are given entrance to the system and begin work, until the system is fully functional. SECTION 28 16 01.00 10 Page 7
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.1.4.2
Interchangeability
Construct the system with off-the-shelf components which are physically, electrically and functionally interchangeable with equivalent components as complete items. Replacement of equivalent components shall not require modification of either the new component or of other components with which the replacement items are used. Custom designed or one-of-a-kind items shall not be used. Interchangeable components or modules shall not require trial and error matching in order to meet integrated system requirements, system accuracy, or restore complete system functionality. 2.1.4.3 Electromagnetic and Radio Frequency Interference (EMI/RFI)
System components generating EMI/RFI shall be designed and constructed in accordance with 47 CFR 15. 2.1.4.4 Product Safety
System components shall conform to applicable rules and requirements of NFPA 70. System components shall be equipped with instruction plates, including warnings and cautions, describing physical safety, and special or important procedures to be followed in operating and servicing system equipment. 2.1.5 Controls and Designations
Provide controls and designations as specified in NEMA ICS 1. 2.1.6 Special Test Equipment special test equipment, special hardware, software, tools, and or initialization equipment needed to start or maintain any system and its components. Special test equipment is defined equipment not normally used in an electronics maintenance
Provide all programming part of the as any test facility. 2.1.7
Alarm Output
The alarm output of each sensor shall be a single pole double throw (SPDT) contact rated for a minimum of 0.25 A at 24 volts DC. 2.1.8 Alarm Indicator Lights
Indicator lights used throughout the system shall be light emitting diodes (LED) or long life incandescent lamps. The indicator lights used shall be visible from a distance of 30 feet in an area illuminated to 75 foot candles. The indicator lights shall conform to the following color coding: a. FLASHING RED to alert an operator that a zone has gone into an unacknowledged alarm or that primary power has failed. RED to alert an operator that a zone is in alarm and that the alarm has been acknowledged. YELLOW to advise an operator that a zone is in access. GREEN to indicate that a zone is secure or that power is on.
b.
c. d.
SECTION 28 16 01.00 10
Page 8
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.1.9
Access/Secure Devices
Access/secure devices shall be used to place a protected zone in ACCESS. The device shall disable all sensor alarm outputs, with the exception of tamper alarm outputs within the protected zone, and sensors in zones above false ceilings or other inaccessible locations as shown. 2.1.9.1 Switches
The switch shall consist of a double pull key-operated switch housed in a NEMA 12 equivalent enclosure. 2.1.9.2 Key Pads
Secure/Access keypads shall use a unique combination of alphanumeric and other symbols as an identifier. Keypads shall contain an integral alphanumeric/special symbols keyboard with symbols arranged in ascending ASCII code ordinal sequence. The keypad shall have a contact output. 2.2 2.2.1 INTERIOR SENSORS Balanced Magnetic Switch (BMS)
The BMS shall detect 1/4 inch of separating relative movement between the magnet and the switch housing. Upon detecting such movement, it shall transmit an alarm signal to the alarm annunciation system. 2.2.1.1 BMS Subassemblies
The BMS shall consist of a switch assembly and an actuating magnetic assembly. The switch mechanism shall be of the balanced magnetic type. Each switch shall be provided with an overcurrent protective device, rated to limit current to 80 percent of the switch capacity. Switches shall be rated for a minimum lifetime of one million operations. The housings of surface mounted switches and magnets shall be made of nonferrous metal and shall be weatherproof. The housings of recess mounted switches and magnets shall be made of nonferrous metal or plastic. 2.2.1.2 Remote Test
Provide a remote test capability. The remote test shall be initiated when commanded by the alarm annunciation system. The remote test shall activate the sensor's switch mechanism causing an alarm signal to be transmitted to the alarm annunciation system. The remote test shall simulate the movement of the actuating magnet relative to the switch subassembly. 2.2.2 Glass Break Sensor, Piezoelectric
The glass break sensor shall detect high frequency vibrations generated by the breaking of glass while ignoring all other mechanical vibrations. An alarm signal shall be transmitted upon detecting such frequencies to the alarm annunciation system. 2.2.2.1 Sensor Element
The sensor element shall consist of piezoelectric crystals. The sensor element housing shall be designed to be mounted directly to the glass surface being protected. Only the adhesive recommended by the manufacturer of the sensor shall be used to mount detectors to glass. The detection SECTION 28 16 01.00 10 Page 9
W912HN-12-R-0003
pattern of a sensor element shall be circular with at least a 5 foot radius on a continuous pane of glass. A factory installed hookup cable of not less than 6 feet shall be included with each sensor. The sensor element shall not exceed 4 square inches. The sensor element shall be equipped with a light emitting diode (LED) activation indicator. The activation indicator shall light when the sensor responds to the high frequencies associated with breaking glass. The LED shall be held on until it is turned off manually at the sensor signal processor or by command from the alarm annunciation system. 2.2.2.2 Sensor Signal Processor
The sensor signal processor shall process the signals from the sensor elements and provide the alarm signal to the alarm annunciation system. The sensitivity of the sensor shall be adjustable by controls within the sensor signal processor. The controls shall not be accessible when the sensor signal processor housing is in place. The sensor signal processor may be integral with the sensor or may be a separate assembly. 2.2.2.3 Glass Break Simulator
Provide a device that can induce frequencies into the protected pane of glass that will simulate breaking glass to the sensor element without causing damage to the pane of glass. 2.2.3 Glass Break Sensor, Acoustic
The glass break sensor shall detect high frequency vibrations generated by the breaking of glass while ignoring all other mechanical vibrations. An alarm signal shall be transmitted upon detecting such frequencies to the alarm annunciation system. 2.2.3.1 Acoustic Sensor Element
The sensor element shall be a microprocessor based digital device. The sensor shall detect breakage of plate, laminate, tempered, and wired glass while rejecting common causes of false alarms. The detection pattern of the sensor element shall be a range of 20 feet minimum. The sensor element shall be equipped with a light emitting diode (LED) activation indicator. The activation indicator shall light when the sensor responds to the high frequencies associated with breaking glass. The LED shall be held on until it is turned off manually at the sensor signal processor or by command from the alarm annunciation system. The sensor signal processor shall process the signals from the sensor element and provide the alarm signal to the alarm annunciation system. 2.2.3.2 Acoustic Sensor Signal Processor
The sensor signal processor shall process the signals from the sensor elements and provide the alarm signal to the alarm annunciation system. The sensitivity of the sensor shall be adjustable by controls within the sensor signal processor. The controls shall not be accessible when the sensor signal processor housing is in place. The sensor signal processor may be integral with the sensor or may be a separate assembly. 2.2.3.3 Acoustic Glass Break Simulator
A device that can induce frequencies which simulate breaking glass to the sensor shall be available for the specific sensor selected. The simulator SECTION 28 16 01.00 10 Page 10
W912HN-12-R-0003
shall not cause damage to the pane of glass. 2.2.4 Vibration Sensor
The vibration sensor shall detect the high frequency vibrations generated by the use of such tools as oxyacetylene torches; oxygen lances; high speed drills and saws; and explosives, to penetrate a structure while ignoring all other mechanical vibrations. An alarm signal shall be transmitted to the alarm annunciation system. The sensor shall consist of a sensor signal processor and piezoelectric crystal sensor elements that are designed to be rigidly mounted to the structure being protected. The sensor signal processor may be integral with the sensor element or may be a separate assembly. The sensor signal processor shall process the signals from the sensor elements and provide the alarm signal to the alarm annunciation system. The sensitivity of the sensor shall be adjustable by controls within the sensor signal processor. The controls shall not be accessible when the sensor signal processor housing is in place. The detection pattern of a sensor element shall be circular with at least a 6 foot radius on the protected structure. 2.2.5 Microwave Motion Sensor
The transmitted microwave motion sensor shall detect changes in a microwave signal. Upon detecting a specific change, the sensor shall transmit an alarm signal to the alarm annunciation system. The sensor shall detect a standard intruder moving within the sensor's detection pattern at a speed of 0.3 to 7.5 feet per second. The sensor shall comply with 47 CFR 15 Subpart F. The sensor's coverage pattern shall be as shown. The sensitivity of the sensor shall be adjustable by controls within the sensor. The controls shall not be accessible when the sensor housing is in place. The sensor shall be adjustable to obtain the coverage shown. 2.2.5.1 Test Indicator, Microwave Signal
The microwave motion sensor shall be equipped with an LED walk test indicator. The walk test indicator shall not be visible during normal operations. When visible, the walk test indicator shall light when the sensor detects an intruder. The sensor shall either be equipped with a manual control, located within the sensor's housing, to enable/disable the test indicator or the test indicator shall be located within the sensor such that it can only be seen when the housing is open/removed. 2.2.5.2 Remote Test, Microwave Signal
Provide a remote test capability. The remote test hardware may be integral to the sensor or a separate piece of equipment. The remote test shall be initiated when commanded by the alarm annunciation system. The remote test shall excite the sensing element and associated electronics causing an alarm signal to be transmitted to the alarm annunciation system. The sensor stimulation generated by the remote test hardware shall simulate a standard intruder moving within the sensor's detection pattern. 2.2.6 Microwave-Passive Infrared Dual Detection Motion Sensor
The dual detection motion sensor shall be a single unit combining a detector which detects changes in the transmitted microwave signal and a detector which detects changes in the ambient level of infrared emissions caused by the movement of a standard intruder within the detection pattern. The detection pattern shall be capable of covering a 20 by 30 feet SECTION 28 16 01.00 10 Page 11
W912HN-12-R-0003
room. Upon detection of changes by either detector, a window of more than 3 seconds but less than 8 seconds shall be opened. If the other detector detects a change during this window, the sensor shall transmit an alarm signal to the alarm annunciation system. The passive infrared detector shall detect a change in temperature of no more than 2 degrees F, and shall detect a standard intruder traveling within the detection pattern at a speed of 0.3 to 7.5 feet per second across two adjacent segments of the field of view. Emissions monitored by the sensor shall be in the range of 8 to 14 microns. The microwave detector shall detect a standard intruder moving within the detection pattern at a speed of 0.3 to 7.5 feet per second. The microwave detector shall comply with 47 CFR 15 Subpart F. The controls shall not be accessible when the sensor housing is in place. The sensor shall be configured to produce an alarm when both detectors sense a target. 2.2.6.1 Test Indicator
The sensor shall be equipped with an LED walk test indicator for both the passive infrared detector and the microwave detector. The walk test indicator shall not be visible during normal operations. When visible, the walk test indicator shall light when the sensor detects an intruder. The sensor shall either be equipped with a manual control, located within the sensor's housing, to enable/disable the test indicators or the test indicators shall be located within the sensor such that it can only be seen when the housing is open/removed. 2.2.6.2 Remote Test
Provide a remote test capability. The remote test hardware may be integral to the sensor or a separate piece of equipment. The remote test shall be initiated when commanded by the alarm annunciation system. The remote test shall excite each sensing element and associated electronics causing an alarm signal to be transmitted to the alarm annunciation system. The sensor stimulation generated by the remote test hardware shall simulate a standard intruder moving within the sensor's detection pattern. 2.3 CONTROL PANEL
The central station computer shall be a standard unmodified unit of modular design. 2.3.1 Capacity
The control panel shall be capable of handling up to 40 points and 4 areas. Up to 99 users may access the system 2.3.2 Power Supply
The power supply shall have a minimum capacity of 40 VA at 12 V. 2.4 KEYPAD PANEL
Keypad panel shall have 16-line LED or VFD screen with 10 numeric keys and function keys. Audible tones will indicate intrusion, entrance warning, exit warning, invalid key warning, trouble tone and watch point failure tone.
SECTION 28 16 01.00 10
Page 12
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.5 2.5.1
WIRE AND CABLE General
Provide all wire and cable not indicated as Government furnished equipment. All wiring shall meet NFPA 70 standards. 2.5.2 Above Ground Sensor Wiring
Sensor wiring shall be 20 AWG minimum, twisted and shielded, 2, 3, 4, or 6 pairs to match hardware. Multiconductor wire shall have an outer jacket of PVC. 2.5.3 Class 2 Low Energy Conductors
The conductor sizes specified for digital functions shall take precedence over any requirements for Class 2 low energy signal-circuit conductors specified elsewhere. PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION INSTALLATION
Install the system in accordance with the standards for safety, NFPA 70, UL 681, UL 1037 and UL 1076, and the appropriate installation manual for each equipment type. Components within the system shall be configured with appropriate service points to pinpoint system trouble in less than 20 minutes. Minimum size of conduit shall be 1/2 inch. DTS shall not be pulled into conduits or placed in raceways, compartments, outlet boxes, junction boxes, or similar fittings with other building wiring. Flexible cords or cord connections shall not be used to supply power to any components of the system, except where specifically noted herein. All other electrical work shall be as specified in Sections 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM and as shown. Grounding shall be installed as necessary to preclude ground loops, noise, and surges from adversely affecting system operation. Install all system components, including Government furnished equipment, and appurtenances in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, IEEE C2 and as shown, and shall furnish necessary interconnections, services, and adjustments required for a complete and operable system as specified and shown. 3.1.1 Enclosure Penetrations
All enclosure penetrations shall be from the bottom unless the system design requires penetrations from other directions. Penetrations of interior enclosures involving transitions of conduit from interior to exterior, and all penetrations on exterior enclosures shall be sealed with rubber silicone sealant to preclude the entry of water. The conduit riser shall terminate in a hot-dipped galvanized metal cable terminator. The terminator shall be filled with an approved sealant as recommended by the cable manufacturer, and in such a manner that the cable is not damaged. 3.1.2 Cold Galvanizing
All field welds and/or brazing on factory galvanized components, such as boxes, enclosures, and conduits, shall be coated with a cold-galvanized paint containing at least 95 percent zinc by weight.
SECTION 28 16 01.00 10
Page 13
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.2
SYSTEM STARTUP
Do not apply power to the intrusion detection system until the following items have been completed: a. Intrusion detection system equipment items and DTS have been set up in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. A visual inspection of the intrusion detection system has been conducted to ensure that defective equipment items have not been installed and that there are no loose connections. System wiring has been tested and verified as correctly connected as indicated. All system grounding and transient protection systems have been verified as properly installed and connected as indicated. Power supplies to be connected to the intrusion detection system have been verified as the correct voltage, phasing, and frequency as indicated. Satisfaction of the above requirements will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for incorrect installation, defective equipment items, or collateral damage as a result of Contractor work/equipment. SITE TESTING Testing
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.3 3.3.1
Perform site testing and adjustment of the completed intrusion detection system. Provide all personnel, equipment, instrumentation, and supplies necessary to perform all testing. The Government will witness all testing. Obtain written permission from the Government before proceeding with the next phase of testing. a. Original copies of all data produced during performance verification and endurance testing shall be turned over to the Government at the conclusion of each phase of testing prior to Government approval of the test. Submit written notification of planned testing to the Government, at least 14 days prior to the test, and in no case shall notice be given until after the Contractor has received written approval of the specific test procedures.
c.
Deliver a report describing results of functional tests, diagnostics, and calibrations including written certification to the Government that the installed complete system has been calibrated, tested, and is ready to begin performance verification testing. The report shall also include a copy of the approved performance verification test procedure. Performance Verification Test
3.3.2
Demonstrate that the completed system complies with the specified requirements. Using approved test procedures, all physical and functional requirements of the project shall be demonstrated and shown. The performance verification test, as specified, shall not be started until receipt of written permission from the Government, based on the SECTION 28 16 01.00 10 Page 14
W912HN-12-R-0003
Contractor's written request. This shall include certification of successful completion of testing as specified in paragraph Contractor's Field Testing, and upon successful completion of training as specified. Upon successful completion of the performance verification test, deliver test reports and other documentation to the Government, as specified. The Contractor will not be held responsible for failures in system performance resulting from the following: a. An outage of the main power in excess of the capability of any backup power source, provided that the automatic initiation of all backup sources was accomplished and that automatic shutdown and restart of the system performed as specified. Failure of a Government furnished communications link, provided that the failure was not due to Contractor furnished equipment, installation, or software. Failure of existing Government owned equipment, provided that the failure was not due to Contractor furnished equipment, installation, or software. The occurrence of specified nuisance alarms. The occurrence of specified environmental alarms. -- End of Section --
b.
c.
d. e.
SECTION 28 16 01.00 10
Page 15
W912HN-12-R-0003
SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEM 10/07 PART 1 1.1 GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE) IEEE C2 IEEE C62.41.1 (2012) National Electrical Safety Code (2002; R 2008) Guide on the Surges Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits (2002) Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits (2007) Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems - IEEE Green Book (Color Book Series)
IEEE C62.41.2
IEEE Std 142
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA) NEMA 250 (2008) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) (2000; R 2005; R 2008) Standard for Industrial Control and Systems: General Requirements
NEMA ICS 1
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) NFPA 70 (2011; TIA 11-1; Errata 2011; TIA 11-2; TIA 11-3; TIA 11-4) National Electrical Code U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA) 47 CFR 15 Radio Frequency Devices
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) UL 1037 (1999; Reprint Dec 2009) Safety Antitheft Alarms and Devices (1995; Reprint Sep 2010) Proprietary Burglar Alarm Units and Systems (1999; Rev thru Aug 2009) Access Control System Units
UL 1076
UL 294
SECTION 28 20 01.00 10
Page 1
W912HN-12-R-0003
UL 639
(2007; Rev Thru Jan 2010) Intrusion Detection Units (1999; Reprint Jan 2001) Installation and Classification of Burglar and Holdup Alarm Systems (2010) Standard for Printed-Wiring Boards
UL 681
UL 796 1.2 1.2.1 DEFINITIONS Intrusion Alarm
An alarm resulting from the detection of a specified target, attempting to intrude into the protected area or when entry into an entry-controlled area is attempted without successfully using entry control procedures. 1.2.2 Nuisance Alarm
An alarm resulting from the detection of an appropriate alarm stimulus, or failure to use established entry control procedures, but which does not represent an attempt to intrude into the protected area. 1.2.3 Environmental Alarm
A nuisance alarm resulting from environmental factors. 1.2.4 False Alarm
An alarm when there is no alarm stimulus. 1.2.5 Duress Alarm
A normally covert alarm condition which results from a set of pre-established conditions such as entering a special code into a keypad or by activating a switch indicating immediate personal danger. This alarm category shall take precedence over other alarm categories. 1.2.6 Fail-Safe Alarm
An alarm resulting from detection of diminished functional capabilities. 1.2.7 Power Loss Alarm
An alarm resulting from a loss of primary power. 1.2.8 Entry Control Alarm
An alarm resulting from improper use of entry control procedures or equipment. 1.2.9 Identifier
A card credential, keypad personal identification number or code, biometric characteristic or any other unique identification entered as data into the entry control database for the purpose of verifying the identity of an individual. Identifiers shall be used by the ESS for the purpose of validating passage requests for areas equipped with entry control equipment.
SECTION 28 20 01.00 10
Page 2
W912HN-12-R-0003
1.2.10
Entry Control Devices
Any equipment which gives a user the means to input identifier data into the entry control system for verification. 1.2.11 Facility Interface Device
A facility interface device shall be any type of mechanism which is controlled in response to passage requests and allows passage through a portal. 1.2.12 Portal
Specific control point, such as a door or a gate, providing entry or access from one security level to another. 1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-03 Product Data Group I Technical Data Package; G, DO Technical Data Package; G, DO Group V Technical Data Package; G, DO 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Provide modifications and additions to the existing IDenticard Systems, Inc. IdentiPASS Electronic Security System (ESS) with IDenticard 9000 series reader panels as described and shown including installation of any Government Furnished Equipment. All computing devices, as defined in 47 CFR 15, shall be certified to comply with the requirements for Class A computing devices and labeled as set forth in 47 CFR 15. Electronic equipment shall comply with 47 CFR 15. New equipment shall be compatible with and operate accurately and reliably with the existing system as a single fully functional system. Products shall be manufactured by IDenticard Systems, Inc. or equal. 1.4.1 Central Station
Configure the central station to provide operator interface, interaction, dynamic and real time monitoring, display, and control for new equipment in same fashion as existing equipment. 1.4.2 Systems Networks
System networks shall interconnect all components of the system. These networks shall include communications between a central station and any peer or subordinate workstations, enrollment stations, local annunciation stations, portal control stations or redundant central stations. The systems network shall provide totally automatic communication of status changes, commands, field initiated interrupts and any other communications SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 3
W912HN-12-R-0003
required for proper system operation. System communication shall not require operator initiation or response. System communication shall return to normal after any partial or total network interruption such as power loss or transient upset. The system shall automatically annunciate communication failures to the operator with identification of the communication link that has experienced a partial or total failure. A communications controller may be used as an interface between the central station display systems and the field device network. The communications controller shall provide those functions needed to attain the specified network communications performance. 1.4.2.1 Field Device Network
The field device network shall provide communication between a central control station and field devices of the system. Field devices shall consist of alarm annunciation local processors and entry control local processors. Each field device shall be interrogated during each interrogation cycle. The field device network shall provide line supervision that detects and annunciates communications interruptions or compromised communications between any field device and the central station. 1.4.3 Field Equipment
Field equipment shall include local processors, sensors and controls. Local processors shall serve as an interface between the central station and sensors and controls. Data exchange between the central station and the local processors shall include down-line transmission of commands, software and databases to local processors. The up line data exchange from the local processor to the central station shall include status data such as intrusion alarms, status reports and entry control records. Local processors are categorized as alarm annunciation or entry control or a combination thereof. 1.4.4 Intercom Interface
Provide an interface for connection of the central station to the intercommunication systems as specified in Section 27 21 00.00 40 INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEM and as shown. This shall not be accomplished by using an electro-mechanical relay assembly. 1.4.5 Passage
Passage is ingress and/or egress past an entry control device, or through a portal. Entry control procedures and equipment shall be implemented for passage through each portal as shown. 1.4.6 Detection Resolution
The system shall have detection resolution sufficient to locate intrusions at each device and zone; and tampering at individual devices. 1.4.7 Electrical Requirements
Electrically powered ESS equipment shall operate on 120 volt 60 Hz ac sources as shown. Equipment shall be able to tolerate variations in the voltage source of plus or minus 10 percent, and variations in the line frequency of plus or minus 2 percent with no degradation of performance.
SECTION 28 20 01.00 10
Page 4
W912HN-12-R-0003
1.4.8 1.4.8.1
System Reaction System Heavy Load Condition
For the purpose of system heavy load condition, the system shall consist of central station equipment, communication controllers and all local processors as shown. System heavy load condition is the occurrence of alarms at the rate of 10 alarms per second distributed evenly among all local processors in the system. The alarm printer shall continue to print out all occurrences, including time of occurrence, to the nearest second. 1.5 SUBMITTAL OF TECHNICAL DATA AND COMPUTER SOFTWARE
Computer software and technical data (including technical data which relates to computer software) which is specifically identified in this Section shall be delivered in accordance with the CONTRACT CLAUSES, SPECIAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS, and DD FORM 1423 "Contract Data Requirements List", found in Attachment 1 to Section 00800. Data delivered shall be identified by reference to the particular Paragraph against which it is furnished. 1.5.1 Group I Technical Data Package
The data package shall include the following as required: 1.5.1.1 a. System Drawings
Functional System block diagram, identifying communications protocols, wire type and quantity, and approximate distances. Local processor installation, including typical block and wiring diagrams. Field equipment enclosure with local processor installation and schematics. Device wiring and installation drawings. Details of connections to power sources, including power supplies and grounding. Details of surge protection device installation. Entry control system block diagram and layout. Details of interconnections with Intercom system. Manufacturer's Data
b.
c.
d. e.
f. g. h.
1.5.1.2
The data package shall include manufacturer's data for all materials and equipment, including terminal devices, local processors and central station equipment provided under this specification. 1.5.1.3 Certifications
Specified manufacturer's certifications shall be included with the data package certification.
SECTION 28 20 01.00 10
Page 5
W912HN-12-R-0003
1.5.2 1.5.2.1
Technical Data Package Operation and Maintenance Manuals
Deliver draft copies of the operator's, software, hardware, functional design, and maintenance manuals, as specified below, to the Government prior to beginning the performance verification test for use during the test period. 1.5.2.2 Operator's Manuals
The operator's manual shall fully explain all procedures and instructions for the operation of the system, including: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. 1.5.2.3 User enrollment. Use of system and application software. Graphic alarm presentation. Data entry. Operator commands. Alarm and system messages and printing formats. System entry requirements. Hardware Manual
A manual describing all equipment furnished including: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. 1.5.2.4 General description and specifications. Installation and checkout procedures. Equipment electrical schematics and layout drawings. System schematics and layout drawings. Alignment and calibration procedures. Manufacturer's repair parts list indicating sources of supply. Interface definition. Data Entry
Enter all data needed to make the system operational. Deliver the data to the Government on data entry forms, utilizing data from the contract documents, Contractor's field surveys, and other pertinent information in the Contractor's possession required for complete installation of the database. Identify and request from the Government, any additional data needed to provide a complete and operational ESS. The completed forms shall be delivered to the Government for review and approval at least 30 days prior to the Contractor's scheduled need date. When the ESS database is to be populated in whole or in part from an existing or Government furnished electronic database, demonstrate the field mapping scheme to correctly input the data. 1.5.3 Group V Technical Data Package
Deliver final copies of the manuals as specified, bound in hardback, loose-leaf binders, to the Government within 30 days after completing the endurance test. The draft copy used during site testing shall be updated with any changes required prior to final delivery of the manuals. Each manual's contents shall be identified on the cover. The manual shall include names, addresses, and telephone numbers of each subcontractor installing equipment and systems, and nearest service representative for each item of equipment. The manuals shall have a table of contents and tab SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 6
W912HN-12-R-0003
sheets. Tab sheets shall be placed at the beginning of each chapter or section and at the beginning of each appendix. The final copies delivered after completion of the endurance test shall include modifications made during installation, checkout, and acceptance. The number of copies of each manual to be delivered shall be as specified on DD FORM 1423 and below. 1.5.3.1 Operator's Manual
A copy of the final and approved Operator's Manual. 1.5.3.2 Hardware Manual
A copy of the final and approved Hardware Manual. 1.5.3.3 Maintenance Manual
A copy of the final and approved Maintenance Manual. 1.5.3.4 Final System Drawings
Maintain a separate set of drawings, elementary diagrams and wiring diagrams of the system to be used for final system drawings. This set shall be accurately kept up-to-date with all changes and additions to the ESS and shall be delivered to the Government with the final endurance test report. In addition to being complete and accurate, this set of drawings shall be kept neat and shall not be used for installation purposes. Final drawings submitted with the endurance test report shall be finished drawings on CD-ROM in Microstation Version 8 format. 1.6 1.6.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE Test Procedures and Reports
Test procedures shall explain in detail, step-by-step actions and expected results, demonstrating compliance with the requirements specified. Test reports shall be used to document results of the tests. Reports shall be delivered to the Government within 7 days after completion of each test. 1.7 1.7.1 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS Interior, Controlled Environment
System components, except the console equipment installed in interior locations, having controlled environments shall be rated for continuous operation under ambient environmental conditions of 36 to 122 degrees F dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, non-condensing. 1.7.2 Interior, Uncontrolled Environment
System components installed in interior locations having uncontrolled environments shall be rated for continuous operation under ambient environmental conditions of 0 to 122 degrees F dry bulb and 10 to 95 percent relative humidity, non-condensing. 1.7.3 Exterior Environment
System components that are installed in locations exposed to weather shall be rated for continuous operation under ambient environmental conditions of -30 to plus 122 degrees F dry bulb and 10 to 95 percent relative humidity, SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 7
W912HN-12-R-0003
condensing. In addition, the system components shall be rated for continuous operation when exposed to performance conditions as specified in UL 294 and UL 639 for outdoor use equipment. Components shall be rated for continuous operation when exposed to rain as specified in NEMA 250, winds up to 85 mph and snow cover up to 2 feet thick, measured vertically. 1.7.4 Hazardous Environment
System components located in areas where fire or explosion hazards may exist because of flammable gases or vapors, flammable liquids, combustible dust, or ignitable fibers or flyings, shall be rated and installed according to Chapter 5 of the NFPA 70 and as shown. 1.8 1.8.1 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Warranty Period
Provide all labor, equipment, and materials required to maintain the entire system in an operational state as specified, for a period of one year after formal written acceptance of the system to include scheduled and nonscheduled adjustments. 1.8.2 Description of Work
The adjustment and repair of the system includes all computer equipment, software updates, communications transmission equipment and DTS, local processors, sensors and entry control, facility interface, and support equipment. Responsibility shall be limited to Contractor installed equipment. Repair, calibration, and other work shall be provided and performed in accordance with the manufacturer's documentation and instruction. The maintenance manual shall include descriptions of maintenance for all equipment including inspection, periodic prevention maintenance, fault diagnosis, and repair or replacement of defective components. 1.8.3 Personnel
Service personnel shall be certified in the maintenance and repair of the specific type of equipment installed and qualified to accomplish work promptly and satisfactorily. The Government shall be advised in writing of the name of the designated service representative, and of any change in personnel. 1.8.4 Emergency Service
The Government will initiate service calls when the system is not functioning properly. Qualified personnel shall be available to provide service to the complete system. The Government shall be furnished with a telephone number where the service supervisor can be reached at all times. Service personnel shall be at site within 4 hours after receiving a request for service. The system shall be restored to proper operating condition within 8 hours after service personnel arrive onsite and obtain access to the system. 1.8.5 Operation
Performance verification test procedures shall be used after all scheduled maintenance and repair activities to verify proper component and system operation. SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 8
W912HN-12-R-0003
1.8.6
Records and Logs
Keep records and logs of each task, and organize cumulative records for each component, and for the complete system chronologically resultig in a continuous log to be maintained for all devices. The log shall contain all initial settings. Complete logs shall be kept and shall be available for inspection onsite, demonstrating that planned and systematic adjustments and repairs have been accomplished for the system. 1.8.7 Work Requests
Separately record each service call request, as received. The form shall include the serial number identifying the component involved, its location, date and time the call was received, specific nature of trouble, names of service personnel assigned to the task, instructions describing what has to be done, the amount and nature of the material to be used, the time and date work started, and the time and date of completion. Deliver a record of the work performed within 5 days after work is accomplished. 1.8.8 System Modifications
Make any recommendations for system modification in writing to the Government. System modifications shall not be made without prior approval of the Government. Any modifications made to the system shall result in the updating of the operation and maintenance manuals as well as any other documentation affected. 1.8.9 Software
Provide a description of all software updates to the Government, who will then decide whether or not they are appropriate for implementation. After notification by the Government, implement the designated software updates and verify operation in the system. These updates shall be accomplished in a timely manner, fully coordinated with system operators, and shall be incorporated into the operation and maintenance manuals, and software documentation. Make a system image file so the system can be restored to its original state if the software update adversely affects system performance. PART 2 2.1 2.1.1 PRODUCTS MATERIALS REQUIREMENTS Materials and Equipment
Units of equipment that perform identical, specified functions shall be products of a single manufacturer. All material and equipment shall be new and currently in production. Each major component of equipment shall have the manufacturer's model and serial number in a conspicuous place. System equipment shall conform to UL 294 and UL 1076. 2.1.2 Nameplates
Laminated plastic nameplates shall be provided for local processors. Each nameplate shall identify the local processor and its location within the system. Laminated plastic shall be 1/8 inch thick, white with black center core. Nameplates shall be a minimum of 1 x 3 inches, with minimum 1/4 inch high engraved block lettering. Nameplates shall be attached to the inside SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 9
W912HN-12-R-0003
of the enclosure housing the local processor. Other major components of the system shall have the manufacturer's name, address, type or style, model or serial number, and catalog number on a corrosion resistant plate secured to the item of equipment. Nameplates will not be required for devices smaller than 1 x 3 inches. 2.1.3 Power Line Surge Protection
Equipment connected to alternating current circuits shall be protected fom power line surges. Equipment protection shall withstand surge test waveforms described in IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2. Fuses shall not be used for surge protection. 2.1.4 Sensor Device Wiring and Communication Circuit Surge Protection
Inputs shall be protected against surges induced on device wiring. Outputs shall be protected against surges induced on control and device wiring installed outdoors and as shown. Communications equipment shall be protected against surges induced on any communications circuit. Cables and conductors, except fiber optics, which serve as communications circuits from console to field equipment, and between field equipment, shall have surge protection circuits installed at each end. Protection shall be furnished at equipment, and additional triple electrode gas surge protectors rated for the application on each wireline circuit shall be installed within 3 feet of the building cable entrance. Fuses shall not be used for surge protection. The inputs and outputs shall be tested in both normal mode and common mode using the following two waveforms: a. A 10 microsecond rise time by 1000 microsecond pulse width waveform with a peak voltage of 1500 Volts and a peak current of 60 amperes. b. An 8 microsecond rise time by 20 microsecond pulse width waveform with a peak voltage of 1000 Volts and a peak current of 500 amperes. 2.1.5 Power Line Conditioners
A power line conditioner shall be furnished for each local processor. The power line conditioners shall be of the ferroresonant design, with no moving parts and no tap switching, while electrically isolating the secondary from the power line side. The power line conditioners shall be sized for 125 percent of the actual connected kVA load. Characteristics of the power line conditioners shall be as follows: a. At 85 percent load, the output voltage shall not deviate by more than plus or minus 1 percent of nominal when the input voltage fluctuates between minus 20 percent to plus 10 percent of nominal. During load changes of zero to full load, the output voltage shall not deviate by more than plus or minus 3 percent of nominal. Full correction of load switching disturbances shall be accomplished within 5 cycles, and 95 percent correction shall be accomplished within 2 cycles of the onset of the disturbance. Total harmonic distortion shall not exceed 3.5 percent at full load.
b.
c.
SECTION 28 20 01.00 10
Page 10
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.1.6 2.1.6.1
Field Enclosures Interior Sensor
Sensors to be used in an interior environment shall have a housing that provides protection against dust, falling dirt, and dripping noncorrosive liquids. 2.1.6.2 Exterior Sensor
Sensors to be used in an exterior environment shall have a housing that provides protection against windblown dust, rain and splashing water, and hose directed water. Sensors shall be undamaged by the formation of ice on the enclosure. 2.1.6.3 Interior Electronics
System electronics to be used in an interior environment shall be housed in enclosures which meet the requirements of NEMA 250 Type 12. 2.1.6.4 Exterior Electronics
System electronics to be used in an exterior environment shall be housed in enclosures which meet the requirements of NEMA 250 Type 4. 2.1.6.5 Corrosion Resistant
System electronics to be used in a corrosive environment as defined in NEMA 250 shall be housed in metallic non-corrosive enclosures which meet the requirements of NEMA 250 Type 4X. 2.1.6.6 Hazardous Environment Equipment
System electronics to be used in a hazardous environment shall be housed in a enclosures which meet the requirements of paragraph Hazardous Environment. 2.1.7 2.1.7.1 Locks and Key-Lock Switches Locks
Locks shall be provided on system enclosures for maintenance purposes. Locks shall be UL listed, round-key type with 3 dual, 1 mushroom, 3 plain pin tumblers or conventional key type lock having a combination of 5 cylinder pin and 5-point 3 position side bar. Keys shall be stamped "U.S. GOVT. DO NOT DUP." The locks shall be arranged so that the key can only be withdrawn when in the locked position. Maintenance locks shall be keyed alike and only 2 keys shall be furnished for all of these locks. These keys shall be controlled in accordance with the key control plan as specified in paragraph Key Control Plan. 2.1.7.2 Key-Lock-Operated Switches
Key-lock-operated switches required to be installed on system components shall be UL listed, round-key type, with 3 dual, 1 mushroom, and 3 plain pin tumblers or conventional key type lock having a combination of 5 cylinder pin and 5-point 3 position side bar. Keys shall be stamped "U.S. GOVT. DO NOT DUP." Key-lock-operated switches shall be 2 position, with the key removable in either position. All key-lock-operated switches shall be keyed differently and only 2 keys shall be furnished for each SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 11
W912HN-12-R-0003
key-lock-operated-switch. These keys shall be controlled in accordance with the key control plan as specified in paragraph Key Control Plan. 2.1.7.3 Construction Locks
A set of temporary locks shall be used during installation and construction. The final set of locks installed and delivered to the Government shall not include any of the temporary locks. 2.1.8 System Components
System components shall be designed for continuous operation. Electronic components shall be solid state type, mounted on printed circuit boards conforming to UL 796. Printed circuit board connectors shall be plug-in, quick-disconnect type. Power dissipating components shall incorporate safety margins of not less that 25 percent with respect to dissipation ratings, maximum voltages, and current carrying capacity. Control relays and similar switching devices shall be solid state type or sealed electro-mechanical. 2.1.8.1 Modularity
Equipment shall be designed for increase of system capability by installation of modular components. System components shall be designed to facilitate maintenance through replacement of modular subassemblies and parts. 2.1.8.2 Maintainability
Components shall be designed to be maintained using commercially available tools and equipment. Components shall be arranged and assembled so they are accessible to maintenance personnel. There shall be no degradation in tamper protection, structural integrity, EMI/RFI attenuation, or line supervision after maintenance when it is performed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2.1.8.3 Interchangeability
The system shall be constructed with off-the-shelf components which are physically, electrically and functionally interchangeable with equivalent components as complete items. Replacement of equivalent components shall not require modification of either the new component or of other components with which the replacement items are used. Custom designed or one-of-a-kind items shall not be used. Interchangeable components or modules shall not require trial and error matching in order to meet integrated system requirements, system accuracy, or restore complete system functionality. 2.1.8.4 Product Safety
System components shall conform to applicable rules and requirements of NFPA 70 and UL 294. System components shall be equipped with instruction plates including warnings and cautions describing physical safety, and special or important procedures to be followed in operating and servicing system equipment. 2.1.9 Controls and Designations
Controls and designations shall be as specified in NEMA ICS 1. SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 12
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.1.10
Special Test Equipment special test equipment, special hardware, software, tools, and or initialization equipment needed to start or maintain any system and its components. Special test equipment is defined equipment not normally used in an electronics maintenance
Provide all programming part of the as any test facility. 2.1.11
Alarm Output
The alarm output of each sensor shall be a single pole double throw (SPDT) contact rated for a minimum of 0.25 A at 24 Volts dc. 2.2 DURESS ANNUNCIATORS
The duress annunciators shall be located in flush wall boxes at each reception desk. Annunciators shall inicate room name and number of duress origin in 1/2" minimum high LED letters and shall initiate a distinctive audio tone upon initiation of a duress call. 2.3 2.3.1 FIELD PROCESSING HARDWARE Alarm Annunciation Local Processor
The alarm annunciation local processor shall respond to interrogations from the field device network, recognize and store alarm status inputs until they are transmitted to the central station and change outputs based on commands received from the central station. The local processor shall also automatically restore communication within 10 seconds after an interruption with the field device network and provide dc line supervision on each of its alarm inputs. a. Inputs. Local processor inputs shall monitor dry contacts for changes of state that reflect alarm conditions. The local processor shall have at least 8 alarm inputs which allow wiring as normally open or normally closed contacts for alarm conditions. It shall also provide line supervision for each input by monitoring each input for abnormal open, grounded, or shorted conditions using dc current change measurements. The local processor shall report line supervision alarms to the central station. Alarms shall be reported for any condition that remains off normal at an input for longer than 500 milliseconds. Each alarm condition shall be transmitted to the central computer during the next interrogation cycle. Outputs. Local processor outputs shall reflect the state of commands issued by the central station. The outputs shall be a form C contact and shall include normally open and normally closed contacts. The local processor shall have at least 4 command outputs. Communications. The local processor shall be able to communicate with the Central Station via RS485 or TCP/IP as a minimum. Processor Power Supply
b.
c.
2.3.1.1
Local processor and sensors shall be powered from an uninterruptible power source. The uninterruptible power source shall provide 8 hours of battery back-up power in the event of primary power failure and shall automatically fully recharge the batteries within 12 hours after primary power is SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 13
W912HN-12-R-0003
restored. If the facility is without an emergency generator, the uninterruptible power source shall provide 24 hours of battery backup power. There will be no equipment malfunctions or perturbations or loss of data during the switch from primary to battery power and vice versa. Batteries shall be sealed, non-outgassing type. The power supply shall be equipped with an indicator for ac input power and an indicator for dc output power. Loss of primary power shall be reported to the central station as an alarm. 2.3.1.2 Auxiliary Equipment Power
A GFI service outlet shall be furnished inside the local processor's enclosure. 2.3.2 Entry Control Local Processor
The entry control local processor shall respond to interrogations from the field device network, recognize and store alarm status inputs until they are transmitted to the central station and change outputs based on commands received from the central station. The local processor shall also automatically restore communication within 10 seconds after an interruption with the field device network and provide dc line supervision on each of its alarm inputs. The entry control local processor shall provide local entry control functions including communicating with field devices such as card readers, keypads, biometric personal identity verification devices, door strikes, magnetic latches, gate and door operators and exit pushbuttons. The processor shall also accept data from entry control field devices as well as database downloads and updates from the central station that include enrollment and privilege information. The processor shall also send indications of success or failure of attempts to use entry control field devices and make comparisons of presented information with stored identification information. The processor shall grant or deny entry by sending control signals to portal control devices and mask intrusion alarm annunciation from sensors stimulated by authorized entries. The entry control local processor shall use inputs from entry control devices to change modes between access and secure. The local processor shall maintain a date-time and location stamped record of each transaction and transmit transaction records to the central station. The processor shall operate as a stand-alone portal controller using the downloaded data base during periods of communication loss between the local processor and the central station. The processor shall store a minimum 4000 transactions during periods of communication loss between the local processor and the central station for subsequent upload to the central station upon restoration of communication. a. Inputs. Local processor inputs shall monitor dry contacts for changes of state that reflect alarm conditions. The local processor shall have at least 8 alarm inputs which allow wiring as normally open or normally closed contacts for alarm conditions. It shall also provide line supervision for each input by monitoring each input for abnormal open, grounded, or shorted conditions using dc current change measurements. The local processor shall report line supervision alarms to the central station. Alarms shall be reported for any condition that remains off normal at an input for longer than 500 milliseconds. Each alarm condition shall be transmitted to the central station during the next interrogation cycle. The entry control local processor shall include the necessary software drivers to communicate with entry control field devices. Information generated by the entry control field devices shall be accepted by the local processor and automatically processed to SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 14
W912HN-12-R-0003
determine valid identification of the individual present at the portal. Upon authentication of the credentials or information presented, the local processor shall automatically check privileges of the identified individual, allowing only those actions granted as privileges. Privileges shall include, but not be limited to, time of day control, day of week control, group control, and visitor escort control. The local processor shall maintain a date-time and location stamped record of each transaction. A transaction is defined as any successful or unsuccessful attempt to gain access through a controlled portal by the presentation of credentials or other identifying information. b. Outputs. Local processor outputs shall reflect the state of commands issued by the central station. The outputs shall be a form C contact and shall include normally open and normally closed contacts. The local processor shall have at least 4 addressable outputs. The entry control local processor shall also provide control outputs to portal control devices. Communications. The local processor shall be able to communicate with the Central Station via RS485 or TCP/IP as a minimum. The system manufacturer shall provide strategies for downloading database information for panel configurations and cardholder data to minimize the required download time when using IP connectivity. Processor Power Supply
c.
2.3.2.1
Local processor and sensors shall be powered from an uninterruptible power source. The uninterruptible power source shall provide 6 hours of battery back-up power in the event of primary power failure and shall automatically fully recharge the batteries within 12 hours after primary power is restored. There shall be no equipment malfunctions or perturbations or loss of data during the switch from primary to battery power and vice versa. Batteries shall be sealed, non-outgassing type. The power supply shall be equipped with an indicator for ac input power and an indicator for dc output power. 2.3.2.2 Auxiliary Equipment Power
A GFI service outlet shall be furnished inside the local processor's enclosure. 2.4 FIELD PROCESSING SOFTWARE
All Field processing software described in this specification shall be furnished as part of the complete system. 2.4.1 Operating System
Each local processor shall contain an operating system that controls and schedules that local processor's activities in real time. The local processor shall maintain a point database in its memory that includes all parameters, constraints, and the latest value or status of all points connected to that local processor. The execution of local processor application programs shall utilize the data in memory resident files. The existing central operating system includes a real time clock function that maintains the seconds, minutes, hours, date and month, including day of the week. Each local processor clock shall be automatically synchronized with the central station at least once per day to plus or minus 10 seconds (the SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 15
W912HN-12-R-0003
time synchronization shall be accomplished automatically, without operator action and without requiring system shutdown). 2.4.1.1 Startup
The local processor shall have startup software that causes automatic commencement of operation without human intervention, including startup of all connected Input/Output functions. A local processor restart program based on detection of power failure at the local processor shall be included in the local processor software. The startup software shall initiate operation of self-test diagnostic routines. Upon failure of the local processor, if the database and application software are no longer resident, the local processor shall not restart and systems shall remain in the failure mode indicated until the necessary repairs are made. If the database and application programs are resident, the local processor shall immediately resume operation. 2.4.1.2 Operating Mode
Each local processor shall control and monitor inputs and outputs as specified, independent of communications with the central station or designated workstations. Alarms, status changes and other data shall be transmitted to the central station or designated workstations when communications circuits are operable. If communications are not available, each local processor shall function in a stand-alone mode and operational data, including the status and alarm data normally transmitted to the central station or designated workstations shall be stored for later transmission to the central station or designated workstations. Storage for the latest 4000 events shall be provided at each local processor, as a minimum. Each local processor shall accept software downloaded from the central station. The panel shall support flash ROM technology to accomplish frimware downloads from a central location. 2.4.1.3 Failure Mode
Upon failure for any reason, each local processor shall perform an orderly shutdown and force all local processor outputs to a predetermined (failure mode) state, consistent with the failure modes shown and the associated control device. 2.4.2 Functions
Provide software necessary to accomplish the following functions, as appropriate, fully implemented and operational, within each local processor. a. b. c. d. e. Monitoring of inputs. Control of outputs. Reporting of alarms automatically to the central station. Reporting of sensor and output status to central station upon request. Maintenance of real time, automatically updated by the central station at least once a day. Communication with the central station. Execution of local processor resident programs. SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 16
f. g.
W912HN-12-R-0003
h. i. 2.5
Diagnostics. Download and upload data to and from the central station. INTERIOR SENSORS AND CONTROL DEVICES
Interior sensor housing shall provide protection against dust, falling dirt, and dripping noncorrosive liquids. 2.5.1 Balanced Magnetic Switch (BMS)
The BMS shall detect a 1/4 inch of separating relative movement between the magnet and the switch housing. Upon detecting such movement, the BMS shall transmit an alarm signal to the alarm annunciation system. 2.5.1.1 BMS Subassemblies
The BMS shall consist of a switch assembly and an actuating magnet assembly. The switch mechanism shall be of the balanced magnetic type or triple-biased reeds to provide detection of tamper attempts. The switches shall provide supervision and pry tamer capability. Each switch shall be provided with an overcurrent protective device, rated to limit current to 80 percent of the switch capacity. Switches shall be rated for a minimum lifetime of 1,000,000 operations. The magnet assembly shall house the actuating magnet. 2.5.1.2 Housing
The housings of surface mounted switches and magnets shall be made of nonferrous metal and shall be weatherproof. The housings of recess mounted switches and magnets shall be made of nonferrous metal or plastic. 2.5.1.3 Remote Test
A remote test capability shall be provided. The remote test shall be initiated when commanded by the alarm annunciation system. The remote test shall activate the sensor's switch mechanism causing an alarm signal to be transmitted to the alarm annunciation system. The remote test shall simulate the movement of the actuating magnet relative to the switch subassembly. 2.5.2 Duress Alarm Switches
Duress alarm switches shall provide the means for an individual to covertly notify the alarm annunciation system that a duress situation exists. 2.5.2.1 Push-button
Latching push-button duress alarm switches shall be designed to be activated by depressing a push-button located on the duress switch housing. No visible or audible alarm or noise shall emanate from the switch. The switch housing shall shroud the activating button to prevent accidental activation. Switches shall be rated for a minimum lifetime of 50,000 operations. Duress buttons shall be fully supervised hold-up style with plunger type DPDT switch, reset key, and stainless steel cover. Mount to underside of desk with screws. Secure cable to underside of desk and provide 15' slack cable coiled and secured to back of desk. Visible portion of cable under desk shall be installed in flexible metal conduit with SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 17
W912HN-12-R-0003
insulating bushing. 2.6 2.6.1 ENTRY CONTROL DEVICES Card Readers and Credential Cards
Entry control card readers shall use unique coded data stored in or on a compatible credential card as an identifier. The card readers shall be proximity type, and shall incorporate built-in heaters or other cold weather equipment to extend the operating temperature range as needed for operation at the site. Communications protocol shall be compatible with the local processor. Furnish card readers to read Weigand wire effect entry cards, and the matching credential cards. The cards shall contain coded data arranged as a unique identification code stored on or within the card, and of the type readable by the card readers. Include within the card's encoded data, a non-duplicated unique identification code. Provide 150 Credential Cards. 2.6.1.1 Data Encryption
Encryption between the card, card reader, and panels shall meet Federal Information Protocol Standards (FIPS) of FIPS 46-3 (DES and TDES) . 2.6.1.2 Weigand Wire Effect
Weigand card readers shall read credential cards which are encoded using Weigand effect ferromagnetic wires laminated into the credential card. The Weigand card reader shall create a magnetic field and output a coded representation of the unique pattern of magnetic flux changes produced by moving the credential card through the card reader. The output shall be a series of electrical signals and shall constitute a unique identification code number. Weigand credential cards shall use at least 24 binary digits to generate a unique credential card identification code. 2.6.1.3 Proximity
Proximity card readers shall use passive proximity detection and shall not require contact with the proximity credential card for proper operation. Passive detection proximity card readers shall use a swept-frequency, radio frequency field generator to read the resonant frequencies of tuned circuits laminated into compatible credential cards. The resonant frequencies read shall constitute a unique identification code number. The card reader shall read proximity cards in a range from 0 to at least 6 inches from the reader. The credential card design shall allow for a minimum of 32,000 unique identification codes per facility. 2.6.1.4 Card Reader Display
The card readers shall include an LED or other visual indicator display. The display shall indicate power on/off, and whether user passage requests have been accepted or rejected. 2.6.1.5 Card Reader Response Time
The card reader shall respond to passage requests by generating a signal to the local processor. The response time shall be 800 milliseconds or less, from the time the card reader finishes reading the credential card until a response signal is generated.
SECTION 28 20 01.00 10
Page 18
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.6.1.6
Card Reader Power
The card reader shall be powered from the source as shown and shall not dissipate more than 5 Watts. 2.6.1.7 Card Reader Mounting Method
Card readers shall be suitable for surface, semi-flush, pedestal, or weatherproof mounting as required. 2.6.1.8 Credential Card Modification
Entry control cards shall be able to be modified by lamination or direct print process during the enrollment process for use as a picture and identification badge as needed for the site without reduction of readability. The design of the credential cards shall allow for the addition of at least one slot or hole to accommodate the attachment of a clip for affixing the credential card to the type badge holder used at the site. 2.6.1.9 Card Size and Dimensional Stability
Credential cards shall be 2-1/8 x 3-3/8 inches. The credential card material shall be dimensionally stable so that an undamaged card with deformations resulting from normal use shall be readable by the card reader. 2.6.1.10 Card Materials and Physical Characteristics
The credential card shall be abrasion resistant, non-flammable, and present no toxic hazard to humans when used in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. The credential card shall be impervious to solar radiation and the effects of ultra-violet light. 2.6.1.11 Card Construction
The credential card shall be of core and laminate or monolithic construction. Lettering, logos and other markings shall be hot stamped into the credential material or direct printed. 2.6.1.12 Card Durability and Maintainability
The credential card shall be able to be cleaned by wiping the credential card with a sponge or cloth wet with a soap and water solution. 2.6.1.13 Warranty
The credential card shall include a minimum 3-year warranty. 2.6.2 2.6.2.1 Card Readers With Integral Keypad Proximity
The proximity card reader, as specified in Paragraphs "Card Readers And Credential Cards" and "Proximity", shall be equipped with integral keypads as specified in paragraph Keypads.
SECTION 28 20 01.00 10
Page 19
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.6.3 2.6.3.1
Portal Control Devices Push-button Switches
Provide momentary contact, back lighted push buttons and stainless steel switch enclosures for each push button as shown. Switch enclosures shall be suitable for flush, or surface mounting as required. Push buttons shall be suitable for flush mount in the switch enclosures. The push button switches shall meet the requirements of NEMA 250 for the area in which they are to be installed. Where multiple push buttons are housed within a single switch enclosure, they shall be stacked vertically with each push button switch labeled with 1/4 inch high text and symbols as required. The push button switches shall be connected to the local processor associated with the portal to which they are applied and shall operate the appropriate electric strike, electric bolt or other facility release device. The continuous current of the IDS circuit shall be no more than 50% of the continuous current rating of the device supplied. The push button switches shall have double-break silver contacts that will make 720 VA at 60 amperes and break 720 VA at 10 amperes. 2.6.3.2 Panic Bar Emergency Exit With Alarm
Entry control portals shall include panic bar emergency exit hardware as shown. Panic bar emergency exit hardware shall provide an alarm shunt signal to the appropiate local processor. The panic bar shall include a conspicuous warning sign with 1 inch high, red lettering notifying personnel that an alarm will be annunciated if the panic bar is operated. Operation of the panic bar hardware shall generate an intrusion alarm. The panic bar, except for local alarm annunciation and alarm communications, shall depend upon a mechanical connection only and shall not depend upon electric power for operation. The panic bar shall be compatible with mortise or rim mount door hardware and shall operate by retracting the bolt. 2.6.3.3 Panic Bars: Normal Exit
a. Entry control portals shall include panic bar emergency exit hardware as shown. Panic bar emergency exit hardware shall provide to the portal's local processor. Operation of the panic bar hardware shall not generate an intrusion alarm. When exiting, the panic bar shall depend upon a mechanical connection only. The exterior, non-secure side of the door shall be provided with an electrified thumb latch or lever to provide access after the credential I.D. authentication by the ESS. The panic bar shall be compatible with mortise or rim mount door hardware and shall operate by retracting the bolt. b. Signal Switches: The strikes/bolts shall include signal switches to indicate to the system when the bolt is not engaged or the strike mechanism is unlocked. The signal switches shall report a forced entry to the system. 2.6.3.4 Electric Door Strikes/Bolts
Electric door strikes/bolts shall be designed to release automatically remain secure in case of power failure. These facility interface devices shall use dc power to energize the solenoids. Electric strikes/bolts shall incorporate end of line resistors to facilitate line supervision by the system. If not incorporated into the electric strike or local controller, metal-oxide veristors (MOVs) shall be installed to protect the controller from reverse current surges. Electric strikes shall have a minimum forcing strength of 2300 lbs. SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 20
W912HN-12-R-0003
a.
Solenoid: The actuating solenoid for the strikes/bolts furnished shall not dissipate more than 12 Watts and shall operate on 12 or 24 Volts dc. The inrush current shall not exceed 1 ampere and the holding current shall not be greater than 500 milliamperes. The actuating solenoid shall move from the fully secure to fully open positions in not more than 500 milliseconds. Signal Switches: The strikes/bolts shall include signal switches to indicate to the system when the bolt is not engaged or the strike mechanism is unlocked. The signal switches shall report a forced entry to the system. Tamper Resistance: The electric strike/bolt mechanism shall be encased in hardened guard barriers to deter forced entry. Size and Weight: Electric strikes/bolts shall be compatible with standard door frame preparations. Mounting Method: The electric door strikes/bolts shall be suitable for use with single and double door with mortise or rim type hardware as shown, and shall be compatible with right or left hand mounting. Astragals: Astragal lock guards shall be installed to prevent tampering with the latch bolt of the locking hardware or the latch bolt keeper of the electric strike. The astragals shall bolt through the door using tamper-resistant screws. The astragals shall be made of 1/8 inch thick brass and are 11-1/14 inch high by 1-5/8 inch wide, with a 5/32 inch wide offset, at a minimum. Finishes shall be as shown. Electrified Mortise Lock
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.6.3.5
Electrified mortise door locks shall be designed to release automatically or remain secure as indicated on drawings in case of power failure. These facility interface devices shall use dc power to energize the solenoids. The solenoids shall be rated for continuous duty. Electric mortise locks shall incorporate end-of-line resistors to facilitate line supervision by the system. If not incorporated into the electric strike or local controller, metal-oxide veristors (MOVs) shall be installed to protect the controller from reverse current surges. a. Solenoid: The actuating solenoid for the locks furnished shall not dissipate more than 12 Watts and shall operate on 12 or 24 Volts dc. The inrush current shall not exceed 1 ampere and the holding current shall not be greater than 700 milliamperes. The actuating solenoid shall move from the fully secure to fully open positions in not more than 500 milliseconds. Signal Switches: The strikes/bolts shall include signal switches to indicate to the system when the bolt is not engaged or the strike mechanism is unlocked. The signal switches shall report a forced entry to the system. Hinge: An electric transfer hinge shall be provided with each lock in order to get power and monitoring signals from the lockset to the door frame. Size and Weight: Electric strikes/bolts shall be compatible with standard door preparations. SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 21
b.
c.
d.
W912HN-12-R-0003
e.
Mounting Method: The electrified mortise locks shall be suitable for use with single and double door installations. In double door installations, the lock would be in the active leaf and the fixed leaf would be monitored. Electromagnetic Lock
2.6.3.6
Electromagnetic locks shall contain no moving parts and shall depend solely upon electromagnetism to secure a portal by generating at least 1200 pounds of holding force. The lock shall interface with the local processors without external, internal or functional alteration of the local processor. The electromagnetic lock shall incorporate an end of line resistor to facilitate line supervision by the system. If not incorporated into the electromagnetic lock or local controller, metal-oxide veristors (MOVs) shall be installed to protect the controller from reverse current surges. a. Armature: The electromagnetic lock shall contain internal circuitry to eliminate residual magnetism and inductive kickback. The actuating armature shall operate on 12 or 24 Volts dc and shall not dissipate more than 12 Watts. The holding current shall be not greater than 500 milliamperes. The actuating armature shall take not more than 300 milliseconds to change the status of the lock from fully secure to fully open or fully open to fully secure. Tamper Resistance: The electromagnetic lock mechanism shall be encased in hardened guard barriers to deter forced entry. Mounting Method: The door electromagnetic lock shall be suitable for use with single and double door with mortise or rim type hardware as shown, and shall be compatible with right or left hand mounting. ENTRY CONTROL SOFTWARE Existing Functionality
b.
c.
2.7 2.7.1
Additions to the system shall contain existing system functionality throughout. 2.7.2 Entry Control System Alarms
The system shall annunciate an alarm when the following conditions occur. Alarms shall be annunciated at the console both audibly and visually. An alarm report shall also be printed on the system printer. The alarm annunciation shall continue until acknowledged by the system operator. Only 1 control key shall be needed to acknowledge an alarm. The system shall control, monitor, differentiate, rank, annunciate, and allow operators to acknowledge, in real time, alarm signals generated by system equipment. The system shall also provide a means to define and customize the annunciation of each alarm type. The system shall use audio and visual information to differentiate the various types of alarms. Each alarm type shall be assigned an audio and a unique visual identifier. 2.7.2.1 Duress
The system shall annunciate a duress alarm when a duress switch is activated. Duress alarms shall be annunciated in a manner that distinguishes them from all other system alarms. Duress alarms shall not SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 22
W912HN-12-R-0003
be annunciated or otherwise indicated locally nor shall a duress alarm cause any special or unusual indications at the portal or area initiating the duress alarm. As an option through programming, individual privileges may have the ability to be carried out in the same as an authorized entry to the protected area. Duress alarms shall only be annunciated at the central station and remote annunciators at each department reception area Annunciators shall be hardwired with I/O boards off the existing access control system. Alarms shall be annunciated on the monitor and shall be logged on the printer. 2.8 WIRE AND CABLE
Provide all wire and cable not indicated as Government furnished equipment. Wiring shall meet NFPA 70 standards. 2.8.1 Above Ground Sensor Wiring
Sensor wiring shall be 20 AWG minimum, twisted and shielded, 2, 3, 4, or 6 pairs to match hardware. Multiconductor wire shall have an outer jacket of PVC. 2.8.2 Local Area Network (LAN) Cabling
LAN cabling shall be in accordance with TIA-568-C.2, category 6. 2.8.3 Cable Construction
All cable components shall withstand the environment in which the cable is installed for a minimum of 20 years. 2.8.4 Power Line Surge Protection
Equipment connected to alternating current circuits shall be protected from power line surges. Equipment protection shall withstand surge test waveforms described in IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2. Fuses shall not be used for surge protection. 2.8.5 Sensor Device Wiring and Communication Circuit Surge Protection
Inputs shall be protected against surges induced on device wiring. Outputs shall be protected against surges induced on control and device wiring installed outdoors and as shown. Communications equipment shall be protected against surges induced on any communications circuit. Cables and conductors, except fiber optics, which serve as communications circuits from console to field equipment, and between field equipment, shall have surge protection circuits installed at each end. Protection shall be furnished at equipment, and additional triple electrode gas surge protectors rated for the application on each wireline circuit shall be installed within 3 feet of the building cable entrance. Fuses shall not be used for surge protection. The inputs and outputs shall be tested in both normal mode and common mode using the following two waveforms: a. A 10-microsecond rise time by 1000 microsecond pulse width waveform with a peak voltage of 1500 Volts and a peak current of 60 amperes. An 8-microsecond rise time by 20-microsecond pulse width waveform with a peak voltage of 1000 Volts and a peak current of 500 amperes.
b.
SECTION 28 20 01.00 10
Page 23
W912HN-12-R-0003
PART 3 3.1
EXECUTION EXAMINATION
Verify that site conditions are in agreement with the design package and report any changes in the site, or conditions that will affect performance of the system to the Government in a report as defined in paragraph Group II Technical Data Package. Do not take any corrective action without written permission from the Government. 3.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Install all system components, including Government furnished equipment, and appurtenances in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, IEEE C2 and as shown. Furnish necessary interconnections, services, and adjustments required for a complete and operable system as specified and shown. Control signal, communications, and data transmission line grounding shall be installed as necessary to preclude ground loops, noise, and surges from adversely affecting system operation. 3.2.1 Installation
Install the system in accordance with the standards for safety, NFPA 70, UL 681, UL 1037 and UL 1076, and the appropriate installation manual for each equipment type. Components within the system shall be configured with appropriate service points to pinpoint system trouble in less than 20 minutes. Conduit shall be a minimum of 3/4 inch in diameter. DTS shall not be pulled into conduits or placed in raceways, compartments, outlet boxes, junction boxes, or similar fittings with other building wiring. Flexible cords or cord connections shall not be used to supply power to any components of the system, except where specifically noted. All other electrical work shall be as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM and as shown. 3.2.2 Enclosure Penetrations
Enclosure penetrations shall be from the bottom unless the system design requires penetrations from other directions. Penetrations of interior enclosures involving transitions of conduit from interior to exterior, and penetrations on exterior enclosures shall be sealed with rubber silicone sealant to preclude the entry of water. The conduit riser shall terminate in a hot-dipped galvanized metal cable terminator. The terminator shall be filled with an approved sealant as recommended by the cable manufacturer, and in a manner that does not damage the cable. 3.2.3 Existing Equipment
Connect to and utilize existing equipment, DTS, and devices as shown. System equipment and DTS that are usable in their original configuration without modification may be reused with Government approval. Perform a field survey, including testing and inspection of all existing system equipment and DTS intended to be incorporated into the system, and furnish a report to the Government as part of the site survey report as defined in paragraph Group II Technical Data Package. For those items considered nonfunctioning, the report shall include specification sheets, or written functional requirements to support the findings and the estimated cost to correct the deficiency. As part of the report, include the scheduled need date for connection to all existing equipment. Make written requests and obtain approval prior to disconnecting any signal lines and equipment, and SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 24
W912HN-12-R-0003
creating equipment downtime. Such work shall proceed only after receiving Government approval of these requests. If any device fails after the Contractor has commenced work on that device, signal or control line, diagnose the failure and perform any necessary corrections to the equipment and work. The Government is responsible for maintenance and the repair of Government equipment. The Contractor is responsible for repair costs due to negligence or abuse of Government equipment. 3.2.4 Installation Software
Load software as specified and required for an operational system, including data bases and specified programs. Upon successful completion of the endurance test, provide original and backup copies on CD-ROM of all accepted software, including diagnostics. 3.3 SYSTEM STARTUP
Satisfaction of the requirements below does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for incorrect installations, defective equipment items, or collateral damage as a result of Contractor work/equipment. Do not apply power to the system until after: a. System equipment items and DTS have been set up in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. A visual inspection of the system has been conducted to ensure that defective equipment items have not been installed and that there are no loose connections. System wiring has been tested and verified as correctly connected. System grounding and transient protection systems have been verified as properly installed. Power supplies to be connected to the system have been verified as the correct voltage, phasing, and frequency. SUPPLEMENTAL CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL
b.
c. d.
e.
3.4
Provide the services of technical representatives who are familiar with all components and installation procedures of the installed system; and are approved by the Contracting Officer. These representatives shall be present on the job site during the preparatory and initial phases of quality control to provide technical assistance. These representatives shall also be available on an as needed basis to provide assistance with follow-up phases of quality control. These technical representatives shall participate in the testing and validation of the system and shall provide certification that their respective system portions meet the contractual requirements. 3.5 3.5.1 TRAINING General
Deliver lesson plans and training manuals for the training phases, including type of training to be provided, and a list of reference material, for Government approval. Conduct training courses for designated personnel in the maintenance and operation of the system as specified. The training shall be oriented to the specific system being installed. SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 25
W912HN-12-R-0003
Training manuals shall be delivered for each trainee with 2 additional copies delivered for archiving at the project site. The manuals shall include an agenda, defined objectives for each lesson, and a detailed description of the subject matter for each lesson. Furnish audio-visual equipment and other training materials and supplies. Where the Contractor presents portions of the course by audio-visual material, copies of the audio-visual material shall be delivered to the Government either as a part of the printed training manuals or on the same media as that used during the training sessions. A training day is defined as 8 hours of classroom instruction, including 2 15-minute breaks and excluding lunchtime, Monday through Friday, during the daytime shift in effect at the training facility. For guidance in planning the required instruction, assume that attendees will have a high school education or equivalent, and are familiar with ESS. Approval of the planned training schedule shall be obtained from the Government at least 30 days prior to the training. 3.5.2 Operator's Training I
The first course shall be taught at the project site for a period of up to one training days at least 3 months prior to the scheduled performance verification test. A maximum of 5 personnel shall attend this course. Upon completion of this course, each student, using appropriate documentation, shall be able to perform elementary operations with guidance and describe the general hardware architecture and functionality of the system. This course shall include: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. 3.5.3 General System hardware architecture. Functional operation of the system. Operator commands. Data base entry. Reports generation. Alarm reporting. Diagnostics. System Manager Training
3 system managers shall be trained for at least 1days. The system manager training shall consist of the operator's training and the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Enrollment/deactivation. Assignments of identifier data. Assign operator password/levels. Change database configuration. System network configuration and management. Modify graphics. Print special or custom reports.
SECTION 28 20 01.00 10
Page 26
W912HN-12-R-0003
h. i. 3.5.4
System backup. Any other functions necessary to manage the system. Maintenance Personnel Training
The system maintenance course shall be taught at the project site after completion of the endurance test for a period of 1 training days. A maximum of 5 personnel, designated by the Government, will attend the course. The training shall include: a. b. c. d. Physical layout of each piece of hardware. Troubleshooting and diagnostics procedures. Component repair and/or replacement procedures. Maintenance procedures and schedules to include system testing after repair. Calibration procedures. Upon completion of this course, the students shall be fully proficient in the maintenance of the system. Review of site-specific drawing package, device location, communication, topology, and flow. TESTING General Requirements for Testing
e.
f.
3.6 3.6.1
Provide personnel, equipment, instrumentation, and supplies necessary to perform site testing. The Government will witness all performance verification and endurance testing. Written permission shall be obtained from the Government before proceeding with the next phase of testing. Original copies of all data produced during predelivery, performance verification and endurance testing, shall be turned over to the Government at the conclusion of each phase of testing, prior to Government approval of the test. 3.6.2 Contractor's Field Testing
Calibrate and test all equipment, verify DTS operation, place the integrated system in service, and test the integrated system. Ground rods installed by the Contractor shall be tested as specified in IEEE Std 142. Deliver a report describing results of functional tests, diagnostics, and calibrations, including written certification to the Government that the installed complete system has been calibrated, tested, and is ready to begin performance verification testing. It is recommended that the Contractor use the approved performance verification test as a guideline when the field test is conducted. 3.6.3 Performance Verification Test
Demonstrate that the completed system complies with the contract requirements. Using approved test procedures, all physical and functional requirements of the project shall be demonstrated and shown. The performance verification test, as specified, shall not be started until after receipt by the Contractor of written permission from the Government, based on the Contractor's written report. The report shall include SECTION 28 20 01.00 10 Page 27
W912HN-12-R-0003
certification of successful completion of testing as specified in paragraph Contractor's Field Testing, and upon successful completion of training as specified. The Government may terminate testing at any time when the system fails to perform as specified. Upon termination of testing by the Government or by the Contractor, commence an assessment period as described for Endurance Testing Phase II. Upon successful completion of the performance verification test, deliver test reports and other documentation as specified to the Government prior to commencing the endurance test. 3.6.4 a. Assessment Assessment: After the conclusion of the Performance Verification Test, identify all failures, determine causes of failures, repair failures, and deliver a written report to the Government. The report shall explain in detail the nature of each failure, corrective action taken, results of tests performed, and shall recommend the point at which testing should be resumed. After delivering the written report, convene a test review meeting at the jobsite to present the results and recommendations to the Government. The meeting shall not be scheduled earlier than 5 business days after receipt of the report by the Government. As a part of this test review meeting, demonstrate that all failures have been corrected by repeating appropriate portions of the performance verification test. Based on the Contractor's report and the test review meeting, the Government will determine the restart date, and may require that the Performance Verification Test be repeated. Do not commence any required retesting until after receipt of written notification by Government. After the conclusion of any retesting which the Government may require, the assessment shall be repeated. Exclusions: The Contractor will not be held responsible for failures in system performance resulting from the following: (1) An outage of the main power in excess of the capability of any backup power source, provided that the automatic initiation of all backup sources was accomplished and that automatic shutdown and restart of the ESS performed as specified. Failure of a Government furnished communications circuit, provided that the failure was not due to Contractor furnished equipment, installation, or software. Failure of existing Government owned equipment, provided that the failure was not due to Contractor furnished equipment, installation, or software. The occurrence of specified nuisance alarms. The occurrence of specified environmental alarms.
b.
(2)
(3)
(4) (5)
SECTION 28 20 01.00 10
Page 28
W912HN-12-R-0003
SECTION 28 31 76 INTERIOR FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM 11/08 PART 1 1.1 GENERAL RELATED SECTIONS
Refer to the following sections for related work and coordination: Section 21 13 13.00 10 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM, FIRE PROTECTION. Section 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE for door release and additional work related to finish hardware. Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING for additional work related to firestopping. 1.2 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. ACOUSTICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA (ASA) ASA S3.2 (2009) Method for Measuring the Intelligibility of Speech Over Communication Systems (ASA 85) ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME) ASME A17.1/CSA B44 (2007; Addenda A 2008; Addenda B 2009) Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators
FM GLOBAL (FM) FM APP GUIDE
(updated on-line) Approval Guide http://www.approvalguide.com/CC_host/pages/public/custom
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE) IEEE C62.41.1 (2002; R 2008) Guide on the Surges Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits (2002) Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits
IEEE C62.41.2
INTERNATIONAL ELECTROTECHNICAL COMMISSION (IEC) IEC 60268-16 (2003) Sound System Equipment - Part 16: Objective Rating Of Speech Intelligibility By Speech Transmission Index; Ed 3.0
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 1
W912HN-12-R-0003
INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION FOR STANDARDIZATION (ISO) ISO 7240-16 (2007) Fire Detection And Alarm Systems Part 16: Sound System Control And Indicating Equipment
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) NFPA 101 NFPA 170 (2009; TIA 09-1; TIA 09-2) Life Safety Code (2009) Standard for Fire Safety and Emergency Symbols (2009) Standard for Safeguarding Construction,Alteration, and Demolition Operations (2011; TIA 11-1; Errata 2011; TIA 11-2; TIA 11-3; TIA 11-4) National Electrical Code (2010; TIA 10-1; TIA 10-2; TIA 10-3; TIA 10-4) National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code (2009; Errata 09-1) Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA) 47 CFR 15 47 CFR 90 Radio Frequency Devices Private Land Mobile Radio Services
NFPA 241
NFPA 70
NFPA 72
NFPA 90A
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) UL 1480 (2003; R 2005 - R 2010) Standard for Speakers for Fire Alarm, Emergency, and Commercial and Professional Use (2001; R thru 2008) Visual Signaling Appliances - Private Mode Emergency and General Utility Signaling (2002; R thru 2008) Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired (2008; R 2009) General-Purpose Signaling Devices and Systems (2006; R 2008) Door Closers-Holders, With or Without Integral Smoke Detectors (2009) Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Systems (2008; R 2009) Smoke Detectors for Duct Application SECTION 28 31 76 Page 2
UL 1638
UL 1971
UL 2017
UL 228
UL 268
UL 268A
W912HN-12-R-0003
UL 464
(2009) Standard for Audible Signal Appliances (1999; R thru 2010) Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems (2003; R thru 2010) Standard for Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems (2009) Electrical Construction Equipment Directory (2011) Fire Protection Equipment Directory
UL 521
UL 864
UL Electrical Constructn
UL Fire Prot Dir 1.3 DEFINITIONS
Wherever mentioned in this specification or on the drawings, the equipment, devices, and functions shall be defined as follows: a. Analog/Addressable System: A system where multiple signals are transmitted via the same conduction path to a remote fire alarm control unit and fire alarm control panel, decoded and separated so that each signal will initiate the specified response. b. Hard Wired System: A system where alarm and supervisory initiating devices are directly connected, through individual dedicated conductors, to a central control panel without the use of analog/addressable circuits or devices. c. Interface Device: An addressable device that interconnects hard wired systems or devices to an analog/addressable system. d. Remote Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Control Unit: A control panel, electronically remote from the fire alarm and mass notification control panel, that receives inputs from automatic and manual fire alarm devices; may supply power to detection devices and interface devices; may provide transfer of power to the notification appliances; may provide transfer of condition to relays or devices connected to the control unit; and reports to and receives signals from the fire alarm control panel. e. Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Control Panel (FACP/FMCP): A master control panel having the features of a fire alarm and mass notification control unit and fire alarm and mass notification control units are interconnected. The panel has central processing, memory, input and output terminals, . f. Terminal Cabinet: A steel cabinet with locking, hinge-mounted door that terminal strips are securely mounted. 1.4 1.4.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Scope a. This work includes completion of design and modifying the existing analog/addressable fire alarm and mass notification system as described herein and on the contract drawings for the Addition/Alteration to Winn SECTION 28 31 76 Page 3
W912HN-12-R-0003
Army Community Hospital. Include in the system wiring, raceways, pull boxes, terminal cabinets, outlet and mounting boxes, control equipment, alarm, and supervisory signal initiating devices, alarm notification appliances, supervising station fire alarm system transmitter, and other accessories and miscellaneous items required for a complete operating system even though each item is not specifically mentioned or described. Provide systems complete and ready for operation. b. Provide equipment, materials, installation, workmanship, inspection, and testing in strict accordance with the required and advisory provisions of NFPA 72, ISO 7240-16, IEC 60268-16, except as modified herein. The system layouts on the drawings show the intent of coverage and are shown in suggested locations. Final quantity, system layout, and coordination are the responsibility of the Contractor. c. Where remote fire alarm control units are needed, they shall be provided at a terminal cabinet location. Each remote fire alarm control unit shall be powered from a wiring riser specifically for that use or from a local emergency power panel located on the same floor as the remote fire alarm control unit. Where remote fire control units are provided, equipment for notification appliances may be located in the remote fire alarm control units. 1.4.2 Technical Data and Computer Software
Technical data and computer software (meaning technical data that relates to computer software) that are specifically identified in this project, and may be defined/required in other specifications, shall be delivered, strictly in accordance with the CONTRACT CLAUSES. Identify data delivered by reference to the particular specification paragraph against which it is furnished. Data to be submitted shall include complete system, equipment, and software descriptions. Descriptions shall show how the equipment will operate as a system to meet the performance requirements of this contract. The data package shall also include the following: a. Identification of programmable portions of system equipment and capabilities. b. Description of system revision and expansion capabilities and methods of implementation detailing both equipment and software requirements. c. Provision of operational software data on all modes of programmable portions of the fire alarm and detection system. d. e. f. g. 1.4.3 Description of Fire Alarm Control Panel equipment operation. Description of auxiliary and remote equipment operations. Library of application software. Operation and maintenance manuals.
Keys
Keys and locks for equipment shall be identical. Provide not less than six keys of each type required. All keys and locks shall be mastered to a single key as required by the local AHJ.
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 4
W912HN-12-R-0003
1.5
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-02 Shop Drawings Annotated catalog data, in table format on the drawings, showing manufacturer's name, model, voltage, and catalog numbers for equipment and components. Submitted shop drawings shall not be smaller than ISO A1. Wiring Diagrams; G Point-to-point wiring diagrams showing the points of connection and terminals used for electrical field connections in the system, including interconnections between the equipment or systems that are supervised or controlled by the system. Diagrams shall show connections from field devices to the FACP and remote fire alarm control units, initiating circuits, switches, relays and terminals. Complete riser diagrams indicating the wiring sequence of devices and their connections to the control equipment. Include a color code schedule for the wiring. Include floor plans showing the locations of devices and equipment. System Layout; G Plan view drawing showing device locations, terminal cabinet locations, junction boxes, other related equipment, conduit routing, wire counts, circuit identification in each conduit, and circuit layouts for all floors. Drawings shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 170, Fire Safety Symbols. System Operation; G A complete list of device addresses and corresponding messages. Notification Appliances; G Data on each circuit to indicate that there is at least 25 percent spare capacity for notification appliances, 25 percent spare capacity for initiating devices. Annotate data for each circuit on the drawings. Amplifiers; G Data to indicate that the amplifiers have sufficient capacity to simultaneously drive all notification speakers at the maximum rating plus 50 percent spare capacity. Annotate data for each circuit on the drawings. As-Built Drawings Six sets of detailed as-built drawings. Furnish one set of CD or DVD discs containing software back-up and CAD based drawings in latest version of AutoCadd and DXF format of as-built drawings and SECTION 28 31 76 Page 5
W912HN-12-R-0003
schematics. The drawings shall include complete wiring diagrams showing connections between devices and equipment, both factory and field wired. Include a riser diagram and drawings showing the as-built location of devices and equipment. The drawings shall show the system as installed, including deviations from both the project drawings and the approved shop drawings. These drawings shall be submitted within two weeks after the final acceptance test of the system. At least one set of as-built (marked-up) drawings shall be provided at the time of, or prior to the final acceptance test. SD-03 Product Data UL or FM listing cards for equipment provided. Technical Data And Computer Software; G Fire Alarm And Mass Notification Control Panel (FACP/FMCP); G Terminal cabinets/assemblies; G Manual stations; G Transmitters (including housing); G Batteries; G Battery chargers; G Smoke sensors; G Thermal sensors; G Wiring and cable; G Notification appliances; G Addressable interface devices; G Amplifiers; G Tone generators; G Digitalized voice generators; G Waterflow detectors; G Tamper switches; G Electromagnetic door holders; G Remote fire alarm control units; G Radio transmitter and interface panels; G Digital alarm communicator transmitter (DACT); G Telegraphic transmitter; G SD-05 Design Data System Operation; G A complete description of the system operation in matrix format on the drawings. Battery power; G Battery calculations as required in paragraph Battery Power Calculations. SD-06 Test Reports Field Quality Control Testing Procedures; G Smoke sensor testing procedures; G SECTION 28 31 76 Page 6
W912HN-12-R-0003
SD-07 Certificates Installer SD-09 Manufacturer's Field Reports Mass Notification System A unique identifier for each device, including the control panel and initiating and indicating devices, with an indication of test results, and signature of the factory-trained technician of the control panel manufacturer and equipment installer. With reports on preliminary tests, include printer information. Include the NFPA 72 Record of Completion and NFPA 72 Inspection and Testing Form, with the appropriate test reports. SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Instructions; G Six copies of the Operation and Maintenance Instructions, indexed and in booklet form. The Operation and Maintenance Instructions shall be a single volume or in separate volumes, and may be submitted as a Technical Data Package. Manuals shall be approved prior to training. Original and backup copies of all software delivered for this project, on each type of CD/DVD media utilized. Instruction of Government Employees The installers training history for the employees involved with this contract. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Equipment and devices shall be compatible and operable with existing station fire alarm system and shall not impair reliability or operational functions of existing supervising station fire alarm system. The proprietary type Supervising Station (PSS) is located in the East Wing of the existing WACHThe supervising equipment is existing and consists of the following brands and models: supervising station control panel Edwards EST 3 , Monaco BT2-8 transmitters, . a. In NFPA publications referred to herein, consider advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears; interpret reference to "authority having jurisdiction" to mean the Contracting Offices Designated Representative (COR). b. The recommended practices stated in the manufacturer's literature or documentation shall be considered as mandatory requirements. c. Devices and equipment for fire alarm service shall be listed by UL Fire Prot Dir or approved by FM APP GUIDE.
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 7
W912HN-12-R-0003
1.6.1 1.6.1.1
Qualifications Design Services
Installations requiring completion of installation drawings and specification or modifications of fire detection, fire alarm, mass notification system, fire suppression systems or mass notification systems shall require the services and review of a qualified engineer. For the purposes of meeting this requirement, a qualified engineer is defined as an individual meeting one of the following conditions: a. A registered professional engineer having a Bachelor of Science or Masters of Science Degree in Fire Protection Engineering from an accredited university engineering program, plus a minimum of four years work experience in fire protection engineering. b. A registered professional engineer (P.E.) in fire protection engineering. c. Registered Professional Engineer with verification of experience and at least four years of current experience in the design of the fire protection and detection systems. d. 1.6.1.2 A NICET Level 4 Fire Alarm Technicians. Supervisor
The installing Contractor shall provide the following: NICET Fire Alarm Technicians to perform the installation of the system. A NICET Level 3 Fire Alarm Technician shall supervise the installation of the fire alarm system/mass notification system.Fire Alarm Technicians to perform the installation of the system. A Fire Alarm Technician with a minimum of 8 years of experience shall perform/supervise the installation of the fire alarm system/mass notification system. The Fire Alarm technicians supervising the installation of equipment shall be factory trained in the installation, adjustment, testing, and operation of the equipment specified herein and on the drawings. 1.6.1.3 Technician
The installing Contractor shall provide the following: Fire Alarm Technicians with a minimum of four years of experience utilized to assist in the installation and terminate fire alarm/mass notification devices, cabinets and panels. The Fire Alarm technicians installing the equipment shall be factory trained in the installation, adjustment, testing, and operation of the equipment specified herein and on the drawings. 1.6.1.4 Installer
The installing Contractor shall provide the following: Fire Alarm installer with a minimum of two years of experience utilized to assist in the installation of fire alarm/mass notification devices, cabinets and panels. An electrician shall be allowed to install wire or cable and to install conduit for the fire alarm system/mass notification system. The Fire Alarm installer shall be factory trained in the installation, adjustment, testing, and operation of the equipment specified herein and on the drawings.
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 8
W912HN-12-R-0003
1.6.1.5
Test Personnel
The installing Contractor shall provide the following: Fire Alarm Technicians with a minimum of eight years of experience utilized to test and certify the installation of the fire alarm/mass notification devices, cabinets and panels. The Fire Alarm technicians testing the equipment shall be factory trained in the installation, adjustment, testing, and operation of the equipment specified herein and on the drawings. 1.6.1.6 Manufacturer's Representative
The fire alarm and mass notification equipment manufacturer's representative shall be present for the connection of wiring to the control panel. The Manufacturer's Representative shall be an employee of the manufacturer with necessary technical training on the system being installed. 1.6.1.7 Manufacturer
Components shall be of current design and shall be in regular and recurrent production at the time of installation. Provide design, materials, and devices for a protected premises fire alarm system, complete, conforming to NFPA 72, except as otherwise or additionally specified herein. 1.6.2 1.6.2.1 Regulatory Requirements Requirements for Fire Protection Service
Equipment and material shall have been tested by UL and listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or approved by FM and listed in FM APP GUIDE. Where the terms "listed" or "approved" appear in this specification, they shall mean listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or FM APP GUIDE. The omission of these terms under the description of any item of equipment described shall not be construed as waiving this requirement. All listings or approval by testing laboratories shall be from an existing ANSI or UL published standard. 1.6.2.2 Mass Notification System
The equipment furnished shall be compatible and be UL listed, FM approved, or approved or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory for the intended use. All listings or approval by testing laboratories shall be from an existing ANSI or UL published standard. 1.6.2.3 Testing Services or Laboratories
Fire alarm and fire detection equipment shall be constructed in accordance with UL Fire Prot Dir, UL Electrical Constructn, or FM APP GUIDE. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Protect equipment delivered and placed in storage from the weather, humidity, and temperature variation, dirt and dust, and other contaminants. 1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) INSTRUCTIONS
The Interior Fire Alarm And Mass Notification System Operation and Maintenance Instructions shall include: a. "Manufacturer Data Package 5" as specified in Section 01 78 23 SECTION 28 31 76 Page 9
W912HN-12-R-0003
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA. b. Operating manual outlining step-by-step procedures required for system startup, operation, and shutdown. The manual shall include the manufacturer's name, model number, service manual, parts list, and complete description of equipment and their basic operating features. c. Maintenance manual listing routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and troubleshooting guide. The manuals shall include conduit layout, equipment layout and simplified wiring, and control diagrams of the system as installed. d. The manuals shall include complete procedures for system revision and expansion, detailing both equipment and software requirements. e. Software delivered for this project shall be provided, on each type of CD/DVD media utilized. f. Printouts of configuration settings for all devices.
g. Routine maintenance checklist. The routine maintenance checklist shall be arranged in a columnar format. The first column shall list all installed devices, the second column shall state the maintenance activity or state no maintenance required, the third column shall state the frequency of the maintenance activity, and the fourth column for additional comments or reference. 1.9 1.9.1 EXTRA MATERIALS Repair Service/Replacement Parts
Repair services and replacement parts for the system shall be available for a period of 10 years after the date of final acceptance of this work by the Contracting Officer. During guarantee period, the service technician shall be on-site within 24 hours after notification. All repairs shall be completed within 24 hours of arrival on-site. 1.9.2 Interchangeable Parts
Spare parts furnished shall be directly interchangeable with the corresponding components of the installed system. Spare parts shall be suitably packaged and identified by nameplate, tagging, or stamping. Spare parts shall be delivered to the Contracting Officer at the time of the final acceptance testing. 1.9.3 Spare Parts
Furnish the following spare parts and accessories: a. Four fuses for each fused circuit
b. 1.9.4
Three break rods for manual stations
Special Tools
Software, connecting cables and proprietary equipment, necessary for the maintenance, testing, and reprogramming of the equipment shall be furnished SECTION 28 31 76 Page 10
W912HN-12-R-0003
to the Contracting Officer. PART 2 2.1 2.1.1 PRODUCTS MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Standard Products
Provide materials, equipment, and devices that have been tested by a nationally recognized testing laboratory, such as UL or FM, and listed or approved for fire protection service when so required by NFPA 72 or this specification. Select material from one manufacturer, where possible, and not a combination of manufacturers, for any particular classification of materials. Material and equipment shall be the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products for at least two years prior to bid opening. 2.1.2 Nameplates
Major components of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address, type or style, model or serial number, catalog number, date of installation, installing Contractor's name and address, and the contract number provided on a new plate permanently affixed to the item or equipment. Major components include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. FACPs Automatic transmitter Printer
Furnish nameplates to obtain approval by the Contracting Officer before installation. Obtain approval by the Contracting Officer for installation locations. Nameplates shall be etched metal or plastic, permanently attached by screws to panels or adjacent walls. 2.2 GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENT
All fire alarm and mass notification equipment shall be listed for use under the applicable reference standards. Interfacing of Listed UL 864 or similar approved industry listing with Mass Notification Panels listed to UL 2017 or equal shall be done in a laboratory listed configuration, if the software programming features can not provide a listed interface control. If a field modification is needed, such as adding equipment like relays, the manufacturer of the panels being same or different brand from manufacturer shall provide the installing contractor for review and confirmation by the installing contractor. The installing contractor shall, as part of the submittal documents, provide this information. 2.3 SYSTEM OPERATION
The Addressable Interior Fire Alarm and Mass Notification System shall be a complete, supervised, noncoded, analog/addressable fire alarm and mass notification system conforming to NFPA 72, UL 864 Ninth Edition, and UL 2017. The system shall be activated into the alarm mode by actuation of any alarm initiating device. The system shall remain in the alarm mode until the initiating device is reset and the fire alarm control panel is reset and restored to normal. The system may be placed in the alert mode by local micrphones or remotely from authorized locations/users. SECTION 28 31 76 Page 11
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.3.1
Alarm Initiating Devices
Connect alarm initiating devices to signal line circuits (SLC) and installed in accordance with NFPA 72. a. Alarm notification appliances shall be connected to notification appliance circuits (NAC) , as "Class A" in accordance with NFPA 72. A looped conduit system shall be provided so that if the conduit and all conductors within are severed or exposed to fire at any point, all IDC, NAC and SLC will remain functional. Should the design or building layout preclude separation then a fire rated separation shall be provided in accordance with NFPA 72. The return portion of the loop shall be remote from the supply portion of the loop. b. Any single impairment of the system shall not affect the system on more than one-half of any floor. c. The system shall operate in the alarm mode upon actuation of any alarm initiating device. The system shall remain in the alarm mode until initiating device(s) are reset and the fire alarm control panel is manually reset and restored to normal. The conduit loop requirement is not applicable to the signal transmission link from the local panels (at the protected premises) to the Supervising Station (fire station, fire alarm central communication center). Audible, and visual appliances and systems shall comply with NFPA 72. Fire alarm system/mass notification system components requiring power, except for the control panel power supply, shall operate on 24 Volts dc. 2.3.2 Functions and Operating Features
The system shall provide the following functions and operating features: a. The FACP/FMCP and fire alarm and mass notification control units, if used, shall provide power, annunciation, supervision, and control for the system. Addressable systems shall be microcomputer (microprocessor or microcontroller) based with a minimum word size of eight bits with sufficient memory to perform as specified. b. Provide Class A or B initiating device circuits for conductor lengths of 10 feet or less. c. d. Provide Class A or B signaling line circuits for each floor. Provide Class A or B signaling line circuits for the network.
e. Provide Class A or B notification appliance circuits. The visual alarm notification appliances shall have the flash rates synchronized. f. Provide electrical supervision of the primary power (AC) supply, presence of the battery, battery voltage, and placement of system modules within the control panel. g. Provide an audible and visual trouble signal to activate upon a single break or open condition, or ground fault. The trouble signal shall also operate upon loss of primary power (AC) supply, absence of a battery supply, low battery voltage, or removal of alarm or supervisory panel modules. Provide a trouble alarm silence feature that shall silence the audible trouble signal, without affecting the visual SECTION 28 31 76 Page 12
W912HN-12-R-0003
indicator. After the system returns to normal operating conditions, the trouble signal shall again sound until the trouble is acknowledged. A smoke sensor in the process of being verified for the actual presence of smoke shall not initiate a trouble condition. h. Provide a notification appliance silencing switch, that when activated, will silence the audible signal appliance, but will not affect the visual alarm indicator, the liquid crystal display, or the automatic notification of the fire department . This switch shall be overridden upon activation of a subsequent alarm. i. Provide alarm verification capability for smoke sensors. verification shall initially be set for 30 seconds. Alarm
j. Provide program capability via switches in a locked portion of the FACP to bypass the automatic notification appliance circuits, fire reporting systemair handler shutdownsmoke control operationelevator recalldoor releasedoor unlocking features. Operation of this programming shall indicate this action on the FACP display and printer output. k. Alarm, supervisory, and/or trouble signals shall be automatically transmitted to the fire department. l. Alarm functions shall override trouble or supervisory functions. Supervisory functions shall override trouble functions. m. The system shall be capable of being programmed from the panels keyboard. Programmed information shall be stored in non-volatile memory. n. The system shall be capable of operating, supervising, and/or monitoring both addressable and non-addressable alarm and supervisory devices. o. There shall be no limit, other than maximum system capacity, as to the number of addressable devices, that may be in alarm simultaneously. p. Where the fire alarm system is responsible for initiating an action in another emergency control device or system, such as an HVAC systema smoke control systeman elevator system, the addressable fire alarm relay shall be within 3 feet of the emergency control device. q. An alarm signal shall automatically initiate the following functions: (1) Transmission of an alarm signal to the fire department.
(2) Visual indication of the device operated on the fire alarm control panel (FACP), and on the graphic annunciator. Indication on the graphic annunciator shall be by floor, zone or circuit, and type of device. (3) Continuous actuation of all alarm notification appliances, except those in stairs or in elevator cabs. (4) Recording of the event via the system printer and electronicly in the history log of the fire control system unit.
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 13
W912HN-12-R-0003
(5) (6)
Release of doors held open by electromagnetic devices. Operation of the smoke control system.
(7) Release of power to electric locks on doors that are part of the means of egress. (8) Operation of a smoke sensor in an elevator lobby or other location associated with the automatic recall of elevators, shall recall the elevators in addition to other requirements of this paragraph. (9) Operation of a duct smoke sensor shall shut down the appropriate air handler in accordance with NFPA 90A in addition to other requirements of this paragraph. (11) Operation of a sprinkler waterflow switch serving an elevator machinery room or elevator shaft shall operate shunt trip circuit breaker(s) to shut down power to the elevators in accordance with ASME A17.1/CSA B44. (12) Operation of an interface, that operates vibrating pagers worn by hearing-impaired occupants. r. A supervisory signal shall automatically initiate the following functions: (1) Visual indication of the device operated on the FACP, and on the graphic annunciator, and sound the audible alarm at the respective panel. (2) Transmission of a supervisory signal to the fire department.
(3) Recording of the event via the system printer and electronicly in the history log of the fire control system unit. s. A trouble condition shall automatically initiate the following functions: (1) Visual indication of the system trouble on the FACP, and on the graphic annunciator, and sound the audible alarm at the respective panel. (2) (3) Transmission of a trouble signal to the fire department. Recording of the event via the system printer.
t. The maximum permissible elapsed time between the actuation of an initiating device and its indication at the FACP shall be 10 seconds. u. The maximum elapsed time between the occurrence of the trouble condition and its indication at the FACP shall not exceed 200 seconds. 2.4 2.4.1 SYSTEM MONITORING Valves
Each valve affecting the proper operation of a fire protection system, including automatic sprinkler control valves, standpipe control valves, SECTION 28 31 76 Page 14
W912HN-12-R-0003
sprinkler service entrance valve, valves at fire pumps, isolating valves for pressure type waterflow or supervision switches, and valves at backflow preventers, whether supplied under this contract or existing, shall be electrically monitored to ensure its proper position. Each tamper switch shall be provided with a separate address . 2.4.2 Independent Fire Detection System independent smoke detection subsystem, and kitchen fire system shall be monitored both for the presence of an alarm for a trouble condition. Each monitored condition shall be a separate address.
Each existing extinguishing condition and provided with 2.5 2.5.1
MASS NOTIFICATION SYSTEM FUNCTIONS Notification Appliance Network
The notification appliance network consists of audio speakers located to provide intelligible instructions at all locations in the building. The Mass Notification System announcements shall take priority over all other function of the system including the audible and visual output of the fire alarm system in a normal or alarm state. All fire alarm system functions shall continue in an alarm state except for the output signals of the audible and visual notification appliances. 2.5.2 Strobes
Strobes are also provided to alert hearing-impaired occupants. 2.5.3 Text Displays
LED text displays for hearing impaired occupants. 2.5.4 Giant Voice
The Giant Voice system (if available) in the area of the building shall be activated to provide a pre-recorded message. 2.5.5 Door Operation
Closure of doors held open by electromagnetic devices. 2.5.6 Voice Notification
An autonomous voice notification control unit is used to monitor and control the notification appliance network and provide consoles for local operation. Using a console, personnel in the building can initiate delivery of pre-recorded voice messages, provide live voice messages and instructions, and initiate visual strobe and (optional) textual message notification appliances. The autonomous voice notification control unit will temporarily override audible fire alarm notification while delivering Mass Notification messages to ensure they are intelligible. 2.5.7 Base-Wide Control
If a base-wide control system for mass notification exists on the base, the autonomous control unit shall communicates with the central control unit of the base-wide system. The autonomous control unit shall receive commands/messages from the central control unit and provide status SECTION 28 31 76 Page 15
W912HN-12-R-0003
information. 2.6 2.6.1 OVERVOLTAGE AND SURGE PROTECTION Signaling Line Circuit Surge Protection
For systems having circuits located outdoors, communications equipment shall be protected against surges induced on any signaling line circuit and shall comply with the applicable requirements of IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2. Cables and conductors, that serve as communications links, shall have surge protection circuits installed at each end that meet the following waveform(s): a. A 10 microsecond by 1000 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of 1500 volts and a peak current of 60 amperes. b. An 8 microsecond by 20 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of 1000 volts and a peak current of 500 amperes. Protection shall be provided at the equipment. Additional triple electrode gas surge protectors, rated for the application, shall be installed on each wireline circuit within 3 feet of the building cable entrance. Fuses shall not be used for surge protection. 2.6.2 Sensor Wiring Surge Protection
Digital and analog inputs and outputs shall be protected against surges induced by sensor wiring installed outdoors and as shown. The inputs and outputs shall be tested with the following waveforms: a. A 10 by 1000 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of 1500 volts and a peak current of 60 amperes. b. An 8 by 20 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of 1000 volts and a peak current of 500 amperes. Fuses shall not be used for surge protection. 2.7 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICES
The initiating device being monitored shall be configured as a Class A or B initiating device circuits. The system shall be capable of defining any module as an alarm module and report alarm trouble, loss of polling, or as a supervisory module, and reporting supervisory short, supervisory open or loss of polling such as waterflow switches, valve supervisory switches, fire pump monitoring, independent smoke detection systems, relays for output function actuation, etc. The module shall be UL or FM listed as compatible with the control panel. The monitor module shall provide address setting means compatible with the control panel's SLC supervision and store an internal identifying code. Monitor module shall contain an integral LED that flashes each time the monitor module is polled. Pull stations with a monitor module in a common backbox are not required to have an LED. Existing fire alarm system initiating device circuits shall be connected to a single module to power and supervise the circuit. 2.8 ADDRESSABLE CONTROL MODULE
The control module shall be capable of operating as a relay (dry contact form C) for interfacing the control panel with other systems, and to control door holders or initiate elevator fire service. The module shall be UL or FM listed as compatible with the control panel. The indicating SECTION 28 31 76 Page 16
W912HN-12-R-0003
device or the external load being controlled shall be configured as a Style Y notification appliance circuits. The system shall be capable of supervising, audible, visual and dry contact circuits. The control module shall have both an input and output address. The supervision shall detect a short on the supervised circuit and shall prevent power from being applied to the circuit. The control model shall provide address setting means compatible with the control panel's SLC supervision and store an internal identifying code. The control module shall contain an integral LED that flashes each time the control module is polled. Control Modules shall be located in environmental areas that reflect the conditions to which they were listed. 2.9 ISOLATION MODULES
Provide isolation modules to subdivide each signaling line circuit into groups of not more than 20 addressable devices between adjacent isolation modules. 2.10 2.10.1 SMOKE SENSORS Photoelectric Smoke Sensors
Provide addressable photoelectric smoke sensors as follows: a. Provide analog/addressable photoelectric smoke sensors utilizing the photoelectric light scattering principle for operation in accordance with UL 268. Smoke sensors shall be listed for use with the fire alarm control panel. b. Provide self-restoring type sensors that do not require any readjustment after actuation at the FACP to restore them to normal operation. Sensors shall be UL listed as smoke-automatic fire sensors. c. Components shall be rust and corrosion resistant. Vibration shall have no effect on the sensor's operation. Protect the detection chamber with a fine mesh metallic screen that prevents the entrance of insects or airborne materials. The screen shall not inhibit the movement of smoke particles into the chamber. d. Provide twist lock bases with sounder that produces a minimum of 90 dBA at 10 feet for the sensors. The sensors shall maintain contact with their bases without the use of springs. Provide companion mounting base with screw terminals for each conductor. Terminate field wiring on the screw terminals. The sensor shall have a visual indicator to show actuation. e. The sensor address shall identify the particular unit, its location within the system, and its sensitivity setting. Sensors shall be of the low voltage type rated for use on a 24 VDC system. f. An operator at the control panel, having a proper access level, shall have the capability to manually access the following information for each initiating device. (1) (2) (3) Primary status Device type Present average value SECTION 28 31 76 Page 17
W912HN-12-R-0003
(4) (5) 2.10.2
Present sensitivity selected Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.)
Ionization Type Smoke Sensors
Provide addressable ionization type smoke sensors as follows: a. Provide analog smoke sensors that operate on the ionization principle and are actuated by the presence of visible or invisible products of combustion. Smoke sensors shall be listed for use with the fire alarm control panel. b. Provide self-restoring type sensors that do not require any readjustment after actuation at the FACP to restore them to normal operation. Sensors shall be UL or FM listed as smoke-automatic fire sensors. c. Components shall be rust and corrosion resistant. Vibration shall have no effect on the sensor's operation. Protect the detection chamber with a fine mesh metallic screen that prevents the entrance of insects or airborne materials. The screen shall not inhibit the movement of smoke particles into the chamber. d. Provide twist lock bases for the sensors. The sensors shall maintain contact with their bases without the use of springs. Provide companion mounting base with screw terminals for each conductor. Terminate field wiring on the screw terminals. The sensor shall have a visual indicator to show actuation. e. The sensor address shall identify the particular unit, its location within the system, and its sensitivity setting. Sensors shall be of the low voltage type rated for use on a 24 VDC system. f. An operator at the control panel, having a proper access level, shall have the capability to manually access the following information for each initiating device. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) 2.10.3 Primary status Device type Present average value Present sensitivity selected Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.) Sensitivity adjustments for smoke detectors.
Projected Beam Smoke Detectors
Detectors shall be designed for detection of abnormal smoke densities. Detectors shall consist of separate transmitter and receiver units. The transmitter unit shall emit an infrared beam to the receiver unit. When the signal at the receiver falls below a preset sensitivity, the detector shall initiate an alarm. The receiver shall contain an LED that is powered upon an alarm condition. Long-term changes to the received signal caused SECTION 28 31 76 Page 18
W912HN-12-R-0003
by environmental variations shall be automatically compensated. Detectors shall incorporate features to assure that they are operational; a trouble signal shall be initiated if the beam is obstructed, the limits of the compensation circuit are reached, or the housing cover is removed. Detectors shall have multiple sensitivity settings in order to meet UL listings for the different distances covered by the beam. In the event of beam interference for more than three seconds a trouble alarm shall be transmitted. 2.10.4 Duct Smoke Sensors
Duct-mounted photoelectric smoke detectors shall be furnished and installed where indicated and in accordance with NFPA 90A. Units shall consist of a smoke detector as specified in paragraph Photoelectric Detectors, mounted in a special housing fitted with duct sampling tubes. Detector circuitry shall be mounted in a metallic enclosure exterior to the duct. Detectors shall have a manual reset. Detectors shall be rated for air velocities that include air flows between 500 and 4000 fpm. Detectors shall be powered from the fire alarm panel. a. Sampling tubes shall run the full width of the duct. The duct detector package shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 90A, UL 268A, and shall be UL listed for use in air-handling systems. The control functions, operation, reset, and bypass shall be controlled from the fire alarm control panel. b. Lights to indicate the operation and alarm condition; and the test and reset buttons shall be visible and accessible with the unit installed and the cover in place. Detectors mounted above 6 feet and those mounted below 6 feet that cannot be easily accessed while standing on the floor, shall be provided with a remote detector indicator panel containing test and reset switches. c. Remote lamps and switches as well as the affected fan units shall be properly identified in etched plastic placards. Detectors shall provide for control of auxiliary contacts that provide control, interlock, and shutdown functions. Auxiliary contacts provide for this function shall be located within 3 feet of the controlled circuit or appliance. The detectors shall be supplied by the fire alarm system manufacturer to ensure complete system compatibility. 2.10.5 Smoke Sensor Testing
Smoke sensors shall be tested in accordance with NFPA 72 and manufacturer's recommended calibrated test method. Submit smoke sensor testing procedures for approval. 2.11 2.11.1 THERMAL SENSORS Heat Detectors
Heat detectors shall be designed for detection of fire by combination fixed temperature and rate-of-rise principle . The alarm condition shall be determined by comparing sensor valve with the stored values. Heat detector spacing shall be rated in accordance with UL 521. Detectors located in areas subject to moisture, exterior atmospheric conditions, or hazardous locations as defined by NFPA 70 and as shown on drawings, shall be types approved for such locations.
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 19
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.11.1.1
Combination Fixed-Temperature and Rate-of-Rise Detectors
Detectors shall be designed for surface outlet box mounting and supported independently of wiring connections. Contacts shall be self-resetting after response to rate-of-rise principle. Under fixed temperature actuation, the detector shall have a permanent external indication that is readily visible. Detector units located in boiler rooms, showers, or other areas subject to abnormal temperature changes shall operate on fixed temperature principle only. The UL 521 test rating for the fixed temperature portion shall be 135 degrees F. The UL 521 test rating for the Rate-of-Rise detectors shall be rated for 50 by 50 feet. 2.11.1.2 Rate Compensating Detectors
Detectors shall be surface mounted horizontal type, with outlet box supported independently of wiring connections. Detectors shall be hermetically sealed and automatically resetting. Rate Compensated detectors shall be rated for 50 by 50 feet. 2.11.1.3 Fixed Temperature Detectors
Detectors shall be designed for surface outlet box mounting and supported independently of wiring connections. Detectors shall be designed to detect high heat. The detectors shall have a specific temperature setting of 135 degrees F. The UL 521 test rating for the fixed temperature detectors shall be rated for 15 by 15 feet. 2.11.2 Heat Sensing
A moving average of the sensors heat sensing value to automatically compensate for conditions that could affect detection operations. System shall automatically maintain a constant heat sensing sensitivity from each sensor by compensating for environmental factors. 2.11.3 Self-Test Routines
Automatic self-test routines shall be performed on each sensor that will functionally check sensor sensitivity electronics and ensure the accuracy of the value being transmitted. Any sensor that fails this test shall indicate a trouble condition with the sensor location at the control panel. 2.11.4 Operator Access
An operator at the control panel, having the proper access level, shall have the capability to manually access the following information for each heat sensor: a. b. c. d. 2.11.5 Primary status Device type Present average value Sensor range () Operator Control
An operator at the control panel, having the proper access level, shall have the capability to manually control the following information for each SECTION 28 31 76 Page 20
W912HN-12-R-0003
heat sensor: a. b. c. 2.12 2.12.1 Alarm detection sensitivity values Enable or disable the point/device Control sensors relay driver output
ELECTRIC POWER Primary Power
Power shall be 120 VAC service for the FACP from the emergency AC service to the building. 2.12.2 Generator
Where any emergency generator provides a standby power supply for life safety system circuits, provide a connection from one of the circuits for the fire alarm system. When a generator buss circuit is available for the fire alarm, mass notification, and life safety equipment, then the fire alarm control unit shall monitor the generator with the following supervisory signals: (a) Generator Selector Switch in a position other than automatic start (b) Generator Running (c) Low Fuel (d) Failure to Start (e) Abnormal conditions such as low oil, high temperature, and low coolant. (f) Low Battery (g) Emergency transfer in proper mode while generator running 2.13 EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY
Provide for system operation in the event of primary power source failure. Transfer from normal to auxiliary (secondary) power or restoration from auxiliary to normal power shall be automatic and shall not cause transmission of a false alarm. 2.13.1 Batteries
Provide sealed, maintenance-free, batteries to match existing type as the source for emergency power to the FACP. Batteries shall contain suspended electrolyte. The battery system shall be maintained in a fully charged condition by means of a solid state battery charger. Provide an automatic transfer switch to transfer the load to the batteries in the event of the failure of primary power. 2.13.1.1 Capacity
Provide the batteries with sufficient capacity operate the system under quiescent load for a minimum of 24 hour and, at the end of that period, shall be capable of operating all alarm notification appliances used for evacuation or to direct aid to the location of an emergency for 5 minutes. 2.13.1.2 a. Battery Power Calculations Verify that battery capacity exceeds supervisory and alarm power SECTION 28 31 76 Page 21
W912HN-12-R-0003
requirements. 1). Substantiate the battery calculations for alarm, alert, and supervisory power requirements. Ampere-hour requirements for each system component and each panel component, and the battery-recharging period shall be included. 2). Provide complete battery calculations for both the alarm, alert, and supervisory power requirements. Ampere-hour requirements for each system component shall be submitted with the calculations. 3). A voltage drop calculation to indicate that sufficient voltage is available for proper operation of the system and all components, at the minimum rated voltage of the system operating on batteries. b. For battery calculations use the following assumptions: Assume a starting voltage of 24 VDC for starting the calculations to size the batteries. Calculate the required Amp-Hours for the specified standby time, and then calculate the required Amp-Hours for the specified alarm time. Calculate the nominal battery voltage after operation on batteries for the specified time period. Using this voltage perform a voltage drop calculation for circuit containing device and/or appliances remote from the power sources. 2.13.2 Battery Chargers
Provide a solid state, fully automatic, variable charging rate battery charger. The charger shall be capable of providing 150 percent of the connected system load and shall maintain the batteries at full charge. In the event the batteries are fully discharged (18 Volts dc), the charger shall recharge the batteries back to 95 percent of full charge within 48 hours. Provide pilot light to indicate when batteries are manually placed on a high rate of charge as part of the unit assembly if a high rate switch is provided. 2.14 FIRE ALARM AND MASS NOTIFICATION CONTROL PANEL (FACP/FMCP)
Provide a complete expansion/extension of the existing control panel fully enclosed in a lockable steel enclosure as specified herein. Operations required for testing or for normal care and maintenance of the systems shall be performed from the front of the enclosure. a. Each control unit shall provide power, supervision, control, and logic for the entire system, utilizing solid state, modular components, internally mounted and arranged for easy access. Each control unit shall be suitable for operation on a 120 volt, 60 hertz, normal building power supply. Provide each panel with supervisory functions for power failure, internal component placement, and operation. b. Visual indication of alarm, supervisory, or trouble initiation on the fire alarm control panel shall be by liquid crystal display or similar means with a minimum of 80 characters, that at least 32 are field changeable. The MNS Control panel shall have the capability of temporarily deactivate the fire alarm audible notification appliances while delivering voice messages. Provide conductor integrity monitoring for strobe, display, temporary deactivation of fire alarm audible notification appliances and speaker wiring. SECTION 28 31 76 Page 22
W912HN-12-R-0003
c. Provide secure operator console for initiating recorded messages, strobes and displays; and for delivering live voice messages. Provide capacity for at least four pre-recorded messages. Provide the ability to automatically repeat pre-recorded messages. Provide a secure microphone for delivering live messages. Provide adequate discrete outputs to temporarily deactivate fire alarm audible notification, and initiate/synchronize strobes. Provide a complete set of self-diagnostics for controller and appliance network. Provide local diagnostic information display and local diagnostic information and system event log file. 2.14.1 Cabinet
Install control panel components in cabinets large enough to accommodate all components and also to allow ample gutter space for interconnection of panels as well as field wiring. The enclosure shall be identified by an engraved laminated phenolic resin nameplate. Lettering on the nameplate shall say "Fire Alarm and Mass Notification Control Panel" and shall not be less than one inch high. Provide prominent rigid plastic or metal identification plates for lamps, circuits, meters, fuses, and switches. The cabinet shall be provided in a sturdy steel housing, complete with back box, hinged steel door with cylinder lock, and surface mounting provisions. 2.14.2 Control Modules
Provide power and control modules to perform all functions of the FACP. Provide audible signals to indicate any alarm, supervisory, or trouble condition. The alarm signals shall be different from the trouble signal. Connect circuit conductors entering or leaving the panel to screw-type terminals with each terminal marked for identification. Locate diodes and relays, if any, on screw terminals in the FACP. Circuits operating at 24 VDC shall not operate at less than 21.6 volts. Circuits operating at any other voltage shall not have a voltage drop exceeding 10 percent of nominal voltage. 2.14.3 Silencing Switches a. Alarm Silencing Switch: Provide an alarm silencing switch at the FACP that shall silence the audible signal but not affect the visual alarm indicator. This switch shall be overridden upon activation of a subsequent alarm. b. Supervisory/Trouble Silencing Switch: Provide supervisory and trouble silencing switch that shall silence the audible trouble and supervisory signal, but not extinguish the visual indicator. This switch shall be overridden upon activation of a subsequent alarm, supervision, or trouble condition. Audible trouble indication must resound automatically every 24 hours after the silencing feature has been operated. 2.14.4 Non-Interfering
Power and supervise each circuit such that a signal from one device does not prevent the receipt of signals from any other device. Circuits shall be manually reset by switch from the FACP after the initiating device or devices have been restored to normal.
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 23
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.14.5
Voice Notification System
The Voice Notification System shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 72 for Emergency Voice/Alarm Communications System requirements ISO 7240-16, IEC 60268-16, except as specified herein. The system shall be a one-way multi-channel voice notification system incorporating user selectability of a minimum 8 distinct sounds for tone signaling, and the incorporation of a voice module for delivery of prerecorded messages. Textual audible appliances shall produce a slow whoop tone for three cycles followed by a voice message that is repeated until the control panel is reset or silenced. Automatic messages shall be broadcast through speakers on appropriate floors, but not in stairs or elevator cabs. The visual strobes and audible message shall automatically be broadcast on the floor of fire alarm origin, the floor immediately above the floor of fire alarm origin, and the floor immediately below the floor of fire alarm origin. A live voice message shall override the automatic audible output through use of a microphone input at the control panel. a. When using the microphone, live messages shall be broadcast through speakers in stairs, in elevator cabs, and throughout a selected floor or floors. The system shall be capable of operating all speakers at the same time. The digitalized voice message shall consist of a non-volatile (EPROM) microprocessor based input to the amplifiers. The microprocessor shall actively interrogate circuitry, field wiring, and digital coding necessary for the immediate and accurate rebroadcasting of the stored voice data into the appropriate amplifier input. Loss of operating power, supervisory power, or any other malfunction that could render the digitalized voice module inoperative shall automatically cause the slow whoop tone to take over all functions assigned to the failed unit. b. The Mass Notification functions shall override the manual or automatic fire alarm notification or Public Address (PA) functions. The system shall have the capability of utilizing a remote microphone station with redundant controls of the notification system control panel. Class "A" Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) shall be provided for the activation of strobe appliances. The activation of the NAC Circuits shall follow the operation of the speaker NAC circuits. Audio output shall be selectable for line level (600 ohms), 25, 70.7 or 100 volt output. The audio amplifier outputs shall be not greater than 100 watts RMS output. The strobe NAC Circuits shall provide at least 2 amps of 24 VDC power to operate strobes and have the ability to synchronize all strobes. A hand held microphone shall be provided and, upon activation, shall take priority over any tone signal, recorded message or PA microphone operation in progress, while maintaining the strobe NAC Circuits activation. All outputs and operational modules shall be fully supervised with on-board diagnostics and trouble reporting circuits. Form "C" contacts shall be provided for system alarm and trouble conditions. Circuits shall be provided for operation of auxiliary appliance during trouble conditions. During a Mass Notification event the panel shall not generate nor cause any trouble alarms to be generated with the Fire Alarm system. The Control Panel for the Voice Notification System shall be independent of the Fire alarm system and shall be capable of autonomous operation. The system shall be housed in same panel with the fire alarm system. Mass Notification functions shall take precedence over all other function performed by the Voice Notification System. Messages shall utilize a female voice and shall be similar to the following: SECTION 28 31 76 Page 24
W912HN-12-R-0003
1) 1000 Hz tones (1 sec on, 1/2 second off, 1 second on, 1/2 second off, 1 second on) "May I have your attention, please. May I have your attention, please. A fire has been reported that may affect your floor. Please walk to the nearest exit and evacuate the building." (Provide a 2 second pause.) "May I have your attention, please, (repeat the message)." 2) 1000 Hz tones (1 sec on, 1/2 second off, 1 second on, 1/2 second off, 1 second on) "May I have your attention please. May I have your attention please. A fire emergency has been reported in the building. Please leave the building by the nearest exit or exit stairway. Do not use the elevators." (Provide a 2 second pause.) "May I have your attention please, (repeat the message)." 3) 1000 Hz tones (1 sec on, 1/2 second off, 1 second on, 1/2 second off, 1 second on) "Alert! This is the Mass Notification System. There is an emergency situation. DO NOT evacuate the building! Stay in your current location! Stay tuned for further instructions." (repeat message 2 times) 4) 1000 Hz tones (1 sec on, 1/2 second off, 1 second on, 1/2 second off, 1 second on) "Alert, This is the Mass Notification System. There is a chemical gas emergency. Turn off all HVAC equipment, seal all doors and windows with wet fabric, Don protective gear. DO NOT evacuate the building, Act now! Listen to the MNS system for further instructions". (repeat message 2 times) 5) 1000 Hz tones (1 sec on, 1/2 second off, 1 second on, 1/2 second off, 1 second on) "Alert, this is the Mass Notification System. There is a explosive blast risk along the South wall of your building. Quietly move towards the north side of the building, and exit from the north stairs. Move away from the building heading north to the north parking area. (repeat message 2 times). a. The Remote Microphone station shall incorporate a Push-To-Talk (PTT) microphone, redundant controls and system status indicators of/for the system. The unit shall incorporate microphone override of any tone generation or prerecorded messages. The unit shall be fully supervised from the control panel. The housing shall contain a lock that is keyed identical to the fire alarm system for the building. b. Auxiliary Input Module shall be designed to be an outboard SECTION 28 31 76 Page 25
W912HN-12-R-0003
expansion module to either expand the number of optional remote microphone stations, or allow a telephone interface. c. Remote Microphone (PTT) microphone, and facility. The Public alarm or notification station (PA) shall incorporate a Push-To-Talk controls to allow Public Address paging in the Address paging function shall not override any functions. The microphone shall be desktop style.
2.14.6
Memory
Provide each control unit with non-volatile memory and logic for all functions. The use of long life batteries, capacitors, or other age-dependent devices shall not be considered as equal to non-volatile processors, PROMS, or EPROMS. 2.14.7 Field Programmability
Provide control units and control panels that are fully field programmable for control, initiation, notification, supervisory, and trouble functions of both input and output. The system program configuration shall be menu driven. System changes shall be password protected and shall be accomplished using personal computer based equipment. Any proprietary equipment and proprietary software needed by qualified technicians to implement future changes to the fire alarm system shall be provided as part of this contract. 2.14.8 Input/Output Modifications features that allow the bypassing of input devices modification of system outputs. These control of a panel mounted keypad and a keyboard. Any to the system shall indicate a trouble condition on
The FACP shall contain from the system or the features shall consist bypass or modification the FACP. 2.14.9 Resetting
Provide the necessary controls to prevent the resetting of any alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal while the alarm, supervisory or trouble condition on the system still exists. 2.14.10 Instructions
Provide a typeset printed or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a Lexan plastic or glass cover in a stainless steel or aluminum frame. Install the instructions on the interior of the FACP. The card shall show those steps to be taken by an operator when a signal is received as well as the functional operation of the system under all conditions, normal, alarm, supervisory, and trouble. The instructions shall be approved by the Contracting Officer before being posted. 2.14.11 Walk Test
The FACP shall have a walk test feature. When using this feature, operation of initiating devices shall result in limited system outputs, so that the notification appliances operate for only a few seconds and the event is indicated on the system printer, but no other outputs occur.
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 26
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.14.12
History Logging
In addition to the required printer output, the control panel shall have the ability to store a minimum of 400 events in a log. These events shall be stored in a battery-protected memory and shall remain in the memory until the memory is downloaded or cleared manually. Resetting of the control panel shall not clear the memory. 2.14.13 RS-232-C Output
Each local control panel shall be capable of operating remote service type cathode ray tubes (CRTs), printers, and/or modems. The output shall be paralleled ASCII from an EIA RS-232-C connection with a baud rate of 1200 or 2400 to allow use of any commonly available CRT, printer, or modem. 2.15 REMOTE FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNITS
Provide complete remote control units fully enclosed in a lockable steel enclosure as specified herein. Operations required for testing or for normal care and maintenance of the control units shall be performed from the front of the enclosure. If more than a single unit is required at a location to form a complete control panel, the unit enclosures shall match exactly. Each control unit shall provide power, supervision, control, and logic for its portion of the entire system, utilizing solid state, modular components, internally mounted and arranged for easy access. Each control unit shall be suitable for operation on a 120 volt, 60 hertz, normal building power supply. Provide each unit with supervisory functions for power failure, internal component placement, and operation. 2.15.1 Cabinet
Install remote control unit components in cabinets large enough to accommodate components and also to allow ample gutter space for interconnection of units as well as field wiring. The enclosure shall be identified by an engraved laminated phenolic resin nameplate. Lettering on the nameplate shall be labeled "Remote Fire Alarm Control Unit" and shall not be less than one inch high. Provide prominent rigid plastic or metal identification plates for lamps, circuits, meters, fuses, and switches. The cabinet shall be provided in a sturdy steel housing, complete with back box, hinged steel door with cylinder lock, and surface mounting provisions. 2.15.2 Control Modules
Provide power and control modules to perform all functions of the remote control unit. Provide audible signals to indicate any alarm or trouble condition. The alarm signals shall be different from the trouble signal. Connect circuit conductors entering or leaving the panel to screw-type terminals with each terminal marked for identification. Locate diodes and relays, if any, on screw terminals in the remote control unit. Circuits operating at 24 VDC shall not operate at less than 21.6 volts. Circuits operating at any other voltage shall not have a voltage drop exceeding 10 percent of nominal voltage. Circuits shall be arranged so that there is 25 percent spare capacity for any circuit. 2.15.3 Silencing Switches
Provide an alarm silencing switch at the remote control unit that shall silence the audible signal but not affect the visual alarm indicator. This switch shall be overridden upon activation of a subsequent alarm. Provide SECTION 28 31 76 Page 27
W912HN-12-R-0003
trouble and supervisory silencing switch that shall silence the audible trouble and supervisory signal, but not extinguish the visual indicator. This switch shall be overridden upon activation of a subsequent trouble or supervisory signal. Audible trouble indication must resound automatically every 24 hours after the silencing feature has been operated. 2.15.4 Non-Interfering
Power and supervise each circuit such that a signal from one device does not prevent the receipt of signals from any other device. Circuits shall be manually resettable by switch from the remote control unit after the initiating device or devices have been restored to normal. 2.15.5 Memory
Provide each control unit with non-volatile memory and logic for all functions. The use of long life batteries, capacitors, or other age-dependent devices shall not be considered as equal to non-volatile processors, PROMS, or EPROMS. 2.15.6 Field Programmability
Provide control units that are fully field programmable for control, initiating, supervisory, and trouble functions of both input and output. The system program configuration shall be menu driven. System changes shall be password protected and shall be accomplished using personal computer based equipment. Any proprietary equipment and proprietary software needed by qualified technicians to implement future changes to the fire alarm system shall be provided as part of this contract. 2.15.7 Input/Output Modifications
Each remote control unit shall contain features that allow the elimination of input devices from the system or the modification of system outputs. Any such modifications shall indicate a trouble condition on the remote control unit, the FACP, and a printed output of the trouble condition. 2.15.8 Resetting
Provide the necessary controls to prevent the resetting of any alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal while the alarm, supervisory, or trouble condition on the system still exists. 2.15.9 Instructions
Provide a typeset printed or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a Lexan plastic or glass cover in a stainless steel or aluminum frame. Install the frame in a conspicuous location observable from the remote fire alarm control unit. The card shall show those steps to be taken by an operator when a signal is received as well as the functional operation of the system under all conditions, normal, alarm, supervisory, and trouble. The instructions shall be approved by the Contracting Officer before being posted. 2.15.10 Walk Test
Each remote control unit shall have a walk test feature. When using this feature, operation of initiating devices shall result in limited system outputs, so that the notification appliances operate for only a few seconds SECTION 28 31 76 Page 28
W912HN-12-R-0003
and the event is indicated on the system printer, but no other outputs occur. 2.15.11 History Logging
In addition to the required printer output, the control panel shall have the ability to store a minimum of 400 events in a log. These events shall be stored in a battery-protected memory and shall remain in the memory until the memory is downloaded or cleared manually. Resetting of the control panel shall not clear the memory. 2.16 AMPLIFIERS, PREAMPLIFIERS, TONE GENERATORS
Any amplifiers, preamplifiers, tone generators, digitalized voice generators, and other hardware necessary for a complete, operational, textual audible circuit conforming to NFPA 72 shall be housed in a fire alarm control unit, terminal cabinet, or in the fire alarm control panel. The system shall automatically operate and control all building fire alarm speakers except those installed in the stairs and within elevator cabs. The speakers in the stairs and elevator cabs shall operate only when the microphone is used to deliver live messages. Each amplifier shall be single output channel. 2.16.1 Construction
Amplifiers shall utilize computer grade solid state components and shall be provided with output protection devices sufficient to protect the amplifier against any transient up to 10 times the highest rated voltage in the system. 2.16.2 Inputs
Each system shall be equipped with separate inputs from the tone generator, digitalized voice driver and panel mounted microphone. Microphone inputs shall be of the low impedance, balanced line type. Both microphone and tone generator input shall be operational on any amplifier. 2.16.3 Tone Generator
The tone generator shall be of the modular, plug-in type with securely attached labels to identify the component as a tone generator and to identify the specific tone it produces. The tone generator shall produce a slow whoop tone, that shall slowly ascend from low (500 hertz) to high (1200 hertz), and shall be constantly repeated until interrupted by either the digitalized voice message, the microphone input, or the alarm silence mode as specified. Each slow whoop cycle shall last approximately 4 seconds. The tone generator shall be single channel with an automatic backup generator per channel such that failure of the primary tone generator causes the backup generator to automatically take over the functions of the failed unit and also causes transfer of the common trouble relay. 2.16.4 Protection Circuits
Each amplifier shall be constantly supervised for any condition that could render the amplifier inoperable at its maximum output. Failure of any component shall cause automatic transfer to a designated backup amplifier, illumination of a visual "amplifier trouble" indicator on the control panel, appropriate logging of the condition on the system printer, and other actions for trouble conditions as specified. SECTION 28 31 76 Page 29
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.17 2.17.1
GRAPHIC ANNUNCIATOR Annunciator Panel
Provide an update of the existing graphic annunciator as required to indicate the building floor plan, including the locations of stairs and elevators. Stairs and elevators shall be identified by number. Alarm circuit boundaries shall be clearly marked on the floor plan. Annunciator shall include a north arrow, location of the fire alarm control panel, and a "you are here" indicator. The graphic annunciator shall be a minimum size of 3 by 3 feet. 2.17.2 Indicating Lights
Provide the graphic annunciator with individual light emitting diode (LED) indicating lights for each type of alarm and supervisory device. Provide an amber LED for indicating a system trouble condition and a separate amber LED for indicating a supervisory condition. Provide a green LED to indicate presence of power and a red LED to indicate an alarm condition. The actuation of any alarm signal shall cause the illumination of a boundary LED, a floor LED, and a device LED. System supervisory or trouble shall cause the illumination of a trouble LED. In addition to all of these LED indicators, provide normal power and emergency power indicating LEDs. Provide a push button LED test switch. The test switch shall not require key operation. Annunciator LEDs shall only be extinguished by operation of the system reset switch on the FACP. 2.17.3 Material
Construct the graphic annunciator face plate of smoked Plexiglas. The face plate shall be backlit with LEDs. Control equipment and wiring shall be housed in a semi-recessed back box. The exposed portions of the back box shall be chrome plated with knockouts. 2.17.4 Programming
Where programming for the operation of the proper LEDs is accomplished by a separate software program than the software for the FACP, the software program shall not require reprogramming after loss of power. The software shall be reprogrammable in the field. 2.18 SYSTEM PRINTERS a. Provide a system printer to record alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions without loss of any signal or signals. Printout shall be by circuit, device, and function as provided in the FACP. Printer shall operate on a 120 VAC, 60 Hz power supply. The printer shall have at least 40 characters per line and have a 96 ASCII character set. The printer shall have a microprocessor-controlled, bi-directional, logic seeking head capable of printing 120 characters per second. Printer shall not contain internal software that is essential for proper operation. b. When the FACP receives a signal, the alarm, supervisory, and trouble condition shall be printed. The printout shall include the type of signal, the circuit or device reporting, the date, and the time of the occurrence. The printer shall differentiate alarm signals from other printed indications. When the system is reset, this condition SECTION 28 31 76 Page 30
W912HN-12-R-0003
shall also be printed including the same information concerning device, location, date, and time. Provide a means to automatically print a list of existing alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions in the system. If a printer is off-line when an alarm is received, the system shall have a buffer to retain the data and it shall be printed when the printer is restored to service. The printer shall have an indicator to alert the operator that the paper has run out. 2.19 MANUAL STATIONS
Provide metal or plastic, semi-flush mounted, single action, addressable manual stations, that are not subject to operation by jarring or vibration. Stations shall be equipped with screw terminals for each conductor. Stations that require the replacement of any portion of the device after activation are not permitted. Stations shall be finished in fire-engine red with molded raised lettering operating instructions of contrasting color. The use of a key or wrench shall be required to reset the station. Manual stations shall be mounted at 48 inches. Stations shall have a separate screw terminal for each conductor. 2.20 2.20.1 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES Fire Alarm/Mass Notification Speakers
Audible appliances shall conform to the applicable requirements of UL 464. Appliances shall be connected into notification appliance circuits. Audible appliances shall generate a unique audible sound from other devices provided in the building and surrounding area. Surface mounted audible appliances shall be painted red. Recessed audible appliances shall be installed with a grill that is painted red. a. Speakers shall conform to the applicable requirements of UL 1480. Speakers shall have six different sound output levels and operate with audio line input levels of 100 Vac, 70 Vac, 7 Vac, and 25 Vac, by means of selectable tap settings. Tap settings shall include taps of 1/4, 1/2, 1, 2, and 8 watt. Speakers shall incorporate a high efficiency speaker for maximum output at minimum power across a frequency range of 400Hz to 4000Hz, and shall have a sealed back construction. Speakers shall be capable of installation on standard 4 inch square electrical boxes. Where speakers and strobes are provided in the same location, they may be combined into a single wall mounted unit. All inputs shall be polarized for compatibility with standard reverse polarity supervision of circuit wiring via the Fire Alarm Control Panel. b. Provide speaker mounting plates constructed of cold rolled steel having a minimum thickness of 16 gauge and equipped with mounting holes and other openings as needed for a complete installation. Fabrication marks and holes shall be ground and finished to provide a smooth and neat appearance for each plate. Each plate shall be primed and painted. 2.20.2 Visual Notification Appliances
Visual notification appliances shall conform to the applicable requirements of UL 1971 and conform to the Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA). Colored lens such as amber, the notifications appliances shall comply with UL 1638. The manufacturer shall have the color lens tests to the full UL 1971 polar plotting criteria, voltage drop, and temperature rise as stated in 1971. Fire Alarm/Mass Notification Appliances shall have amber high intensity optic lens, xenon flash tubes, and output white light and be SECTION 28 31 76 Page 31
W912HN-12-R-0003
marked "ALERT" in red letters. The light pattern shall be disbursed so that it is visible above and below the strobe and from a 90 degree angle on both sides of the strobe. Strobe flash rate shall be 1 flash per second and a minimum of 15 candela (actual output after derating for tinted lens) based on the UL 1971 test. Strobe shall be surface mounted. Where more than two appliances are located in the same room or corridor, provide synchronized operation. 2.20.3 Fire Alarm Horns
Provide surface mounted electronic multi-tone horns that produce a minimum of four distinct sounds, suitable for use in an electrically supervised circuit. Horns shall have a rating of 90 dBA at 10 feet when tested in accordance with UL 464 while emitting a slow whoop tone. Output from the horn shall be three-pulse temporal pattern. Where horns and strobes are provided in the same location, they may be combined into a single unit. Horns used in exterior locations shall be specifically listed or approved for outdoor use and be provided with metal housing and protective grilles. 2.20.4 Fire Alarm Bells
Bells shall be surface mounted with the matching mounting back box surface mounted suitable for use in an electrically supervised circuit. Bells shall be suitable for use in an electrically supervised circuit. Bells shall be the underdome type producing a minimum output rating of 90 dBA at 10 feet. Bells used in exterior locations shall be specifically listed or approved for outdoor use and be provided with metal housing and protective grilles. Single stroke, electrically operated, supervised, solenoid bells shall be used for coded applications. 2.20.5 Chimes
Chimes shall be electrically operated, supervised, electronic type, with an adjustable frequency of 800 to 1200 Hertz. Chimes shall have a minimum sound rating of 80 dBA at 10 feet. Chimes shall ring the bell codes, as indicated. 2.20.6 Connections
Provide screw terminals for each notification appliance. Terminals shall be designed to accept the size conductors used in this project without modification. 2.21 ENVIRONMENTAL ENCLOSURES OR GUARDS
Environmental enclosures shall be provided to permit Fire Alarm or Mass Notification components to be used in areas that exceed the environmental limits of the listing. The enclosure shall be listed for the device or appliance as either a manufactured part number or as a listed compatible accessory for the UL category that the component is currently listed. Guards required to deter mechanical damage shall be either a listed manufactured part or a listed accessory for the category of the initiating device or notification appliance. 2.22 VALVE MONITOR SWITCHES (TAMPER SWITCHES)
Provide a tamper switch for each fire protection system control valve. Tamper switches shall be UL listed as "Extinguishing System Attachment" for the location and type of valve supervised. The device shall contain double SECTION 28 31 76 Page 32
W912HN-12-R-0003
pole, double throw contacts. Operation of the switch shall cause a supervisory signal to be transmitted to the FACP upon not more than two complete turns of the valve wheel or a closure of 10 percent, whichever is less. Tamper switches shall be equipped with screw terminals for each conductor. 2.23 WATERFLOW DETECTORS a. Provide vane type waterflow detectors for wet pipe sprinkler systems. The device shall contain double pole, double throw contacts. Equip the detector with a pneumatic time delay, field adjustable from 0 to 90 seconds. The time delay shall be set initially to 30seconds. The device shall be a UL listed extinguishing system attachment rated for the particular pressure and location that it is installed. Flow switches shall be equipped with screw terminals for each conductor. b. Provide pressure type waterflow detectors for dry pipe sprinkler systems, pre-action, and deluge systems. Switch shall be equipped with equiped to provide a time delay from 0 to 90 second. The device shall contain double pole, double throw contacts. The device shall be a UL listed extinguishing system attachment rated for the particular pressure and location that it is installed. Switch shall be equipped with screw terminals for each conductor. 2.24 ELECTROMAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS
Where indicated on the drawings, provide magnetic fire door hold open devices. The electromagnetic holding devices shall be designed to operate on 120 VAC, and require not more than 3 watts of power to develop 25 psi of holding force. Under normal conditions, the magnets shall attract and hold the doors open. The initiation of any fire alarm shall cause the release of the electromagnetic door holding device permitting the door to be closed by the door closer. Operation shall be fail safe with no moving parts. Electromagnetic door hold-open devices shall not be required to be held open during building power failure. The device shall be UL listed based on UL 228 tests. 2.25 2.25.1 INTERFACE TO THE BASE WIDE MASS NOTIFICATION NETWORK Wide Area Network/Local Area Network (WAN/LAN)
The Wide Area Network/Local Area Network (WAN/LAN) Interface shall be a 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Category 6. The ANSI/TIA/EIA 568 wiring method of the RJ-45 outlet shall be as specified in Section 27 10 00 BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM. The WAN/LAN Interface shall support sensitive data at rated data transmission speeds with DES/3DES encryption, MD5 and SHA-1 hashing, RFC 2402 authentication and meet security features of FIPS 140-2 criteria. The WAN/LAN Interface shall have the following characteristics: a. b. 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX, autonegotiation WAN/LAN Connection: RJ-45
c. Cabling: as specified in Section 27 10 00 BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM d. Security Protocals: 168-bit 3DES, 56-bit DES, SHA-1, MD5, RFC 2402; up to 75 security associations SECTION 28 31 76 Page 33
W912HN-12-R-0003
e. 2.25.2
Network protocols: TCP/IP, ISO 8802-3 Fiber Optic
The fiber optic transceiver shall be fully compatible with EIA standards for RS-232, RS-422 and RS-485 at data rates from 0 (DC) to 2.1 mbps (200 kbps for RS-232) in the low speed mode or from 10 kbps to 10 mbps in the high-speed mode. The fiber optic transceiver shall be capable of simplex or full duplex asynchronous transmissions in both point-to-point systems and drop-and-repeat data networks. The fiber optic transceiver shall be user configurable for the protocol, speed and mode of operation required. The fiber optic transceiver shall be installed as a card-cage unit. The fiber optic transceiver shall operate on Multi-mode fiber optic cable. The fiber optic transceiver shall be supplied with ST or FCPC type optical connectors. Cabling: as specified in Section 27 10 00 BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM. 2.25.3 Radio
The radio transceiver shall be bi-direction and meet all the requirements of paragraph, RADIO TRANSMITTER AND INTERFACE PANELS as specified in this Specification Section. The transceiver utilized in the Mass Notification System shall be capable of the following: a. Communication with the Central Control/Monitoring System to provide supervision of communication link and status changes are reported by automatic and manual poll/reply/acknowledge routines. b. All monitored points/status changes are transmitted immediately and at programmed intervals until acknowledged by the Central Control/Monitoring System. c. Each transceiver shall transmits a unique identity code as part of all messages; the code is set by the user at the transceiver. 2.25.3.1 Radio Frequency Communications
Use of radio frequency-type communications systems shall comply with National Telecommunications and Information Administration (NTIA) requirements. 2.25.3.2 Licensed Radio Frequency Systems
An approved DD Form 1494 for the system is required prior to operation. 2.25.4 Telephone
A modem shall be provide for communication with the Central Control/Monitoring System. The modem shall be 56k, compatible with data mode V.90, utilizing Hayes compatible command codes. The modem shall be capable of Auto dialing a preset number based on preprogrammed events. The modem shall auto answer and provide a secure password protection system. Cabling: as specified in Section 27 10 00 BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM. 2.25.5 RS-232/RS-485
The panel shall support a direct connect via RS-232 or RS-485 connections. SECTION 28 31 76 Page 34
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.25.6 2.25.6.1
Secure Radio System Communications Network
The communications network provides two-way signals between central control units and autonomous control units (in individual building systems), and should include redundant (primary and backup) communication links. The system shall incorporate technology to prevent easy interruption of the radio traffic for MNS Alerting. 2.25.6.2 Radio Frequency Communications
Use of radio frequency-type communications systems shall comply with National Telecommunications and Information Administration (NTIA) requirements. The systems shall be designed to minimize the potential for interference, jamming, eavesdropping, and spoofing. 2.25.6.3 Licensed Radio Frequency Systems
An approved DD Form 1494 for the system is required prior to operation. 2.26 2.26.1 AUTOMATIC FIRE TRANSMITTERS Telegraphic Transmitter
Provide transmitter of the electric motor-driven or pre-wound spring mechanism type that shall transmit not less than four rounds of code. When motor-driven transmitters are provided, the motor shall be connected to a supervised circuit in a control panel. Provide metallic or rigid plastic code number plates on the exterior face of transmitters. Transmitters shall be designed to provide the same features as the fire alarm boxes for electrically supervised, coded positive noninterfering type and shall have the ability to transmit signals on grounded or open circuits. Activation of box when a single open fault is present on exterior fire alarm circuit shall have box to idle for one complete round only, then immediately transmit four complete code rounds via the box earth ground connection. Transmitter shall have a local energy type auxiliary tripping device. Code wheel shall be metallic and box code shall be as directed by the Contracting Officer. Wiring shall be extended to the indicated telephone terminating location for future connection by other. One new -pair shielded twisted-pair cable shall be extended to the Supervising Station and connected to existing terminating equipment. 2.26.2 Radio Transmitter and Interface Panels
Transmitters shall be compatible with proprietary supervising station receiving equipment. Each radio alarm transmitter shall be the manufacturer's recognized commercial product, completely assembled, wired, factory tested, and delivered ready for installation and operation. Transmitters shall be provided in accordance with applicable portions of NFPA 72, Federal Communications Commission (FCC) 47 CFR 90 and Federal Communications Commission (FCC) 47 CFR 15. Transmitter electronics module shall be contained within the physical housing as an integral, removable assembly. The proprietary supervising station receiving equipment is Monaco BT2-8 and the transceiver shall be fully compatible with this equipment. At the contractors option, and if UL or FM listed, the transmitter may be housed in the same panel as the fire alarm control panel. The transmitter shall be Narrowband radio, with FCC certification SECTION 28 31 76 Page 35
W912HN-12-R-0003
for narrowband operation and meets the requirements of the NTIA (National Telecommunications and Information Administration) Manual of Regulations and Procedures for Federal Frequency Management. a. Operation: Each transmitter shall operate from 120-volt ac power. In the event of 120-volt ac power loss, the transmitter shall automatically switch to battery operation. Switchover shall be accomplished with no interruption of protective service, and shall automatically transmit a trouble message. Upon restoration of ac power, transfer back to normal ac power supply shall also be automatic. b. Battery Power: Transmitter standby battery capacity shall provide sufficient power to operate the transmitter in a normal standby status for a minimum of 72 hours and be capable of transmitting alarms during that period. c. Transmitter housing shall be NEMA Type 1. The housing shall contain a lock that is keyed identical to the fire alarm system for the building. Radio alarm transmitter housing shall be factory painted with a suitable priming coat and not less than two coats of a hard, durable weatherproof enamel. d. Antenna shall be omnidirectional, coaxial, halfwave dipole antennas for radio alarm transmitters with a driving point impedance to match transmitter output. The antenna and antenna mounts shall be corrosion resistant and designed to withstand wind velocities of 161 km/h. 100 mph. Antennas shall not be mounted to any portion of the building roofing system. Protect the antenna from physical damage. 2.26.3 Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter (DACT)
Provide DACT that is compatible with the existing supervising station fire alarm system. Transmitter shall have a means to transmit alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions via a single transmitter. Transmitter shall have a source of power for operation that conforms to NFPA 72. Transmitter shall be capable of initiating a test signal daily at any selected time. Transmitter shall be arranged to seize telephone circuits in accordance with NFPA 72. 2.26.4 Master Fire Alarm Boxes
Master fire alarm boxes shall be of the coded, shunt noninterfering type with succession features having a shunt type auxiliary tripping device, and of the prewound, open-door, pull-lever type. Mechanism shall be housed in a weatherproof cottage shell type of housing with metallic or rigid plastic code number plate mounted on the exterior face of the cottage shell. Operation of the actuating pull lever shall cause the box to transmit four complete rounds of code to gongs, recorders, and other devices on the same circuit. Driving springs shall have the capability to transmit not less than eight complete four-round groups of code before being rewound. Boxes shall be designed for operation of 100 milliamperes dc, but with capability of full operation of 70 milliamperes and up to 120 milliamperes. Activation of box when a single open fault is present on exterior fire alarm circuit shall have box to idle for one complete round only, then immediately transmit four complete code rounds via the box earth ground connection. Each box shall be equipped with manual signaling key, telephone jack, silent test device, and box shunt device. Box shall be wall-mounted with center of box48 inches above grade, and provided with lighting fixture. Mounting bolts, brackets, fastenings, and conduit shall SECTION 28 31 76 Page 36
W912HN-12-R-0003
be copper alloy, metallic and box fire alarm boxes for a minimum of period. 2.26.5
cadmium, or zinc-coated steel. Code wheel shall be code shall be as directed. Electrically powered master shall have standby sealed, lead calcium battery capacity 72 hours and be capable of transmitting alarms during that
Signals to Be Transmitted to the Base Receiving Station
The following signals shall be sent to the base receiving station: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. Sprinkler water flow Manual pull stations Smoke detectors Duct smoke detectors Sleeping room smoke detectors Heat detectors Fire Extinguishing System Sprinkler valve supervision Fire pump running Fire pump supervision Water supply level and temperature Combustion Engine Drive Fire Pump Running (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) 2.27 WIRING Selector Switch in position than automatic Engine Over-speed Low Fuel Low Battery Engine Trouble (Low Oil, Over temp, etc)
Provide wiring materials under this section as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM with the additions and modifications specified herein. 2.27.1 Alarm Wiring
The SLC wiring shall be fiber optic or copper cable in accordance with the manufacturers requirements. Copper signaling line circuits and initiating device circuit field wiring shall be No. 14 AWG size conductors at a minimum. Notification appliance circuit conductors, that contain audible alarm devices, other than speakers, shall be solid copper No. 14 AWG size conductors at a minimum. Speaker circuits shall be copper No. 16 AWG size conductors at a minimum. Wire size shall be sufficient to prevent voltage SECTION 28 31 76 Page 37
W912HN-12-R-0003
drop problems. Circuits operating at 24 VDC shall not operate at less than 21.6 volts. Circuits operating at any other voltage shall not have a voltage drop exceeding 10 percent of nominal voltage. Power wiring, operating at 120 VAC minimum, shall be a minimum No. 12 AWG solid copper having similar insulation. 2.27.2 Wiring to Station Telegraphic Fire Alarm Circuit
Wiring from the master fire alarm box to the station telegraphic fire alarm circuit shall be a two-conductor No. 12 AWG type UF cable in conduit. PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION INSTALLATION OF FIRE ALARM INITIATING AND INDICATING DEVICES a. FACP/FMCP: Locate the FACP/FMCP where indicated on the drawings. Surface mount the enclosure with the top of the cabinet 6 feet above the finished floor or center the cabinet at 5 feet, whichever is lower. Conductor terminations shall be labeled and a drawing containing conductors, their labels, their circuits, and their interconnection shall be permanently mounted in the FACP. b. Manual Stations: Locate manual stations as required by NFPA 101 IEC 60268, Part 16, and ASA S3.2 and NFPA 72. Mount stations so that their operating handles are 4 feet above the finished floor. Mount stations so they are located no farther than 5 feet from the exit door they serve, measured horizontally. c. Notification Appliance Devices: Locate notification appliance devices as required by NFPA 72. Mount assemblies on walls 90 inches above the finished floor or 6 inches below the ceiling whichever is lower. . d. Smoke and Heat Sensors: Locate sensors as required by NFPA 72 and their listings on a 4 inch mounting box. Sensors located on the ceiling shall be installed not less than 4 inches from a side wall to the near edge. Those located on the wall shall have the top of the sensor at least 4 inches below the ceiling, but not more than 12 inches below the ceiling. In raised floor spaces, the smoke sensors shall be installed to protect 225 square feet per sensor. Install smoke sensors no closer than 5 feet from air handling supply outlets. e. Graphic Annunciator: Locate the graphic annunciator as shown on the drawings. Surface mount the panel, with the top of the panel 6 feet above the finished floor or center the panel at 5 feet, whichever is lower. f. Water Flow Detectors and Tamper Switches: Locate water flow detectors and tamper switches at each supervised sprinkler valve station. g. Firefighter Telephones: Locate wall mounted in each stair at each floor landing, in each elevator lobby, and in each elevator cab 4 feet above the finished floor. h. The modification of any fire alarm system and the procedures shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 241.
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 38
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.2 3.2.1
SYSTEM FIELD WIRING Wiring within Cabinets, Enclosures, and Boxes
Provide wiring installed in a neat and workmanlike manner and installed parallel with or at right angles to the sides and back of any box, enclosure, or cabinet. Conductors that are terminated, spliced, or otherwise interrupted in any enclosure, cabinet, mounting, or junction box shall be connected to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal in accordance with the wiring diagrams of the system. Make connections with approved pressure type terminal blocks, that are securely mounted. The use of wire nuts or similar devices shall be prohibited. Wiring shall conform to NFPA 70. 3.2.2 Terminal Cabinets
Provide a terminal cabinet at the base of any circuit riser, on each floor at each riser, and where indicated on the drawings. Terminal size shall be appropriate for the size of the wiring to be connected. Conductor terminations shall be labeled and a drawing containing conductors, their labels, their circuits, and their interconnection shall be permanently mounted in the terminal cabinet. Minimum size is 8 inches by 8 inches. 3.2.3 Alarm Wiring
Provide all wiring in rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit. Voltages shall not be mixed in any junction box, housing, or device, except those containing power supplies and control relays. Electrical metallic tubing conduit is acceptable in dry locations not enclosed in concrete or where not subject to mechanical damage. Conceal conduit in finished areas of new construction and wherever practicable in existing construction. The use of flexible conduit not exceeding a 6 foot length shall be permitted in initiating device circuits. Run conduit or tubing concealed unless specifically shown otherwise on the drawings. Shielded wiring shall be utilized where recommended by the manufacturer. For shielded wiring, the shield shall be grounded at only one point, that shall be in or adjacent to the FACP. Pigtail or T-tap connections to signal line circuits, initiating device circuits, supervisory alarm circuits, and notification appliance circuits are prohibited. Color coding is required for circuits and shall be maintained throughout the circuit. Conductors used for the same functions shall be similarly color coded. Wiring shall conform to NFPA 70. 3.2.4 Conductor Terminations
Labeling of conductors at terminal blocks in terminal cabinets, FACP, and remote fire alarm control units shall be provided at each conductor connection. Each conductor or cable shall have a shrink-wrap label to provide a unique and specific designation. Each terminal cabinet, FACP, and fire alarm control unit shall contain a laminated drawing that indicates each conductor, its label, circuit, and terminal. The laminated drawing shall be neat, using 12 point lettering minimum size, and mounted within each cabinet, panel, or unit so that it does not interfere with the wiring or terminals. Maintain existing color code scheme where connecting to existing equipment. 3.3 DISCONNECTION AND REMOVAL OF EXISTING SYSTEM
Existing fire alarm equipment shall be maintained fully operational until the new equipment has been tested and accepted by the Contracting Officer. SECTION 28 31 76 Page 39
W912HN-12-R-0003
As new equipment is installed, it shall be labeled "NOT IN SERVICE" until the new equipment is accepted. Once the new system is completed, tested, and accepted by the Government, it shall be placed in service and connected to the station fire alarm system. New equipment shall have tags removed and the existing equipment shall be tagged "NOT IN SERVICE" until removed from the building. a. After acceptance of the new system by the Contracting Officer, existing equipment not connected to the new system shall be removed, unused exposed conduit shall be removed, and damaged surfaces shall be restored. The material shall be removed from the site and disposed of by the Contractor. b. Disconnect and remove the existing fire alarm and smoke detection systems where indicated and elsewhere in the specification. c. Fire alarm control panels and fire alarm devices disconnected and removed shall be turned over to the Contracting Officer. d. Properly dispose of fire alarm outlet and junction boxes, wiring, conduit, supports, and other such items. 3.4 CONNECTION OF NEW SYSTEM
The following new system connections shall be made during the last phase of construction, at the beginning of the preliminary tests. New system connections shall include: a. Connection of new control modules to existing magnetically held smoke door (hold-open) devices. b. Connection of new elevator recall smoke sensors to existing wiring and conduit. c. Connection of new system transmitter to existing base fire reporting system. Once these connections are made, system shall be left energized and new audio/visual devices deactivated. Report immediately to the Contracting Officer, coordination and field problems resulting from the connection of the above components. 3.5 FIRESTOPPING
Provide firestopping for holes at conduit penetrations through floor slabs, fire rated walls, partitions with fire rated doors, corridor walls, and vertical service shafts in accordance with Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING. 3.6 PAINTING
Paint exposed electrical, fire alarm conduit, and surface metal raceway to match adjacent finishes in exposed areas. Paint junction boxesconduit and surface metal raceways red in unfinished areas. Painting shall comply with Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS.
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 40
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.7 3.7.1
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Testing Procedures
Detailed test procedures, prepared and signed by a Registered Professional Engineer or a NICET Level 3 Fire Alarm Technician, and signed by representative of the installing company, for the fire detection and alarm system 60 days prior to performing system tests. Detailed test procedures shall list all components of the installed system such as initiating devices and circuits, notification appliances and circuits, signaling line devices and circuits, control devices/equipment, batteries, transmitting and receiving equipment, power sources/supply, annunciators, special hazard equipment, emergency communication equipment, interface equipment, Guard's Tour equipment, and transient (surge) suppressors. Test procedures shall include sequence of testing, time estimate for each test, and sample test data forms. The test data forms shall be in a check-off format (pass/fail with space to add applicable test data) and shall be used for the preliminary testing and the acceptance testing. The test data forms shall record the test results and shall: a. Identify the NFPA Class and Style of all Initiating Device Circuits (IDC), Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC), Voice Notification System, and Signaling Line Circuits (SLC). b. Identify each test required by NFPA 72 Test Methods and required test herein to be performed on each component, and describe how this test shall be performed. c. Identify each component and circuit as to type, location within the facility, and unique identity within the installed system. Provide necessary floor plan sheets showing each component location, test location, and alphanumeric identity. d. Identify all test equipment and personnel required to perform each test (including equipment necessary for testing smoke detectors using real smoke). e. Provide space to identify the date and time of each test. space to identify the names and signatures of the individuals conducting and witnessing each test. 3.7.2 Tests Stages a. Preliminary Testing: Conduct preliminary tests to ensure that devices and circuits are functioning properly. Tests shall meet the requirements of paragraph entitled "Minimum System Tests." After preliminary testing is complete, provide a letter certifying that the installation is complete and fully operable. The letter shall state that each initiating and indicating device was tested in place and functioned properly. The letter shall also state that panel functions were tested and operated properly. The letter shall include the names and titles of the witnesses to the preliminary tests. The Contractor and an authorized representative from each supplier of equipment shall be in attendance at the preliminary testing to make necessary adjustments. b. Request for Formal Inspection and Tests: When tests have been completed and corrections made, submit a signed, dated certificate with a request for formal inspection and tests to the Contracting Offices SECTION 28 31 76 Page 41 Provide
W912HN-12-R-0003
Designated Representative (COR). c. Final Testing: Notify the Contracting Officer in writing when the system is ready for final acceptance testing. Submit request for test at least 15 calendar days prior to the test date. The tests shall be performed in accordance with the approved test procedures in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Furnish instruments and personnel required for the tests. A final acceptance test will not be scheduled until the operation and maintenance (O&M) manuals are furnished to the Contracting Officer and the following are provided at the job site: (1) The systems manufacturer's technical representative
(2) Marked-up red line drawings of the system as actually installed (3) (4) (5) Megger test results Loop resistance test results Complete program printout including input/output addresses
The final tests shall be witnessed by the Contracting Offices Designated Representative (COR). At this time, any and all required tests shall be repeated at their discretion. Following acceptance of the system, as-built drawings and O&M manuals shall be delivered to the Contracting Officer for review and acceptance. In existing buildings, the transfer of devices from the existing system to the new system and the permission to begin demolition of the old fire alarm system will not be permitted until the as-built drawings and O&M manuals are received. 3.7.3 Minimum System Tests
Test the system in accordance with the procedures outlined in NFPA 72, ISO 7240-16, IEC 60268-16. The required tests are as follows: a. Megger Tests: After wiring has been installed, and prior to making any connections to panels or devices, wiring shall be megger tested for insulation resistance, grounds, and/or shorts. Conductors with 300 volt rated insulation shall be tested at a minimum of 250 VDC. Conductors with 600 volt rated insulation shall be tested at a minimum of 500 VDC. The tests shall be witnessed by the Contracting Officer and test results recorded for use at the final acceptance test. b. Loop Resistance Tests: Measure and record the resistance of each circuit with each pair of conductors in the circuit short-circuited at the farthest point from the circuit origin. The tests shall be witnessed by the Contracting Officer and test results recorded for use at the final acceptance test. c. Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and ground. The tests shall be accomplished at the preliminary test with results available at the final system test. d. Verify that the control unit is in the normal condition as detailed in the manufacturer's O&M manual. e. Test each initiating and indicating device and circuit for proper operation and response at the control unit. Smoke sensors shall be SECTION 28 31 76 Page 42
W912HN-12-R-0003
tested in accordance with manufacturer's recommended calibrated test method. Use of magnets is prohibited. Testing of duct smoke detectors shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 72. f. Test the system for specified functions in accordance with the contract drawings and specifications and the manufacturer's O&M manual. g. Test both primary power and secondary power. Verify, by test, the secondary power system is capable of operating the system for the time period and in the manner specified. h. Determine that the system is operable under trouble conditions as specified. i. j. Visually inspect wiring. Test the battery charger and batteries.
k. Verify that software control and data files have been entered or programmed into the FACP. Hard copy records of the software shall be provided to the Contracting Officer. l. Verify that red-line drawings are accurate.
m. Measure the current in circuits to ensure there is the calculated spare capacity for the circuits. n. Measure voltage readings for circuits to ensure that voltage drop is not excessive. o. Disconnect the verification feature for smoke sensors during tests to minimize the amount of smoke needed to activate the sensor. Testing of smoke sensors shall be conducted using real smoke. The use of canned smoke is prohibited. p. Measure the voltage drop at the most remote appliance (based on wire length) on each notification appliance circuit. q. Audibility Intelligibility testing of the Voice Evacuation Notification System shall be accomplished iaw NFPA 72 for Voice Evacuation Systems, IEC 60268-16, and ASA S3.2. r. Opening the circuit at not less than all alarm initiating devices and notification appliances to test the wiring supervisory feature. s. Demonstrate modem communications with remote sites as specified by the COR. Dial in capability shall also, be demonstrated, using specified security. t. Demonstrate fiber optic communications with remote sites as specified by the COR. Dial in capability shall also, be demonstrated, using specified security. 3.8 INSTRUCTION OF GOVERNMENT EMPLOYEES
Equipment manufacturer shall provide 1 days on site and 5 days of technical training to the Government at the manufacturing facility. Training shall allow for classroom instruction as well as individual hands on programming, troubleshooting and diagnostics exercises. Room and board costs shall be SECTION 28 31 76 Page 43
W912HN-12-R-0003
included for two Government personnel. months of system acceptance. 3.8.1 Instructor
training shall occur within 6
Include in the project the services of an instructor, who has received specific training from the manufacturer for the training of other persons regarding the inspection, testing, and maintenance of the system provided. The instructor shall train the Government employees designated by the Contracting Officer, in the care, adjustment, maintenance, and operation of the fire alarm and fire detection system. Each instructor shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of this installation. The instructor shall be trained in operating theory as well as in practical O&M work. 3.8.2 Required Instruction Time
Provide 8 hours of instruction after final acceptance of the system. The instruction shall be given during regular working hours on such dates and times as are selected by the Contracting Officer. The instruction may be divided into two or more periods at the discretion of the Contracting Officer. The training shall allow for rescheduling for unforeseen maintenance and/or fire department responses. 3.8.3 Technical Data and Computer Software
Provide, in manual format, lesson plans, operating instructions, maintenance procedures, and training data for the training courses. The operations training shall familiarize designated government personnel with proper operation of the installed system. The maintenance training course shall provide the designated government personnel adequate knowledge required to diagnose, repair, maintain, and expand functions inherent to the system. -- End of Section --
SECTION 28 31 76
Page 44
Winn Army Community Hospital Revised in accordance with Amendment 005 FY 12-PN-72292- ADD/ALT Winn Army Community Hospital April 13th 2012 SECTION 31 00 00 EARTHWORK 08/08 PART 1 1.1 GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM C 33/C 33M (2008) Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates (2000; R 2006) Amount of Material in Soils Finer than the No. 200 (75-micrometer) Sieve (2007) Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method (2009) Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3) (2700 kN-m/m3) (2010) Laboratory Determination of Water (Moisture) Content of Soil and Rock by Mass (1968; R 2006) Permeability of Granular Soils (Constant Head) (2006) Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System) (1963; R 2007) Particle-Size Analysis of Soils (2010) Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils (2010) Density of Soil in Place by the Drive-Cylinder Method
ASTM D 1140
ASTM D 1556
ASTM D 1557
ASTM D 2216
ASTM D 2434
ASTM D 2487
ASTM D 422
ASTM D 4318
ASTM D2937
1.2 1.2.1
DEFINITIONS Satisfactory Materials
1.2.1.1 Earthwork, Roadwork, and Utilities Systems (except beneath buildings) Satisfactory materials shall comprise any materials classified by ASTM D 2487 as GW, GP, GM, GP-GM, GW-GM, GC, GP-GC, GM-GC, SW, SP, SM, SW-SM, SC, SW-SC, SP-SM, SP-SC, CL, ML, and CL-ML. Satisfactory materials for grading shall be free from roots and other organic matter, trash, SECTION 31 00 00 Page 1
Winn Army Community Hospital Revised in accordance with Amendment 005 FY 12-PN-72292- ADD/ALT Winn Army Community Hospital April 13th 2012 debris, frozen material, and stones larger than 3 inches in any dimension. 1.2.1.2 Beneath Buildings
a. Natural Insitu Soil: Satisfactory materials for natural insitu soil supporting building foundations and/or slabs shall be limited to materials classified in ASTM D 2487 as GW, GP, GM, GP-GM, GW-GM, GC, GP-GC, GM-GC, SW, SP, SM, SW-SM, SC, SW-SC, SP-SM, SP-SC, CL, ML, CL-ML, CH, MH, and shall be free of trash, debris, roots or other organic matter, frozen material, and stones larger than 3 inches in any dimension. b. Foundation Fill or Backfill: Satisfactory materials for fill or backfill supporting building foundations and/or slabs shall be limited to materials classified in ASTM D 2487 as GW, GP, GM, GP-GM, GW-GM, GC, GP-GC, GM-GC, SW, SP, SM, SW-SM, SC, SW-SC, SP-SM, SP-SC, CL, ML, CL-ML, and shall be free of trash, debris, roots or other organic matter, frozen material, and stones larger than 3 inches in any dimension. c. Fill or Backfill backfill adjacent to materials classified and shall be free of material, and stones 1.2.2 Adjacent to Walls: Satisfactory materials for fill or walls shall be limited to cohesionless, free draining in ASTM D 2487 as GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, SM, and SP-SM, trash, debris, roots or other organic matter, frozen larger than 3 inches in any dimension.
Unsatisfactory Materials
1.2.2.1 Earthwork, Roadwork, and Utilities Systems (except beneath buildings) Materials which do not comply with the requirements for satisfactory materials are unsatisfactory. Unsatisfactory materials also include man-made fills; trash; refuse; backfills from previous construction; demolition debris; and material classified as satisfactory which contains root and other organic matter or frozen material. The Contracting Officer shall be notified of any contaminated materials. 1.2.2.2 Beneath Buildings
a. Natural In Situ Soil: Satisfactory materials for natural in situ soil supporting building foundations and/or slabs shall be limited to materials classified in ASTM D 2487 as GW, GP, GM, GP-GM, GW-GM, GC, GP-GC, GM-GC, SW, SP, SM, SW-SM, SC, SW-SC, SP-SM, SP-SC, CL, ML, CL-ML, CH, MH, and shall be free of trash, debris, roots or other organic matter, frozen material, and stones larger than 3 inches in any dimension. b. Foundation Fill or Backfill: Satisfactory materials for fill or backfill supporting building foundations and/or slabs shall be limited to materials classified in ASTM D 2487 as GW, GP, GM, GP-GM, GW-GM, GC, GP-GC, GM-GC, SW, SP, SM, SW-SM, SC, SW-SC, SP-SM, SP-SC, CL, ML, CL-ML, and shall be free of trash, debris, roots or other organic matter, frozen material, and stones larger than 3 inches in any dimension. c. Fill or Backfill Adjacent to Walls: Satisfactory materials for fill or backfill adjacent to walls shall be limited to cohesionless, free draining materials classified in ASTM D 2487 as GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, SM, SP-SM, and shall be free of trash, debris, roots or other organic matter, frozen material, and stones larger than 3 inches in any dimension. d. Wet of Soft Materials: Materials determined by the Contracting Officer Page 2
SECTION 31 00 00
Winn Army Community Hospital Revised in accordance with Amendment 005 FY 12-PN-72292- ADD/ALT Winn Army Community Hospital April 13th 2012 as too wet or too soft to provide a stable sub-grade, foundation, or fill will be classified as unsatisfactory regardless of classification. However, if such materials do meet the appropriate ASTM D 2487 classification, the Contractor shall at no additional cost to the Government, recondition the materials. 1.2.3 Cohesionless and Cohesive Materials
Cohesionless materials include materials classified in ASTM D 2487 as GW, GP, SW, and SP. Cohesive materials include materials classified as GC, SC, ML, CL, MH, and CH. Materials classified as GM and SM will be identified as cohesionless only when the fines are non-plastic. Perform testing, required for classifying materials, in accordance with ASTM D 4318, ASTM C 136, ASTM D 422, and ASTM D 1140. 1.2.4 Degree of Compaction
Degree of compaction required, except as noted in the second sentence, is expressed as a percentage of the maximum density obtained by the test procedure presented in ASTM D 1557 abbreviated as a percent of laboratory maximum density. Since ASTM D 1557 applies only to soils that have 30 percent or less by weight of their particles retained on the 3/4 inch sieve, express the degree of compaction for material having more than 30 percent by weight of their particles retained on the 3/4 inch sieve as a percentage of the maximum density in accordance with AASHTO T 180 and corrected with AASHTO T 224. To maintain the same percentage of coarse material, use the "remove and replace" procedure as described in NOTE 8 of Paragraph 7.2 in AASHTO T 180. 1.2.5 Topsoil
Material suitable for top-soils obtained from offsite areas and/or onsite excavations is defined as: Natural, friable soil representative of productive, well-drained soils in the area, free of subsoil, stumps, rocks larger than one inch diameter, brush, weeds, toxic substances, and other material detrimental to plant growth. Amend topsoil pH range to obtain a pH of 5.5 to 7. 1.2.6 Unstable Material
Unstable material shall consist of materials too wet to properly support the utility pipe, conduit, or appurtenant structure. 1.2.7 1.2.7.1 Select Granular Material General Requirements
Select granular material shall consist of materials classified as GW, GP, SW, Sp, or SpP-SM by ASTM D 4318 The plasticity index must not be greater than 12 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318, and not more than 35 percent by weight may be finer than No. 200 sieve when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1140. Provide a minimum coefficient of permeability of 0.002 feet per minute when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2434. Select granular material consist of materials classified as GW, GP, SW, SP, by ASTM D 2487 where indicated. The liquid limit of such material must not exceed 35 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318. The plasticity index must not be greater than 12 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318, and not more than 35 percent by weight may be SECTION 31 00 00 Page 3
Winn Army Community Hospital Revised in accordance with Amendment 005 FY 12-PN-72292- ADD/ALT Winn Army Community Hospital April 13th 2012 finer than No. 200 sieve when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1140. Provide a minimum coefficient of permeability of 0.002 feet per minute when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2434. 1.2.7.2 Initial Backfill Material
Initial backfill consists of select granular material or satisfactory materials free from rocks 3 inches or larger in any dimension or free from rocks of such size as recommended by the pipe manufacturer, whichever is smaller. When the pipe is coated or wrapped for corrosion protection, free the initial backfill material of stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension or as recommended by the pipe manufacturer, whichever is smaller. 1.2.7.3 Maximum Dry Density
The maximum dry density is expressed as the maximum density obtained when the soil is compacted in accordance with ASTM D 1557, abbreviated as laboratory maximum dry density. 1.2.8 Optimum Moisture Content
The optimum moisture content is the moisture content corresponding to the maximum dry density obtained by the test procedure presented in ASTM D 1557. 1.2.9 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Subsurface soil boring logs and soil laboratory test data are shown on the drawings. The subsoil investigation report may be examined upon request. The water level data indicates only the conditions at the time(s) the information was obtained and may not include variations such as those caused by periods of drought or increased rain fall or seasonal fluctuations. These data represent the best subsurface information available; however, variations may exist in the surface between boring locations. 1.2.10 Common Excavation
Include common excavation with the satisfactory removal and disposal of all materials not classified as rock excavation.
1.2.11
Dewatering Work Plan
Submit procedures for accomplishing dewatering work, as specified in paragraph 3.2.4.2. 1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only or as otherwise designated. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Shoring; G, RE
SECTION 31 00 00
Page 4
Winn Army Community Hospital Revised in accordance with Amendment 005 FY 12-PN-72292- ADD/ALT Winn Army Community Hospital April 13th 2012 Dewatering Work Plan; G, RE Submit 45 days prior to starting work. SD-03 Product Data Utilization of excavated Materials; G, RE Opening of any Excavation or borrow Pit; G, RE Procedure and location for disposal of unused satisfactory material. Proposed source of borrow material. Advance notice on the opening of excavation or borrow areas. Advance notice on shoulder construction for rigid pavements. SD-04 Samples Tracer Wire; G, RE Sample of tracer wire, including manufacturer's descriptive technical literature, specifications, and installation instructions. Sample and information shall be submitted at least 60 days prior to the initial installation of any tracer wire. SD-06 Test Reports Testing; G, RE Borrow site testing; G, RE Within 24 hours of conclusion of physical tests, two copies of test results, including calibration curves and results of calibration tests,. Results of testing at the borrow site. SD-07 Certificates Certificates of compliance indicating conformance with specified requirements shall be furnished for capillary water barrier materials. Testing; G, RE Qualifications of the Corps validated commercial testing laboratory or the Contractor's validated testing facilities. PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS REQUIREMENTS FOR OFFSITE SOILS
Test offsite soils brought in for use as backfill for Total Petroleum Hydrocarbons (TPH), Benzene, Toluene, Ethyl Benzene, and Xylene (BTEX) and full Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) including ignitability, corrosivity and reactivity. Backfill shall contain a maximum of 100 parts per million (ppm) of total petroleum hydrocarbons (TPH) and a maximum of 10 ppm of the sum of Benzene, Toluene, Ethyl Benzene, and Xylene (BTEX) and shall pass the TCPL test. Determine TPH concentrations by using EPA 600/4-79/020 Method 418.1. Determine BTEX concentrations by using EPA SW-846.3-3 Method 5030/8020. Perform TCLP in accordance with EPA SW-846.3-3 Method 1311. Provide Borrow Site Testing for TPH, BTEX and TCLP from a composite sample of material from the borrow site, with at least one SECTION 31 00 00 Page 5
Winn Army Community Hospital Revised in accordance with Amendment 005 FY 12-PN-72292- ADD/ALT Winn Army Community Hospital April 13th 2012 test from each borrow site. Do not bring material onsite until tests have been approved by the Contracting Officer. 2.2 BURIED WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE
Provide Polyethylene plastic and metallic core or metallic-faced, acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene plastic warning tape manufactured specifically for warning and identification of buried utility lines. Provide tape on rolls, 3-inch minimum width, color coded as specified below for the intended utility with warning and identification imprinted in bold black letters continuously over the entire tape length. Warning and identification to read, "CAUTION, BURIED (intended service) LINE BELOW" or similar wording. Provide color and printing shall be permanent, unaffected by moisture or soil. Warning Tape Color Codes Red: Electric Yellow: Gas, Oil; Dangerous Materials Orange: Telephone and Other Communications Blue: Water Systems Green: Sewer Systems White: Steam Systems Gray: Compressed Air 2.2.1 Warning Tape for Metallic Piping
Provide acid and alkali-resistant polyethylene plastic tape conforming to the width, color, and printing requirements specified above, with a minimum thickness of 0.003 inch and a minimum strength of 1500 psi lengthwise, and 1250 psi crosswise, with a maximum 350 percent elongation. 2.2.2 Detectable Warning Tape for Non-Metallic Piping
Provide polyethylene plastic tape conforming to the width, color, and printing requirements specified above, with a minimum thickness of 0.004 inch, and a minimum strength of 1500 psi lengthwise and 1250 psi crosswise. Manufacture tape with integral wires, foil backing, or other means of enabling detection by a metal detector when tape is buried up to 3 feet deep. Encase metallic element of the tape in a protective jacket or provide with other means of corrosion protection. 2.3 DETECTION WIRE FOR NON-METALLIC PIPING
Insulate a single strand, solid copper detection wire with a minimum of 12 AWG. 2.4 MATERIAL FOR RIP-RAP
Provide bedding material, filter fabric and rock conforming requirements. 2.5 CAPILLARY WATER BARRIER
Provide capillary water barrier of clean, poorly graded crushed rock, crushed gravel, or uncrushed gravel placed beneath a building slab with or without a vapor barrier to cut off the capillary flow of pore water to the area immediately below. Conform to ASTM C 33/C 33M for fine aggregate grading with a maximum of 3 percent by weight passing ASTM D 1140, No. 200 sieve, or coarse aggregate Size 57, 67, or 77. SECTION 31 00 00 Page 6
Winn Army Community Hospital Revised in accordance with Amendment 005 FY 12-PN-72292- ADD/ALT Winn Army Community Hospital April 13th 2012
PART 3 3.1
EXECUTION STRIPPING OF TOPSOIL
Where indicated or directed, strip topsoil to full depth to topsoil shall be spread topsoil on areas already graded and prepared for topsoil, or transported and deposited in stockpiles convenient to areas that are to receive application of the topsoil later, or at locations indicated or specified. Keep topsoil separate from other excavated materials, brush, litter, objectionable weeds, roots, stones larger than 2 inches in diameter, and other materials that would interfere with planting and maintenance operations. Remove any surplus of topsoil from excavations and gradings from the site. 3.2 GENERAL EXCAVATION
Perform excavation of every type of material encountered within the limits of the project to the lines, grades, and elevations indicated and as specified. Perform the grading in accordance with the typical sections shown and the tolerances specified in paragraph FINISHING. Transport satisfactory excavated materials and place in fill or embankment within the limits of the work. Excavate unsatisfactory materials encountered within the limits of the work below grade and replace with satisfactory materials as directed. Include such excavated material and the satisfactory material ordered as replacement in excavation. Dispose surplus satisfactory excavated material not required for fill or embankment in areas approved for surplus material storage or designated waste areas. Dispose unsatisfactory excavated material in designated waste or spoil areas. During construction, perform excavation and fill in a manner and sequence that will provide proper drainage at all times. Excavate material required for fill or embankment in excess of that produced by excavation within the grading limits from the borrow areas indicated or from other approved areas selected by the Contractor as specified. 3.2.1 Ditches, Gutters, and Channel Changes
Finish excavation of ditches, gutters, and channel changes by cutting accurately to the cross sections, grades, and elevations shown on appropriate drawing Sheet sheets. Do not excavate ditches and gutters below grades shown. Backfill the excessive open ditch or gutter excavation with satisfactory, thoroughly compacted, material. Dispose of excavated material as shown or as directed, except in no case allow material be deposited a maximum within 4 feet from of the edge of a ditch. Maintain excavations free from detrimental quantities of leaves, brush, sticks, trash, and other debris until final acceptance of the work. 3.2.2 Drainage Structures
Make excavations to the lines, grades, and elevations shown, or as directed. Provide trenches and foundation pits of sufficient size to permit the placement and removal of forms for the full length and width of structure footings and foundations as shown. Clean rock or other hard foundation material of loose debris and cut to a firm, level, stepped, or serrated surface. Remove loose disintegrated rock and thin strata. Do not disturb the bottom of the excavation when concrete or masonry is to be placed in an excavated area. Do not excavate to the final grade level until just before the concrete or masonry is to be placed.
SECTION 31 00 00
Page 7
Winn Army Community Hospital Revised in accordance with Amendment 005 FY 12-PN-72292- ADD/ALT Winn Army Community Hospital April 13th 2012 3.2.3 Drainage
Provide for the collection and disposal of surface and subsurface water encountered during construction. Completely drain construction site during periods of construction to keep soil materials sufficiently dry. The Contractor shall establish/construct storm drainage features (ponds/basins) at the earliest stages of site development, and throughout construction grade the construction area to provide positive surface water runoff away from the construction activity and/or provide temporary ditches, swales, and other drainage features and equipment as required to maintain dry soils. When unsuitable working platforms for equipment operation and unsuitable soil support for subsequent construction features develop, remove unsuitable material and provide new soil material as specified herein. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to assess the soil and ground water conditions presented by the plans and specifications and to employ necessary measures to permit construction to proceed. 3.2.4 Dewatering
Control groundwater flowing toward or into excavations to prevent sloughing of excavation slopes and walls, boils, uplift and heave in the excavation and to eliminate interference with orderly progress of construction. Do not permit French drains, sumps, ditches or trenches within 3 feet of the foundation of any structure, except with specific written approval, and after specific contractual provisions for restoration of the foundation area have been made. Take control measures by the time the excavation reaches the water level in order to maintain the integrity of the in situ material. While the excavation is open, maintain the water level continuously, at least 3 feet below the working level. Operate dewatering system continuously until construction work below existing water levels is complete. Submit performance records weekly. Measure and record performance of dewatering system at same time each day by use of observation wells or piezometers installed in conjunction with the dewatering system. 3.2.4.1 Control of Water
Where ground water is encountered, dewatering by the use of well points or other approved methods will be required to the extent that excavations are performed in the dry. If after dewatering, localized wet or soft areas remain, the areas shall be dried by aerating or other satisfactory means; or at the Contractor's option and at no additional cost to the Government, localized soft areas may be undercut and replaced with compacted suitable materials in accordance with the specifications. Dewatering of excavations will be maintained until the excavation is backfilled and fill material is placed to within 1 foot of finished floor or top of pavement elevation. Dewatering of utility excavations will be maintained until pipe and conduit are placed and tested and the trench backfilled. 3.2.4.2 Dewatering Work Plan
At least 45 days prior to beginning excavation, compaction or fill placement, the Contractor shall submit for review and comment a plan describing and showing the proposed method(s) of dewatering to satisfy the requirement that water levels be maintained a minimum three feet beneath all working levels during excavation and compaction operations to the Contracting Officer. The information to be submitted shall include but not be limited to the following: a. Drawings indicating locations for interceptor underdrains SECTION 31 00 00 Page 8
Winn Army Community Hospital Revised in accordance with Amendment 005 FY 12-PN-72292- ADD/ALT Winn Army Community Hospital April 13th 2012 trenches, sumps, well points, pumps and discharge lines. b. Details of interceptor underdrain trench or well points, if used. c. Description of drainage pipe or tubing and gradations of filter materials. d. Types and capacities of pumps. e. The impact of pump, power supply or other failures and proposed backup plan or system for such failures. 3.2.5 Trench Excavation Requirements
Excavate the trench as recommended by the manufacturer of the pipe to be installed. Slope trench walls below the top of the pipe, or make vertical, and of such width as recommended in the manufacturer's printed installation manual. Provide vertical trench walls where no manufacturer's printed installation manual is available, in accordance with OSHA requirements. Shore trench walls more than 4 feet high, cut back to a stable slope, or provide with equivalent means of protection for employees who may be exposed to moving ground or cave in, in accordance with OSHA requirements. Excavate trench walls which are cut back to at least the angle of repose of the soil. Give special attention to slopes which may be adversely affected by weather or moisture content. Do not exceed the trench width below the pipe top of 24 inches plus pipe outside diameter (O.D.) for pipes of less than 24 inches inside diameter, and do not exceed 36 inches plus pipe outside diameter for sizes larger than 24 inches inside diameter. Where recommended trench widths are exceeded, provide redesign, stronger pipe, or special installation procedures by the Contractor. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of redesign, stronger pipe, or special installation procedures without any additional cost to the Government. 3.2.5.1 Bottom Preparation
Grade the bottoms of trenches accurately to provide uniform bearing and support for the bottom quadrant of each section of the pipe. Excavate bell holes to the necessary size at each joint or coupling to eliminate point bearing. Remove stones of 3 inches or greater in any dimension, or as recommended by the pipe manufacturer, whichever is smaller, to avoid point bearing. 3.2.5.2 Removal of Unyielding Material
Where overdepth is not indicated and unyielding material is encountered in the bottom of the trench, remove such material 4 inches below the required grade and replaced with suitable materials as provided in paragraph BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION. 3.2.5.3 Removal of Unstable Material
Where unstable material is encountered in the bottom of the trench, remove such material to the depth as directed by the Contracting Officer, and replace it to the proper grade with select granular material as provided in paragraph BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION. When removal of unstable material is required due to the Contractor's fault or neglect in performing the work, the Contractor is responsible for excavating the resulting material and replacing it without additional cost to the Government. 3.2.5.4 Excavation for Appurtenances
Provide excavation for manholes, catch-basins, inlets, or similar SECTION 31 00 00 Page 9
Winn Army Community Hospital Revised in accordance with Amendment 005 FY 12-PN-72292- ADD/ALT Winn Army Community Hospital April 13th 2012 structures of sufficient size to permit the placement and removal of forms for the full length and width of structure footings and foundations as shown. Clean rock or loose debris and cut to a firm surface either level, stepped, or serrated, as shown or as directed. Remove unstable material as specified above. When concrete or masonry is to be placed in an excavated area, take special care not to disturb the bottom of the excavation. Do not excavate to the final grade level until just before the concrete or masonry is to be placed. 3.2.5.5 Jacking, Boring, and Tunneling
Unless otherwise indicated, provide excavation by open cut except that sections of a trench may be jacked, bored, or tunneled if, in the opinion of the Contracting Officer, the pipe, cable, or duct can be safely and properly installed and backfill can be properly compacted in such sections. 3.2.6 Underground Utilities
The Contractor is responsible for movement of construction machinery and equipment over pipes and utilities during construction. Perform work adjacent to non-Government utilities as indicated in accordance with procedures outlined by utility company. Excavation made with power-driven equipment is not permitted within 2 feet of known Government-owned utility or subsurface construction. For work immediately adjacent to or for excavations exposing a utility or other buried obstruction, excavate by hand. Start hand excavation on each side of the indicated obstruction and continue until the obstruction is uncovered or until clearance for the new grade is assured. Support uncovered lines or other existing work affected by the contract excavation until approval for backfill is granted by the Contracting Officer. Immediately report any and all damage to utility lines or subsurface construction to the Contracting Officer. 3.2.7 Structural Excavation
Excavations shall conform to the dimensions and elevations indicated for each structure and footing except as specified, and shall include trenching for utility and foundation drainage systems to a point 5 feet beyond the structure line. Excavations shall extend a sufficient distance from walls and footings to allow for removal and placing of forms. Excavations below indicated depths shall not be permitted except for removal of unsatisfactory material. Ensure that footing sub-grades have been inspected and approved by the Contracting Officer prior to concrete placement. 3.3 SELECTION OF BORROW MATERIAL
Select borrow material to meet the requirements and conditions of the particular fill or embankment for which it is to be used. Obtain borrow material and/or from approved private sources, as approved by the Contracting Officer. Unless otherwise provided in the contract, the Contractor is responsible for obtaining the right to procure material, pay royalties and other charges involved, and bear the expense of developing the sources, including rights-of-way for hauling from the owners. Unless specifically provided, do not obtain borrow within the limits of the project site without prior written approval. Consider necessary clearing, grubbing, and satisfactory drainage of borrow pits and the disposal of debris thereon related operations to the borrow excavation.
SECTION 31 00 00
Page 10
Winn Army Community Hospital Revised in accordance with Amendment 005 FY 12-PN-72292- ADD/ALT Winn Army Community Hospital April 13th 2012 3.4 OPENING AND DRAINAGE OF EXCAVATION AND BORROW PITS
borrow pits and otherExcept as otherwise permitted, provide adequate drainage during excavation of borrow pits and other excavation areas. Transport overburden and other spoil material to designated spoil areas or otherwise dispose of these as directed by the Contracting Officer. Provide neatly trimmed and drained borrow pits after the excavation is completed. Ensure that excavation of any area, operation of borrow pits, or dumping of spoil material results in minimum detrimental effects on natural environmental conditions 3.5 3.5.1 SHORING General Requirements
Should the Contractor determine shoring is required, the Contractor shall submit a Shoring and Sheeting plan for approval 15 days prior to starting work. Submit drawings and calculations, certified by a registered professional engineer, describing the methods for shoring and sheeting of excavations. Finish shoring, including sheet piling, and install as necessary to protect workmen, banks, adjacent paving, structures, and utilities. Remove shoring, bracing, and sheeting as excavations are backfilled, in a manner to prevent caving. 3.6 GRADING AREAS
Where indicated, divide work into grading areas within which satisfactory excavated material will be placed in embankments, fills, and required backfills. Do not haul satisfactory material excavated in one grading area to another grading area except when so directed in writing. Place and grade stockpiles of satisfactory, unsatisfactory and wasted materials as specified. Stockpiles shall be kept in a neat and well drained condition, giving due consideration to drainage at all times. Clear, grub, and seal by rubber-tired equipment, the ground surface at stockpile locations. Stockpile excavated satisfactory and unsatisfactory materials separately. Protect stockpiles of satisfactory materials from contamination which may destroy the quality and fitness of the stockpiled material. If the Contractor fails to protect the stockpiles, and any material becomes unsatisfactory, remove and replace such material with satisfactory material from approved sources. 3.7 FINAL GRADE OF SURFACES TO SUPPORT CONCRETE
Do not excavate to final grade until just before concrete is to be placed. Roughen the level surfaces, and cut the sloped surfaces, as indicated, into rough steps or benches to provide a satisfactory bond. Protect shales from slaking and all surfaces from erosion resulting from ponding or water flow. 3.8 3.8.1 GROUND SURFACE PREPARATION General Requirements
Ground surface on which fill is to be placed shall be stripped of live, dead, or decayed vegetation, rubbish, debris, and other unsatisfactory material; plowed, disked, or otherwise broken up to a depth of 8 inches; pulverized; moistened or aerated as necessary to plus or minus 2.5 percent of optimum moisture; thoroughly mixed; and compacted to at least 92 percent laboratory maximum density as determined using ASTM D 1557. Compaction shall be accomplished by sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic-tired rollers, SECTION 31 00 00 Page 11
Winn Army Community Hospital Revised in accordance with Amendment 005 FY 12-PN-72292- ADD/ALT Winn Army Community Hospital April 13th 2012 steel-wheeled rollers, vibratory compactors, or other approved equipment well suited to the soil being compacted. The prepared ground surface shall be scarified and moistened or aerated as required just prior to placement of embankment materials to assure adequate bond between embankment material and the prepared ground surface. 3.8.1.1 Sub-grade Preparation for Building Sites
Unsatisfactory material in surfaces to received fill or in excavated areas shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory materials as directed by the Contracting Officer. The surface shall be scarified to a depth of 6 inches before the fill is started. Sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal shall be plowed, stepped, benched, or broken up so that the fill material will bond with the existing material. When sub-grades are less than the specified density, the ground surface shall be broken up to a minimum depth of 6 inches, pulverized, and compacted to the specified density. When the subgrade is part fill and part excavation or natural ground, the excavated or natural ground portion shall be scarified to a depth of 12 inches and compacted as specified for the adjacent fill. Compaction shall be accomplished by sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic-tired rollers, steel-wheeled rollers, or other approved equipment well suited to the soil being compacted. Material shall be moistened or aerated as necessary to plus or minus 2.5 percent of optimum moisture. Minimum subgrade density shall be as specified in paragraph FILLING AND BACKFILLING. *5 3.8.2
Frozen Material
Do not place material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost. Finish compaction by sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic-tired rollers, steel-wheeled rollers, or other approved equipment well suited to the soil being compacted. Moisten material as necessary to plus or minus 2.5 percent of optimum moisture to provide the moisture content that will readily facilitate obtaining the specified compaction with the equipment used.. 3.9 UTILIZATION OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS
Dispose of unsatisfactory materials removed from excavations into designated waste disposal or spoil areas as directed by the Contracting Officer. Use satisfactory material removed from excavations, insofar as practicable, in the construction of fills, embankments, subgrades, shoulders, bedding (as backfill), and for similar purposes. Do not waste any satisfactory excavated material without specific written authorization. Dispose of satisfactory material, authorized to be wasted, in designated areas approved for surplus material storage or designated waste areas as directed. Clear and grub newly designated waste areas on Government-controlled land before disposal of waste material thereon. Stockpile and use coarse rock from excavations for constructing slopes or embankments adjacent to streams, or sides and bottoms of channels and for protecting against erosion. Do not dispose of excavated material in such a manner as to obstruct the flow of any stream, endanger a partly finished structure, impair the efficiency or appearance of any structure, or be detrimental to the completed work in any way.
SECTION 31 00 00
Page 12
Winn Army Community Hospital Revised in accordance with Amendment 005 FY 12-PN-72292- ADD/ALT Winn Army Community Hospital April 13th 2012 3.10 3.10.1 BURIED TAPE AND DETECTION WIRE Buried Warning and Identification Tape
Provide buried utility lines with utility identification tape. Bury tape 1.5 feet below finished grade; under pavements and slabs, bury tape 12 inches below top of subgrade. 3.10.2 Buried Detection Wire
Bury detection wire directly above non-metallic piping at a distance not to exceed 12 inches above the top of pipe. Extend the wire continuously and unbroken, from manhole to manhole. Terminate the ends of the wire inside the manholes at each end of the pipe, with a minimum of 3 feet of wire, coiled, remaining accessible in each manhole. Furnish insulated wire over its entire length. Install wires at manholes between the top of the corbel and the frame, and extend up through the chimney seal between the frame and the chimney seal. For force mains, terminate the wire in the valve pit at the pump station end of the pipe. 3.11 MOISTURE CONTENT
Satisfactory materials in each layer of fill shall contain the amount of moisture within the limits specified below. Materials that are not within the specified limits after compaction shall be reworked regardless of density. The moisture content after compaction shall be as uniform as practicable throughout any one layer and shall be within the limits of 2.5 percentage points above optimum moisture content and 2.5 percentage points below optimum moisture content. Materials which are too wet shall be disked, harrowed, plowed, bladed, or otherwise manipulated to reduce the moisture content to within the specified limits. Materials which are too dry shall be broken up, sprinkled, and thoroughly mixed to bring the moisture content uniformly up to within specified limits of moisture content specified above, the Contractor shall either adjust the moisture content to bring it within the specified limits or remove it from the fill. 3.12 3.12.1 GENERAL EARTHWORK Earth Embankments
Earth embankments shall be constructed from satisfactory materials free of organic or frozen material and rocks with any dimension greater than 3 inches. The material shall be placed in successive horizontal layers of loose material not more than 8 inches in depth. Each layer shall be spread uniformly on a soil surface that has been moistened or aerated as necessary, and scarified or otherwise broken up so that the fill will bond with the surface on which it is placed. After spreading, each layer shall be plowed, disked, or otherwise broken up; moistened or aerated as necessary; thoroughly mixed; and compacted to at least 95 percent laboratory maximum density. Compaction requirements for the upper portion of earth embankments forming subgrade for pavements shall be identical with those requirements specified in paragraph SUBGRADE PREPARATION. Compaction shall be accomplished by sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic-tired rollers, steel-wheeled rollers, vibratory compactors, or other approved equipment. 3.12.2 Subgrade Preparation
Proof rolling of areas to be paved shall be done on an exposed subgrade free of surface water(wet conditions resulting from rainfall) which could SECTION 31 00 00 Page 13
Winn Army Community Hospital Revised in accordance with Amendment 005 FY 12-PN-72292- ADD/ALT Winn Army Community Hospital April 13th 2012 promote degradation of an otherwise acceptable subgrade. Proof roll the existing subgrade beneath areas to be paved,with two passes of a dump truck loaded with 6 cubic yards of soilor a 15 ton, pneumatic-tired roller. Operate the roller or truck in a systematic manner to ensure the number of passes over all areas, and at speeds between 2 1/2 to 3 1/2 mph. Notify the Contracting Officer a minimum of 3 days prior to proof rolling. Proof rolling shall be performed in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Rutting or pumping of material shall be undercut and replaced with satisfactory material compacted as specified in paragraph 3.12.2.4 Subgrade for Pavements, at the directed direction by of the Contracting Officer. 3.12.2.1 Construction
Subgrade shall be shaped to line, grade, and cross section, and compacted as specified. This operation shall include plowing, disking, and any moistening or aerating required to satisfy obtain specified compaction and moisture requirements. Materials shall be moistened or aerated as necessary to plus or minus 2.5 percent of optimum moisture. Soft or otherwise unsatisfactory material shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory excavated material or other approved material as directed. Low areas resulting from removal of unsatisfactory material shall be brought up to required grade with satisfactory materials, and the entire subgrade shall be shaped to line, grade, and cross section and compacted as specified. When the subgrade is in cut, the top 8 inches of subgrade shall be scarified, windrowed, moistened or aerated as necessary to plus or minus 2.5 percent of optimum moisture, thoroughly blended, reshaped, and compacted. The elevation of the finish subgrade shall not vary more than 0.05 foot from the established grade and cross section. 3.12.2.2 Compaction
Compaction shall be accomplished by sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic-tired rollers, steel-wheeled rollers, vibratory compactors, or other approved equipment well suited to the soil being compacted. See subgrade compaction requirements in paragraph 3.8.1.1.1. 3.12.2.3 Subgrade for Pavements
Subgrade for pavements shall be compacted to at least 95 percent laboratory maximum density for the depth below the subgrade of 12 inches in fill or backfill and 8 inches in undisturbed native soil or cut. 3.12.2.4 Subgrade for Shoulders
Subgrade for shoulders shall be compacted to at least 92 percent laboratory maximum density for a depth of 8 inches below finish grade. In areas where the shoulder is to be grassed the top 8 inches shall be compacted to a density of at least 92 percent laboratory maximum density. 3.12.3 Shoulder Construction
Shoulders shall be constructed of satisfactory excavated or borrow material or as otherwise shown or specified. Shoulders shall be constructed as soon as possible after adjacent paving is complete, but in the case of rigid pavements, shoulders shall not be constructed until permission of the Contracting Officer has been obtained. The entire shoulder area shall be compacted to at least the percentage of maximum density as specified in paragraph SUBGRADE PREPARATION above, for specific ranges of depth below SECTION 31 00 00 Page 14
Winn Army Community Hospital Revised in accordance with Amendment 005 FY 12-PN-72292- ADD/ALT Winn Army Community Hospital April 13th 2012 the surface of the shoulder. Compaction shall be accomplished by sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic-tired rollers, steel-wheeled rollers, vibratory compactors, or other approved equipment well suited to the soil being compacted. Shoulder construction shall be done in proper sequence in such a manner that adjacent ditches will be drained effectively and that no damage of any kind is done to the adjacent completed pavement. The completed shoulders shall be true to alignment and grade and shaped to drain in conformity with the cross section shown. 3.13 3.13.1 FILLING AND BACKFILLING FOR BUILDINGS General
Filling and backfilling shall not begin until construction below finish grade has been approved, underground utilities systems have been inspected, tested and approved, forms removed and the excavation cleaned of trash and debris. Backfill shall not be placed in areas that are wet, muddy, contain organic materials or are otherwise unacceptable to the Contracting Officer. Satisfactory materials shall be used in bringing fills and backfills to the lines and grades indicated and for replacing unsatisfactory materials. Satisfactory material shall be free from roots and other organic matter, trash, debris, frozen materials, and stones larger than 3 inches in any dimension. Where pipe and/or utility lines are coated or wrapped for protection against corrosion, the backfill material up to an elevation of two feet above sewer lines and one foot above other utility lines shall be free from stones larger than one inch in any dimension. 3.13.2 Placement
Satisfactory materials shall be placed in horizontal layers not exceeding 8 inches in loose thickness, or 4 inches in loose thickness where hand-operated compactors are used. After placing, each layer shall be plowed, disked, or otherwise broken up, moistened or aerated as necessary, thoroughly mixed and compacted as specified. Backfill shall be brought to the indicated finish grade. Heavy equipment for spreading and compacting backfill shall not be operated closer to foundation or retaining walls than a distance equal to the height of backfill above the top of footing; the area remaining shall be compacted in layers not more than 100 mm in loose thickness with power-driven hand tampers suitable for the material being compacted. Backfill shall be placed carefully around pipes or tanks to avoid damage to coatings, wrappings, or tanks. Backfill shall not be placed against foundation walls less than 7 days after completion of each compaction. Each layer shall be thoroughly and uniformly blended throughout its entire thickness by disking. 3.13.3 Compaction
Compaction shall be accomplished by sheepsfoot roller, pneumatic-tired rollers, smooth-drum vibratory rollers or other approved equipment well suited to the soil being compacted. Generally, sheepsfoot rollers are best suited for compacting cohesive material while smooth-drum vibratory rollers are best suited for compacting cohesionless materials. In areas inaccessible to heavy equipment, or where in the opinion of the Contracting Officer, use of heavy equipment may cause damage to pipes, conduits, or structures, approved power-driven hand tampers suitable for the material being compacted shall be used. Each layer of fill and backfill shall be compacted to not less than the percentage of maximum density specified below. SECTION 31 00 00 Page 15
Winn Army Community Hospital Revised in accordance with Amendment 005 FY 12-PN-72292- ADD/ALT Winn Army Community Hospital April 13th 2012 Percent Laboratory Maximum Density
Fill, Embankment, and Backfill
Under structures, steps, paved areas, and in trenches Beside structures, footings, and walls Under sidewalks and grassed areas Subgrade (Top of Fill, Embankment, and Backfill) Under building slabs, steps, paved areas, and footings, top 300mm (12 inches) Under sidewalks and grassed areas, top 150 mm (6 inches) Subgrade (Undisturbed Native Soil or Cut) Under building slabs, steps, paved areas, and footings, top 200mm (8 inches) Under sidewalks and grassed areas, top 150 mm (6 inches)
92 92 85
95 85
95 85
Approved compacted subgrades that are disturbed by the Contractor's operations or adverse weather shall be scarified and recompacted to the required density prior to further construction thereon. Recompaction over underground utilities and heating lines shall be by hand tamping. For compacted subgrades and/or any lift of fill or backfill that fails to meet the specified density and/or moisture requirements, the entire subgrade and/or entire lift of fill shall be broken up to a minimum depth of 8 inches, pulverized, the moisture content adjusted as necessary, and recompacted to the specified density, even if this action requires the removal and replacement of subsequently placed satisfactory lifts of fill. Tests on recompacted areas shall be performed to determine conformance with specification requirements. Lifts of fill placed without being field density tested will not be accepted as satisfactory under any circumstances. 3.14 BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION FOR UTILITIES SYSTEMS
Backfill material shall consist of satisfactory material, select granular material, or initial backfill material as required. Backfill shall be placed in layers not exceeding 6 inches loose thickness for compaction by hand operated machine compactors, and 8 inches loose thickness for other than hand operated machines, unless otherwise specified. Each layer shall be compacted to at least 95 percent maximum density, unless otherwise specified. 3.14.1 Trench Backfill
Trenches shall be backfilled to the grade shown. The trench shall be backfilled to two feet above the top of pipe prior to performing the required pressure tests. The joints and couplings shall be left uncovered during the pressure test. The trench shall not be backfilled until all specified tests are performed. 3.14.1.1 Replacement of Unyielding Material
Unyielding material removed from the bottom of the trench shall be replaced with select granular material or initial backfill material. 3.14.1.2 Replacement of Unstable Material
Unstable material removed from the bottom of the trench or excavation shall be replaced with select granular material placed in layers not exceeding 6 SECTION 31 00 00 Page 16
Winn Army Community Hospital Revised in accordance with Amendment 005 FY 12-PN-72292- ADD/ALT Winn Army Community Hospital April 13th 2012 inches loose thickness. 3.14.1.3 Initial Backfill
Initial backfill material shall be placed and compacted with approved tampers to a height of at least one foot above the utility pipe or conduit. The backfill shall be brought up evenly on both sides of the pipe for the full length of the pipe. Care shall be taken to ensure thorough compaction of the fill under the haunches of the pipe. 3.14.1.4 Final Backfill
The remainder of the trench, except for special materials for paved areas, shall be filled with satisfactory material. Backfill material shall be placed and compacted as follows: a. Paved areas: Backfill shall be placed up to the required elevation as specified. Water flooding or jetting methods of compaction will not be permitted. sidewalks, Turfed or Seeded Areas, and Miscellaneous Areas: Backfill shall be deposited in layers of a maximum of 1 foot loose thickness, and compacted to 85 percent maximum density. Compaction by water flooding or jetting will not be permitted. This requirement shall also apply to all other areas not specifically designated above. Backfill for Appurtances
b.
3.14.2
After the manhole, catch basin, inlet, or similar structure has been constructed and the concrete has been allowed to cure for 7 days, backfill shall be placed in such a manner that the structure will not be damaged by the shock of falling earth. The backfill material shall be deposited and compacted as specified for final backfill, and shall be brought up evenly on all sides of the structure to prevent eccentric loading and excessive stress. 3.14.3 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
Special requirements for both excavation and backfill relating to the specific utilities are as follows: 3.14.3.1 Gas Distribution
Excavate trenches to a depth that will provide for a minimum 24 inches of cover. 3.14.3.2 Water Lines
Excavate trenches to a depth that provides a minimum cover of 30 inches from the existing ground surface, or from the indicated finished grade, whichever is lower, to the top of the pipe beneath unpaved areas, and 36 inches beneath paved areas. For fire protection yard mains or piping, an additional 6 inches of cover is required. 3.14.3.3 Heat Distribution System 1/4 inch in
Initial backfill material shall be free of stones larger than any dimension. SECTION 31 00 00 Page 17
Winn Army Community Hospital Revised in accordance with Amendment 005 FY 12-PN-72292- ADD/ALT Winn Army Community Hospital April 13th 2012
3.14.3.4
Electrical Distribution System
Provide a minimum cover of 24 inches from the finished grade to direct burial cable and conduit or duct line, unless otherwise indicated. 3.15 FINISHING
Finish the surface of excavations, embankments, and subgrades to a smooth and compact surface in accordance with the lines, grades, and cross sections or elevations shown. Provide the degree of finish for graded areas within 0.1 foot of the grades and elevations indicated except that the degree of finish for subgrades specified in paragraph SUBGRADE PREPARATION. Finish gutters and ditches in a manner that will result in effective drainage. Finish the surface of areas to be turfed from settlement or washing to a smoothness suitable for the application of turfing materials. Repair graded, topsoiled, or backfilled areas prior to acceptance of the work, and re-established grades to the required elevations and slopes. 3.15.1 Subgrade and Embankment Protection
During construction, keep embankments and excavations shaped and drained. Maintain ditches and drains along Subgrade to drain effectively at all times. Do not disturb the finished Subgrade by traffic or other operation. Protect and maintain the finished subgrade in a satisfactory condition until ballast, subbase, base, or pavement is placed. Do not permit the storage or stockpiling of materials on the finished subgrade. Do not lay subbase, base course, ballast, or pavement until the subgrade has been checked and approved, and in no case place subbase, base, surfacing, pavement, or ballast on a muddy, spongy, or frozen subgrade. 3.15.2 Capillary Water Barrier
Place a capillary water barrier under concrete floor and area-way slabs grade directly on the subgrade and compact with a minimum of two passes of a hand-operated plate-type vibratory compactor. 3.15.3 Grading Around Structures
Construct areas within 5 feet outside of each building and structure line true-to-grade, shape to drain, and maintain free of trash and debris until final inspection has been completed and the work has been accepted. 3.16 PLACING TOPSOIL
On areas to receive topsoil, prepare the compacted subgrade soil to a depth of 2 inches in order to facilitate bonding of topsoil with subsoil. Spread topsoil evenly to a thickness of 4 inches and grade to the elevations and slopes shown. Do not spread topsoil when frozen or excessively wet or dry. Obtain material required for topsoil in excess of that produced by excavation within the grading limits from offsite areas. 3.17 TESTING
Testing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be performed at no additional cost to the Government. Tests shall be performed by an approved commercial testing laboratory. Field in-place density shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D 1556 and ASTM D2937, SECTION 31 00 00 Page 18
Winn Army Community Hospital Revised in accordance with Amendment 005 FY 12-PN-72292- ADD/ALT Winn Army Community Hospital April 13th 2012 Drive Cylinder Method shall be used for soft, fine-grained, cohesive soils. When test results indicate that compaction is not as specified, the material shall be removed, replaced, and recompacted to meet specification requirements. Tests on recompacted areas shall be performed to determine conformance with specification requirements. Inspections and test results shall be certified by a registered professional civil engineer. These certifications shall state that the tests and observations were performed by or under the direct supervision of the engineer and that the results are representative of the materials or conditions being certified by the tests. The following number of tests, if performed at the appropriate time, will be the minimum acceptable for each type operation: 3.17.1 Content Fill and Backfill Material Gradation, Classification, and Moisture
One test per 500 cubic yards of stockpiled or in-place source material. Gradation of fill and backfill material shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D 422and ASTM D 1140 (wash 0.003 inches, without hydrometer). Liquid limit and plasticity index shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D 4318. Classification of soils shall be in accordance with ASTM D 2487. Moisture content shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D 2216. 3.17.2 Compaction Tests
Compaction tests shall be performed by the test procedure presented in ASTM D 1557. Adequate testing shall be conducted to establish at least five points with at least one point falling within plus or minus 1.5 percentage points of the plotted optimum moisture content. 3.17.3 3.17.3.1 Tests Required on Material Prior to Placement General
All material from required excavations and borrow shall be tested prior to incorporation into the permanent work. The tests shall be performed on samples representative of the various materials to be utilized. Samples shall be carefully selected to represent the full range of materials to be used as fill and/or backfill. The following minimum number of tests shall be performed on the materials prior to the placement of the materials in the work. Additional tests of these types shall be performed when materials of different classification or compaction characteristics are encountered to determine the properties of the materials. The Contracting Officer reserves the right to direct additional testing as required. 3.17.3.2 Classification Tests
Classification tests shall be performed to determine the acceptability of materials in accordance with paragraph MATERIALS. Such tests on materials proposed for use as fill and/or backfill shall be performed prior to their use. Sufficient classification tests shall be performed to define the full range of all materials proposed for use. A minimum of two classification tests from each location identified as a borrow source shall be performed on each material classified as satisfactory for use. The Contracting Officer may at any time require additional classification tests to confirm material acceptability.
SECTION 31 00 00
Page 19
Winn Army Community Hospital Revised in accordance with Amendment 005 FY 12-PN-72292- ADD/ALT Winn Army Community Hospital April 13th 2012 3.17.3.3 Compaction Tests
Compaction tests shall be performed prior to commencement of construction in order to determine the moisture-density relationships of all satisfactory materials proposed for use as fill and/or backfill. For each compaction test performed, an associated or companion classification test and moisture content test shall be performed. Compaction tests shall be performed in sufficient number to establish the full range of maximum dry density and optimum water content. A minimum of 8 compaction tests shall be performed on materials classified as satisfactory for use. Samples for these tests from each location classified as a borrow source,shall not be obtained from the same locations. The Contracting Officer reserves the right to direct where samples for additional compaction tests are obtained. In the event that the compaction characteristics of materials having the same classification vary appreciably, additional compaction tests shall be performed. 3.17.3.4 Moisture Content Tests
Moisture content tests shall be performed on all materials proposed for use as fill and/or backfill to determine their suitability for use in accordance with paragraph Moisture Content. Moisture content tests shall be performed in sufficient number to determine the full range of moisture contents. Moisture content test shall be performed for each compaction test and as required to determine acceptability of material prior to placement. At a minimum, two moisture content tests shall be performed on each material classified as satisfactory for use from each on-site or off-site location identified as a borrow source. 3.17.4 3.17.4.1 Tests Required During Placement In-Place Density Tests for General Earthwork
a. One test per 10,000 square feet, or fraction thereof, of each lift of fill or backfill areas compacted by other than hand-operated machines. b. One test per 100 square feet, or fraction thereof, of each lift of fill or backfill areas compacted by hand-operated machines. c. One test per 100 linear feet, or fraction thereof, of each lift of embankment or backfill for roads. d. One test per 7500 square feet, or fraction thereof, of subgrade in native soil or cut in all areas, excluding roads. e. One test per 50 linear feet, or fraction thereof, of subgrade in embankment or backfill, and in native soil or cut in roads. 3.17.4.2 In-Place Tests for Buildings
Acceptance of the compacted materials shall be determined by the results of field in-place density tests. Density tests in randomly selected locations shall be performed in the material and at the minimum frequency specified below: Material Type Fill, embankment Location of Material Beneath structures, to SECTION 31 00 00 Page 20 Minimum Test Frequency One test per lift
Winn Army Community Hospital Revised in accordance with Amendment 005 FY 12-PN-72292- ADD/ALT Winn Army Community Hospital April 13th 2012 Material Type and backfill Location of Material the 5-foot building line Minimum Test Frequency per each increment or fraction of 4000 square feet One test per foot of depth per each increment or fraction of 200 square feet, or for each 50 linear feet of long narrow (less than 3 feet wide) fills 150 linear feet or more One test per each increment or fraction of 2500 square feet One test per every fifth column footing and for each increment or fraction of 75 linear feet of wall footings
Fill and backfill
Areas beside structures, footings, walls, and areas enclosed by grade beams that are compacted by hand operated compaction equipment
Subgrade
Under building slabs on grade and paved areas
Subgrade
Under footings
3.17.4.3
In-Place Density Tests for Utility Systems
Tests shall be performed in sufficient numbers to ensure that the specified density is being obtained. A minimum of one field density test per lift of backfill for every 150 linear feet, or fraction thereof, of installation shall be performed. 3.17.4.4 Moisture Content
In the stockpile(s), excavation, or borrow areas, a minimum of two tests, each with a one-point or two-point compaction test, shall be performed per day per type of material or source of material being placed during stable weather conditions. During unstable weather, tests shall be made as dictated by the local conditions to ensure the moisture content of the placed materials is within the specified limits. 3.17.4.5 Optimum Moisture and Laboratory Maximum Density
One representative test shall be performed per 500 cubic yards meters of fill, embankment, and backfill, or when any change in material occurs which may affect the optimum moisture content of laboratory maximum density. 3.17.4.6 Time and Location of Tests
The Government reserves the right to specify the location of any test. Whenever there is doubt as to the adequacy of the testing or validity of results, the Contracting Officer may direct that additional tests be performed, at not additional cost to the Government. The field density tests shall be performed at times and locations which will assure the specified compaction is being obtained throughout each lift for all materials placed. Additional field density tests shall be performed in areas where the Contracting Officer determines there is reason to doubt the SECTION 31 00 00 Page 21
Winn Army Community Hospital Revised in accordance with Amendment 005 FY 12-PN-72292- ADD/ALT Winn Army Community Hospital April 13th 2012 adequacy of the natural subgrade. 3.17.4.7 Field Density Control
The results of field density tests shall be compared to results of compaction tests performed as required elsewhere in these specifications by the use of the appropriate procedures described in the following paragraphs. 3.17.5 Compaction Control
For fine grained (clayey and silty) soils and for sands with appreciable fines such that normal shaped compaction curves are obtained, results of all compaction tests shall be plotted on a common plot as a family of curves. For each field density test performed, a one-point compaction test, with additional points as needed, shall be performed on the same material on which the field density test was conducted. The one-point compaction test shall be performed on the dry side of the optimum moisture content. For comparison of field density data to the proper laboratory compaction test results, the procedures for the one-point and/or two-point compaction control methods as described in paragraph Compaction Procedure, shall be used. Compaction curves plotted on the family of curves shall be of such a scale that the optimum moisture content can be interpreted to the nearest 0.1 percent and the maximum dry density can be interpreted to the nearest 0.5 pounds per cubic foot. When a one-point test plots outside the range of the family of curves, an additional five-point compaction test shall be performed. 3.17.6 3.17.6.1 Compaction Procedure General
The following paragraphs describe methods of relating field density data to desired or specified values. Compaction control of soils requires comparison of fill water content and/or dry density values obtained in field density tests with optimum water content and/or maximum dry density. At a minimum, control shall be in accordance with the One-Point Compaction Method. Where conditions require, the Two-Point Compaction Method shall be used. See Appendix H "One- and Two-Point Compaction Methods". 3.17.6.2 One-Point Compaction Method
The material from the field density test is allowed to dry to a water content on the dry side of estimated optimum, and then compacted using the same equipment and procedures used in the five-point compaction test. Thorough mixing is required to obtain uniform drying; otherwise, results obtained may be erroneous. The water content and dry density of the compacted sample are determined and then used to estimate its optimum water content and maximum dry density as illustrated in Figure 1 at the end of this section. In Figure 1, the line of optimums is well defined and the compaction curves are approximately parallel to each other, consequently, the one-point compaction method could be used with a relatively high degree of confidence. However, in Figure 2 at the end of this section, the curves are not parallel to each other and in several instances will cross if extended on the dry side. Consequently, the correct curve cannot be determined from the one-point method; therefore, the two-point compaction method should be used. The one-point method should be used only when the data define a relatively good line of optimums.
SECTION 31 00 00
Page 22
Winn Army Community Hospital Revised in accordance with Amendment 005 FY 12-PN-72292- ADD/ALT Winn Army Community Hospital April 13th 2012 3.17.6.3 Two-Point Compaction Method
In the two-point test, one sample of material from the location of the field density test is compacted at the fill water content if thought to be at or on the dry side of optimum water content (otherwise, reduced by drying to this condition) using the same equipment and procedures used in the five-point compaction test. A second sample of material is allowed to dry back about 2 to 3 percentage points dry of the water content of the first sample and then compacted in the same manner. At least one point shall fall within 3 percent of the line of optimum. After compaction, the water contents and dry densities for the two samples are determined. The results are used to identify the appropriate compaction curve for the material being tested as shown in Figure 2 at the end of this section. The data shown in Figure 2 warrant the use of the two-point compaction test because the five-point compaction curves are not parallel. Using point A only, as in the one-point test method, would result in appreciable error as the shape of the curve would not be defined. The estimated compaction curve can be more accurately defined by two compaction points. 3.17.7 Tolerance Tests for Subgrades
Perform continuous checks on the degree of finish specified in paragraph SUBGRADE PREPARATION during construction of the subgrades. 3.17.8 Displacement of Sewers
After other required tests have been performed and the trench backfill compacted to the finished grade surface, inspect the pipe to determine whether significant displacement has occurred. Conduct this inspection in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Inspect pipe sizes larger than 36 inches, while inspecting smaller diameter pipe by shining a light or laser between manholes or manhole locations, or by the use of television cameras passed through the pipe. If, in the judgment of the Contracting Officer, the interior of the pipe shows poor alignment or any other defects that would cause improper functioning of the system, replace or repair the defects as directed at no additional cost to the Government. 3.18 DISPOSITION OF SURPLUS MATERIAL
Surplus material or other soil material not required or suitable for filling or backfilling, and brush, refuse, stumps, roots, and timber shall be wasted in Government disposal area or removed from Government property as directed by the Contracting Officer. 3.19 PROTECTION
Settlement or washing that occurs in graded, topsoiled, or backfilled areas prior to acceptance of the work, shall be repaired and grades reestablished to the required elevations and slopes.
3.19.1
PROCEDURE: 1. Point A is the result of a one-point compaction test on material from field density test. This point must be on the dry side of optimum water content. SECTION 31 00 00 Page 23
Winn Army Community Hospital Revised in accordance with Amendment 005 FY 12-PN-72292- ADD/ALT Winn Army Community Hospital April 13th 2012 2. Point O is the estimated optimum water content and maximum density of the fill material based on a projection of point A approximately parallel to the adjacent compaction curves. 3. Point A must plot within 3 percent of the line of optimums. Figure 1. Illustration of one-point compaction method.
3.19.2
PROCEDURE:
1. Points A and B are results of a two-point compaction test on material from field density test. Points A and B must be on the dry side of optimum water content. 2. The estimated compaction curve based on Points A and B establishes Point O on the locus, which is the estimated maximum dry density and optimum water content of the fill material. 3. One point must plot within 3 percent of the line of optimums. Figure 2. Illustration of two-point compaction method. See Attachement
SECTION 31 00 00
Page 24
PROCEDURE: 1. Point A is the result of a one-point compaction test on material from field density test. This point must be on the dry side of optimum water content. Point O is the estimated optimum water content and maximum density of the fill material based on a projection of point A approximately parallel to the adjacent compaction curves. Point A must plot within 3 percent of the line of optimums.
2.
3.
Figure 1. Illustration of one-point compaction method.
PROCEDURE: 1. Points A and B are results of a two-point compaction test on material from field density test. Points A and B must be on the dry side of optimum water content. 2. The estimated compaction curve based on Points A and B establishes Point O on the locus, which is the estimated maximum dry density and optimum water content of the fill material. 3. One point must plot within 3 percent of the line of optimums. Figure 2. Illustration of two-point compaction method.
SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION AND GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT
WINN ARMY HOSPITAL ADDITION AND ALTERATION PH. 1 FY 11/12, LI 70482/72292 Fort Stewart, Georgia
By Soils Section Geotechnical & HTRW Branch U.S. Army Engineer District, Savannah January 2010
TABLE OF CONTENTS SUBJECT 1. 2. 3. 4. PURPOSE QUALIFICATION OF REPORT PROJECT DESCRIPTION EXPLORATION PROCEDURES a. Site Reconnaissance b. Field Exploration c. Laboratory Soils Testing d. Soil Resistivity Testing e. Soil Percolation Testing 5. SITE AND SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS a. Site Description b. Area and Site Geology c. Subsurface Soil Conditions d. Groundwater Conditions e. Soil Resistivity and pH conditions f. Soil Percolation Rates 6. CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS a. General b. Foundation Design c. Seismic Design d. Slabs on Grade e. Control of Water f. Pavement Design Criteria g. Presentation of Soil Boring Data h. Specifications PAGE 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 7 7 7 7
ATTACHMENT A: Soil Test Boring Location Plan ATTACHMENT B: Soil Test Boring Logs ATTACHMENT C: Laboratory Soils Test Results ATTACHMENT D: Soil Resistivity Test Results ATTACHMENT E: Soil Percolation Test Results
SUBURFACE EXPLORATION AND GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT Winn Army Hospital Addition and Alteration Phase1, FY 11, LI 70482 Fort Stewart, Georgia 1. PURPOSE. This report has been prepared for the design of a two-story addition to the West wing and an extension of the Central Utility Plant of the Winn Army Hospital at Fort Stewart, Georgia. The purpose of this report is to provide recommendations for the geotechnical and foundation design of the facilities. The recommendations included in this report are based on the project information provided by the project AE, Leo A Daly located in Atlanta, GA, in the Design Charrette report and in two separate SAS FL 363 forms; one dated 29 October 2009 and the other undated and received 12 December 2009. Any change in site layout, structural system, loads, or finished floor or finished grade elevations may affect the recommendations. The Soils Section, Geotechnical and HTRW Branch of the Savannah District should be notified immediately of the change(s) and provided the necessary information regarding any change(s) so that we may review our recommendations. We may then modify our recommendations as appropriate for the proposed project. 2. QUALIFICATION OF REPORT. The field explorations performed for this report were made to determine the subsurface soil and ground water conditions and were not intended to serve as a comprehensive assessment of site environmental conditions. No effort was made to define, delineate, or designate any area of environmental concern or of contamination. Any recommendations regarding drainage and earthwork construction are made on the basis that such work can be performed in accordance with applicable laws pertaining to environmental contamination. The analyses for this report were performed for the Phase I construction activities outlined below. 3. PROJECT DESCRIPTION. This is phase 1 of a two-phase project. Phase 1 of this project is to construct a 65,000 square foot (sf) addition and a 1,000 sf alteration to the hospital, and to expand the Central Utility Plant (CUP) to support the current and new facilities. Phase 1 also includes the demolition of 3 buildings occupying an area of 11,659 sf. Phase 2 would consist of constructing a 40,000 sf addition and 55,000 sf alterations to the hospital. The phasing plan will enable the existing facility to be open and completely operational during repairs. Supporting facilities include electric service, natural gas, water and sewer services, security lighting, fire protection, paving walks and curb and gutters, storm drain, signage, information systems, site improvements and landscaping, fencing and gates, and other Anti-Terrorism/Fire Protection (AT/FP) measures. The project also provides access for persons with disabilities. Comprehensive interior and furnishings design will be provided. 4. EXPLORATION PROCEDURES. a. Site Reconnaissance. Prior to the field exploration, a geotechnical engineer visually inspected the site for both phases of the project and surrounding areas. The observations were
Subsurface Exploration and Geotechnical Report Winn Army Hospital Addition and Alteration Phase1 FY 11, LI 70482 Fort Stewart, Georgia January 2010
used in planning the exploration, in determining areas of special interest, and in relating site conditions to known geologic conditions in the area. b. Field Exploration. (1) Subsurface conditions at the project site were explored by thirteen Standard Penetration Test (SPT) and five auger borings drilled to depths ranging from 5 to 50 feet (ft). The borings were performed at the approximate locations shown on the boring location plans included in Attachment A of this report and on the drawings. (2) Boring locations were established in the field by a geotechnical engineer using a hand held Global Positioning System (GPS) device having an accuracy of 10 ft. The ground surface elevation at each boring location was determined by interpolation from the site topography survey. Since the measurements were not precise, the locations shown on the boring layout plans and the elevations on the drilling logs should be considered approximate. (3) The borings were drilled by the USACE Savannah District using a truck-mounted Mobile B-59 drill rig. Split-barrel sampling with SPT borings was performed at intervals shown on the boring logs. All soil sampling and Standard Penetration Testing was in substantial accordance with ASTM D 1586. In the Standard Penetration Test, a soil sample is obtained with a standard 1 3/8-inch I.D. by 2-inch O.D. split-barrel sampler. The sampler is first seated 6 inches and then driven an additional 12 inches with blows from a 140 lb. hammer falling a distance of 30 inches. The number of blows required to drive the sampler the final 12 inches is recorded and is termed the standard penetration resistance, or the N-value. Penetration resistance, when properly evaluated, is an index of the soils strength, density, and foundation support capability. (4) Soil classifications shown on the boring logs were determined in the field by a geologist. Classification of the soil samples was performed in general accordance with ASTM D 2488 (Visual-Manual Procedure for Description of Soils). The soil classifications include the use of the Unified Soil Classification System described in ASTM D 2487 (Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes). Since the soil descriptions and classifications are based on visual examination, they should be considered approximate, except where the samples were subjected to laboratory testing as described below. (5) Logs of the soil borings graphically depicting soil descriptions, standard penetration resistances, and ground water levels are included in Attachment B of this report. c. Laboratory Soils Testing Twenty-two soil samples obtained during the field investigations were tested in the laboratory and the results are included in Attachment C. Tests were performed in accordance with applicable ASTM Standards. The tests were performed to confirm the visual classifications and to aid in our evaluation of the subsurface soil conditions. Testing consisted of analyzing the samples for natural moisture content, Atterberg limits, grainsize distribution, pH, chlorides and sulphates. Where there is a difference between the field and laboratory classification, the laboratory classification shall take precedence. d. Soil Resistivity Testing Soil resistivity testing was performed at two locations beneath proposed locations of underground ductile iron piping. Resistivity testing was done in 2
accordance with USACE EM 1110-1-1802 August 1995. Results of the soil resistivity testing are included in Attachment D of this report. e. Soil Percolation Testing Soil percolation tests were run at five locations where stormwater management systems are anticipated. The percolation tests were done in accordance with USACE SAD DM 110-1-1 July 1983 chapter 20. Results of the soil percolation tests are included in Attachment E of this report.
5. SITE AND SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS. a. Site Description. The Winn Army Hospital Complex is located on a site covering approximately 22 acres in the cantonment area of Ft Stewart, GA. The site is bounded to the Northwest by Niles Avenue, to the Southwest by 6th Street Extension, to the Southeast by Harmon Avenue and to the Northeast by 9th Street. The Winn Army Hospital and its supporting facilities currently occupy a portion of the site. Phase I construction activities are planned over the West-Northwest area of the site. This area is relatively flat with a gentle northern slope and elevations ranging from 84 to 87 ft mean sea level (msl). The site is cleared and grassed with some paved areas currently used for parking. Three buildings will be demolished as part of the project. A summary of finish floor elevations, existing site elevations, and approximate cut/fill required is shown below.
Building Hospital Addition CUP Addition
Existing Site Elevation (msl) 84 to 86 84
FF Elevation (msl) 87.9 83.48
Cut/Fill Quantity 1 to 3 ft fill 0.5 ft cut
b. Area and Site Geology. Fort Stewart is located near the eastern edge of the Coastal Plain Physiographic Province. In South Carolina and Georgia, this broad, gently sloping region extends southeastward from the Fall Line (Columbia-Augusta-Macon-Columbus) to the Atlantic Ocean. The province is typified by nine southeastward dipping strata that increase in thickness from 0 feet at the fall line to approximately 4,200 ft at the coast. State geologic records describe crystalline basement rocks at a depth of 4,254 ft below land surface in a petroleum exploration well (the No. 1 Jelks-Rogers) located in the region. This well provides the most complete record for Cretaceous, Tertiary, and Quaternary sedimentary strata. The Cretaceous section is approximately 1,970 ft thick and is dominated by clastics. The Tertiary section is approximately 2,170 ft thick and is dominated by limestone with a 175-ft thick cap of dark green phosphatic clay. The clay is regionally extensive and is known as the Hawthorn Group. The interval from approximately 110 ft to the surface is Quaternary in age and composed primarily of sand with interbeds of clay or silt.
The near-surface soils encountered are predominantly sedimentary in origin and consist of layered marine deposits of sands, silts and clays. The deposits have since been subjected to successive erosion and re-deposition by fluctuations of sea levels, storm tides and winds. Many of the surface sands are the result of depositional forces along ancient beaches which formed during the changing shoreline and river conditions. Intermittent deposits of shells occur within the strata at irregular intervals. c. Subsurface Soil Conditions. The following four borings were drilled to the depths indicated beneath the proposed hospital addition: B-358 (37 ft), B-359-a (50 ft), B-360 (30 ft), and B-361 (30 ft). Boring B-365 was drilled to a depth of 24 ft beneath the proposed CUP addition. Borings B-366 and B-367 were drilled to depths of 10 ft beneath the proposed paved areas for Phase 1 construction. The near-surface soils encountered in these borings are loose to very dense poorly graded, fine sands (SP) and silty sands (SM) extending to depths of at least 25 ft or to the termination of the borings in the case of the 10 ft deep borings. Blow counts, or N-values in these soils ranged from 5 to 89 blows per foot (bpf). The sands were underlain, in borings B-358 and B-359-a, by layers of finer soils consisting of soft fat clays (CH) and elastic silts (MH) with N-values ranging from 3 to 10 bpf. These clay layers ranged in thickness from 2 to 7 ft, and were generally underlain by alternating layers of loose to medium dense clayey and silty sands ranging in thickness from 1 to 5 ft extending to the termination depths of the borings. The above subsurface descriptions are of a generalized nature to highlight the major subsurface stratification features and material characteristics at each of the sites. The boring logs should be reviewed for specific information at individual boring locations. The stratifications shown on the boring logs represent the conditions only at the actual boring locations. Variations may occur and should be expected between boring locations. The stratification lines shown on the boring logs represent approximate boundaries between the subsurface materials; the actual transitions are typically more gradual. Note that borings B-368, B-369, B-370, B-371, B-372, and B-373 were drilled for the buildings and paved parking areas that will be included in Phase 2 construction. These borings are not specifically discussed in this report. d. Groundwater Conditions. Groundwater levels were read during and immediately after drilling in all of the borings. In the borings where groundwater was encountered during or immediately after drilling, groundwater levels were also taken 24-hours after drilling. The depth at which groundwater was encountered in the borings at the site for Phase 1 construction ranged from 9.3 to 10.3 ft below the surface. It should be noted that groundwater conditions, including perched water, vary during periods of prolonged drought and excessive rainfall as well as seasonally. Therefore, fluctuations in the elevation of the ground water and the occurrence of perched water should be anticipated with changing climatic and rainfall conditions.
Water should not be allowed to collect near the foundation or on floor slab areas of the building either during or after construction. Undercut or excavated areas should be sloped toward one corner to facilitate removal of any collected rain water, ground water, or surface runoff. Positive site drainage should be provided to reduce infiltration of surface water around the perimeter of the building and beneath the floor slabs. e. Soil Resistivity and pH Conditions. Resistivity tests were run using a Wenner array in accordance with USACE EM 1110-1-1802 August 1995. The tests were run at the midpoint between borings PT-2 and PT-3, and between borings PT-1 and B-361. In a Wenner array, four electrodes are equally spaced on a line. The two inner electrodes are used to measure potential difference, while the outer electrodes are used for current measurement. The average resistivity to a depth of five ft of the site was estimated as 234,255 Ohm-cm (-cm) in B-1, 5282 -cm between borings PT-2 and PT-3 and 222,818 -cm between borings PT-1 and B-361. The Soil Resistivity Test Data is provided in Attachment D. Soil samples taken at percolation test holes PT-1, PT-2 and PT-3 at depths around 2.5 ft were tested for pH. The values range from 6.99 to 11.8. The results of pH testing are included with other Laboratory Soil Test data in Attachment C. f. Soil Percolation Rates. Percolation tests were performed in substantial accordance with DM 110-1-1 July 1983 chapter 20. The test holes were dug to the dimensions indicated in Attachment D, Percolation Test Data. Samples were taken at depths of about 2.5 ft at each test hole and sent to a lab for analyses. The soils encountered in the test holes are poorly graded and silty sands (SP and SM). The percolation rates at test locations PT-1, PT-2, PT-3, PT-4 and PT-5 were 3.1, 2.4, 2.4, 1.6 and 1.2 inches per hour, respectively.
6.
CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS.
a. General. The following conclusions and recommendations are based on the information available on the proposed structures, observations made at the project site, interpretation of the data obtained from the soil test borings, and our experience with soils and subsurface conditions similar to those encountered at the site. Soil penetration resistance data has been used to estimate allowable foundation bearing pressures. b. Foundation Design. (1) Allowable Bearing Pressure. We recommend that all footings be designed for a maximum allowable soil bearing pressure of 3000 psf, based on total load, and provided the following recommendations are followed. Post construction total foundation settlements are not expected to exceed one inch for column footings and one half of an inch for wall footings, based on the above bearing pressure and the maximum loads provided by the AE. Differential settlements between similarly loaded foundation elements will be less than one-half of an inch.
(2) Footing Dimensions. For all load-bearing wall footings and column footings, we recommend a minimum width of 24 inches and 36 inches respectively, and the minimum depth of all load-bearing footings should be 24 inches as measured from finish floor. For all other wall footings, the minimum width should be 18 inches and the minimum depth should be 18 inches, as measured from finish floor or finish grade, whichever is lower, to the bottom of the footing. We recommend all footings be topped with a minimum six inches of soil. (3) Footings with Uplift. The resistance of footings to be subjected to uplift from transient live loads should be represented by the total of weight of concrete in the footing and the weight of soil in the vertical column directly above the footing. The effect of a groundwater table on the uplift resistance of the footing should be considered. The effect of the ground water (or buoyancy) can be taken into account by subtracting the weight of water represented by the block of concrete and soil which is located below the groundwater level and above the bottom of the footing from the total weight of concrete and soil. The level of the groundwater should be the highest anticipated during the life of the structure. The factor of safety against uplift should be not less than 1.5. (4) Earth Retaining Structures. The following earth pressure coefficients and soil parameters should be used for design of retaining walls, and other below grade or earth retaining structures: Coefficient of at-rest earth pressure (Ko) = 0.45 Coefficient of active earth pressure (Ka) = 0.29 Coefficient of passive earth pressure (Kp) = 3.39 Coefficient of friction (soil -vs- concrete) (uf) = 0.35 Unit weight of soil (moist) = 112 lbs/ft3 Unit weight of soil (saturated) = 125 lbs/ft3 Unit weight of soil (buoyant) = 63 lbs/ft3 c. Seismic Design. Seismic loads should be computed in accordance with IBC 2006. The project site should be classified as Site Class D for the purpose of determining maximum considered earthquake spectral response accelerations. d. Slabs on Grade. (1) All concrete slabs-on-grade in enclosed areas shall be underlain by a minimum of 4 inches of open graded, washed pea gravel, or stone, often termed capillary water barrier, to prevent the capillary rise of ground water. Nos. 57, 67, 78, or 89 stone should be used. All drawings shall be consistently labeled with the term capillary water barrier, since this is the term utilized in Section EARTHWORK of the Specifications. A moisture barrier consisting of lapped polyethylene sheeting having a minimum thickness of 10 mils shall be provided beneath building floor slabs to reduce the potential for slab dampness from soil moisture. The capillary water barrier material may be omitted under slabs-on-grade in unenclosed areas; however, the slab should be provided with a vapor barrier. Concrete slabs should be jointed around columns and along supported walls to minimize cracking due to possible differential movement. 6
(2) The design of thickened slabs on grade to support line loads (such as partitions and light wall loads) should be in accordance with TI 809-2, Structural Design Criteria for Buildings. e. Control of Water. The following note should be added to an appropriate civil/site plate and also to an appropriate structural foundation plate of the contract drawings: Drainage and Dewatering: All excavations shall be performed so that the site and the area immediately surrounding the site which affects construction operations will be continually and effectively drained. The Contractor shall provide drainage and dewatering as required to ensure that all footing excavations are accomplished with the subgrade soils remaining dry and firm until after footings are placed and backfilled. Removal of surface water, ground water, and any perched water conditions, which might be encountered during excavations shall be accomplished by approved means. Refer to Specification 31 00 00 EARTHWORK for additional requirements. f. Pavement Design Criteria. The soil types expected to be encountered under the pavement are poorly graded and silty sands (SP and SM respectively). Unsatisfactory subgrade soils should be removed and replaced with satisfactory soils in accordance with the requirements of Section EARTHWORK of the specifications. We recommend the following subgrade values for satisfactory soils be used for design of the pavement: a. b. Flexible Pavement Compacted Subgrade, use CBR of 10. Rigid Pavement:
(1) Corrected modulus of subgrade reaction, use K of 150 psi per inch. (2) Design 28-day concrete flexural strength, use 650 psi. g. Presentation of Soil Boring Data. The locations of the soil test borings drilled at the project site are shown on the boring location plan in Attachment A. The boring locations will also be provided to the AE in MicroStation format. The boring locations shall be referenced and shown on the appropriate site grading and drainage plates of the contract drawings. The SPT boring location symbol (circle with the right half filled in) shall also be placed in the civil legend. Microstation drawings containing the Soil test boring logs, laboratory soils test results, soil resistivity test results and soil percolation test results will be provided to the AE. These drawings shall be directly inserted into the project drawings and the plate titles shall be included in the index. h. Specifications. Savannah Districts EARTHWORK specification 31 00 00 has been manually edited and provided to the AE for use in the specifications for this project. The AE shall make the changes as marked-up and make other edits as applicable in SpecsIntact. The un-
edited version of this specification (SpecsIntact format) can be found at the following website, http://en.sas.usace.army.mil/enweb, under menus Engineering Criteria and Guide Specs.
ATTACHMENT A Soil Test Boring Location Plan
ATTACHMENT B Soil Test Boring Logs
Boring Designation DRILLING LOG

1. PROJECT DIVISION INSTALLATION
B-358
SHEET HORIZONTAL OF 2 SHEETS VERTICAL
South Atlantic Division
Ft.Stewart, Georgia
9. COORDINATE SYSTEM
Winn Hospital Addition LI-70482, FY-11

2. HOLE NUMBER LOCATION COORDINATES
State Plane - Georgia East NAD83 NAVD88 10. SIZE AND TYPE OF BIT 3-1/4" Continuous Spiral Auger
11. MANUFACTURER'S DESIGNATION OF DRILL
B-358
3. DRILLING AGENCY 4. NAME OF DRILLER
N 681286 E 831639
Failing 1500
12. TOTAL SAMPLES 13. TOTAL NUMBER CORE BOXES DISTURBED UNDISTURBED
U.S. Corps of Engineers - Savannah District John Haskew

5. DIRECTION OF BORING VERTICAL INCLINED 6. THICKNESS OF OVERBURDEN 7. DEPTH DRILLED INTO ROCK 8. TOTAL DEPTH OF BORING
LEGEND
11
BEARING 14. ELEVATION GROUND WATER 15. DATE BORING STARTED
DEG FROM VERTICAL
75.85' 11/3/09
COMPLETED
--0'
>37' 37'
11/3/09 11/3/09 16. ELEVATION TOP OF BORING 87' (Estimated from plans) 17. TOTAL CORE RECOVERY FOR BORING N/A
18. SIGNATURE AND TITLE OF INSPECTOR
Graham Johnson, Geologist

Samp No. RQD % % REC
ELEV
DEPTH
FIELD CLASSIFICATION OF MATERIALS (Description)
REMARKS
N-Value
Blows/ 0.5 ft
POORLY GRADED SAND (SP), dark brown, fine grained, dry, trace rootlets. Moist, trace medium sand. Light brown, trace fine gravel.
55 SS-1
2 4 9 11 11 12 14 10 9
13
100 SS-2
23 4 19
23 SS-3
Trace silt. 78.5 8.5 SILTY SAND (SM), black, fine grained, trace organics. 70 SS-4 SS-5
4 4 6 4 10 15
10 8
30 SS-6
25 12
73.5
13.5 POORLY GRADED SAND (SP), dark brown, fine grained, wet, trace medium sand.
10 29 31
26 SS-7
60
16
Light brown.
14 26 34
20 60
28 SS-8
15 39 50
24
30 SS-9
100+
SAS FORM 1836-A

FEB 08
Boring Designation
B-358
SHEET 1 of 2
28
Boring Designation DRILLING LOG (Cont Sheet)

PROJECT INSTALLATION
B-358
Ft.Stewart, Georgia
COORDINATE SYSTEM
Winn Hospital Addition

LOCATION COORDINATES
State Plane
ELEVATION TOP OF BORING
NAD83
NAVD88
N 681286 E 831639
LEGEND
87'
Samp No. RQD %
ELEV
DEPTH
% REC
REMARKS
N-Value
Blows/ 0.5 ft
POORLY GRADED SAND (SP), dark brown, fine grained, wet, trace medium sand. (continued) Yellowish orange.
28
19 35 49
30 SS-10
100+ 32
53.5
33.5 FAT CLAY (CH), gray. High plasticity.

2
67 SS-11 Undisturbed sample
3 2
36 50.0 37.0 BOTTOM OF BOREHOLE AT 37.0 ft Water Level Data Reading Depth During drilling 11.15 24 hours 9.4
Notes
Date / Time 11/3/2009 11/4/2009
SAS FORM 1836-A

FEB 08
Boring Designation
B-358
SHEET 2 of 2

B-359-a
Ft.Stewart, Georgia

B-359-a
N 681512 E 831780
Failing 1500

LEGEND
15
DEG FROM VERTICAL
79' 11/4/09
COMPLETED
--0'
>50' 50'

ELEV
DEPTH
REMARKS
N-Value
Blows/ 0.5 ft
POORLY GRADED SAND (SP), light brown, fine grained, moist, trace rootlets. Black.
55 SS-1
2 3 5 12 20 20 14 21 22
100 SS-2
40 4 43
50 SS-3
Light brown. 70 SS-4 80.5 8.5 SILTY SAND (SM), black, fine grained.
6 8 7 3 2 2
15 8
30 SS-5
4 12
Dark brown, wet.
20 50 30
26 SS-6
100+
16
8 14 30
20 44
28 SS-7
65.5
23.5 POORLY GRADED SAND (SP), brown, fine grained, trace silt.
18 25 35
24
26 SS-8
60
SAS FORM 1836-A

FEB 08
Boring Designation
B-359-a
SHEET 1 of 2
28
Boring Designation DRILLING LOG (Cont Sheet)

PROJECT INSTALLATION
B-359-a
Ft.Stewart, Georgia
COORDINATE SYSTEM
Winn Hospital Addition

LOCATION COORDINATES
State Plane
ELEVATION TOP OF BORING
NAD83
NAVD88
N 681512 E 831780
LEGEND
89'
Samp No. RQD %
ELEV
DEPTH
% REC
REMARKS
N-Value
Blows/ 0.5 ft
60.5
28.5
28
FAT CLAY (CH), gray, high plasticity.
100 SS-9 100 SS-10
3 5 5 4 6 3
8 10 32 7
57.5
31.5 LEAN CLAY (CL), greenish gray, medium plasticity. 75 SS-11 Trace fine sand, low to medium plasticity.
4 3 2 2 3
30 SS-12
36
50.5
38.5 CLAYEY SAND (SC), fine grained.

1 1 1
40 2
26 SS-13
45.5
43.5 POORLY GRADED SAND (SP), fine grained, trace silt.

5 10 11
44
20 SS-14
21
48
3
53 SS-15 39.0 50.0 BOTTOM OF BOREHOLE AT 50.0 ft Water Level Data Reading Depth During drilling 10 24 hours 10.6
9 13
22
Notes
Date / Time 11/4/2009 11/5/2009
SAS FORM 1836-A

FEB 08
Boring Designation
B-359-a
SHEET 2 of 2

B-360
Ft.Stewart, Georgia

B-360
N 681454 E 831679
Failing 1500

LEGEND
8
DEG FROM VERTICAL
76.4' 11/6/09
COMPLETED
--0'
>30' 30'
Eidalia Gonzalez, Geologist

ELEV
DEPTH
REMARKS
N-Value
Blows/ 0.5 ft
SILTY SAND (SM), brown, fine grained, dry. 55 SS-1 Brown and tan. Black, moist. 50 SS-3 Brown. 70 SS-4 Wet. 93 SS-2
2 8 15 10 15 16 3 5 6
23 31
11
2 2 3 9 14 17
10 31
30 SS-5
72.5
13.5 POORLY GRADED SAND (SP), yellowish orange, fine grained. 30 SS-6
14 40 50
15 100+
Yellowish orange and brown, trace fine gravel, little silt.
13 40 33
20 73
28 SS-7
23 50
25 26 SS-8 50 /
57.5 56.0
28.5 SANDY LEAN CLAY (CL), light gray, medium plasticity. 30.0 BOTTOM OF BOREHOLE AT 30.0 ft 80 SS-9 Water Level Data Reading Depth During drilling 9.6 24 hours 9.3
1 2 1
3 30
Notes
Date / Time 11/6/2009 11/7/2009
SAS FORM 1836-A

FEB 08
Boring Designation
B-360
SHEET 1 of 1

B-361
Ft.Stewart, Georgia

B-361
N 681331 E 831572
Failing 1500

LEGEND
9
DEG FROM VERTICAL
76.7' 11/5/09
COMPLETED
--0'
>30' 30'

ELEV
DEPTH
REMARKS
N-Value
Blows/ 0.5 ft
SILTY SAND (SM), brown, fine grained, dry, some organics.
55 SS-1 93 SS-2
1 7 10 11 11 11 10 12 14
17 22
82.5
3.5 POORLY GRADED SAND (SP), gray, fine grained, trace silt.
50 SS-3
26
79.5
6.5 SILTY SAND (SM), black, fine grained, moist, trace organics. Wet. 70 SS-4
4 6 8 14 22 26
14
10 48
30 SS-5
72.5
13.5 POORLY GRADED SAND (SP), brown, fine grained, trace silt. 30 SS-6
15 19 40
15 59
14 31 39
20 70
28 SS-7
15 39 50
25 100+
26 SS-8
56.0
30.0 BOTTOM OF BOREHOLE AT 30.0 ft
80 SS-9 Water Level Data Reading Depth During drilling 9.3 24 hours 9.3
22 35 43
100+ 30
Notes
Date / Time 11/5/2009 11/6/2009
SAS FORM 1836-A

FEB 08
Boring Designation
B-361
SHEET 1 of 1

B-365
Ft.Stewart, Georgia

B-365
N 681499 E 831345
Failing 1500

LEGEND
7
DEG FROM VERTICAL
76.7' 11/7/09
COMPLETED
--0'
>24.4' 24.4'

ELEV
DEPTH
REMARKS
N-Value
Blows/ 0.5 ft
SILTY SAND (SM), dark brown and red, fine grained, dry, trace organics, trace clay. Dark brown, trace coarse sand. Black, moist, trace clay.
60 SS-1
2 3 6 6 4 5 3 6 9
87 SS-2
9 4 15
50 SS-3
Wet. 75 SS-4
8 12 15 9
27 8 49
87 SS-5
20 29
12 70.5 13.5 POORLY GRADED SAND (SP), yellowish brown, fine grained.
6 12 21
26 SS-6
33
16
9 14 23
20 37
30
59.6
24.4
Trace fine gravel. BOTTOM OF BOREHOLE AT 24.4 ft
100 SS-7
Refusal encountered at 25.4'
18 50
50 /5"
24
Water Level Data Reading Depth During drilling 7.3 24 hours 8
Notes
Date / Time 11/7/2009 11/7/2009
SAS FORM 1836-A

FEB 08
Boring Designation
B-365
SHEET 1 of 1

B-366
Ft.Stewart, Georgia

B-366
N 681447 E 831449
Failing 1500

LEGEND
5
DEG FROM VERTICAL
See Remarks
COMPLETED
--0'
>10' 10'
11/7/09 11/7/09 16. ELEVATION TOP OF BORING 84.1' (Estimated from plans) 17. TOTAL CORE RECOVERY FOR BORING N/A

ELEV
DEPTH
REMARKS
N-Value
Blows/ 0.5 ft
83.6
0.5
ASPHALT (Asphalt), black, dry. SILTY SAND (SM), reddish orange and dark brown, fine grained, trace fine gravel.
Water not encountered during drilling
8 12
75 SS-1
11
23
Dark brown and tan. 87 SS-2
2
4 6 5
11
Dark brown.
4
2 2
50 SS-3
6 Black, moist.
2 5
70 SS-4
8
13 8
12
100 SS-5 74.1 10.0 BOTTOM OF BOREHOLE AT 10.0 ft
22 28
50 10
SAS FORM 1836-A

FEB 08
Boring Designation
B-366
SHEET 1 of 1

B-367
Ft.Stewart, Georgia

B-367
N 681562 E 831559
Failing 1500

LEGEND
5
DEG FROM VERTICAL
74.4' 11/6/09
COMPLETED
--0'
>10' 10'

ELEV
DEPTH
REMARKS
N-Value
Blows/ 0.5 ft
SILTY SAND (SM), dark brown, fine grained, dry, trace organics, trace clay. 40 SS-1
17 30
44
14
Dark brown and tan, moist. 80 SS-2
2
6 12 8 4
20
4
7 7
40 SS-3
14
6 Dark brown, trace clay.

3 6
65
8
14 8
75.5
8.5 POORLY GRADED SAND (SP), fine grained, wet, trace fine gravel, little silt. 93 SS-4
3 17 7
24 10
74.0
10.0 BOTTOM OF BOREHOLE AT 10.0 ft Water Level Data Reading Depth During drilling 9.6 24 hours 9.6
Notes
Date / Time 11/6/2009 11/7/2009
SAS FORM 1836-A

FEB 08
Boring Designation
B-367
SHEET 1 of 1

B-368
Ft.Stewart, Georgia

B-368
N 681494 E 832260
Failing 1500

LEGEND
10
DEG FROM VERTICAL
77.2' 11/8/09
COMPLETED
--0'
>24.5' 24.5'

ELEV
DEPTH
REMARKS
N-Value
Blows/ 0.5 ft
POORLY GRADED SAND (SP), black and dark brown, fine grained, dry, some organics, trace medium sand, from 0.5' to1.0' a layer of fine silty sand. Fine to medium grained, moist. Yellow and brown.
70 SS-1 SS-2 SS-3 93 SS-4
1 6 10 4 3 3 2 5 11
16
6 4 16
43 SS-5
Tan and pinkish brown. 75 SS-6 79.5 8.5 SILTY SAND (SM), fine grained.
5 4 5 3 6 8
9 8
22 SS-7
14 12
74.5
13.5 POORLY GRADED SAND (SP), reddish brown, fine grained, wet.
9 15 19
26 SS-8
34
16
5 8 11
20 19
24 SS-9
64.5 63.5
23.5 24.5 CLAYEY SAND (SC), yellowish brown, fine grained. BOTTOM OF BOREHOLE AT 24.5 ft 100 SS-10 Refusal at 24.4'
40 50
50 /
24
Water Level Data Reading Depth During drilling 10.8 24 hours 10.8
Notes
Date / Time 11/8/2009 11/9/2009
SAS FORM 1836-A

FEB 08
Boring Designation
B-368
SHEET 1 of 1

B-369
Ft.Stewart, Georgia

B-369
N 681559 E 832266
Failing 1500

LEGEND
8
DEG FROM VERTICAL
77.5' 11/7/09
COMPLETED
--0'
>25' 25'

ELEV
DEPTH
REMARKS
N-Value
Blows/ 0.5 ft
SILTY SAND (SM), tan and dark brown, fine grained, dry, trace organics. Dark brown, trace coarse sand. 84.5 3.5 POORLY GRADED SAND (SP), yellow, fine to medium grained, trace fine gravel.
70 SS-1
2 3 7 6 11 10 5 9 11
10
93 SS-2
21 4 20
50 SS-3
Tan, moist. 65 SS-4 Brown, trace silt.
4 7 8 3 4 5
15 8
28 SS-5
9 12
74.5
13.5 SILTY SAND (SM), yellow, fine grained, wet.

4 9 11
24 SS-6
20
16
69.5
18.5 POORLY GRADED SAND (SP), tan, fine to medium grained.

4 5 7
20 12
24 SS-7
64.5 63.6 63.0
23.5 24.4 25.0 CLAYEY SAND (SC), white, fine grained. SILTY SAND (SM), fine grained. BOTTOM OF BOREHOLE AT 25.0 ft
12
93 SS-8 Water Level Data Reading Depth During drilling 10.5 24 hours 10.5
16 10
26
24
Notes
Date / Time 11/7/2009 11/8/2009
SAS FORM 1836-A

FEB 08
Boring Designation
B-369
SHEET 1 of 1

B-370
Ft.Stewart, Georgia

B-370
N 681782 E 831972
Failing 1500

LEGEND
5
DEG FROM VERTICAL
77' 11/7/09
COMPLETED
--0'
>10' 10'

ELEV
DEPTH
REMARKS
N-Value
Blows/ 0.5 ft
POORLY GRADED SAND (SP), dark brown and light gray, fine grained, dry, trace organics. 65 SS-1
Water not encountered 24 hours after drilling
2 4
8
4
Tan. 93 SS-2 80.5 3.5 SILTY SAND (SM), dark brown, fine grained, moist.
2
2 3 3 2
4
3 2
40 SS-3
6
3 6
70 SS-4
10
16 8
Brown. 93 SS-5 74.0 10.0 BOTTOM OF BOREHOLE AT 10.0 ft Water Level Data Reading Depth During drilling 7
19 27 33
60 10
Notes
Date / Time 11/7/2009
SAS FORM 1836-A

FEB 08
Boring Designation
B-370
SHEET 1 of 1

B-371
Ft.Stewart, Georgia

B-371
N 681918 E 832137
Failing 1500

LEGEND
4
DEG FROM VERTICAL
See Remarks
COMPLETED
--0'
>10' 10'

ELEV
DEPTH
REMARKS
N-Value
Blows/ 0.5 ft
SILTY SAND (SM), dark brown, fine grained, dry, trace organics, trace clay. 70 SS-1
4 7
17
10
82.0
2.0 POORLY GRADED SAND (SP), light gray and yellow, fine grained, trace silt. 87 SS-2
5 6 6 4
2 12
4
9 8
37
17
6 77.5 6.5 SILTY SAND (SM), black, fine grained, moist.

2 3
70 SS-3
6
9 8
5
8 15
23 10
SAS FORM 1836-A

FEB 08
Boring Designation
B-371
SHEET 1 of 1

B-372
Ft.Stewart, Georgia

B-372
N 682156 E 831947
Failing 1500

LEGEND
5
DEG FROM VERTICAL
See Remarks
COMPLETED
--0'
>9.4' 9.4'

ELEV
DEPTH
REMARKS
N-Value
Blows/ 0.5 ft
SILTY SAND (SM), dark brown and light brown, dry, trace organics. 65 SS-1
2 5
10
5
Tan amd light yellow. 80 SS-2
2
3 5 4
Black, moist.
4
2 3
47 SS-3
6 Very moist.
10 23
70 SS-4
29
52 8 Refusal at 9.4'
24 50
50 /5"
SAS FORM 1836-A

FEB 08
Boring Designation
B-372
SHEET 1 of 1

B-373
Ft.Stewart, Georgia

B-373
N 682019 E 831802
Failing 1500

LEGEND
5
DEG FROM VERTICAL
76.3' 11/7/09
COMPLETED
--0'
>9.9' 9.9'

ELEV
DEPTH
REMARKS
N-Value
Blows/ 0.5 ft
SILTY SAND (SM), black and light gray, fine grained, dry, trace organics. 65 SS-1
Water not encountered 24 hours after drilling
3 7
17
10
81.0
2.0 POORLY GRADED SAND (SP), light yellow, fine grained. 100 SS-2
6 8 8
2 16
79.5
3.5 SILTY SAND (SM), dark brown and tan, fine grained, moist.
4
4 4
50 SS-3
6 Wet.
7 14 23
8 Refusal at 9.9' 30 SS-4 93 SS-5 73.1 9.9 BOTTOM OF BOREHOLE AT 9.9 ft Water Level Data Reading Depth During drilling 6.7
25
37
40
100+
50
Notes
Date / Time 11/7/2009
SAS FORM 1836-A

FEB 08
Boring Designation
B-373
SHEET 1 of 1

PT-1
Ft.Stewart, Georgia

State Plane - Georgia East

10. SIZE AND TYPE OF BIT
NAD83
NAVD88
11. MANUFACTURER'S DESIGNATION OF DRILL 12. TOTAL SAMPLES 13. TOTAL NUMBER CORE BOXES DISTURBED UNDISTURBED
PT-1
N 681263 E 831505 1

LEGEND
DEG FROM VERTICAL
See Remarks
COMPLETED
--0' 5'
>5'

ELEV
DEPTH
REMARKS
N-Value
Blows/ 0.5 ft
Hand-auger boring
2 POORLY GRADED SAND (SP), dark brown, fine grained, dry, trace rootlets.
SS-1 4
80.0
SAS FORM 1836-A

FEB 08
Boring Designation
PT-1
SHEET 1 of 1

PT-2
Ft.Stewart, Georgia


NAD83
NAVD88
PT-2
N 681407 E 831492 1

LEGEND
DEG FROM VERTICAL
See Remarks
COMPLETED
--0' 5'
>5'

ELEV
DEPTH
REMARKS
N-Value
Blows/ 0.5 ft
Hand-auger boring
SS-1 4
79.0
SAS FORM 1836-A

FEB 08
Boring Designation
PT-2
SHEET 1 of 1

PT-3
Ft.Stewart, Georgia


NAD83
NAVD88
PT-3
N 681508 E 831605 1

LEGEND
DEG FROM VERTICAL
See Remarks
COMPLETED
--0' 5'
>5'

ELEV
DEPTH
REMARKS
N-Value
Blows/ 0.5 ft
Hand-auger boring
SS-1 4
79.0
SAS FORM 1836-A

FEB 08
Boring Designation
PT-3
SHEET 1 of 1

PT-4
Ft.Stewart, Georgia


NAD83
NAVD88
PT-4
N 681778 E 831795 1

LEGEND
DEG FROM VERTICAL
See Remarks
COMPLETED
--0' 5'
>5'
11/4/09 11/4/09 16. ELEVATION TOP OF BORING 83.5' (Estimated from plans) 17. TOTAL CORE RECOVERY FOR BORING N/A

ELEV
DEPTH
REMARKS
N-Value
Blows/ 0.5 ft
Hand-auger boring
SS-1 4
78.5
SAS FORM 1836-A

FEB 08
Boring Designation
PT-4
SHEET 1 of 1

PT-5
Ft.Stewart, Georgia


NAD83
NAVD88
PT-5
N 681719 E 832039 1

LEGEND
DEG FROM VERTICAL
See Remarks
COMPLETED
--0' 5'
>5'

ELEV
DEPTH
REMARKS
N-Value
Blows/ 0.5 ft
Hand-auger boring
2 SILTY SAND (SM), dark brown, fine grained, dry, trace rootlets.
SS-1 4
79.0
SAS FORM 1836-A

FEB 08
Boring Designation
PT-5
SHEET 1 of 1
ATTACHMENT C Laboratory Soils Test Results
LIQUID AND PLASTIC LIMITS TEST REPORT

60
Dashed line indicates the approximate upper limit boundary for natural soils
50
CH
40 PLASTICITY INDEX
O or
30
20
CL
O or
10
CL-ML
4 7
ML or OL
20 30 40 50 60 LIQUID LIMIT 70
MH or OH
80 90 100 110
10
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION Dark Brown SAND Light Brown Black SAND with Silt Grey Elastic SILT with Sand Black Silty SAND Grey Fat CLAY with Sand Project No. 3309.00099
LL NV NV 59 NV 64
PL NP NP 36 NP 26
PI NP NP 23 NP 38
%<#40 61.6 89.8 99.5 87.8 98.9 Remarks:
%<#200 4.2 8.9 76.7 22.7 80.1
USCS SP SP-SM MH SM CH
Client: U.S. Army Corps of Engineers
Project: Winn Hospital Addition Sample Source: Boring Samples LI:70482 Sample Source: Boring Samples LI:70482 Sample Source: Boring Samples LI:70482 Sample Source: Boring Samples LI:70482 Sample Source: Boring Samples LI:70482 Depth: 6.5' Depth: 6.5' Depth: 33.5' Depth: 8.5' Depth: 31.5'
WPC, Inc. Savannah, Georgia

Tested By: Crews Checked By: Crews
Figure
Particle Size Distribution Report

1 in. 3/8 in. in. in. #100 #140
0 10
20
30
PERCENT COARSER
40
50
60
70
80
90 100
100
10
0.1
#200
6 in.
3 in.
2 in.
1 in.
#10
#20
#30
#40
#60
#4
0.01
0.001
GRAIN SIZE - mm.

% +3" % Gravel Coarse Fine Coarse % Sand Medium % Fines Fine Silt Clay
0.0
SIEVE SIZE PERCENT FINER
0.0
SPEC.* PERCENT
0.0
PASS? (X=NO)
0.0
11.4
80.2
8.4
Material Description Light Brown SAND with Silt
#4 #10 #20 #40 #60 #100 #200
100.0 100.0 99.7 88.6 60.4 24.5 8.4
PL= NP D85= 0.3866 D30= 0.1647 Cu= 2.78 USCS= SP-SM
Atterberg Limits LL= NV Coefficients D60= 0.2486 D15= 0.1180 Cc= 1.22 Classification AASHTO= Remarks
PI= NP D50= 0.2172 D10= 0.0894
A-3
Natural Moisture = 6.2% Field Class = SP * (no specification provided) Sample Number: LI:70482 B-370 S#2 Source of Sample: Boring Samples LI:70482 Depth: 2' Client: U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Project: Winn Hospital Addition Project No: Figure Date:
11/30/2009

Tested By: Crews
Checked By: Crews

1 in. 3/8 in. in. in. #100 #140
0 10
20
30
PERCENT COARSER
40
50
60
70
80
90 100
100
10
0.1
#200
6 in.
3 in.
2 in.
1 in.
#10
#20
#30
#40
#60
#4
0.01
0.001
GRAIN SIZE - mm.

0.0
0.0
SPEC.* PERCENT
0.0
PASS? (X=NO)
0.0
10.1
82.2
7.7
Material Description Light Brown Tan SAND with Silt
#4 #10 #20 #40 #60 #100 #200
100.0 100.0 99.8 89.9 61.4 23.9 7.7
Atterberg Limits LL= NV Coefficients D60= 0.2454 D15= 0.1218 Cc= 1.16 Classification AASHTO=
PI= NP D50= 0.2157 D10= 0.0962
A-3
Remarks Natural Moisture = 11.3% Field Class = SM * (no specification provided) Sample Number: LI:70482 B-373 S#3 Source of Sample: Boring Samples LI:70482 Depth: 3.5' Client: U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Project: Winn Hospital Addition Project No: Figure Date:
11/30/2009

Tested By: Crews
Checked By: Crews

1 in. 3/8 in. in. in. #100 #140
0 10
20
30
PERCENT COARSER
40
50
60
70
80
90 100
100
10
0.1
#200
6 in.
3 in.
2 in.
1 in.
#10
#20
#30
#40
#60
#4
0.01
0.001
GRAIN SIZE - mm.

0.0
0.0
SPEC.* PERCENT
0.0
PASS? (X=NO)
0.0
9.9
78.7
11.4
Material Description Dark Brown Tan SAND with Silt
#4 #10 #20 #40 #60 #100 #200
100.0 100.0 99.7 90.1 64.7 28.2 11.4
PL= NP D85= 0.3660 D30= 0.1549 C u= USCS= SP-SM
Atterberg Limits LL= NV Coefficients D60= 0.2341 D15= 0.1022 Cc= Classification AASHTO=
PI= NP D50= 0.2051 D10=
A-2-4(0)
11/30/2009

Tested By: Crews
Checked By: Crews

1 in. 3/8 in. in. in. #100 #140
0 10
20
30
PERCENT COARSER
40
50
60
70
80
90 100
100
10
0.1
#200
6 in.
3 in.
2 in.
1 in.
#10
#20
#30
#40
#60
#4
0.01
0.001
GRAIN SIZE - mm.

0.0
SIEVE SIZE PERCENT FINER SPEC.* PERCENT PASS? (X=NO)
10.5
81.8
7.7
Material Description Black SAND with Silt
#4 #10 #20 #40 #60 #100 #200
100.0 100.0 99.7 89.5 62.3 25.0 7.7
PI= NP D50= 0.2126 D10= 0.0929
A-3
Natural Moisture = 9.3% Field Class = SM * (no specification provided) Sample Number: LI:70482 B-366 S#3 Source of Sample: Boring Samples LI:70482 Depth: 3.5' Client: U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Project: Winn Hospital Addition Project No: Figure Date:
11/30/2009

Tested By: Crews
Checked By: Crews

1 in. 3/8 in. in. in. #100 #140
0 10
20
30
PERCENT COARSER
40
50
60
70
80
90 100
100
10
0.1
#200
6 in.
3 in.
2 in.
1 in.
#10
#20
#30
#40
#60
#4
0.01
0.001
GRAIN SIZE - mm.

0.0
0.0
SPEC.* PERCENT
0.0
PASS? (X=NO)
0.0
11.9
88.1
0.0
0.0
Material Description Dark Brown SAND
#4 #10 #20 #40 #60 #100 #200
100.0 100.0 99.7 88.1 58.9 15.5 0.0
PL= NP D85= 0.3904 D30= 0.1808 Cu= 1.87 USCS= SP
PI= NP D50= 0.2252 D10= 0.1357
A-3
11/30/2009

Tested By: Crews
Checked By: Crews

1 in. 3/8 in. in. in. #100 #140
0 10
20
30
PERCENT COARSER
40
50
60
70
80
90 100
100
10
0.1
#200
6 in.
3 in.
2 in.
1 in.
#10
#20
#30
#40
#60
#4
0.01
0.001
GRAIN SIZE - mm.

0.0
8.4
81.0
10.2
Material Description Tan Black SAND with Silt
#4 #10 #20 #40 #60 #100 #200
99.6 99.6 99.3 91.2 67.2 29.1 10.2
PL= NP D85= 0.3503 D30= 0.1523 C u= USCS= SP-SM
Atterberg Limits LL= NV Coefficients D60= 0.2266 D15= 0.1042 Cc= Classification AASHTO= Remarks
PI= NP D50= 0.1997 D10=
A-3
11/30/2009

Tested By: Crews
Checked By: Crews

1 in. 3/8 in. in. in. #100 #140
0 10
20
30
PERCENT COARSER
40
50
60
70
80
90 100
100
10
0.1
#200
6 in.
3 in.
2 in.
1 in.
#10
#20
#30
#40
#60
#4
0.01
0.001
GRAIN SIZE - mm.

0.0
0.0
SPEC.* PERCENT
0.0
PASS? (X=NO)
0.0
10.5
81.9
7.6
#4 #10 #20 #40 #60 #100 #200
100.0 100.0 99.9 89.5 58.3 22.0 7.6
PI= NP D50= 0.2243 D10= 0.1014
A-3
11/30/2009

Tested By: Crews
Checked By: Crews

1 in. 3/8 in. in. in. #100 #140
0 10
20
30
PERCENT COARSER
40
50
60
70
80
90 100
100
10
0.1
#200
6 in.
3 in.
2 in.
1 in.
#10
#20
#30
#40
#60
#4
0.01
0.001
GRAIN SIZE - mm.

0.0
0.0
SPEC.* PERCENT
0.0
PASS? (X=NO)
0.0
10.9
81.3
7.8
#4 #10 #20 #40 #60 #100 #200
100.0 100.0 99.3 89.1 62.8 25.4 7.8
PI= NP D50= 0.2110 D10= 0.0918
A-3
Natural Moisture = 7.9% Field Class = SM * (no specification provided) Sample Number: LI:70482 PT-5 S#1 Source of Sample: Boring Samples LI:70482 Depth: 2.5 Client: U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Project: Winn Hospital Addition Project No: Figure Date:
11/30/2009

Tested By: Crews
Checked By: Crews

1 in. 3/8 in. in. in. #100 #140
0 10
20
30
PERCENT COARSER
40
50
60
70
80
90 100
100
10
0.1
#200
6 in.
3 in.
2 in.
1 in.
#10
#20
#30
#40
#60
#4
0.01
0.001
GRAIN SIZE - mm.

0.2
7.2
78.6
13.7
Material Description Black Orange Silty SAND
#4 #10 #20 #40 #60 #100 #200
99.7 99.5 99.1 92.3 75.3 45.0 13.7
PL= NP D85= 0.3172 D30= 0.1116 C u= USCS= SM
Atterberg Limits LL= NV Coefficients D60= 0.1916 D15= 0.0776 Cc= Classification AASHTO=
PI= NP D50= 0.1632 D10=
A-2-4(0)
Remarks Natural Moisture = 10.3% Field Class = SP * (no specification provided) Sample Number: LI:70482 PT-4 S#1 Source of Sample: Boring Samples LI:70482 Depth: 2.5' Client: U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Project: Winn Hospital Addition Project No: Figure Date:
11/30/2009

Tested By: Crews
Checked By: Crews

1 in. 3/8 in. in. in. #100 #140
0 10
20
30
PERCENT COARSER
40
50
60
70
80
90 100
100
10
0.1
#200
6 in.
3 in.
2 in.
1 in.
#10
#20
#30
#40
#60
#4
0.01
0.001
GRAIN SIZE - mm.

0.0
0.0
SPEC.* PERCENT
0.0
PASS? (X=NO)
0.0
9.6
81.5
8.9
#4 #10 #20 #40 #60 #100 #200
100.0 100.0 98.7 90.4 68.1 29.6 8.9
PI= NP D50= 0.1971 D10= 0.0813
A-3
Natural Moisture = 7.9% Field Class = SP * (no specification provided) Sample Number: LI:70482 PT-3 S#1 Source of Sample: Boring Samples LI:70482 Depth: 2.5' Client: U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Project: Winn Hospital Addition Project No: Figure Date:
11/30/2009

Tested By: Crews
Checked By: Crews

1 in. 3/8 in. in. in. #100 #140
0 10
20
30
PERCENT COARSER
40
50
60
70
80
90 100
100
10
0.1
#200
6 in.
3 in.
2 in.
1 in.
#10
#20
#30
#40
#60
#4
0.01
0.001
GRAIN SIZE - mm.

0.0
0.0
SPEC.* PERCENT
0.0
PASS? (X=NO)
0.0
8.7
86.6 Material Description
4.7
Black SAND
#4 #10 #20 #40 #60 #100 #200
100.0 100.0 99.8 91.3 68.2 24.9 4.7
PL= NP D85= 0.3428 D30= 0.1607 Cu= 2.10 USCS= SP
PI= NP D50= 0.2018 D10= 0.1074
A-3
11/30/2009

Tested By: Crews
Checked By: Crews

1 in. 3/8 in. in. in. #100 #140
0 10
20
30
PERCENT COARSER
40
50
60
70
80
90 100
100
10
0.1
#200
6 in.
3 in.
2 in.
1 in.
#10
#20
#30
#40
#60
#4
0.01
0.001
GRAIN SIZE - mm.

0.0
0.0
SPEC.* PERCENT
0.0
PASS? (X=NO)
0.0
10.9
81.7
7.4
Material Description Dark Brown Tan SAND with Silt
#4 #10 #20 #40 #60 #100 #200
100.0 100.0 99.3 89.1 62.2 24.8 7.4
PI= NP D50= 0.2127 D10= 0.0951
A-3
11/30/2009

Tested By: Crews
Checked By: Crews

1 in. 3/8 in. in. in. #100 #140
0 10
20
30
PERCENT COARSER
40
50
60
70
80
90 100
100
10
0.1
#200
6 in.
3 in.
2 in.
1 in.
#10
#20
#30
#40
#60
#4
0.01
0.001
GRAIN SIZE - mm.

0.0
0.0
SPEC.* PERCENT
0.0
PASS? (X=NO)
0.0
7.6
83.3
9.1
Material Description Dark Brown SAND with Silt
#4 #10 #20 #40 #60 #100 #200
100.0 100.0 99.8 92.4 68.1 27.1 9.1
PI= NP D50= 0.2005 D10= 0.0838
A-3
11/30/2009

Tested By: Crews
Checked By: Crews

1 in. 3/8 in. in. in. #100 #140
0 10
20
30
PERCENT COARSER
40
50
60
70
80
90 100
100
10
0.1
#200
6 in.
3 in.
2 in.
1 in.
#10
#20
#30
#40
#60
#4
0.01
0.001
GRAIN SIZE - mm.

0.0
0.0
SPEC.* PERCENT
0.0
PASS? (X=NO)
0.0
1.1
18.8
80.1
Material Description Grey Fat CLAY with Sand
#4 #10 #20 #40 #60 #100 #200
100.0 100.0 99.8 98.9 97.6 94.2 80.1
PL= 26 D85= 0.0921 D30= C u= USCS= CH
Atterberg Limits LL= 64 Coefficients D60= D15= Cc= Classification AASHTO=
PI= 38 D50= D10=
A-7-6(33)
Remarks Natural Moisture = 26.8% Field Class = CL * (no specification provided) Sample Number: LI:70482 B-359a S#11 Source of Sample: Boring Samples LI:70482 Depth: 31.5' Client: U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Project: Winn Hospital Addition Project No: Figure Date:
11/30/2009

Tested By: Crews
Checked By: Crews

1 in. 3/8 in. in. in. #100 #140
0 10
20
30
PERCENT COARSER
40
50
60
70
80
90 100
100
10
0.1
#200
6 in.
3 in.
2 in.
1 in.
#10
#20
#30
#40
#60
#4
0.01
0.001
GRAIN SIZE - mm.

0.0
0.0
SPEC.* PERCENT
0.0
PASS? (X=NO)
0.2
12.0
65.1 Material Description
22.7
Black Silty SAND
#4 #10 #20 #40 #60 #100 #200
100.0 99.8 98.2 87.8 65.8 36.9 22.7
PL= NP D85= 0.3872 D30= 0.1229 C u= USCS= SM
Atterberg Limits LL= NV Coefficients D60= 0.2263 D15= Cc= Classification AASHTO= Remarks
PI= NP D50= 0.1917 D10=
A-2-4(0)
Natural Moisture = 20.7 Field Class = SM * (no specification provided) Sample Number: LI:70482 B-359a S#5 Source of Sample: Boring Samples LI:70482 Depth: 8.5' Client: U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Project: Winn Hospital Addition Project No: Figure Date:
11/30/2009

Tested By: Crews
Checked By: Crews

1 in. 3/8 in. in. in. #100 #140
0 10
20
30
PERCENT COARSER
40
50
60
70
80
90 100
100
10
0.1
#200
6 in.
3 in.
2 in.
1 in.
#10
#20
#30
#40
#60
#4
0.01
0.001
GRAIN SIZE - mm.

0.0
0.0
SPEC.* PERCENT
0.0
PASS? (X=NO)
0.0
0.5
22.8
76.7
Material Description Grey Elastic SILT with Sand
#4 #10 #20 #40 #60 #100 #200
100.0 100.0 99.9 99.5 98.2 94.1 76.7
PL= 36 D85= 0.0997 D30= C u= USCS= MH
Atterberg Limits LL= 59 Coefficients D60= D15= Cc= Classification AASHTO=
PI= 23 D50= D10=
A-7-5(20)
Remarks Nayural Moisture = 41.4% Field Class = CH * (no specification provided) Sample Number: LI:70482 B-358 S#11 Source of Sample: Boring Samples LI:70482 Depth: 33.5' Client: U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Project: Winn Hospital Addition Project No: Figure Date:
11/30/2009

Tested By: Crews
Checked By: Crews

1 in. 3/8 in. in. in. #100 #140
0 10
20
30
PERCENT COARSER
40
50
60
70
80
90 100
100
10
0.1
#200
6 in.
3 in.
2 in.
1 in.
#10
#20
#30
#40
#60
#4
0.01
0.001
GRAIN SIZE - mm.

0.0
0.0
SPEC.* PERCENT
0.0
PASS? (X=NO)
0.0
10.2
80.9
8.9
Material Description Light Brown Black SAND with Silt
#4 #10 #20 #40 #60 #100 #200
100.0 100.0 99.7 89.8 63.3 25.3 8.9
PI= NP D50= 0.2103 D10= 0.0862
A-3
Remarks Natural Moisture = 10.7% Field Class = SP * (no specification provided) Sample Number: LI:70482 B-358 S#5 Source of Sample: Boring Samples LI:70482 Depth: 6.5' Client: U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Project: Winn Hospital Addition Project No: Figure Date:
11/30/2009

Tested By: Crews
Checked By: Crews

1 in. 3/8 in. in. in. #100 #140
0 10
20
30
PERCENT COARSER
40
50
60
70
80
90 100
100
10
0.1
#200
6 in.
3 in.
2 in.
1 in.
#10
#20
#30
#40
#60
#4
0.01
0.001
GRAIN SIZE - mm.

2.3
35.9
57.4
4.2
Material Description Dark Brown SAND
#4 #10 #20 #40 #60 #100 #200
99.8 97.5 85.7 61.6 31.4 11.8 4.2
PL= NP D85= 0.8238 D30= 0.2435 Cu= 2.99 USCS= SP
PI= NP D50= 0.3456 D10= 0.1378
A-3
Natural Moisture = 3.9% Field Class = SP * (no specification provided) Sample Number: LI:70482 B-358 S#4 Source of Sample: Boring Samples LI:70482 Depth: 6.5' Client: U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Project: Winn Hospital Addition Project No: Figure Date:
11/30/2009

Tested By: Crews
Checked By: Crews

1 in. 3/8 in. in. in. #100 #140
0 10
20
30
PERCENT COARSER
40
50
60
70
80
90 100
100
10
0.1
#200
6 in.
3 in.
2 in.
1 in.
#10
#20
#30
#40
#60
#4
0.01
0.001
GRAIN SIZE - mm.

0.9
20.6
64.9
8.6
Material Description Black Tan SAND with Silt
#4 #10 #20 #40 #60 #100 #200
95.0 94.1 89.0 73.5 47.3 20.7 8.6
PI= NP D50= 0.2623 D10= 0.0895
A-3
Natural Moisture = 8.7% Field Class = SP * (no specification provided) Sample Number: LI:70482 B-368 S#4 Source of Sample: Boring Samples LI:70482 Depth: 2' Client: U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Project: Winn Hospital Addition Project No: Figure Date:
11/30/2009

Tested By: Crews
Checked By: Crews

1 in. 3/8 in. in. in. #100 #140
0 10
20
30
PERCENT COARSER
40
50
60
70
80
90 100
100
10
0.1
#200
6 in.
3 in.
2 in.
1 in.
#10
#20
#30
#40
#60
#4
0.01
0.001
GRAIN SIZE - mm.

0.0
0.0
SPEC.* PERCENT
0.0
PASS? (X=NO)
0.0
10.7
84.6
4.7
Material Description Light Brown Tan SAND
#4 #10 #20 #40 #60 #100 #200
100.0 100.0 99.5 89.3 63.7 22.9 4.7
PL= NP D85= 0.3724 D30= 0.1661 Cu= 2.15 USCS= SP
PI= NP D50= 0.2110 D10= 0.1107
A-3
Natural Moisture = 7.8% Field Class = SP * (no specification provided) Sample Number: LI:70482 B-368 S#6 Source of Sample: Boring Samples LI:70482 Depth: 6.5' Client: U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Project: Winn Hospital Addition Project No: Figure Date:
11/30/2009

Tested By: Crews
Checked By: Crews

1 in. 3/8 in. in. in. #100 #140
0 10
20
30
PERCENT COARSER
40
50
60
70
80
90 100
100
10
0.1
#200
6 in.
3 in.
2 in.
1 in.
#10
#20
#30
#40
#60
#4
0.01
0.001
GRAIN SIZE - mm.

0.0
0.0
SPEC.* PERCENT
0.0
PASS? (X=NO)
0.0
9.0
84.9
6.1
Material Description Light and Dark Brown SAND with Silt
#4 #10 #20 #40 #60 #100 #200
100.0 100.0 99.6 91.0 68.2 24.9 6.1
PI= NP D50= 0.2018 D10= 0.1052
A-3
Remarks Natural Moisture = 17.8% Field Class = SP * (no specification provided) Sample Number: LI:70482 B-369 S#5 Source of Sample: Boring Samples LI:70482 Depth: 8.5' Client: U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Project: Winn Hospital Addition Project No: Figure Date:
11/30/2009

Tested By: Crews
Checked By: Crews

60
50
CH
40 PLASTICITY INDEX
O or
30
20
CL
O or
10
CL-ML
4 7
ML or OL
20 30 40 50 60 LIQUID LIMIT 70
MH or OH
80 90 100 110
10
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION Black Orange Silty SAND Black SAND with Silt
LL NV NV
PL NP NP
PI NP NP
%<#40 92.3 89.1
%<#200 13.7 7.8
USCS SM SP-SM
Project No.
3309.00099
Remarks:
Project: Winn Hospital Addition Sample Source: Boring Samples LI:70482 Sample Source: Boring Samples LI:70482 Depth: 2.5' Depth: 2.5

Figure

60
50
CH
40 PLASTICITY INDEX
O or
30
20
CL
O or
10
CL-ML
4 7
ML or OL
20 30 40 50 60 LIQUID LIMIT 70
MH or OH
80 90 100 110
10
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION Dark Brown Tan SAND with Silt Light Brown Tan SAND with Silt Dark Brown SAND with Silt Dark Brown Tan SAND with Silt Black SAND with Silt Project No. 3309.00099
LL NV NV NV NV NV
PL NP NP NP NP NP
PI NP NP NP NP NP
%<#40 90.1 89.9 92.4 89.1 90.4 Remarks:
%<#200 11.4 7.7 9.1 7.4 8.9
USCS SP-SM SP-SM SP-SM SP-SM SP-SM

Figure

60
50
CH
40 PLASTICITY INDEX
O or
30
20
CL
O or
10
CL-ML
4 7
ML or OL
20 30 40 50 60 LIQUID LIMIT 70
MH or OH
80 90 100 110
10
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION Black Tan SAND with Silt Light Brown Tan SAND Light and Dark Brown SAND with Silt Light Brown SAND with Silt Dark Brown SAND with Silt Project No. 3309.00099
LL NV NV NV NV NV
PL NP NP NP NP NP
PI NP NP NP NP NP
%<#40 73.5 89.3 91.0 88.6 88.8 Remarks:
%<#200 8.6 4.7 6.1 8.4 8.2
USCS SP-SM SP SP-SM SP-SM SP-SM
Project: Winn Hospital Addition Sample Source: Boring Samples LI:70482 Sample Source: Boring Samples LI:70482 Sample Source: Boring Samples LI:70482 Sample Source: Boring Samples LI:70482 Sample Source: Boring Samples LI:70482 Depth: 2' Depth: 6.5' Depth: 8.5' Depth: 2' Depth: 3.5'

Figure

60
50
CH
40 PLASTICITY INDEX
O or
30
20
CL
O or
10
CL-ML
4 7
ML or OL
20 30 40 50 60 LIQUID LIMIT 70
MH or OH
80 90 100 110
10
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION Black SAND with Silt Black SAND Dark Brown SAND Black SAND with Silt Tan Black SAND with Silt Project No. 3309.00099
LL NV NV NV NV NV
PL NP NP NP NP NP
PI NP NP NP NP NP
%<#40 89.5 91.3 88.1 89.5 91.2 Remarks:
%<#200 7.6 4.7 0.0 7.7 10.2
USCS SP-SM SP SP SP-SM SP-SM

Figure

60
50
CH
40 PLASTICITY INDEX
O or
30
20
CL
O or
10
CL-ML
4 7
ML or OL
20 30 40 50 60 LIQUID LIMIT 70
MH or OH
80 90 100 110
10
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION Dark Brown SAND Light Brown Black SAND with Silt Grey Elastic SILT with Sand Black Silty SAND Grey Fat CLAY with Sand Project No. 3309.00099
LL NV NV 59 NV 64
PL NP NP 36 NP 26
PI NP NP 23 NP 38
%<#40 61.6 89.8 99.5 87.8 98.9 Remarks:
%<#200 4.2 8.9 76.7 22.7 80.1
USCS SP SP-SM MH SM CH

Figure

1 in. 3/8 in. in. in. #100 #140
0 10
20
30
PERCENT COARSER
40
50
60
70
80
90 100
100
10
0.1
#200
6 in.
3 in.
2 in.
1 in.
#10
#20
#30
#40
#60
#4
0.01
0.001
GRAIN SIZE - mm.

0.0
0.0
SPEC.* PERCENT
0.0
PASS? (X=NO)
0.0
11.2
80.6
8.2
Material Description Dark Brown SAND with Silt
#4 #10 #20 #40 #60 #100 #200
100.0 100.0 99.9 88.8 60.4 23.2 8.2
PI= NP D50= 0.2182 D10= 0.0960
A-3
11/30/2009

Tested By: Crews
Checked By: Crews
101B Estus Road Savannah, Ga. 31404 T: (912) 944-3748 F: (912) 234-9294
Laboratory Analytical Report

Client Report For: Attention: Client Address: WPC Mr. John Mnieckonski 2201 Rowland Ave. Savannah, GA 31410
Report Date: LAB ID: Project ID: Comment:
December 09, 2009 AL09NOV25-04 Winn Hospital Addition
The following test results meet all NELAC requirements for analytes for which certification is available. Any deviations from these quality systems will be noted in this case narrative. All analyses performed by Avery Laboratories & Environmental Services, LLC unless noted. Parameters not perfromed by Avery Laboratories will be qualified with "Sub" in the qualifier field of this report. For questions regarding this report, contact Robert Paul Grimm at (912)944-3748.
CASE NARRATIVE:
Approved By:__________________________________
Robert Paul Grimm, Technical Director
Date:December 09, 2009
Note: The results in this report relate only to the samples submitted on the attached Chain of Custody.
XLIMS_RLReport Rev 003 Rev Date: 05/01/2009
Page 1 of 8
Avery Laboratories & Environmental Services 101B Estus Road T: (912) 944-3748 Savannah, Ga. 31404 F: (912) 234-9294
NELAP Accreditor: Florida Dept. of Health NELAP Laboratory ID: E87941 EPA Lab ID: GA01177, South Carolina ID: 98023
Client: Lab ID: % Solid:

Analyses
WPC AL09NOV25-04-001 93.8
Client Sample ID:LI:70432 PT-1 S#1 Collection Date:11/24/2009 2:05:00 PM Matrix:Soil
Chloride (water extraction)

Chloride Dilution Factor Analyzed By Analysis Date/Time
SM 4500-CL-E (20th)
Result 586 1 BM 12/09/09 11:38
Batch: Bat-120909-009
Reporting Limit 209 Qual
Run: 1
Unit mg/kg dw
pH-Soil
pH Dilution Factor Analyzed By Analysis Date/Time
SW-846 9045C
Result 11.8 1.0 RA 12/03/09 16:01
Batch: Bat-120909-011
Reporting Limit Qual
Run: 1
Unit pH Units
Resistivity (by calculation)

Resistivity Analysis Date/Time
EPA 120.1
Result 0.0212 12/04/09 16:03
Batch: Bat-120809-001
Run: 1
Unit megaohmcm
Sulfate (water extraction)

Sulfate as SO4 Dilution Factor Analyzed By Analysis Date/Time
ASTM D516-90
Result BRL 1.0 BM 12/09/09 11:04
Batch: Bat-120909-010
Run: 1
Unit mg/kg dw
Page 2 of 8
Avery Laboratories & Environmental Services 101B Estus Road T: (912) 944-3748 Client: Lab ID: % Solid:
Analyses Chloride (water extraction)
NELAP Accreditor: Florida Dept. of Health NELAP Laboratory ID: E87941 EPA Lab ID: GA01177, South Carolina ID: 98023 Client Sample ID:LI:70482 PT-2 S#1 Collection Date:11/24/2009 2:10:00 PM Matrix:Soil
Savannah, Ga. 31404 F: (912) 234-9294
WPC AL09NOV25-04-002 94.6
SM 4500-CL-E (20th)
Result 389 1 BM 12/09/09 11:38
Batch: Bat-120909-009
Run: 1
Unit mg/kg dw
pH-Soil
SW-846 9045C
Result 7.31 1.0 RA 12/03/09 16:15
Batch: Bat-120909-011
Run: 1
Unit pH Units

EPA 120.1
Result 0.0262 12/04/09 16:04
Batch: Bat-120809-001
Run: 1
Unit megaohmcm

ASTM D516-90
Result BRL 1.0 BM 12/09/09 11:04
Batch: Bat-120909-010
Run: 1
Unit mg/kg dw
Page 3 of 8
Avery Laboratories & Environmental Services 101B Estus Road T: (912) 944-3748 Client: Lab ID: % Solid:
Analyses Chloride (water extraction)
NELAP Accreditor: Florida Dept. of Health NELAP Laboratory ID: E87941 EPA Lab ID: GA01177, South Carolina ID: 98023 Client Sample ID:LI:70482 PT-3 S#1 Collection Date:11/24/2009 2:15:00 PM Matrix:Soil
Savannah, Ga. 31404 F: (912) 234-9294
WPC AL09NOV25-04-003 93.4
SM 4500-CL-E (20th)
Result 454 1 BM 12/09/09 11:38
Batch: Bat-120909-009
Run: 1
Unit mg/kg dw
pH-Soil
SW-846 9045C
Result 6.99 1.0 RA 12/03/09 16:30
Batch: Bat-120909-011
Run: 1
Unit pH Units

EPA 120.1
Result 0.0187 12/04/09 15:58
Batch: Bat-120809-001
Run: 1
Unit megaohmcm

ASTM D516-90
Result BRL 1.0 BM 12/09/09 11:04
Batch: Bat-120909-010
Run: 1
Unit mg/kg dw
Page 4 of 8
Avery Laboratories & Environmental Services 101B Estus Road T: (912) 944-3748 Savannah, Ga. 31404 F: (912) 234-9294
NELAP Accreditor: Florida Dept. of Health NELAP Laboratory ID: E87941 EPA Lab ID: GA01177, South Carolina ID: 98023
Data Qualifier H I J1 J2 J3 L N O S U V Y D A Z BB CC DD EE FF BDL BRL Sub
Qualifier Definition The parameter was analyzed outside the method specified holding time. The reported value is between the method detection limit and the practical quantitation limit. Estimated value- The reported value failed the established quality control criteria for accuracy and /or precision. Estimated value- The sample matrix interfered with the ability to make any accurate determination. Estimated Value- The data are questionable because of improper lab protocol. Off scale high-The concentration of the analyte exceeds the linear range. Presumptive evidence of presence of material. (tentatively identified compound) Sampled, but analysis was lost or not performed. The surrogate recovery was outside the established laboratory recovery limit. Compound was analyzed but not detected. Analyte was detected in both sample and method blank. The analysis was from an improperly preserved sample. The data may not be accurate. Due to dilution, the spike and/ or surrogate has not been reported. Detection limit elevated due to abundance of non-target analyte. See case narrative. The sample was received unpreserved. Sample was preserved at time of receipt or at time of sample preparation. The sample was received with insufficient preservation. The sample was properly preserved at time of receipt or at time of sample preparation. The vial analyzed for volatile analysis had headspace greater than 6mm. The results of the analysis may be bias low. The seed control factor for biochemical oxygen demand did not meet the method limits of 0.60-1.0 mg/l The blank for biochemical oxygen demand depleted more then the method limit of 0.20 mg/l. Below the method detedtion limit. Below the method reporting limit. Subcontracted Parameter
Page 5 of 8
Avery Laboratories & Environmental Services, LLC
Date: 12/9/2009 Analytical QC Summary Report
Client: WPC COC #: AL09NOV25-04
Batch: Bat-120909-009
Sample: Bat-120909-009-LCSD-01 Parameter
Chloride (% Recovery) Chloride (RPD) Dilution Factor Analyzed By Analysis Date/Time
QC Type: LCSD Unit

% %
Result
101 1 1.0 BM 12/09/09 11:38
Qual
Observed
2530 mg/kg dw
True Value
2500 mg/kg dw
Low Limit (%)

80
High Limit (%)

120
RPD Limit
20
Sample: Bat-120909-009-LCS-01 Parameter

Chloride (% Recovery) Analyzed By Analysis Date/Time
QC Type: LCS Unit

%
Result
100 BM 12/09/09 11:38
Qual
Observed
2490 mg/kg dw
True Value
2500 mg/kg dw
Low Limit (%)

80
High Limit (%)

120
RPD Limit
Sample: Bat-120909-009-MB-01 Parameter

Chloride Analyzed By Analysis Date/Time
QC Type: MB Unit
mg/kg dw
Result
BRL BM 12/09/09 11:38
Qual
RL
200
RPD Limit
Page 6 of 8
Batch: Bat-120809-001
Analysis Date/Time
QC Type: LCS Unit Observed True Value Low Limit (%) High Limit (%) RPD Limit
Result
12/04/09 15:37
Qual

Analysis Date/Time
QC Type: MB Unit RL RPD Limit
Result
12/04/09 15:38
Qual
Page 7 of 8
Batch: Bat-120909-010
Sulfate as SO4 (% Recovery) Dilution Factor Analyzed By Analysis Date/Time
QC Type: LCS Unit

%
Result
99 1.0 BM 12/09/09 11:04
Qual
Observed
2000 mg/kg dw
True Value
2000 mg/kg dw
Low Limit (%)

80
High Limit (%)

120
RPD Limit
Sample: Bat-120909-010-LCSD-01 Parameter

Sulfate as SO4 (% Recovery) Sulfate as SO4 (RPD) Dilution Factor Analyzed By Analysis Date/Time
QC Type: LCSD Unit

% %
Result
100 2 1.0 BM 12/09/09 11:04
Qual
Observed
2000 mg/kg dw
True Value
2000 mg/kg dw
Low Limit (%)

80
High Limit (%)

120
RPD Limit
20

QC Type: MB Unit
mg/kg dw
Result
BRL 1.0 BM 12/09/09 11:04
Qual
RL
250
RPD Limit
Page 8 of 8
ATTACHMENT D Soil Resistivity Test Results
Winn Army Hospital Addition Ph 1 LI:70482, FY11 Vertical Wenner Resistivity Survey
Line No. 1, bw PT-2 and PT-3 (90' north-south line, starting at sidewalk) Conducted 05 Nov 2009 Weather Conditions: 70F, Sunny Volts V (mV) Current I (mA) 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 2 Ohms reading 960 595 441 341 271 123.7 30.2 10.11 Apparent Depth in Resistivity feet ohm-cm 183,925 1 227,990 2 253,472 3 261,327 4 259,603 5 236,995 10 115,719 20 58,109 30
Line No. 2 Line No. 1
Winn Army Hospital Addition Resistivity test between PT-2 and PT-3
Apparent Resistivity, ohm-cm
Volts V (mV)
Current I (mA) 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 2
Ohms reading 865 608 440 331 262 111 29.2 9.33
Apparent Depth in Resistivity feet ohm-cm 165,724 1 232,972 2 252,897 3 253,663 4 250,981 5 212,663 10 111,888 20 53,626 30
Depth in Feet
Line No. 2, bw PT-2 and PT-3 (90' east-west line, centered at intersection with Line No. 1) Conducted 05 Nov 2009 Weather Conditions: 70F, Sunny
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
0 .0
5 .0
0E +0 0E 0 1.0 +04 0E 1.5 +05 0E 2.0 +05 0E 2.5 +05 0E 3.0 +05 0E 3.5 +05 0E 4.0 +05 0E 4.5 +05 0E 5.0 +05 0E +0 5
Line No. 1, bw PT-1 and B-361 (90' north-south line, starting at sidewalk) Conducted 05 Nov 2009 Weather Conditions: 70F, Sunny Volts V (mV) Current I (mA) 5 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Ohms reading 837 530 375 337 286 104 39.5 20.7 Apparent Depth in Resistivity feet ohm-cm 160,360 1 203,084 2 215,537 3 258,261 4 273,972 5 199,252 10 113,516 15 79,318 20
Line N0. 1 Line No. 2
Winn Army Hospital Addition Resistivity test between PT-1 and B-361
Apparent Resistivity, ohm-cm

+0 0 +0 4 +0 5 +0 5 +0 5 +0 5 +0 5 +0 5 +0 5 +0 5 4.5 0E +0 5 5.0 0E
2.0 0E
Depth in Feet
Line No. 2, bw PT-1 and B-361 (90' north-south line, starting at sidewalk) Conducted 05 Nov 2009 Weather Conditions: 70F, Sunny Volts V (mV) Current I (mA) 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 Ohms reading 922 522 385 331 277 233 51.8 19.64 Apparent Depth in Resistivity feet ohm-cm 176,645 1 200,018 2 221,285 3 253,663 4 265,350 5 446,401 10 148,864 15 75,256 20
10
15
20
25
30
0.0 0E
2.5 0E
5.0 0E
1.0 0E
1.5 0E
3.0 0E
3.5 0E
4.0 0E
ATTACHMENT E Soil Percolation Test Results
Winn Army Hospital Addition LI 70482 FY11 / 72292 FY12 Fort Stewart, GA tests performed by FN and RR on 04 - 05 Nov 09 Percolation test were performed in accordance with DM 110-1-1, Jul 83, chapter 20, the percolation rate to use is shown in boldface type Weather Conditions:70F, cloudy 2 - 3" of pea gravel was placed in the bottom of the holes before water was added perc tests were performed on 05 Nov Water levels were measured by a water level indicator and a batter board. A minimum 6" water column above gravel was used as the initial height of water, subsequently recharged to this level after each reading. All times were noted by digital watch and stop watch
Percolation Test # PT-1 Percolation test hole: 4" diameter x 49"deep Classification of test hole soil: 0.0' -- 4'-1" Poorly Graded Sand (SP), fine-grained, dark brown, trace roots Start and End Times Time (min.) 28 1302-1330 30 1330-1401 30 1401-1431 30 1431-1501 30 1502-1532 30 1532-1602 30 1602-1632 30 1632-1702 initial reading from ground surface, ft 1.80 2.15 2.35 2.55 2.05 2.20 2.35 2.50 final reading from ground surface, ft 2.15 2.35 2.55 2.7 2.2 2.35 2.5 2.63 perc rate ft/hr 0.75 0.40 0.40 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.26
in/hr 9.00 4.80 4.80 3.60 3.60 3.60 3.60 3.12
Percolation Test # PT-2 Percolation test hole: 4" diameter x 57"deep Classification of test hole soil: 0.0' -- 4'-7" Poorly Graded Sand (SP), fine-grained, dark brown, trace roots Start and End Times Time (min.) 30 1259-1329 30 1329-1359 30 1400-1430 30 1430-1500 30 1500-1530 30 1531-1601 30 1601-1631 30 1631-1701 initial reading from top of hole, ft 2.20 2.45 2.10 2.30 2.40 1.90 2.15 2.27 final reading from top of hole, ft 2.45 2.6 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.15 2.27 2.37 perc rate ft/hr 0.50 0.30 0.40 0.20 0.20 0.50 0.24 0.20
in/hr 6.00 3.60 4.80 2.40 2.40 6.00 2.88 2.40
Percolation Test # PT-3 Percolation test hole: 4" diameter x 56"deep Classification of test hole soil: 0.0' -- 4'-8" Poorly Graded Sand (SP), fine-grained, dark brown, trace roots Start and End Times Time (min.) 30 1257-1327 30 1327-1357 30 1358-1428 30 1428-1458 30 1458-1528 30 1529-1559 30 1559-1629 30 1629-1659 initial reading from top of hole, ft 2.40 2.75 2.20 2.55 2.65 2.35 2.50 2.60 final reading from top of hole, ft 2.75 2.9 2.55 2.65 2.7 2.5 2.6 2.7 perc rate ft/hr 0.70 0.30 0.70 0.20 0.10 0.30 0.20 0.20
in/hr 8.40 3.60 8.40 2.40 1.20 3.60 2.40 2.40
Percolation Test # PT-4 Percolation test hole: 4" diameter x 31"deep Classification of test hole soil: 0.0' -- 2'-7" Poorly Graded Sand (SP), fine-grained, dark brown, trace orange silty sand Start and End Times Time (min.) 30 1310-1340 30 1342-1412 30 1412-1442 30 1442-1512 30 1512-1542 30 1542-1612 30 1612-1642 30 1642-1712 initial reading from top of hole, ft 0.70 0.45 0.75 0.85 0.95 1.00 1.05 1.10 final reading from top of hole, ft 0.95 0.75 0.85 0.95 1 1.05 1.1 1.17 perc rate ft/hr 0.50 0.60 0.20 0.20 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.14
in/hr 6.00 7.20 2.40 2.40 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.68
Percolation Test # PT-5 Percolation test hole: 4" diameter x 57"deep Classification of test hole soil: 0.0' -- 4'-9" Silty Sand (SM), fine-grained, black Start and End Times Time (min.) 30 1308-1338 30 1338-1408 30 1408-1438 30 1438-1508 30 1508-1538 30 1538-1608 30 1608-1638 30 1638-1708 initial reading from top of hole, ft 2.10 2.25 2.35 2.40 2.50 2.55 2.60 2.65 final reading from top of hole, ft 2.25 2.35 2.4 2.5 2.55 2.6 2.65 2.7 perc rate ft/hr 0.30 0.20 0.10 0.20 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10
in/hr 3.60 2.40 1.20 2.40 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20
W912HN-12-R-0003
SECTION 31 11 00 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 08/08 PART 1 1.1 GENERAL SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-03 Product Data Nonsaleable Materials; G, RO Written permission to dispose of such products on private property shall be filed with the Contracting Officer. SD-04 Samples Tree wound paint Herbicide Samples in cans with manufacturer's label. 1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver materials to store at the site, and handle in a manner which will maintain the materials in their original manufactured or fabricated condition until ready for use. PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS TREE WOUND PAINT
Bituminous based paint of standard manufacture specially formulated for tree wounds. 2.2 HERBICIDE
Comply with Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act (Title 7 U.S.C. Section 136) for requirements on Contractor's licensing, certification and record keeping. Contact the command Pest Control Coordinator prior to starting work. PART 3 3.1 3.1.1 EXECUTION PROTECTION Roads and Walks
Keep roads and walks free of dirt and debris at all times.
SECTION 31 11 00
Page 1
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.1.2
Trees, Shrubs, and Existing Facilities
Trees and vegetation to be left standing shall be protected from damage incident to clearing, grubbing, and construction operations by the erection of barriers or by such other means as the circumstances require. 3.1.3 Utility Lines
Protect existing utility lines that are indicated to remain from damage. Notify the Contracting Officer immediately of damage to or an encounter with an unknown existing utility line. The Contractor shall be responsible for the repairs of damage to existing utility lines that are indicated or made known to the Contractor prior to start of clearing and grubbing operations. When utility lines which are to be removed are encountered within the area of operations, notify the Contracting Officer in ample time to minimize interruption of the service. Refer to Section 01 30 00, ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS and Section 01 57 19.00 20, TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS for additional utility protection. 3.2 CLEARING
Clearing shall consist of the felling, trimming, and cutting of trees into sections and the satisfactory disposal of the trees and other vegetation designated for removal, including downed timber, snags, brush, and rubbish occurring within the areas to be cleared. Clearing shall also include the removal and disposal of structures that obtrude, encroach upon, or otherwise obstruct the work. Trees, stumps, roots, brush, and other vegetation in areas to be cleared shall be cut off flush with or below the original ground surface, except such trees and vegetation as may be indicated or directed to be left standing. Trees designated to be left standing within the cleared areas shall be trimmed of dead branches 1-1/2 inches or more in diameter and shall be trimmed of all branches the heights indicated or directed. Limbs and branches to be trimmed shall be neatly cut close to the bole of the tree or main branches. Cuts more than 1-1/2 inches in diameter shall be painted with an approved tree-wound paint. 3.3 TREE REMOVAL
Where indicated or directed, trees and stumps that are designated as trees shall be removed from areas outside those areas designated for clearing and grubbing. This work shall include the felling of such trees and the removal of their stumps and roots as specified in paragraph GRUBBING. Trees shall be disposed of as specified in paragraph DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS. 3.4 PRUNING
Prune or trim trees designated to be left standing within the cleared areas of dead branches 1 1/2 inches or more in diameter; and trim branches to heights and in a manner as indicated. Neatly cut limbs and branches to be trimmed close to the bole of the tree or main branches. Paint cuts more than 1 1/4 inches in diameter with an approved tree wound paint. 3.5 GRUBBING
Grubbing shall consist of the removal and disposal of stumps, roots larger than 3 inches in diameter, and matted roots from the designated grubbing areas. Material to be grubbed, together with logs and other organic or metallic debris not suitable for foundation purposes, shall be removed to a depth of not less than 18 inches below the original surface level of the SECTION 31 11 00 Page 2
W912HN-12-R-0003
ground in areas indicated to be grubbed and in areas indicated as construction areas under this contract, such as areas for buildings, and areas to be paved. Depressions made by grubbing shall be filled with suitable material and compacted to make the surface conform with the original adjacent surface of the ground. 3.6 3.6.1 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS Saleable Timber
1. Consider felled timber from which saw logs, pulpwood, posts, poles, ties, or fuelwood can be produced as saleable timber. Trim limbs and tops, and saw into saleable lengths of 10 feet for saw logs, 8.33 feet for pulpwood, 20-75 feet for poles, 8 feet for ties, and 4 feet for fuelwood, and stockpile adjacent to the site. The stockpile timber will remain the property of the Government. 2. The Government shall, by separate contract, harvest all saleable timber from the project site. All remaining timber, limbs, tops, stumps, and debris shall be cleared and disposed of by the Contractor as specified. 3. All timber removed from the project site shall become the property of the Contractor. The Contractor shall reimburse the Government for the value of the timber (which the Government has appraised at $TBD). The Contractor shall submit payment to the Contracting Officer by cashier's or certified check in the amount of $TBD, made payable to the U.S. Treasury. Payment shall be made within 30 days of the Notice to Proceed. The Contracting Officer shall deposit the check into the appropriate account. 4. All timber on the project site noted for clearing and grubbing shall become the property of the Contractor, and shall be removed from the project site and disposed of off station. 3.6.2 Nonsaleable Materials
Logs, stumps, roots, brush, rotten wood, and other refuse from the clearing and grubbing operations, except for salable timber, shall be disposed of outside the limits of Government-controlled land at the Contractor's responsibility, except when otherwise directed in writing. Such directive will state the conditions covering the disposal of such products and will also state the areas in which they may be placed. -- End of Section --
SECTION 31 11 00
Page 3
W912HN-12-R-0003
SECTION 31 31 16 SOIL TREATMENT FOR SUBTERRANEAN TERMITE CONTROL 08/08 PART 1 1.1 GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA) 7 USC Section 136 Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act
1.2
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-03 Product Data Termiticide Application Plan; G, RO Termiticide application plan with proposed sequence of treatment work with dates and times. Include the termiticide trade name, EPA registration number, chemical composition, formulation, concentration of original and diluted material, application rate of active ingredients, method of application, area/volume treated, amount applied; and the name and state license number of the state certified applicator. Termiticides Manufacturer's label and Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for termiticides proposed for use. Foundation Exterior Written verification that other site work will not disturb the treatment. Utilities and Vents Written verification that utilities and vents have been located. Crawl and Plenum Air Spaces Written verification that crawl spaces and plenum air spaces have been located.
SECTION 31 31 16
Page 1
W912HN-12-R-0003
Verification of Measurement Written verification that the volume of termiticide used meets the application rate. Application Equipment A listing of equipment to be used. Warranty Copy of Contractor's warrany. SD-04 Samples Termiticides Samples of the pesticides used in this work. The Contracting Officer may draw, at any time and without prior notice, from stocks at the job site; should analysis, performed by the Government, indicate such samples to contain less than the amount of active ingredient specified on the label, work performed with such products shall be repeated, with pesticides conforming to this specification, at no additional cost to the Government. SD-06 Test Reports Equipment Calibration and Tank Measurement Certification of calibration tests conducted on the equipment used in the termiticide application. Soil Moisture Soil moisture test result. Quality Assurance Pest Management Report and copies of daily records signed by an officer of the Contractor. SD-07 Certificates Qualifications Qualifications and state license number of the termiticide applicator. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Comply with 7 USC Section 136 for requirements on Contractor's licensing, certification, and record keeping. Maintain daily records using Pest Management Maintenance Record, DD Form 1532-1 and submit copies of records when requested by the Contracting Officer. These forms may be obtained from the main web site: http://www.dtic.mil/whs/directives/infomgt/forms/ddforms1500-1999.htm Upon completion of this work, submit Pest Management Report DD Form 1532 SECTION 31 31 16 Page 2
W912HN-12-R-0003
identifying target pest, type of operation, brand name and manufacturer of pesticide, formulation, concentration or rate of application used. 1.3.1 Qualifications
For the application of pesticides, use the services of a subcontractor whose principal business is pest control. The subcontractor shall be licensed and certified in the state where the work is to be performed. Termiticide applicators shall also be certified in the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) pesticide applicator category which includes structural pest control. 1.3.2 Safety Requirements
Formulate, treat, and dispose of termiticides and their containers in accordance with label directions. Draw water for formulating only from sites designated by the Contracting Officer, and fit the filling hose with a backflow preventer meeting local plumbing codes or standards. The filling operation shall be under the direct and continuous observation of a contractor's representative to prevent overflow. Secure pesticides and related materials under lock and key when unattended. Ensure that proper protective clothing and equipment are worn and used during all phases of termiticide application. Dispose of used pesticide containers off Government property. 1.4 1.4.1 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Delivery
Deliver termiticide material to the site in the original unopened containers bearing legible labels indicating the EPA registration number and manufacturer's registered uses. All other materials, to be used on site for the purpose of termite control, shall be delivered in new or otherwise good condition as supplied by the manufacturer or formulator. 1.4.2 Inspection
Inspect termiticides upon arrival at the job site for conformity to type and quality in accordance with paragraph TERMITICIDES. Each label shall bear evidence of registration under the Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act (FIFRA), as amended or under appropriate regulations of the host county. Other materials shall be inspected for conformance with specified requirements. Remove unacceptable materials from the job site. 1.4.3 Storage
Store materials in designated areas and in accordance with manufacturer's labels. Termiticides and related materials shall be kept under lock and key when unattended. 1.4.4 Handling
Observe manufacturer's warnings and precautions. Termiticides shall be handled in accordance with manufacturer's labels, preventing contamination by dirt, water, and organic material. Protect termiticides from sunlight as recommended by the manufacturer.
SECTION 31 31 16
Page 3
W912HN-12-R-0003
1.5
SITE CONDITIONS
The following conditions will determine the time of application. 1.5.1 Soil Moisture
Soils to be treated shall be tested immediately before application. Test soil moisture content to a minimum depth of 3 inches. The soil moisture shall be as recommended by the termiticide manufacturer. The termiticide will not be applied when soil moisture exceeds manufacturer's recommendations because termiticides do not adhere to the soil particles in saturated soils. 1.5.2 Runoff and Wind Drift
Do not apply termiticide during or immediately following heavy rains. Applications shall not be performed when conditions may cause runoff or create an environmental hazard. Applications shall not be performed when average wind speed exceeds 10 miles per hour. The termiticide shall not be allowed to enter water systems, aquifers, or endanger humans or animals. 1.5.2.1 Vapor Barriers and Waterproof Membranes
Termiticide shall be applied prior to placement of a vapor barrier or waterproof membrane. 1.5.2.2 Utilities and Vents
Prior to application, HVAC ducts and vents located in treatment area shall be turned off and blocked to protect people and animals from termiticide. 1.5.3 Placement of Concrete
Place concrete covering treated soils as soon as the termiticide has reached maximum penetration into the soil. Time for maximum penetration shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. 1.6 WARRANTY
The Contractor shall provide a 5-year written warranty against infestations or reinfestations by subterranean termites of the buildings or building additions constructed under this contract. Warranty shall include annual inspections of the buildings or building additions. If live subterranean termite infestation or subterranean termite damage is discovered during the warranty period, and the soil and building conditions have not been altered in the interim, the Contractor shall: a. Retreat the soil and perform other treatment as may be necessary for elimination of subterranean termite infestation; b. c. PART 2 2.1 Repair damage caused by termite infestation; and Reinspect the building approximately 180 days after the retreatment. PRODUCTS TERMITICIDES
Provide termiticides currently registered by the EPA or approved for such SECTION 31 31 16 Page 4
W912HN-12-R-0003
use by the appropriate agency of the host county. Select non-repellant termiticide for maximum effectiveness and duration after application. The selected termiticide shall be suitable for the soil and climatic conditions at the project site. PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION VERIFICATION OF MEASUREMENT
Once termiticide application has been completed, measure tank contents to determine the remaining volume. The total volume measurement of used contents for the application shall equal the established application rate for the project site conditions. Provide written verification of the measurements. 3.2 TECHNICAL REPRESENTATIVE
The certified installation pest management coordinator shall be the technical representative, shall be present at all meetings concerning treatment measures for subterranean termites, and may be present during treatment application. The command Pest Control Coordinator shall be contacted prior to starting work. 3.3 SITE PREPARATION
Site preparation shall be in accordance with Sections 31 11 00 CLEARING AND GRUBBING, 31 00 00 EARTHWORK, 32 92 23 SODDING, and 32 93 00 EXTERIOR PLANTS. Work related to final grades, landscape plantings, foundations, or any other alterations to finished construction which might alter the condition of treated soils, shall be coordinated with this specification. 3.3.1 Ground Preparation
Food sources shall be eliminated by removing debris from clearing and grubbing and post construction wood scraps such as ground stakes, form boards, and scrap lumber from the site, before termiticide application begins. 3.3.2 Verification
Before work starts, verify that final grades are as indicated and smooth grading has been completed in accordance with Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK. Soil particles shall be finely graded with particles no larger than 1 inch and compacted to eliminate soil movement to the greatest degree. 3.3.3 Foundation Exterior
Provide written verification that final grading and landscape planting operations will not disturb treatment of the soil on the exterior sides of foundation walls, grade beams, and similar structures. 3.3.4 Utilities and Vents
Provide written verification that the location and identity of HVAC ducts and vents, water and sewer lines, and plumbing have been accomplished prior to the termiticide application.
SECTION 31 31 16
Page 5
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.3.5
Crawl and Plenum Air Spaces
Provide written verification that the location and identity of crawl and plenum air spaces have been accomplished prior to the termiticide application. 3.3.6 Application Plan
Submit a Termiticide Application Plan for approval before starting the specified treatment. 3.4 3.4.1 TERMITICIDE TREATMENT Equipment Calibration and Tank Measurement
Immediately prior to commencement of termiticide application, calibration tests shall be conducted on the application equipment to be used and the application tank shall be measured to determine the volume and contents. These tests shall confirm that the application equipment is operating within the manufacturer's specifications and will meet the specified requirements. Provide written certification of the equipment calibration test results within 1 week of testing. 3.4.2 Mixing and Application
Formulating, mixing, and application shall be performed in the presence of the Contracting Officer or the technical representative. A closed system is recommended as it prevents the termiticide from coming into contact with the applicator or other persons. Water for formulating shall only come from designated locations. Filling hoses shall be fitted with a backflow preventer meeting local plumbing codes or standards. Overflow shall be prevented during the filling operation. Prior to each day of use, the equipment used for applying termiticides shall be inspected for leaks, clogging, wear, or damage. Any repairs are to be performed immediately. 3.4.3 Treatment Method
For areas to be treated, establish complete and unbroken vertical and/or horizontal soil poison barriers between the soil and all portions of the intended structure which may allow termite access to wood and wood related products. Application shall not be made to areas which serve as crawl spaces or for use as a plenum air space. 3.4.3.1 Surface Application
Use surface application for establishing horizontal barriers. Surface applicants shall be applied as a coarse spray and provide uniform distribution over the soil surface. Termiticide shall penetrate a minimum of 1 inch into the soil, or as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.4.3.2 Rodding and Trenching
Use rodding and trenching for establishing vertical soil barriers. Trenching shall be to the depth of the foundation footing. Width of trench shall be as recommended by the manufacturer, or as indicated. Rodding or other approved method may be implemented for saturating the base of the trench with termiticide. Immediately after termiticide has reached maximum penetration as recommended by the manufacturer, backfilling of the trench shall commence. Backfilling shall be in 6 inch rises or layers. Each rise SECTION 31 31 16 Page 6
W912HN-12-R-0003
shall be treated with termiticide. 3.4.4 Sampling
The Contracting Officer may draw from stocks at the job site, at any time and without prior notice, take samples of the termiticides used to determine if the amount of active ingredient specified on the label is being applied. 3.5 CLEAN UP, DISPOSAL, AND PROTECTION
Once application has been completed, proceed with clean up and protection of the site without delay. 3.5.1 Clean Up
The site shall be cleaned of all material associated with the treatment measures, according to label instructions, and as indicated. Excess and waste material shall be removed and disposed off site. 3.5.2 Disposal of Termiticide
Dispose of residual termiticides and containers off Government property, and in accordance with label instructions and EPA criteria. 3.5.3 Protection of Treated Area
Immediately after the application, the area shall be protected from other use by erecting barricades and providing signage as required or directed. Signage shall be in accordance with Section 10 14 01 EXTERIOR SIGNAGE. Signage shall be placed inside the entrances to crawl spaces and shall identify the space as treated with termiticide and not safe for children and animals. 3.6 3.6.1 CONDITIONS FOR SATISFACTORY TREATMENT Equipment Calibrations and Measurements
Where results from the equipment calibration and tank measurements tests are unsatisfactory, re-treatment will be required. 3.6.2 Testing
Should an analysis, performed by a third party, indicate that the samples of the applied termiticide contain less than the amount of active ingredient specified on the label, and/or if soils are treated to a depth less than specified or approved, re-treatment will be required. 3.6.3 Disturbance of Treated Soils
Soil and fill material disturbed after treatment shall be re-treated before placement of slabs or other covering structures. 3.6.4 Termites Found Within the Warranty Period
If live subterranean termite infestation or termite damage is discovered during the warranty period, re-treat the site.
SECTION 31 31 16
Page 7
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.7
RE-TREATMENT
Where re-treatment is required, comply with the requirements specified in paragraph WARRANTY. -- End of Section --
SECTION 31 31 16
Page 8
Pre-construction treatment for subterranean termite specifications

1. SOIL TREATMENT: Treatment will be applied within three days (in the absence of rain) for all critical phases of construction: pouring concrete slab on grade, pouring of basement slab, prior to backfilling around concrete or masonry foundations and during final grading completion for structures. Application will be made in strict accordance with manufacturers label. 1.1 Labeling information shall be submitted not less than seven days prior to soil treatment is scheduled to occur. All treatment agents shall be delivered to the job site in un-opened containers, bearing the original manufacturers labels. Labels shall bear evidence of registration under the Federal Insecticide, Fungicide and Rodenticide Act (FIFRA). 1.2 Approved termiticide agent will be restricted to the products listed below that have been approved for use in the State of Georgia and approved for the use on Fort Stewart and Hunter AAF. Other products contrary to the list are not approved. Termidor SC AI: Fipronil 9.1% EPA Reg. # 7969-210. Termidor WG AI: Fipronil 80% EPA Reg. # 7969-209. Primise 2 Insecticide AI: Imidacloprid 21.4% EPA Reg. # 432-1331. 1.3 Inspection of chemical agent delivery, opening and application will be carried out by Mr. Charles Sikes (DoD certified PMQAE, DPW), or Mr. Merritt Chambers (PM State Certified Supervisor, GSI Inc.) for all construction projects requiring treatment. All materials, equipment and means needed to handle, mix and apply treatments will be inspected for safety and accuracy before the application of chemical agent. Unacceptable materials shall be removed from the job site. Inspection agent shall be notified of treatment schedule at minimum 1 day prior to treatment. 1.4 Applicators with category # 30 (Wood Destroying Organisms) State certification will be allowed to apply termiticide on the Installation. 1.5 Treatment shall be the maximum allowable concentration for the chemical when used as a termiticide during soil treatment according to the label. Any variations will not be permitted. 1.6 Record of treatment(s) will be accurately documented and maintained by inspection agent at the time of treatment, along with documentation of services provided from the contractor conducting treatment as required by the State of Georgia. 1.7 Warranty of completed treatment shall be in writing and shall be valid for no less than five years after the completion of treatment(s). Warranty shall cover against the infestations or re-infestations by subterranean termites of the building or buildings additions constructed under this contract.
Pesticide Application Record

Date: ______________ Building # / Location: _____________________ Sq. Ft treated: ____________________________ Ln. Ft treated: ____________________________ Acres treated: _____________________________ Product(s) Name: __________________________ __________________________ __________________________ __________________________ EPA # (s): _________________ EPA # (s): _________________ EPA # (s): _________________ EPA # (s): _________________
% Finish Product: _____________________________________________________ Amount of Finished Product Applied: _____________________________________ Amount of Concentrate Used (Lbs/ Oz/ Gal): _______________________________ Lbs AI / unit of measure for Product: ______________________________________ Active Ingredient(s) of Product: __________________________________________ __________________________________________ __________________________________________ Company Name: ______________________________________________________ Address/Telephone #: __________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________ Company License #: ___________________________________________________ Applicator Name: ______________________________________________________ Certification #: ________________________________________________________ Project Responsibility: DPW/COE/Other __________________________________ Project Superintendent Name: ____________________________________________ Comments: ___________________________________________________________
W912HN-12-R-0003
SECTION 31 32 11 SOIL SURFACE EROSION CONTROL 08/08 PART 1 1.1 1.1.1 GENERAL MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Standard and Geosynthetic Binder
Measure the standard and geosynthetic binder by the square yard of surface area covered. No measurement for payment will be made for fine grading, trenching or other miscellaneous materials necessary for placement of the binder. 1.1.2 Mulch and Compost
Measure mulch and compost by the square yard of surface area covered. No measurement for payment will be made for binder, dye or other miscellaneous materials or equipment necessary for placement of the mulch or compost. 1.1.3 Hydraulic Mulch
Measure hydraulic mulch by the square yard of surface area covered. Measurement for payment will include binder, dye or both. No measurement for payment will be made for other miscellaneous materials or equipment necessary for placement of the hydraulic mulch. 1.1.4 Geotextile Fabric
Measure geotextile fabrics by the square yard of surface area covered. No measurement for payment will be made for fine grading, trenching or other miscellaneous materials necessary for placement of the fabric. 1.1.5 Erosion Control Blankets
Measure erosion control blankets by the square yard of surface area covered. No measurement for payment will be made for fine grading, trenching or other miscellaneous materials necessary for placement of the erosion control blankets. 1.1.6 Synthetic Grid/Sheet Systems
Measure synthetic grid/sheet system by the square yard of surface area covered. No measurement for payment will be made for fine grading, trenching, geotextile, seams, grout, rock, topsoil or other miscellaneous materials necessary for placement of the articulating cellular concrete block system. 1.1.7 Cellular Concrete Block Systems
Measure articulating cellular concrete block system by the square yard of surface area covered. No measurement for payment will be made for fine grading, trenching, geotextile, seams, grout, rock, topsoil or other miscellaneous materials necessary for placement of the articulating SECTION 31 32 11 Page 1
W912HN-12-R-0003
cellular concrete block system. 1.2 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM D 1248 (2005) Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable (2009) Resistance to Deformation and Cohesion of Bituminous Mixtures by Means of Hveem Apparatus (1996; R 2007) Thickness of Textile Materials (1997; R 2004) Cutback Asphalt (Rapid-Curing Type) (2007) Resistance R-Value and Expansion Pressure of Compacted Soils (2009) Mass Per Unit Area (Weight) of Fabric (2007) Bursting Strength of Textiles Constant-Rate-of-Traverse (CRT), Ball Burst Test (2009) Abrasion Resistance of Textile Fabrics (Rotary Platform, Double-Head Method) (2007) Deterioration of Geotextiles from Exposure to Light, Moisture and Heat in a Xenon-Arc Type Apparatus (1999a; R 2004e1) Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity (2004) Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles (2009) Tensile Properties of Geotextiles by the Wide-Width Strip Method (2008) Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles (2004) Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile (2007) Index Puncture Resistance of Geotextiles, Geomembranes, and Related SECTION 31 32 11 Page 2
ASTM D 1560
ASTM D 1777
ASTM D 2028
ASTM D 2844
ASTM D 3776
ASTM D 3787
ASTM D 3884
ASTM D 4355
ASTM D 4491
ASTM D 4533
ASTM D 4595
ASTM D 4632
ASTM D 4751
ASTM D 4833
W912HN-12-R-0003
Products ASTM D 4972 ASTM D 5034 (2001; R 2007) pH of Soils (2009) Breaking Strength and Elongation of Textile Fabrics (Grab Test) (2006; R 2008e1) Breaking Force and Elongation of Textile Fabrics (Strip Method) (2007) Topsoil Used for Landscaping Purposes (2007) Deflection Temperature of Plastics Under Flexural Load in the Edgewise Position (2005) Emulsified Asphalt
ASTM D 5035
ASTM D 5268
ASTM D 648
ASTM D 977
U.S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC) LEED (2009) Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design(tm) Green Building Rating System for New Construction (LEED-NC) SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.3
The work consists of furnishing and installing soil surface erosion control materials, including fine grading, blanketing, stapling, mulching and miscellaneous related work, within project limits and in areas outside the project limits where the soil surface is disturbed from work under this contract at the designated locations. This work includes all necessary materials, labor, supervision and equipment for installation of a complete system. Coordinate this section with the requirements of Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK and Section 32 92 23 SODDING. Complete backfilling the openings in synthetic grid systems and articulating cellular concrete block systems a maximum 7 days after placement to protect the material from ultraviolet radiation. 1.4 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Erosion control plan; G, RO (LEED) SD-02 Shop Drawings Layout; Obstructions Below Ground; Erosion Control; SECTION 31 32 11 Page 3
W912HN-12-R-0003
Scale drawings defining areas to receive recommended materials as required by federal, state or local regulations. Seed Establishment Period Calendar time period for the seed establishment period. When there is more than one seed establishment period, the boundaries of the seeded area covered for each period shall be described. Maintenance Record Record of maintenance work performed, of measurements and findings for product failure, recommendations for repair, and products replaced. SD-03 Product Data Geosynthetic Binders; Recycled Plastic Wood Cellulose Fiber Paper Fiber Mulch Control Netting and Filter Fabric Hydraulic Mulch; Geotextile Fabrics; Aggregate Manufacturer's literature including physical characteristics, application and installation instructions. Equipment A listing of equipment to be used for the application of erosion control materials. Finished Grade Erosion Control Blankets Condition of finish grade status prior to installation; location of underground utilities and facilities. SD-04 Samples Materials a. Geosynthetic and synthetic binding material; b. Standard mulch; c. Hydraulic mulch; 2 pounds. 2 pounds. 6 inch square. 6 inch square. 1 quart.
d. Geotextile fabrics;
e. Erosion control blankets; f. Omitted g. Omitted
SECTION 31 32 11
Page 4
W912HN-12-R-0003
h. Omitted SD-06 Test Reports Geosynthetic Binders Hydraulic Mulch Geotextile Fabrics Erosion Control Blankets Certified reports of inspections and laboratory tests, prepared by an independent testing agency, including analysis and interpretation of test results. Each report shall be properly identified. Test methods used and compliance with recognized test standards shall be described. Sand Gravel Sieve test results. SD-07 Certificates Fill Material Mulch Hydraulic Mulch Geotextile Fabrics Prior to delivery of materials, certificates of compliance attesting that materials meet the specified requirements. Certified copies of the material certificates shall include the following. For items listed in this section: a. Certification of recycled content or, b. Statement of recycled content. c. Certification of origin including the name, address and telephone number of manufacturer. Geosynthetic Binders Synthetic Soil Binders Certification for binders showing EPA registered uses, toxicity levels, and application hazards. Installer's Qualification The installer's company name and address; training and experience and or certification. Recycled Plastic Individual component and assembled unit structural integrity test; creep tolerance; deflection tolerance; and vertical load test results. Life-cycle durability. Asphalt Adhesive SECTION 31 32 11 Page 5 Sand shall be uniformly graded.
W912HN-12-R-0003
Tackifier Composition. Wood By-Products Composition, source, and particle size. Products shall be free from toxic chemicals or hazardous material. Wood Cellulose Fiber Certification stating that wood components were obtained from managed forests. SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Maintenance Instructions Instruction for year-round care of installed material. The Contractor shall include manufacturer supplied spare parts. SD-11 Closeout Submittals Local/Regional Materials; (LEED) LEED documentation relative to local/regional materials credit in accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED Documentation Notebook. Recycled Plastic; (LEED) Wood Cellulose Fiber; (LEED) Paper Fiber; (LEED) Mulch Control Netting and Filter Fabric; (LEED) Hydraulic Mulch; G, RO (LEED) Geotextile Fabrics; G, RO (LEED) Aggregate; (LEED) LEED documentation relative to recycled content credit in accordance with LEED Reference Guide. Include in LEED Documentation Notebook. 1.5 1.5.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer's Qualification
The installer shall be certified by the manufacturer for training and experience installing the material. 1.5.2 Substitutions
Substitutions will not be allowed without written request and approval from the Contracting Officer.
SECTION 31 32 11
Page 6
W912HN-12-R-0003
1.5.3 1.5.3.1
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS Local/Regional Materials
Use materials or products extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within a 500 mile radius from the project site, if available from a minimum of three sources. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total local material requirements. Erosion control materials may be locally available. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Store materials in designated areas and as recommended by the manufacturer protected from the elements, direct exposure, and damage. Do not drop containers from trucks. Material shall be free of defects that would void required performance or warranty. Deliver geosynthetic binders and synthetic soil binders in the manufacturer's original sealed containers and stored in a secure area. a. Furnish erosion control blankets and geotextile fabric in rolls with suitable wrapping to protect against moisture and extended ultraviolet exposure prior to placement. Label erosion control blanket and geotextile fabric rolls to provide identification sufficient for inventory and quality control purposes. b. All synthetic grids, synthetic sheets, and articulating cellular concrete block grids shall be sound and free of defects that would interfere with the proper placing of the block or impair the strength or permanence of the construction. Minor cracks in synthetic grids and concrete cellular block, incidental to the usual methods of manufacture, or resulting from standard methods of handling in shipment and delivery, will not be deemed grounds for rejection. c. Inspect seed upon arrival at the jobsite for conformity to species and quality. Seed that is wet, moldy, or bears a test date five months or older, shall be rejected. 1.7 WARRANTY
Erosion control material shall have a warranty for use and durable condition for project specific installations. Temporary erosion control materials shall carry a minimum eighteen month warranty. Permanent erosion control materials shall carry a minimum three year warranty. PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS RECYCLED PLASTIC
Recycled plastic shall contain a minimum 85 percent of recycled post-consumer product. Recycled material shall be constructed or manufactured with a maximum 1/4 inch deflection or creep in any member, according to ASTM D 648 and ASTM D 1248. The components shall be molded of ultraviolet (UV) and color stabilized polyethylene. The material shall consist of a minimum 75 percent plastic profile of high-density polyethylene, low-density polyethylene, and polypropylene raw material. The material shall be non-toxic and have no discernible contaminates such as paper, foil, or wood. The material shall contain a maximum 3 percent air voids and shall be free of splinters, chips, peels, buckling, and cracks. Material shall be resistant to deformation from solar heat gain. SECTION 31 32 11 Page 7
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.2 2.2.1
BINDERS Synthetic Soil Binders
Calcium chloride, or other standard manufacturer's spray on adhesives designed for dust suppression. 2.2.2 Geosynthetic Binders
Geosynthetic binders shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM D 1560, ASTM D 2844; and shall be referred to as products manufactured for use as modified emulsions for the purpose of erosion control and soil stabilization. Emulsions shall be manufactured from all natural materials and provide a hard durable finish. 2.3 MULCH
Mulch shall be free from weeds, mold, and other deleterious materials. Mulch materials shall be native to the region. 2.3.1 Straw
Straw shall be stalks from oats, wheat, rye, barley, or rice, furnished in air-dry condition and with a consistency for placing with commercial mulch-blowing equipment. 2.3.2 Hay
Hay shall be native hay, sudan-grass hay, broomsedge hay, or other herbaceous mowings, furnished in an air-dry condition suitable for placing with commercial mulch-blowing equipment. 2.3.3 Wood Cellulose Fiber
Wood cellulose fiber shall be 100 percent recycled material and shall not contain any growth or germination-inhibiting factors and shall be dyed with non-toxic, biodegradable dye an appropriate color to facilitate placement during application. Composition on air-dry weight basis: a minimum 9 to a maximum 15 percent moisture, and between a minimum 4.5 to a maximum 6.0 pH. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total recycled content requirements. This item may contain post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content. Wood cellulose fiber shall not contain environmentally hazardous levels of heavy metals. Materials may be bulk tested or tested by toxicity characteristic leaching procedure (TCLP). 2.3.4 Paper Fiber
Paper fiber mulch shall be 100 percent post-consumer recycled news print that is shredded for the purpose of mulching seed. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total recycled content requirements. 2.3.5 Shredded Bark
Locally shredded material shall be treated to retard the growth of mold and fungi.
SECTION 31 32 11
Page 8
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.3.6
Wood By-Products
Wood locally chipped or ground bark shall be treated to retard the growth of mold and fungi. Gradation: A maximum 2 inch wide by 4 inch long. 2.3.7 Coir
Coir shall be manufactured from 100 percent coconut fiber cured in fresh water for a minimum of 6 months. 2.3.8 Asphalt Adhesive
Asphalt adhesive shall conform to the following: Emulsified asphalt, conforming to ASTM D 977, Grade SS-1; and cutback asphalt, conforming to ASTM D 2028, Designation RC-70. 2.3.9 Mulch Control Netting and Filter Fabric
Mulch control netting and filter fabric may be constructed of lightweight recycled plastic, cotton, or paper or organic fiber. The recycled plastic shall be a woven or nonwoven polypropylene, nylon, or polyester containing stabilizers and/or inhibitors to make the fabric resistant to deterioration from UV, and with the following properties: a. Minimum grab tensile strength (TF 25 #1/ASTM D 4632), 180 pounds.
b. Minimum Puncture (TF 25 #4/ASTM D 3787), direction.
75 psi in the weakest
c. Apparent opening sieve size of a minimum 40 and maximum 80 (U.S. Sieve Size). d. 2.3.10 Minimum Trapezoidal tear strength (TF 25 #2/ASTM D 4533), Hydraulic Mulch 50 pounds.
Hydraulic mulch shall be made of 100 percent recycled material. Wood shall be naturally air-dried to a moisture content of 10.0 percent, plus or minus 3.0 percent. A minimum of 50 percent of the fibers shall be equal to or greater than 0.15 inch in length and a minimum of 75 percent of the fibers shall be retained on a 28 mesh screen. Hydraulic mulch shall have the following mixture characteristics: CHARACTERISTIC (typical) pH Organic Matter (oven dried basis), Inorganic Ash (oven dried basis), Water Holding Capacity, 2.3.11 Tackifier VALUE 5.4 + 0.1 percent 99.3 within + 0.2 percent 0.7 within + 0.2 percent 1,401
Tackifier shall be a blended polyacrylimide material with non-ionic galactomannan of Gramineae endosperm in powder and crystalline form with molecular weights over 250,000. 2.3.12 Dye Pre-package dye in water
Dye shall be a water-activated, green color. SECTION 31 32 11
Page 9
W912HN-12-R-0003
dissolvable packets in the hydraulic mulch. 2.4 GEOTEXTILE FABRICS
Geotextile fabrics shall be woven of polypropylene filaments formed into a stable network so that the filaments retain their relative position to each other. Content shall be a minimum of 75 percent recycled materials. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total recycled content requirements. Geotextile fabric may contain post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content. Sewn seams shall have strength equal to or greater than the geotextile itself. Install fabric to withstand maximum velocity flows as recommended by the manufacturer. The geotextile shall conform to the following minimum average roll values: Property Weight Thickness Permeability Abrasion Resistance, Type (percent strength retained) Tensile Grab Strength Grab Elongation Burst Strength Puncture Strength Trapezoid Tear Apparent Opening Size UV Resistance @ 500 hrs 2.5 2.5.1 EROSION CONTROL BLANKETS Erosion Control Blankets Type I Performance Test Method
ASTM D 3776 ASTM D 1777 ASTM D 4491 58 percent X 81 percent ASTM D 3884 1,467 N X 1, 933 N 15percent X 20percent 5,510 kN/m2 733 N 533 N X 533 N 40 US Std Sieve 90 percent ASTM D 4632 ASTM D 4632 ASTM ASTM ASTM ASTM ASTM D D D D D 3787 4833 4533 4751 4355
Use Type I blankets for erosion control and vegetation establishment on roadside embankments, abutments, berms, shoulders, and median swales where natural vegetation will provide long term stabilization. Erosion control blankets shall be a machine-produced mat of 100% straw. The blanket shall be of consistent thickness with the straw evenly distributed over the entire area of the mat. Cover the blanket on the top side with a photodegradable polypropylene netting having an approximate 1/2 by 1/2 inch mesh and be sewn together on a maximum 1.5 inch centers with degradable thread. The erosion control blanket shall have the following properties: Material Content Straw 100 percent with approximately 0.50 lb/yd2 weight One side only, lightweight photodegradable with approximately 1.64 lb/1,000 ft2 weight. Degradable
Netting
Thread Note 1:
Photodegradable life a minimum of 2 months with a minimum 90 SECTION 31 32 11 Page 10
W912HN-12-R-0003
Material Content percent light penetration. 2.5.2
Apply to slopes up to a maximum 3:1 gradient.
Erosion Control Blankets Type II
Erosion control blankets shall be a machine-produced mat of 100 percent straw. The blanket shall be of consistent thickness with the straw evenly distributed over the entire area of the mat. Cover the blanket on the top side with a polypropylene netting having an approximate 1/2 by 1/2 inch mesh with photodegradable accelerators to provide breakdown of the netting within approximately 45 days, depending upon geographic location and elevation. Sew the blanket together on a maximum 1.5 inch centers with degradable thread. The erosion control blanket shall have the following properties: Material Content Straw 100 percent with approximately 0.50 lb/yd2 weight. One side only, photodegradable with photo accelerators and approximately 1.64 lb/1,000 ft2 weight. Degradable Photodegradable life a minimum of 10 months with a minimum 90 percent light penetration. Apply to slopes up to a maximum 3:1 gradient.
Netting
Thread NOTE:
2.5.3
Erosion Control Blankets Type III
Type III blankets shall be used for erosion control and vegetation establishment on roadside embankments, abutments, berms, shoulders, and median swales where natural vegetation will provide long term stabilization. Erosion control blanket shall be a machine-produced mat consisting of 70 percent straw and 30 percent coconut fiber. The blanket shall be of consistent thickness with the straw and coconut fiber evenly distributed over the entire area of the mat. Cover the blanket on the top side with heavyweight photodegradable polypropylene netting having UV additives to delay breakdown and an approximate 5/8 by 5/8 inch mesh, and on the bottom side with a lightweight photodegradable polypropylene netting with an approximate 1/2 by 1/2 inch mesh. Sew the blanket together on 1.5 inch centers with degradable thread. The erosion control blanket shall have the following properties: Material Content Straw 70 percent by approximately 0.35 lb/yd2. 30 percent by approximately 0.15 lb/yd2 weight. Top side heavyweight photodegradable with UV additives and approximately 3 lb/1,000 ft2 weight SECTION 31 32 11 Page 11
Coconut Fiber
Netting
W912HN-12-R-0003
Material Content Bottom side lightweight photodegradable with approximately 1.64 lb/1,000 ft2 weight. NOTE: Photodegradable life a minimum of 10 months with a minimum 90 percent light penetration. Apply to slopes with a gradient less than 1.5:1.
2.5.4
Erosion Control Blankets Type IV
Erosion control blanket shall be a machine-produced mat of 100 percent straw. The blanket shall be of consistent thickness with the straw evenly distributed over the entire area of the mat. Cover the blanket on the top and bottom sides with lightweight photodegradable polypropylene netting having an approximate 1/2 by 1/2 inch mesh. Sew the blanket together on 1.5 inch centers with degradable thread. The erosion control blanket shall have the following properties: Material Content Straw 100 percent with approximately 0.5 lb/yd2 weight. Both sides lightweight photodegradable with approximately 1.64 lb/1,000 ft2
Netting weight. Thread NOTE:
Degradable Photodegradable life a minimum of 2 months with a minimum 90 percent light penetration. Apply to slopes with a gradient of less than 1.5:1.
2.5.5
Erosion Control Blankets Type V
Erosion control blanket shall be a machine-produced mat of 100 percent straw. The blanket shall be of consistent thickness with the straw evenly distributed over the entire area of the mat. Cover the blanket on the top side with polypropylene netting having an approximate 1/2 by 1/2 inch mesh with photodegradable accelerators to provide breakdown of the netting within approximately 45 days, depending upon geographic location and elevation. Cover the bottom with a polypropylene netting having an approximate 1/2 by 1/2 inch mesh with photo accelerators. Sew the blanket together on 1.5 inch centers with degradable thread. The erosion control blanket shall have the following properties: Material Content Straw 100 percent with approximately 0.5 lb/yd2 weight. Top side lightweight photodegradable with photo accelerators with approximately 1.64 lb/1,000 ft2 weight.
Netting
SECTION 31 32 11
Page 12
W912HN-12-R-0003
Material Content Thread
Bottom side lightweight photodegradable with photo accelerators and approximately 1.64 lb/1,000 ft2 weight.
NOTE:
Photodegradable life a minimum of 10 months with a minimum 90 percent light penetration. Apply to slopes up to a maximum 2:1 gradient.
2.5.6
Erosion Control Blankets Type VI
Erosion control blanket shall be a machine-produced 100 percent biodegradable mat with a 100 percent straw fiber matrix. The blanket shall be of consistent thickness with the straw fiber evenly distributed over the entire area of the mat. Cover the blanket on the top side with a 100 percent biodegradable woven natural organic fiber netting. The netting shall consist of machine directional strands formed from two intertwined yarns with cross directional strands interwoven through the twisted machine strands (commonly referred to as a Leno weave) to form an approximate 1/2 by 1/2 inch mesh. Sew the blanket together with biodegradable thread on 1.5 inch centers. The erosion control blanket shall have the following properties: Material Content Matrix 100 percent straw fiber with approximately 0.50 lb/yd2 weight One side only, Leno woven 100% biodegradable natural organic fiber approximately 9.3 lb/1,000 ft. Biodegradable Photodegradable life a minimum of 10 months with a minimum 90 Percent light penetration. Apply to slopes up to a maximum 2:1 gradient.
Netting
Weight Thread NOTE:
2.5.7
Erosion Control Blankets Type VII
Erosion control blanket shall be a machine-produced 100 percent biodegradable mat with an herbaceous straw fiber matrix. The blanket shall be of consistent thickness with the straw evenly distributed over the entire area of the mat. Cover the blanket on the top and bottom sides with 100 percent biodegradable woven natural fiber netting. The netting shall consist of machine directional strands formed from two intertwined yarns with cross directional strands interwoven through the twisted machine strands (commonly referred to as a Leno weave) to form an approximate 1/2 by 1/2 inch mesh. Sew the blanket together with biodegradable thread on 1.5 inch centers. The blanket shall have the following properties: Material Content Straw 100 percent straw fiber with approximately 0.5 lb/yd2 weight. Top and bottom sides,Leno woven 100% biodegradable SECTION 31 32 11 Page 13
Netting
W912HN-12-R-0003
Material Content natural organic fiber with approximately 9.3 lb/1,000ft2 weight. Thread Biodegradable
Note: Photodegradable life a minimum of 18 months with a minimum 90 percent light penetration. Apply to slopes up to a maximum 1.5:1 gradient. 2.5.8 Erosion Control Blankets Type VIII
Erosion control blanket shall be a machine-produced 100 percent biodegradable mat with a 70 percent herbaceous straw and 30 percent coconut fiber blend matrix. The blanket shall be of consistent thickness with the straw and coconut fiber evenly distributed over the entire area of the mat. Cover the blanket on the top and bottom sides with 100 percent biodegradable woven natural organic fiber netting. The netting shall consist of machine directional strands formed from two intertwined yarns with cross directional strands interwoven through the twisted machine strands (commonly referred to as a Leno weave) to form an approximate 1/2 by 1/2 inch mesh. Sew the blanket together with biodegradable thread on 1.5 inch centers. Straw/Coconut fiber erosion control blanket shall have the following properties: Material Content Matrix 70 percent straw fiber with approximately . 0.35 lb/yd2 weight. 30 percent coconut fiber cured in fresh water with approximately 0.15 lb/yd2 weight. Both sides woven 100% biodegradable natural organic fiber with approximately 9.3 lbs/1,000 ft2 weight. Biodegradable Photodegradable life a minimum of 24 months with a minimum 90 percent light penetration. Apply to slopes up to a maximum 1.5:1 gradient.
Netting
Thread NOTE:
2.5.9
Erosion Control Blankets Type IX (Turf Reinforcement Mat)
Permanent erosion control/turf reinforcement mat is constructed of 100 percent coconut fiber stitch bonded between a heavy duty UV stabilized bottom net, and a heavy duty UV stabilized cuspated (crimped) middle netting overlaid with a heavy duty UV stabilized top net. The cuspated netting forms prominent closely spaced ridges across the entire width of the mat. The three nettings are stitched together on 1.5 inch centers with UV stabilized polypropylene thread to form a permanent three dimensional structure. The following list contains further physical properties of the turf erosion control mat.
SECTION 31 32 11
Page 14
W912HN-12-R-0003
Property Ground Cover Thickness Mass Per Unit Area Tensile Strength Elongation Tensile Strength Elongation Tensile Strength Elongation Resiliency UV Stability* Color(permanent net) Porosity(permanent net)Calculated Minimum Filament Measured Diameter (permanent net) NOTE 1:
Test Method Image Analysis ASTM D 1777 ASTM D 3776 ASTM D 5035 ASTM D 5035 ASTM D 5035 ASTM D 5035 ASTM D 5034 ASTM D 5034 ASTM D 1777 ASTM D 4355
Value 93
Units percent 0.63 in 0.92 lb/sy 480 lb/ft percent 960 lb/ft percent 177 lbs percent percent 151 lbs percent
31 22 greater than 80 86 UV Black greater than 95
percent 0.03 in
*ASTM D 5034 Tensile Strength and percent Strength Retention of material after 1000 hours of exposure in Xenon-Arc Weatherometer
NOTE 2: Photodegradable life a minimum of 36 months with a minimum 90 percent light penetration. Apply to slopes up to a maximum 1:1 gradient. 2.5.10 Erosion Control Blankets Type X (Turf Reinforcement Mat)
Permanent erosion control/turf reinforcement mat shall be constructed of 100 percent UV stabilized high denier polypropylene fiber sewn between a black UV stabilized 1/2 inch mesh polypropylene netting on the top 5 lbs/1000 square ft and a black UV stabilized 5/8 inch mesh polypropylene netting on the bottom 3 lbs/1000 square ft with polypropylene thread. The mat shall be resistant to photo and chemical degradation. The following list contains further physical properties of the turf reinforcement mat. Property Thickness Resiliency Mass Per Unit Area Tensile Strength Elongation Tensile Strength Elongation Tensile Strength Elongation Tensile Strength Elongation UV Stability* Test Method ASTM D 1777 100 PSI-3 cycles ASTM D 3776 ASTM D 4632 ASTM D 4632 ASTM D 4595 ASTM D 4595 ASTM D 5035 ASTM D 5035 ASTM D 5034 ASTM D 5034 ASTM D 4355 Value Units
0.56 in percent 11.2 oz/sq yd 35.2 lbs 25.5 percent 259.2 lbs/ft 20.9 percent 300 lbs/ft 51 percent 89 lbs 21 percent 81* lbs 90* percent 94
NOTE 1:
*ASTM D 5034 Tensile Strength and percent Strength Retention of material after 1000 hours of exposure in Xenon-Arc Weatherometer. SECTION 31 32 11 Page 15
W912HN-12-R-0003
Property NOTE 2:
Test Method
Value
Units
Photodegradable life a minimum of 36 months with a minimum 90 percent light penetration. Apply to slopes up to a maximum 1:1 gradient.
2.5.11 2.5.12 2.5.13
Omitted Omitted Staking
Stakes shall be 100 percent biodegradable manufactured from recycled plastic or wood and shall be designed to safely and effectively secure erosion control blankets for temporary or permanent applications. The biodegradable stake shall be fully degradable by biological activity within a reasonable time frame. The bio-plastic resin used in production of the biodegradable stake shall consist of polylactide, a natural, completely biodegradable substance derived from renewable agricultural resources. The biodegradable stake must exhibit ample rigidity to enable being driven into hard ground, with sufficient flexibility to resist shattering. Serrate the biodegradable stake on the leg to increase resistance to pull-out from the soil. 2.5.14 Staples
Staples shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. 2.6 2.7 OMITTED AGGREGATE
Aggregate shall be offsite material generated from grading and demolition operations, as available. Recycled crushed concrete shall be free of steel, free-draining and graded between a minimum 3/4 inch and a maximum 1.5 inches. Crushed rock shall be crushed run between a minimum 3/4 inches and a maximum 2 inches. Submit sieve test results for both gravel and sand. 2.8 2.9 OMITTED WATER
Unless otherwise directed, water is the responsibility of the Contractor. Water shall be potable or supplied by an existing irrigation system. PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION WEATHER CONDITIONS
Perform erosion control operations under favorable weather conditions; when excessive moisture, frozen ground or other unsatisfactory conditions prevail, the work shall be stopped as directed. When special conditions warrant a variance to earthwork operations, submit a revised construction schedule for approval. Do not apply erosion control materials in adverse weather conditions which could affect their performance. 3.1.1 Finished Grade
Verify that finished grades are as indicated on the drawings; complete finish grading and compaction in accordance with Section 31 00 00 SECTION 31 32 11 Page 16
W912HN-12-R-0003
EARTHWORK, prior to the commencement of the work. Verify and mark the location of underground utilities and facilities in the area of the work. Repair damage to underground utilities and facilities at the Contractor's expense. 3.1.2 Placement of Erosion Control Blankets
Before placing the erosion control blankets, ensure the subgrade has been graded smooth; has no depressed, void areas; is free from obstructions, such as tree roots, projecting stones or other foreign matter. Vehicles will not be permitted directly on the blankets. 3.1.3 Synthetic Grid
Before placing the grid system, ensure that the subgrade has been properly grubbed of large roots and rocks; compacted; has been graded smooth; has no depressed, void, soft or uncompacted areas; is free from obstructions, such as tree roots, projecting stones or other foreign matter; and has been seeded. 3.2 3.2.1 SITE PREPARATION Soil Test
Test soil in accordance with ASTM D 5268 and ASTM D 4972 for determining the particle size and mechanical analysis. Sample collection onsite shall be random over the entire site. The test shall determine the soil particle size as compatible for the specified material. 3.2.2 Layout
Erosion control material locations may be adjusted to meet field conditions. When soil tests result in unacceptable particle sizes, a shop drawing shall be submitted indicating the corrective measures. 3.2.3 Protecting Existing Vegetation
When there are established lawns in the work area, the turf shall be covered and/or protected or replaced after construction operations. Identify existing trees, shrubs, plant beds, and landscape features that are to be preserved on site by appropriate tags and barricade with reusable, high-visibility fencing along the dripline. Mitigate damage to existing trees at no additional cost to the Government. Damage shall be assessed by a state certified arborist or other approved professional using the National Arborist Association's tree valuation guideline. 3.2.4 Obstructions Below Ground
When obstructions below ground affect the work, submit shop drawings showing proposed adjustments to placement of erosion control material for approval. 3.3 3.3.1 INSTALLATION Synthetic Binders
Apply synthetic binders heaviest at edges of areas and at crests of ridges and banks to prevent displacement. Apply binders to the remainder of the area evenly at the rate recommended by the manufacturer. SECTION 31 32 11 Page 17
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.3.2 3.3.3
Omitted Mulch Installation
Install mulch in the areas indicated. 3.3.4 Mulch Control Netting
Netting may be stapled over mulch according to manufacturer's recommendations. 3.3.5 Mechanical Anchor
Mechanical anchor shall be a V-type-wheel land packer; a scalloped-disk land packer designed to force mulch into the soil surface; or other suitable equipment. 3.3.6 Asphalt Adhesive Tackifier
Asphalt adhesive tackifier shall be sprayed at a rate between 10 to 13 gallons/1000 square feet. Do no completely exclude sunlight from penetrating to the ground surface. 3.3.7 Non-Asphaltic Tackifier
Apply hydrophilic colloid at the rate recommended by the manufacturer, using hydraulic equipment suitable for thoroughly mixing with water. Apply a uniform mixture over the area. 3.3.8 Asphalt Adhesive Coated Mulch
Hay or straw mulch may be spread simultaneously with asphalt adhesive applied at a rate between 10 to 13 gallons/1000 square feet, using power mulch equipment equipped with suitable asphalt pump and nozzle. Apply the adhesive-coated mulch evenly over the surface. Do not completely exclude sunlight from penetrating to the ground surface. 3.3.9 Wood Cellulose Fiber, Paper Fiber, and Recycled Paper
Apply wood cellulose fiber, paper fiber, or recycled paper as part of the hydraulic mulch operation. 3.3.10 3.3.10.1 Hydraulic Mulch Application Unseeded Area
Install hydraulic mulch as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Mix hydraulic mulch with water at the rate recommended by the manufacturer for the area to be covered. Mixing shall be done in equipment manufactured specifically for hydraulic mulching work, including an agitator in the mixing tank to keep the mulch evenly disbursed. 3.3.11 Erosion Control Blankets a. Install erosion control blankets as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. The extent of erosion control blankets shall be as shown on drawings.
SECTION 31 32 11
Page 18
W912HN-12-R-0003
b. Orient erosion control blankets in vertical strips and anchored with staples, as indicated. Abut adjacent strips to allow for installation of a common row of staples. Overlap horizontal joints between erosion control blankets sufficiently to accommodate a common row of staples with the uphill end on top. c. Where exposed to overland sheet flow, locate a trench at the uphill termination. Staple the erosion control blanket to the bottom of the trench. Backfill and compact the trench as required. d. Where terminating in a channel containing an installed blanket, the erosion control blanket shall overlap installed blanket sufficiently to accommodate a common row of staples. 3.3.12 Synthetic Sheet System
Anchor synthetic sheet systems in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation. Place systems on a well graded surface and then backfill, a maximum seven days after placement, to protect the material from ultraviolet radiation. Include contiguous perimeter termination trenches as the installation progresses. 3.3.12.1 Sheet System Revegetation
For areas not requiring re-vegetation, backfill openings to grade with well graded fill material and surface prepared for finish as indicated on the drawings. For areas requiring re-vegetation, backfill openings using well graded fill and topsoil as indicated on the drawings. 3.3.12.2 Sheet System Grids
Each pair of grids shall cover grade without gaps or open spaces between them. Provide 100 percent coverage of the area with the cells backfilled. 3.3.13 3.3.13.1 Grids Grid System Revegetation
For areas not requiring re-vegetation, backfill openings with a minimum 1/2 inch nominal size crushed rock, to a minimum 2 inch depth. 3.3.13.2 Synthetic Grids
Each pair of grids shall cover grade without gaps or open spaces between them. The system shall provide 100 percent coverage of the area with the cells backfilled. 3.4 CLEAN-UP
Dispose of excess material, debris, and waste materials offsite at an approved landfill or recycling center. Clear adjacent paved areas. Immediately upon completion of the installation in an area, protect the area against traffic or other use by erecting barricades and providing signage as required, or as directed.
SECTION 31 32 11
Page 19
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.5 3.6
OMITTED MAINTENANCE RECORD
Furnish a record describing the maintenance work performed, record of measurements and findings for product failure, recommendations for repair, and products replaced. 3.6.1 Maintenance
Maintenance shall include eradicating weeds; protecting embankments and ditches from surface erosion; maintaining the performance of the erosion control materials and mulch; protecting installed areas from traffic. 3.6.2 Maintenance Instructions
Furnish written instructions containing drawings and other necessary information, describing the care of the installed material; including, when and where maintenance should occur, and the procedures for material replacement. 3.6.3 Patching and Replacement
Unless otherwise directed, material shall be placed, seamed or patched as recommended by the manufacturer. Remove material not meeting the required performance as a result of placement, seaming or patching from the site. Replace the unacceptable material at no additional cost to the Government. -- End of Section --
SECTION 31 32 11
Page 20
W912HN-12-R-0003
SECTION 32 05 33 LANDSCAPE ESTABLISHMENT 07/06 PART 1 1.1 GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI) ANSI Z133.1 (2006) Arboricultural Operations - Safety Requirements for Pruning, Repairing, Maintaining, and Removing Trees, and Cutting Brush
U.S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC) LEED (2009) Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design(tm) Green Building Rating System for New Construction (LEED-NC) DEFINITIONS Pesticide
1.2 1.2.1
Any substance or mixture of substances, including biological control agents, that may pervent, destroy, repel, or mitigate pests and are specifically labeled for use by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). Also, any substance used as a plant regulator, defoliant, disinfectant, or biocide. Examples of pesticides include fumigants, herbicides, insecticides, fungicides, nematicides, molluscicides and rodenticides. 1.2.2 Stand of Turf
100 percent ground cover of the established species. 1.2.3 Planter Beds
A planter bed is defined as an area containing one or a combination of the following plant types: shrubs, vines, wildflowers, annuals, perennials, ground cover, and a mulch topdressing excluding turf. Trees may also be found in planter beds. 1.3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
Section 32 93 00 EXTERIOR PLANTS applies to this section for installation of trees, shrubs, and ground cover with additions and modifications herein. 1.4 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; SECTION 32 05 33 Page 1
W912HN-12-R-0003
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Integrated Pest Management Plan SD-03 Product Data Local/Regional Materials; (LEED) Submit documentation indicating distance between manufacturing facility and the project site. Indicate distance of raw material origin from the project site. Indicate relative dollar value of local/regional materials to total dollar value of products included in project. Hose; (LEED) Mulches Topdressing; (LEED) Submit documentation indicating percentage of post-industrial and post-consumer recycled content per unit of product. Indicate relative dollar value of recycled content products to total dollar value of products included in project. Organic Mulch Materials Submit documentation indicating type of biobased material in product and biobased content. Indicate relative dollar value of biobased content products to total dollar value of products included in project. SD-07 Certificates Maintenance inspection report Plant quantities; G, RO SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Maintenance SD-11 Closeout Submittals Tree, staking and guying removal 1.5 1.5.1 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Delivery
Deliver fertilizer and gypsum to the site in original containers bearing manufacturer's chemical analysis, name, trade name, or trademark, and indication of conformance to state and federal laws. Instead of containers, fertilizer, and gypsum may be furnished in bulk with a certificate indicating the above information.
SECTION 32 05 33
Page 2
W912HN-12-R-0003
1.5.2 1.5.2.1
Storage Fertilizer, Lime, and Mulch Storage
Material shall be stored in designated areas. Lime and fertilizer shall be stored in cool, dry locations away from contaminants. 1.5.2.2 Antidessicants Storage
Do not store with fertilizers or other landscape maintenance materials. 1.5.3 Handling
Do not drop or dump materials from vehicles. 1.6 1.6.1 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS Local/Regional Materials
Use materials or products extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within a 500 mile radius from the project site, if available from a minimum of three sources. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total local material requirements. Landscaping materials may be locally available. PART 2 2.1 2.1.1 PRODUCTS POST-PLANT FERTILIZER Granular Fertilizer
Organic, granular controlled release fertilizer containing the following minimum percentages, by weight, of plant food nutrients: 13 percent available nitrogen 13 percent available phosphorus 13 percent available potassium 2.2 WATER
Source of water shall be approved by the Contracting Officer, and be of suitable quality for irrigation. 2.2.1 Hose
Hoses used for watering shall be a minimum of 60 percent post-consumer rubber or plastic. 2.3 MULCHES TOPDRESSING
Free from noxious weeds, mold, or other deleterious materials. PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION EXTENT OF WORK
Provide landscape construction maintenance to include irrigation equipment cleaning and adjustments, mowing, edging, overseeding, aeration, fertilizing, watering, weeding, pruning, and stake and guy adjusting, for SECTION 32 05 33 Page 3
W912HN-12-R-0003
all newly installed landscape areas and existing plant material, unless indicated otherwise, and at all areas inside or outside the limits of the construction that are disturbed by the Contractor's operations. 3.1.1 Policing
The Contractor shall police all landscaped areas. Policing includes removal of leaves, branches and limbs regardless of length or diameter, dead vegetation, paper, trash, cigarette butts, garbage, rocks or other debris. Collected debris shall be promptly removed and disposed of at an approved disposal site. 3.1.2 Drainage System Maintenance
The Contractor shall remove all obstructions from surface and subsurface drain lines to allow water to flow unrestricted in swales, gutters, catch basins, storm drain curb inlets, and yard drains. Remove grates and clear debris in catch basins. Open drainage channels are to be maintained free of all debris and vegetation at all times. Edges of these channels shall be clear of any encroachment by vegetation. 3.2 IRRIGATION ESTABLISHMENT PERIOD
The irrigation establishment period will commence on the date that inspection by the Contracting Officer shows that the new irrigation equipment furnished under this contract have been satisfactorily installed and is functional and shall continue for a period of 365 days. 3.2.1 Maintenance During the Irrigation Establishment Period
Begin maintenance immediately after irrigation equipment has been installed and is functional. Inspect irrigation equipment at least once a week during the installation and establishment period and perform needed maintenance promptly. Irrigation controllers shall be inspected and reprogrammed after power outages. Contractor shall be responsible for winterization and startup. Sprinkler heads shall direct water away from buildings and hard surfaced areas. Contractor shall provide manual and training so base staff can continue proper maintenance. 3.2.2 3.2.3 Omitted Fire Hydrants
To use a fire hydrant for temporary irrigation, the Contractor shall obtain prior clearance from the Contracting Officer and provide the tools and connections approved for use on fire hydrants. If a fire hydrant is used, Contractor shall provide a reduced pressure backflow preventer for each connection between hose and fire hydrant. Backflow preventer used shall be tested once per month by a certified backflow preventer tester. 3.2.4 Final Acceptance
Operation and coverage test is acceptable if system operates through at least one complete cycle for areas to be irrigated and all leaks or repairs have been completed. 3.2.5 Controller Charts Indicate in chart area
Provide one chart for each controller supplied. SECTION 32 05 33
Page 4
W912HN-12-R-0003
controlled by the automatic controller. The chart is a reduction of the actual plan that will fit the maximum dimensions inside the controller housing. Use a black line print for the chart and a different pastel or transparent color to indicate each station zone of coverage. Provide complete operating instructions and train staff after chart is completed and approved for final acceptance, seal chart between two 20 mil pieces of clear plastic. 3.3 TURF ESTABLISHMENT PERIOD
Groundcover establishment period will commence on the date that inspection by the Contracting Officer shows that the new turf furnished under this contract has been satisfactorily installed to a 100 percent stand of coverage. The establishment period shall continue for a period of 365 days or 2 months into the next growing season, whichever is longer. 3.3.1 Frequency of Maintenance
Begin maintenance immediately after turf has been installed. Inspect areas once a week during the installation period and once a month for the rest of the establishment period, and perform needed maintenance promptly. 3.3.2 Promotion of Growth
Groundcover shall be maintained in a manner that promotes proper health, growth, natural color.Turf shall have a neat uniform manicured appearance, free of bare areas, ruts, holes, weeds, pests, dead vegetation, debris, and unwanted vegetation that present an unsightly appearance. Mow, remove excess clippings, eradicate weeds, water, fertilize, topdress and perform other operations necessary to promote growth, as approved by Contracting Officer and consistent with approved Integrated Pest Management Plan. Remove noxious weeds common to the area from planting areas by mechanical means. 3.3.3 3.3.3.1 Mowing Turf
Turf shall be mowed at a uniform finished height. Mow turfed areas to a minimum average height of 2 inches when average height of grass becomes 3 inches for spring/summer maintenance and to a minimum average height of 3 inches when the average height of grass reaches 4 inches for fall maintenance. The height of turf is measured from the soil. Mowing of turf shall be performed in a manner that prevents scalping, rutting, bruising, uneven and rough cutting. Prior to mowing, all rubbish, debris, trash, leaves, rocks, paper, and limbs or branches on a turf area shall be picked up and disposed. Adjacent paved areas shall be swept/vacuumed clean. 3.3.4 Turf Edging and Trimming
Perimeter of planter bed edges, sidewalks, driveways, curbs, and other paved surfaces shall be edged. Uniformly edge these areas to prevent encroachment of vegetation onto paved surfaces and to provide a clear cut division line between planter beds, turf, and ground cover. Edging is to be accomplished in a manner that prevents scalping, rutting, bruising, uneven and rough cutting. Edging shall be performed on the same day that turf is mowed. Use of string line trimmers is permitted in "soft" areas such as an edge between turfgrass and a planter bed. Care shall be exercised to avoid damage to any plant materials, structures, and other SECTION 32 05 33 Page 5
W912HN-12-R-0003
landscape features. Trimming around trees, fences, poles, walls, irrigation valve boxes and other similar objects is to be accomplished to match the height and appearance of surrounding mowed turf growth. Trimming shall be performed on the same day the turf's mowed. Care shall be exercised to avoid "Girdling" trees located in turf areas. The use of protective tree collars on trees in turf areas may be utilized as a temporary means to avoid injury to tree trunks. At the end of the plant establishment period Contractor will be responsible for removing all protective tree collars. Fences, poles, walls, and other elements must not be marked in the edging process. If this happens, the contractor is responsible for replacement of the marked element(s). 3.3.5 Post-Fertilizer Application
Apply turf fertilizer in a manner that promotes health, growth, vigor, color and appearance of cultivated turf areas. The method of application, fertilizer type and frequencies shall be determined by the laboratory soil analysis results the requirements of the particular turf species. Organic fertilizer shall be used. In the event that organic fertilizer is not producing the desired effect, the Contractor shall contact the Contracting Officer for approval prior to the use of a synthetic type of fertilizer. Fertilizer shall be applied by approved methods in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.3.6 Turf Watering
The Contractor shall perform irrigation in a manner that promotes the health, growth, color and appearance of cultivated vegetation and that complies with all Federal, State, and local water agencies and authorities directives. The Contractor shall be responsible to prevent over watering, water run-off, erosion, and ponding due to excessive quantities or rate of application. The Contractor shall abide by state, local or other water conservation regulations or restrictions in force during the establishment period. 3.3.7 3.3.8 Omitted Turf Clearance Area
Trees located in turf areas shall be maintained with a growth free clearance of 18 inches from the tree trunk base. The use of mechanical weed whips to accomplish the turf growth free bed area is prohibited. 3.3.9 Replanting
Replant in accordance with Section 32 92 23 SODDING and within specified planting dates areas which do not have a satisfactory stand of turf. 3.3.10 Final Inspection and Acceptance
Final inspection will be make upon written request from the Contractor at least 10 days prior to the last day of the turf establishment period. Final turf acceptance will be based upon a satisfactory stand of turf. 3.4 EXTERIOR PLANT ESTABLISHMENT PERIOD
The exterior plant establishment period will commence on the date that SECTION 32 05 33 Page 6
W912HN-12-R-0003
inspection by the Contracting Officer shows that the new plants furnished under this contract have been satisfactorily installed and shall continue for a period of 365 days, or through 2 months of the next growing season, whichever is longer. 3.4.1 Frequency of Maintenance
Begin maintenance immediately after plants have been installed. Inspect exterior plants at least once a week for two months and once a month for the rest of the establishment period and perform needed maintenance promptly. 3.4.2 Promotion of Plant Growth and Vigor
Water, prune, fertilize, mulch, adjust stakes, guys and turnbuckles, eradicate weeds and perform other operations necessary to promote plant growth, and vigor. 3.4.3 Planter Bed Maintenance
Planter beds shall be weeded, fertilized, irrigated, kept pest free, turf free, pruned, and mulch levels maintained. Planter beds will not be allowed to encroach into turf areas. A definite break shall be maintained between turf areas and planter beds. 3.4.3.1 Shrub Selective Maintenance
In addition to the above requirements, shrubs shall be selectively pruned, and shaped for health and safety when the following conditions exist: Remove growth in front of windows, over entrance ways or walks, and any growth which will obstruct vision at street intersections or of security personnel; Remove dead, damaged or diseased branches or limbs; where shrub growth obstructs pedestrian walkways; where shrub growth is found growing against or over structures; where shrub growth permits concealment of unauthorized persons. Prune by hand to enhance natural form. Do not shear. All pruning debris shall be disposed of in a proper manner. 3.4.3.2 Tree Maintenance
Tree maintenance shall include adjustment of stakes, ties, guy supports, watering, fertilizing, pest control, mulching, pruning for health and safety and fall leaf cleanup. Stakes, ties, guy supports shall be inspected and adjusted to avoid girdling and promote natural development. All trees within the project boundaries, regardless of caliper, shall be selectively pruned for safety and health reasons. These include but are not limited to removal of dead and broken branches and correction of structural defects. Prune trees according to their natural growth characteristics leaving trees well shaped and balanced. Pruning of all trees including palm trees shall be accomplished by or in the presence of a certified member of the International Society of Arboriculture and in accordance with ANSI Z133.1. All pruning debris generated shall be disposed of in a proper manner. 3.4.4 3.4.5 Omitted Removal of Dying or Dead Plants
Remove dead and dying plants and provide new plants immediately upon commencement of the specified planting season, and replace stakes, guys, SECTION 32 05 33 Page 7
W912HN-12-R-0003
mulch and eroded earth mound water basins. A tree shall be considered dying or dead when the main leader has died back, or a minimum of 20 percent of the crown has died. A shrub or ground cover shall be considered dying or dead when a minimum of 20 percent of the plant has died. This condition shall be determined by scraping on a branch an area 1/16 inch square, maximum, to determine the cause for dying plant material and shall provide recommendations for replacement. The Contractor shall determine the cause for dying plant material and provide recommendations for replacement. 3.4.6 Tracking of Unhealthy Plants
Note plants not in healthy growing condition, as determined by the Contracting Officer, and as soon as seasonal conditions permit, remove and replace with plants of the same species and sizes as originally specified. Install replacement plantings in accordance with Section 32 93 00 EXTERIOR PLANTS. New plants will carry a new full warranty period. 3.4.7 Final Inspection
Final inspection will be made upon written request from the Contractor at least 10 days prior to the last day of the establishment period. Final inspection will be based upon satisfactory health and growth of plants and on the following: 3.4.7.1 Total Plants on Site
Plants have been accepted and required number of replacements have been installed. 3.4.7.2 Mulching and Weeding
Planter beds and earth mound water basins are properly mulched and free of weeds. 3.4.7.3 Tree Supports
Stakes and guys are in good condition. 3.4.7.4 Remedial Work
Remedial measures directed by the Contracting Officer to ensure plant material survival and promote healthy growth have been completed. 3.5 3.5.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Maintenance Inspection Report
Provide maintenance inspection report to assure that landscape maintenance is being performed in accordance with the specifications and in the best interest of plant growth and survivability. Site observations shall be documented at the start of the establishment period, then quarterly following the start, and at the end of establishment period. Results of site observation visits shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer within 7 calendar days of each site observation visit. 3.5.2 Plant Quantities
The Contractor shall provide Contracting Officer with the number of plant quantities. In addition, provide total exterior area of hardscape and SECTION 32 05 33 Page 8
W912HN-12-R-0003
landscaping such as turf and total number of shrubs. 3.5.3 Tree Staking and Guying Removal
The Contractor shall provide a certified letter that all stakes and guys are removed from all project trees at the end of the establishment period. -- End of Section --
SECTION 32 05 33
Page 9
W912HN-12-R-0003
SECTION 32 11 16.16 SUBBASE COURSE FOR PERVIOUS PAVING 07/06 PART 1 1.1 GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM C 117 (2004) Standard Test Method for Materials Finer than 75-um (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing (2006)Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine (2006) Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates (2007) Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method (2009) Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3) (2700 kN-m/m3) (2007e2) CBR (California Bearing Ratio) of Laboratory-Compacted Soils (2005) Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) (2009) Graded Aggregate Material for Bases or Subbases for Highways or Airports (2005) Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) (2010) Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils (2006) Nontraditional Coarse Aggregate for Bituminous Paving Mixtures (2008e1) Use of Scrap Tires in Civil Engineering Applications (2007e1) Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard SECTION 32 11 16.16 Page 1
ASTM C 131
ASTM C 136
ASTM D 1556
ASTM D 1557
ASTM D 1883
ASTM D 2922
ASTM D 2940/D 2940M
ASTM D 3017
ASTM D 4318
ASTM D 6155
ASTM D 6270
ASTM D 698
W912HN-12-R-0003
Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/cu. ft. (600 kN-m/cu. m.)) ASTM D 75/D 75M (2009) Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates
U.S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC) LEED (2009) Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design(tm) Green Building Rating System for New Construction (LEED-NC) OMITTED SUBMITTALS
1.2 1.3
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-03 Product Data Materials; (LEED) Geotextile; (LEED) Documentation indicating percentage of post-industrial and post-consumer recycled content per unit of product. Indicate relative dollar value of recycled content products to total dollar value of products included in project. Local/Regional Materials; (LEED) Documentation indicating distance between manufacturing facility and the project site. Indicate distance of raw material origin from the project site. Indicate relative dollar value of local/regional materials to total dollar value of products included in project. SD-05 Design Data Gradation curve SD-06 Test Reports Bearing ratio Liquid limit Plasticity index Percentage of wear Gradation tests Density tests
SECTION 32 11 16.16
Page 2
W912HN-12-R-0003
SD-07 Certificates Source Location and name. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Inspect materials delivered to the site and store aggregates in a manner that will prevent segregation and contamination. 1.5 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT
Subject to approval of the Contracting Officer, special equipment as dictated by local conditions may be used. Calibrated equipment, such as scales, batching equipment, spreaders, and other similar equipment, shall have been calibrated by a calibration laboratory approved by the Contracting Officer within 12 months of commencing work. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Do not construct course when atmospheric temperature is below 35 degrees F or when weather conditions could detrimentally affect quality of finished course. When temperature falls below 35 degrees F, protect areas of completed course against freezing. 1.7 1.7.1 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS Local/Regional Materials
Use materials or products extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within a 500 mile radius from the project site, if available from a minimum of three sources. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total local material requirements. Course materials may be locally available. PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS MATERIALS
ASTM D 2940/D 2940M, except as modified herein. Material shall consist of natural, processed or blends of waste concrete, masonry, cement, tile, or other waste material from on-site work as specified; rock, crushed concrete, or concrete block from off-site grading or demolition work; concrete, stone, or other recycled material complying with ASTM D 6155; gravel; stone. Material shall be free-draining. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total recycled content requirements. Material may contain post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content. Obtain materials from sources approved by the Contracting Officer. Preliminary approval of pits shall not mean that material found in the deposit will be acceptable. Maximum dimensions of material particles shall not be greater than two-thirds the compacted thickness of the layer in which it is to be placed. Coarse aggregate shall have a percentage of wear of not more than 40 as determined by ASTM C 131. Material shall have a bearing ratio of at least 30 as determined by laboratory test on a four day soaked specimen in accordance with ASTM D 1883; compact the specimen in accordance with ASTM D 1557, Method B, C, or D. Material passing the No. 40 sieve shall have a liquid limit of not more than 25 and a plasticity index of not more than 5 in accordance with ASTM D 4318. Grading shall be per SECTION 32 11 16.16 Page 3
W912HN-12-R-0003
the plans. 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
Prior to production and delivery of aggregates, take at least one initial sample in accordance with ASTM D 75/D 75M. Collect each sample by taking three incremental samples at random from source material to make a composite sample of not less than 50 pounds. Repeat sampling procedure when source of material is changed or when deficiencies or variations from specified grading of materials are found in testing. 2.2.1 Geotextile
See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total recycled content requirements. Geotextile may contain post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content. PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION GRADE CONTROL
Provide line and grade stakes for control. Place grade stakes in lanes parallel to centerline of areas to be paved and space for string lining or other control methods. 3.2 PLACING AND MIXING
Clean underlying surface of foreign substances and ensure proper compaction and smoothness before placement of course. Verify subsoils have a permeability between 0.5 and 3.0 inches per hour. Recondition, reshape, and recompact areas damaged by freezing, rainfall, or other weather conditions. Place geotextiles in accordance with specifications and drawings. Mix and place materials to obtain a uniform course for the water content and gradation specified. Construct course in one or more layers. Make each layer between 3 and 8 inches in compacted thickness. Tire shall be installed in accordance with ASTM D 6270. 3.3 COMPACTING AND FINISHING
Compact each layer to at least 100 percent of the maximum laboratory density determined in accordance with ASTM D 1557 for areas subject to heavy vehicular traffic. Compact each layer to at least 95 percent Standard Proctor Density per ASTM D 698 for pedestrian areas. Compact material inaccessible to rolling equipment by mechanical tamping. Finish surface of the layer by blading and rolling. Blade, roll, and tamp until surface is smooth and free from waves and irregularities. Aerate material excessively moistened by rain during construction. Aerate using blade graders, harrows, or other equipment until the moisture content is that needed to obtain specified density. Place and compact earth at edges of course for at least one foot of the shoulder. 3.4 3.4.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Sampling During Construction
Take one random sample of each 1000 tons of material placed, but not less than one random sample per day's run. Take samples in accordance with ASTM D 75/D 75M.
SECTION 32 11 16.16
Page 4
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.4.2 3.4.2.1
Testing Material
Make gradation tests from each sample in accordance with ASTM C 136. Determine material passing the No. 200 sieve in accordance with ASTM C 117. 3.4.2.2 Smoothness Test
Test with a 10 foot straightedge applied parallel with and at right angles to centerline of the rolled area. Correct surface deviations in excess of 3/8 inch by loosening, adding or removing material, reshaping, watering, and compacting. When course is constructed in more than one layer, smoothness requirements apply only to the top layer. 3.4.2.3 Field Density Tests
ASTM D 1556 or ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 3017. Take one field density test for each 500 square yards of each layer of course. When using ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017 to test field compaction densities, verify the results of the tests by performing one test per day using ASTM D 1556 at locations previously tested by ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017 and one additional test using ASTM D 1556 for every ten tests performed at locations previously tested by ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017. 3.4.2.4 Laboratory Density Tests
ASTM D 1557, Method B, C, or D, for all material. 3.4.2.5 Thickness Test
Determine thickness of course from test holes not less than 3 inches in diameter. Obtain a thickness test for each 500 square yards of course. Where course deficiency is more than 1/2 inch, correct by scarifying, adding mixture of proper gradation, reblading, and recompacting. Where the measured thickness exceeds the indicated thickness by more than 1/2 inch, consider the measured thickness as the indicated or specified thickness plus 1/2 inch for determining the average. The average thickness shall be the average of the depth measurements and shall not underrun the thickness shown by more than 1/4 inch. 3.5 MAINTENANCE
After construction is completed, protect and maintain all areas of course against detrimental effects. Maintenance includes drainage, rolling, shaping, watering, or other action required to maintain course in proper condition. Maintain sufficient moisture by light sprinkling with water at the surface to prevent a dusty condition. -- End of Section --
SECTION 32 11 16.16
Page 5
W912HN-12-R-0003
SECTION 32 11 24 GRADED CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE FOR FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT 08/08 PART 1 1.1 GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM C 117 (2004) Standard Test Method for Materials Finer than 75-um (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing (2006)Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine (2006) Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates (2007) Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method (2009) Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3) (2700 kN-m/m3) (2007e2) CBR (California Bearing Ratio) of Laboratory-Compacted Soils (1985; R 1998) Wet Preparation of Soil Samples for Particle-Size Analysis and Determination of Soil Constants (2010) Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils (2009) Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates
ASTM C 131
ASTM C 136
ASTM D 1556
ASTM D 1557
ASTM D 1883
ASTM D 2217
ASTM D 4318
ASTM D 75/D 75M
U.S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC) LEED (2009) Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design(tm) Green Building Rating System for New Construction (LEED-NC)
SECTION 32 11 24
Page 1
W912HN-12-R-0003
1.2 1.3
OMITTED SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-03 Product Data Aggregates; (LEED) Submit documentation indicating percentage of post-industrial and post-consumer recycled content per unit of product. Indicate relative dollar value of recycled content products to total dollar value of products included in project. Local/Regional Materials; (LEED) Submit documentation indicating distance between manufacturing facility and the project site. Indicate distance of raw material origin from the project site. Indicate relative dollar value of local/regional materials to total dollar value of products included in project. SD-06 Test Reports Gradation Bearing ratio Liquid limit Plasticity index Percentage of wear Density Gradation Smoothness Density Thickness 1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Inspect materials delivered to site for damage and store as to prevent segregation and contamination. 1.5 WEATHER LIMITATIONS
Do not construct base course when atmospheric temperature is below 35 degrees F or when rainfall or other weather conditions detrimentally affect the quality of the finished course. SECTION 32 11 24 Page 2
W912HN-12-R-0003
1.6
CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT
Equipment shall be dependable and adequate for the purpose intended. Maintain equipment in satisfactory and safe operating condition. Subject to approval, special equipment dictated by local conditions may be used. Calibrated equipment, such as scales, batching equipment, spreaders, and similar items, shall have been recalibrated by an approved calibration laboratory within 12 months of commencing work. 1.7 1.7.1 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS Local/Regional Materials
Use materials or products extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within a 500 mile radius from the project site, if available from a minimum of three sources. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total local material requirements. Aggregate materials may be locally available. PART 2 2.1 2.1.1 PRODUCTS MATERIALS Aggregates
Consist of durable and sound crushed concrete, crushed masonry, crushed tile, crushed gravel, or crushed stone, free of lumps or balls of clay or other objectionable matter. See Section 01 33 29 LEED(tm) DOCUMENTATION for cumulative total recycled content requirements. Material may contain post-consumer or post-industrial recycled content. Crushed stone and gravel shall be free from flat, elongated, soft, or disintegrated pieces. Crushed gravel retained on a No. 4 sieve shall have at least 90 percent by weight with at least two fractured faces and 100 percent by weight with at least one fractured face. Base course materials samples shall have a bearing ratio of at least 100 as determined by laboratory tests on a 4-day soaked specimen in accordance with ASTM D 1883; compact specimen in accordance with ASTM D 1557, Method D. Determine grain size in accordance with ASTM C 136 and amount of material finer than 200 mesh sieve in accordance with ASTM C 117. Aggregate shall have a percentage of wear not exceeding 40 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 131, Grading A. Soil binder material, that portion of material passing the No. 40 sieve, shall be of such composition that the composite material conforms to the requirements specified herein. The base course shall be of such nature that it can be compacted readily with watering and rolling to a firm, stable base and shall conform to one of the following sizes: Percentage by Weight Passing Square Mesh Laboratory Sieves Size Numbers Sieves 2 inch 1 1/2 inch 1 inch 1/2 inch No. 4 1 100 70-100 45-80 30-60 20-50 2 100 60-100 30-65 20-50 Page 3 3 100 40-70 20-50
SECTION 32 11 24
W912HN-12-R-0003
Percentage by Weight Passing Square Mesh Laboratory Sieves Size Numbers Sieves No. 10 No. 40 No. 200 1 15-40 5-25 0-10 2 15-40 5-25 0-10 3 15-40 5-25 0-10
That portion of the material passing the No. 40sieve shall have a liquid limit of not more than 25 and a plasticity index of not more than 5 as determined by ASTM D 4318. Prepare samples in accordance with ASTM D 2217, Procedure A. PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION BASE COURSE
Construct the graded aggregate base course on a prepared subgrade, as indicated. Verify compacted subgrade, granular base, or stabilized soil is acceptable and ready to support paving and imposed loads. Provide line and grade stakes for control. Place grade stakes in lanes parallel to the centerline of areas to be paved and space for string lining or other control methods. The base course shall consist of aggregate processed, deposited, spread, and compacted on a prepared surface. The Contractor shall be responsible for protection of completed areas against detrimental effects. Recondition, reshape, and recompact areas damaged by freezing, rainfall, or other weather conditions. 3.2 3.3 OMITTED MIXING OF MATERIALS
Mix aggregates in a stationary or traveling plant. Proportion aggregates by weight or volume in such quantities that specified gradation, liquid limit, and plasticity index requirements are met after the base course has been placed and compacted. Incorporate, during the mixing operation, water in quantities sufficient to provide the necessary moisture content for the specified compaction. Mixing operations shall produce satisfactory uniform blending and the method of discharging into trucks shall not produce segregation. 3.4 PLACING
Do not dump mixed materials in piles, but place on prepared subgrade or subbase in layers of uniform thickness with a spreader. When a compacted course 6 inches in thickness is required, place material in a single layer. When a compacted course in excess of 6 inches is required, place material in layers of equal thickness. Do not exceed 6 inches or have less than 3 inches in thickness for any compacted layer. Place layers so that when compacted, they will be true to grades or levels required with the least possible surface disturbance. Where the base course is constructed in more than one layer, clean previously constructed layers of loose and foreign matter. Maintain material water content during the placing period to obtain the compaction specified. Make adjustments in placing procedures or equipment to obtain true grades, to minimize segregation and degradation, to reduce or increase water content, and to insure a satisfactory base SECTION 32 11 24 Page 4
W912HN-12-R-0003
course. 3.4.1 Stationary-Plant Method
Mix aggregates, binder material and water until a uniform homogeneous mixture is obtained. Do not dump materials in piles; place in layers of essentially uniform thickness, not to exceed 6 inches after compaction, by an approved spreader. Tail gate spreading will be acceptable only with permission, under conditions such as where space limitations prohibit use of the spreader. 3.4.2 Windrow Traveling-Plant Method
Place aggregates and binder materials in windrows of such cross section and proportions that, when picked up, mixed, and redeposited in windrows, the finished mixture shall conform to the specified requirements. Do not exceed the rated capacity of the traveling plant with the size of the windrow of the combined materials. Add water, in quantity sufficient to provide the necessary moisture content for compacting, to the aggregates at the time of mixing. Mix materials uniformly by the traveling plant, deposit in windrows of uniform cross section, and spread in a layer of uniform thickness to the required contour and grades. 3.5 COMPACTING AND FINISHING
Immediately following the placing, spread the finished mixture uniformly in a layer and bring to optimum moisture content. The loose thickness and the surface of the layer shall be such that the specified density and the required thickness shall be obtained after compaction. Compact the layer with steel-faced, vibrating or pneumatic-tired rollers, or other suitable compacting equipment or combinations thereof. Continue compacting until the layer is compacted through the full depth to a field density of at least 100 percent of the maximum density at optimum moisture content tested in accordance with ASTM D 1556 . In areas not accessible to rollers or compactors, compact the mixture with mechanical hand tampers. If the mixture is excessively moistened by rain, aerate by blade graders, or other suitable equipment. Aerate until the moisture content of the material is that needed to obtain the required density. Finish the surface of the layer by a combination of rolling and blading. Final surface shall be smooth and free from waves, irregularities, and ruts or soft yielding spots. 3.6 PROOF ROLLING
Proof roll the top surface of the completed base course by making eight coverages with a heavy rubber-tired roller having four tires with each tire loaded to 30,000 pounds or more and inflated to at least 150 psi. Make four coverages over other areas to be paved. A coverage is defined as one application of one tire print over each point in the surface of the designated area. When under the action of the proof rolling, the base course yields, pumps, or otherwise fails, remove, replace with suitable materials, and recompact materials in the base course or in the underlying layers indicated to be unsatisfactory. The speed of the roller shall not exceed 5 miles per hour. Obtain approval upon completion of the proof rolling of the base course. 3.7 FINISHING AT EDGES OF BASE COURSE
Place earth or other approved materials along the edges of the base course in such quantity that it will compact to the thickness of the course being SECTION 32 11 24 Page 5
W912HN-12-R-0003
constructed. When the course is being constructed in two or more layers, place material to the thickness of each layer. In each operation, allow at least a one foot width of the shoulder to be rolled and compacted simultaneously with the rolling and compacting of each layer. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Approve materials and material sources in advance of the use of such materials in the work. Replace base where samples are removed. 3.8.1 3.8.1.1 Sampling Aggregates at the Source
Prior to production and delivery of aggregates, take at least one initial sample in accordance with ASTM D 75/D 75M. Collect each sample by taking three incremental samples at random from the source material to make a composite sample of not less than 50 pounds. Repeat above sampling when source of material is changed or when unacceptable deficiencies or variations from specified grading of materials are found in testing. 3.8.1.2 During Construction
Take one random sample from each 1000 tons of completed course material, but not less than one random sample per day's run. Take samples in accordance with ASTM D 75/D 75M. 3.8.1.3 Sample Identification
Place each sample in a clean container, securely fastened to prevent loss of material. Tag each sample for identification and with the following information: Contract No._______________________________________ Sample No._____________________ Quality __________ Date of Sample_____________________________________ Sampler____________________________________________ Source_____________________________________________ Intended Use_______________________________________ For Testing________________________________________ 3.8.2 3.8.2.1 Testing Aggregates
Test each sample of base course material without delay. Make gradation tests from each sample in accordance with ASTM C 136. Make sieve analysis on material passing the No. 200 sieve in accordance with ASTM C 117. 3.8.2.2 Smoothness Tests
Test with a 10 foot straightedge, applied parallel with and at right angles to the center line of the paved area. Correct deviations in the surface in excess of 3/8 inch by loosening, adding or removing material, reshaping, watering, and compacting. The smoothness requirements specified herein apply only to the top layer when base course is constructed in more than one layer.
SECTION 32 11 24
Page 6
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.8.2.3
Field Density Tests Take one test for each 500 square yards of each layer of base
ASTM D 1556. course. 3.8.2.4
Laboratory Density Tests
In accordance with ASTM D 1557, Method D. 3.8.2.5 Thickness Tests
Measure thickness of base course at intervals such that there will be a depth measurement for at least each 500 square yards of complete base course. Make depth measurements by test holes, at least 3 inches in diameter, through the base course. Where base course deficiency is more than 1/2 inch, correct by scarifying, adding mixture of proper gradation, reblading, and recompacting. Where the measured thickness is more than 1/2 inch thicker than indicated, consider it as the indicated thickness plus 1/2 inch for determining the average. The average thickness is the average of the depth measurements and shall not underrun the thickness indicated. 3.9 MAINTENANCE
After construction is completed, maintain the base course throughout, except where portion of the succeeding course is under construction thereon. Maintenance includes drainage, rolling, shaping, and watering, as necessary, to maintain the course in proper condition. Correct deficiencies in thickness, composition, construction, smoothness, and density, which develop during the maintenance, to conform to the requirements specified herein. Maintain sufficient moisture by light sprinkling with water at the surface to prevent a dusty condition. -- End of Section --
SECTION 32 11 24
Page 7
W912HN-12-R-0003
SECTION 32 12 16 HOT-MIX ASPHALT (HMA) FOR ROADS 08/09 PART 1 1.1 1.1.1 GENERAL UNIT PRICES Method of Measurement
The amount paid for will be the number of short tons of hot-mix asphalt mixture used in the accepted work. Weigh hot-mix asphalt mixture after mixing, and no separate payment will be made for weight of asphalt cement material incorporated herein. 1.1.2 Basis of Payment
Quantities of hot-mix asphalt mixtures, determined as specified above, will be paid for at respective contract unit prices or at reduced prices adjusted in accordance with paragraphs MATERIAL ACCEPTANCE and PERCENT PAYMENT. Payment will constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials, equipment, plant, and tools; and for all labor and other incidentals necessary to complete work required by this section of the specification. The measured quantity of hot-mix asphalt will be paid for and included in the lump-sum contract price. Payment will constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials, equipment, plant, and tools; and for all labor and other incidentals necessary to complete work required by this section of the specification. If less than 100 percent payment is due based on the pay factors stipulated in paragraphs MATERIAL ACCEPTANCE and PERCENT PAYMENT, use a unit price of TBD per short ton for purposes of calculating the payment reduction. 1.1.3 Percent Payment
When a lot of material fails to meet the specification requirements for 100 percent pay as outlined in the following paragraphs, that lot shall be removed and replaced, or accepted at a reduced price which will be computed by multiplying the unit price by the lot's pay factor. The lot pay factor is determined by taking the lowest computed pay factor based on either laboratory air voids, in-place density, grade or smoothness (each discussed below). At the end of the project, an average of all lot pay factors will be calculated. If this average lot pay factor equals or exceeds 95.0 percent, and no individual lot has a pay factor less than 75.1 percent, then the percent payment for the entire project will be 100 percent of the unit bid price. If the average lot pay factor is less than 95.0 percent, then each lot will be paid for at the unit price multiplied by the lot's pay factor. For any lots which are less than 2000 short tons, a weighted lot pay factor will be used to calculate the average lot pay factor. 1.1.4 Laboratory Air Voids and Theoretical Maximum Density
Laboratory air voids will be calculated by determining the Marshall or Superpave density of each lab compacted specimen using the laboratory-prepared, thoroughly dry method of ASTM D 2726 and determining SECTION 32 12 16 Page 1
W912HN-12-R-0003
the theoretical maximum density of every other sublot sample using ASTM D 2041. Laboratory air void calculations for each sublot will use the latest theoretical maximum density values obtained, either for that sublot or the previous sublot. The mean absolute deviation of the four laboratory air void contents (one from each sublot) from the JMF air void content will be evaluated and a pay factor determined from Table 1. All laboratory air void tests will be completed and reported within 24 hours after completion of construction of each lot. 1.1.5 Mean Absolute Deviation
An example of the computation of mean absolute deviation for laboratory air voids is as follows: Assume that the laboratory air voids are determined from 4 random samples of a lot (where 3 specimens were compacted from each sample). The average laboratory air voids for each sublot sample are determined to be 3.5, 3.0, 4.0, and 3.7. Assume that the target air voids from the JMF is 4.0. The mean absolute deviation is then: Mean Absolute Deviation = (|3.5 - 4.0| + |3.0 - 4.0| + |4.0 - 4.0| + |3.7 4.0|/4 = (0.5 + 1.0 + 0.0 + 0.3)/4 = (1.8)/4 = 0.45 The mean absolute deviation for laboratory air voids is determined to be 0.45. It can be seen from Table 1 that the lot's pay factor based on laboratory air voids, is 100 percent. Table 1. Pay Factor Based on Laboratory Air Voids Mean Absolute Deviation of Lab Air Voids from JMF Pay Factor, % O.60 or less 0.61 - 0.80 0.81 - 1.00 1.01 - 1.20 Above 1.20 1.1.6 In-place Density 100 98 95 90 reject (0)
For determining in-place density, one random core ( 4 inches or 6 inches in diameter) will be taken by the Government from the mat (interior of the lane) of each sublot, and one random core will be taken from the joint (immediately over joint) of each sublot. Each random core will be full thickness of the layer being placed. When the random core is less than 1 inch thick, it will not be included in the analysis. In this case, another random core will be taken. After air drying to a constant weight, cores obtained from the mat and from the joints will be used for in-place density determination. 1.1.7 Mat and Joint Densities
The average in-place mat and joint densities are expressed as a percentage of the average TMD for the lot. The TMD for each lot will be determined as the average TMD of the two random samples per lot. The average in-place mat density and joint density for a lot are determined and compared with Table 2 to calculate a single pay factor per lot based on in-place density, as described below. First, a pay factor for both mat density and joint density are determined from Table 2. The area associated with the joint is then determined and will be considered to be 5 feet wide times the length of completed longitudinal construction joint in the lot. This area will SECTION 32 12 16 Page 2
W912HN-12-R-0003
not exceed the total lot size. The length of joint to be considered will be that length where a new lane has been placed against an adjacent lane of hot-mix asphalt pavement, either an adjacent freshly paved lane or one paved at any time previously. The area associated with the joint is expressed as a percentage of the total lot area. A weighted pay factor for the joint is determined based on this percentage (see example below). The pay factor for mat density and the weighted pay factor for joint density is compared and the lowest selected. This selected pay factor is the pay factor based on density for the lot. When the TMD on both sides of a longitudinal joint is different, the average of these two TMD will be used as the TMD needed to calculate the percent joint density. All density results for a lot will be completed and reported within 24 hours after the construction of that lot. Table 2. Pay Factor Based on In-place Density Average Mat Density Average Joint Density (4 Cores) Pay Factor, % (4 Cores) (% of TMD) (% of TMD) -------------------------------------------------------------------94.0 or 96.0 93 9 93.8 or 96.1 93.7 93.6 or 96.2 93.5 93.4 or 96.3 93.3 93.2 or 96.4 93.1 93.0 or 96.5 92.9 92.8 or 96.6 92.7 92.6 or 96.7 92.5 92.4 or 96.8 92.3 92.2 or 96.9 92.1 92.0 or 97.0 below 92.0 or above 97.0 1.1.8 100.0 100.0 99.9 99.8 99.6 99.4 99.1 98.7 98.3 97.8 97.3 96.3 94.1 92.2 90.3 87.9 85.7 83.3 80.6 78.0 75.0 0.0 (reject) 92.5 or above 92.4 92.3 92.2 92.1 92.0 91.9 91.8 91.7 91.6 91.5 91.4 91.3 91.2 91.1 91.0 90.9 90.8 90.7 90.6 90.5 below 90.5
Pay Factor Based on In-place Density
An example of the computation of a pay factor (in I-P units only) based on in-place density, is as follows: Assume the following test results for field density made on the lot: (1) Average mat density = 93.2 percent of TMD. (2) Average joint density = 91.5 percent of TMD. (3) Total area of lot = 30,000 square feet. (4) Length of completed longitudinal construction joint = 2000 feet. a. Step 1: Determine pay factor based on mat density and on joint density, using Table 2: (1) Mat density of 93.2 percent = 98.3 pay factor. (2) Joint density of 91.5 percent = 97.3 pay factor.
SECTION 32 12 16
Page 3
W912HN-12-R-0003
b.
Step 2: Determine ratio of joint area (length of longitudinal joint x 5 ft) to mat area (total paved area in the lot): Multiply the length of completed longitudinal construction joint by the specified 5 ft. width and divide by the mat area (total paved area in the lot). (1) (2000 ft. x 5 ft.)/30000 sq.ft. = 0.3333 ratio of joint area to mat area (ratio).
c.
Step 3: Weighted pay factor (wpf) for joint is determined as indicated below: wpf = joint pay factor + (100 - joint pay factor) (1 - ratio) wpf = 97.3 + (100-97.3) (1-.3333) = 99.1%
d.
Step 4: Compare weighted pay factor for joint density to pay factor for mat density and select the smaller: (1) Pay factor for mat density: density: 99.1% 98.3%. Weighted pay factor for joint
(2) Select the smaller of the two values as pay factor based on density: 98.3% 1.1.9 Pay Factor for Grade
When more than 5 percent of all measurements made within a lot are outside the 0.05 foot tolerance, the pay factor based on grade for that lot will be 95 percent. In areas where the grade exceeds the tolerance by more than 50 percent, remove the surface lift full depth and replace the lift with hot-mix asphalt to meet specification requirements, at no additional cost to the Government. 1.1.10 a. Payment Adjustment for Smoothness Straightedge Testing. Record location and deviation from straightedge for all measurements. When between 5.0 and 10.0 percent of all measurements made within a lot exceed the tolerance specified in paragraph Smoothness Requirements above, after any reduction of high spots or removal and replacement, the computed pay factor for that lot based on surface smoothness, will be 95 percent. When more than 10.0 percent of all measurements exceed the tolerance, the computed pay factor will be 90 percent. When between 15.0 and 20.0 percent of all measurements exceed the tolerance, the computed pay factor will be 75 percent. When 20.0 percent or more of the measurements exceed the tolerance, the lot shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to the Government. Regardless of the above, any small individual area with surface deviation which exceeds the tolerance given above by more than 50 percent, shall be corrected by diamond grinding to meet the specification requirements above or shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to the Government. Profilograph Testing. Record location and data from all profilograph measurements. When the Profile Index of a 0.1 mile segment of a lot exceeds the tolerance specified in paragraph Smoothness Requirements above by 1.0 inch/mile, but less than 2.0 inches/mile, after any reduction of high spots or removal and replacement, the computed pay factor for that lot based on surface smoothness will be 95 percent. When the Profile Index exceeds the tolerance by 2.0 inches/mile, but less than 3.0 inches/mile, the computed pay factor will be 90 percent. SECTION 32 12 16 Page 4
b.
W912HN-12-R-0003
When the Profile Index exceeds the tolerance by 3.0 inches/mile, but less than 4.0 inches/mile, the computed pay factor will be 75 percent. When the Profile Index exceeds the tolerance by 4.0 inches/mile or more, the lot shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to the Government. Regardless of the above, any small individual area with surface deviation which exceeds the tolerance given above by more than 5.0 inches/mile or more, shall be corrected by grinding to meet the specification requirements above or shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to the Government. c. Bumps ("Must Grind" Areas). Any bumps ("must grind" areas) shown on the profilograph trace which exceed 0.3 inch in height shall be reduced by diamond grinding until they do not exceed 0.3 inch when retested. Such grinding shall be tapered in all directions to provide smooth transitions to areas not requiring grinding. The following will not be permitted: (1) skin patching for correcting low areas, (2) planing or milling for correcting high areas. At the Contractor's option, pavement areas, including ground areas, may be rechecked with the profilograph in order to record a lower Profile Index. REFERENCES
1.2
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS (AASHTO) AASHTO M 320 ASPHALT INSTITUTE (AI) AI MS-02 (6th Edition; 1997) Mix Design Methods for Asphalt (2nd Edition; 2001) Construction of Hot-Mix Asphalt Pavements (2001e3) Superpave Mix Design ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM C 117 (2004) Standard Test Method for Materials Finer than 75-um (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing (2006) Standard Test Methods for Uncompacted Void Content of Fine Aggregate (as Influenced by Particle Shape, Surface Texture, and Grading) (2007) Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific Gravity), and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate (2007a) Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific Gravity), and Absorption of Fine Aggregate SECTION 32 12 16 Page 5 (2005) Performance-Graded Asphalt Binder
AI MS-22
AI SP-2
ASTM C 1252
ASTM C 127
ASTM C 128
W912HN-12-R-0003
ASTM C 131
(2006)Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine (2006) Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates (1997; R 2004) Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates (2007) Standard Test Method for Bulk Density ("Unit Weight") and Voids in Aggregate (1997; R 2004) Standard Test Method for Total Evaporable Moisture Content of Aggregate by Drying (2005) Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate (2001; R 2007) Sampling Bituminous Materials (1985; R 2006) Moisture or Volatile Distillates in Bituminous Paving Mixtures (2003a) Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity and Density of Bituminous Paving Mixtures (2005) Quantitative Extraction of Bitumen from Bituminous Paving Mixtures (2002) Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregate (2009) Mineral Filler for Bituminous Paving Mixtures (2008) Estimating Degree of Particle Coating of Bituminous-Aggregate Mixtures (2008) Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Non-Absorptive Compacted Bituminous Mixtures (2005) Density of Bituminous Concrete in Place by Nuclear Methods (2007) Random Sampling of Construction Materials (2009) Minimum Requirements for Agencies Testing and Inspecting Road and Paving SECTION 32 12 16 Page 6
ASTM C 136
ASTM C 142
ASTM C 29/C 29M
ASTM C 566
ASTM C 88
ASTM D 140
ASTM D 1461
ASTM D 2041
ASTM D 2172
ASTM D 2419
ASTM D 242/D 242M
ASTM D 2489/D 2489M
ASTM D 2726
ASTM D 2950
ASTM D 3665
ASTM D 3666
W912HN-12-R-0003
Materials ASTM D 4125 (2005) Asphalt Content of Bituminous Mixtures by the Nuclear Method (2005e1) Flat Particles, Elongated Particles, or Flat and Elongated Particles in Coarse Aggregate (2004) Effect of Moisture on Asphalt Concrete Paving Mixtures (2008) Mechanical Size Analysis of Extracted Aggregate (2005) Asphalt Content of Hot Mix Asphalt by Ignition Method (2008) Standard Test Method for Preparation and Determination of the Relative Density of Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) Specimens by Means of the Superpave Gyratory Compactor (2004) Preparation of Bituminous Specimens Using Marshall Apparatus (2006) Standard Test Method for Marshall Stability and Flow of Bituminous Mixtures (1995b; R 2002) Mixing Plants for Hot-Mixed, Hot-Laid Bituminous Paving Mixtures
ASTM D 4791
ASTM D 4867/D 4867M
ASTM D 5444
ASTM D 6307
ASTM D 6925
ASTM D 6926
ASTM D 6927
ASTM D 995
STATE OF CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION (CDT) CDT Test 526 (2002) Operation of California Profilograph and Evaluation of Profiles
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE) COE CRD-C 171 (1994) Standard Test Method for Determining Percentage of Crushed Particles in Aggregate
1.3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Perform the work consisting of pavement courses composed of mineral aggregate and asphalt material heated and mixed in a central mixing plant and placed on a prepared course. HMA designed and constructed in accordance with this section shall conform to the lines, grades, thicknesses, and typical cross sections shown on the drawings. Construct each course to the depth, section, or elevation required by the drawings and roll, finish, and approve it before the placement of the next course. 1.3.1 Asphalt Mixing Plant
Plants used for the preparation of hot-mix asphalt shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D 995 with the following changes: SECTION 32 12 16 Page 7
W912HN-12-R-0003
a.
Truck Scales. Weigh the asphalt mixture on approved, certified scales at the Contractor's expense. Inspect and seal scales at least annually by an approved calibration laboratory. Testing Facilities. Provide laboratory facilities at the plant for the use of the Government's acceptance testing and the Contractor's quality control testing. Inspection of Plant. Provide the Contracting Officer with access at all times, to all areas of the plant for checking adequacy of equipment; inspecting operation of the plant; verifying weights, proportions, and material properties; checking the temperatures maintained in the preparation of the mixtures and for taking samples. Provide assistance as requested, for the Government to procure any desired samples. Storage Bins. Use of storage bins for temporary storage of hot-mix asphalt will be permitted as follows: (1) The asphalt mixture may be stored in non-insulated storage bins for a period of time not exceeding 3 hours. (2) The asphalt mixture may be stored in insulated storage bins for a period of time not exceeding 8 hours. The mix drawn from bins shall meet the same requirements as mix loaded directly into trucks.
b.
c.
d.
1.3.2
Hauling Equipment
Provide trucks for hauling hot-mix asphalt having tight, clean, and smooth metal beds. To prevent the mixture from adhering to them, the truck beds shall be lightly coated with a minimum amount of paraffin oil, lime solution, or other approved material. Petroleum based products shall not be used as a release agent. Each truck shall have a suitable cover to protect the mixture from adverse weather. When necessary to ensure that the mixture will be delivered to the site at the specified temperature, truck beds shall be insulated or heated and covers (tarps) shall be securely fastened. 1.3.3 Asphalt Pavers
Provide asphalt pavers which are self-propelled, with an activated screed, heated as necessary, and capable of spreading and finishing courses of hot-mix asphalt which will meet the specified thickness, smoothness, and grade. The paver shall have sufficient power to propel itself and the hauling equipment without adversely affecting the finished surface. 1.3.3.1 Receiving Hopper
Provide paver with a receiving hopper of sufficient capacity to permit a uniform spreading operation and equipped with a distribution system to place the mixture uniformly in front of the screed without segregation. The screed shall effectively produce a finished surface of the required evenness and texture without tearing, shoving, or gouging the mixture. 1.3.3.2 Automatic Grade Controls
If an automatic grade control device is used, equip the paver with a SECTION 32 12 16 Page 8
W912HN-12-R-0003
control system capable of automatically maintaining the specified screed elevation. The control system shall be automatically actuated from either a reference line and/or through a system of mechanical sensors or sensor-directed mechanisms or devices which will maintain the paver screed at a predetermined transverse slope and at the proper elevation to obtain the required surface. The transverse slope controller shall be capable of maintaining the screed at the desired slope within plus or minus 0.1 percent. A transverse slope controller shall not be used to control grade. Provide controls capable of working in conjunction with any of the following attachments: a. b. c. d. 1.3.4 Ski-type device of not less than 30 feet in length. Taut stringline set to grade. Short ski or shoe for joint matching. Laser control. Rollers
Rollers shall be in good condition and shall be operated at slow speeds to avoid displacement of the asphalt mixture. The number, type, and weight of rollers shall be sufficient to compact the mixture to the required density while it is still in a workable condition. Do not use equipment which causes excessive crushing of the aggregate. 1.4 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-03 Product Data Mix Design; G, RO Proposed JMF. Contractor Quality Control; G, RO Quality control plan. Material Acceptance; G, RO Acceptance test results. Percent Payment; G, RO Pay calculations. SD-04 Samples Asphalt Cement Binder A 5 gallon sample for mix design verification.
SECTION 32 12 16
Page 9
W912HN-12-R-0003
Aggregates Sufficient materials to produce 200 lb of blended mixture for mix design verification. SD-06 Test Reports Aggregates; G, RO QC Monitoring Aggregate and QC test results. SD-07 Certificates Asphalt Cement Binder; G, RO Copies of certified test data. Amount, type and description of any modifiers blended into the asphalt cement binder Testing Laboratory Certification of compliance. Plant Scale Calibration Certification 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIRENMENTS
Do not place the hot-mix asphalt upon a wet surface or when the surface temperature of the underlying course is less than specified in Table 3. The temperature requirements may be waived by the Contracting Officer, if requested; however, all other requirements, including compaction, shall be met. Table 3. Surface Temperature Limitations of Underlying Course Mat Thickness, inches Degrees F
3 or greater Less than 3 PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS AGGREGATES
40 45
Provide aggregates consisting of crushed stone, crushed gravel, crushed slag, screenings, natural sand and mineral filler, as required. The portion of material retained on the No. 4 sieve is coarse aggregate. The portion of material passing the No. 4 sieve and retained on the No. 200 sieve is fine aggregate. The portion passing the No. 200 sieve is defined as mineral filler. Submit all aggregate test results and samples to the Contracting Officer at least 14 days prior to start of construction. 2.1.1 Coarse Aggregate
Provide coarse aggregate consisting of sound, tough, durable particles, free from films of material that would prevent thorough coating and bonding SECTION 32 12 16 Page 10
W912HN-12-R-0003
with the asphalt material and free from organic matter and other deleterious substances. All individual coarse aggregate sources shall meet the following requirements: a. The percentage of loss shall not be greater than 40 percent after 500 revolutions when tested in accordance with ASTM C 131. The percentage of loss shall not be greater than 18 percent after five cycles when tested in accordance with ASTM C 88 using magnesium sulfate or 12 percent when using sodium sulfate. At least 75 percent by weight of coarse aggregate shall have at least two or more fractured faces when tested in accordance with COE CRD-C 171. Fractured faces shall be produced by crushing. The particle shape shall be essentially cubical and the aggregate shall not contain more than 20% percent, by weight, of flat and elongated particles (3:1 ratio of maximum to minimum) when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4791. Slag shall be air-cooled, blast furnace slag, with a compacted weight of not less than 75 lb/cu ft when tested in accordance with ASTM C 29/C 29M. Clay lumps and friable particles shall not exceed 0.3 percent, by weight, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 142. Fine Aggregate
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.1.2
Fine aggregate shall consist of clean, sound, tough, durable particles free from coatings of clay, silt, or any objectionable material and containing no clay balls. a. All individual fine aggregate sources shall have a sand equivalent value not less than 45 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2419. The fine aggregate portion of the blended aggregate shall have an uncompacted void content not less than 45.0 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1252 Method A. The quantity of natural sand (noncrushed material) added to the aggregate blend shall not exceed 25 percent by weight of total aggregate. Clay lumps and friable particles shall not exceed 0.3 percent, by weight, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 142 Mineral Filler
b.
c.
d.
2.1.3
Mineral filler shall be nonplastic material meeting the requirements of ASTM D 242/D 242M. 2.1.4 Aggregate Gradation
The combined aggregate gradation shall conform to gradations specified in Table 2, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 136 and ASTM C 117, and shall not vary from the low limit on one sieve to the high limit on the adjacent sieve or vice versa, but grade uniformly from coarse to fine.
SECTION 32 12 16
Page 11
W912HN-12-R-0003
Table 4.
Aggregate Gradations Gradation 2 Percent Passing by Mass Gradation 3 Percent Passing by Mass
Sieve Size, inch
Gradation 1 Percent Passing by Mass
1 3/4 1/2 3/8 No. 4 No. 8 No. 16 No. 30 No. 50 No. 100 No. 200 2.2
100 76-96 68-88 60-82 45-67 32-54 22-44 15-35 9-25 6-18 3-6
--100 76-96 69-89 53-73 38-60 26-48 18-38 11-27 6-18 3-6
----100 76-96 58-78 40-60 28-48 18-38 11-27 6-18 3-6
ASPHALT CEMENT BINDER
Asphalt cement binder shall conform to AASHTO M 320 Performance Grade (PG). Test data indicating grade certification shall be provided by the supplier at the time of delivery of each load to the mix plant. Submit copies of these certifications to the Contracting Officer. The supplier is defined as the last source of any modification to the binder. The Contracting Officer may sample and test the binder at the mix plant at any time before or during mix production. Obtain samples for this verification testing in accordance with ASTM D 140 and in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Furnish these samples to the Contracting Officer for the verification testing, which shall be at no cost to the Contractor. Submit samples of the asphalt cement specified for approval not less than 14 days before start of the test section. 2.3 a. MIX DESIGN Develop the mix design. The asphalt mix shall be composed of a mixture of well-graded aggregate, mineral filler if required, and asphalt material. The aggregate fractions shall be sized, handled in separate size groups, and combined in such proportions that the resulting mixture meets the grading requirements of the job mix formula (JMF). Do not produce hot-mix asphalt for payment until a JMF has been approved. The hot-mix asphalt shall be designed in accordance with Marshall (MS-02), Superpave (SP-2), or Hveem (MS-02) procedures and the criteria shown in Table 5. Use the hand-held hammer to compact the specimens for Marshall mix design. If the Tensile Strength Ratio (TSR) of the composite mixture, as determined by ASTM D 4867/D 4867M is less than 75, the aggregates shall be rejected or the asphalt mixture treated with an approved anti-stripping agent. The amount of anti-stripping agent added shall be sufficient to produce a TSR of not less than 75. Provide an antistrip agent, if required, at no additional cost. Sufficient materials to produce 200 pound of blended mixture shall be provided to the Contracting Officer for verification of mix design at least 14 days prior to construction of test section. At the option of the Contractor, a currently used DOT Superpave hot mix may be used in lieu of developing a Marshall hot mix design as described herein. Design the Superpave volumetric mix in accordance SECTION 32 12 16 Page 12
b.
W912HN-12-R-0003
with AI SP-2 and ASTM D 6925. The nominal maximum aggregate size (NMAS) shall be 3/4 inch. Other DOT hot mix design methods (Hveem, etc.) may be suitable, as determined by the Contracting Officer. c. Design Superpave mixes with the number of gyrations specified in Table 5, unless the DOT option is chosen. 2.3.1 JMF Requirements
Submit in writing the job mix formula for approval at least 14 days prior to the start of the test section including as a minimum: a. b. c. d. e. Percent passing each sieve size. Percent of asphalt cement. Percent of each aggregate and mineral filler to be used. Asphalt viscosity grade, penetration grade, or performance grade. Number of blows of hand-held hammer per side of molded specimen. for Superpave) (NA
f.
Number of gyrations of Superpave gyratory compactor, (NA for Marshall mix design) Laboratory mixing temperature. Lab compaction temperature. Temperature-viscosity relationship of the asphalt cement. Plot of the combined gradation on the 0.45 power gradation chart, stating the nominal maximum size. Graphical plots of stability (NA for Superpave), flow (NA for Superpave), air voids, voids in the mineral aggregate, and unit weight versus asphalt content as shown in AI MS-02. Specific gravity and absorption of each aggregate. Percent natural sand. Percent particles with 2 or more fractured faces (in coarse aggregate). Fine aggregate angularity. Percent flat or elongated particles (in coarse aggregate). Tensile Strength Ratio(TSR). Antistrip agent (if required) and amount. List of all modifiers and amount. Correlation of hand-held hammer with mechanical hammer (NA for Superpave). Percentage and properties (asphalt content, binder properties, and SECTION 32 12 16 Page 13
g. h. i. j.
k.
l. m. n. o. p. q. r. s. t.
u.
W912HN-12-R-0003
aggregate properties) of reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) in accordance with paragraph RECYCLED HOT-MIX ASPHALT, if RAP is used.
Table 5. Test Property
Mix Design Criteria 75 Blows or 75 Gyrations
50 Blows or 50 Gyrations
Stability, pounds, minimum (NA for Superpave) Flow, 0.01 inch (NA for Superpave) Air voids, percent Percent Voids in mineral aggregate VMA, (minimum) Gradation 1 Gradation 2 Gradation 3 TSR, minimum percent
*1000 8-18
*1800 8-16
3-5
3-5
13.0 14.0 15.0 75
13.0 14.0 15.0 75
* This is a minimum requirement. The average during construction shall be significantly higher than this number to ensure compliance with the specifications. ** Calculate VMA in accordance with AI MS-02, based on ASTM C 127 and ASTM C 128 bulk specific gravity for the aggregate. 2.3.2 Adjustments to Field JMF
Keep the Laboratory JMF for each mixture in effect until a new formula is approved in writing by the Contracting Officer. Should a change in sources of any materials be made, perform a new laboratory jmf design and a new JMF approved before the new material is used. The Contractor will be allowed to adjust the Laboratory JMF within the limits specified below to optimize mix volumetric properties with the approval of the Contracting Officer. Adjustments to the Laboratory JMF shall be applied to the field (plant) established JMF and limited to those values as shown. Adjustments shall be targeted to produce or nearly produce 4 percent voids total mix (VTM). TABLE 6. Field (Plant) Established JMF Tolerances Sieves Adjustments (plus or minus), percent 1/2 inch No. 4 No. 8 No. 200 Binder Content 3 3 3 1 0.40
If adjustments are needed that exceed these limits, develop a new mix design. Tolerances given above may permit the aggregate grading to be outside the limits shown in Table 4; while not desirable, this is acceptable, except for the No. 200 sieve, which shall remain within the SECTION 32 12 16 Page 14
W912HN-12-R-0003
aggregate grading of Table 4. 2.4 RECYCLED HOT MIX ASPHALT
Recycled HMA shall consist of reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP), coarse aggregate, fine aggregate, mineral filler, and asphalt cement to produce a consistent gradation and asphalt content and properties. When RAP is fed into the plant, the maximum RAP chunk size shall not exceed 2 inches. Design the recycled HMA mix using procedures contained in AI MS-02 and AI MS-22. The job mix shall meet the requirements of paragraph MIX DESIGN. The amount of RAP shall not exceed 30 percent. 2.4.1 RAP Aggregates and Asphalt Cement
The blend of aggregates used in the recycled mix shall meet the requirements of paragraph AGGREGATES. Establish the percentage of asphalt in the RAP for the mixture design according to ASTM D 2172 or ASTM D 6307 using the appropriate dust correction procedure. 2.4.2 RAP Mix
The blend of new asphalt cement and the RAP asphalt binder shall meet the requirements in paragraph ASPHALT CEMENT BINDER. The virgin asphalt cement shall not be more than two standard asphalt material grades different than that specified in paragraph ASPHALT CEMENT BINDER. PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION PREPARATION OF ASPHALT BINDER MATERIAL
Heat the asphalt cement material avoiding local overheating and providing a continuous supply of the asphalt material to the mixer at a uniform temperature. The temperature of unmodified asphalts shall be no more than 325 degrees F when added to the aggregates. 3.2 PREPARATION OF MINERAL AGGREGATE
Heat and dry the aggregate for the mixture prior to mixing. No damage shall occur to the aggregates due to the maximum temperature and rate of heating used. The temperature of the aggregate and mineral filler shall not exceed 350 degrees F when the asphalt cement is added. The temperature shall not be lower than is required to obtain complete coating and uniform distribution on the aggregate particles and to provide a mixture of satisfactory workability. 3.3 PREPARATION OF HOT-MIX ASPHALT MIXTURE
The aggregates and the asphalt cement shall be weighed or metered and introduced into the mixer in the amount specified by the JMF. Mix the combined materials until the aggregate obtains a uniform coating of asphalt binder and is thoroughly distributed throughout the mixture. Wet mixing time shall be the shortest time that will produce a satisfactory mixture, but no less than 25 seconds for batch plants. Establish the wet mixing time for all plants based on the procedure for determining the percentage of coated particles described in ASTM D 2489/D 2489M, for each individual plant and for each type of aggregate used. The wet mixing time will be set to at least achieve 95 percent of coated particles. The moisture content of all hot-mix asphalt upon discharge from the plant shall not exceed 0.5 percent by total weight of mixture as measured by ASTM D 1461. SECTION 32 12 16 Page 15
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.4
PREPARATION OF THE UNDERLYING SURFACE
Immediately before placing the hot mix asphalt, clean the underlying course of dust and debris. Apply a prime coat and/or tack coat in accordance with the contract specifications. 3.5 TEST SECTION
Prior to full production, place a test section for each JMF used. Construct a test section 250 - 500 feet long and two paver passes wide placed for two lanes, with a longitudinal cold joint. The test section shall be of the same thickness as the course which it represents. The underlying grade or pavement structure upon which the test section is to be constructed shall be the same as the remainder of the course represented by the test section. The equipment and personnel used in construction of the test section shall be the same equipment to be used on the remainder of the course represented by the test section. Place the test section as part of the project pavement, as approved by the Contracting Officer. 3.5.1 Sampling and Testing for Test Section
Take one random sample at the plant, triplicate specimens compacted, and tested for stability, flow, and laboratory air voids. Test a portion of the same sample for theoretical maximum density (TMD), aggregate gradation and asphalt content. Take four randomly selected cores from the finished pavement mat, and four from the longitudinal joint, and tested for density. Random sampling shall be in accordance with procedures contained in ASTM D 3665. The test results shall be within the tolerances shown in Table 7 for work to continue. If all test results meet the specified requirements, the test section shall remain as part of the project pavement. If test results exceed the tolerances shown, the test section shall be removed and replaced at no cost to the Government and another test section shall be constructed. The test section shall be paid for with the first lot of paving Table 7. Test Section Requirements for Material and Mixture Properties Specification Limit
Property
Aggregate Gradation-Percent Passing (Individual Test Result) No. 4 and larger No. 8, No. 16, No. 30, and No. 50 No. 100 and No. 200 Asphalt Content, Percent (Individual Test Result) Laboratory Air Voids, Percent (Average of 3 specimens) VMA, Percent (Average of 3 specimens) Stability, pounds (Average of 3 specimens) (NA for superpave) SECTION 32 12 16 JMF plus or minus 8 JMF plus or minus 6 JMF plus or minus 2.0 JMF plus or minus 0.5
JMF plus or minus 1.0 15 minimum 1000 minimum for 50 blows 1800 minimum for 75 blows Page 16
W912HN-12-R-0003
Table 7.
Test Section Requirements for Material and Mixture Properties Specification Limit 8 - 18 for 50 blows 8 - 16 for 75 blows
Property Flow, 0.01 inches (Average of 3 specimens) (NA for superpave) Mat Density, Percent of TMD (Average of 4 Random Cores) Joint Density, Percent of TMD (Average of 4 Random Cores) 3.5.2 Additional Test Sections
92.0 - 96.0
90.5 - 92.5
If the initial test section should prove to be unacceptable, make the necessary adjustments to the JMF, plant operation, placing procedures, and/or rolling procedures and place a second test section. Additional test sections, as required, shall be constructed and evaluated for conformance to the specifications. Full production shall not begin until an acceptable section has been constructed and accepted. 3.6 TESTING LABORATORY
Use a laboratory to develop the JMF that meets the requirements of ASTM D 3666. The Government will inspect the laboratory equipment and test procedures prior to the start of hot mix operations for conformance to ASTM D 3666. The laboratory shall maintain the Corps certification for the duration of the project. A statement signed by the manager of the laboratory stating that it meets these requirements or clearly listing all deficiencies shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer prior to the start of construction. The statement shall contain as a minimum: a. Qualifications of personnel; laboratory manager, supervising technician, and testing technicians. A listing of equipment to be used in developing the job mix. A copy of the laboratory's quality control system. Evidence of participation in the AASHTO Materials Reference Laboratory (AMRL) program. TRANSPORTING AND PLACING Transporting
b. c. d.
3.7 3.7.1
Transport the hot-mix asphalt from the mixing plant to the site in clean, tight vehicles. Schedule deliveries so that placing and compacting of mixture is uniform with minimum stopping and starting of the paver. Provide adequate artificial lighting for night placements. Hauling over freshly placed material will not be permitted until the material has been compacted as specified, and allowed to cool to 140 degrees F. To deliver mix to the paver, use a material transfer vehicle operated to produce continuous forward motion of the paver.
SECTION 32 12 16
Page 17
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.7.2
Placing
Place and compact the mix at a temperature suitable for obtaining density, surface smoothness, and other specified requirements. Upon arrival, place the mixture to the full width by an asphalt paver; it shall be struck off in a uniform layer of such depth that, when the work is completed, it will have the required thickness and conform to the grade and contour indicated. Regulate the speed of the paver to eliminate pulling and tearing of the asphalt mat. Unless otherwise permitted, placement of the mixture shall begin along the centerline of a crowned section or on the high side of areas with a one-way slope. Place the mixture in consecutive adjacent strips having a minimum width of 10 feet. The longitudinal joint in one course shall offset the longitudinal joint in the course immediately below by at least 1 foot; however, the joint in the surface course shall be at the centerline of the pavement. Transverse joints in one course shall be offset by at least 10 feet from transverse joints in the previous course. Transverse joints in adjacent lanes shall be offset a minimum of 10 feet. On isolated areas where irregularities or unavoidable obstacles make the use of mechanical spreading and finishing equipment impractical, the mixture may be spread and luted by hand tools. 3.8 COMPACTION OF MIXTURE
After placing, the mixture shall be thoroughly and uniformly compacted by rolling. Compact the surface as soon as possible without causing displacement, cracking or shoving. The sequence of rolling operations and the type of rollers used shall be at the discretion of the Contractor. The speed of the roller shall, at all times, be sufficiently slow to avoid displacement of the hot mixture and be effective in compaction. Any displacement occurring as a result of reversing the direction of the roller, or from any other cause, shall be corrected at once. Furnish sufficient rollers to handle the output of the plant. Continue rolling until the surface is of uniform texture, true to grade and cross section, and the required field density is obtained. To prevent adhesion of the mixture to the roller, keep the wheels properly moistened but excessive water will not be permitted. In areas not accessible to the roller, the mixture shall be thoroughly compacted with hand tampers. Any mixture that becomes loose and broken, mixed with dirt, contains check-cracking, or is in any way defective shall be removed full depth, replaced with fresh hot mixture and immediately compacted to conform to the surrounding area. This work shall be done at the Contractor's expense. Skin patching will not be allowed. 3.9 JOINTS
The formation of joints shall be performed ensuring a continuous bond between the courses and to obtain the required density. All joints shall have the same texture as other sections of the course and meet the requirements for smoothness and grade. 3.9.1 Transverse Joints
Do not pass the roller over the unprotected end of the freshly laid mixture, except when necessary to form a transverse joint. When necessary to form a transverse joint, it shall be made by means of placing a bulkhead or by tapering the course. The tapered edge shall be cut back to its full depth and width on a straight line to expose a vertical face prior to placing material at the joint. Remove the cutback material from the project. In both methods, all contact surfaces shall be given a light tack SECTION 32 12 16 Page 18
W912HN-12-R-0003
coat of asphalt material before placing any fresh mixture against the joint. 3.9.2 Longitudinal Joints
Longitudinal joints which are irregular, damaged, uncompacted, cold (less than 175 degrees F at the time of placing adjacent lanes), or otherwise defective, shall be cut back a maximum of 3 inches from the top of the course with a cutting wheel to expose a clean, sound vertical surface for the full depth of the course. All cutback material shall be removed from the project. All contact surfaces shall be given a light tack coat of asphalt material prior to placing any fresh mixture against the joint. The Contractor will be allowed to use an alternate method if it can be demonstrated that density, smoothness, and texture can be met. 3.10 3.10.1 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL General Quality Control Requirements
Develop an approved Quality Control Plan. Do not produce hot-mix asphalt for payment until the quality control plan has been approved addressing all elements which affect the quality of the pavement including, but not limited to: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. 3.10.2 Mix Design Aggregate Grading Quality of Materials Stockpile Management Proportioning Mixing and Transportation Mixture Volumetrics Moisture Content of Mixtures Placing and Finishing Joints Compaction Surface Smoothness
Testing Laboratory
Provide a fully equipped asphalt laboratory located at the plant or job site and meeting the pertinent requirements in ASTM D 3666. Laboratory facilities shall be kept clean and all equipment maintained in proper working condition. The Contracting Officer shall be permitted unrestricted access to inspect the Contractor's laboratory facility, to witness quality control activities, and to perform any check testing desired. The Contracting Officer will advise the Contractor in writing of any noted deficiencies concerning the laboratory facility, equipment, supplies, or testing personnel and procedures. When the deficiencies are serious enough to adversely affect test results, the incorporation of the materials into SECTION 32 12 16 Page 19
W912HN-12-R-0003
the work shall be suspended immediately and will not be permitted to resume until the deficiencies are corrected. 3.10.3 Quality Control Testing
Perform all quality control tests applicable to these specifications and as set forth in the Quality Control Program. The testing program shall include, but shall not be limited to, tests for the control of asphalt content, aggregate gradation, temperatures, aggregate moisture, moisture in the asphalt mixture, laboratory air voids, stability (NA for Superpave), flow (NA for Superpave), in-place density, grade and smoothness. Develop a Quality Control Testing Plan as part of the Quality Control Program. 3.10.3.1 Asphalt Content
A minimum of two tests to determine asphalt content will be performed per lot (a lot is defined in paragraph MATERIAL ACCEPTANCE and PERCENT PAYMENT) by one of the following methods: the extraction method in accordance with ASTM D 2172, Method A or B, the ignition method in accordance with ASTM D 6307, or the nuclear method in accordance with ASTM D 4125. Calibrate the ignition oven or the nuclear gauge for the specific mix being used. For the extraction method, determine the weight of ash, as described in ASTM D 2172, as part of the first extraction test performed at the beginning of plant production; and as part of every tenth extraction test performed thereafter, for the duration of plant production. The last weight of ash value obtained shall be used in the calculation of the asphalt content for the mixture. 3.10.3.2 Gradation
Determine aggregate gradations a minimum of twice per lot from mechanical analysis of recovered aggregate in accordance with ASTM D 5444. When asphalt content is determined by the ignition oven or nuclear method, aggregate gradation shall be determined from hot bin samples on batch plants, or from the cold feed on drum mix plants. For batch plants, test aggregates in accordance with ASTM C 136 using actual batch weights to determine the combined aggregate gradation of the mixture. 3.10.3.3 Temperatures
Check temperatures at least four times per lot, at necessary locations, to determine the temperature at the dryer, the asphalt cement in the storage tank, the asphalt mixture at the plant, and the asphalt mixture at the job site. 3.10.3.4 Aggregate Moisture
Determine the moisture content of aggregate used for production a minimum of once per lot in accordance with ASTM C 566. 3.10.3.5 Moisture Content of Mixture
Determine the moisture content of the mixture at least once per lot in accordance with ASTM D 1461 or an approved alternate procedure. 3.10.3.6 Laboratory Air Voids, Marshall Stability and Flow
Take mixture samples at least four times per lot compacted into specimens, using the number of blows per side with the hand-held Marshall hammer as SECTION 32 12 16 Page 20
W912HN-12-R-0003
described in ASTM D 6926. When the Superpave gyratory compactor is used, mixes will be compacted in accordance with ASTM D 6925. Hot-mix provided under the DOT Superpave option shall be compacted in accordance with the DOT requirements. After compaction, determine the laboratory air voids of each specimen. Stability and flow shall be determined for the Marshall-compacted specimens, in accordance with ASTM D 6927. 3.10.3.7 In-Place Density
Conduct any necessary testing to ensure the specified density is achieved. A nuclear gauge may be used to monitor pavement density in accordance with ASTM D 2950. 3.10.3.8 Grade and Smoothness
Conduct the necessary checks to ensure the grade and smoothness requirements are met in accordance with paragraphs MATERIAL ACCEPTANCE and PERCENT PAYMENT. 3.10.3.9 Additional Testing
Any additional testing, which the Contractor deems necessary to control the process, may be performed at the Contractor's option. 3.10.3.10 QC Monitoring
Submit all QC test results to the Contracting Officer on a daily basis as the tests are performed. The Contracting Officer reserves the right to monitor any of the Contractor's quality control testing and to perform duplicate testing as a check to the Contractor's quality control testing. 3.10.4 Sampling
When directed by the Contracting Officer, sample and test any material which appears inconsistent with similar material being produced, unless such material is voluntarily removed and replaced or deficiencies corrected by the Contractor. All sampling shall be in accordance with standard procedures specified. 3.10.5 Control Charts
For process control, establish and maintain linear control charts on both individual samples and the running average of last four samples for the parameters listed in Table 8, as a minimum. These control charts shall be posted as directed by the Contracting Officer and kept current at all times. The control charts shall identify the project number, the test parameter being plotted, the individual sample numbers, the Action and Suspension Limits listed in Table 8 applicable to the test parameter being plotted, and the Contractor's test results. Target values from the JMF shall also be shown on the control charts as indicators of central tendency for the cumulative percent passing, asphalt content, and laboratory air voids parameters. When the test results exceed either applicable Action Limit, take immediate steps to bring the process back in control. When the test results exceed either applicable Suspension Limit, halt production until the problem is solved. Use the control charts as part of the process control system for identifying trends so that potential problems can be corrected before they occur. Make decisions concerning mix modifications based on analysis of the results provided in the control charts. The Quality Control Plan shall indicate the appropriate action to be taken to SECTION 32 12 16 Page 21
W912HN-12-R-0003
bring the process into control when certain parameters exceed their Action Limits.
SECTION 32 12 16
Page 22
W912HN-12-R-0003
Table 8.
Action and Suspension Limits for the Parameters to be Plotted on Individual and Running Average Control Charts Running Average of Last Four Samples
Individual Samples
Action Suspension Action Suspension Parameter to be Plotted Limit Limit Limit Limit ---------------------------------------------------------------------No. 4 sieve, Cumulative % Passing, deviation from JMF target; plus or minus values No. 30 sieve, Cumulative % Passing, deviation from JMF target; plus or minus values No. 200 sieve, Cumulative % Passing, deviation from JMF target; plus or minus values 6 8 4 5
1.4
2.0
1.1
1.5
Stability, pounds (minimum) (NA for Superpave) 75 Blow JMF 1800 1700 50 Blow JMF 1000 900 Flow, 0.01 inches (NA for Superpave) 75 Blow 8 min. 7 min. 16 max. 17 max. 50 Blow 8 min. 7 min. 18 max. 19 max. Asphalt content, % deviation from JMF target; plus or minus value Laboratory Air Voids, % deviation from JMF target value In-place Mat Density, % of TMD 0.4 0.5
1900 1100 9 min. 15 max. 9 min. 17 max. 0.2
1800 1000 8 min. 16 max. 8 min. 18 max. 0.3
No specific action and suspension limits set since this parameter is used to determine percent payment No specific action and suspension limits set since this parameter is used to determine percent payment No specific action and suspension limits set since this parameter is used to determine percent payment
In-place Joint Density, % of TMD
3.11
MATERIAL ACCEPTANCE
Testing for acceptability of work will be performed by an independent laboratory hired by the Contractor. Forward test results and payment calculations daily to the Contracting Officer. Acceptance of the plant produced mix and in-place requirements will be on a lot to lot basis. A standard lot for all requirements will be equal to 2000 short tons or 8 hours of production. Where appropriate, adjustment in payment for individual lots of hot-mix asphalt will be made based on in-place density, laboratory air voids, grade and smoothness in accordance with the following paragraphs. Grade and surface smoothness determinations will be made on SECTION 32 12 16 Page 23
W912HN-12-R-0003
the lot as a whole. Exceptions or adjustments to this will be made in situations where the mix within one lot is placed as part of both the intermediate and surface courses, thus grade and smoothness measurements for the entire lot cannot be made. In order to evaluate laboratory air voids and in-place (field) density, each lot will be divided into four equal sublots. 3.11.1 Sublot Sampling
One random mixture sample for determining laboratory air voids, theoretical maximum density, and for any additional testing the Contracting Officer desires, will be taken from a loaded truck delivering mixture to each sublot, or other appropriate location for each sublot. All samples will be selected randomly, using commonly recognized methods of assuring randomness conforming to ASTM D 3665 and employing tables of random numbers or computer programs. Laboratory air voids will be determined from three laboratory compacted specimens of each sublot sample in accordance with ASTM D 6926. The specimens will be compacted within 2 hours of the time the mixture was loaded into trucks at the asphalt plant. Samples will not be reheated prior to compaction and insulated containers will be used as necessary to maintain the temperature. 3.11.2 Additional Sampling and Testing
The Contracting Officer reserves the right to direct additional samples and tests for any area which appears to deviate from the specification requirements. The cost of any additional testing will be paid for by the Government. Testing in these areas will be in addition to the lot testing, and the requirements for these areas will be the same as those for a lot. 3.11.3 Grade
The final wearing surface of pavement shall conform to the elevations and cross sections shown and shall vary not more than 0.05 foot from the plan grade established and approved at site of work. Finished surfaces at juncture with other pavements shall coincide with finished surfaces of abutting pavements. Deviation from the plan elevation will not be permitted in areas of pavements where closer conformance with planned elevation is required for the proper functioning of drainage and other appurtenant structures involved. The grade will be determined by running lines of levels at intervals of 25 feet, or less, longitudinally and transversely, to determine the elevation of the completed pavement surface. Within 5 working days, after the completion of a particular lot incorporating the final wearing surface, test the final wearing surface of the pavement for conformance with the specified plan grade. Diamond grinding may be used to remove high spots to meet grade requirements. Skin patching for correcting low areas or planing or milling for correcting high areas will not be permitted. 3.11.4 Surface Smoothness
Use one of the following methods to test and evaluate surface smoothness of the pavement. Perform all testing in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Keep detailed notes of the results of the testing and furnish a copy to the Government immediately after each day's testing. Where drawings show required deviations from a plane surface (crowns, drainage inlets, etc.), the surface shall be finished to meet the approval of the Contracting Officer.
SECTION 32 12 16
Page 24
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.11.4.1 a.
Smoothness Requirements
Straightedge Testing: The finished surfaces of the pavements shall have no abrupt change of 1/4 inch or more, and all pavements shall be within the tolerances of 1/4 inch in both the longitudinal and transverse directions, when tested with an approved 12 feet straightedge. Profilograph Testing: The finished surfaces of the pavements shall have no abrupt change of 1/8 inch or more, and each 0.1 mile segment of each pavement lot shall have a Profile Index not greater than 9 inches/mile when tested with an approved California-type profilograph. If the extent of the pavement in either direction is less than 200 feet, that direction shall be tested by the straightedge method and shall meet requirements specified above. Testing Method
b.
3.11.4.2
After the final rolling, but not later than 24 hours after placement, test the surface of the pavement in each entire lot in such a manner as to reveal all surface irregularities exceeding the tolerances specified above. Separate testing of individual sublots is not required. If any pavement areas are ground, these areas shall be retested immediately after grinding. Test each lot of the pavement in both a longitudinal and a transverse direction on parallel lines. Set the transverse lines 15 feet or less apart, as directed. The longitudinal lines shall be at the centerline of each paving lane for lanes less than 20 feet wide and at the third points for lanes 20 feet or wider. Also test other areas having obvious deviations. Longitudinal testing lines shall be continuous across all joints. a. Straightedge Testing. Hold the straightedge in contact with the surface and move it ahead one-half the length of the straightedge for each successive measurement. Determine the amount of surface irregularity by placing the freestanding (unleveled) straightedge on the pavement surface and allowing it to rest upon the two highest spots covered by its length, and measuring the maximum gap between the straightedge and the pavement surface in the area between these two high points. Profilograph Testing. Perform profilograph testing using approved equipment and procedures described in CDT Test 526. The equipment shall utilize electronic recording and automatic computerized reduction of data to indicate "must-grind" bumps and the Profile Index for each 0.1 mile segment of each pavement lot. Grade breaks on parking lots shall be accomodated by breaking the profile segment into shorter sections and repositioning the blanking band on each segment. The "blanking band" shall be 0.2 inches wide and the "bump template" shall span 1 inch with an offset of 0.3 inch. Compute the Profile Index for each pass of the profilograph in each 0.1 mile segment. The Profile Index for each segment shall be the average of the Profile Indices for each pass in each segment. The profilograph shall be operated by a DOT approved operator. Furnish a copy of the reduced tapes to the Government at the end of each day's testing. -- End of Section --
b.
SECTION 32 12 16
Page 25
W912HN-12-R-0003
SECTION 32 16 13 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND CURBS AND GUTTERS 04/08 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 MEASUREMENT FOR PAYMENT 1.1.1 Sidewalks
The quantities of sidewalks to be paid for will be the number of square yards of each depth of sidewalk constructed as indicated. 1.1.2 Curbs and Gutters
The quantities of curbs and gutters to be paid for will be the number of linear feet of each cross section constructed as indicated, measured along the face of the curb at the gutter line. 1.2 1.2.1 BASIS FOR PAYMENT Sidewalks
Payment of the quantities of sidewalks measured as specified will be at the contract unit price per squareyard of the thickness specified. 1.2.2 Curbs and Gutters
Payment of the quantities of curbs and gutters measured as specified will be at the contract unit price per linear foot of each cross section. 1.3 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS (AASHTO) AASHTO M 182 (2005) Standard Specification for Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf and Cotton Mats
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM A 185/A 185M (2007) Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete (2009) Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement (2008) Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete
ASTM A 615/A 615M
ASTM C 143/C 143M
SECTION 32 16 13
Page 1
W912HN-12-R-0003
ASTM C 171
(2007) Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete (2008) Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete (2009) Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method (2009) Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method (2007) Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete (2009) Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field (2008) Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants (2004; R 2008) Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types) (2004a; R 2008) Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion (2004) Cold Applied, Single Component, Chemically Curing Silicone Joint Sealant for Portland Cement Concrete Pavements
ASTM C 172
ASTM C 173/C 173M
ASTM C 231
ASTM C 309
ASTM C 31/C 31M
ASTM C 920
ASTM D 1751
ASTM D 1752
ASTM D 5893
1.4 1.4.1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION General Requirements
Provide plant, equipment, machines, and tools used in the work subject to approval and maintained in a satisfactory working condition at all times. The equipment shall have the capability of producing the required product, meeting grade controls, thickness control and smoothness requirements as specified. Use of the equipment shall be discontinued if it produces unsatisfactory results. The Contracting Officer shall have access at all times to the plant and equipment to ensure proper operation and compliance with specifications. 1.4.2 Slip Form Equipment
Slip form paver or curb forming machine, will be approved based on trial use on the job and shall be self-propelled, automatically controlled, crawler mounted, and capable of spreading, consolidating, and shaping the plastic concrete to the desired cross section in 1 pass.
SECTION 32 16 13
Page 2
W912HN-12-R-0003
1.5
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-03 Product Data Concrete Copies of certified delivery tickets for all concrete used in the construction. SD-06 Test Reports Field Quality Control Copies of all test reports within 24 hours of completion of the test. 1.6 1.6.1 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS Placing During Cold Weather
Do not place concrete when the air temperature reaches 40 degrees F and is falling, or is already below that point. Placement may begin when the air temperature reaches 35 degrees F and is rising, or is already above 40 degrees F. Make provisions to protect the concrete from freezing during the specified curing period. If necessary to place concrete when the temperature of the air, aggregates, or water is below 35 degrees F, placement and protection shall be approved in writing. Approval will be contingent upon full conformance with the following provisions. The underlying material shall be prepared and protected so that it is entirely free of frost when the concrete is deposited. Mixing water and aggregates shall be heated as necessary to result in the temperature of the in-place concrete being between 50 and 85 degrees F. Methods and equipment for heating shall be approved. The aggregates shall be free of ice, snow, and frozen lumps before entering the mixer. Covering and other means shall be provided for maintaining the concrete at a temperature of at least 50 degrees F for not less than 72 hours after placing, and at a temperature above freezing for the remainder of the curing period. 1.6.2 Placing During Warm Weather
The temperature of the concrete as placed shall not exceed 85 degrees F except where an approved retarder is used. The mixing water and/or aggregates shall be cooled, if necessary, to maintain a satisfactory placing temperature. The placing temperature shall not exceed 95 degrees F at any time. PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS CONCRETE
Provide concrete as per plans, unless otherwise specified or directed. Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3500 psi at 28 days. Maximum size of aggregate shall be 1-1/2 inches. SECTION 32 16 13 Page 3
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.1.1
Air Content
Mixtures shall have air content by volume of concrete of 5 to 7 percent, based on measurements made immediately after discharge from the mixer. 2.1.2 Slump
The concrete slump shall be 2 inches plus or minus 1 inch where determined in accordance with ASTM C 143/C 143M. 2.1.3 Reinforcement Steel Wire mesh
Reinforcement bars shall conform to ASTM A 615/A 615M. reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A 185/A 185M. 2.2 2.2.1 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS Impervious Sheet Materials
Impervious sheet materials shall conform to ASTM C 171, type optional, except that polyethylene film, if used, shall be white opaque. 2.2.2 Burlap
Burlap shall conform to AASHTO M 182. 2.2.3 White Pigmented Membrane-Forming Curing Compound
White pigmented membrane-forming curing compound shall conform to ASTM C 309, Type 2. 2.3 CONCRETE PROTECTION MATERIALS
Concrete protection materials shall be a linseed oil mixture of equal parts, by volume, of linseed oil and either mineral spirits, naphtha, or turpentine. At the option of the Contractor, commercially prepared linseed oil mixtures, formulated specifically for application to concrete to provide protection against the action of deicing chemicals may be used, except that emulsified mixtures are not acceptable. 2.4 2.4.1 JOINT FILLER STRIPS Contraction Joint Filler for Curb and Gutter
Contraction joint filler for curb and gutter shall consist of hard-pressed fiberboard. 2.4.2 Expansion Joint Filler, Premolded
Expansion joint filler, premolded, shall conform to ASTM D 1751 or ASTM D 1752, 1/2 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 JOINT SEALANTS
Joint sealant, cold-applied shall conform to ASTM C 920 or ASTM D 5893.
SECTION 32 16 13
Page 4
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.6
FORM WORK
Design and construct form work to ensure that the finished concrete will conform accurately to the indicated dimensions, lines, and elevations, and within the tolerances specified. Forms shall be of wood or steel, straight, of sufficient strength to resist springing during depositing and consolidating concrete. Wood forms shall be surfaced plank, 2 inches nominal thickness, straight and free from warp, twist, loose knots, splits or other defects. Wood forms shall have a nominal length of 10 feet. Radius bends may be formed with 3/4 inch boards, laminated to the required thickness. Steel forms shall be channel-formed sections with a flat top surface and with welded braces at each end and at not less than two intermediate points. Ends of steel forms shall be interlocking and self-aligning. Steel forms shall include flexible forms for radius forming, corner forms, form spreaders, and fillers. Steel forms shall have a nominal length of 10 feet with a minimum of 3 welded stake pockets per form. Stake pins shall be solid steel rods with chamfered heads and pointed tips designed for use with steel forms. 2.6.1 Sidewalk Forms
Sidewalk forms shall be of a height equal to the full depth of the finished sidewalk. 2.6.2 Curb and Gutter Forms
Curb and gutter outside forms shall have a height equal to the full depth of the curb or gutter. The inside form of curb shall have batter as indicated and shall be securely fastened to and supported by the outside form. Rigid forms shall be provided for curb returns, except that benders or thin plank forms may be used for curb or curb returns with a radius of 10 feet or more, where grade changes occur in the return, or where the central angle is such that a rigid form with a central angle of 90 degrees cannot be used. Back forms for curb returns may be made of 1-1/2 inch benders, for the full height of the curb, cleated together. In lieu of inside forms for curbs, a curb "mule" may be used for forming and finishing this surface, provided the results are approved. PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION SUBGRADE PREPARATION
The subgrade shall be constructed to the specified grade and cross section prior to concrete placement. Subgrade shall be placed and compacted as directed. 3.1.1 Sidewalk Subgrade
The subgrade shall be tested for grade and cross section with a template extending the full width of the sidewalk and supported between side forms. 3.1.2 Curb and Gutter Subgrade
The subgrade shall be tested for grade and cross section by means of a template extending the full width of the curb and gutter. The subgrade shall be of materials equal in bearing quality to the subgrade under the adjacent pavement.
SECTION 32 16 13
Page 5
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.1.3
Maintenance of Subgrade
The subgrade shall be maintained in a smooth, compacted condition in conformity with the required section and established grade until the concrete is placed. The subgrade shall be in a moist condition when concrete is placed. The subgrade shall be prepared and protected to produce a subgrade free from frost when the concrete is deposited. 3.2 FORM SETTING
Set forms to the indicated alignment, grade and dimensions. Hold forms rigidly in place by a minimum of 3 stakes per form placed at intervals not to exceed 4 feet. Corners, deep sections, and radius bends shall have additional stakes and braces, as required. Clamps, spreaders, and braces shall be used where required to ensure rigidity in the forms. Forms shall be removed without injuring the concrete. Bars or heavy tools shall not be used against the concrete in removing the forms. Any concrete found defective after form removal shall be promptly and satisfactorily repaired. Forms shall be cleaned and coated with form oil each time before concrete is placed. Wood forms may, instead, be thoroughly wetted with water before concrete is placed, except that with probable freezing temperatures, oiling is mandatory. 3.2.1 Sidewalks
Set forms for sidewalks with the upper edge true to line and grade with an allowable tolerance of 1/8 inch in any 10 foot long section. After forms are set, grade and alignment shall be checked with a 10 foot straightedge. Forms shall have a transverse slope as indicated with the low side adjacent to the roadway. Side forms shall not be removed for 12 hours after finishing has been completed. 3.2.2 Curbs and Gutters
The forms of the front of the curb shall be removed not less than 2 hours nor more than 6 hours after the concrete has been placed. Forms back of curb shall remain in place until the face and top of the curb have been finished, as specified for concrete finishing. Gutter forms shall not be removed while the concrete is sufficiently plastic to slump in any direction. 3.3 3.3.1 SIDEWALK CONCRETE PLACEMENT AND FINISHING Formed Sidewalks
Place concrete in the forms in one layer. When consolidated and finished, the sidewalks shall be of the thickness indicated. After concrete has been placed in the forms, a strike-off guided by side forms shall be used to bring the surface to proper section to be compacted. The concrete shall be consolidated with an approved vibrator, and the surface shall be finished to grade with a strike off. 3.3.2 Concrete Finishing
After straightedging, when most of the water sheen has disappeared, and just before the concrete hardens, finish the surface with a wood float or darby to a smooth and uniformly fine granular or sandy texture free of waves, irregularities, or tool marks. A scored surface shall be produced by brooming with a fiber-bristle brush in a direction transverse to that of SECTION 32 16 13 Page 6
W912HN-12-R-0003
the traffic, followed by edging. 3.3.3 Edge and Joint Finishing
All slab edges, including those at formed joints, shall be finished with an edger having a radius of 1/8 inch. Transverse joint shall be edged before brooming, and the brooming shall eliminate the flat surface left by the surface face of the edger. Corners and edges which have crumbled and areas which lack sufficient mortar for proper finishing shall be cleaned and filled solidly with a properly proportioned mortar mixture and then finished. 3.3.4 Surface and Thickness Tolerances
Finished surfaces shall not vary more than 5/16 inch from the testing edge of a 10-foot straightedge. Permissible deficiency in section thickness will be up to 1/4 inch. 3.4 3.4.1 CURB AND GUTTER CONCRETE PLACEMENT AND FINISHING Formed Curb and Gutter
Concrete shall be placed to the section required in a single lift. Consolidation shall be achieved by using approved mechanical vibrators. Curve shaped gutters shall be finished with a standard curb "mule". 3.4.2 Curb and Gutter Finishing
Approved slipformed curb and gutter machines may be used in lieu of hand placement. 3.4.3 Concrete Finishing
Exposed surfaces shall be floated and finished with a smooth wood float until true to grade and section and uniform in texture. Floated surfaces shall then be brushed with a fine-hair brush with longitudinal strokes. The edges of the gutter and top of the curb shall be rounded with an edging tool to a radius of 1/2 inch. Immediately after removing the front curb form, the face of the curb shall be rubbed with a wood or concrete rubbing block and water until blemishes, form marks, and tool marks have been removed. The front curb surface, while still wet, shall be brushed in the same manner as the gutter and curb top. The top surface of gutter and entrance shall be finished to grade with a wood float. 3.4.4 Joint Finishing
Curb edges at formed joints shall be finished as indicated. 3.4.5 Surface and Thickness Tolerances
Finished surfaces shall not vary more than 1/4 inch from the testing edge of a 10-foot straightedge. Permissible deficiency in section thickness will be up to 1/4 inch. 3.5 SIDEWALK JOINTS
Sidewalk joints shall be constructed to divide the surface into rectangular areas. Transverse contraction joints shall be spaced at a distance equal to the sidewalk width or 5 feet on centers, whichever is less, and shall be SECTION 32 16 13 Page 7
W912HN-12-R-0003
continuous across the slab. Longitudinal contraction joints shall be constructed along the centerline of all sidewalks 10 feet or more in width. Transverse expansion joints shall be installed at sidewalk returns and opposite expansion joints in adjoining curbs. Where the sidewalk is not in contact with the curb, transverse expansion joints shall be installed as indicated. Expansion joints shall be formed about structures and features which project through or into the sidewalk pavement, using joint filler of the type, thickness, and width indicated. Expansion joints are not required between sidewalks and curb that abut the sidewalk longitudinally. 3.5.1 Sidewalk Contraction Joints
The contraction joints shall be formed in the fresh concrete by cutting a groove in the top portion of the slab to a depth of at least one-fourth of the sidewalk slab thickness, using a jointer to cut the groove, or by sawing a groove in the hardened concrete with a power-driven saw, unless otherwise approved. Sawed joints shall be constructed by sawing a groove in the concrete with a 1/8 inch blade to the depth indicated. An ample supply of saw blades shall be available on the job before concrete placement is started, and at least one standby sawing unit in good working order shall be available at the jobsite at all times during the sawing operations. 3.5.2 Sidewalk Expansion Joints
Expansion joints shall be formed with 1/2 inch joint filler strips. Joint filler in expansion joints surrounding structures and features within the sidewalk may consist of preformed filler material conforming to ASTM D 1752 or building paper. Joint filler shall be held in place with steel pins or other devices to prevent warping of the filler during floating and finishing. Immediately after finishing operations are completed, joint edges shall be rounded with an edging tool having a radius of 1/8 inch, and concrete over the joint filler shall be removed. At the end of the curing period, expansion joints shall be cleaned and filled with cold-applied joint sealant. Joint sealant shall be gray or stone in color. The joint opening shall be thoroughly cleaned before the sealing material is placed. Sealing material shall not be spilled on exposed surfaces of the concrete. Concrete at the joint shall be surface dry and atmospheric and concrete temperatures shall be above 50 degrees F at the time of application of joint sealing material. Excess material on exposed surfaces of the concrete shall be removed immediately and concrete surfaces cleaned. 3.5.3 Reinforcement Steel Placement
Reinforcement steel shall be accurately and securely fastened in place with suitable supports and ties before the concrete is placed. 3.6 CURB AND GUTTER JOINTS
Curb and gutter joints shall be constructed at right angles to the line of curb and gutter. 3.6.1 Contraction Joints
Contraction joints shall be constructed directly opposite contraction joints in abutting portland cement concrete pavements and spaced so that monolithic sections between curb returns will not be less than 5 feet nor greater than 15 feet in length. SECTION 32 16 13 Page 8
W912HN-12-R-0003
a. Contraction joints (except for slip forming) shall be constructed by means of 1/8 inch thick separators and of a section conforming to the cross section of the curb and gutter. Separators shall be removed as soon as practicable after concrete has set sufficiently to preserve the width and shape of the joint and prior to finishing. b. When slip forming is used, the contraction joints shall be cut in the top portion of the gutter/curb hardened concrete in a continuous cut across the curb and gutter, using a power-driven saw. The depth of cut shall be at least one-fourth of the gutter/curb depth and 1/8 inch in width. 3.6.2 Expansion Joints
Expansion joints shall be formed by means of preformed expansion joint filler material cut and shaped to the cross section of curb and gutter. Expansion joints shall be provided in curb and gutter directly opposite expansion joints of abutting portland cement concrete pavement, and shall be of the same type and thickness as joints in the pavement. Where curb and gutter do not abut portland cement concrete pavement, expansion joints at least 1/2 inch in width shall be provided at intervals not less than 30 feet nor greater than 120 feet. Expansion joints shall be provided in nonreinforced concrete gutter at locations indicated. Expansion joints shall be sealed immediately following curing of the concrete or as soon thereafter as weather conditions permit. Expansion joints and the top 1 inch depth of curb and gutter contraction-joints shall be sealed with joint sealant. The joint opening shall be thoroughly cleaned before the sealing material is placed. Sealing material shall not be spilled on exposed surfaces of the concrete. Concrete at the joint shall be surface dry and atmospheric and concrete temperatures shall be above 50 degrees F at the time of application of joint sealing material. Excess material on exposed surfaces of the concrete shall be removed immediately and concrete surfaces cleaned. 3.7 3.7.1 CURING AND PROTECTION General Requirements
Protect concrete against loss of moisture and rapid temperature changes for at least 7 days from the beginning of the curing operation. Protect unhardened concrete from rain and flowing water. All equipment needed for adequate curing and protection of the concrete shall be on hand and ready for use before actual concrete placement begins. Protection shall be provided as necessary to prevent cracking of the pavement due to temperature changes during the curing period. 3.7.1.1 Mat Method
The entire exposed surface shall be covered with 2 or more layers of burlap. Mats shall overlap each other at least 6 inches. The mat shall be thoroughly wetted with water prior to placing on concrete surface and shall be kept continuously in a saturated condition and in intimate contact with concrete for not less than 7 days. 3.7.1.2 Impervious Sheeting Method
The entire exposed surface shall be wetted with a fine spray of water and then covered with impervious sheeting material. Sheets shall be laid SECTION 32 16 13 Page 9
W912HN-12-R-0003
directly on the concrete surface with the light-colored side up and overlapped 12 inches when a continuous sheet is not used. The curing medium shall not be less than 18-inches wider than the concrete surface to be cured, and shall be securely weighted down by heavy wood planks, or a bank of moist earth placed along edges and laps in the sheets. Sheets shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced if torn or otherwise damaged during curing. The curing medium shall remain on the concrete surface to be cured for not less than 7 days. 3.7.1.3 Membrane Curing Method
A uniform coating of white-pigmented membrane-curing compound shall be applied to the entire exposed surface of the concrete as soon after finishing as the free water has disappeared from the finished surface. Formed surfaces shall be coated immediately after the forms are removed and in no case longer than 1 hour after the removal of forms. Concrete shall not be allowed to dry before the application of the membrane. If any drying has occurred, the surface of the concrete shall be moistened with a fine spray of water and the curing compound applied as soon as the free water disappears. Curing compound shall be applied in two coats by hand-operated pressure sprayers at a coverage of approximately 200 square feet/gallon for the total of both coats. The second coat shall be applied in a direction approximately at right angles to the direction of application of the first coat. The compound shall form a uniform, continuous, coherent film that will not check, crack, or peel and shall be free from pinholes or other imperfections. If pinholes, abrasion, or other discontinuities exist, an additional coat shall be applied to the affected areas within 30 minutes. Concrete surfaces that are subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after the curing compound has been applied shall be resprayed by the method and at the coverage specified above. Areas where the curing compound is damaged by subsequent construction operations within the curing period shall be resprayed. Necessary precautions shall be taken to insure that the concrete is properly cured at sawed joints, and that no curing compound enters the joints. The top of the joint opening and the joint groove at exposed edges shall be tightly sealed before the concrete in the region of the joint is resprayed with curing compound. The method used for sealing the joint groove shall prevent loss of moisture from the joint during the entire specified curing period. Approved standby facilities for curing concrete pavement shall be provided at a location accessible to the jobsite for use in the event of mechanical failure of the spraying equipment or other conditions that might prevent correct application of the membrane-curing compound at the proper time. Concrete surfaces to which membrane-curing compounds have been applied shall be adequately protected during the entire curing period from pedestrian and vehicular traffic, except as required for joint-sawing operations and surface tests, and from any other possible damage to the continuity of the membrane. 3.7.2 Backfilling
After curing, debris shall be removed and the area adjoining the concrete shall be backfilled, graded, and compacted to conform to the surrounding area in accordance with lines and grades indicated. 3.7.3 Protection
Completed concrete shall be protected from damage until accepted. Repair damaged concrete and clean concrete discolored during construction. Concrete that is damaged shall be removed and reconstructed for the entire SECTION 32 16 13 Page 10
W912HN-12-R-0003
length between regularly scheduled joints. Refinishing the damaged portion will not be acceptable. Removed damaged portions shall be disposed of as directed. 3.7.4 Protective Coating
Protective coating, of linseed oil mixture, shall be applied to the exposed-to-view concrete surface after the curing period, if concrete will be exposed to de-icing chemicals within 6 weeks after placement. Concrete to receive a protective coating shall be moist cured. 3.7.4.1 Application
Curing and backfilling operation shall be completed prior to applying two coats of protective coating. Concrete shall be surface dry and clean before each application. Coverage shall be by spray application at not more than 50 square yards/gallon for first application and not more than 70 square yards/gallon for second application, except that the number of applications and coverage for each application for commercially prepared mixture shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Coated surfaces shall be protected from vehicular and pedestrian traffic until dry. 3.7.4.2 Precautions
Protective coating shall not be heated by direct application of flame or electrical heaters and shall be protected from exposure to open flame, sparks, and fire adjacent to open containers or applicators. Material shall not be applied at ambient or material temperatures lower than 50 degrees F. 3.8 3.8.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL General Requirements
Perform the inspection and tests described and meet the specified requirements for inspection details and frequency of testing. Based upon the results of these inspections and tests, take the action and submit reports as required below, and any additional tests to insure that the requirements of these specifications are met. 3.8.2 3.8.2.1 Concrete Testing Strength Testing
Provide molded concrete specimens for strength tests. Samples of concrete placed each day shall be taken not less than once a day nor less than once for every 250 cubic yards of concrete. The samples for strength tests shall be taken in accordance with ASTM C 172. Cylinders for acceptance shall be molded in conformance with ASTM C 31/C 31M by an approved testing laboratory. Each strength test result shall be the average of 2 test cylinders from the same concrete sample tested at 28 days, unless otherwise specified or approved. Concrete specified on the basis of compressive strength will be considered satisfactory if the averages of all sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed the specified strength, and no individual strength test result falls below the specified strength by more than 500 psi.
SECTION 32 16 13
Page 11
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.8.2.2
Air Content
Determine air content in accordance with ASTM C 173/C 173M or ASTM C 231. ASTM C 231 shall be used with concretes and mortars made with relatively dense natural aggregates. Two tests for air content shall be made on randomly selected batches of each class of concrete placed during each shift. Additional tests shall be made when excessive variation in concrete workability is reported by the placing foreman or the Government inspector. If results are out of tolerance, the placing foreman shall be notified and he shall take appropriate action to have the air content corrected at the plant. Additional tests for air content will be performed on each truckload of material until such time as the air content is within the tolerance specified. 3.8.2.3 Slump Test
Two slump tests shall be made on randomly selected batches of each class of concrete for every 250 cubic yards, or fraction thereof, of concrete placed during each shift. Additional tests shall be performed when excessive variation in the workability of the concrete is noted or when excessive crumbling or slumping is noted along the edges of slip-formed concrete. 3.8.3 Thickness Evaluation
The anticipated thickness of the concrete shall be determined prior to placement by passing a template through the formed section or by measuring the depth of opening of the extrusion template of the curb forming machine. If a slip form paver is used for sidewalk placement, the subgrade shall be true to grade prior to concrete placement and the thickness will be determined by measuring each edge of the completed slab. 3.8.4 Surface Evaluation
The finished surface of each category of the completed work shall be uniform in color and free of blemishes and form or tool marks. 3.9 3.9.1 SURFACE DEFICIENCIES AND CORRECTIONS Thickness Deficiency
When measurements indicate that the completed concrete section is deficient in thickness by more than 1/4 inch the deficient section will be removed, between regularly scheduled joints, and replaced. 3.9.2 High Areas
In areas not meeting surface smoothness and plan grade requirements, high areas shall be reduced either by rubbing the freshly finished concrete with carborundum brick and water when the concrete is less than 36 hours old or by grinding the hardened concrete with an approved surface grinding machine after the concrete is 36 hours old or more. The area corrected by grinding the surface of the hardened concrete shall not exceed 5 percent of the area of any integral slab, and the depth of grinding shall not exceed 1/4 inch. Pavement areas requiring grade or surface smoothness corrections in excess of the limits specified above shall be removed and replaced. 3.9.3 Appearance
Exposed surfaces of the finished work will be inspected by the Government SECTION 32 16 13 Page 12
W912HN-12-R-0003
and any deficiencies in appearance will be identified. Areas which exhibit excessive cracking, discoloration, form marks, or tool marks or which are otherwise inconsistent with the overall appearances of the work shall be removed and replaced. -- End of Section --
SECTION 32 16 13
Page 13
W912HN-12-R-0003
SECTION 32 16 15 CONCRETE BLOCK PAVEMENTS04/08 PART 1 1.1 1.1.1 GENERAL PAYMENT PROCEDURES Pavements
The blocks, cut blocks, bedding sand, and jointing sand will be paid per square foot of satisfactorily installed block pavement surface. 1.1.2 Edge Restraint
The edge restraint will be paid per lineal foot of satisfactorily installed edge restraint. 1.2 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. ACI INTERNATIONAL (ACI) ACI 301 (2005; Errata 2008) Specifications for Structural Concrete ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM C 67 (2009) Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile (2008) Solid Concrete Interlocking Paving Units
ASTM C 936
1.3
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-04 Samples Concrete Paving Block; G, RO A sample of five paving blocks prior to the start of the work. Also, a representative sample of not less than 15 blocks as directed by the Contracting Officer, from each lot of 20,000 concrete paving blocks or fraction thereof. SD-06 Test Reports Tests, Inspections and Verifications SECTION 32 16 15 Page 1
W912HN-12-R-0003
A written report within 7 calendar days after completion of the work, covering the testing required for each lot. 1.4 MAINTENANCE
At the completion of work provide paving blocks (in a quantity to be determined by the Contracting Officer) matching those used in the project. These paving blocks shall be delivered stacked on pallets. PART 2 2.1 2.1.1 PRODUCTS MATERIALS Bedding
Use stone gradations for the bedding, base, and subbase (stone reservoir) courses in accordance with the specifications on the plans. All stone gradations shall be open graded. No sand or stone fines shall be permissible within the stone. 2.1.2 Concrete Paving Block Reference
The concrete paving block shall be a minimum of 3-1/8" thick. the plans for color and shape specifications. 2.1.3 2.1.3.1 2.1.3.2 2.1.3.3 Edge Restraints Omitted Omitted Cast-in-Place Concrete
The edge restraint shall be portland cement concrete placed with the dimensions shown in the plans. Concrete shall conform to the requirements of ACI 301, except that it shall have a compressive strength of not less than the specifications defined within Section 32 16 13 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND CURBS AND GUTTERS. 2.2 2.2.1 TESTS, INSPECTIONS AND VERIFICATIONS Paving Block
Conduct the tests prescribed by ASTM C 936 and the following tests on the remaining 13 blocks of each sample from each lot. 2.2.1.1 Freezing and Thawing resistance to freezing and thawing in accordance with Section 8 67 for five blocks. The blocks shall have no breakage and no 1.0 percent loss of any individual unit in dry weight when to 50 cycles of freezing and thawing.
Determine of ASTM C more than subjected 2.2.1.2
Dimensional Tolerance
The length and width of each block in the sample shall not vary from any other block in this or any other lot sample by more than 1/8 inch. Thickness of any block in the sample shall not vary by more than 1/8 inch from the specified block thickness. SECTION 32 16 15 Page 2
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.2.1.3
Retest
Notify the Contracting Officer if any blocks fail to meet the specified requirements. In case the shipment fails to conform to the specified requirements, the Contractor may sort it, and new specimens selected from the retained lot for retesting, as directed by the Contracting Officer. All concrete paving block retests shall be performed at the expense of the Contractor. In case the second set of specimens fail to conform to the test requirements, the entire lot shall be rejected. PART 3 3.1 3.1.1 EXECUTION PREPARATION Edge Restraint Location
Install the edge restraint as shown in the drawings prior to placement of the blocks. 3.1.2 Sand Bedding Layer
The bedding sand shall be spread evenly over the area to be paved and shall be screeded to an uncompacted average thickness of 1-1/4 inch with a tolerance for grade and surface smoothness of plus or minus 1/4 inches. This bedding sand shall not be used to fill low areas that exceed the specified tolerance for the base. The sand shall be left uncompacted and shall not be disturbed by any pedestrian or vehicle construction traffic. 3.2 BLOCK PLACEMENT
The paving block shall be placed by hand or machine in the indicated pattern. Placement of paving block shall start from a corner or straight edge and proceed forward over the undisturbed sand bedding layer. The joints, excluding any chamfer between paving blocks, shall be not less than 1/16 inch or more than 1/4 inch in width. After seating, the block surface shall be flush or up to 1/4 inch above the edge restraint. 3.2.1 Unfilled Gaps
Any gaps between paving blocks and any edge restraint, drainage structures, or other members that cannot be filled with a whole block shall be filled with a paving block cut to fit the gap, except that slivers will not be allowed. Cutting shall be done with a hydraulic splitter, a masonry saw, or other device that accurately leaves a clean, vertical face without spalling. Any remaining gap between the block and adjoining edge restraint or structure greater than 1/4 inch will not be accepted; adjacent blocks shall be cut or rearranged to prevent this. 3.2.2 Seating Blocks
The blocks shall be seated in the bedding sand by compacting them with a minimum of three passes of a vibratory plate compactor. 3.2.3 Jointing Sand
The jointing sand shall be swept into joints and vibrated with a vibratory plate or vibratory roller compactor. This process shall be continued until sweeping and vibrating have filled all joints with sand and further SECTION 32 16 15 Page 3
W912HN-12-R-0003
vibration cannot force additional sand into the joints. The coarser particles of the sand will not enter the joints and will remain on the surface. These particles and any excess sand shall be swept off the pavement. 3.2.4 Timing of Operations
Seating of blocks and placement of jointing sand can be done concurrently with block placement. However, seating of blocks and placement of jointing sand shall not be done within 5 feet of any unfinished edge of the block pavement that is not supported by the edge restraint. 3.2.5 Final Rolling
The final finished paving block surface shall be rolled with four passes of a vibratory or pneumatic roller with a static weight of not less than 10,000 pounds. 3.2.6 Construction Traffic
Construction traffic shall not be allowed on the paving block surface until the jointing sand has been placed and vibrated into the joints and all debris and excess sand has been swept off. 3.3 CLEANUP
Sweep the entire pavement surface and remove all excess sand, blocks and debris from the project area. 3.4 3.4.1 SMOOTHNESS AND GRADE TOLERANCES Smoothness
No portion of the finished pavement surface shall deviate by more than 3/8 inch from a 10 foot long metal straightedge placed on the pavement surface. 3.4.2 Block Height
The finished block surface shall be either flush or up to 1/4 inch higher than all edge restraints or drainage structures. 3.4.3 Grade
The finished pavement shall be within 0.04 feet of planned grade shown on the plans. 3.4.4 Remedial Action
Any area not meeting the smoothness, block height, or grade tolerance shall be taken up, adjustments made, and the blocks relaid. -- End of Section --
SECTION 32 16 15
Page 4
W912HN-12-R-0003
SECTION 32 16 20 PERMEABLE INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVEMENT 08/10 PART 1 1.1 1.1.1 GENERAL PAYMENT PROCEDURES Pavements
The permeable interlocking concrete pavers, crushed stone bedding material, open-graded subbase aggregate, open-graded base aggregate, bedding and joint/opening filler materials, and geotextiles will be paid per square foot of satisfactorily installed pavement surface. 1.1.2 Edge Restraint
The edge restraint will be paid per lineal foot of satisfactorily installed edge restraint. 1.2 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. ACI INTERNATIONAL (ACI) ACI 301 (2005; Errata 2008) Specifications for Structural Concrete ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM C 131 (2006)Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine (2006) Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates (2009) Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile (2009) Solid Concrete Interlocking Paving Units (2005) Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete (2007e2) CBR (California Bearing Ratio) of Laboratory-Compacted Soils (2008) Sizes of Aggregate for Road and Bridge Construction (2010) Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and SECTION 32 16 20 Page 1
ASTM C 136
ASTM C 67
ASTM C 936/C 936M
ASTM C 979
ASTM D 1883
ASTM D 448
ASTM D6938
W912HN-12-R-0003
Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) 1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-02 Shop Drawings Paver manufacturer's/installation subcontractor's drawings and details: Indicate perimeter conditions, junction with other materials, expansion and control joints, paver layout, patterns, color arrangement, installation and setting details. Indicate layout, pattern and relationship of paving joints to fixtures, and project formed details. Manufacturers' material safety data sheets for the safe handling of the specified paving materials and other products specified herein. Paver manufacturer's written quality control procedures including representative samples of production record keeping that ensure conformance of paving products to the product specifications. Written Method Statement and Quality Control Plan that describes material staging and flow, paving direction and installation procedures, including representative reporting forms that ensure conformance to the project specifications. SD-03 Product Data Paver manufacturer's catalog sheets with product specifications. SD-04 Samples Permeable Interlocking Concrete Pavers; G, RO Eight representative full-size samples of each paver type, thickness, color, and finish. Submit samples indicating the range of color expected in the finished installation. Accepted samples become the standard of acceptance for the work of this Section. Aggregate Materials; G, RO Minimum 3 lb samples of subbase, base and bedding aggregate materials. SD-06 Test Reports Sieve analysis of aggregates for subbase, base and bedding materials per ASTM C 136. Project specific or producer/manufacturer source test results for void ratio and bulk density of the base and subbase aggregates.
SECTION 32 16 20
Page 2
W912HN-12-R-0003
Soils report indicating density test reports, classification, and infiltration rate measured on-site under compacted conditions, and suitability for the intended project. Laboratory test reports certifying compliance of the concrete pavers with ASTM C 936/C 936M. A written report within 7 calendar days after completion of the work, covering the testing required for each lot. SD-07 Certificates Demonstrate that job foremen on the project have a current PICP Installer Technician certificate from the Interlocking Concrete Pavement Institute Concrete Paver Installer Certification program. 1.4 1.4.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE Paver Installation Subcontractor Qualifications
a. Utilize an installer having successfully completed concrete paver installations similar in design, material and extent indicated on this project. b. Utilize an installer with job foremen holding a current certificate from the Interlocking Concrete Pavement Institute Concrete Paver Installer Certification program. 1.4.2 Quality Control Plan
Review the manufacturers' quality control plan, paver installation subcontractor's Method Statement and Quality Control Plan with a pre-construction meeting of representatives from the manufacturer, paver installation subcontractor, general contractor, engineer and/or owner's representative. 1.4.3 Mock-Ups
Install a 10 ft x 10 ft paver area. Mechanized installations may require a larger mock up area. Consult with the paver installation contractor on the size of the mock up. Use this area to determine surcharge of the bedding layer, joint sizes, and lines, laying pattern, color and texture of the job. This area will be used as the standard by which the work will be judged. Subject to acceptance by owner, mock-up may be retained as part of finished work. If mock-up is not retained, remove and properly dispose of mock-up. 1.5 1.5.1 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Delivery
Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged container packaging with identification tags intact on each paver bundle. Coordinate delivery and paving schedule to minimize interference with normal use of buildings adjacent to paving. Deliver concrete pavers to the site in steel banded, plastic banded, or plastic wrapped cubes capable of transfer by forklift or clamp lift. Unload pavers at job site in such a manner that no damage occurs to the product or existing construction.
SECTION 32 16 20
Page 3
W912HN-12-R-0003
1.5.2
Storage and Protection
Store materials in protected area such that they are kept free from mud, dirt, and other foreign materials. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Do not install in rain or snow. Do not install frozen bedding materials. 1.7 MAINTENANCE
At the completion of work provide two pallets of paving blocks matching those used in the project for use by the owner for maintenance and repair. These paving blocks shall be delivered stacked on pallets. Pavers shall be from the same production run as installed materials. PART 2 2.1 2.1.1 PRODUCTS MATERIALS Permeable Interlocking Concrete Pavers
a. Paver manufacturer: Pavers shall be supplied by ICPI member supplier. b. Paver type: The concrete pavers shall conform to ASTM C 936/C 936M. Pavers shall be 3-1/8 inch thick, as shown on drwaings, and with paver types, shapes, sizes, and paver solar reflectivity as specified on the plans. Pigmentation shall conform to ASTM C 979. Structural interlocking capability shall be achieved by a vertical joint profile exhibiting protruding spacer bars that interlock throughout the depth of the block when placed in pattern. 2.1.2 Aggregate Materials
a. Crushed stone with 90% fractured faces, LA Abrasion < 40 per ASTM C 131, minimum CBR of 80% per ASTM D 1883. b. Do not use rounded river gravel for vehicular applications. c. All stone materials shall be washed with less than 1% passing the No. 200 sieve. d. Joint/opening filler, bedding, base and subbase: conforming to ASTM D 448 gradation as shown in Tables 1, 2 and 3 below. (Note: No. 89 stone or that having similar gradation and infiltration rates may be used to fill pavers with narrow joints.)
Table 1 ASTM No. 8 Grading Requirements Bedding and Joint/Opening Filler Sieve Size 12.5 mm (1/2 in.) 9.5 mm (3/8 in.) 4.75 mm (No. 4) Percent Passing 100 85 to 100 10 to 30
SECTION 32 16 20
Page 4
W912HN-12-R-0003
Table 1 ASTM No. 8 Grading Requirements Bedding and Joint/Opening Filler Sieve Size 12.5 mm (1/2 in.) 2.36 mm (No. 8) 1.16 mm (No. 16) Table 2 ASTM No. 57 Base Grading Requirements Sieve Size 37.5 mm (1 1/2 in.) 25 mm (1 in.) 12.5 mm (1/2 in.) 4.75 mm (No. 4) 2.36 mm (No. 8) Percent Passing 100 95 to 100 25 to 60 0 to 10 0 to 5 Percent Passing 100 0 to 10 0 to 5
SECTION 32 16 20
Page 5
W912HN-12-R-0003
Table 3 Grading Requirement for ASTM No. 2 Subbase Sieve Size 75 mm (3 in.) 63 mm (2 1/2 in.) 50 mm (2 in.) 37.5 mm (1 1/2 in.) 19 mm (3/4 in.) Percent Passing 100 90 to 100 35 to 70 0 to 10 0 to 5
e. Gradation criteria for the bedding and base: (Note: Dx is the particle size at which x percent of the particles are finer. For example, D15 is the particle size of the aggregate for which 15% of the particles are smaller and 85% are larger.) (1) D15 base stone /D15 bedding stone < 5. (2) D50 base stone/D50 bedding stone > 2. 2.1.3 Edge Restraints
The edge restraint shall be cast-in-place portland cement concrete placed with the dimensions shown in the plans. Concrete shall conform to the requirements of ACI 301. Refer to plans for additional information on restraint types, specifications, and installation locations. 2.1.4 Geotextile Fabric
Nonwoven geotextile permeable filter fabric with a permeability greater than or equal to the infiltration rate of the surrounding native soils. 2.1.5 Product Substitutions
Substitutions permitted for gradations for crushed stone jointing material, base and subbase materials. Base and subbase materials shall have a minimum 0.32 void ratio. All substitutions shall be approved in writing by the resident engineer. 2.2 2.2.1 TESTS, INSPECTIONS AND VERIFICATIONS Permeable Interlocking Concrete Pavers
Conduct the tests prescribed by ASTM C 936/C 936M and the following tests on paver samples. 2.2.1.1 Freezing and Thawing resistance to freezing and thawing in accordance with Section 8 67 for five blocks. The blocks shall have no breakage and no 1.0 percent loss of any individual unit in dry weight when to 50 cycles of freezing and thawing.
Determine of ASTM C more than subjected 2.2.1.2
Dimensional Tolerance
The length and width of each block in the sample shall not vary from any SECTION 32 16 20 Page 6
W912HN-12-R-0003
other block in this or any other lot sample by more than 1/8 inch. Thickness of any block in the sample shall not vary by more than 1/8 inch from the specified block thickness. 2.2.1.3 Retest
Notify the Contracting Officer if any blocks fail to meet the specified requirements. In case the shipment fails to conform to the specified requirements, the Contractor may sort it, and new specimens selected from the retained lot for retesting, as directed by the Contracting Officer. All concrete paving block retests shall be performed at the expense of the Contractor. In case the second set of specimens fail to conform to the test requirements, the entire lot shall be rejected. PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION ACCEPTANCE OF SITE VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS
a. General Contractor shall inspect, accept and certify in writing to the paver installation subcontractor that site conditions meet specifications for the following items prior to installation of interlocking concrete pavers. Verify that subgrade preparation, compacted density and elevations conform to specified requirements. Provide written density test results for soil subgrade to the Owner, General Contractor and paver installation subcontractor. Verify location, type, and elevations of edge restraints, utility structures, and drainage pipes and inlets. b. Do not proceed with installation of bedding and interlocking concrete pavers until subgrade soil conditions are corrected by the General Contractor or designated subcontractor. 3.2 PREPARATION
a. Verify that the soil subgrade is free from standing water. b. Stockpile joint/opening filler, base and subbase materials such that they are free from standing water, uniformly graded, free of any organic material or sediment, debris, and ready for placement. c. Install edge restraints per the drawings at the indicated elevations. 3.3 3.3.1 INSTALLATION General
a. All drain pipes, observation wells, overflow pipes, and (if applicable) geotextiles, berms, baffles and impermeable liner should be in place per the drawings prior to or during placement of the subbase and base, depending on their location. Care must be taken not to damage drainpipes during compaction and paving. No mud or sediment can be left on the base or bedding aggregates. If they are contaminated, they must be removed and replaced with clean materials. Base/subbase thicknesses shall be per plan. b. Any excess thickness of soil applied over the excavated soil subgrade to trap sediment from adjacent construction activities shall be removed before application of the geotextile and subbase materials. c. Keep area where pavement is to be constructed free from sediment during entire job. Geotextiles, base, and bedding materials contaminated with SECTION 32 16 20 Page 7
W912HN-12-R-0003
sediment shall be removed and replaced with clean materials. d. Do not damage drainpipes, overflow pipes, observation wells, or any inlets and other drainage appurtenances during installation. Report any damage immediately to the project engineer. 3.3.2 Geotextiles
a. Place on bottom and sides of soil subgrade. Secure in place to prevent wrinkling from vehicle tires and tracks. b. Overlap a minimum of 12 inches in the direction of drainage. 3.3.3 Open-graded subbase and base
a. Moisten, spread and compact the No. 2 subbase in 4 to 6 inch lifts without wrinkling or folding the geotextile. Place subbase to protect geotextile from wrinkling under equipment tires and tracks. b. For each lift, make at least two passes in the vibratory mode then at least two in the static mode with a minimum 10 t (10 T) vibratory roller until there is no visible movement of the No. 2 stone. Do not crush aggregate with the roller. c. The surface tolerance of the compacted No. 2 subbase shall be 2 1/2 inches over a 10 ft straightedge. d. Moisten, spread and compact the No. 57 base layer in one 4 inch thick lift. On this layer, make at least two passes in the vibratory mode then at least two in the static mode with a minimum 10 t (10 T) vibratory roller until there is no visible movement of the No. 2 stone. Do not crush aggregate with the roller. e. Use part of the compacted base area as a control strip for density testing by the Testing Company to be provided by the contractor. The Testing Company shall supply nuclear moisture/density gauges and ancillary equipment required to conduct density and moisture content measurements for compaction of the No. 57 aggregate drainage layer. Qualified testing laboratory operators/gauges may conduct compaction testing. Each gauge operator shall be trained in the safe operation, transportation and handling of the gauge. The registered owner of the gauge shall have and maintain a valid Radioisotope License for each gauge. Each gauge shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months, either by the manufacturer or other qualified agent, against certified density and moisture reference blocks. The density standard count and the moisture standard count shall be within 2 percent and 4 percent respectively, of the most recent calibration values. A certificate of calibration for each gauge shall accompany each gauge. f. Target Density: Determine a target density on the control strip during under the following conditions: 1. After initial placement and compaction of the base aggregate layer; 2. When there is a perceptible change in the appearance or gradation of the aggregate; 3. When there is a change in the source of aggregate. SECTION 32 16 20 Page 8
W912HN-12-R-0003
Test field density according to ASTM D6938 Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate In-Place by Nuclear Methods (shallow Depth). Field density tests shall be performed on compacted base materials to determine within acceptable limits of a target density. g. Control Strip 1. The Testing Company shall construct a control strip for the determination of a target density consisting of a single uniform lift as specified in the contract documents, but not more than 4 inches thick and covering approximately 600 yd2 in area. No testing shall be performed within 10 ft from any unrestrained outside edge of the work area. The control strip may be incorporated into the project upon acceptance of density measurements by the Testing Company. 2. During construction of the control strip, the surface of the aggregate shall be visibly moist and maintained as such throughout construction and compaction. 3. After initial placement of the aggregate base material, the compaction equipment shall make two passes over the entire surface of the control strip. Field densities and field moisture contents, using the backscatter/indirect method, shall be determined at five randomly selected locations at least 15 ft apart. The dry density and moisture content shall be calculated for each of these locations and the averages shall be used as initial values. The maximum compacted thickness of the aggregate base layer measured for density shall be 4 inches. 4. The compaction equipment shall then make two additional passes over the entire surface of the control strip. After compaction, three separate, random field density and moisture content determinations shall be made, using the backscatter/indirect method, and a new average dry density and moisture content shall be calculated. 5. If the new average dry density exceeds the previous value by more than 1.2 pcf then two additional passes of the equipment shall be carried out as described above. If the new average dry density does not exceed the previous value by more than 1.2 pcf, then compaction of the control strip will be considered satisfactory and complete. 6. Upon satisfactory completion of the control strip, an additional seven (7) field density and moisture tests, using the backscatter/indirect method, shall be taken at random locations and the dry density and moisture content values shall be determined. The final dry density and moisture content of the control strip shall be the average of these seven values plus the three most recent values obtained upon completion. h. Compaction Equipment: Use a smooth dual or single smooth drum, minimum 10 ton (10 T) vibratory roller or a minimum 13,500 lbf centrifugal force, reversible vibratory plate compactor that provides maximum compaction force without crushing the aggregate base. i. Test Report: The test report shall include the following: SECTION 32 16 20 Page 9
W912HN-12-R-0003
1. Project description. 2. Sketch of test area and test locations. 3. Aggregate type and layer thicknesses. 4. Aggregate characteristic properties: gradation, void ratio, bulk density. 5. Compaction equipment type and weight. 6. Static or vibratory compaction. 7. Number of passes of the compaction equipment. 8. Test number and location. 9. Individual and average field wet density, moisture content, and dry density values determined after each compaction operation in accordance with ASTM D 2922 Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate In-Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). 10. Calculation of target density. 3.3.4 Surface Tolerance
The surface tolerance of the compacted No. 57 base should not deviate more than 1 inch over a 10 foot straightedge. 3.3.5 Bedding layer
a. Moisten, spread and screed the No. 8 stone bedding material. b. Fill voids left by removed screed rails with No. 8 stone. c. The surface tolerance of the screeded No. 8 bedding layer shall be 3/8 in over a 10 ft straightedge. d. Do not subject screeded bedding material to any pedestrian or vehicular traffic before paving unit installation begins. 3.3.6 Permeable interlocking concrete pavers and joint/opening fill material
a. Lay the paving units in the pattern(s) and joint widths shown on the drawings. Maintain straight pattern lines. Pavers to be placed with mechanical methods. b. Fill gaps at the edges of the paved area with cut units. Cut pavers subject to tire traffic shall be no smaller than 1/3 of a whole unit. c. Cut pavers with a masonry saw and place along the edges. d. Fill the openings and joints with No. 8 stone. (Note: Some paver joint widths may be narrow and not accept most of the No. 8 stone. Use joint material that will fill joints such as washed ASTM No. 89, No. 9, or No. 10 stone.
SECTION 32 16 20
Page 10
W912HN-12-R-0003
e. Remove excess aggregate on the surface by sweeping pavers clean. f. Compact and seat the pavers into the bedding material using a low-amplitude, 75-90 Hz plate compactor capable of at least 5,000 lbf centrifugal compaction force. This will require at least two passes with the plate compactor. g. Do not compact within 6 ft of the unrestrained edges of the paving units. h. Apply additional aggregate to the openings and joints if needed, filling them completely. Remove excess aggregate by sweeping then compact the pavers. This will require at least two passes with the plate compactor. i. All pavers within 6 ft of the laying face must be left fully compacted at the completion of each day. j. The final surface tolerance of compacted pavers shall not deviate more than /8 inches under a 10 ft long straightedge. k. The surface elevation of pavers shall be 1/8 to 1/4 in. above adjacent drainage inlets, concrete collars or channels. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
a. After sweeping the surface clean, check final elevations for conformance to the drawings. b. Lippage: No greater than 1/8 in. difference in height between adjacent pavers. (Note: The surface of the pavers may be 1/8 to 1/4 inch above the final elevations after compaction to help compensate for possible minor settling normal to pavements.) c. The surface elevation of pavers shall be 1/8 to 1/4 in. above adjacent drainage inlets, concrete collars or channels. d. Bond lines for paver courses: 1/2 in. over a 50 ft string line. e. Any area not meeting the smoothness, paver height, or grade tolerance shall be taken up, adjustments made, and the pavers relaid. 3.5 PROTECTION
After work in this Section is complete, the General Contractor shall be responsible for protecting work from sediment deposition and damage due to subsequent construction activity on the site.
SECTION 32 16 20
Page 11
W912HN-12-R-0003
SECTION 32 17 24.00 10 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 04/08 PART 1 1.1 1.1.1 1.1.1.1 GENERAL UNIT PRICES Measurement Surface Preparation
The unit of measurement for surface preparation will be the number of square feet of pavement surface prepared for marking and accepted by the Contracting Officer. 1.1.1.2 Pavement Striping and Markings
The unit of measurement for pavement striping and markings will be the number of square feet of reflective and nonreflective striping or marking actually completed and accepted by the Contracting Officer. 1.1.1.3 1.1.1.4 Omitted Removal of Pavement Markings
The unit of measurement for removal of pavement markings shall be the number of square feet of pavement markings actually removed and accepted by the Contracting Officer. 1.1.2 Payment
The quantities of surface preparation, pavement striping or markings, and removal of pavement markings determined as specified in paragraph Measurement, will be paid for at the contract unit price. The payment will constitute full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, appliances, and doing all work involved in marking pavements. Any striping or markings which are placed without reflective media, when reflective media is required, shall be removed and replaced at no cost to the Government. Striping or markings which do not conform to the alignment and/or location required shall be removed and replaced at no cost to the Government. 1.2 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS (AASHTO) AASHTO M 247 (2008) Glass Beads Used in Traffic Paints
SECTION 32 17 24.00 10
Page 1
W912HN-12-R-0003
U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA) FS TT-B-1325 (Rev C) Beads (Glass Spheres) Retro-Reflective (Metric) (Rev D) Paint, Traffic and Airfield Markings, Waterborne
FS TT-P-1952
1.3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
All machines, tools and equipment used in the performance of the work shall be approved and maintained in satisfactory operating condition. Equipment operating on roads and runways shall display low speed traffic markings and traffic warning lights. 1.3.1 1.3.1.1 Paint Application Equipment Self-Propelled or Mobile-Drawn Pneumatic Spraying Machines
The equipment to apply paint to pavements shall be a self-propelled or mobile-drawn pneumatic spraying machine with suitable arrangements of atomizing nozzles and controls to obtain the specified results. The machine shall have a speed during application not less than 5 mph, and shall be capable of applying the stripe widths indicated, at the paint coverage rate specified in paragraph APPLICATION, and of even uniform thickness with clear-cut edges. The paint applicator shall have paint reservoirs or tanks of sufficient capacity and suitable gauges to apply paint in accordance with requirements specified. Tanks shall be equipped with suitable air-driven mechanical agitators. The spray mechanism shall be equipped with quick-action valves conveniently located, and shall include necessary pressure regulators and gauges in full view and reach of the operator. Paint strainers shall be installed in paint supply lines to ensure freedom from residue and foreign matter that may cause malfunction of the spray guns. The paint applicator shall be readily adaptable for attachment of an air-actuated dispenser for the reflective media approved for use. Pneumatic spray guns shall be provided for hand application of paint in areas where the mobile paint applicator cannot be used. 1.3.1.2 Hand-Operated, Push-Type Machines
All machines, tools, and equipment used in performance of the work shall be approved and maintained in satisfactory operating condition. Hand-operated push-type machines of a type commonly used for application of paint to pavement surfaces will be acceptable for marking small streets and parking areas. Applicator machine shall be equipped with the necessary paint tanks and spraying nozzles, and shall be capable of applying paint uniformly at coverage specified. Sandblasting equipment shall be provided as required for cleaning surfaces to be painted. Hand-operated spray guns shall be provided for use in areas where push-type machines cannot be used. 1.3.2 Reflective Media Dispenser
The dispenser for applying the reflective media shall be attached to the paint dispenser and shall operate automatically and simultaneously with the applicator through the same control mechanism. The dispenser shall be capable of adjustment and designed to provide uniform flow of reflective media over the full length and width of the stripe at the rate of coverage specified in paragraph APPLICATION, at all operating speeds of the applicator to which it is attached. SECTION 32 17 24.00 10 Page 2
W912HN-12-R-0003
1.3.3 1.3.3.1
Surface Preparation Equipment Sandblasting Equipment
Sandblasting equipment shall include an air compressor, hoses, and nozzles of proper size and capacity as required for cleaning surfaces to be painted. The compressor shall be capable of furnishing not less than 150 cfm of air at a pressure of not less than 90 psi at each nozzle used, and shall be equipped with traps that will maintain the compressed air free of oil and water. 1.3.3.2 Waterblast Equipment
The water pressure shall be specified at 2600 psi at 140 degrees F in order to adequately clean the surfaces to be marked. 1.3.4 Marking Removal Equipment
Equipment shall be mounted on rubber tires and shall be capable of removing markings from the pavement without damaging the pavement surface or joint sealant. Waterblasting equipment shall be capable of producing an adjustable, pressurized stream of water. Sandblasting equipment shall include an air compressor, hoses, and nozzles. The compressor shall be equipped with traps to maintain the air free of oil and water. 1.3.4.1 Shotblasting Equipment
Shotblasting equipment shall be capable of producing an adjustable depth of removal of marking and pavement. Each unit shall be self-cleaning and self-contained, shall be able to confine dust and debris from the operation, and shall be capable of recycling the abrasive for reuse. 1.3.4.2 Chemical Equipment
Chemical equipment shall be capable of application and removal of chemicals from the pavement surface, and shall leave only non-toxic biodegradeable residue. 1.4 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-03 Product Data Equipment; G, RO Lists of proposed equipment, including descriptive data, and notifications of proposed Contractor actions as specified in this section. List of removal equipment shall include descriptive data indicating area of coverage per pass, pressure adjustment range, tank and flow capacities, and safety precautions required for the equipment operation. Composition Requirements SECTION 32 17 24.00 10 Page 3
W912HN-12-R-0003
Manufacturer's current printed product description and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for each type paint/color proposed for use. Qualifications Documentation on personnel qualifications, as specified. SD-06 Test Reports Sampling and Testing Certified copies of the test reports, prior to the use of the materials at the jobsite. Testing shall be performed in an approved independent laboratory. SD-07 Certificates Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Certificate stating that the proposed pavement marking paint meets the VOC regulations of the local Air Pollution Control District having jurisdiction over the geographical area in which the project is located. 1.5 1.5.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE Qualifications
Submit documentation certifying that pertinent personnel are qualified for equipment operation and handling of chemicals. 1.5.2 Traffic Controls
Suitable warning signs shall be placed near the beginning of the worksite and well ahead of the worksite for alerting approaching traffic from both directions. Small markers shall be placed along newly painted lines or freshly placed raised markers to control traffic and prevent damage to newly painted surfaces. Painting equipment shall be marked with large warning signs indicating slow-moving painting equipment in operation. 1.5.3 1.5.3.1 1.5.3.2 Maintenance of Traffic Omitted Roads, Streets, and Parking Areas
When traffic must be rerouted or controlled to accomplish the work, the necessary warning signs, flagpersons, and related equipment for the safe passage of vehicles shall be provided. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
All materials shall be delivered and stored in sealed containers that plainly show the designated name, formula or specification number, batch number, color, date of manufacture, manufacturer's name, and directions, all of which shall be plainly legible at time of use.
SECTION 32 17 24.00 10
Page 4
W912HN-12-R-0003
1.7
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Pavement surface shall be free of snow, ice, or slush. Surface temperature shall be at least 40 degrees F and rising at the beginning of operations, except those involving shot or sand blasting. Operation shall cease during thunderstorms. Operation shall cease during rainfall, except for waterblasting and removal of previously applied chemicals. Waterblasting shall cease where surface water accumulation alters the effectiveness of material removal. PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS PAINT
The paint shall be homogeneous, easily stirred to smooth consistency, and shall show no hard settlement or other objectionable characteristics during a storage period of 6 months. Paints for roads, parking areas, and streets shall conform to FS TT-P-1952, color as indicated or selected. Pavement marking paints shall comply with applicable state and local laws enacted to ensure compliance with Federal Clean Air Standards. Paint materials shall conform to the restrictions of the local Air Pollution Control District. 2.2 2.3 OMITTED REFLECTIVE MEDIA
Reflective media for roads and streets shall conform to FS TT-B-1325, Type I, Gradation A or AASHTO M 247, Type I. 2.4 SAMPLING AND TESTING
Materials proposed for use shall be stored on the project site in sealed and labeled containers, or segregated at source of supply, sufficiently in advance of needs to allow 60 days for testing. Upon notification by the Contractor that the material is at the site or source of supply, a sample shall be taken by random selection from sealed containers in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Samples shall be clearly identified by designated name, specification number, batch number, manufacturer's formulation number, project contract number, intended use, and quantity involved. PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION SURFACE PREPARATION
Thoroughly clean surfaces to be marked before application of the pavement marking material. Dust, dirt, and other granular surface deposits shall be removed by sweeping, blowing with compressed air, rinsing with water or a combination of these methods as required. Rubber deposits, surface laitance, existing paint markings, and other coatings adhering to the pavement shall be completely removed with scrapers, wire brushes, sandblasting, approved chemicals, or mechanical abrasion as directed. Areas of old pavement affected with oil or grease shall be scrubbed with several applications of trisodium phosphate solution or other approved detergent or degreaser, and rinsed thoroughly after each application. After cleaning, oil-soaked areas shall be sealed with cut shellac to prevent bleeding through the new paint. Pavement surfaces shall be allowed to dry, when water is used for cleaning, prior to striping or marking. Surfaces shall be recleaned, when work has been stopped due to rain. SECTION 32 17 24.00 10 Page 5
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.1.1
Pretreatment for Early Painting
Where early painting is required on rigid pavements, apply a pretreatment with an aqueous solution, containing 3 percent phosphoric acid and 2 percent zinc chloride, to prepared pavement areas prior to painting. 3.1.2 Cleaning Existing Pavement Markings
In general, markings shall not be placed over existing pavement marking patterns. Remove existing pavement markings, which are in good condition but interfere or conflict with the newly applied marking patterns. Deteriorated or obscured markings that are not misleading or confusing or interfere with the adhesion of the new marking material do not require removal. New preformed and thermoplastic pavement markings shall not be applied over existing preformed or thermoplastic markings. Whenever grinding, scraping, sandblasting or other operations are performed the work must be conducted in such a manner that the finished pavement surface is not damaged or left in a pattern that is misleading or confusing. When these operations are completed the pavement surface shall be blown off with compressed air to remove residue and debris resulting from the cleaning work. 3.1.3 Cleaning Concrete Curing Compounds
On new portland cement concrete pavements, cleaning operations shall not begin until a minimum of 30 days after the placement of concrete. All new concrete pavements shall be cleaned by either sandblasting or water blasting. When water blasting is performed, thermoplastic and preformed markings shall be applied no sooner than 24 hours after the blasting has been completed. The extent of the blasting work shall be to clean and prepare the concrete surface as follows: a. There is no visible evidence of curing compound on the peaks of the textured concrete surface. b. There are no heavy puddled deposits of curing compound in the valleys of the textured concrete surface. c. All remaining curing compound is intact; all loose and flaking material is removed. d. The peaks of the textured pavement surface are rounded in profile and free of sharp edges and irregularities. e. 3.2 The surface to be marked is dry.
APPLICATION
All pavement markings and patterns shall be placed as shown on the plans. 3.2.1 Paint
Paint shall be applied to clean, dry surfaces, and only when air and pavement temperatures are above 40 degrees F and less than 95 degrees F. Paint temperature shall be maintained within these same limits. New asphalt pavement surfaces and new Portland concrete cement shall be allowed to cure for a period of not less than 30 days before applications of paint. Paint shall be applied pneumatically with approved equipment at SECTION 32 17 24.00 10 Page 6
W912HN-12-R-0003
rate of coverage specified. Provide guide lines and templates as necessary to control paint application. Special precautions shall be taken in marking numbers, letters, and symbols. Edges of markings shall be sharply outlined. 3.2.1.1 Rate of Application
a. Reflective Markings: Pigmented binder shall be applied evenly to the pavement area to be coated at a rate of 105 plus or minus 5 square feet/gallon. Glass spheres shall be applied uniformly to the wet paint on road and street pavement at a rate of 6 plus or minus 0.5 pounds of glass spheres per gallon of paint. b. Nonreflective Markings: Paint shall be applied evenly to the pavement surface to be coated at a rate of 105 plus or minus 5 square feet/gallon. 3.2.1.2 Drying
The maximum drying time requirements of the paint specifications will be strictly enforced to prevent undue softening of bitumen, and pickup, displacement, or discoloration by tires of traffic. If there is a delay in drying of the markings, painting operations shall be discontinued until cause of the slow drying is determined and corrected. 3.2.2 3.2.3 Omitted Reflective Media
Application of reflective media shall immediately follow application of pigmented binder. Drop-on application of glass spheres shall be accomplished to insure that reflective media is evenly distributed at the specified rate of coverage. Should there be malfunction of either paint applicator or reflective media dispenser, operations shall be discontinued immediately until deficiency is corrected. 3.3 MARKING REMOVAL
Pavement marking, shall be removed in the areas shown on the drawings. Removal of marking shall be as complete as possible without damage to the surface. Aggregate shall not be exposed by the removal process. After the markings are removed, the cleaned pavement surfaces shall exhibit adequate texture for remarking as specified in paragraph SURFACE PREPARATION. Demonstrate removal of pavement marking in an area designated by the Contracting Officer. The demonstration area will become the standard for the remainder of the work. 3.3.1 Equipment Operation
Equipment shall be controlled and operated to remove markings from the pavement surface, prevent dilution or removal of binder from underlying pavement, and prevent emission of blue smoke from asphalt or tar surfaces. 3.3.2 Cleanup and Waste Disposal
The worksite shall be kept clean of debris and waste from the removal operations. Cleanup shall immediately follow removal operations in areas subject to air traffic. Debris shall be disposed of at approved sites.
SECTION 32 17 24.00 10
Page 7
W912HN-12-R-0003
SECTION 32 17 24.00 10
Page 8
W912HN-12-R-0003
SECTION 32 35 00 SCREENING DEVICES 06/11 PART 1 1.1 GENERAL SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Fence panels and accessories. Choosing appropriate plant material for GREENscreen requires consideration of climate, sun and wind exposure, soil, size of container, feeding, adjacent plants, and desired visual effect. Twining, climbing, curling, and tendril vines are more suitable than vines that cling by aerial roots or suckers. Less woody vines with flexible stems are most appropriate for weaving into panels. Some vines, such as wisteria, that tend to grow heavy and tree-like are better off in containers that prevent them from growing too large and heavy for trellis. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 30 00: Cast-in-Place Concrete: For setting fence posts. 2. Section 32 93 00: Plants
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Provide two sets of submittals. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer s product data, standard details, and installation instructions. Shop drawings are not ordinarily required. However, text below may be retained for complex projects if required to coordinate dimensions and installation of treillage with adjacent work. C. Shop Drawings: Submit showing sizes critical dimensions, panel layout constraints using a 2 x 2 inch modular grid, and details and locations of accessories. Color samples are not ordinarily required. However, text below may be retained below if required to verify appearance of custom colors. D. Color Submittals: Submit coupons 2 x 3/12 inches minimum showing color and texture to be provided.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Minimum 5 years experience manufacturing and supplying trellis structures of the type required for this project. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect materials from damage. Store panels flat. Provide edge protection when strapping is used. Do not apply loads to panel edges. In addition to the sustainability factors below, GREENscreen can reduce energy requirements for cooling; use a deciduous vine to shade your building against summer sun but allow it to be warmed by winter sun. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect materials from damage. Store panels flat. Provide edge protection when strapping is used. Do not apply loads to panel edges. SECTION 32 35 00 Page 1
W912HN-12-R-0003
In addition to the sustainability factors below, GREENscreen can reduce energy requirements for cooling; use a deciduous vine to shade your building against summer sun but allow it to be warmed by winter sun. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Contact manufacturer before specifying recycled content to verify current raw material availability. A. Recycled Materials Content: Steel components shall contain not less than 95 percent recycled materials content. Panels are fabricated in Fontana, CA, located 50 miles east of Los Angeles, CA. If the project is located more than 500 miles from the plant, delete the following. B. Panels shall be manufactured and fabricated within 500 miles of Project location. PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER
A. GREENscreen , Los Angeles, CA; phone 800-450-3494, fax 310-837-0523, www.greenscreen.com. 2.2 PANELS
A. Panels shall be rigid, three-dimensional welded wire grid fabricated of 14-gage ASTM A641 galvanized steel wire. B. Face Grid: Wires shall be welded at each intersection to form a 2 x 2 inch face grid on the front and back of panels, C. Trusses: Face grids shall be separated by bent wire trusses spaced at 2-inch centers and welded to front and back face grids at each truss apex. 2 thick panels should be used at wall-mounted conditions. They take up less area and enable the two-inch module to be maintained around corners. 3 thick panels can be used at wall-mounted conditions, edge-mounted conditions with supports at up to 96 inches on center, and at horizontal or inclined (overhead) conditions with supports at up to 48 inches on center. D. Thickness: As shown on Drawings. E. Length and Width: Provide in 2-inch nominal increments. F. Tolerance: 1/8 inch in width and inch in length. 2.3 ACCESSORIES
Trim is recommended adjacent to pedestrian traffic areas and where required visually or to provide an edge to which vines can be trimmed for maintenance. Do not use channel trim at bottom of panels where it could hold water and restrict plant growth. A. Trim: 1. Fabricate from 20-gage ASTM A879 galvanized steel. 2. Types: a. Channel Trim: Thickness of panel x inch legs. b. Angle Trim: inch x inch legs. Omit following if locations are shown on drawings. 3. Locations: a. Corners formed by intersections of panels: Angle type. b. Top of Treillage : Channel type. c. Side of Treillage : Channel type. d. Bottom of Treillage : Angle type. If panel exterior face of panel is more than 18 inches in front of SECTION 32 35 00 Page 2
W912HN-12-R-0003
substrate, contact GREENscreen for custom designed mounting brackets. B. Clips and Straps: Provide manufacturer s standard types of clips and straps suitable for mounting conditions. Fabricate from ASTM A879 galvanized steel. Adjustable clips shall have inch diameter 18-8 stainless steel bolt, washer, and nut. Spacers are recommended when panels are mounted directly to a wall. Post imbed length and footing size should be determined based on overall height, spacing, wind load, soil conditions, and type of footing. Detail footing on drawings. C. Fence Posts: 3-inch diameter ASTM A500 steel tube. Provide steel post caps. D. Fasteners for Mounting Clips to Fence Posts: Self drilling, self tapping hex washer head screws, Type 410 stainless steel, and free from rust when salt spray tested for 300 hours in accordance with ASTM B117. 2.4 A. B. 2.5 FABRICATION Cut to size. Weld trim to panels and grind smooth exterior surfaces of welds. FINISHES
A. Metal components (except fasteners) shall be factory finished after fabrication. B. Finish System: pretreat with general purpose, alkaline, water based cleaner / degreaser applied at 240 degrees F. prime with zinc-rich epoxy powder coat. Topcoat with polyester or polyester-urethane powder coat. C. Salt Spray Resistance: Finish shall remain rust free when tested 1680 hours in accordance with ASTM B117. GREENscreen offers six standard finishes including four gloss finishes and two matte textured finishes. Colors are available at a slight premium, depending upon the size of an order. Contact factory for information on custom colors. D. Color: Wrinkle-Textured Green E. Touch-Up Paint: Provide high quality, exterior-grade spray paint suitable for conditions of use. PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION EXAMINATION Do not
A. Inspect substrates and conditions affecting work of Section. proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install panels plumb and square, centered within area designated for panels, and aligned to maintain modular grid. B. Avoid cutting panels in field. Where field cutting is essential, apply touch-up paint to cut edges. C. Install securely with fasteners located To meet manufacturer s requirements. D. Repair bent or damaged panels. If panels cannot be repaired to satisfaction of COR, remove from jobsite and replace with new panels. -- End of Section --
SECTION 32 35 00
Page 3
W912HN-12-R-0003
SECTION 32 84 23 UNDERGROUND SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 04/08 PART 1 1.1 GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SANITARY ENGINEERING (ASSE) ASSE 1012 (2009) Performance Requirements for Backflow Preventer with an Intermediate Atmospheric Vent - (ANSI approved 2009) (2009) Performance Requirements for Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers and Reduced Pressure Fire Protection Principle Backflow Preventers (ANSI approved 2010)
ASSE 1013
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA) AWWA C509 (2001) Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME) ASME B1.2 (1983; Errata 1992; R 2007) Gages and Gaging for Unified Inch Screw Threads (2006) Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Classes 150 and 300 (2005) Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments
ASME B16.3
ASME B40.100
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM A 53/A 53M (2007) Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless (2006) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC), Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120 (2009) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series) (1996; R 2001) Nonrigid Vinyl Chloride Polymer and Copolymer Molding and SECTION 32 84 23 Page 1
ASTM D 1785
ASTM D 2241
ASTM D 2287
W912HN-12-R-0003
Extrusion Compounds ASTM D 2464 (2006) Standard Specification for Threaded Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80 (2006) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40 (2004e1) Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems (2008) Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pressure Piping (1996; R 2002) Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings (2002; R 2008) Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80
ASTM D 2466
ASTM D 2564
ASTM D 2774
ASTM D 2855
ASTM F 441/F 441M
FOUNDATION FOR CROSS-CONNECTION CONTROL AND HYDRAULIC RESEARCH (FCCCHR) FCCCHR Manual (1988e9) Manual of Cross-Connection Control
MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS INDUSTRY (MSS) MSS SP-80 (2008) Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves (2002) Standard for Cast Iron Globe & Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends
MSS SP-85
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA) NEMA ICS 2 (2000; R 2005; Errata 2008) Standard for Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays Rated 600 V (1993; R 2011) Enclosures
NEMA ICS 6
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) NFPA 70 (2011; TIA 11-1; Errata 2011; TIA 11-2; TIA 11-3; TIA 11-4) National Electrical Code PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE INSTITUTE (PDI) PDI WH 201 (2006) Water Hammer Arresters Standard
SECTION 32 84 23
Page 2
W912HN-12-R-0003
1.2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Provide a system that operates with a minimum water pressure of 65 psi at connection to cistern pumping unit and 30-40 psi at the last head in each zone, depending on head type. Submit Design Analysis and Calculations as specified in the Submittals paragraph. 1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-02 Shop Drawings Sprinkler System Detail drawings for valves, sprinkler heads, backflow preventers, automatic controllers, emitter heads, and water hammer arresters. Include on the drawings a complete list of equipment and materials, and manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature, performance charts and curves, catalog cuts, and installation instructions. Also show on the drawings complete wiring and schematic diagrams and any other details required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will function as a unit. Show on the drawings proposed system layout, type and number of heads and emitters, zone valves, drain pockets, backflow devices, controllers, and mounting details of controllers. It is assumed that if plans are not altered, contractor will simply submit construction document plans clearly labeled "PLANS NOT ALTERED". Include As-built Drawings which provide current factual information showing locations of mains, heads, valves, and controllers including deviations from and amendments to the drawings and changes in the work. All valve locations to be cross-measured to permanent site fixtures. SD-03 Product Data Framed Instructions Labels, signs, and templates of operating instructions that are required to be mounted or installed on or near the product for normal, safe operation. Field Training Information describing training to be provided, training aids to be used, samples of training materials to be provided, and schedules and notification of training. Sprinkler System Detailed procedures defining the Contractor's provisions for accident prevention, health protection, and other safety precautions for the work to be done. Spare Parts SECTION 32 84 23 Page 3
W912HN-12-R-0003
Spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment specified. Design Analysis and Calculations Design analyses and pressure calculations verifying that system will provide the irrigation requirements. SD-06 Test Reports Field Tests Performance test reports, in booklet form, showing all field tests performed to adjust each component; and all field tests performed to prove compliance with the specified performance criteria, upon completion and testing of the installed system. Indicate in each test report the final position of control valves. SD-07 Certificates Sprinkler System The material supplier's or equipment manufacturer's statement that the supplied material or equipment meets specified requirements. Each certificate shall be signed by an official authorized to certify in behalf of material supplier or product manufacturer and shall identify quantity and date or dates of shipment or delivery to which the certificates apply. SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Sprinkler System Six copies of operation and six copies of maintenance manuals for the equipment furnished. One complete set prior to field testing and the remainder upon acceptance. Manuals shall be approved prior to the field training course. Operating manuals shall detail the step-by-step procedures required for system startup, operation, and shutdown. Operating manuals shall include the manufacturer's name, model number, parts list, and brief description of all equipment and their basic operating features. Maintenance manuals shall list routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and troubleshooting guides. Maintenance manuals shall include piping and equipment layout, simplified wiring and control diagrams of the system as installed, and system programming schedule. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Protect all equipment delivered and placed in storage from the weather, excessive humidity, and temperature variation; direct sunlight (in the case of plastic or rubber materials); and dirt, dust, or other contaminants. 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
Submit spare parts data for each different item of material and equipment specified, after approval of the related submittals and not later than the start of the field tests. Include with the data a complete list of parts SECTION 32 84 23 Page 4
W912HN-12-R-0003
and supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply. PART 2 2.1 2.1.1 PRODUCTS MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Standard Products
Provide materials and equipment which are the standard products of a manufacturer who has produced similar systems that have performed well for a minimum period of 2 years prior to bid opening. Equipment shall be supported by a service organization that is, in the opinion of the Contracting Officer, reasonably convenient to the site. 2.1.2 Nameplates
Each item of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address, type or style, model or serial number, and catalog number on a plate secured to the item of equipment. 2.1.3 Additional Stock
Provide the following extra stock: Two sprinkler heads of each size and type, two valve keys for operating manual valves, two wrenches for removing and installing each type of head, two quick coupler keys and hose swivels, and four irrigation controller housing keys. 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 PIPING MATERIALS Omitted Omitted Galvanized Steel Pipe and Associated Fittings
Pipe shall conform to requirements of ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40. Fittings shall be Class 150 conforming to requirements of ASME B16.3. 2.2.4 2.2.4.1 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, Fittings and Solvent Cement PVC Pipe
Pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D 1785, PVC 1120 Schedule 40; or ASTM D 2241, PVC 1120 SDR 21, Class 200. Refer to plans and details for more specifics on which pipe type to use in specific settings. 2.2.4.2 PVC Fittings
Solvent welded socket type fittings shall conform to requirements of ASTM D 2466, Schedule 40. Threaded type fittings shall conform to requirements of ASTM D 2464, Schedule 80. 2.2.4.3 Solvent Cement and Primer
Solvent cement and primer shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D 2564.
SECTION 32 84 23
Page 5
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.2.5 2.2.6
Omitted Dielectric Fittings
Dielectric fittings shall conform to ASTM F 441/F 441M, Schedule 80, CPVC threaded pipe nipples, 4 inch minimum length. 2.2.7 Emitter Hose and Distribution Tubing
Emitter hose and distribution tubing shall conform to ASTM D 2287, maximum inside diameter of 1/2 inch, minimum wall thickness of 90 mils, vinyl plastic extruded from non-rigid chloride, integrally algae-resistant, homogeneous throughout, smooth inside and outside, free from foreign materials, cracks, serrations, blisters and other effects. Slip fittings shall be provided. Refer to plans for more specifics on drip tubing type, emitter spacing and emitter flow. 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.1.1 SPRINKLER AND EMITTER HEADS Pop-Up Spray Heads General Requirements
Pop-up spray heads lay flush with housing, then pop up when water pressure 20 psi is activated in system, although heads will operate at 30 psi for optimal performance. The rising member supporting the nozzle shall be identical on full, half, third or quarter pattern sprinklers so that nozzles will be interchangeable. The sprinkler head shall be designed to be adjustable for coverage and flow. The nozzle shall be removable so head does not have to be removed for flushing or cleaning. Nozzle rises a minimum of 4 inches above the body. The body shall be constructed with a 1/2 inch female thread for installation in a fixed underground pipe system. 2.3.1.2 Shrubbery Sprinkler Heads
Sprinkler heads shall be conical spray with adjustable or non-adjustable coverage and designed for permanent above ground mounting on riser or pop-ups at a height compatible with ground covers, where deemed necessary (in coordination with Owner's Representative). Provide brass nozzles. 2.3.2 Rotary Pop-Up Sprinklers
Sprinklers shall be capable of covering 20-30 feet diameter at 40 psi with a distribution rate of up to 4.0 gpm, 6 inch pop-up. Construction shall be high impact molded plastic with filter screen, reducible watering radius, and choice of 6 nozzles and have adjustable radius capabilities. 2.3.3 Bubbler Sprinkler Heads
Heads shall be multiple-spray bubbler with adjustable flow and designed for permanent aboveground mounting on risers. 2.3.4 Surface Connected Lawn Sprinkler Heads
Heads shall be an impulse type with or without sled, ring, or wheel base; multiple T Type; a rotary type with sled, spike or wheel base; or oscillating type with wheel or sled base.
SECTION 32 84 23
Page 6
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.3.5
Emitter Heads
Emitter heads shall be self-cleaning, pressure compensating inline tubing type. Refer to more specifics on plans/details related to emitter performance and type. 2.4 2.4.1 VALVES Gate Valves, Less than 3 Inches
Gate valves shall be Schedule 80 PVC Ball Valve type. 2.4.2 Gate Valves, 3 Inches and Larger
Gate valves shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C509 and have encapsulated resilient wedge, parallel seats, non-rising stems, and open by counterclockwise turning. End connections shall be flanged. Interior construction of valves shall be bronze including stem containing a maximum 2 percent aluminum and maximum 16 percent zinc. 2.4.3 Angle Valves, Less Than 2-1/2 Inches
Angle valves shall conform to the requirements of MSS SP-80, Type 3, Class 150 threaded or soldered ends. 2.4.4 Angle Valves, 2-1/2 Inches and Larger
Angle valves shall conform to the requirements of MSS SP-85, Type II, Class 250 threaded or flanged ends. 2.4.5 Quick Coupling Valves
Quick coupling valves shall have brass parts and shall be two-piece unit consisting of a coupler water seal valve assembly and a removable upper body to allow spring and key track to be serviced without shutdown of main. Lids shall be lockable vinyl with spring for positive closure on key removal. 2.4.6 Remote Control Valves, Electrical
Remote control valves shall be solenoid actuated globe valves of 3/4 to 3 inch size, suitable for 24 volts, 60 cycle, and designed to provide for shut-off in event of power failure. Valve shall be cast bronze or brass or plastic housing suitable for service at 150 psi operating pressure with external flow control adjustment for shut-off capability, external plug at diaphragm chamber to enable manual operation, filter in control chamber to prevent valve body clogging with debris, durable diaphragm, and accessibility to internal parts without removing valve from system. 2.4.7 Drain Valves Refer to plans/details for
Drain Valves to be Schedule 80 PVC Ball Valves. more specifics on installation. 2.4.8 2.4.9 Omitted Backflow Preventers
Reduced pressure principle assemblies, double check valve assemblies, SECTION 32 84 23 Page 7
W912HN-12-R-0003
atmospheric (non-pressure) type vacuum breakers, and pressure type vacuum breakers shall be tested, approved, and listed in accordance with FCCCHR Manual. Backflow preventers with intermediate atmospheric vent shall be in accordance with ASSE 1012. Reduced pressure principle backflow preventers shall be in accordance with ASSE 1013. 2.4.9.1 2.4.9.2 Omitted Reduced Pressure Type Backflow Preventers
Backflow preventers shall be 200 pound flanged cast iron mounted gate valve and strainer, 304 stainless steel or bronze, internal parts. Total pressure drop through complete assembly shall be a maximum of 10 psi at rated flow. Piping shall be galvanized steel pipe and fittings. Strainers shall be bronze or brass construction with gasket caps. Units shall have 200-mesh stainless steel screen elements. 2.5 2.5.1 ACCESSORIES AND APPURTENANCES Valve Keys for Manually Operated Valves
Valve keys shall be 1/2 inch diameter by 3 feet long, tee handles and keyed to fit valves. 2.5.2 2.5.2.1 Valve Boxes and Concrete Pads Valve Vaults
Valve boxes shall be cast iron, plastic lockable, or precast concrete for each gate valve, manual control valve and remote control valve. Vault sizes shall be adjustable for valve used. Cast the word "IRRIGATION" on the cover. Shaft diameter of vault shall be minimum 5-1/4 inches. Cast iron vault shall have bituminous coating. 2.5.2.2 Concrete Pads
Concrete pads shall be precast or cast-in-place reinforced concrete construction for reduced pressure type backflow preventers. 2.5.3 Pressure Gauges
Pressure gauges shall conform to requirements of ASME B40.100, single style pressure gauge for water with 4-1/2 inch dial brass or aluminum case, bronze tube, gauge cock, pressure snubber, and siphon. Scale range shall be suitable for irrigation sprinkler systems. 2.5.4 Service Clamps
Service clamps shall be bronze flat, double strap, with neoprene gasket or "O"-ring seal. 2.5.5 Water Hammer Arresters
Water hammer arrester shall conform to the requirements of PDI WH 201; stainless steel construction with an encased and sealed bellows compression chamber.
SECTION 32 84 23
Page 8
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.5.6 2.5.6.1
Emitter Head Accessories Strainer Refer to
Strainer shall be provided at inlet to each drip line. plans/details for more specifics. 2.5.6.2 Pressure Regulator
Pressure regulator shall be provided at each drip control valve. plans/details for more specifics. 2.5.6.3 Riser Adapters
Refer to
Riser adapters shall be provided with a rigid piping system. 2.5.6.4 Tubing Stakes
Tubing stakes shall be plastic coated steel, or other non-corrosive strong material to secure tubing. 2.5.6.5 Emitter Outlet Check Valve (Bug Cap)
Check valves shall be provided at end of each emitter outlet distribution line. Valves shall permit free flow of water with minimum restriction; prevent back siphoning, entry of insects, and contamination into outlet ports. 2.5.6.6 Access Sleeve
Access sleeve shall be provided at buried emitters placed in covered boxes. Lids of access sleeve shall be secured with removable lugs. Drip hose in both vertical and horizontal axis shall be secured. 2.5.6.7 Closure Caps
Closure caps shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2.6 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLERS, ELECTRICAL
Controller shall conform to the requirements of NEMA ICS 2 with 120-volt single phase service, operating with indicated stations, and grounded chassis. Enclosure shall conform to NEMA ICS 6 Type 3R, with locking hinged cover, wall-mounted. Controller shall be programmed for various schedules by setting switches and dials equipped with the following features: A switch for each day of week for at least three schedules, allowing each station to be scheduled individually as to days of watering; a minute switch for each station with a positive increment range of 3 to 60 minutes, set time within one percent; a switch allowing selected schedules to be repeated after each completion of initial watering schedule and allowing each operation to be scheduled throughout a 24-hour day; a circuit breaker for surge protection; and circuit for a 9-volt rechargeable NiCad battery. 2.7 ELECTRICAL WORK
Wiring and rigid conduit for electrical power shall be in accordance with NFPA 70, and Section 33 70 02.00 10 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, UNDERGROUND. SECTION 32 84 23 Page 9
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.8
CONCRETE MATERIALS
Concrete shall have a compressive strength of 2500 psi at 28 days or as specified on the plans, whichever is more stringent. 2.9 WATER SUPPLY MAIN MATERIALS
Tapping sleeves, service cut off valves, and connections to water supply mains shall be in accordance with Section 33 11 00 WATER DISTRIBUTION. 2.10 INSULATING JOINTS
Insulating joints and dielectric fittings shall be in accordance with Section 33 11 00 WATER DISTRIBUTION. PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION EXAMINATION
After becoming familiar with all details of the work verify all dimensions in the field and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing the work. 3.2 INSTALLATION
Install Sprinkler System after site grading has been completed. Perform excavation, trenching, and backfilling for sprinkler system in accordance with the applicable provisions of Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK, except as modified herein. 3.2.1 Trenching
Hand excavate trench around roots to pipe grade when roots of 2 inches diameter or greater are encountered. Trench width shall be 4 inches minimum or 1.5 times diameter of pipe, whichever is wider. Backfill shall be hand tamped over excavation. When rock is encountered, trench shall be excavated 4 inchesdeeper and backfilled with silty sand (SM) or well-graded sand (SW) to pipe grade. Trenches shall be kept free of obstructions and debris that would damage pipe. Subsoil shall not be mixed with topsoil. Existing concrete walks, drives and other obstacles shall be bored at a depth conforming to bottom of adjacent trenches. Pipe sleeves for bored pipe shall be two pipe diameters larger than sprinkler pipe. 3.2.2 3.2.2.1 Piping System Cover
Underground piping shall be installed to meet the minimum depth of backfill cover specified. 3.2.2.2 Clearances
Minimum horizontal clearances between lines shall be 4 inches for pipe 2 inches and less; 12 inches for 2-1/2 inches and larger. Minimum vertical clearances between lines shall be 1 inch.
SECTION 32 84 23
Page 10
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.2.2.3
Minimum Slope
Minimum slope shall be 6 inches per 100 feet in direction of drain valves. 3.2.3 3.2.3.1 Piping Installation Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe
a. Solvent-cemented joints shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D 2855. b. Threaded joints shall be full cut with a maximum of three threads remaining exposed on pipe and nipples. Threaded joints shall be made tight without recourse to wicks or fillers, other than polytetrafluoroethylene thread tape. c. Piping shall be joined to conform with requirements of ASTM D 2774 or ASTM D 2855, and pipe manufacturer's instructions. Pipe shall be installed in a serpentine (snaked) manner to allow for expansion and contraction in trench before backfilling. Pipes shall be installed at temperatures over 40 degrees F. 3.2.3.2 3.2.3.3 Omitted Threaded Brass or Galvanized Steel Pipe
Prior to installation, pipe shall be reamed. Threads shall be cut in conformance with ASME B1.2. Pipe joint compound shall be applied to male end only. 3.2.3.4 Insulating Joints
Insulating and dielectric fittings shall be provided where pipes of dissimilar metal are joined and at connections to water supply mains as shown. Installation shall be in accordance with Section 33 11 00 WATER DISTRIBUTION. 3.2.3.5 Grooved Mechanical Joints
Grooves shall be prepared according to the coupling manufacturer's instructions. Grooved fittings, couplings, and grooving tools shall be products of the same manufacturer. Pipe and groove dimensions shall comply with the tolerances specified by the coupling manufacturer. The diameter of grooves made in the field shall be measured using a "go/no-go" gauge, vernier or dial caliper, narrow-land micrometer, or other method specifically approved by the coupling manufacturer for the intended application. Grove width and dimension of groove from end of pipe shall be measured and recorded for each change in grooving tool setup to verify compliance with the coupling manufacturer's tolerances. Grooved joints shall not be used in concealed locations. 3.2.4 3.2.4.1 Installation of Valves Manual Valves
Valves shall be installed in a valve box extending from grade to below valve body, with a minimum of 4 inches cover measured from finish grade to top of valve stem.
SECTION 32 84 23
Page 11
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.2.4.2
Automatic Valves
Valve shall be set plumb in a valve box extending from grade to below valve body, with minimum of 4 inch cover measured from grade to top of valve. Automatic valves shall be installed beside sprinkler heads with a valve box. 3.2.4.3 Drain Valves
Entire system shall be manually or automatically drainable. Low points of system shall be equipped with drain valve draining into an excavation containing 1 cubic foot gravel. Gravel shall be covered with building paper then backfilled with excavated material and 6 inches of topsoil. 3.2.5 Sprinklers and Quick Coupling Valves
Sprinklers and valves shall be installed plumb and level with terrain. 3.2.6 3.2.6.1 Installation of Drip Irrigation System Emitter Hose
Emitter laterals shall be buried 12 inches deep. Connections shall be solvent welded in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation to standard weight Schedule 40 PVC fittings and bushings. Hose shall be installed in a serpentine manner. When cutting hose, shearing tool such as a pipe cutter, knife, or shears shall be used. Manufacturer's recommended tool and procedures when punching hose for emitters shall be followed. 3.2.6.2 3.2.6.3 Omitted Tubing Stakes
Main irrigation line shall be secured with stakes where line is aboveground. Stakes shall be spaced to ensure that hose does not shift location in presence of foot traffic, operations, gravity on slope installations, or environmental effects. Discharge of the emitter distribution tubing shall be staked to ensure that discharge point of emitter will be maintained at specified position in relation to plant material to be irrigated. 3.2.7 Backflow Preventers
Backflow preventer shall be installed in new connection to existing water distribution system, between connection and control valves. Backflow preventer shall be installed with concrete pads. 3.2.7.1 3.2.7.2 Omitted Reduced Pressure Type
Pipe lines shall be flushed prior to installing reduced pressure device; device shall be protected by a strainer located upstream. Device shall not be installed in pits or where any part of device could become submerged in standing water.
SECTION 32 84 23
Page 12
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.2.8 3.2.8.1
Control Wire and Conduit Wires
Low voltage wires may be buried beside pipe in same trench. Rigid conduit shall be provided where wires run under paving. Wires shall be number tagged at key locations along main to facilitate service. One control circuit shall be provided for each zone and a circuit to control sprinkler system. 3.2.8.2 Loops
A 12 inch loop of wire shall be provided at each valve where controls are connected. 3.2.8.3 Expansion and Contraction
Multiple tubes or wires shall be bundled and taped together at 10 foot intervals with 12 inch loop for expansion and contraction. 3.2.8.4 Splices
Electrical splices shall be waterproof, refer to plans/details for more specifics. 3.2.9 Automatic Controller
Exact field location of controllers shall be determined before installation. Coordinate the electrical service to these locations. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and NFPA 70. 3.2.10 Thrust Blocks
Concrete shall be placed so that sides subject to thrust or load are against undisturbed earth, and valves and fittings are serviceable after concrete has set. Thrust blocks shall be as specified in Section 33 11 00 WATER DISTRIBUTION. 3.2.11 3.2.11.1 Backfill Minimum Cover
Depth of cover shall be a minimum of 18 inches for mainline pipe; 12 inches for lateral line piping; 24 inches for pipes under traffic loads, farm operations, and freezing temperatures; and 12-18 inches for low-voltage wires, depending on other pipe in trench. Remainder of trench or pipe cover shall be filled to within 3 inchesof top with excavated soil, and compact soil with plate hand-held compactors to same density as undisturbed adjacent soil. 3.2.11.2 Restoration
Top 3 inches shall be filled with topsoil and compacted with same density as surrounding soil. Lawns and plants shall be restored in accordance with 32 92 23 SODDING and Section 32 93 00 EXTERIOR PLANTS. 3.2.12 Adjustment
After grading, seeding, and rolling of planted areas, sprinkler heads shall SECTION 32 84 23 Page 13
W912HN-12-R-0003
be adjusted flush with finished grade. Adjustments shall be made by providing new nipples of proper length or by use of heads having an approved device, integral with head, which will permit adjustment in height of head without changing piping. 3.2.13 Disinfection
Sprinkler system fed from a potable water system shall be disinfected upstream of backflow preventer in accordance with Section 33 11 00 WATER DISTRIBUTION. 3.2.14 Cleaning of Piping
Prior to the hydrostatic and operation tests, the interior of the pipe shall be flushed with clean water until pipe is free of all foreign materials. Flushing and cleaning out of system pipe, valves, and components shall not be considered completed until witnessed and accepted by Contracting Officer. 3.3 FRAMED INSTRUCTIONS
Post framed instructions, containing wiring and control diagrams under glass or in laminated plastic, where directed. Condensed operating instructions, prepared in typed form, shall be framed as specified above and posted beside the diagrams. Post the framed instructions before acceptance testing of the system. After as-built drawings are approved by Contracting Officer, prepare controller charts and programming schedule. One chart for each controller shall be supplied. Chart shall be a reduced drawing of actual as-built system that will fit the maximum dimensions inside controller housing. Black line print for chart and a different pastel or transparent color shall indicate each station area of coverage. After chart is completed and approved for final acceptance, chart shall be sealed between two 20 mil pieces of clear plastic. 3.4 FIELD TRAINING
Provide a field training course for designated operating and maintenance staff members for a total period of 8 hours of normal working time and starting after the system is functionally complete but prior to final acceptance tests. Field training shall cover all of the items contained in the operating and maintenance manuals. 3.5 FIELD TESTS
Provide all instruments, equipment, facilities, and labor required to conduct the tests. 3.5.1 Hydrostatic Pressure Test
Piping shall be tested hydrostatically before backfilling and proved tight at a hydrostatic pressure of 150 psi without pumping for a period of one hour with an allowable pressure drop of 5 psi. If hydrostatic pressure cannot be held for a minimum of 4 hours, make adjustments or replacements and repeat the tests until satisfactory results are achieved and accepted by the Contracting Officer. 3.5.2 Leakage Tests
Leakage tests for service main shall be in accordance with Section 33 11 00 SECTION 32 84 23 Page 14
W912HN-12-R-0003
WATER DISTRIBUTION. 3.5.3 Operation Test
At conclusion of pressure test, sprinkler heads or emitter heads, quick coupling assemblies, and hose valves shall be installed and entire system tested for operation under normal operating pressure. Operation test consists of the system operating through at least one complete programmed cycle for all areas to be sprinkled. 3.6 CLEANUP a. During irrigation work, Contractor shall keep project site clean and orderly. b. Upon completion of installation of system, all debris and surplus materials resulting from the work shall be removed. Clear grounds of debris, superfluous materials and all equipment. Remove from site to satisfaction of the Owner's Representative. 3.7 WINTERIZING THE SYSTEM
It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to winterize the irrigation system the first winter following Substantial Completion of the Project. 3.8 INSPECTION a. Periodic Inspections will be made by the Owner's Representative to review the quality and progress of the work. Work found to be unacceptable must be corrected within a timely mater (to be determined by Owner's Representative). Remove rejected materials promptly from the project site. b. It will be the responsibility of the Irrigation Contractor to provide a reliable communication system (i.e. Two way radios or remote radio control activation system) for Substantial Completion and all periodic inspections. 3.9 CODES AND ORDINANCES
All materials, installation parameters, and operations shall conform to all applicable codes and ordinances. It is the Contractor's responsibility to investigate and follow all regulations. Contractor is responsible to verify applicable codes and ordinances prior to submitting bid. Before bid submittal, it is the Contractor's responsibility to notify the Irrigation Consultant/Designer at least 5 days before bid submittal, of any changes due to code or ordinance discrepancies. If the Contractor does not comply with this process and notification, the Contractor shall be responsible for the necessary installation change and redesign costs for non-compliance. 3.10 PERMITS AND FEES
The Contractor shall obtain, at his expense, all required permits and shall pay all required fees. Any penalties imposed due to failure to obtain any permit or pay any fee shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
SECTION 32 84 23
Page 15
W912HN-12-R-0003
SECTION 32 84 23
Page 16
W912HN-12-R-0003
SECTION 32 92 19 SEEDING 10/06 PART 1 1.1 GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM C 602 ASTM D 4427 ASTM D 4972 (2007) Agricultural Liming Materials (2007) Peat Samples by Laboratory Testing (2001; R 2007) pH of Soils
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE (USDA) AMS Seed Act DOA SSIR 42 (1940; R 1988; R 1998) Federal Seed Act (1996) Soil Survey Investigation Report No. 42, Soil Survey Laboratory Methods Manual, Version 3.0
1.2 1.2.1
DEFINITIONS Stand of Turf
95 percent ground cover of the established species. 1.3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
Section 32 93 00 EXTERIOR PLANTS, and Section 32 05 33 LANDSCAPE ESTABLISHMENT applies to this section for pesticide use and plant establishment requirements, with additions and modifications herein. 1.4 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-03 Product Data Wood cellulose fiber mulch Fertilizer Include physical characteristics, and recommendations. SD-06 Test Reports SECTION 32 92 19 Page 1
W912HN-12-R-0003
Topsoil composition tests (reports and recommendations). SD-07 Certificates State certification and approval for seed SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions Erosion Control Materials 1.5 1.5.1 1.5.1.1 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Delivery Seed Protection
Protect from drying out and from contamination during delivery, on-site storage, and handling. 1.5.1.2 Fertilizer Delivery
Deliver to the site in original, unopened containers bearing manufacturer's chemical analysis, name, trade name, trademark, and indication of conformance to state and federal laws. Instead of containers, fertilizer may be furnished in bulk with certificate indicating the above information. 1.5.2 1.5.2.1 Storage Seed, Fertilizer Storage
Store in cool, dry locations away from contaminants. 1.5.2.2 Topsoil
Prior to stockpiling topsoil, treat growing vegetation with application of appropriate specified non-selective herbicide. Clear and grub existing vegetation three to four weeks prior to stockpiling topsoil. 1.5.2.3 Handling
Do not drop or dump materials from vehicles. 1.6 1.6.1 TIME RESTRICTIONS AND PLANTING CONDITIONS Restrictions
Do not plant when the ground is frozen, snow covered, muddy, or when air temperature exceeds90 degrees Fahrenheit. 1.7 1.7.1 TIME LIMITATIONS Seed
Apply seed within twenty four hours after seed bed preparation.
SECTION 32 92 19
Page 2
W912HN-12-R-0003
PART 2 2.1 2.1.1
PRODUCTS SEED Classification
Provide State-approved seed of the latest season's crop delivered in original sealed packages, bearing producer's guaranteed analysis for percentages of mixtures, purity, germination, weedseed content, and inert material. Label in conformance with AMS Seed Act and applicable state seed laws. Wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged seed will be rejected. Field mixes will be acceptable when field mix is performed on site in the presence of the Contracting Officer. 2.1.2 Planting Dates Planting Season Season 1 Planting Dates Feb - Aug
2.1.3
Temporary Seeding Seed Purity Common Name --
Year Round Min. Percent Pure Seed 90 Min. Percent Germination and Hard Seed 70 Max. Percent Weed Seed 2
Botanical Name all 2.1.4
Seed Mixture by Weight Planting Season Season 1 Variety all Percent (by Weight) 48
Temporary Seeding
all
16
Proportion seed mixtures by weight. Temporary seeding must later be replaced by Season 1 plantings for a permanent stand of grass. The same requirements of turf establishment for Season 1 apply for temporary seeding. 2.2 2.2.1 TOPSOIL On-Site Topsoil
Surface soil stripped and stockpiled on site and modified as necessary to meet the requirements specified for topsoil in paragraph entitled "Composition." When available topsoil shall be existing surface soil stripped and stockpiled on-site in accordance with Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK. 2.2.2 Off-Site Topsoil
Conform to requirements specified in paragraph entitled "Composition." Additional topsoil shall be furnished by the Contractor
SECTION 32 92 19
Page 3
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.2.3
Composition
Containing from 5 to 10 percent organic matter as determined by the topsoil composition tests of the Organic Carbon, 6A, Chemical Analysis Method described in DOA SSIR 42. Maximum particle size, 3/4 inch, with maximum 3 percent retained on 1/4 inch screen. The pH shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D 4972. Topsoil shall be free of sticks, stones, roots, and other debris and objectionable materials. Other components shall conform to the following limits: Silt Clay Sand pH Soluble Salts 2.3 SOIL CONDITIONERS 25-50 percent 10-30 percent 20-35 percent 5.5 to 7.0 600 ppm maximum
Add conditioners to topsoil as required to bring into compliance with "composition" standard for topsoil as specified herein. 2.3.1 Lime
Commercial grade hydrate limestone containing a calcium carbonate equivalent (C.C.E.) as specified in ASTM C 602 of not less than 90 percent. 2.3.2 Aluminum Sulfate
Commercial grade. 2.3.3 Sulfur
100 percent elemental 2.3.4 Iron
100 percent elemental 2.3.5 Peat
Natural product of peat moss derived from a freshwater site and conforming to ASTM D 4427. Shred and granulate peat to pass a 1/2 inch mesh screen and condition in storage pile for minimum 6 months after excavation. 2.3.6 Sand
Clean and free of materials harmful to plants. 2.3.7 Perlite
Horticultural grade. 2.3.8 Composted Derivatives
Ground bark, nitrolized sawdust, humus or other green wood waste material free of stones, sticks, and soil stabilized with nitrogen and having the following properties:
SECTION 32 92 19
Page 4
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.3.8.1
Particle Size
Minimum percent by weight passing: No. 4 mesh screen No. 8 mesh screen 2.3.8.2 Nitrogen Content 95 80
Minimum percent based on dry weight: Fir Sawdust Fir or Pine Bark 2.3.9 Gypsum 0.7 1.0
Coarsely ground gypsum comprised of calcium sulfate dihydrate 61 percent, calcium 22 percent, sulfur 17 percent; minimum 96 percent passing through 20 mesh screen, 100 percent passing thru 16 mesh screen. 2.3.10 Calcined Clay
Calcined clay shall be granular particles produced from montmorillonite clay calcined to a minimum temperature of 1200 degrees F. Gradation: A minimum 90 percent shall pass a No. 8 sieve; a minimum 99 percent shall be retained on a No. 60 sieve; and a maximum 2 percent shall pass a No. 100 sieve. Bulk density: A maximum 40 pounds per cubic foot. 2.4 2.4.1 FERTILIZER Granular Fertilizer
Organic, granular controlled release fertilizer containing the following minimum percentages, by weight, of plant food nutrients: 10 percent available nitrogen 10 percent available phosphorus 10 percent available potassium percent sulfur
2.4.2
Hydroseeding Fertilizer
Controlled release fertilizer, to use with hydroseeding and composed of pills coated with plastic resin to provide a continuous release of nutrients for at least 6 months and containing the following minimum percentages, by weight, of plant food nutrients. 10 percent available nitrogen 10 percent available phosphorus 10 percent available potassium
2.5
MULCH
Mulch shall be free from noxious weeds, mold, and other deleterious materials.
SECTION 32 92 19
Page 5
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.5.1
Straw
Stalks from oats, wheat, rye, barley, or rice. Furnish in air-dry condition and of proper consistency for placing with commercial mulch blowing equipment. Straw shall contain no fertile seed. 2.5.2 Hay
Air-dry condition and of proper consistency for placing with commercial mulch blowing equipment. Hay shall be sterile, containing no fertile seed. 2.5.3 Wood Cellulose Fiber Mulch
Use recovered materials of either paper-based (100 percent) or wood-based (100 percent) hydraulic mulch. Processed to contain no growth or germination-inhibiting factors and dyed an appropriate color to facilitate visual metering of materials application. Composition on air-dry weight basis: 9 to 15 percent moisture, pH range from 5.5 to 8.2. Use with hydraulic application of grass seed and fertilizer. 2.6 WATER
Source of water shall be approved by Contracting Officer and of suitable quality for irrigation, containing no elements toxic to plant life. 2.7 EROSION CONTROL MATERIALS
Erosion control material shall conform to the following: 2.7.1 Erosion Control Blanket
100 percent agricultural straw stitched with a degradable nettings, designed to degrade within 12 months. 2.7.2 Erosion Control Fabric
Fabric shall be knitted construction of polypropylene yarn with uniform mesh openings 3/4 to 1 inch square with strips of biodegradable paper. Filler paper strips shall have a minimum life of 6 months. 2.7.3 Erosion Control Material Anchors
Erosion control anchors shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. PART 3 3.1 3.1.1 EXECUTION PREPARATION EXTENT OF WORK
Provide soil preparation (including soil conditioners as required), fertilizing, seeding, and surface topdressing of all newly graded finished earth surfaces, unless indicated otherwise, and at all areas inside or outside the limits of construction that are disturbed by the Contractor's operations. 3.1.1.1 Topsoil
Provide 4 inches of on-site topsoil to meet indicated finish grade. After SECTION 32 92 19 Page 6
W912HN-12-R-0003
areas have been brought to indicated finish grade, incorporate fertilizer into soil a minimum depth of 4 inches by disking, harrowing, tilling or other method approved by the Contracting Officer. Remove debris and stones larger than3/4 inch in any dimension remaining on the surface after finish grading. Correct irregularities in finish surfaces to eliminate depressions. Protect finished topsoil areas from damage by vehicular or pedestrian traffic. 3.1.1.2 Soil Conditioner Application Rates
Apply soil conditioners at rates as determined by laboratory soil analysis of the soils at the job site. For bidding purposes only apply at rates for the following:
3.1.1.3
Fertilizer Application Rates
Apply fertilizer at rates as determined by laboratory soil analysis of the soils at the job site. For bidding purposes only apply at rates for the following:
3.2 3.2.1
SEEDING Seed Application Seasons and Conditions
Immediately before seeding, restore soil to proper grade. Do not seed when ground is muddy frozen or in an unsatisfactory condition for seeding. If special conditions exist that may warrant a variance in the above seeding dates or conditions, submit a written request to the Contracting Officer stating the special conditions and proposed variance. Apply seed within twenty four hours after seedbed preparation. Sow seed by approved sowing equipment. Sow one-half the seed in one direction, and sow remainder at right angles to the first sowing. 3.2.2 Seed Application Method
Seeding method shall be hydroseeding.
3.2.2.1
Hydroseeding
First, mix water and fiber. Wood cellulose fiber, paper fiber, or recycled paper shall be applied as part of the hydroseeding operation. Fiber shall be added at 1,000 pounds, dry weight, per acre. Then add and mix seed and fertilizer to produce a homogeneous slurry. Seed shall be mixed to ensure broadcasting at the rate of 26 pounds per 1000 square feet. When hydraulically sprayed on the ground, material shall form a blotter like cover impregnated uniformly with grass seed. Spread with one application with no second application of mulch. 3.2.3 3.2.3.1 Mulching Hay or Straw Mulch
Hay or straw mulch shall be spread uniformly at the rate of 2 tons per acre. Mulch shall be spread by hand, blower-type mulch spreader, or other SECTION 32 92 19 Page 7
W912HN-12-R-0003
approved method. Mulching shall be started on the windward side of relatively flat areas or on the upper part of steep slopes, and continued uniformly until the area is covered. The mulch shall not be bunched or clumped. Sunlight shall not be completely excluded from penetrating to the ground surface. All areas installed with seed shall be mulched on the same day as the seeding. Mulch shall be anchored immediately following spreading.
3.2.4
Erosion Control Material
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, where indicated or as directed by the Contracting Officer. 3.2.5 Watering
Start watering areas seeded as required by temperature and wind conditions. Apply water at a rate sufficient to insure thorough wetting of soil to a depth of 2 inches without run off. During the germination process, seed is to be kept actively growing and not allowed to dry out. 3.3 PROTECTION OF TURF AREAS
Immediately after turfing, protect area against traffic and other use. 3.4 3.4.1 RENOVATION OF EXISTING TURF AREA Aeration
Upon completion of weed eradication operations and Contracting Officer's approval to proceed, aerate turf areas indicated , by approved device. Keep clean at all times at least one paved pedestrian access route and one paved vehicular access route to each building. Clean all soil plugs off of other paving when work is complete. 3.4.2 Vertical Mowing
Upon completion of aerating operation and Contracting Officer's approval to proceed, vertical mow turf areas indicated, by approved device, to a depth of 1/4 inch above existing soil level, to reduce thatch build-up, grain, and surface compaction. Keep clean at all times at least one paved pedestrian access route and one paved vehicular access route to each building. Clean other paving when work is complete. Remove all debris generated during this operation off site. 3.4.3 Dethatching
Upon completion of aerating operation and Contracting Officer's approval to proceed, dethatch turf areas indicated, by approved device, to a depth of 1/4 inch below existing soil level, to reduce thatch build-up, grain, and surface compaction. Keep clean at all times at least one paved pedestrian access route and one paved vehicular access route to each building. Clean other paving when work is complete. Remove all debris generated during this operation off site. 3.4.4 Overseeding
Apply seed in accordance with applicable portions of paragraph entitled "Seed Application Method" at rates in accordance with paragraph entitled SECTION 32 92 19 Page 8
W912HN-12-R-0003
"Seed Composition." 3.5 RESTORATION damaged Keep one paved work in
Restore to original condition existing turf areas which have been during turf installation operations at the Contractor's expense. clean at all times at least one paved pedestrian access route and vehicular access route to each building. Clean other paving when adjacent areas is complete. -- End of Section --
SECTION 32 92 19
Page 9
W912HN-12-R-0003
SECTION 32 92 23 SODDING 04/06 PART 1 1.1 GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM C 602 ASTM D 4427 ASTM D 4972 (2007) Agricultural Liming Materials (2007) Peat Samples by Laboratory Testing (2001; R 2007) pH of Soils
TURFGRASS PRODUCERS INTERNATIONAL (TPI) TPI GSS (1995) Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE (USDA) DOA SSIR 42 (1996) Soil Survey Investigation Report No. 42, Soil Survey Laboratory Methods Manual, Version 3.0
1.2 1.2.1
DEFINITIONS Stand of Turf
100 percent ground cover of the established species. 1.3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK, Section 32 84 23 UNDERGROUND SPRINKLER SYSTEMS, Section 32 93 00 EXTERIOR PLANTS, and Section 32 05 33 LANDSCAPE ESTABLISHMENT applies to this section for pesticide use and plant establishment requirements, with additions and modifications herein. 1.4 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-03 Product Data Fertilizer Include physical characteristics, and recommendations. SECTION 32 92 23 Page 1
W912HN-12-R-0003
SD-06 Test Reports Topsoil composition tests (reports and recommendations). SD-07 Certificates Sod farm certification for sods. accordance with TPI GSS. 1.5 1.5.1 1.5.1.1 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Delivery Sod Protection Indicate type of sod in
Protect from drying out and from contamination during delivery, on-site storage, and handling. 1.5.1.2 Fertilizer, Gypsum and Lime Delivery
Deliver to the site in original, unopened containers bearing manufacturer's chemical analysis, name, trade name, trademark, and indication of conformance to state and federal laws. Instead of containers, fertilizer, gypsum, and lime may be furnished in bulk with certificate indicating the above information. 1.5.2 1.5.2.1 Storage Sod Storage
Lightly sprinkle with water, cover with moist burlap, straw, or other approved covering; and protect from exposure to wind and direct sunlight until planted. Provide covering that will allow air to circulate so that internal heat will not develop. Do not store sod longer than 24 hours. Do not store directly on concrete or bituminous surfaces. 1.5.2.2 Topsoil
Prior to stockpiling topsoil, treat growing vegetation with application of appropriate specified non-selective herbicide. Clear and grub existing vegetation three to four weeks prior to stockpiling topsoil. 1.5.2.3 Handling
Do not drop or dump materials from vehicles. 1.6 1.6.1 TIME RESTRICTIONS AND PLANTING CONDITIONS Restrictions
Do not plant when the ground is frozen, snow covered, muddy, or when air temperature exceeds 90 degrees Fahrenheit. 1.7 1.7.1 TIME LIMITATIONS Sod
Place sod a maximum of thirty six hours after initial harvesting, in SECTION 32 92 23 Page 2
W912HN-12-R-0003
accordance with TPI GSS as modified herein. PART 2 2.1 2.1.1 PRODUCTS SODS Classification
Nursery grown, certified as classified in the TPI GSS. Machine cut sod at a uniform thickness of 3/4 inch within a tolerance of 1/4 inch, excluding top growth and thatch. Each individual sod piece shall be strong enough to support its own weight when lifted by the ends. Broken pads, irregularly shaped pieces, and torn or uneven ends will be rejected. 2.1.2 Purity
Sod species shall be genetically pure, free of weeds, pests, and disease. 2.1.3 Planting Dates Follow
Lay sod when weather permits and when irrigation is available. grower's instructions for planting. 2.1.4 2.1.4.1 Composition Proportion
Proportion grass species as follows. Botanical Name Cynodon Dactylan "Tifway" Common Name Tifway Bermuda Percent: 100% where shown 100% where shown
Stenotaphrum Secundum "Mercedes" "Mercedes" St. Augustine 2.2 2.3 2.3.1 OMITTED TOPSOIL On-Site Topsoil
Conform to requirements specified in paragraph entitled "Composition." Additional topsoil shall be obtained from topsoil borrow areas as directed by contracting officer. 2.3.3 Composition
Containing from 5 to 10 percent organic matter as determined by the topsoil composition tests of the Organic Carbon, 6A, Chemical Analysis Method described in DOA SSIR 42. Maximum particle size, 3/4 inch, with maximum 3 percent retained on 1/4 inch screen. The pH shall be tested in accordance SECTION 32 92 23 Page 3
W912HN-12-R-0003
with ASTM D 4972. Topsoil shall be free of sticks, stones, roots, and other debris and objectionable materials. 2.4 SOIL CONDITIONERS Add
Soil shall be tested to identify nutrients needed for landscape use. conditioners to topsoil as required to bring into compliance with "composition" standard for topsoil. 2.4.1 Lime
Commercial grade hydrate limestone containing a calcium carbonate equivalent (C.C.E.) as specified in ASTM C 602. 2.4.2 Aluminum Sulfate
Commercial grade. 2.4.3 2.4.4 2.4.5 Omitted Omitted Peat
Natural product of peat moss derived from a freshwater site and conforming to ASTM D 4427. Shred and granulate peat to pass a 1/2 inch mesh screen and condition in storage pile for minimum 6 months after excavation. 2.4.6 Sand
Ground bark, nitrolized sawdust, humus or other green wood waste material free of stones, sticks, and soil stabilized with nitrogen and having the following properties: 2.4.8.1 Particle Size
Minimum percent based on dry weight:
Pine Bark 2.4.9 Gypsum
1.0
Coarsely ground gypsum comprised of calcium sulfate dihydrate 91 percent, calcium 22 percent, sulfur 17 percent; minimum 96 percent passing through SECTION 32 92 23 Page 4
W912HN-12-R-0003
20 mesh screen, 100 percent passing thru 16 mesh screen. 2.4.10 Calcined Clay
Calcined clay shall be granular particles produced from montmorillonite clay calcined to a minimum temperature of 1200 degrees F. Gradation: A minimum 90 percent shall pass a No. 8 sieve; a minimum 99 percent shall be retained on a No. 60 sieve; and a maximum 2 percent shall pass a No. 100 sieve. Bulk density: A maximum 40 pounds per cubic foot. 2.5 2.5.1 FERTILIZER Granular Fertilizer
Organic or synthetic, granular controlled release fertilizer containing the following minimum percentages, by weight, of plant food nutrients: 14 percent available nitrogen 14 percent available phosphorus 14 percent available potassium 2.6 WATER
Source of water shall be approved by Contracting Officer and of suitable quality for irrigation containing no element toxic to plant life. PART 3 3.1 3.1.1 EXECUTION PREPARATION EXTENT OF WORK
Provide soil preparation (including soil conditioners), fertilizing, and sodding of all newly graded finished earth surfaces, unless indicated otherwise, and at all areas inside or outside the limits of construction that are disturbed by the Contractor's operations. 3.1.2 Soil Preparation
Provide 4 inches of on-site topsoil to meet indicated finish grade. After areas have been brought to indicated finish grade, incorporate fertilizer, pH adjusters, and soil conditioners into soil a minimum depth of 4 inches by disking, harrowing, tilling or other method approved by the Contracting Officer. Remove debris and stones larger than 3/4 inch in any dimension remaining on the surface after finish grading. Correct irregularities in finish surfaces to eliminate depressions. Protect finished topsoil areas from damage by vehicular or pedestrian traffic. 3.1.2.1 Soil Conditioner Application Rates
Apply soil conditioners at rates as determined by laboratory soil analysis of the soils at the job site. 3.1.2.2 Fertilizer Application Rates
Apply fertilizer at rates as determined by laboratory soil analysis of the soils at the job site.
SECTION 32 92 23
Page 5
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.2 3.2.1
SODDING Finished Grade and Topsoil
Prior to the commencement of the sodding operation, the Contractor shall verify that finished grades are as indicated on drawings; the placing of topsoil, smooth grading, and compaction requirements have been completed in accordance with Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK. The prepared surface shall be a maximum 1 inch below the adjoining grade of any surfaced area. New surfaces shall be blended to existing areas. The prepared surface shall be completed with a light raking to remove from the surface debris and stones over a minimum 5/8 inch in any dimension. 3.2.2 Placing
Place sod a maximum of 36 hours after initial harvesting, in accordance with TPI GSS as modified herein. Stagger joints and place tightly together. 3.2.3 3.2.4 Omitted Finishing
After completing sodding, blend edges of sodded area smoothly into surrounding area. Air pockets shall be eliminated and a true and even surface shall be provided. Frayed edges shall be trimmed and holes and missing corners shall be patched with sod. 3.2.5 Rolling
Immediately after sodding, firm entire area except for slopes in excess of 3 to 1 with a roller not exceeding 90 pounds for each foot of roller width. 3.2.6 Watering
Start watering areas sodded as required by daily temperature and wind conditions. Apply water at a rate sufficient to ensure thorough wetting of soil to minimum depth of 6 inches. Run-off, puddling, and wilting shall be prevented. Unless otherwise directed, watering trucks shall not be driven over turf areas. Watering of other adjacent areas or plant material shall be prevented. 3.3 PROTECTION OF TURF AREAS
Immediately after turfing, protect area against traffic and other use. 3.4 3.5 OMITTED RESTORATION
Restore to original condition existing turf areas which have been damaged during construction operations. Keep clean at all times at least one paved pedestrian access route and one paved vehicular access route to each building. Clean other paving when work in adjacent areas is complete. -- End of Section --
SECTION 32 92 23
Page 6
W912HN-12-R-0003
SECTION 32 93 00 EXTERIOR PLANTS 07/06 PART 1 1.1 GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI) ANSI A300 (1995) Tree Care Operations - Trees, Shrubs and Other Woody Plant Maintenance (2006) Arboricultural Operations - Safety Requirements for Pruning, Repairing, Maintaining, and Removing Trees, and Cutting Brush (1996) Nursery Stock
ANSI Z133.1
ANSI Z60.1
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM A 580/A 580M (2008) Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Wire (2007) Agricultural Liming Materials (2007) Peat Samples by Laboratory Testing (2001; R 2007) pH of Soils (2007) Topsoil Used for Landscaping Purposes
ASTM C 602 ASTM D 4427 ASTM D 4972 ASTM D 5268
L.H. BAILEY HORTORIUM (LHBH) LHBH (1976) Hortus Third U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE (USDA) DOA SSIR 42 (1996) Soil Survey Investigation Report No. 42, Soil Survey Laboratory Methods Manual, Version 3.0
U.S. GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC) LEED (2009) Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design(tm) Green Building Rating System for New Construction (LEED-NC)
SECTION 32 93 00
Page 1
W912HN-12-R-0003
1.2
Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK, Section 32 84 23 UNDERGROUND SPRINKLER SYSTEMS, Section 32 92 23 SODDING, and Section 32 05 33 LANDSCAPE ESTABLISHMENT applies to this section for pesticide use and plant establishment requirements, with additions and modifications herein. 1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals State Landscape Contractor's License Time Restrictions and Planting Conditions Indicate anticipated dates and locations for each type of planting. SD-03 Product Data Local/Regional Materials; (LEED) Submit documentation indicating distance between manufacturing facility and the project site. Indicate distance of raw material origin from the project site. Indicate relative dollar value of local/regional materials to total dollar value of products included in project. Peat Composted Derivatives Rotted Manure Organic Mulch Materials Submit documentation indicating type of biobased material in product and biobased content. Indicate relative dollar value of biobased content products to total dollar value of products included in project. Gypsum; (LEED) Mulch; G, RO Ground Stakes Hose; (LEED) Submit documentation indicating percentage of post-industrial and post-consumer recycled content per unit of product. Indicate relative dollar value of recycled content products to total dollar value of products included in project. Fertilizer Root control barrier; G, RO Staking Material SECTION 32 93 00 Page 2
W912HN-12-R-0003
Submit documentation certifying products are from salvaged/recovered lumber sources and indicating percentage of salvaged/recovered content per unit of product. Metal anchors Antidesiccants Photographs; G, RO SD-04 Samples Mulch; G, RO SD-06 Test Reports Topsoil composition tests; Soil Test of proposed area SD-07 Certificates Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) Certification; (LEED) Nursery certifications Indicate names of plants in accordance with the LHBH, including type, quality, and size. SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Plastic Identification When not labeled, identify types in Operation and Maintenance Manual. 1.4 1.4.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE Topsoil Composition Tests
Commercial test from an independent testing laboratory including basic soil groups (moisture and saturation percentages, Nitrogen-Phosphorus-Potassium (N-P-K) ratio, pH (ASTM D 4972), soil salinity), secondary nutrient groups (calcium, magnesium, sodium, Sodium Absorption Ratio (SAR)), micronutrients (zinc, manganese, iron, copper), toxic soil elements (boron, chloride, sulfate), cation exchange and base saturation percentages, and soil amendment and fertilizer recommendations with quantities for plant material being transplanted. Soil required for each test shall include a maximum depth of 18 inches of approximately 1 quart volume for each test. Areas sampled should contain at least 6-8 cores be thoroughly mixed. Sample throughout project area and also topsoil to be added. The location of the sample areas should be noted and marked on a parcel or planting map for future reference. 1.4.2 Nursery Certifications a. Indicate on nursery letterhead the name of plants in accordance with the LHBH, including botanical common names, quality, and size.
SECTION 32 93 00
Page 3
W912HN-12-R-0003
b. c. 1.4.3
Inspection certificate. Mycorrhizal fungi inoculum for plant material treated
State Landscape Contractor's License
Construction company shall hold a landscape contractors license in Georgia and have a minimum of five years landscape construction experience. Submit copy of license and three references for similar work completed in the last five years. 1.4.4 Plant Material Photographs
Contractor shall submit nursery photographs, for government approval prior to ordering for each tree. 1.5 1.5.1 1.5.1.1 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Delivery Branched Plant Delivery
Deliver with branches tied and exposed branches covered with material which allows air circulation. Prevent damage to branches, trunks, root systems, and root balls and desiccation of leaves. 1.5.1.2 Soil Amendment Delivery
Deliver to the site in original, unopened containers bearing manufacturer's chemical analysis, name, trade name, or trademark, and indication of conformance to state and federal laws. Instead of containers, fertilizer, gypsum, and lime may be furnished in bulk with a certificate indicating the above information. Store in dry locations away from contaminates. 1.5.1.3 Plant Labels
Deliver plants with durable waterproof labels in weather-resistant ink. Provide labels stating the correct botanical and common plant name and variety as applicable and size as specified in the list of required plants. Attach to plants, bundles, and containers of plants. Groups of plants may be labeled by tagging one plant. Labels shall be legible for a minimum of 60 days after delivery to the planting site. 1.5.2 1.5.2.1 Storage Plant Storage and Protection
Store and protect plants not planted on the day of arrival at the site as follows: a. Shade and protect plants in outside storage areas from the wind and direct sunlight until planted. Heel-in bare root plants. Protect balled and burlapped plants from freezing or drying out by covering the balls or roots with moist burlap, sawdust, wood chips, shredded bark, peat moss, or other approved material. Provide covering which allows air circulation. SECTION 32 93 00 Page 4
b. c.
W912HN-12-R-0003
d.
Keep plants in a moist condition until planted by watering with a fine mist spray. Do not store plant material directly on concrete or bituminous surfaces. Fertilizer, Gypsum, pH Adjusters and Mulch Storage
e.
1.5.2.2
Store in dry locations away from contaminants. 1.5.2.3 Topsoil
Prior to stockpiling topsoil, eradicate on site undesirable growing vegetation. Clear and grub existing vegetation three to four weeks prior to stockpiling existing topsoil. 1.5.2.4 Root Control Barrier and Weed Control Fabric
Store materials on site in enclosures or under protective covering in dry location. Store under cover out of direct sunlight. Do not store materials directly on ground. 1.5.3 Handling
Do not drop or dump plants from vehicles. Avoid damaging plants being moved from nursery or storage area to planting site. Handle all plants carefully to avoid damaging or breaking the earth ball or root structure. Do not handle plants by the trunk or stem. Puddle bare-root plants after removal from the heeling-in bed to protect roots from drying out. Remove damaged plants from the site. 1.5.4 TIME LIMITATION
Except for container-grown plant material, the time limitation from digging to installing plant material shall be a maximum of 90 days. The time limitation between installing the plant material, installing tree guys/supports, and placing the mulch shall be a maximum of 24 hours. 1.6 1.6.1 TIME RESTRICTIONS AND PLANTING CONDITIONS Planting Dates
Plant all plants from September to June. 1.6.2 Restrictions
Do not plant when ground is frozen, snow covered, muddy, or when air temperature exceeds 90 degrees Fahrenheit 1.7 GUARANTEE
All plants shall be guaranteed for one year beginning on the date of inspection by the Contracting Officer to commence the plant establishment period, against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from lack of adequate maintenance, neglect, or abuse by the Government or by weather conditions unusual for the warranty period. Guarantee plants installed during fall planting season until the following SECTION 32 93 00 Page 5
W912HN-12-R-0003
October 1; guarantee plants installed during spring planting season until the following October 1. Replace palms which are not alive at the end of a one-year period. A new guarantee period shall apply to all replacement plants. Remove and replace dead planting materials immediately unless required to plant in the succeeding planting season. At end of warranty period, replace planting materials that die or have 25 percent or more of their branches that die during the construction operations or the guarantee period. 1.8 1.8.1 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS Local/Regional Materials
Use materials or products extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within a 500 mile radius from the project site, if available from a minimum of three sources. PART 2 2.1 2.1.1 PRODUCTS PLANTS Regulations and Varieties
Furnish nursery stock in accordance with ANSI Z60.1, except as otherwise specified or indicated. Each plant or group of planting shall have a "key" number indicated on the nursery certifications of the plant schedule. Furnish plants, including turf grass, grown under climatic conditions similar to those in the locality of the project. Spray plants budding into leaf or having soft growth with an antidesiccant before digging. Plants of the same specified size shall be of uniform size and character of growth. All plants shall comply with all Federal and State Laws requiring inspection for plant diseases and infestation. 2.1.2 Shape and Condition
Well-branched, well-formed, sound, vigorous, healthy planting stock free from disease, sunscald, windburn, abrasion, and harmful insects or insect eggs and having a healthy, normal, and undamaged root system. 2.1.2.1 Deciduous Trees and Shrubs
Symmetrically developed and of uniform habit of growth, with straight boles or stems, and free from objectionable disfigurements. 2.1.2.2 Evergreen Trees and Shrubs
Well developed symmetrical tops with typical spread of branches for each particular species or variety. 2.1.2.3 Ground Covers and Vines
Number and length of runners and clump sizes indicated, and of the proper age for the grade of plants indicated, furnished in removable containers, integral containers, or formed homogeneous soil section.
SECTION 32 93 00
Page 6
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.1.3
Plant Size
Minimum sizes measured after pruning and with branches in normal position, shall conform to measurements indicated, based on the average width or height of the plant for the species as specified in ANSI Z60.1. Plants larger in size than specified may be provided with approval of the Contracting Officer. When larger plants are provided, increase the ball of earth or spread of roots in accordance with ANSI Z60.1. 2.1.4 Root Ball Size
All box-grown, field potted, field boxed, collected, plantation grown, bare root, balled and burlapped, container grown, processed-balled, and in-ground fabric bag-grown root balls shall conform to ANSI Z60.1. All wrappings and ties shall be biodegradable. Root growth in container grown plants shall be sufficient to hold earth intact when removed from containers. Root bound plants will not be accepted. 2.1.4.1 Mycorrhizal fungi inoculum
Before shipment, root systems shall contain mycorrhizal fungi inoculum. 2.1.5 2.1.5.1 Growth of Trunk and Crown Deciduous Trees be provided in accordance with bear a relationship to the size and crown in good balance with the or the leader removed.
A height to caliper relationship shall ANSI Z60.1. Height of branching shall species of tree specified and with the trunk. The trees shall not be "poled" a.
Single stem: The trunk shall be reasonably straight and symmetrical with crown and have a persistent main leader. Multi-stem: All countable stems, in aggregate, shall average the size specified. To be considered a stem, there shall be no division of the trunk which branches more than 6 inches from ground level. Palms
b.
2.1.5.2
Palms shall have the specified height as measured from the base of the trunk to the base of the fronds or foliage in accordance with ANSI Z60.1. The palm shall have straight trunk and healthy fronds or foliage as typical for the variety grown in the region of the project, unless specified otherwise. Palms trimmed or pruned for delivery shall retain a minimum of 6 inches of foliage at the crown as a means of determining plant health. 2.1.5.3 Deciduous Shrubs
Deciduous shrubs shall have the height and number of primary stems recommended by ANSI Z60.1. Acceptable plant material shall be well shaped, with sufficient well-spaced side branches, and recognized by the trade as typical for the species grown in the region of the project. 2.1.5.4 Coniferous Evergreen Plant Material
Coniferous Evergreen plant material shall have the height-to-spread ratio recommended by ANSI Z60.1. The coniferous evergreen trees shall not be SECTION 32 93 00 Page 7
W912HN-12-R-0003
"poled" or the leader removed. Acceptable plant material shall be exceptionally heavy, well shaped and trimmed to form a symmetrical and tightly knit plant. The form of growth desired shall be as indicated. 2.1.5.5 Broadleaf Evergreen Plant Material
Broadleaf evergreen plant material shall have the height-to-spread ratio recommended by ANSI Z60.1. Acceptable plant material shall be well shaped and recognized by the trade as typical for the variety grown in the region of the project. 2.1.5.6 Ground Cover and Vine Plant Material
Ground cover and vine plant material shall have the minimum number of runners and length of runner recommended by ANSI Z60.1. Plant material shall have heavy, well developed and balanced crown with vigorous, well developed root system and shall be furnished in containers. 2.2 2.2.1 TOPSOIL Existing Soil
Modify to conform to requirements specified in paragraph entitled "Composition." 2.2.2 On-Site Topsoil
Conform to requirements specified in paragraph entitled "Composition." Additional topsoil shall be obtained from topsoil borrow areas indicated. 2.2.4 Composition
Evaluate soil for use as topsoil in accordance with ASTM D 5268. From 5 to 10 percent organic matter as determined by the topsoil composition tests of the Organic Carbon, 6A, Chemical Analysis Method described in DOA SSIR 42. Maximum particle size, 3/4 inch, with maximum 3 percent retained on 1/4 inch screen. The pH shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D 4972. Topsoil shall be free of sticks, stones, roots, plants, and other debris and objectionable materials. 2.3 SOIL CONDITIONERS
Provide singly or in combination as required to meet specified requirements for topsoil. Soil conditioners shall be nontoxic to plants. 2.3.1 Lime
Commercial grade hydrated limestone containing a calcium carbonate equivalent (C.C.E.) as specified in ASTM C 602.
SECTION 32 93 00
Page 8
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.3.2
Aluminum Sulfate
Commercial grade. 2.3.3 Sulfur
100 percent elemental 2.3.4 Iron
100 percent elemental 2.3.5 Peat
Natural product of peat moss derived from a freshwater site and conforming to ASTM D 4427 as modified herein. Shred and granulate peat to pass a 1/2 inch mesh screen and condition in storage pile for minimum 6 months after excavation. Biobased content shall be a minimum of 100 percent. Peat shall not contain invasive species, including seeds. 2.3.6 Sand
Ground bark, nitrolized sawdust, humus or other green wood waste material free of stones, sticks, invasive species, including seeds, and soil stabilized with nitrogen and having the following properties: 2.3.8.1 Particle Size
Minimum percent based on dry weight: Pine Bark 2.3.8.3 Biobased Content 1.0
Minimum 100 percent. 2.3.9 Gypsum
Coarsely ground gypsum comprised of calcium sulfate dihydrate 91 percent, calcium 22 percent, sulfur 17 percent; minimum 96 percent passing through 20 mesh screen, 100 percent passing thru 16 mesh screen.
SECTION 32 93 00
Page 9
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.4
PLANTING SOIL MIXTURES
1 part topsoil to 1 part peat. Thoroughly mix all parts of planting soil mixture to a uniform blend throughout. 2.5 2.5.1 FERTILIZER Granular Fertilizer
Organic, granular controlled release fertilizer containing the following minimum percentages, by weight, of plant food nutrients: 14 percent available nitrogen 14 percent available phosphorus 14 percent available potassium 2.6 2.7 2.8 OMITTED OMITTED MULCH
Free from noxious weeds, mold, pesticides, or other deleterious materials. 2.8.1 2.8.2 Omitted Organic Mulch Materials Biobased content shall be a
Pine straw mulch from site when available. minimum of 100 percent. 2.9 2.9.1 2.9.1.1 2.9.1.2 STAKING AND GUYING MATERIAL Staking Material Omitted Ground Stakes
FSC-certified or salvaged wood or 100 percent post-consumer recycled content plastic, 2 inches square are by 3 feet long, pointed at one end. 2.9.2 2.9.2.1 Guying Material Guying Wire
12 gauge annealed galvanized steel, ASTM A 580/A 580M. 2.9.2.2 Guying Cable
Minimum five-strand, 3/16 inch diameter galvanized steel cable plastic coated. 2.9.3 Hose Chafing Guards
New or used 2 ply 3/4 inch diameter reinforced rubber or plastic hose, black or dark green, all of same color.
SECTION 32 93 00
Page 10
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.9.4
Flags
White surveyor's plastic tape, fastened to guying wires or cables. 2.9.5 Turnbuckles
Galvanized or cadmium-plated steel with minimum 3 inch long openings fitted with screw eyes. Eye bolts shall be galvanized or cadmium-plated steel with one inch diameter eyes and screw length 1 1/2 inches, minimum. 2.9.6 2.9.7 2.9.7.1 Omitted Metal Anchors Driven Anchors
Malleable iron, arrow shaped, galvanized, sized as follows: Tree Caliper 2 inches and under 3 to 6 inches 6 to 8 inches 8 to 10 inches 10 to 12 inches 2.9.7.2 Screw Anchors Anchor Size 3 inches 4 inches 6 inches 8 inches 10 inches
Steel, screw type with welded-on 3 inch round helical steel plate, minimum 3/8 inch diameter, 15 inches long. 2.10 2.11 OMITTED ANTIDESICCANTS
Sprayable, water insoluble vinyl-vinledine complex which produce a moisture retarding barrier not removable by rain or snow. Film shall form at temperatures commonly encountered out of doors during planting season and have a moisture vapor transmission rate (MVT) of the resultant film of maximum 10 grams per 24 hours at 70 percent humidity. 2.12 2.13 OMITTED ROOT CONTROL BARRIER
Flexible and permeable geotextile fabric with permanently attached time-released nodules. Color to be black. 2.14 WATER
Source of water to be approved by Contracting Officer and suitable quality for irrigation and shall not contain elements toxic to plant life. 2.14.1 Hose
Hoses used for watering shall be a minimum of 60 percent post-consumer rubber or plastic.
SECTION 32 93 00
Page 11
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.15
MYCORRHIZAL FUNGI INOCULUM
Mycorrhizal fungi inoculum shall be composed of multiple-fungus inoculum as recommended by the manufacturer for the plant material specified. 2.16 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
The Contracting Officer will inspect plant materials at the project site and approve them. Tag plant materials for size and quality. PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION EXTENT OF WORK
Provide soil preparation, fertilizing, tree, shrub, groundcover, and planting, edging, staking and guying, and root control barrier installation and a mulch topdressing of all newly graded finished earth surfaces, unless indicated otherwise, and at all areas inside or outside the limits of construction that are disturbed by the Contractor's operations. 3.2 3.2.1 PREPARATION Layout
Stake out approved plant material locations and planter bed outlines on the project site before digging plant pits or beds. The Contracting Officer reserves the right to adjust plant material locations to meet field conditions. Do not plant closer than 24 inches to a building wall, fence or wall edge, and other similar structures. 3.2.2 3.2.2.1 Soil Preparation pH Adjuster Application Rates of
Apply pH adjuster at rates as determined by laboratory soil analysis the soils at the job site. 3.2.2.2 Soil Conditioner Application Rates
Apply soil conditioners at rates as determined by laboratory soil analysis of the soils at the job site. 3.2.2.3 Fertilizer Application Rates of the
Apply fertilizer at rates as determined by laboratory soil analysis soils at the job site. 3.2.3 Root Control Barrier
Install geotextile fabric in the soil in a vertical application. Use appropriate holding device to assure fabric position. A minimum 2 inch soil cover is required over the top edge. A minimum 18 inch extension of fabric beyond the structure area to be protected is required to prevent root growth from growing around fabric edges. 3.3 PLANT BED PREPARATION
Verify location of underground utilities prior to excavation. Protect existing adjacent turf before excavations are made. Where planting beds SECTION 32 93 00 Page 12
W912HN-12-R-0003
occur in existing turf areas, remove turf to a depth that will ensure removal of entire root system. Measure depth of plant pits from finished grade. Depth of plant pit excavation shall be as indicated and provide proper relation between top of root ball and finished grade. Install plant material as specified in paragraph entitled "Plant Installation." Do not install trees within 10 feet of any utility lines or building walls. 3.4 3.4.1 PLANT INSTALLATION Individual Plant Pit Excavation
Excavate pits at least twice as large in diameter as the size of ball or container to depth shown. 3.4.2 Plant Beds with Multiple Plants
Excavate plant beds continuously throughout entire bed as outlined to depth shown. 3.4.3 Handling and Setting
Move plant materials only by supporting the root ball or container. Set plants on hand compacted layer of prepared backfill soil mixture 6 inches thick and hold plumb in the center of the pit until soil has been tamped firmly around root ball. Set plant materials, in relation to surrounding finish grade, one to 2 inches above depth at which they were grown in the nursery, collecting field or container. Replace plant material whose root balls are cracked or damaged either before or during the planting process. Plant material shall be set in plant beds according to the drawings. Backfill soil mixture shall be placed on previously scarified subsoil to completely surround the root balls, and shall be brought to a smooth and even surface, blending to existing areas. 3.4.3.1 Balled and Burlapped Stock
Backfill with topsoil to approximately half the depth of ball and then tamp and water. Carefully remove or fold back excess burlap and tying materials from the top a minimum 1/3 depth from the top of the rootball. Tamp and complete backfill, place mulch topdressing, and water. Remove wires and non-biodegradable materials from plant pit prior to backfill operations. 3.4.3.2 3.4.3.3 Omitted Container Grown Stock
Remove from container and prevent damage to plant or root system. 3.4.3.4 Ground Covers and Vines
Do not remove plant materials from flats or containers until immediately before planting. Space at intervals indicated. Plant at a depth to sufficiently cover all roots. Start watering areas planted as required by temperature and wind conditions. Apply water at a rate sufficient to ensure thorough wetting of soil to a depth of 6 inches without run off or puddling. Smooth planting areas after planting to provide even, smooth finish. Mulch as indicated.
SECTION 32 93 00
Page 13
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.4.4
Earth Mounded Watering Basin for Individual Plant Pits
Form with topsoil around each tree by replacing a mound of topsoil around the edge of each plant pit. Watering basins shall be 6 inches deep. 3.4.5 3.4.6 3.4.7 3.4.8 Omitted Omitted Omitted Mulch Topdressing
Provide mulch topdressing over entire planter bed surfaces and individual plant surfaces including earth mound watering basin around plants to a depth of 3 compacted inches after completion of plant installation and before watering. Keep mulch out of the crowns of shrubs. Place mulch a minimum 2 to 3 inches away from trunk of shrub or tree. 3.4.9 3.4.10 3.4.10.1 3.4.10.2 Omitted Fertilization Omitted Granular Fertilizer
Apply granular fertilizer as a top coat prior to placing mulch layer and water thoroughly. 3.4.11 Watering
Start watering areas planted as required by temperature and wind conditions. Apply water at a rate sufficient to ensure thorough wetting of soil to a depth of 12 inches without run off. 3.4.12 3.4.12.1 3.4.12.2 Staking and Guying Omitted Guying
Guy plants as indicated. Attach two strands of guying wire around the tree trunk at an angle of 45 degrees at approximately 1/2 of the trunk height. Protect tree trunks with chafing guards where guying wire contacts the tree trunk. Anchor guys to deadmen wood blocks, wood ground stakes, malleable iron anchors, or steel screw anchors. Fasten flags to each guying wire approximately 2/3 of the distance up from ground level. Provide turnbuckles as indicated. 3.4.12.3 Chafing Guards
Use hose chafing guards, as specified where guy wire will contact the plant. 3.4.12.4 Deadmen Place equal distance
Place deadmen minimum 18 inches below ground surface. from tree trunk and around the plant pit.
SECTION 32 93 00
Page 14
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.4.12.5
Wood Ground Stakes
Drive wood ground stakes into firm ground outside of plant pit with top of stake flush with ground. Place equal distance from tree trunk and around the plant pit. 3.4.12.6 Iron Anchors
Drive malleable iron anchors into firm ground outside of plant pit a minimum 30 inches below finish grade. Place equal distance from tree trunk and around the plant pit. 3.4.12.7 Steel Screw Anchors Place
Insert steel screw anchors as recommended in manufacturer's data. equal distance from tree trunk and around the plant pit. 3.4.12.8 Flags
Securely fasten flags on each guy wire approximately two-thirds of the distance up from ground level. 3.4.13 Pruning
Prune in accordance with safety requirement of ANSI Z133.1. 3.4.13.1 Trees and Shrubs
Remove dead and broken branches. Prune to correct structural defects only. Retain typical growth shape of individual plants with as much height and spread as practical. Do not cut central leader on trees. Make cuts with sharp instruments. Do not flush cut with trunk or adjacent branches. Collars shall remain in place. Pruning shall be accomplished by trained and experienced personnel and shall be accordance with ANSI A300. 3.4.13.2 Wound Dressing
Do not apply tree wound dressing to cuts. 3.5 3.5.1 RESTORATION AND CLEAN UP Restoration
Turf areas, pavements and facilities that have been damaged from the planting operation shall be restored to original condition at the Contractor's expense. 3.5.2 Clean Up
Excess and waste material shall be removed from the installed area and shall be disposed offsite at an approved landfill, recycling center, or composting center. Separate and recycle or reuse the following landscape waste materials: nylon straps, wire, ball wrap, burlap, wood stakes. Adjacent paved areas shall be cleared. -- End of Section --
SECTION 32 93 00
Page 15
W912HN-12-R-0003
SECTION 33 11 00 WATER DISTRIBUTION 10/06 PART 1 1.1 GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS (AASHTO) AASHTO HB-17 (2002; Errata 2003; Errata 2005) Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA) AWWA B300 AWWA B301 AWWA C104/A21.4 (2010; Addenda 2011) Hypochlorites (2010) Liquid Chlorine (2008; Errata 2010) Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water (2008) Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems (2008) Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings for Water (2007) Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings (2005) Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe With Ductile-Iron or Gray-Iron Threaded Flanges (2009) Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water (2006) Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service (2009) Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service (2005) Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants (2005) Wet-Barrel Fire Hydrants (2001) Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service (2005) Installation of Ductile-Iron Water SECTION 33 11 00 Page 1
AWWA C105/A21.5
AWWA C110/A21.10
AWWA C111/A21.11
AWWA C115/A21.15
AWWA C151/A21.51
AWWA C153/A21.53
AWWA C500
AWWA C502 AWWA C503 AWWA C509
AWWA C600
W912HN-12-R-0003
Mains and Their Appurtenances AWWA C605 (2005) Underground Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fittings for Water (2005; Errata 2005) Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains (2002; Errata 2008) Standard for Cold Water Meters - Displacement Type, Bronze Main Case (2007) Standard for Cold-Water Meters Turbine Type for Customer Service (2001) Cold-Water Meters - Compound Type (1996; R 2004) Cold-Water Meters - Fire Service Type (2008) Propeller-Type Meters for Waterworks Applications (1996; R 2005) Direct-Reading, Remote-Registration Systems for Cold-Water Meters (2005) Encoder-Type Remote-Registration Systems for Cold-Water Meters (2005) Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings (2007; Errata 2008) Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, and Fabricated Fittings, 4 In. Through 12 In. (100 mm Through 300 mm), for Water Distribution (1997) Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fabricated Fittings 14 In. Through 48 In. (350 mm through 1,200 mm) (2002) Manual: PVC Pipe - Design and Installation ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME) ASME B16.1 (2010) Gray Iron Threaded Fittings; Classes 25, 125 and 250 (2011) Cast Bronze Alloy Threaded Fittings Classes 125 and 250 (2001; R 2005) Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings (2001; R 2010) Standard for Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure SECTION 33 11 00 Page 2
AWWA C651
AWWA C700
AWWA C701
AWWA C702 AWWA C703
AWWA C704
AWWA C706
AWWA C707
AWWA C800
AWWA C900
AWWA C905
AWWA M23
ASME B16.15
ASME B16.18
ASME B16.22
W912HN-12-R-0003
Fittings ASME B16.26 (2006) Standard for Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM A 536 (1984; R 2009) Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings (2008) Standard Specification for Solder Metal (2002e1) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes (2008) Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings (2009) Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings (2009) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (2009) Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete (2006) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC), Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120 (2009) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series) (2006) Standard Specification for Threaded Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80 (2006) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40 (2006) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80 (2004e1) Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems (2008) Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pressure Piping (1996; R 2002) Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings SECTION 33 11 00 Page 3
ASTM B 32
ASTM B 42
ASTM B 61
ASTM B 62
ASTM B 88
ASTM C 94/C 94M
ASTM D 1785
ASTM D 2241
ASTM D 2464
ASTM D 2466
ASTM D 2467
ASTM D 2564
ASTM D 2774
ASTM D 2855
W912HN-12-R-0003
ASTM D 3139
(1998; R 2005) Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals (2005) Safe Handling of Solvent Cements, Primers, and Cleaners Used for Joining Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings (2008) Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe
ASTM F 402
ASTM F 477
MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS INDUSTRY (MSS) MSS SP-80 (2008) Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) NFPA 24 (2010) Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances (1994) Fire Hazard Properties of Flammable Liquids, Gases, and Volatile Solids (2003) Hazardous Chemicals Data (2006) Identification of the Hazards of Materials for Emergency Response UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) UL 246 (1993; Rev thru Dec 1998) Hydrants for Fire-Protection Service (2004) Standard for Gate Valves for Fire-Protection Service UNI-BELL PVC PIPE ASSOCIATION (UBPPA) UBPPA UNI-B-3 (1992) Recommended Practice for the Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe (Nominal Diameters 4-36 Inch) (2000) Recommended Practice for the Direct Tapping of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Water Pipe (Nominal Diameters 6-12 Inch)
NFPA 325
NFPA 49 NFPA 704
UL 262
UBPPA UNI-B-8
1.2
UNIT PRICES
Measurement and payment will be based on completed work performed in accordance with the drawings, specifications, and the contract payment schedules. Payment will not be made under this section for excavation, trenching, or backfilling.
SECTION 33 11 00
Page 4
W912HN-12-R-0003
1.2.1
Measurement
The length of water lines to be paid for will be determined by measuring along the centerlines of the various sizes of pipe furnished and installed. Pipe will be measured from center of fitting to center of fitting, from center of water distribution line to end of service connection, and from center of water distribution line to center of hydrant. No deduction will be made for the space occupied by valves or fittings. 1.2.2 Payment
Payment will be made for water lines at the contract unit price per linear foot for the various types and sizes of water lines, and will be full compensation for all pipes, joints, specials, and fittings, complete in place. Payment for fire hydrants, gate valves, valve boxes, and standard valve manholes will be made at the respective contract unit price each for such items complete in place. Payment will include the furnishing of all testing, plant, labor, and material and incidentals necessary to complete the work, as specified and as shown. 1.3 1.3.1 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS Water Distribution Mains
Provide water distribution mains with sizes as indicated on the plans of ductile-iron (DIP) or polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe. Provide water main accessories, gate valves, and check valves as specified and where indicated. Submit design calculations of water piping. 1.3.2 Water Service Lines
Provide water service lines with sizes as indicated on the plans from water distribution main to building and temporary decontamination shower service at the points indicated. Water service lines shall be copper or polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe . Ductile-iron (DIP) or polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe appurtenances, and valves as specified for water mains may also be used for service lines. Provide water service line appurtenances as specified and where indicated. Submit design calculations of water piping. 1.4 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-03 Product Data Piping Materials Water distribution main piping, fittings, joints, valves, and coupling Water service line piping, fittings, joints, valves, and coupling Hydrants SECTION 33 11 00 Page 5
W912HN-12-R-0003
Corporation stops Valve boxes Submit manufacturer's standard drawings or catalog cuts, except submit both drawings and cuts for push-on and rubber-gasketed bell-and-spigot joints. Include information concerning gaskets with submittal for joints and couplings. SD-05 Design Data Design calculations of water piping SD-06 Test Reports Bacteriological Disinfection Test results from commercial laboratory verifying disinfection SD-07 Certificates Water distribution main piping, fittings, joints, valves, and coupling Water service line piping, fittings, joints, valves, and coupling Shop-applied lining and coating Lining Fire hydrants Displacement Type Meters Compound Type Meters Certificates shall attest that tests set forth in each applicable referenced publication have been performed, whether specified in that publication to be mandatory or otherwise and that production control tests have been performed at the intervals or frequency specified in the publication. Other tests shall have been performed within 3 years of the date of submittal of certificates on the same type, class, grade, and size of material as is being provided for the project. SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions Delivery, storage, and handling Installation procedures for water piping 1.5 1.5.1 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Delivery and Storage
Inspect materials delivered to site for damage. Unload and store with minimum handling. Store materials on site in enclosures or under protective covering. Store plastic piping, jointing materials and rubber SECTION 33 11 00 Page 6
W912HN-12-R-0003
gaskets under cover out of direct sunlight. Do not store materials directly on the ground. Keep inside of pipes, fittings, valves and hydrants free of dirt and debris. 1.5.2 Handling
Handle pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants, and other accessories in a manner to ensure delivery to the trench in sound undamaged condition. Take special care to avoid injury to coatings and linings on pipe and fittings; make repairs if coatings or linings are damaged. Do not place any other material or pipe inside a pipe or fitting after the coating has been applied. Carry, do not drag pipe to the trench. Use of pinch bars and tongs for aligning or turning pipe will be permitted only on the bare ends of the pipe. The interior of pipe and accessories shall be thoroughly cleaned of foreign matter before being lowered into the trench and shall be kept clean during laying operations by plugging or other approved method. Before installation, the pipe shall be inspected for defects. Material found to be defective before or after laying shall be replaced with sound material without additional expense to the Government. Store rubber gaskets that are not to be installed immediately, under cover out of direct sunlight. 1.5.2.1 1.5.2.2 1.5.2.3 Omitted Omitted Miscellaneous Plastic Pipe and Fittings
Handle Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC), pipe and fittings in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Store plastic piping and jointing materials that are not to be installed immediately under cover out of direct sunlight. Storage facilities shall be classified and marked in accordance with NFPA 704, with classification as indicated in NFPA 49 and NFPA 325. PART 2 2.1 2.1.1 2.1.1.1 a. PRODUCTS WATER DISTRIBUTION MAIN MATERIALS Piping Materials Ductile-Iron Piping (DIP) Pipe and Fittings: Pipe, except flanged pipe, AWWA C151/A21.51, Pressure Class 150. Flanged pipe, AWWA C115/A21.15. Fittings, AWWA C110/A21.10 or AWWA C153/A21.53; fittings with push-on joint ends conforming to the same requirements as fittings with mechanical-joint ends, except that the bell design shall be modified, as approved, for push-on joint. Fittings shall have pressure rating at least equivalent to that of the pipe. Ends of pipe and fittings shall be suitable for the specified joints. Pipe and fittings shall have cement-mortar lining, AWWA C104/A21.4, twice the standard thickness. Joints and Jointing Material: (1) Joints: Joints for pipe and fittings shall be push-on joints or mechanical joints. Provide mechanical joints where indicated. Provide flanged joints where indicated. SECTION 33 11 00 Page 7
b.
W912HN-12-R-0003
(2) Push-On Joints: Shape of pipe ends and fitting ends, gaskets, and lubricant for joint assembly, AWWA C111/A21.11. (3) Mechanical Joints: Dimensional and material requirements for pipe ends, glands, bolts and nuts, and gaskets, AWWA C111/A21.11. (4) Flanged Joints: Bolts, nuts, and gaskets for flanged connections as recommended in the Appendix to AWWA C115/A21.15. Flange for setscrewed flanges shall be of ductile iron, ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12, and conform to the applicable requirements of ASME B16.1, Class 250. Setscrews for setscrewed flanges shall be 190,000 psi tensile strength, heat treated and zinc-coated steel. Gasket and lubricants for setscrewed flanges, in accordance with applicable requirements for mechanical-joint gaskets specified in AWWA C111/A21.11. Design of setscrewed gasket shall provide for confinement and compression of gasket when joint to adjoining flange is made. 2.1.1.2 a. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Piping Pipe and Fittings: Pipe, AWWA C900, shall be plain end or gasket bell end, Pressure Class 150 (DR 18)with cast-iron-pipe-equivalent OD. Pipe 14 through 36 diameter: AWWA C905.
b. c.
Fittings for PVC pipe: Fittings shall be gray iron or ductile iron, AWWA C110/A21.10 or AWWA C153/A21.53, and have cement-mortar lining, AWWA C104/A21.4, standard thickness. Fittings with push-on joint ends shall conform to the same requirements as fittings with mechanical-joint ends, except that bell design shall be modified, as approved, for push-on joint suitable for use with PVC plastic pipe specified in this paragraph. Iron fittings and specials shall be cement-mortar lined in accordance with AWWA C104/A21.4. Fittings and specials may be of the same material as the pipe with elastomeric gaskets, all in conformance with AWWA C605 and AWWA C900. Joints and Jointing Material: Joints for pipe shall be push-on joints, ASTM D 3139. Joints between pipe and metal fittings, valves, and other accessories shall be push-on joints ASTM D 3139, or compression-type joints/mechanical joints, ASTM D 3139 and AWWA C111/A21.11. Provide each joint connection with an elastomeric gasket suitable for the bell or coupling with which it is to be used. Gaskets for push-on joints for pipe, ASTM F 477. Gaskets for push-on joints and compression-type joints/mechanical joints for joint connections between pipe and metal fittings, valves, and other accessories, AWWA C111/A21.11, respectively, for push-on joints and mechanical joints. Mechanically coupled joints using a sleeve-type mechanical coupling, as specified in paragraph entitled "Sleeve-Type Mechanical Couplings," may be used as an optional jointing method in lieu of push-on joints on plain-end PVC plastic pipe, subject to the limitations specified for mechanically coupled joints using a sleeve-type mechanical coupling and to the use of internal stiffeners as specified for compression-type joints in ASTM D 3139.
d.
SECTION 33 11 00
Page 8
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.1.2 2.1.2.1
Valves, Hydrants, and Other Water Main Accessories Gate Valves on Buried Piping
AWWA C500, AWWA C509, or UL 262. Unless otherwise specified, valves conforming to: (1) AWWA C500 shall be nonrising stem type with double-disc gates and mechanical-joint ends or push-on joint ends as appropriate for the adjoining pipe, (2) AWWA C509 shall be nonrising stem type with mechanical-joint ends or resilient-seated gate valves 3 to 12 inches in size, and (3) UL 262 shall be inside-screw type with operating nut, double-disc or split-wedge type gate, designed for a hydraulic working pressure of 175 psi, and shall have mechanical-joint ends or push-on joint ends as appropriate for the pipe to which it is joined. Materials for UL 262 valves shall conform to the reference standards specified in AWWA C500. Valves shall open by counterclockwise rotation of the valve stem. Stuffing boxes shall have 0-ring stem seals. Stuffing boxes shall be bolted and constructed so as to permit easy removal of parts for repair. In lieu of mechanical-joint ends and push-on joint ends, valves may have special ends for connection to sleeve-type mechanical coupling. Valve ends and gaskets for connection to sleeve-type mechanical coupling shall conform to the applicable requirements specified respectively for the joint or coupling. Valves shall be of one manufacturer. 2.1.2.2 2.1.2.3 2.1.2.4 2.1.2.5 2.1.2.6 Omitted Omitted Omitted Omitted Vacuum and Air Relief Valves
Vacuum and air relief valves shall be of the size shown and shall be of a type that will release air and prevent the formation of a vacuum. The valves shall automatically release air when the lines are being filled with water and shall admit air into the line when water is being withdrawn in excess of the inflow. Valves shall be iron body with bronze trim and stainless steel float. 2.1.2.7 Fire Hydrants
Dry-barrel type , except that flush-type hydrants shall be provided where indicated. Paint hydrants with at least one coat of primer and two coats of yellow enamel paint, except use red enamel paint for tops of hydrants in non-potable water systems. Stencil hydrant number and main size on the hydrant barrel using black stencil paint. a. Dry-Barrel Type Fire Hydrants: Dry-barrel type hydrants, AWWA C502 or UL 246, "Base Valve" design, shall have 6 inch inlet, 5 1/4 inch valve opening, one 4 1/2 inch pumper connection, and two 2 1/2 inch hose connections. Inlet shall have mechanical-joint or push-on joint end; end shall conform to the applicable requirements as specified for the joint. Size and shape of operating nut, cap nuts, and threads on hose and pumper connections shall be as specified in AWWA C502 or AWWA C503 or UL 246. Flush-Type Fire Hydrants: Hydrants shall conform to the applicable requirements of AWWA C502, except that they shall be of a design that will permit placement of hydrant below surface of pavement. Hydrants shall have 6 inch inlet, 4 1/4 inch minimum SECTION 33 11 00 Page 9
b.
W912HN-12-R-0003
valve opening, one 4 1/2 inch pumper connection, and one 2 1/2 inch hose connection. Hose and pumper connections and operating nuts shall be readily accessible, and enclosed in a cast iron box with top flush with pavement and having cast-iron cover with flush lifting handle. Inlet shall have mechanical-joint or push-on joint end. Size and shape of operating nut and cap nuts and threads on hose and pumper connections shall be as specified in AWWA C502. 2.1.2.8 2.1.2.9 2.1.2.10 Omitted Omitted Valve Boxes
Provide a valve box for each gate valve on buried piping. Valve boxes shall be of cast iron or precast concrete of a size suitable for the valve on which it is to be used and shall be adjustable. Cast-iron boxes shall have a minimum cover and wall thickness of 3/16 inch. Precast concrete boxes installed in locations subjected to vehicular traffic shall be designed to withstand the AASHTO load designation as outlined in AASHTO HB-17. Provide a round head. Cast the word "WATER" on the lid. The least diameter of the shaft of the box shall be 5 1/4 inches. Cast-iron box shall have a heavy coat of bituminous paint. 2.1.2.11 2.1.2.12 Omitted Turbine Type Meters
Turbine type meters shall conform to AWWA C701. The main casing shall be bronze or cast iron protected by corrosion resistant coating with stainless steel external fasteners. Registers shall be straight-reading type, shall be permanently sealed and shall read in U.S. gallons. Connections shall be suitable to the type of pipe and conditions encountered. Register type shall be a direct reading remote register designed in accordance with AWWA C706 or an encoder type remote register designed in accordance with AWWA C707. Meters shall comply with the accuracy and capacity requirements of AWWA C701. 2.1.2.13 Propeller Type Meters
Propeller type meters shall conform to AWWA C704. Registers shall be straight-reading type, shall be permanently sealed and shall read in U.S. gallons. Connections shall be suitable to the type of pipe and conditions encountered. Register type shall be a direct-reading remote register designed in accordance with AWWA C706 or an encoder-type remote register designed in accordance with AWWA C707. Meters shall comply with the accuracy and capacity requirements of AWWA C703. 2.1.2.14 2.1.2.15 2.1.2.16 2.1.2.17 Omitted Omitted Omitted Tracer Wire for Nonmetallic Piping
Provide bare copper or aluminum wire not less than 0.10 inch in diameter in sufficient length to be continuous over each separate run of nonmetallic pipe.
SECTION 33 11 00
Page 10
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.2 2.2.1
WATER SERVICE LINE MATERIALS Piping Materials Copper Pipe and Associated Fittings Fittings shall be brass or
2.2.1.1
Pipe, ASTM B 42, regular, threaded ends. bronze, ASME B16.15, 125 pound. 2.2.1.2
Copper Tubing and Associated Fittings
Tubing, ASTM B 88, Type K. Fittings for solder-type joint, ASME B16.18 or ASME B16.22; fittings for compression-type joint, ASME B16.26, flared tube type. 2.2.1.3 Plastic Piping
Plastic pipe and fittings shall bear the seal of the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) for potable water service. Plastic pipe and fittings shall be supplied from the same manufacturer. a. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Piping with Screw Joints: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40; or ASTM D 2241, with SDR as necessary to provide 150 psi minimum pressure rating. Fittings, ASTM D 2466 or ASTM D 2467. Pipe and fittings shall be of the same PVC plastic material and shall be one of the following pipe/fitting combinations, as marked on the pipe and fitting, respectively: PVC 1120/PVC I; PVC 1220/PVC 12; PVC 2120/PVC II; PVC 2116/PVC II. Solvent cement for jointing, ASTM D 2564. Pipe couplings, when used shall be tested as required by ASTM D 2464. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Piping with Elastomeric-Gasket Joints: Pipe shall conform to dimensional requirements of ASTM D 1785 Schedule 40, with joints meeting the requirements of 150 psi working pressure, 200 psi hydrostatic test pressure, unless otherwise shown or specified. c. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Piping with Solvent Cement Joints: Pipe shall conform to dimensional requirements of ASTM D 1785 or ASTM D 2241 with joints meeting the requirements of 150 psi working pressure and 200 psi hydrostatic test pressure. 2.2.1.4 2.2.1.5 2.2.1.6 2.2.1.7 2.2.1.8 Omitted Omitted Omitted Omitted Ductile-Iron Piping
b.
Comply with "Ductile-Iron Piping" subparagraph under paragraph "Water Distribution Main Materials." 2.2.1.9 Insulating Joints
Joints between pipe of dissimilar metals shall have a rubber-gasketed or other suitable approved type of insulating joint or dielectric coupling SECTION 33 11 00 Page 11
W912HN-12-R-0003
which will effectively prevent metal-to-metal contact between adjacent sections of piping. 2.2.2 2.2.2.1 Water Service Line Appurtenances Corporation Stops
Ground key type; bronze, ASTM B 61 or ASTM B 62; and suitable for the working pressure of the system. Ends shall be suitable for solder-joint, or flared tube compression type joint. Threaded ends for inlet and outlet of corporation stops, AWWA C800; coupling nut for connection to flared copper tubing, ASME B16.26. 2.2.2.2 Curb or Service Stops
Ground key, round way, inverted key type; made of bronze, ASTM B 61 or ASTM B 62; and suitable for the working pressure of the system. Ends shall be as appropriate for connection to the service piping. Arrow shall be cast into body of the curb or service stop indicating direction of flow. 2.2.2.3 Service Clamps
Service clamps used for repairing damaged cast-iron, steel, PVC or asbestos-cement pipe shall have a pressure rating not less than that of the pipe to be connected and shall be either the single or double flattened strap type. Clamps shall have a galvanized malleable-iron body with cadmium plated straps and nuts. Clamps shall have a rubber gasket cemented to the body. 2.2.2.4 Goosenecks
Type K copper tubing. Joint ends for goosenecks shall be appropriate for connecting to corporation stop and service line. Where multiple gooseneck connections are required for an individual service, goosenecks shall be connected to the service line through a suitable approved brass or bronze branch connection; the total clear area of the branches shall be at least equal to the clear area of the service line. Length of goosenecks shall be in accordance with standard practice. 2.2.2.5 Dielectric Fittings between threaded ferrous and valves, except where corporation shall prevent metal-to-metal contact and shall be suitable for the
Dielectric fittings shall be installed nonferrous metallic pipe, fittings and stops join mains. Dielectric fittings of dissimilar metallic piping elements required working pressure. 2.2.2.6 Check Valves
Check valves shall be designed for a minimum working pressure of 150 psi or as indicated. Valves shall have a clear waterway equal to the full nominal diameter of the valve. Valves shall open to permit flow when inlet pressure is greater than the discharge pressure, and shall close tightly to prevent return flow when discharge pressure exceeds inlet pressure. The size of the valve, working pressure, manufacturer's name, initials, or trademark shall be cast on the body of each valve. a. Valves 2 inches and smaller shall be all bronze designed for screwed fittings, and shall conform to MSS SP-80, Class 150, Types SECTION 33 11 00 Page 12
W912HN-12-R-0003
3 and 4 as suitable for the application. 2.2.2.7 2.2.2.8 Omitted Gate Valves Smaller than 3 Inch in Size on Buried Piping
Gate valves smaller than 3 inch size on Buried Piping MSS SP-80, Class 150, solid wedge, nonrising stem. Valves shall have flanged or threaded end connections, with a union on one side of the valve. Provide handwheel operators. 2.2.2.9 2.2.2.10 2.2.2.11 Omitted Omitted Curb Boxes
Provide a curb box for each curb or service stop. Curb boxes shall be of cast iron of a size suitable for the stop on which it is to be used. Provide a round head. Cast the word "WATER" on the lid. Each box shall have a heavy coat of bituminous paint. 2.2.2.12 Valve Boxes
Provide a valve box for each gate valve on buried piping. Valve boxes shall be of cast iron or precast concrete of a size suitable for the valve on which it is to be used and shall be adjustable. Precast concrete boxes installed in locations subjected to vehicular traffic shall be designed to withstand the AASHTO load designation as outline in AASHTO HB-17. Provide a round head. Cast the word "WATER" on the lid. The least diameter of the shaft of the box shall be 5 1/4 inches. Cast-iron box shall have a heavy coat of bituminous paint. 2.2.2.13 Tapping Sleeves
Tapping sleeves of the sizes indicated for connection to existing main shall be the cast gray, ductile, or malleable iron, split-sleeve type with flanged or grooved outlet, and with bolts, follower rings and gaskets on each end of the sleeve. Construction shall be suitable for a maximum working pressure of 150 psi. Bolts shall have square heads and hexagonal nuts. Longitudinal gaskets and mechanical joints with gaskets shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the sleeve. When using grooved mechanical tee, it shall consist of an upper housing with full locating collar for rigid positioning which engages a machine-cut hole in pipe, encasing an elastomeric gasket which conforms to the pipe outside diameter around the hole and a lower housing with positioning lugs, secured together during assembly by nuts and bolts as specified, pretorqued to 50 foot-pound. 2.2.2.14 Displacement Type Meters
Displacement type meters shall conform to AWWA C700. Registers shall be straight-reading and shall read in cubic meters U.S. gallon. Meters in sizes 13 through 1/2 through 1 shall be frost-protection design. Connections shall be suitable to the type of pipe and conditions encountered. Register type shall be a direct reading remote register designed in accordance with AWWA C706 or an encoder type remote register designed in accordance with AWWA C707. Meters shall comply with the accuracy and capacity requirements of AWWA C700. SECTION 33 11 00 Page 13
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.2.2.15
Compound Type Meters
Compound type meters shall conform to AWWA C702 and shall be furnished with strainers. The main casing shall be bronze or cast iron protected by corrosion resistant coating with stainless steel external fasteners. The main casing shall be tapped for field testing purposes. Registers shall be straight-reading type, shall be permanently sealed and shall read in U.S. gallons. The meter shall be equipped with a coordinating register. Connections shall be suitable to the type of pipe and conditions encountered. Register type shall be a direct reading remote register designed in accordance with AWWA C706 or an encoder type remote register designed in accordance with AWWA C707. Meters shall comply with the accuracy and capacity requirements of AWWA C702. 2.2.2.16 2.2.2.17 Omitted Meter Boxes
Meter boxes shall be of cast iron, concrete, or plastic. The boxes shall be of sufficient size to completely enclose the meter and shutoff valve or service stop. Meter boxes set in paved areas subject to vehicular traffic shall be cast iron, or concrete with cast iron lid and cast iron meter reader lid. Boxes set in sidewalks, not subject to vehicular traffic, shall use concrete covers with cast iron meter reader lids or shall be concrete with cast iron lid and cast iron meter reader lid. Plastic boxes and lids shall not be used in unpaved areas or grass areas not subject to vehicular traffic. Box height shall extend from invert of the meter to final grade at the meter location. The lid shall have the word "WATER" cast in it. 2.2.2.18 Disinfection
Chlorinating materials shall conform to the following: Chlorine, Liquid: AWWA B301. AWWA B300.
Hypochlorite, Calcium and Sodium:
PART 3 3.1 3.1.1
EXECUTION INSTALLATION OF PIPELINES General Requirements for Installation of Pipelines
These requirements shall apply to all pipeline installation except where specific exception is made in the "Special Requirements..." paragraphs. 3.1.1.1 Location of Water Lines
Terminate the work covered by this section at a point approximately 5 feet from the building , unless otherwise indicated. Where the location of the water line is not clearly defined by dimensions on the drawings, do not lay water line closer horizontally than 10 feet from any sewer line. Where water lines cross under gravity sewer lines, encase sewer line fully in concrete for a distance of at least 10 feet on each side of the crossing, unless sewer line is made of pressure pipe with rubber-gasketed joints and no joint is located within 3 feet horizontally of the crossing. Lay water SECTION 33 11 00 Page 14
W912HN-12-R-0003
lines which cross sewer force mains and inverted siphons at least 2 feet above these sewer lines; when joints in the sewer line are closer than 3 feet horizontally from the water line, encase these joints in concrete. Do not lay water lines in the same trench with gas lines, fuel lines, or electric wiring. Copper tubing shall not be installed in the same trench with ferrous piping materials. Where nonferrous metallic pipe, e.g. copper tubing, cross any ferrous piping, provide a minimum vertical separation of 12 inches between pipes. Where water piping is required to be installed within 3 structures, the water pipe shall be sleeved as required "Casting Pipe". The Contractor shall install the water ensuring that there will be no damage to the structures or movement of foundations or footings. a. feet of existing in Paragraph pipe and sleeve and no settlement
Water Piping Installation Parallel With Sewer Piping (1) Normal Conditions: Lay water piping at least 10 feet horizontally from a sewer or sewer manhole whenever possible. Measure the distance edge-to-edge. (2) Unusual Conditions: When local conditions prevent a horizontal separation of 10 feet, the water piping may be laid closer to a sewer or sewer manhole provided that: (a) The bottom (invert) of the water piping shall be at least 18 inches above the top (crown) of the sewer piping. (b) Where this vertical separation cannot be obtained, the sewer piping shall be constructed of AWWA-approved water pipe and pressure tested in place without leakage prior to backfilling. Approved waste water disposal method shall be utilized. (c) The sewer manhole shall be of watertight construction and tested in place.
b.
Installation of Water Piping Crossing Sewer Piping (1) Normal Conditions: Water piping crossing above sewer piping shall be laid to provide a separation of at least 18 inches between the bottom of the water piping and the top of the sewer piping. (2) Unusual Conditions: When local conditions prevent a vertical separation described above, use the following construction: (a) Sewer piping passing over or under water piping shall be constructed of AWWA-approved ductile iron water piping, pressure tested in place without leakage prior to backfilling. (b) Water piping passing under sewer piping shall, in addition, be protected by providing a vertical separation of at least 18 inches between the bottom of the sewer piping and the top of the water piping; adequate structural support for the sewer piping to prevent excessive deflection of the joints and the settling on and breaking of the water piping; and that the length, minimum 20 feet, of the water piping be centered at the point of the crossing so that joints shall be equidistant and as far as possible from the sewer piping. SECTION 33 11 00 Page 15
W912HN-12-R-0003
c.
Sewer Piping or Sewer Manholes: No water piping shall pass through or come in contact with any part of a sewer manhole. Earthwork
3.1.1.2
Perform earthwork operations in accordance with Section 31 00 00. 3.1.1.3 Pipe Laying and Jointing
Remove fins and burrs from pipe and fittings. Before placing in position, clean pipe, fittings, valves, and accessories, and maintain in a clean condition. Provide proper facilities for lowering sections of pipe into trenches. Do not under any circumstances drop or dump pipe, fittings, valves, or any other water line material into trenches. Cut pipe in a neat workmanlike manner accurately to length established at the site and work into place without springing or forcing. Replace by one of the proper length any pipe or fitting that does not allow sufficient space for proper installation of jointing material. Blocking or wedging between bells and spigots will not be permitted. Lay bell-and-spigot pipe with the bell end pointing in the direction of laying. Grade the pipeline in straight lines; avoid the formation of dips and low points. Support pipe at proper elevation and grade. Secure firm, uniform support. Wood support blocking will not be permitted. Lay pipe so that the full length of each section of pipe and each fitting will rest solidly on the pipe bedding; excavate recesses to accommodate bells, joints, and couplings. Provide anchors and supports where necessary for fastening work into place. Make proper provision for expansion and contraction of pipelines. Keep trenches free of water until joints have been properly made. At the end of each work day, close open ends of pipe temporarily with wood blocks or bulkheads. Do not lay pipe when conditions of trench or weather prevent installation. Depth of cover over top of pipe shall not be less than 2 1/2 feet. 3.1.1.4 Installation of Tracer Wire
Install a continuous length of tracer wire for the full length of each run of nonmetallic pipe. Attach wire to top of pipe in such manner that it will not be displaced during construction operations. 3.1.1.5 Connections to Existing Water Lines
Make connections to existing water lines after approval is obtained and with a minimum interruption of service on the existing line. Make connections to existing lines under pressure in accordance with the recommended procedures of the manufacturer of the pipe being tapped. 3.1.1.6 Penetrations
Pipe passing through walls of valve pits and structures shall be provided with ductile-iron or Schedule 40 steel wall sleeves. Annular space between walls and sleeves shall be filled with rich cement mortar. Annular space between pipe and sleeves shall be filled with mastic. 3.1.1.7 Flanged Pipe
Flanged pipe shall only be installed above ground or with the flanges in valve pits.
SECTION 33 11 00
Page 16
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.1.2 3.1.2.1
Special Requirements for Installation of Water Mains Installation of Ductile-Iron Piping
Unless otherwise specified, install pipe and fittings in accordance with paragraph entitled "General Requirements for Installation of Pipelines" and with the requirements of AWWA C600 for pipe installation, joint assembly, valve-and-fitting installation, and thrust restraint. a. Jointing: Make push-on joints with the gaskets and lubricant specified for this type joint; assemble in accordance with the applicable requirements of AWWA C600 for joint assembly. Make mechanical joints with the gaskets, glands, bolts, and nuts specified for this type joint; assemble in accordance with the applicable requirements of AWWA C600 for joint assembly and the recommendations of Appendix A to AWWA C111/A21.11. Make flanged joints with the gaskets, bolts, and nuts specified for this type joint. Make flanged joints up tight; avoid undue strain on flanges, fittings, valves, and other equipment and accessories. Align bolt holes for each flanged joint. Use full size bolts for the bolt holes; use of undersized bolts to make up for misalignment of bolt holes or for any other purpose will not be permitted. Do not allow adjoining flange faces to be out of parallel to such degree that the flanged joint cannot be made watertight without overstraining the flange. When flanged pipe or fitting has dimensions that do not allow the making of a proper flanged joint as specified, replace it by one of proper dimensions. Use setscrewed flanges to make flanged joints where conditions prevent the use of full-length flanged pipe and assemble in accordance with the recommendations of the setscrewed flange manufacturer. Make insulating joints with the gaskets, sleeves, washers, bolts, and nuts previously specified for this type joint. Assemble insulating joints as specified for flanged joints, except that bolts with insulating sleeves shall be full size for the bolt holes. Ensure that there is no metal-to-metal contact between dissimilar metals after the joint has been assembled. Allowable Deflection: The maximum allowable deflection shall be as given in AWWA C600. If the alignment requires deflection in excess of the above limitations, special bends or a sufficient number of shorter lengths of pipe shall be furnished to provide angular deflections within the limit set forth. Pipe Anchorage: Provide concrete thrust blocks (reaction backing) for pipe anchorage. Thrust blocks shall be in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C600 for thrust restraint. Use concrete, ASTM C 94/C 94M, having a minimum compressive strength of 2,500 psi at 28 days; or use concrete of a mix not leaner than one part cement, 2 1/2 parts sand, and 5 parts gravel, having the same minimum compressive strength. Exterior Protection: Completely encase buried ductile iron pipelines with polyethylene tube or sheet, using polyethylene film, in accordance with AWWA C105/A21.5. Installation of PVC Plastic Water Main Pipe
b.
c.
d.
3.1.2.2
Installation of PVC Plastic Water Main Pipe and Associated Fittings: Unless SECTION 33 11 00 Page 17
W912HN-12-R-0003
otherwise specified, install pipe and fittings in accordance with paragraph entitled "General Requirements for Installation of Pipelines"; with the requirements of UBPPA UNI-B-3 for laying of pipe, joining PVC pipe to fittings and accessories, and setting of hydrants, valves, and fittings; and with the recommendations for pipe joint assembly and appurtenance installation in AWWA M23, Chapter 7, "Installation." a. Jointing: Make push-on joints with the elastomeric gaskets specified for this type joint, using either elastomeric-gasket bell-end pipe or elastomeric-gasket couplings. For pipe-to-pipe push-on joint connections, use only pipe with push-on joint ends having factory-made bevel; for push-on joint connections to metal fittings, valves, and other accessories, cut spigot end of pipe off square and re-bevel pipe end to a bevel approximately the same as that on ductile-iron pipe used for the same type of joint. Use an approved lubricant recommended by the pipe manufacturer for push-on joints. Assemble push-on joints for pipe-to-pipe joint connections in accordance with the requirements of UBPPA UNI-B-3 for laying the pipe and the recommendations in AWWA M23, Chapter 7, "Installation," for pipe joint assembly. Assemble push-on joints for connection to fittings, valves, and other accessories in accordance with the requirements of UBPPA UNI-B-3 for joining PVC pipe to fittings and accessories and with the applicable requirements of AWWA C600 for joint assembly. Make compression-type joints/mechanical joints with the gaskets, glands, bolts, nuts, and internal stiffeners previously specified for this type joint; assemble in accordance with the requirements of UBPPA UNI-B-3 for joining PVC pipe to fittings and accessories, with the applicable requirements of AWWA C600 for joint assembly, and with the recommendations of Appendix A to AWWA C111/A21.11. Cut off spigot end of pipe for compression-type joint/mechanical-joint connections and do not re-bevel. Assemble joints made with sleeve-type mechanical couplings in accordance with the recommendations of the coupling manufacturer using internal stiffeners as previously specified for compression-type joints. Offset: Maximum offset in alignment between adjacent pipe joints shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Contracting Officer, but shall not exceed 5 degrees. Pipe Anchorage: Provide concrete thrust blocks (reaction backing) for pipe anchorage. Thrust blocks shall be in accordance with the requirements of UBPPA UNI-B-3 for reaction or thrust blocking and plugging of dead ends. Use concrete, ASTM C 94/C 94M, having a minimum compressive strength of 2,500 psi at 28 days; or use concrete of a mix not leaner than one part cement, 2 1/2 parts sand, and 5 parts gravel, having the same minimum compressive strength. Fittings: Install in accordance with AWWA C605.
b.
c.
d.
SECTION 33 11 00
Page 18
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.1.2.3 3.1.2.4 3.1.2.5 3.1.2.6 3.1.2.7 3.1.2.8 a.
Omitted Omitted Omitted Omitted Omitted Installation of Valves and Hydrants Installation of Valves: Install gate valves, AWWA C500 and UL 262, in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C600 for valve-and-fitting installation and with the recommendations of the Appendix ("Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Gate Valves") to AWWA C500. Install gate valves, AWWA C509, in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C600 for valve-and-fitting installation and with the recommendations of the Appendix ("Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Gate Valves") to AWWA C509. Install gate valves on PVC water mains in accordance with the recommendations for appurtenance installation in AWWA M23, Chapter 7, "Installation." Install check valves in accordance with the applicable requirements of AWWA C600 for valve-and-fitting installation. Make and assemble joints to gate valves and check valves as specified for making and assembling the same type joints between pipe and fittings. Installation of Hydrants: Install hydrants in accordance with AWWA C600 for hydrant installation and as indicated. Make and assemble joints as specified for making and assembling the same type joints between pipe and fittings. Install hydrants with the 4 1/2 inch connections facing the adjacent paved surface. If there are two paved adjacent surfaces, contact the Contracting Officer for further instructions.
b.
3.1.3 3.1.3.1
Installation of Water Service Piping Location
Connect water service piping to the building service where the building service has been installed. Where building service has not been installed, terminate water service lines approximately 5 feet from the building line at a point directed by the Contracting Officer; such water service lines shall be closed with plugs or caps. 3.1.3.2 Service Line Connections to Water Mains
Connect service linesto the main with a rigid connection or a corporation stop and gooseneck and install a gate valve on service line below the frostline. Connect service lines to ductile-iron water mains in accordance with AWWA C600 for service taps. Connect service lines to PVC plastic water mains in accordance with UBPPA UNI-B-8 and the recommendations of AWWA M23, Chapter 9, "Service Connections." 3.1.4 3.1.4.1 Special Requirements for Installation of Water Service Piping Installation of Metallic Piping
Install pipe and fittings in accordance with paragraph entitled "General Requirements for Installation of Pipelines" and with the applicable requirements of AWWA C600 for pipe installation, unless otherwise specified.
SECTION 33 11 00
Page 19
W912HN-12-R-0003
a.
Jointing: (1) Screwed Joints: Make screwed joints up tight with a stiff mixture of graphite and oil, inert filler and oil, or graphite compound; apply to male threads only. Threads shall be full cut; do not leave more than three threads on the pipe exposed after assembling the joint. (2) Joints for Copper Tubing: Cut copper tubing with square ends; remove fins and burrs. Handle tubing carefully; replace dented, gouged, or otherwise damaged tubing with undamaged tubing. Make solder joints using ASTM B 32, 95-5 tin-antimony or Grade Sn96 solder. Solder and flux shall contain not more than 0.2 percent lead. Before making joint, clean ends of tubing and inside of fitting or coupling with wire brush or abrasive. Apply a rosin flux to the tubing end and on recess inside of fitting or coupling. Insert tubing end into fitting or coupling for the full depth of the recess and solder. For compression joints on flared tubing, insert tubing through the coupling nut and flare tubing. (3) Flanged Joints: Make flanged joints up tight, taking care to avoid undue strain on flanges, valves, fittings, and accessories.
3.1.4.2
Installation of Plastic Piping
Install pipe and fittings in accordance with paragraph entitled "General Requirements for Installation of Pipelines" and with the applicable requirements of ASTM D 2774 and ASTM D 2855, unless otherwise specified. Handle solvent cements used to join plastic piping in accordance with ASTM F 402. a. Jointing: Make solvent-cemented joints for PVC plastic piping using the solvent cement previously specified for this material; assemble joints in accordance with ASTM D 2855. Make plastic pipe joints to other pipe materials in accordance with the recommendations of the plastic pipe manufacturer. Plastic Pipe Connections to Appurtenances: Connect plastic pipe service lines to corporation stops and gate valves in accordance with the recommendations of the plastic pipe manufacturer. Service Lines for Sprinkler Supplies
b.
3.1.4.3
Water service lines used to supply building sprinkler systems for fire protection shall be connected to the water distribution main in accordance with NFPA 24. 3.1.4.4 Location of Meters
Meters and meter boxes shall be installed at the locations shown on the drawings. The meters shall be centered in the boxes to allow for reading and ease of removal or maintenance. 3.1.5 Disinfection
Prior to disinfection, obtain Contracting Officer approval of the proposed method for disposal of waste water from disinfection procedures. Disinfect new water piping and existing water piping affected by Contractor's operations in accordance with AWWA C651. Fill piping systems with solution SECTION 33 11 00 Page 20
W912HN-12-R-0003
containing minimum of 50 parts per million of available chlorine and allow solution to stand for minimum of 24 hours. Flush solution from the systems with domestic water until maximum residual chlorine content is within the range of 0.2 and 0.5 parts per million, or the residual chlorine content of domestic water supply. Obtain at least two consecutive satisfactory bacteriological samples from new water piping, analyze by a certified laboratory, and submit the results prior to the new water piping being placed into service. Disinfection of systems supplying nonpotable water is not required. 3.2 3.2.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Field Tests and Inspections
Prior to hydrostatic testing, obtain Contracting Officer approval of the proposed method for disposal of waste water from hydrostatic testing. The Contracting Officer will conduct field inspections and witness field tests specified in this section. The Contractor shall perform field tests, and provide labor, equipment, and incidentals required for testing. The Contractor shall produce evidence, when required, that any item of work has been constructed in accordance with the drawings and specifications. Do not begin testing on any section of a pipeline where concrete thrust blocks have been provided until at least 5 days after placing of the concrete. 3.2.2 Testing Procedure
Test water mains and water service lines in accordance with the applicable specified standard, except for the special testing requirements given in paragraph entitled "Special Testing Requirements." Test ductile-iron water mains and water service lines in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C600 for hydrostatic testing. The amount of leakage on ductile-iron pipelines with mechanical-joints or push-on joints shall not exceed the amounts given in AWWA C600; no leakage will be allowed at joints made by any other method. Test PVC plastic water mains and water service lines made with PVC plastic water main pipe in accordance with the requirements of UBPPA UNI-B-3 for pressure and leakage tests. The amount of leakage on pipelines made of PVC plastic water main pipe shall not exceed the amounts given in UBPPA UNI-B-3, except that at joints made with sleeve-type mechanical couplings, no leakage will be allowed. Test water service lines in accordance with applicable requirements of AWWA C600 for hydrostatic testing. No leakage will be allowed at copper pipe joints, copper tubing joints (soldered, compression type, brazed), plastic pipe joints, flanged joints and screwed joints. 3.2.3 Special Testing Requirements
For pressure test, use a hydrostatic pressure 50 psi greater than the maximum working pressure of the system, except that for those portions of the system having pipe size larger than 2 inches in diameter, hydrostatic test pressure shall be not less than 200 psi. Hold this pressure for not less than 2 hours. Prior to the pressure test, fill that portion of the pipeline being tested with water for a soaking period of not less than 24 hours. For leakage test, use a hydrostatic pressure not less than the maximum working pressure of the system. Leakage test may be performed at the same time and at the same test pressure as the pressure test. 3.3 CLEANUP
Upon completion of the installation of water lines, and appurtenances, all SECTION 33 11 00 Page 21
W912HN-12-R-0003
debris and surplus materials resulting from the work shall be removed. -- End of Section --
SECTION 33 11 00
Page 22
W912HN-12-R-0003
SECTION 33 30 00 SANITARY SEWERS 04/08 PART 1 1.1 GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA) AWWA C104/A21.4 (2008; Errata 2010) Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water (2008) Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems (2008) Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings for Water (2007) Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings (2006) Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service (2005) Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances
AWWA C105/A21.5
AWWA C110/A21.10
AWWA C111/A21.11
AWWA C153/A21.53
AWWA C600
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM A 123/A 123M (2009) Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products (2009) Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Gravity Sewer Pipe (2007) Standard Specification for Portland Cement (2008a) Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry (2008) Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates (2005a) Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets (2009) Standard Specification for Precast SECTION 33 30 00 Page 1
ASTM A 746
ASTM C 150
ASTM C 270
ASTM C 33/C 33M
ASTM C 443
ASTM C 478
W912HN-12-R-0003
Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections ASTM C 923 (2008) Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures, Pipes and Laterals (2002; R 2009) Testing Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines by Low-Pressure Air Test Method (2009) Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete (2002) Standard Practice for Infiltration and Exfiltration Acceptance Testing of Installed Precast Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines (2000; R 2006) Compression-Recovery of Tape Sealant (2009) Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes and Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants (2005) Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications (2002; R 2008) Determination of External Loading Characteristics of Plastic Pipe by Parallel-Plate Loading (2001; R 2009) Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) and Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Composite Sewer Piping (2005) Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Sewer Pipe and Fittings (2008) Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings (2007) Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals (2009) Standard Specification for Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion Materials Standard Test Methods For Vulcanized Rubber And Thermoplastic Elastomers Tension (2000; R 2007) Tear Strength of SECTION 33 30 00 Page 2
ASTM C 924
ASTM C 94/C 94M
ASTM C 969
ASTM C 972
ASTM C 990
ASTM D 2321
ASTM D 2412
ASTM D 2680
ASTM D 2751
ASTM D 3034
ASTM D 3212
ASTM D 4101
ASTM D 412
ASTM D 624
W912HN-12-R-0003
Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers ASTM F 477 (2008) Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe (2006a) Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Corrugated Sewer Pipe with a Smooth Interior and Fittings
ASTM F 949
U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA) FS A-A-60005 (Basic) Frames.Covers, Gratings, Steps, Sump and Catch Basin, Manhole
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA) 29 CFR 1910.27 Fixed Ladders
UNI-BELL PVC PIPE ASSOCIATION (UBPPA) UBPPA UNI-B-6 (1998) Recommended Practice for Low-Pressure Air Testing of Installed Sewer Pipe
1.2 1.2.1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Sanitary Sewer Gravity Pipeline
Provide mains and laterals of ductile-iron pipe or polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe at the Contractor's option. Provide building connections of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe. Provide new and modify existing exterior sanitary gravity sewer piping and appurtenances. Provide each system complete and ready for operation. The exterior sanitary gravity sewer system includes equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship as specified herein more than 5 feet outside of building walls. 1.2.2 1.2.3 Omitted USACE Project
The construction required herein shall include appurtenant structures and building sewers to points of connection with the building drains 5 feet outside the building to which the sewer system is to be connected. Replace damaged material and redo unacceptable work at no additional cost to the Government. Backfilling shall be accomplished after inspection by the Contracting Officer. Before, during, and after installation, plastic pipe and fittings shall be protected from any environment that would result in damage or deterioration to the material. Keep a copy of the manufacturer's instructions available at the construction site at all times and shall follow these instructions unless directed otherwise by the Contracting Officer. Solvents, solvent compounds, lubricants, elastomeric gaskets, and any similar materials required to install the plastic pipe shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation and shall be discarded if the storage period exceeds the recommended shelf life. Solvents in use shall be discarded when the recommended pot life is exceeded.
SECTION 33 30 00
Page 3
W912HN-12-R-0003
1.3
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals Existing Conditions Drawings of existing conditions, as specified. SD-02 Shop Drawings Drawings Installation and As-Built drawings, as specified. Precast concrete manhole Metal items Frames, covers, and gratings Details, as specified. SD-03 Product Data Pipeline materials Submit manufacturer's standard drawings or catalog cuts. SD-06 Test Reports Reports Test and inspection reports, as specified. SD-07 Certificates Portland Cement Certificates of compliance stating the type of cement used in manufacture of concrete pipe, fittings and precast manholes. Gaskets Certificates of compliance stating that the fittings or gaskets used for waste drains or lines designated on the plans as oil resistant. 1.4 1.4.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications
Install specified materials by a licensed underground utility Contractor licensed for such work in the state where the work is to be performed. Installing Contractor's License shall be current and be state certified or state registered. SECTION 33 30 00 Page 4
W912HN-12-R-0003
1.4.2
Drawings a. Submit Installation Drawings showing complete detail, both plan and side view details with proper layout and elevations. b. Submit As-Built Drawings for the complete sanitary sewer system showing complete detail with all dimensions, both above and below grade, including invert elevation.
1.5 1.5.1
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Delivery and Storage Piping
1.5.1.1
Inspect materials delivered to site for damage; store with minimum of handling. Store materials on site in enclosures or under protective coverings. Store plastic piping and jointing materials and rubber gaskets under cover out of direct sunlight. Do not store materials directly on the ground. Keep inside of pipes and fittings free of dirt and debris. 1.5.1.2 Metal Items
Check upon arrival; identify and segregate as to types, functions, and sizes. Store off the ground in a manner affording easy accessibility and not causing excessive rusting or coating with grease or other objectionable materials. 1.5.1.3 Cement, Aggregate, and Reinforcement
As specified in Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. 1.5.2 Handling
Handle pipe, fittings, and other accessories in such manner as to ensure delivery to the trench in sound undamaged condition. Take special care not to damage linings of pipe and fittings; if lining is damaged, make satisfactory repairs. Carry, do not drag, pipe to trench. 1.6 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
Submit drawings of existing conditions, after a thorough inspection of the area in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Details shall include the environmental conditions of the site and adjacent areas. Submit copies of the records for verification before starting work. PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS PIPELINE MATERIALS
Pipe shall conform to the respective specifications and other requirements specified below.
SECTION 33 30 00
Page 5
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.1.5 2.1.5.1
Omitted Omitted Omitted Omitted Ductile Iron Gravity Sewer Pipe and Associated Fittings Ductile Iron Gravity Pipe and Fittings
Ductile iron pipe shall conform to ASTM A 746, Thickness Class 50. Fittings shall conform to AWWA C110/A21.10 or AWWA C153/A21.53. Fittings with push-on joint ends shall conform to the same requirements as fittings with mechanical-joint ends, except that the bell design shall be modified, as approved by the Contracting Officer, for push-on joint. Fittings shall have strength at least equivalent to that of the pipe. Ends of pipe and fittings shall be suitable for the joints specified hereinafter. Pipe and fittings shall have cement-mortar lining conforming to AWWA C104/A21.4, standard thickness. 2.1.5.2 Ductile Iron Gravity Joints and Jointing Materials
Pipe and fittings shall have push-on joints or mechanical joints, except as otherwise specified in this paragraph. Push-on joint pipe ends and fitting ends, gaskets, and lubricant for joint assembly shall conform to AWWA C111/A21.11. Mechanical joint requirements for pipe ends, glands, bolts and nuts, and gaskets shall conform to AWWA C111/A21.11. 2.1.6 2.1.7 2.1.8 2.1.9 2.1.9.1 Omitted Omitted Omitted PVC Plastic Gravity Sewer Piping PVC Plastic Gravity Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, or ASTM F 949 with ends suitable for elastomeric gasket joints. 2.1.9.2 PVC Plastic Gravity Joints and Jointing Material Gaskets shall conform to ASTM F 477.
Joints shall conform to ASTM D 3212. 2.1.10 2.1.11 2.1.12 2.1.13 2.1.14 2.2 2.2.1 Omitted Omitted Omitted Omitted Omitted CONCRETE MATERIALS Cement Mortar
Cement mortar shall conform to ASTM C 270, Type M with Type II cement. 2.2.2 Portland Cement
Portland cement shall conform to ASTM C 150, Type II for concrete used in concrete pipe, concrete pipe fittings, and manholes and type optional with the Contractor for cement used in concrete cradle, concrete encasement, and SECTION 33 30 00 Page 6
W912HN-12-R-0003
thrust blocking. Where aggregates are alkali reactive, as determined by Appendix XI of ASTM C 33/C 33M, a cement containing less than 0.60 percent alkalies shall be used. 2.2.3 Portland Cement Concrete
Portland cement concrete shall conform to ASTM C 94/C 94M, compressive strength of 4000 psi at 28 days, except for concrete cradle and encasement or concrete blocks for manholes. Concrete used for cradle and encasement shall have a compressive strength of 2500 psi minimum at 28 days. Concrete in place shall be protected from freezing and moisture loss for 7 days. 2.3 2.3.1 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Precast Concrete Manholes
Precast concrete manhole risers, base sections, and tops shall conform to ASTM C 478 and be manufactured in accordance with Section 03 40 00.00 10 PLANT-PRECAST CONCRETE PRODUCTS FOR BELOW GRADE CONSTRUCTION; base and first riser shall be monolithic. 2.3.2 Gaskets and Connectors
Gaskets for joints between manhole sections shall conform to ASTM C 443. Resilient connectors for making joints between manhole and pipes entering manhole shall conform to ASTM C 923 or ASTM C 990. 2.3.3 External Preformed Rubber Joint Seals
An external preformed rubber joint seal shall be an accepted method of sealing cast iron covers to precast concrete sections to prevent ground water infiltration into sewer systems. All finished and sealed manholes constructed in accordance with paragraph entitled "Manhole Construction" shall be tested for leakage in the same manner as pipelines as described in paragraph entitled "Leakage Tests." The seal shall be multi-section with a neoprene rubber top section and all lower sections made of Ethylene Proplene Di Monomer (EPDM) rubber with a minimum thickness of 60 mils. Each unit shall consist of a top and bottom section and shall have mastic on the bottom of the bottom section and mastic on the top and bottom of the top section. The mastic shall be a non-hardening butyl rubber sealant and shall seal to the cone/top slab of the manhole/catch basin and over the lip of the casting. Extension sections shall cover up to two more adjusting rings. Properties and values are listed in the following tables: Properties, Test Methods and Minimum Values for Rubber used in Preformed Joint Seals Physical Properties Tensile, psi Elogation percent Tear Resistance, ppi Test Methods ASTM D 412 ASTM D 412 ASTM D 624 (Die B) ASTM C 972 (mod.) EPDM 1840 553 280 Neoprene 2195 295 160 Butyl mastic 350 -
Rebound, percent, 5 minutes
11
SECTION 33 30 00
Page 7
W912HN-12-R-0003
Properties, Test Methods and Minimum Values for Rubber used in Preformed Joint Seals Physical Properties Rebound, percent, 2 hours 2.3.4 2.3.4.1 Metal Items Frames, Covers, and Gratings for Manholes Test Methods ASTM C 972 EPDM Neoprene Butyl mastic 12
FS A-A-60005, cast iron; figure numbers shall be as follows: a. Traffic manhole: Frame: Cover: Steps: b. Provide in paved areas.
Figure 1, Size 22A Figure 8, Size 22A Figure 19
Non-traffic manhole: Frame: Cover: Steps: Figure 4, Size 22 Figure 12, Size 22 Figure 19
Frames and covers shall be cast iron, ductile iron or reinforced concrete. Cast iron frames and covers shall be as indicated or shall be of type suitable for the application, circular, without vent holes. The frames and covers shall have a combined weight of not less than 400 pounds. Reinforced concrete frames and covers shall be as indicated or shall conform to ASTM C 478. The word "Sewer" shall be stamped or cast into covers so that it is plainly visible. 2.3.4.2 Manhole Steps
Zinc-coated steel conforming to 29 CFR 1910.27. As an option, plastic or rubber coating pressure-molded to the steel may be used. Plastic coating shall conform to ASTM D 4101, copolymer polypropylene. Rubber shall conform to ASTM C 443, except shore A durometer hardness shall be 70 plus or minus 5. Aluminum steps or rungs will not be permitted. Steps are not required in manholes less than 4 feet deep. 2.3.4.3 Manhole Ladders
A steel ladder shall be provided where the depth of a manhole exceeds 12 feet. The ladder shall not be less than 16 inches in width, with 3/4 inch diameter rungs spaced 12 inches apart. The two stringers shall be a minimum 3/8 inch thick and 2 inches wide. Ladders and inserts shall be galvanized after fabrication in conformance with ASTM A 123/A 123M. 2.4 REPORTS
Submit Test Reports. Compaction and density test shall be in accordance with Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK. Submit Inspection Reports for daily activities during the installation of the sanitary system. Information in the report shall be detailed enough to describe location of work and amount of pipe laid in place, measured in linear feet.
SECTION 33 30 00
Page 8
W912HN-12-R-0003
PART 3 3.1 3.1.1
EXECUTION INSTALLATION OF PIPELINES AND APPURTENANT CONSTRUCTION General Requirements for Installation of Pipelines
These general requirements apply except where specific exception is made in the following paragraphs entitled "Special Requirements." 3.1.1.1 Location
The work covered by this section shall terminate at a point approximately 5 feet from the building, unless otherwise indicated. Where the location of the sewer is not clearly defined by dimensions on the drawings, do not lay sewer line closer horizontally than 10 feet to a water main or service line. Where sanitary sewer lines pass above water lines, encase sewer in concrete for a distance of 10 feet on each side of the crossing, or substitute rubber-gasketed pressure pipe for the pipe being used for the same distance. Where sanitary sewer lines pass below water lines, lay pipe so that no joint in the sewer line will be closer than 3 feet, horizontal distance, to the water line. 3.1.1.2 Earthwork
Perform earthwork operations in accordance with Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK. 3.1.1.3 Pipe Laying and Jointing
Inspect each pipe and fitting before and after installation; replace those found defective and remove from site. Provide proper facilities for lowering sections of pipe into trenches. Lay nonpressure pipe with the bell ends in the upgrade direction. Adjust spigots in bells to give a uniform space all around. Blocking or wedging between bells and spigots will not be permitted. Replace by one of the proper dimensions, pipe or fittings that do not allow sufficient space for installation of joint material. At the end of each work day, close open ends of pipe temporarily with wood blocks or bulkheads. Provide batterboards not more than 25 feet apart in trenches for checking and ensuring that pipe invert elevations are as indicated. Laser beam method may be used in lieu of batterboards for the same purpose. Branch connections shall be made by use of regular fittings or solvent cemented saddles as approved. Saddles for ABS and PVC composite pipe shall conform to Figure 2 of ASTM D 2680; saddles for ABS pipe shall comply with Table 3 of ASTM D 2751; and saddles for PVC pipe shall conform to Table 4 of ASTM D 3034. 3.1.1.4 Connections to Existing Lines
Obtain approval from the Contracting Officer before making connection to existing line. Conduct work so that there is minimum interruption of service on existing line.
SECTION 33 30 00
Page 9
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.1.2 3.1.2.1 3.1.2.2 3.1.2.3 3.1.2.4 3.1.2.5
Special Requirements Omitted Omitted Omitted Omitted Installation of Ductile Iron Gravity Sewer Pipe
Unless otherwise specified, install pipe and associated fittings in accordance with paragraph entitled "General Requirements for Installation of Pipelines" of this section and with the requirements of AWWA C600 for pipe installation and joint assembly. a. Make push-on joints with the gaskets and lubricant specified for this type joint and assemble in accordance with the applicable requirements of AWWA C600 for joint assembly. Make mechanical-joints with the gaskets, glands, bolts, and nuts specified for this type joint and assemble in accordance with the applicable requirements of AWWA C600 for joint assembly and the recommendations of Appendix A to AWWA C111/A21.11. b. Exterior protection: Completely encase buried ductile iron pipelines with polyethylene tube or sheet in accordance with AWWA C105/A21.5, using the appropriate Class polyethylene film. 3.1.2.6 3.1.2.7 3.1.2.8 3.1.2.9 Omitted Omitted Omitted Installation of PVC Plastic Piping
Install pipe and fittings in accordance with paragraph entitled "General Requirements for Installation of Pipelines" of this section and with the requirements of ASTM D 2321 for laying and joining pipe and fittings. Make joints with the gaskets specified for joints with this piping and assemble in accordance with the requirements of ASTM D 2321 for assembly of joints. Make joints to other pipe materials in accordance with the recommendations of the plastic pipe manufacturer. 3.1.3 Concrete Work
Cast-in-place concrete is included in Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. The pipe shall be supported on a concrete cradle, or encased in concrete where indicated or directed. 3.1.4 Manhole Construction
Construct base slab of cast-in-place concrete or use precast concrete base sections. Make inverts in cast-in-place concrete and precast concrete bases with a smooth-surfaced semi-circular bottom conforming to the inside contour of the adjacent sewer sections. For changes in direction of the sewer and entering branches into the manhole, make a circular curve in the manhole invert of as large a radius as manhole size will permit. For cast-in-place concrete construction, either pour bottom slabs and walls integrally or key and bond walls to bottom slab. No parging will be permitted on interior manhole walls. For precast concrete construction, make joints between manhole sections with the gaskets specified for this purpose; install in the manner specified for installing joints in concrete SECTION 33 30 00 Page 10
W912HN-12-R-0003
piping. Parging will not be required for precast concrete manholes. Cast-in-place concrete work shall be in accordance with the requirements specified under paragraph entitled "Concrete Work" of this section. Make joints between concrete manholes and pipes entering manholes with the resilient connectors specified for this purpose; install in accordance with the recommendations of the connector manufacturer. Where a new manhole is constructed on an existing line, remove existing pipe as necessary to construct the manhole. Cut existing pipe so that pipe ends are approximately flush with the interior face of manhole wall, but not protruding into the manhole. Use resilient connectors as previously specified for pipe connectors to concrete manholes. 3.1.5 3.1.5.1 Miscellaneous Construction and Installation Connecting to Existing Manholes
Pipe connections to existing manholes shall be made so that finish work will conform as nearly as practicable to the applicable requirements specified for new manholes, including all necessary concrete work, cutting, and shaping. The connection shall be centered on the manhole. Holes for the new pipe shall be of sufficient diameter to allow packing cement mortar around the entire periphery of the pipe but no larger than 1.5 times the diameter of the pipe. Cutting the manhole shall be done in a manner that will cause the least damage to the walls. 3.1.5.2 Metal Work
a. Workmanship and finish: Perform metal work so that workmanship and finish will be equal to the best practice in modern structural shops and foundries. Form iron to shape and size with sharp lines and angles. Do shearing and punching so that clean true lines and surfaces are produced. Make castings sound and free from warp, cold shuts, and blow holes that may impair their strength or appearance. Give exposed surfaces a smooth finish with sharp well-defined lines and arises. Provide necessary rabbets, lugs, and brackets wherever necessary for fitting and support. b. Field painting: After installation, clean cast-iron frames, covers, gratings, and steps not buried in concrete to bare metal of mortar, rust, grease, dirt, and other deleterious materials and apply a coat of bituminous paint. Do not paint surfaces subject to abrasion. 3.1.6 3.1.7 Omitted Installations of Wye Branches
Cutting into piping for connections shall not be done except in special approved cases. When the connecting pipe cannot be adequately supported on undisturbed earth or tamped backfill, the pipe shall be encased in concrete backfill or supported on a concrete cradle as directed. Concrete required because of conditions resulting from faulty construction methods or negligence by the Contractor shall be installed at no additional cost to the Government. The installation of wye branches in an existing sewer shall be made by a method which does not damage the integrity of the existing sewer. One acceptable method consists of removing one pipe section, breaking off the upper half of the bell of the next lower section and half of the running bell of wye section. After placing the new section, it shall be rotated so that the broken half of the bell will be at the bottom. The two joints shall then be made with joint packing and SECTION 33 30 00 Page 11
W912HN-12-R-0003
cement mortar. 3.2 3.2.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Field Tests and Inspections
The Contracting Officer will conduct field inspections and witness field tests specified in this section. Perform field tests and provide labor, equipment, and incidentals required for testing. Be able to produce evidence, when required, that each item of work has been constructed in accordance with the drawings and specifications. 3.2.2 Tests for Nonpressure Lines
Check each straight run of pipeline for gross deficiencies by holding a light in a manhole; it shall show a practically full circle of light through the pipeline when viewed from the adjoining end of line. When pressure piping is used in a nonpressure line for nonpressure use, test this piping as specified for nonpressure pipe. 3.2.2.1 Leakage Tests
Test lines for leakage by either infiltration tests or exfiltration tests, or by low-pressure air tests. Prior to testing for leakage, backfill trench up to at least lower half of pipe. When necessary to prevent pipeline movement during testing, place additional backfill around pipe sufficient to prevent movement, but leaving joints uncovered to permit inspection. When leakage or pressure drop exceeds the allowable amount specified, make satisfactory correction and retest pipeline section in the same manner. Correct visible leaks regardless of leakage test results. a. Infiltration tests and exfiltration tests: Perform these tests for sewer lines made of the specified materials, not only concrete, in accordance with ASTM C 969. Make calculations in accordance with the Appendix to ASTM C 969. b. Low-pressure air tests: Perform tests as follows:
1 Ductile-iron pipelines: Test in accordance with the applicable requirements of ASTM C 924. Allowable pressure drop shall be as given in ASTM C 924. Make calculations in accordance with the Appendix to ASTM C 924. 2 PVC plastic pipelines: Test in accordance with UBPPA UNI-B-6. Allowable pressure drop shall be as given in UBPPA UNI-B-6. Make calculations in accordance with the Appendix to UBPPA UNI-B-6. 3.2.2.2 Deflection Testing
Perform a deflection test on entire length of installed plastic pipeline on completion of work adjacent to and over the pipeline, including leakage tests, backfilling, placement of fill, grading, paving, concreting, and any other superimposed loads determined in accordance with ASTM D 2412. Deflection of pipe in the installed pipeline under external loads shall not exceed 4.5 percent of the average inside diameter of pipe. Determine whether the allowable deflection has been exceeded by use of a pull-through device or a deflection measuring device. a. Pull-through device: This device shall be a spherical, spheroidal, Page 12
SECTION 33 30 00
W912HN-12-R-0003
or elliptical ball, a cylinder, or circular sections fused to a common shaft. Circular sections shall be so spaced on the shaft that distance from external faces of front and back sections will equal or exceed diameter of the circular section. Pull-through device may also be of a design promulgated by the Uni-Bell Plastic Pipe Association, provided the device meets the applicable requirements specified in this paragraph, including those for diameter of the device, and that the mandrel has a minimum of 9 arms. Ball, cylinder, or circular sections shall conform to the following: 1 A diameter, or minor diameter as applicable, of 95 percent of the average inside diameter of the pipe; tolerance of plus 0.5 percent will be permitted. 2 Homogeneous material throughout, shall have a density greater than 1.0 as related to water at 39.2 degrees F, and shall have a surface Brinell hardness of not less than 150. 3 Center bored and through-bolted with a 1/4 inch minimum diameter steel shaft having a yield strength of not less than 70,000 psi, with eyes or loops at each end for attaching pulling cables. 4 Each eye or loop shall be suitably backed with a flange or heavy washer such that a pull exerted on opposite end of shaft will produce compression throughout remote end. b. Deflection measuring device: Sensitive to 1.0 percent of the diameter of the pipe being tested and shall be accurate to 1.0 percent of the indicated dimension. Deflection measuring device shall be approved prior to use. c. Pull-through device procedure: Pass the pull-through device through each run of pipe, either by pulling it through or flushing it through with water. If the device fails to pass freely through a pipe run, replace pipe which has the excessive deflection and completely retest in same manner and under same conditions. d. Deflection measuring device procedure: Measure deflections through each run of installed pipe. If deflection readings in excess of 4.5 percent of average inside diameter of pipe are obtained, retest pipe by a run from the opposite direction. If retest continues to show a deflection in excess of 4.5 percent of average inside diameter of pipe, replace pipe which has excessive deflection and completely retest in same manner and under same conditions. 3.2.3 3.2.4 Omitted Field Tests for Concrete
Field testing requirements are covered in Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE -- End of Section --
SECTION 33 30 00
Page 13
W912HN-12-R-0003
SECTION 33 34 00 FORCE MAINS AND INVERTED SIPHONS; SEWER 04/08 PART 1 1.1 GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. AMERICAN PETROLEUM INSTITUTE (API) API Spec 6D (2008; Errata 1 2008; Errata 2 2008; Errata 3 2009; Addendum 1 2009; Errata 4 2010; Errata 5 2010; Errata 6 2011; Addendum 2 2011) Specification for Pipeline Valves
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA) AWWA C111/A21.11 (2007) Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings (2008) Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines - Enamel and Tape - Hot-Applied (2007) Standard for Liquid Epoxy Coating Systems for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines (2009) Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service (2001) Swing-Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 2 In. (50 mm) Through 24 In. (600 mm) NPS (2005) Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances (2007; Errata 2008) Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, and Fabricated Fittings, 4 In. Through 12 In. (100 mm Through 300 mm), for Water Distribution
AWWA C203
AWWA C210
AWWA C500
AWWA C508
AWWA C600
AWWA C900
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME) ASME B16.1 (2010) Gray Iron Threaded Fittings; Classes 25, 125 and 250
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM D 1785 (2006) Standard Specification for SECTION 33 34 00 Page 1
W912HN-12-R-0003
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC), Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120 ASTM D 2241 (2009) Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series) (2006) Standard Specification for Threaded Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80 (2004e1) Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems (2008) Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pressure Piping (1998; R 2005) Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals (2006) PTFE Resin Skived Tape (2008) Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe
ASTM D 2464
ASTM D 2564
ASTM D 2774
ASTM D 3139
ASTM D 3308 ASTM F 477
DUCTILE IRON PIPE RESEARCH ASSOCIATION (DIPRA) DIPRA TRD (2002) Thrust Restraint Design for Ductile Iron Pipe
MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS INDUSTRY (MSS) MSS SP-78 (2005a) Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends
1.2
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-06 Test Reports Hydrostatic Tests. Copies of test results. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Do not damage pipe, fittings and accessories, and pipe coatings during delivery, handling, and storage.
SECTION 33 34 00
Page 2
W912HN-12-R-0003
PART 2 2.1
PRODUCTS PIPE AND FITTINGS
Piping for force mains less than 4 inches in diameter shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic. Piping for force mains 4 inches in diameter and larger shall be PVC plastic. Pipe shall conform to the respective specifications, manufacturer specifications, and other requirements specified below. 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.2.1 Omitted Plastic Pipe PVC Pipe
a. PVC Pipe and Fittings Less Than 4 inches Diameter: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40, or ASTM D 2241, SDR 26, with screw joints, push-on joints, or solvent weld joints. b. PVC Pipe and Fittings 4 inches Diameter and Larger: SDR 26, or AWWA C900, Class 150, with push-on joints. 2.2 2.2.1 JOINTS PVC Piping a. b. c. Screw Joint Fittings: Push-On Joint Fittings: Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2464, Schedule 80. ASTM D 3139, with ASTM F 477gaskets. ASTM D 2241,
ASTM D 2564.
d. Couplings for use with plain end pipe shall have centering rings or stops to ensure the coupling is centered on the joint. 2.3 2.3.1 VALVES Gate Valves
Gate valves 3 inches and larger shall comply with AWWA C500. Valves for buried service shall be non-rising stem (NRS), 2 inch square nut operated with joints applicable to the pipe or installation. Buried valves shall be furnished with extension stems comprising socket, extension stem and operating nut, and shall be of an appropriate length to bring operating nut to within 6 inches of grade. One 4 foot "T" handle valve wrench shall be furnished for each quantity of 6 buried valves. Gate valves that are exposed or installed inside shall be outside screw and yoke (OS&Y), handwheel operated with flange ends unless otherwise indicated. Gate valve operating nuts and handwheels shall have an arrow and the word "OPEN" cast in raised letters to indicate the direction of opening. Gate valves 14 inches and larger shall be equipped with gearing to reduce operating effort. Gate valves 14 inches and larger installed in horizontal lines in horizontal position with stems horizontal shall be equipped with bronze track, roller and scrapers to support the weight of the gate for its full length of travel. Gate valves 14 inches and larger installed in vertical pipe lines with stems horizontal shall be fitted with slides to assist the travel of the gate assembly.
SECTION 33 34 00
Page 3
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.3.2
Check Valves
Provide check valves that permit free flow of sewage forward and provide a positive check against backflow. Design check valves for a minimum working pressure of 150 psi or as indicated. The body shall be iron. The manufacturer's name, initials, or trademark and also the size of the valve, working pressure, and direction of flow shall be directly cast on the body. a. Ball Check Valves shall be iron body, shall have flanged ends, and shall be the non-slam type. Flanges shall be the 125 pound type complying with ASME B16.1. Ball shall be stainless steel unless otherwise specified. b. Swing Check Valves shall comply with AWWA C508 and shall be iron body, bronze mounted, and shall have flanged ends. Flanges shall be the 125 pound type complying with ASME B16.1. 2.3.3 Plug Valves Steel plug valves shall
Cast iron valves shall comply with MSS SP-78. comply with API Spec 6D. 2.3.4 Pinch Valves
Pinch valves shall be double acting, jam-proof type with unobstructed streamlined flows and built-in operator. The body shall be iron with a non-rising handwheel. The sleeve shall be of pure gum rubber, neoprene, Buna N or hypalon as required for service. The valve shall have flanged ends. Flanges shall be of the 125 pound type complying with ASME B16.1. 2.3.5 Air Release Valves
Air release valves shall be designed to permit release of air from an empty pipe during filling and shall be capable of discharging accumulated air in the line while the line is in operation and under pressure. Valves shall be attached by means of threaded pipe connections. Valves shall be vented to the atmosphere. a. Manual Air Release Valves: Manual air release valves shall consist of a 3 inch gate valve and 3 inch ductile iron pipe and fittings. The valve shall be installed with its line of flow in the horizontal position. b. Automatic Air Release Valve: Automatic air release valves shall be of the compound lever type capable of withstanding operating pressures of 150 psi. The valves shall have a 1/2 inch outlet. The body and cover of the valve shall be of iron with a stainless steel float. All internal parts shall be stainless steel or bronze. The valve shall be specifically adapted for use with sewage. Each valve shall be complete with hose and blow-off valves to permit backflushing without dismantling the valve. 2.4 2.5 2.6 OMITTED OMITTED MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
Miscellaneous materials shall comply with the following requirements:
SECTION 33 34 00
Page 4
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.6.1
Pipe Coatings and Linings a. b. c. Steel, interior: AWWA C203 or AWWA C210. AWWA C203. AWWA C210.
Steel, exterior, buried: Steel, exterior, exposed:
2.6.2
Joint Lubricants
Joint lubricants shall be as recommended by the pipe manufacturer. 2.6.3 Bolts, Nuts and Glands
AWWA C111/A21.11. 2.6.4 Joint Compound
A stiff mixture of graphite and oil or inert filler and oil. 2.6.5 Joint Tape
ASTM D 3308. 2.6.6 Bond Wire
Bond wire type RHW or USE, Size 1/0 AWG, neoprene jacketed copper conductor shaped to stand clear of the joint. PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION INSTALLATION
Pipe, pipe fittings, and appurtenances shall be installed at the locations indicated. Excavation, trenching, and backfilling shall be as specified in Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK. 3.1.1 Adjacent Facilities
Installation of force mains near adjacent facilities shall be as specified in Section 33 30 00 SANITARY SEWERS. 3.1.2 Cutting
Pipe shall be cut in a neat manner with mechanical cutters. Wheel cutters shall be used where practicable. Sharp and rough edges shall be ground smooth and loose material removed from the pipe before laying. 3.1.3 Laying
Except where otherwise authorized, pipe shall be laid with bells facing the direction of laying. Before lowering and while suspended, the pipe shall be inspected for defects. Defective material shall be rejected. Pipe shall be laid in compliance with the following: a. b. Ductile Iron: Steel: AWWA C600.
AWWA C600.
SECTION 33 34 00
Page 5
W912HN-12-R-0003
c. d. e. f. g. h. 3.1.4 3.1.4.1
Concrete:
Manufacturer's instructions. Manufacturer's instructions.
Polyvinyl Chloride: Polyethylene: Polypropylene:
ASTM D 2774. ASTM D 2774. Manufacturer's instructions.
Reinforced Thermosetting Resin: Reinforced Plastic Mortar:
Manufacturer's Instructions.
Jointing Joints for PVC Pipe
a. Threaded joints shall be made by wrapping the male threads with joint tape or by applying an approved thread lubricant, then threading the joining members together. The joint shall be tightened with strap wrenches which will not damage the pipe and fittings. The joint shall be tightened no more than 2 threads past hand-tight. b. Push-on joints: The ends of pipe for push-on joints shall be beveled to facilitate assembly. Pipe shall be marked to indicate when the pipe is fully seated. The gasket shall be lubricated to prevent displacement. The gasket shall remain in proper position in the bell or coupling while the joint is made. c. Solvent-weld joints shall comply with the manufacturer's instructions. 3.1.5 Coating and Lining
Field coating of non-galvanized steel pipe shall comply with AWWA C203. The applied materials shall be tested by means of a spark-type electrical device in compliance with AWWA C203. Flaws and holidays in the coating or lining of the pipe and the pipe joints shall be repaired; the repaired areas shall be at least equal in thickness to the minimum required for the pipe. 3.1.6 3.1.7 Omitted Installation of Valves
Prior to installation, valves shall be cleaned of all foreign matter and inspected for damage. Valves shall be fully opened and closed to ensure that all parts are properly operating. Valves shall be installed with the stem in the vertical position. 3.1.8 Installation of Valve Boxes
Valve boxes shall be installed over each outside gate valve, unless otherwise indicated. Valve boxes shall be centered over the valve. Fill shall be carefully tamped around each valve box to a distance of 4 feet on all sides or to undisturbed trench face, if less than 4 feet. 3.1.9 Installation of Valve Vaults
Valve vaults shall be installed as indicated. SECTION 33 34 00 Page 6
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.1.10
Drain Lines
Drain lines shall be installed where indicated. The drain line shall consist of a tee in the main line with a 4 inch diameter branch, a 4 inch diameter elbow, and a 4 inch gate valve. 3.1.11 Thrust Restraint
Plugs, caps, tees and bends deflecting 11-1/4 degrees or more, either vertically or horizontally, shall be provided with thrust restraint. Valves shall be securely anchored or shall be provided with thrust restraints to prevent movement. Thrust restraints shall be either thrust blocks or, for ductile-iron pipes, restrained joints. 3.1.11.1 Thrust Blocks
Thrust blocking shall be concrete of a mix not leaner than: 1 cement, 2-1/2 sand, 5 gravel; and having a compressive strength of not less than 2000 psi after 28 days. Blocking shall be placed between solid ground and the fitting to be anchored. Unless otherwise indicated or directed, the base and thrust bearing sides of thrust blocks shall be poured directly against undisturbed earth. The sides of thrust blocks not subject to thrust may be poured against forms. The area of bearing shall be as shown or as directed. Blocking shall be placed so that the fitting joints will be accessible for repair. Steel rods and clamps, protected by galvanizing or by coating with bituminous paint, shall be used to anchor vertical down bends into gravity thrust blocks. 3.1.11.2 Restrained Joints
For ductile iron pipe, restrained joints shall be designed by the Contractor or the pipe manufacturer in accordance with DIPRA TRD. 3.1.12 Grout
Grout for exterior joint protection on concrete pipes shall be a mix of 1 part portland cement, 2 parts sand, and of sufficient liquid consistency to flow into the joint recess beneath the diaper. Grout for interior joint protection shall be a mix of 1 part portland cement and 1 part sand. A polyurethane foam loop, impregnated with portland cement, may be substituted for grout for exterior joints. 3.1.13 Bonded Joints
Where indicated, a metallic bond shall be provided at each joint, including joints made with flexible couplings or rubber gaskets, of ferrous-metallic piping to effect continuous conductivity. The bond shall be of the thermal-weld type. 3.2 HYDROSTATIC TESTS
The pipeline shall be subjected to both a pressure test and a leakage test. The method proposed for disposal of waste water from hydrostatic tests shall be approved by the Contracting Officer. Testing is the responsibility of the Contractor. Perform testing using an approved independent testing laboratory or the Contractor, subject to approval. The test may be witnessed by the Contracting Officer. The Contracting Officer shall be notified at least 7 days in advance of equipment tests. The final SECTION 33 34 00 Page 7
W912HN-12-R-0003
test report shall be delivered to the Contracting Officer within 30 days of the test. 3.2.1 Pressure Test
After the pipe has been installed, joints completed, thrust blocks have been in place for at least five days, and the trench has been partially backfilled, leaving the joints exposed for examination, the pipe shall be filled with water to expel all air. The pipeline shall be subjected to a test pressure of 100 psi or 150 percent of the working pressure, whichever is greater, for a period of at least one hour. Each valve shall be opened and closed several times during the test. The exposed pipe, joints, fitting, and valves shall be examined for leaks. Visible leaks shall be stopped or the defective pipe, fitting, joints, or valve shall be replaced. 3.2.2 Leakage Test
The leakage test may be conducted subsequent to or concurrently with the pressure test. The amount of water permitted as leakage for the line shall be placed in a sealed container attached to the supply side of the test pump. No other source of supply will be permitted to be applied to the pump or line under test. The water shall be pumped into the line by the test pump as required to maintain the specified test pressure as described for pressure test for a 2 hour period. Exhaustion of the supply or the inability to maintain the required pressure will be considered test failure. PE pipe can experience diametric expansion and pressure elongation during initial testing. The manufacturer shall be consulted prior to testing for special testing considerations. Allowable leakage shall be determined by the following I-P formula: L = NDP/K Where: L = Allowable leakage in gallons per hour. N = Number of joints in length of pipeline tested. D = Nominal diameter of the pipe in inches. P = Square root of the test pressure in psig. K = 7400 for pipe materials. At the conclusion of the test, the amount of water remaining in the container shall be measured and the results recorded in the test report. 3.2.3 Retesting
If any deficiencies are revealed during any test, such deficiencies shall be corrected and the tests shall be reconducted until the results of the tests are within specified allowances, without additional cost to the Government. -- End of Section --
SECTION 33 34 00
Page 8
W912HN-12-R-0003
SECTION 33 40 00 STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES 08/09 PART 1 1.1 1.1.1 GENERAL MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Pipe Culverts and Storm Drains
The length of pipe installed will be measured along the centerlines of the pipe from end to end of pipe without deductions for diameter of manholes. Pipe will be paid for at the contract unit price for the number of linear feet of culverts or storm drains placed in the accepted work. 1.1.2 Storm Drainage Structures
The quantity of manholes and inlets will be measured as the total number of manholes and inlets of the various types of construction, complete with frames and gratings or covers and, where indicated, with fixed side-rail ladders, constructed to the depth of 8 feet in the accepted work. The depth of manholes and inlets will be measured from the top of grating or cover to invert of outlet pipe. Manholes and inlets constructed to depths greater than the depth specified above will be paid for as units at the contract unit price for manholes and inlets, plus an additional amount per linear foot for the measured depth beyond a depth of 8 feet. 1.1.3 Walls and Headwalls
Walls and headwalls will be measured by the number of cubic yards of reinforced concrete, plain concrete, or masonry used in the construction of the walls and headwalls. Wall and headwalls will be paid for at the contract unit price for the number of walls and headwalls constructed in the completed work. 1.1.4 Flared End Sections
Flared end sections will be measured by the unit. Flared end sections will be paid for at the contract unit price for the various sizes in the accepted work. 1.1.5 Sheeting and Bracing
Payment will be made for that sheeting and bracing ordered to be left in place, based on the number of square feet of sheeting and bracing remaining below the surface of the ground. 1.1.6 Rock Excavation
Payment will be made for the number of cubic yards of material acceptably excavated, as specified and defined as rock excavation in Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK, measured in the original position, and computed by allowing actual width of rock excavation with the following limitations: maximum rock excavation width, 30 inches for pipe of 12 inch or less nominal diameter; maximum rock excavation width, 16 inches greater than outside diameter of pipe of more than 12 inch nominal diameter. Measurement will SECTION 33 40 00 Page 1
W912HN-12-R-0003
include authorized overdepth excavation. Payment will also include all necessary drilling and blasting, and all incidentals necessary for satisfactory excavation and disposal of authorized rock excavation. No separate payment will be made for backfill material required to replace rock excavation; this cost shall be included in the Contractor's unit price bid per cubic yard for rock excavation. In rock excavation for manholes and other appurtenances, 1 foot will be allowed outside the wall lines of the structures. 1.1.7 Backfill Replacing Unstable Material
Payment will be made for the number of cubic yards of select granular material required to replace unstable material for foundations under pipes or drainage structures, which will constitute full compensation for this backfill material, including removal and disposal of unstable material and all excavating, hauling, placing, compacting, and all incidentals necessary to complete the construction of the foundation satisfactorily. 1.1.8 Pipe Placed by Jacking
Payment will be made for the number of linear feet of jacked pipe accepted in the completed work measured along the centerline of the pipe in place. 1.2 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS (AASHTO) AASHTO M 198 (2008) Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes and Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM A 123/A 123M (2009) Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products (2003; R 2008) Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings (1984; R 2009) Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings (2001; R 2007) Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process for Corrugated Steel Pipe (2009) Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings (2003) Standard Practice for Joint Acceptance Testing of Installed Precast Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines SECTION 33 40 00 Page 2
ASTM A 48/A 48M
ASTM A 536
ASTM A 929/A 929M
ASTM B 26/B 26M
ASTM C 1103
W912HN-12-R-0003
ASTM C 139
(2005) Standard Specification for Concrete Masonry Units for Construction of Catch Basins and Manholes (2008) Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains, and Sewers (2009) Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method (2008a) Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry (2009) Standard Specification for Sewer and Manhole Brick (Made from Clay or Shale) (2004) Standard Specification for Compression Joints for Vitrified Clay Pipe and Fittings (2005a) Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets (2009) Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections (2006e1) Concrete Brick (2008) Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale) (2008a) Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe (2008) Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures, Pipes and Laterals (2002; R 2009) Testing Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines by Low-Pressure Air Test Method (2009) Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3) (2700 kN-m/m3) (2004; R 2008) Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types) (2004a; R 2008) Standard Specification for SECTION 33 40 00 Page 3
ASTM C 1433
ASTM C 231
ASTM C 270
ASTM C 32
ASTM C 425
ASTM C 443
ASTM C 478
ASTM C 55 ASTM C 62
ASTM C 76
ASTM C 923
ASTM C 924
ASTM D 1557
ASTM D 1751
ASTM D 1752
W912HN-12-R-0003
Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion ASTM D 2167 (2008) Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method (2007) Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals (2007a) Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)
ASTM D 3212
ASTM D 6938
1.3
SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-03 Product Data Placing Pipe Printed copies of the manufacturer's recommendations for installation procedures of the material being placed, prior to installation. SD-04 Samples Pipe for Culverts and Storm Drains Samples of the following materials, before work is started. SD-07 Certificates Resin Certification Pipeline Testing Hydrostatic Test on Watertight Joints Determination of Density Frame and Cover for Gratings Certified copies of test reports demonstrating conformance to applicable pipe specifications, before pipe is installed. Certification on the ability of frame and cover or gratings to carry the imposed live load. 1.4 1.4.1 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Delivery and Storage
Materials delivered to site shall be inspected for damage, unloaded, and stored with a minimum of handling. Materials shall not be stored directly on the ground. The inside of pipes and fittings shall be kept free of dirt and debris. Before, during, and after installation, plastic pipe and fittings shall be protected from any environment that would result in SECTION 33 40 00 Page 4
W912HN-12-R-0003
damage or deterioration to the material. Keep a copy of the manufacturer's instructions available at the construction site at all times and follow these instructions unless directed otherwise by the Contracting Officer. Solvents, solvent compounds, lubricants, elastomeric gaskets, and any similar materials required to install plastic pipe shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and shall be discarded if the storage period exceeds the recommended shelf life. Solvents in use shall be discarded when the recommended pot life is exceeded. 1.4.2 Handling
Materials shall be handled in a manner that ensures delivery to the trench in sound, undamaged condition. Pipe shall be carried to the trench, not dragged. PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS PIPE FOR CULVERTS AND STORM DRAINS
Pipe for culverts and storm drains shall be of the sizes indicated and shall conform to the requirements specified. 2.1.1 Concrete Pipe
Manufactured in accordance with and conforming to ASTM C 76, Class III. 2.2 2.2.1 DRAINAGE STRUCTURES Flared End Sections
Sections shall be of a standard design fabricated from zinc coated steel sheets meeting requirements of ASTM A 929/A 929M. 2.2.2 Precast Reinforced Concrete Box
Manufactured in accordance with and conforming to ASTM C 1433. 2.3 2.3.1 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Concrete
Unless otherwise specified, concrete and reinforced concrete shall conform to the requirements for concrete under Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. The concrete mixture shall have air content by volume of concrete, based on measurements made immediately after discharge from the mixer, of 5 to 7 percent when maximum size of coarse aggregate exceeds 1-1/2 inches. Air content shall be determined in accordance with ASTM C 231. The concrete covering over steel reinforcing shall not be less than 1 inch thick for covers and not less than 1-1/2 inches thick for walls and flooring. Concrete covering deposited directly against the ground shall have a thickness of at least 3 inches between steel and ground. Expansion-joint filler material shall conform to ASTM D 1751, or ASTM D 1752, or shall be resin-impregnated fiberboard conforming to the physical requirements of ASTM D 1752. 2.3.2 Mortar
Mortar for pipe joints, connections to other drainage structures, and brick or block construction shall conform to ASTM C 270, Type M, except that the SECTION 33 40 00 Page 5
W912HN-12-R-0003
maximum placement time shall be 1 hour. The quantity of water in the mixture shall be sufficient to produce a stiff workable mortar. Water shall be clean and free of harmful acids, alkalies, and organic impurities. The mortar shall be used within 30 minutes after the ingredients are mixed with water. The inside of the joint shall be wiped clean and finished smooth. The mortar head on the outside shall be protected from air and sun with a proper covering until satisfactorily cured. 2.3.3 Precast Concrete Segmental Blocks
Precast concrete segmental block shall conform to ASTM C 139, not more than 8 inches thick, not less than 8 inches long, and of such shape that joints can be sealed effectively and bonded with cement mortar. 2.3.4 Brick
Brick shall conform to ASTM C 62, Grade SW; ASTM C 55, Grade S-I or S-II; or ASTM C 32, Grade MS. Mortar for jointing and plastering shall consist of one part portland cement and two parts fine sand. Lime may be added to the mortar in a quantity not more than 25 percent of the volume of cement. The joints shall be filled completely and shall be smooth and free from surplus mortar on the inside of the structure. Brick structures shall be plastered with 1/2 inch of mortar over the entire outside surface of the walls. For square or rectangular structures, brick shall be laid in stretcher courses with a header course every sixth course. For round structures, brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course a stretcher course. 2.3.5 Precast Reinforced Concrete Manholes
Conform to ASTM C 478. Joints between precast concrete risers and tops shall be made with flexible watertight, rubber-type gaskets meeting the requirements of paragraph JOINTS. 2.3.6 2.3.7 Omitted Frame and Cover for Gratings
Frame and cover for gratings shall be cast gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 35B; cast ductile iron, ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12; or cast aluminum, ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 356.OT6. Weight, shape, size, and waterway openings for grates and curb inlets shall be as indicated on the plans. 2.3.8 2.3.8.1 a. Joints Flexible Watertight Joints
Materials: Flexible watertight joints shall be made with plastic or rubber-type gaskets for concrete pipe and with factory-fabricated resilient materials for clay pipe. The design of joints and the physical requirements for plastic gaskets shall conform to AASHTO M 198, and rubber-type gaskets shall conform to ASTM C 443. Factory-fabricated resilient joint materials shall conform to ASTM C 425. Gaskets shall have not more than one factory-fabricated splice, except that two factory-fabricated splices of the rubber-type gasket are permitted if the nominal diameter of the pipe being gasketed exceeds 54 inches.
SECTION 33 40 00
Page 6
W912HN-12-R-0003
b.
Test Requirements: Watertight joints shall be tested and shall meet test requirements of paragraph HYDROSTATIC TEST ON WATERTIGHT JOINTS. Rubber gaskets shall comply with the oil resistant gasket requirements of ASTM C 443. Certified copies of test results shall be delivered to the Contracting Officer before gaskets or jointing materials are installed. Alternate types of watertight joint may be furnished, if specifically approved. Flap Gates
2.3.9
Flap Gates shall be medium or heavy-duty with circular opening and double-hinged. The seat shall be one-piece cast iron with a raised section around the perimeter of the waterway opening to provide the seating face. The seating face of the seat shall be cast iron. The cover shall be one-piece cast iron with necessary reinforcing rib, lifting eye for manual operation, and bosses to provide a pivot point connection with the links. The seating face of the cover shall be cast iron. Links or hinge arms shall be cast or ductile iron. Holes of pivot points shall be bronze bushed. All fasteners shall be either galvanized steel, bronze or stainless steel. 2.4 STEEL LADDER
Steel ladder shall be provided where the depth of the storm drainage structure exceeds 12 feet. These ladders shall be not less than 16 inches in width, with 3/4 inch diameter rungs spaced 12 inches apart. The two stringers shall be a minimum 3/8 inch thick and 2-1/2 inches wide. Ladders and inserts shall be galvanized after fabrication in conformance with ASTM A 123/A 123M. 2.5 2.6 OMITTED RESILIENT CONNECTORS
Flexible, watertight connectors used for connecting pipe to manholes and inlets shall conform to ASTM C 923. 2.7 2.7.1 HYDROSTATIC TEST ON WATERTIGHT JOINTS Concrete, Clay, PVC and PE Pipe
A hydrostatic test shall be made on the watertight joint types as proposed. Only one sample joint of each type needs testing; however, if the sample joint fails because of faulty design or workmanship, an additional sample joint may be tested. During the test period, gaskets or other jointing material shall be protected from extreme temperatures which might adversely affect the performance of such materials. Performance requirements for joints in reinforced and nonreinforced concrete pipe shall conform to AASHTO M 198 or ASTM C 443. Test requirements for joints in clay pipe shall conform to ASTM C 425. Test requirements for joints in PVC and PE plastic pipe shall conform to ASTM D 3212. 2.8 EROSION CONTROL RIPRAP
Provide nonerodible rock not exceeding 15 inches in its greatest dimension and choked with sufficient small rocks to provide a dense mass with a minimum thickness of as indicated.
SECTION 33 40 00
Page 7
W912HN-12-R-0003
PART 3 3.1
EXECUTION EXCAVATION FOR PIPE CULVERTS, STORM DRAINS, AND DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
Excavation of trenches, and for appurtenances and backfilling for culverts and storm drains, shall be in accordance with the applicable portions of Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK and the requirements specified below. 3.1.1 Trenching
The width of trenches at any point below the top of the pipe shall be not greater than the outside diameter of the pipe plus 24 inches to permit satisfactory jointing and thorough tamping of the bedding material under and around the pipe. Sheeting and bracing, where required, shall be placed within the trench width as specified, without any overexcavation. Where trench widths are exceeded, redesign with a resultant increase in cost of stronger pipe or special installation procedures will be necessary. Cost of this redesign and increased cost of pipe or installation shall be borne by the Contractor without additional cost to the Government. 3.1.2 Removal of Rock
Rock in either ledge or boulder formation shall be replaced with suitable materials to provide a compacted earth cushion having a thickness between unremoved rock and the pipe of at least 8 inches or 1/2 inch for each foot of fill over the top of the pipe, whichever is greater, but not more than three-fourths the nominal diameter of the pipe. Where bell-and-spigot pipe is used, the cushion shall be maintained under the bell as well as under the straight portion of the pipe. Rock excavation shall be as specified and defined in Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK. 3.1.3 Removal of Unstable Material
Where wet or otherwise unstable soil incapable of properly supporting the pipe, as determined by the Contracting Officer, is unexpectedly encountered in the bottom of a trench, such material shall be removed to the depth required and replaced to the proper grade with select granular material, compacted as provided in paragraph BACKFILLING. When removal of unstable material is due to the fault or neglect of the Contractor while performing shoring and sheeting, water removal, or other specified requirements, such removal and replacement shall be performed at no additional cost to the Government. 3.2 BEDDING
The bedding surface for the pipe shall provide a firm foundation of uniform density throughout the entire length of the pipe. 3.2.1 Concrete Pipe Requirements
When no bedding class is specified or detailed on the drawings, concrete pipe shall be bedded in granular material minimum 4 inch in depth in trenches with soil foundation. Depth of granular bedding in trenches with rock foundation shall be 1/2 inch in depth per foot of depth of fill, minimum depth of bedding shall be 8 inch up to maximum depth of 24 inches. The middle third of the granular bedding shall be loosely placed. Bell holes and depressions for joints shall be removed and formed so entire barrel of pipe is uniformly supported. The bell hole and depressions for the joints shall be not more than the length, depth, and width required for SECTION 33 40 00 Page 8
W912HN-12-R-0003
properly making the particular type of joint. 3.3 PLACING PIPE
Each pipe shall be thoroughly examined before being laid; defective or damaged pipe shall not be used. Pipelines shall be laid to the grades and alignment indicated. Proper facilities shall be provided for lowering sections of pipe into trenches. Lifting lugs in vertically elongated metal pipe shall be placed in the same vertical plane as the major axis of the pipe. Pipe shall not be laid in water, and pipe shall not be laid when trench conditions or weather are unsuitable for such work. Diversion of drainage or dewatering of trenches during construction shall be provided as necessary. 3.3.1 Concrete, Clay, PVC, Ribbed PVC, Ductile Iron and Cast-Iron Pipe
Laying shall proceed upgrade with spigot ends of bell-and-spigot pipe and tongue ends of tongue-and-groove pipe pointing in the direction of the flow. 3.4 3.4.1 3.4.1.1 JOINTING Concrete and Clay Pipe Flexible Watertight Joints
Gaskets and jointing materials shall be as recommended by the particular manufacturer in regard to use of lubricants, cements, adhesives, and other special installation requirements. Surfaces to receive lubricants, cements, or adhesives shall be clean and dry. Gaskets and jointing materials shall be affixed to the pipe not more than 24 hours prior to the installation of the pipe, and shall be protected from the sun, blowing dust, and other deleterious agents at all times. Gaskets and jointing materials shall be inspected before installing the pipe; any loose or improperly affixed gaskets and jointing materials shall be removed and replaced. The pipe shall be aligned with the previously installed pipe, and the joint pushed home. If, while the joint is being made the gasket becomes visibly dislocated the pipe shall be removed and the joint remade. 3.5 3.5.1 DRAINAGE STRUCTURES Manholes and Inlets
Construction shall be of reinforced concrete, brick, or precast reinforced concrete; complete with frames and covers or gratings; and with fixed galvanized steel ladders where indicated. Pipe connections to concrete manholes and inlets shall be made with flexible, watertight connectors. 3.5.2 Walls and Headwalls
Construction shall be as indicated. 3.6 STEEL LADDER INSTALLATION
Ladder shall be adequately anchored to the wall by means of steel inserts spaced not more than 6 feet vertically, and shall be installed to provide at least 6 inches of space between the wall and the rungs. The wall along the line of the ladder shall be vertical for its entire length.
SECTION 33 40 00
Page 9
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.7 3.7.1
BACKFILLING Backfilling Pipe in Trenches
After the pipe has been properly bedded, selected material from excavation or borrow, at a moisture content that will facilitate compaction, shall be placed along both sides of pipe in layers not exceeding 6 inches in compacted depth. The backfill shall be brought up evenly on both sides of pipe for the full length of pipe. The fill shall be thoroughly compacted under the haunches of the pipe. Each layer shall be thoroughly compacted with mechanical tampers or rammers. This method of filling and compacting shall continue until the fill has reached an elevation equal to the midpoint (spring line) of RCP. The remainder of the trench shall be backfilled and compacted by spreading and rolling or compacted by mechanical rammers or tampers in layers not exceeding 6 inches. Tests for density shall be made as necessary to ensure conformance to the compaction requirements specified below. Where it is necessary, in the opinion of the Contracting Officer, that sheeting or portions of bracing used be left in place, the contract will be adjusted accordingly. Untreated sheeting shall not be left in place beneath structures or pavements. 3.7.2 Backfilling Pipe in Fill Sections
For pipe placed in fill sections, backfill material and the placement and compaction procedures shall be as specified below. The fill material shall be uniformly spread in layers longitudinally on both sides of the pipe, not exceeding 6 inches in compacted depth, and shall be compacted by rolling parallel with pipe or by mechanical tamping or ramming. Prior to commencing normal filling operations, the crown width of the fill at a height of 12 inches above the top of the pipe shall extend a distance of not less than twice the outside pipe diameter on each side of the pipe or 12 feet, whichever is less. After the backfill has reached at least 12 inches above the top of the pipe, the remainder of the fill shall be placed and thoroughly compacted in layers not exceeding 6 inches. Use select granular material for this entire region of backfill for flexible pipe installations. 3.7.3 Movement of Construction Machinery
When compacting by rolling or operating heavy equipment parallel with the pipe, displacement of or injury to the pipe shall be avoided. Movement of construction machinery over a culvert or storm drain at any stage of construction shall be at the Contractor's risk. Any damaged pipe shall be repaired or replaced. 3.7.4 3.7.4.1 Compaction General Requirements
Cohesionless materials include gravels, gravel-sand mixtures, sands, and gravelly sands. Cohesive materials include clayey and silty gravels, gravel-silt mixtures, clayey and silty sands, sand-clay mixtures, clays, silts, and very fine sands. When results of compaction tests for moisture-density relations are recorded on graphs, cohesionless soils will show straight lines or reverse-shaped moisture-density curves, and cohesive soils will show normal moisture-density curves.
SECTION 33 40 00
Page 10
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.7.4.2
Minimum Density
Backfill over and around the pipe and backfill around and adjacent to drainage structures shall be compacted at the approved moisture content to the following applicable minimum density, which will be determined as specified below. a. Under airfield and heliport pavements, paved roads, streets, parking areas, and similar-use pavements including adjacent shoulder areas, the density shall be not less than 90 percent of maximum density for cohesive material and 95 percent of maximum density for cohesionless material, up to the elevation where requirements for pavement subgrade materials and compaction shall control. Under unpaved or turfed traffic areas, density shall not be less than 90 percent of maximum density for cohesive material and 95 percent of maximum density for cohesionless material. Under nontraffic areas, density shall be not less than that of the surrounding material. Determination of Density
b.
c.
3.7.5
Testing is the responsibility of the Contractor and performed at no additional cost to the Government. Testing shall be performed by an approved commercial testing laboratory or by the Contractor subject to approval. Tests shall be performed in sufficient number to ensure that specified density is being obtained. Laboratory tests for moisture-density relations shall be made in accordance with ASTM D 1557 except that mechanical tampers may be used provided the results are correlated with those obtained with the specified hand tamper. Field density tests shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D 2167 or ASTM D 6938. When ASTM D 6938 is used, the calibration curves shall be checked and adjusted, if necessary, using the sand cone method as described in paragraph Calibration of the referenced publications. ASTM D 6938 results in a wet unit weight of soil and ASTM D 6938 shall be used to determine the moisture content of the soil. The calibration curves furnished with the moisture gauges shall be checked along with density calibration checks as described in ASTM D 6938. Test results shall be furnished the Contracting Officer. The calibration checks of both the density and moisture gauges shall be made at the beginning of a job on each different type of material encountered and at intervals as directed. 3.8 3.8.1 PIPELINE TESTING Leakage Tests
Lines shall be tested for leakage by low pressure air or water testing or exfiltration tests, as appropriate. Low pressure air testing for concrete pipes shall conform to ASTM C 924. Testing of individual joints for leakage by low pressure air or water shall conform to ASTM C 1103. Prior to exfiltration tests, the trench shall be backfilled up to at least the lower half of the pipe. If required, sufficient additional backfill shall be placed to prevent pipe movement during testing, leaving the joints uncovered to permit inspection. Visible leaks encountered shall be corrected regardless of leakage test results. When the water table is 2 feet or more above the top of the pipe at the upper end of the pipeline section to be tested, infiltration shall be measured using a suitable weir or other device acceptable to the Contracting Officer. An exfiltration SECTION 33 40 00 Page 11
W912HN-12-R-0003
test shall be made by filling the line to be tested with water so that a head of at least 2 feet is provided above both the water table and the top of the pipe at the upper end of the pipeline to be tested. The filled line shall be allowed to stand until the pipe has reached its maximum absorption, but not less than 4 hours. After absorption, the head shall be reestablished. The amount of water required to maintain this water level during a 2-hour test period shall be measured. Leakage as measured by the exfiltration test shall not exceed 0.2 gallons per inch in diameter per 100 feet of pipeline per hour. When leakage exceeds the maximum amount specified, satisfactory correction shall be made and retesting accomplished. 3.8.2 3.8.3 Omitted Post-Installation Inspection
One hundred percent of all reinforced concrete pipe installations shall be checked for joint separations, soil migration through the joint, cracks greater than 0.01 inches, settlement and alignment. a. Replace pipes having cracks greater than 0.1 inches in width or deflection greater than 5 percent deflection. An engineer shall evaluate all pipes with cracks greater than 0.01 inches but less than 0.10 inches to determine if any remediation or repair is required. RCP with crack width less than 0.10 inches and located in a non-corrosive environment (pH 5.5) are generally acceptable. Repair or replace any pipe with crack exhibiting displacement across the crack, exhibiting bulges, creases, tears, spalls, or delamination. Reports: The deflection results and final post installation inspection report shall include: a copy of all video taken, pipe location identification, equipment used for inspection, inspector name, deviation from design, grade, deviation from line, deflection and deformation of flexible pipe systems, inspector notes, condition of joints, condition of pipe wall (e.g. distress, cracking, wall damage dents, bulges, creases, tears, holes, etc.).
b.
3.9
FIELD PAINTING
After installation, clean cast-iron frames, covers, gratings, and steps not buried in masonry or concrete to bare metal of mortar, rust, grease, dirt, and other deleterious materials and apply a coat of bituminous paint. Do not paint surfaces subject to abrasion. -- End of Section --
SECTION 33 40 00
Page 12
W912HN-12-R-0003
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, UNDERGROUND PART 1 1.1 GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. ALLIANCE FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY SOLUTIONS (ATIS) ATIS O5.1 (2008) Specifications and Dimensions (for Wood Poles)
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM A 123/A 123M (2009) Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products (2009) Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware (2003; R 2008) Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings (2001; R 2007) Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire (2004) Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft (2009) Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections (2009) Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections (Metric)
ASTM A 153/A 153M
ASTM A 48/A 48M
ASTM B 3
ASTM B 8
ASTM C 478
ASTM C 478M
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE) IEEE C2 IEEE Std 81 (2012) National Electrical Safety Code (1983) Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System (Part 1)Normal Measurements
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA) NEMA C119.1 (2006) Sealed Insulated Underground Connector Systems Rated 600 Volts (2005) Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 1
NEMA C80.1
W912HN-12-R-0003
Conduit (ERSC) NEMA FB 1 (2007) Standard for Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable (2003) Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride PVC Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installations (2005) Standard for Smooth-Wall Coilable Polyethylene Electrical Plastic Duct
NEMA TC 6 & 8
NEMA TC 7
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) NFPA 70 (2011; TIA 11-1; Errata 2011; TIA 11-2; TIA 11-3; TIA 11-4) National Electrical Code UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) UL 1242 (2006; Rev thru Jul 2007) Standard for Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit -Steel (2007) Grounding and Bonding Equipment (2003; R 2010) Wire Connectors (2004; Rev thru Oct 2009) Standard for Metallic Outlet Boxes (2007) Standard for Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel (2005; Rev thru May 2007) Standard for Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings U.S. ARMY INFORMATION SYSTEMS ENGINEERING COMMAND (USAISEC) USAISEC I3A (2010; Rev thru Feb 2010) Technical Criteria for the Installation Information Infrastructure Architcture
UL 467 UL 486A-486B UL 514A
UL 6
UL 651
1.2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Items provided under this section shall be specifically suitable for the following service conditions. Seismic details shall conform to UFC 3-310-04 SEISMIC DESIGN FOR BUILDINGS and Sections 13 48 00 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT and 26 05 48.00 10 SEISMIC PROTECTION FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. 1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 2
W912HN-12-R-0003
accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-02 Shop Drawings As-Built Drawings; G, AE Drawings, as specified. SD-03 Product Data Nameplates; G, AE Catalog cuts, brochures, circulars, specifications, product data, and printed information in sufficient detail and scope to verify compliance with the requirements of the contract documents. Material and Equipment; G, AE A complete itemized listing of equipment and materials proposed for incorporation into the work. Each entry shall include an item number, the quantity of items proposed, and the name of the manufacturer of each such item. Installation Requirements; G, AE As a minimum, installation procedures for transformers, substations, switchgear, and splices. Procedures shall include cable pulling plans, diagrams, instructions, and precautions required to install, adjust, calibrate, and test the devices and equipment. SD-06 Test Reports Field Testing A proposed field test plan, 30 days prior to testing the installed system. No field test shall be performed until the test plan is approved. The test plan shall consist of complete field test procedures including tests to be performed, test equipment required, and tolerance limits. SD-07 Certificates Material and Equipment Where materials or equipment are specified to conform to the standards of the Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or to be constructed or tested, or both, in accordance with the standards of the American National Standards Institute (ANSI), the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE), or the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), submit proof that the items provided conform to such requirements. The label of, or listing by, UL will be acceptable as evidence that the items conform. Either a certification or a published catalog specification data statement, to the effect that the item is in accordance with the referenced ANSI or IEEE standard, will be acceptable as evidence that the item conforms. A similar certification or published catalog specification data statement to the effect that the item is in accordance with the referenced NEMA SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 3
W912HN-12-R-0003
standard, by a company listed as a member company of NEMA, will be acceptable as evidence that the item conforms. In lieu of such certification or published data, the Contractor may submit a certificate from a recognized testing agency equipped and competent to perform such services, stating that the items have been tested and that they conform to the requirements listed, including methods of testing of the specified agencies. Compliance with above-named requirements does not relieve the Contractor from compliance with any other requirements of the specifications. SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Operation and Maintenance Manuals Six copies of operation and maintenance manuals, within 7 calendar days following the completion of tests and including assembly, installation, operation and maintenance instructions, spare parts data which provides supplier name, current cost, catalog order number, and a recommended list of spare parts to be stocked. Manuals shall also include data outlining detailed procedures for system startup and operation, and a troubleshooting guide which lists possible operational problems and corrective action to be taken. A brief description of all equipment, basic operating features, and routine maintenance requirements shall also be included. Documents shall be bound in a binder marked or identified on the spine and front cover. A table of contents page shall be included and marked with pertinent contract information and contents of the manual. Tabs shall be provided to separate different types of documents, such as catalog ordering information, drawings, instructions, and spare parts data. Index sheets shall be provided for each section of the manual when warranted by the quantity of documents included under separate tabs or dividers. Three additional copies of the instructions manual shall be provided within 30 calendar days following the manuals. 1.4 1.4.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE As-Built Drawings
The as-built drawings shall be a record of the construction as installed. The drawings shall include the information shown on the contract drawings as well as deviations, modifications, and changes from the contract drawings, however minor. The as-built drawings shall be a full sized set of prints marked to reflect deviations, modifications, and changes. The as-built drawings shall be complete and show the location, size, dimensions, part identification, and other information. Additional sheets may be added. The as-built drawings shall be jointly inspected for accuracy and completeness by the Contractor's quality control representative and by the Contracting Officer prior to the submission of each monthly pay estimate. Upon completion of the work, provide three full sized sets of the marked prints to the Contracting Officer for approval. If upon review, the as-built drawings are found to contain errors and/or omissions, they will be returned to the Contractor for correction. Correct and return the as-built drawings to the Contracting Officer for approval within 10 calendar days from the time the drawings are returned to the Contractor.
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10
Page 4
W912HN-12-R-0003
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Visually inspect devices and equipment when received and prior to acceptance from conveyance. Protect stored items from the environment in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions. Damaged items shall be replaced. Store oil filled transformers and switches in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. Wood poles held in storage for more than 2 weeks shall be stored in accordance with ATIS O5.1. Handle wood poles in accordance with ATIS O5.1, except that pointed tools capable of producing indentations more than 1 inch in depth shall not be used. Metal poles shall be handled and stored in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
One additional spare fuse or fuse element for each furnished fuse or fuse element shall be delivered to the contracting officer when the electrical system is accepted. Two complete sets of all special tools required for maintenance shall be provided, complete with a suitable tool box. Special tools are those that only the manufacturer provides, for special purposes (to access compartments, or operate, adjust, or maintain special parts). PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS STANDARD PRODUCT
Provide material and equipment which are the standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the product and that essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least 2 years prior to bid opening. Items of the same classification shall be identical including equipment, assemblies, parts, and components. 2.2 2.2.1 NAMEPLATES General
Each major component of this specification shall have the manufacturer's name, address, type or style, model or serial number, and catalog number on a nameplate securely attached to the equipment. Nameplates shall be made of noncorrosive metal. Equipment containing liquid dielectrics shall have the type of dielectric on the nameplate. As a minimum, nameplates shall be provided for transformers, circuit breakers, meters and switches. 2.3 2.3.1 CORROSION PROTECTION Aluminum Materials
Aluminum shall not be used. 2.3.2 2.3.2.1 Ferrous Metal Materials Hardware
Ferrous metal hardware shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153/A 153M and ASTM A 123/A 123M.
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10
Page 5
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.4 2.4.1
CABLES Low-Voltage Cables
Cables shall be rated 600 volts and shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 70, and must be UL listed for the application or meet the applicable section of either ICEA or NEMA standards. 2.4.1.1 Conductor Material
Underground cables shall be annealed copper complying with ASTM B 3 and ASTM B 8. Intermixing of copper and aluminum conductors is not permitted. 2.4.1.2 In Duct
Cables shall be single-conductor cable, in accordance with NFPA 70. Cables in factory-installed, coilable-plastic-duct assemblies shall conform to NEMA TC 7. 2.5 2.5.1 CABLE JOINTS, TERMINATIONS, AND CONNECTORS Low-Voltage Cable Splices
Low-voltage cable splices and terminations shall be rated at not less than 600 Volts. Splices in conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller shall be made with an insulated, solderless, pressure type connector, conforming to the applicable requirements of UL 486A-486B. Splices in conductors No. 8 AWG and larger shall be made with noninsulated, solderless, pressure type connector, conforming to the applicable requirements of UL 486A-486B. Splices shall then be covered with an insulation and jacket material equivalent to the conductor insulation and jacket. Splices below grade or in wet locations shall be sealed type conforming to NEMA C119.1 or shall be waterproofed by a sealant-filled, thick wall, heat shrinkable, thermosetting tubing or by pouring a thermosetting resin into a mold that surrounds the joined conductors. 2.6 CONDUIT AND DUCTS
Ducts shall be single, round-bore type, with wall thickness and fittings suitable for the application. Duct lines shall be concrete-encased, thin-wall type. 2.6.1 Metallic Conduit
Intermediate metal conduit shall comply with UL 1242. Rigid galvanized steel conduit shall comply with UL 6 and NEMA C80.1. Metallic conduit fittings and outlets shall comply with UL 514A and NEMA FB 1. 2.6.2 2.6.2.1 Nonmetallic Ducts Concrete Encased Ducts
UL 651 Schedule 40 or NEMA TC 6 & 8 Type EB. 2.6.2.2 Direct Burial
UL 651 Schedule 40 as indicated.
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10
Page 6
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.6.3
Conduit Sealing Compound
Compounds for sealing ducts and conduit shall have a putty-like consistency workable with the hands at temperatures as low as 35 degrees F, shall neither slump at a temperature of 300 degrees F, nor harden materially when exposed to the air. Compounds shall adhere to clean surfaces of fiber or plastic ducts; metallic conduits or conduit coatings; concrete, masonry, or lead; any cable sheaths, jackets, covers, or insulation materials; and the common metals. Compounds shall form a seal without dissolving, noticeably changing characteristics, or removing any of the ingredients. Compounds shall have no injurious effect upon the hands of workmen or upon materials. 2.7 MANHOLES, HANDHOLES, AND PULLBOXES
Manholes, handholes, and pullboxes shall be as indicated. Strength of manholes, handholes, and pullboxes and their frames and covers shall conform to the requirements of IEEE C2. Precast-concrete manholes shall have the required strength established by ASTM C 478, ASTM C 478M. Frames and covers shall be made of gray cast iron and a machine-finished seat shall be provided to ensure a matching joint between frame and cover. Cast iron shall comply with ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30B, minimum. Handholes for low voltage cables installed in parking lots, sidewalks, and turfed areas shall be fabricated from an aggregate consisting of sand and with continuous woven glass strands having an overall compressive strength of at least 10,000 psi and a flexural strength of at least 5,000 psi. Pullbox and handhole covers in sidewalks, and turfed areas shall be of the same material as the box. Concrete pullboxes shall consist of precast reinforced concrete boxes, extensions, bases, and covers. Communications manholes shall conform to requirements of USAISEC I3A for mainteneance holes. 2.8 2.8.1 GROUNDING AND BONDING Driven Ground Rods
Ground rods shall be copper-clad steel conforming to UL 467 not less than 5/8 inch in diameter by 10 feet in length. Sectional type rods may be used. 2.8.2 Grounding Conductors
Grounding conductors shall be bare, except where installed in conduit with associated phase conductors. Insulated conductors shall be of the same material as phase conductors and green color-coded, except that conductors shall be rated no more than 600 volts. Bare conductors shall be ASTM B 8 soft-drawn unless otherwise indicated. Aluminum is not acceptable. 2.9 CONCRETE AND REINFORCEMENT
Concrete work shall have minimum 3000 psi compressive strength and conform to the requirements of Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION EXAMINATION
After becoming familiar with details of the work, verify dimensions in the field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing any work. SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 7
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.2
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Equipment and devices shall be installed and energized in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions. Steel conduits installed underground shall be installed and protected from corrosion in conformance with the requirements of Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Except as covered herein, excavation, trenching, and backfilling shall conform to the requirements of Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK. Concrete work shall have minimum 3000 psi compressive strength and conform to the requirements of Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE ONCRETE. 3.2.1 Conformance to Codes
The installation shall comply with the requirements and recommendations of NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 as applicable. 3.3 CABLE AND BUSWAY INSTALLATION
Obtain from the manufacturer an installation manual or set of instructions which addresses such aspects as cable construction, insulation type, cable diameter, bending radius, cable temperature, lubricants, coefficient of friction, conduit cleaning, storage procedures, moisture seals, testing for and purging moisture, etc. 3.3.1 Cable Installation Plan and Procedure
Cable shall be installed strictly in accordance with the cable manufacturer's recommendations. Each circuit shall be identified by means of a fiber, laminated plastic, or non-ferrous metal tags, or approved equal, in each manhole, handhole, junction box, and each terminal. Each tag shall contain the following information; cable type, conductor size, circuit number, circuit voltage, cable destination and phase identification. 3.3.1.1 Cable Inspection
The cable reel shall be inspected for correct storage positions, signs of physical damage, and broken end seals. If end seal is broken, moisture shall be removed from cable in accordance with the cable manufacturer's recommendations. 3.3.1.2 Duct Cleaning
Duct shall be cleaned with an assembly that consists of a flexible mandrel (manufacturers standard product in lengths recommended for the specific size and type of duct) that is 1/4 inch less than inside diameter of duct, 2 wire brushes, and a rag. The cleaning assembly shall be pulled through conduit a minimum of 2 times or until less than a volume of 8 cubic inches of debris is expelled from the duct. 3.3.1.3 Duct Lubrication
The cable lubricant shall be compatible with the cable jacket for cable that is being installed. Application of lubricant shall be in accordance with lubricant manufacturer's recommendations. 3.3.1.4 Cable Installation
Provide a cable feeding truck and a cable pulling winch as required. SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 8
W912HN-12-R-0003
Provide a pulling grip or pulling eye in accordance with cable manufacturer's recommendations. The pulling grip or pulling eye apparatus shall be attached to polypropylene or manilla rope followed by lubricant front end packs and then by power cables. A dynamometer shall be used to monitor pulling tension. Pulling tension shall not exceed cable manufacturer's recommendations. Do not allow cables to cross over while cables are being fed into duct. For cable installation in cold weather, cables shall be kept at 50 degrees F temperature for at least 24 hours before installation. 3.3.2 Duct Line
Cables shall be installed in duct lines where indicated. Neutral and grounding conductors shall be installed in the same duct with their associated phase conductors. 3.3.3 Electric Manholes
Cables shall be routed around the interior walls and securely supported from walls on cables racks. Cable routing shall minimize cable crossover, provide access space for maintenance and installation of additional cables, and maintain cable separation in accordance with IEEE C2. 3.4 3.4.1 DUCT LINES Requirements
Numbers and sizes of ducts shall be as indicated. Duct lines shall be laid with a minimum slope of 4 inches per 100 feet. Depending on the contour of the finished grade, the high-point may be at a terminal, a manhole, a handhole, or between manholes or handholes. Short-radius manufactured 90-degree duct bends may be used only for pole or equipment risers, unless specifically indicated as acceptable. The minimum manufactured bend radius shall be 18 inches for ducts of less than 3 inch diameter, and 36 inches for ducts 3 inches or greater in diameter. Otherwise, long sweep bends having a minimum radius of 25 feet shall be used for a change of direction of more than 5 degrees, either horizontally or vertically. Both curved and straight sections may be used to form long sweep bends, but the maximum curve used shall be 30 degrees and manufactured bends shall be used. Ducts shall be provided with end bells whenever duct lines terminate in manholes or handholes. 3.4.2 Treatment
Ducts shall be kept clean of concrete, dirt, or foreign substances during construction. Field cuts requiring tapers shall be made with proper tools and match factory tapers. A coupling recommended by the duct manufacturer shall be used whenever an existing duct is connected to a duct of different material or shape. Ducts shall be stored to avoid warping and deterioration with ends sufficiently plugged to prevent entry of any water or solid substances. Ducts shall be thoroughly cleaned before being laid. Plastic ducts shall be stored on a flat surface and protected from the direct rays of the sun. 3.4.3 Concrete Encasement
Ducts requiring concrete encasements shall comply with NFPA 70, except that electrical duct bank configurations for ducts 6 inches in diameter shall be determined by calculation and as shown on the drawings. The separation SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 9
W912HN-12-R-0003
between adjacent electric power and communication ducts shall conform to IEEE C2. Duct line encasements shall be monolithic construction. Where a connection is made to a previously poured encasement, the new encasement shall be well bonded or doweled to the existing encasement. Submit proposed bonding method for approval in accordance with the detail drawing portion of paragraph SUBMITTALS. At any point, except railroad and airfield crossings, tops of concrete encasements shall be not less than the cover requirements listed in NFPA 70. At railroad and airfield crossings, duct lines shall be encased with concrete and reinforced as indicated to withstand specified surface loadings. Tops of concrete encasements shall be not less than 5 feet below tops of rails or airfield paving unless otherwise indicated. Where ducts are jacked under existing pavement, rigid steel conduit will be installed because of its strength. To protect the corrosion-resistant conduit coating, predrilling or installing conduit inside a larger iron pipe sleeve (jack-and-sleeve) is required. For crossings of existing railroads and airfield pavements greater than 50 feet in length, the predrilling method or the jack-and-sleeve method will be used. Separators or spacing blocks shall be made of steel, concrete, plastic, or a combination of these materials placed not farther apart than 4 feet on centers. Ducts shall be securely anchored to prevent movement during the placement of concrete and joints shall be staggered at least 6 inches vertically. 3.4.4 Nonencased Direct-Burial
Top of duct lines shall be not less than 18 inches below finished grade and shall be installed with a minimum of 3 inches of earth around each duct, except that between adjacent electric power and communication ducts, 12 inches of earth is required. Bottoms of trenches shall be graded toward manholes or handholes and shall be smooth and free of stones, soft spots, and sharp objects. Where bottoms of trenches comprise materials other than sand, a 3 inch layer of sand shall be laid first and compacted to approximate densities of surrounding firm soil before installing ducts. Joints in adjacent tiers of duct shall be vertically staggered at least 6 inches. The first 6 inch layer of backfill cover shall be sand compacted as previously specified. The rest of the excavation shall be backfilled and compacted in 3 to 6 inch layers. Duct banks may be held in alignment with earth. However, high-tiered banks shall use a wooden frame or equivalent form to hold ducts in alignment prior to backfilling. 3.4.5 Installation of Couplings
Joints in each type of duct shall be made up in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for the particular type of duct and coupling selected and as approved. 3.4.5.1 Plastic Duct
Duct joints shall be made by brushing a plastic solvent cement on insides of plastic coupling fittings and on outsides of duct ends. Each duct and fitting shall then be slipped together with a quick 1/4-turn twist to set the joint tightly. 3.4.6 Duct Line Markers
Duct line markers shall be provided as indicated. In addition to markers, a 5 mil brightly colored plastic tape, not less than 3 inches in width and suitably inscribed at not more than 10 feet on centers with a continuous metallic backing and a corrosion-resistant 1 mil metallic foil core to SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 10
W912HN-12-R-0003
permit easy location of the duct line, shall be placed approximately 12 inches below finished grade levels of such lines. 3.5 3.5.1 MANHOLES, HANDHOLES, AND PULLBOXES General
Manholes shall be constructed approximately where shown. The exact location of each manhole shall be determined after careful consideration has been given to the location of other utilities, grading, and paving. The location of each manhole shall be approved by the Contracting Officer before construction of the manhole is started. Manholes shall be the type noted on the drawings and shall be constructed in accordance with the applicable details as indicated. Top, walls, and bottom shall consist of reinforced concrete. Walls and bottom shall be of monolithic concrete construction. The Contractor may, as an option, utilize monolithically constructed precast-concrete manholes having the required strength and inside dimensions as required by the drawings or specifications. In paved areas, frames and covers for manhole and handhole entrances in vehicular traffic areas shall be flush with the finished surface of the paving. In unpaved areas, the top of manhole covers shall be approximately 1/2 inch above the finished grade. Where existing grades that are higher than finished grades are encountered, concrete assemblies designed for the purpose shall be installed to elevate temporarily the manhole cover to existing grade level. All duct lines entering manholes must be installed on compact soil or otherwise supported when entering a manhole to prevent shear stress on the duct at the point of entrance to the manhole. Duct lines entering cast-in-place concrete manholes shall be cast in-place with the manhole. Duct lines entering precast concrete manholes through a precast knockout penetration shall be grouted tight with a portland cement mortar. PVC duct lines entering precast manholes through a PVC endbell shall be solvent welded to the endbell. A cast metal grille-type sump frame and cover shall be installed over the manhole sump. A cable-pulling iron shall be installed in the wall opposite each duct line entrance. 3.5.2 Electric Manholes
Cables shall be securely supported from walls by hot-dip galvanized cable racks with a plastic coating over the galvanizing and equipped with adjustable hooks and insulators. The number of cable racks indicated shall be installed in each manhole and not less than 2 spare hooks shall be installed on each cable rack. Insulators shall be made of high-glazed porcelain. Insulators will not be required on spare hooks. 3.5.3 Communications Manholes
Accessories and installation shall conform to requirements of USAISEC I3A for maintenance holes. 3.5.4 Handholes
Handholes shall be located approximately as shown. Handholes shall be of the type noted on the drawings and shall be constructed in accordance with the details shown. 3.5.5 Pullboxes
Pullbox tops shall be flush with sidewalks or curbs or placed 1/2 inch above surrounding grades when remote from curbed roadways or sidewalks. SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 11
W912HN-12-R-0003
Covers shall be marked "Low-Voltage" and provided with 2 lifting eyes and 2 hold-down bolts. Each box shall have a suitable opening for a ground rod. Conduit, cable, ground rod entrances, and unused openings shall be sealed with mortar. 3.5.6 Ground Rods
A ground rod shall be installed at the manholes, handholes and pullboxes. Ground rods shall be driven into the earth before the manhole floor is poured so that approximately 4 inches of the ground rod will extend above the manhole floor. When precast concrete manholes are used, the top of the ground rod may be below the manhole floor and a No. 1/0 AWG ground conductor brought into the manhole through a watertight sleeve in the manhole wall. 3.6 PAD-MOUNTED EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
Pad-mounted equipment, shall be installed on concrete pads in accordance with the manufacturer's published, standard installation drawings and procedures, except that they shall be modified to meet the requirements of this document. Units shall be installed so that they do not damage equipment or scratch painted or coated surfaces. After installation, surfaces shall be inspected and scratches touched up with a paint or coating provided by the manufacturer especially for this purpose. 3.6.1 3.6.1.1 Concrete Pads Construction
Concrete pads for pad-mounted electrical equipment may be either pre-fabricated or poured-in-place. Pads shall be constructed as indicated, except that exact pad dimensions and mounting details are equipment specific and are the responsibility of the Contractor. Tops of concrete pads shall be level and shall project 4 inches above finished paving or grade and sloped to drain. Edges of concrete pads shall have 3/4 inch chamfer. Conduits for primary, secondary, and grounding conductors shall be set in place prior to placement of concrete pads. Where grounding electrode conductors are installed through concrete pads, PVC conduit sleeves shall be installed through the concrete to provide physical protection. To facilitate cable installation and termination, the concrete pad shall be provided with a rectangular hole below the primary and secondary compartments, sized in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended dimensions. Upon completion of equipment installation the rectangular hole shall be filled with masonry grout. 3.6.1.2 Concrete and Reinforcement
Concrete work shall have minimum 3000 psi compressive strength and comform to the requirements of Section 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. 3.6.1.3 Sealing
When the installation is complete, seal all conduit and other entries into the equipment enclosure with an approved sealing compound. Seals shall be of sufficient strength and durability to protect all energized live parts of the equipment from rodents, insects, or other foreign matter.
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10
Page 12
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.6.2
Padlocks
Padlocks shall be provided for pad-mounted equipment and for each fence gate. Padlocks shall be keyed as directed by the Contracting Officer. 3.7 CONNECTIONS TO BUILDINGS indicated, and shall in each building. with caulking buildings.
Cables shall be extended into the various buildings as be connected to the first applicable termination point After installation of cables, conduits shall be sealed compound to prevent entrance of moisture or gases into 3.8 GROUNDING
A ground ring consisting of bare copper conductors and driven ground rods shall be installed around pad-mounted equipment. Equipment frames of metal-enclosed equipment, and other noncurrent-carrying metal parts, such as cable shields, cable sheaths and armor, and metallic conduit shall be grounded. At least 2 connections shall be provided from a transformer or a switchgear ground bus to the ground ring. Metallic frames and covers of handholes and pull boxes shall be grounded by use of a braided, copper ground strap with equivalent ampacity of No. 6 AWG. 3.8.1 Grounding Electrodes
Grounding electrodes shall be installed as shown on the drawings and as follows: a. Driven rod electrodes - Unless otherwise indicated, ground rods shall be driven into the earth until the tops of the rods are approximately 1 foot below finished grade. Ground ring - A ground ring shall be installed consisting of bare copper conductors installed not less than 30 inches below finished top of soil grade. Ground ring conductors shall be No. 2 AWG, minimum. Additional electrodes - When the required ground resistance is not met, additional electrodes shall be provided interconnected with grounding conductors to achieve the specified ground resistance. The additional electrodes will be up to three, 10 feet rods spaced a minimum of 10 feet apart, a single extension-type rod, 5/8 inch diameter, up to 30 feet long, driven perpendicular to grade. In high ground resistance, UL listed chemically charged ground rods may be used. If the resultant resistance exceeds 25 ohms measured not less than 48 hours after rainfall, the Contracting Officer shall be notified immediately. Grounding and Bonding Connections
b.
c.
3.8.2
Connections above grade shall be made by the fusion-welding process or with bolted solderless connectors, in compliance with UL 467, and those below grade shall be made by a fusion-welding process. 3.8.3 Grounding and Bonding Conductors
Grounding and bonding conductors include conductors used to bond transformer enclosures and equipment frames to the grounding electrode system. Grounding and bonding conductors shall be sized as shown, and located to provide maximum physical protection. Bends greater than 45 degrees in ground conductors are not permitted. Routing of ground SECTION 33 70 02.00 10 Page 13
W912HN-12-R-0003
conductors through concrete shall be avoided. When concrete penetration is necessary, nonmetallic conduit shall be cast flush with the points of concrete entrance and exit so as to provide an opening for the ground conductor, and the opening shall be sealed with a suitable compound after installation. 3.8.4 Manhole, Handhole, or Concrete Pullbox Grounding
Ground rods installed in manholes, handholes, or concrete pullboxes shall be connected to cable racks, cable-pulling irons, the cable shielding, metallic sheath, and armor at each cable joint or splice by means of a No. 4 AWG braided tinned copper wire. Connections to metallic cable sheaths shall be by means of tinned terminals soldered to ground wires and to cable sheaths. Care shall be taken in soldering not to damage metallic cable sheaths or shields. Ground rods shall be protected with a double wrapping of pressure-sensitive plastic tape for a distance of 2 inches above and 6 inches below concrete penetrations. Grounding electrode conductors shall be neatly and firmly attached to manhole or handhole walls and the amount of exposed bare wire shall be held to a minimum. 3.9 3.9.1 FIELD TESTING General
Field testing shall be performed in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Notify the Contracting Officer ten days prior to conducting tests. Furnish all materials, labor, and equipment necessary to conduct field tests. Perform all tests and inspections recommended by the manufacturer unless specifically waived by the Contracting Officer. Maintain a written record of all tests which includes date, test performed, personnel involved, devices tested, serial number and name of test equipment, and test results. Field test reports shall be signed and dated by the Contractor. 3.9.2 Safety
Provide and use safety devices such as rubber gloves, protective barriers, and danger signs to protect and warn personnel in the test vicinity. Replace any devices or equipment which are damaged due to improper test procedures or handling. 3.9.3 Ground-Resistance Tests
The resistance of each grounding electrode system shall be measured using the fall-of-potential method defined in IEEE Std 81. Ground resistance measurements shall be made before the electrical distribution system is energized and shall be made in normally dry conditions not less than 48 hours after the last rainfall. Resistance measurements of separate grounding electrode systems shall be made before the systems are bonded together below grade. The combined resistance of separate systems may be used to meet the required resistance, but the specified number of electrodes must still be provided. a. b. Single rod electrode - 25 ohms. Ground ring - 5 ohms.
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10
Page 14
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.9.4
Low-Voltage Cable Test
Low-voltage cable, complete with splices, shall be tested for insulation resistance after the cables are installed, in their final configuration, ready for connection to the equipment, and prior to energization. The test voltage shall be 500 volts dc, applied for one minute between each conductor and ground and between all possible combinations conductors in the same trench, duct, or cable, with all other conductors in the same trench, duct, or conduit. The minimum value of insulation shall be: R in megohms = (rated voltage in kV + 1) x 1000/(length of cable in feet Each cable failing this test shall be repaired or replaced. The repaired cable shall be retested until failures have been eliminated. 3.10 3.10.1 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICE Installation Engineer
After delivery of the equipment, furnish one or more field engineers, regularly employed by the equipment manufacturer to supervise the installation of the equipment, assist in the performance of the onsite tests, initial operation, and instruct personnel as to the operational and maintenance features of the equipment. 3.11 ACCEPTANCE
Final acceptance of the facility will not be given until the Contractor has successfully completed all tests and after all defects in installation, material or operation have been corrected. Provide Operation and Maintenance Manuals as specified in Paragraph SUBMITTALS.
SECTION 33 70 02.00 10
Page 15
W912HN-12-R-0003
SECTION 33 82 00 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTSIDE PLANT (OSP) 04/06 PART 1 1.1 GENERAL REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM B 1 (2001; R 2007) Standard Specification for Hard-Drawn Copper Wire (2004) Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft (2001; R 2007) Laminated Thermosetting Materials
ASTM B 8
ASTM D 709
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE) IEEE C2 (2012) National Electrical Safety Code INSULATED CABLE ENGINEERS ASSOCIATION (ICEA) ICEA S-87-640 (2006) Optical Fiber Outside Plant Communications Cable; 4th Edition (2006) Broadband Twisted Pair Telecommunication Cable, Aircore, Polyolefin Insulated Copper Conductors (2006) Broadband Twisted Pair, Telecommunication Cable Filled, Polyolefin Insulated Copper Conductors Technical Requirements
ICEA S-98-688
ICEA S-99-689
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA) ANSI C62.61 (1993) Gas Tube Surge Arresters on Wire Line Telephone Circuits
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) NFPA 70 (2011; TIA 11-1; Errata 2011; TIA 11-2; TIA 11-3; TIA 11-4) National Electrical Code TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION (TIA) TIA J-STD-607-A (2002) Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for SECTION 33 82 00 Page 1
W912HN-12-R-0003
Telecommunications TIA TIA/EIA-455-204 (2000) Standard for Measurement of Bandwidth on Multimode Fiber (1999) Component Reflectance or Link/System Return Loss using a Loss Test Set (2002) FOTP-78 Optical Fibres - Part 1-40: Measurement Methods and Test Procedures - Attenuation (1998; R 2002) Detail Specification for Class IVa Dispersion-Unshifted Single-Mode Optical Fibers (1996; R 2002) Class IVd Nonzero-Dispersion Single-Mode Optical Fibers for the 1550 nm Window (1998) OFSTP-14A Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant (2002; R 2008) OFSTP-7 Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Single-Mode Fiber Cable Plant (2009) Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard (2009; Errata 2010) Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cabling and Components Standards (2008; Corrections 2008) Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard (1997) Standard for Physical Location and Protection of Below Ground Fiber Optic Cable Plant (2004) Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard (1998) Standard Test Procedure for Fiber Optic Fibers, Cables, Transducers, Sensors, Connecting and Terminating Devices, and Other Fiber Optic Components (2005) Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding (2002; Reaffirmed 2007) Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure
TIA-455-107A
TIA-455-78-B
TIA-492CAAA
TIA-492E000
TIA-526-14-A
TIA-526-7
TIA-568-C.1
TIA-568-C.2
TIA-568-C.3
TIA-590-A
TIA-758-A
TIA/EIA-455-B
TIA/EIA-598-B TIA/EIA-606-A
SECTION 33 82 00
Page 2
W912HN-12-R-0003
THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC) SSPC SP 6/NACE No.3 (2007) Commercial Blast Cleaning
U.S. ARMY INFORMATION SYSTEMS ENGINEERING COMMAND (USAISEC) U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE (USDA) RUS 1755 Telecommunications Standards and Specifications for Materials, Equipment and Construction (1996) Design of Aerial Plant (2002) Underground Plant Design (1979) Electrical Protection of Outside Plant (1997) Acceptance Tests of Telecommunications Plant (PC-4) (1995) Splicing Copper and Fiber Optic Cables (PC-2) (1985) Shield Bonding Connectors (PE-65) (1985) Filled Splice Closures (PE-74) (1979; Rev Oct 1982) Gas Tube Surge Arrestors (PE-80)
RUS Bull 1751F-630 RUS Bull 1751F-643 RUS Bull 1751F-815
RUS Bull 1753F-201
RUS Bull 1753F-401
RUS Bull 345-65 RUS Bull 345-72 RUS Bull 345-83
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) UL 497 (2001; R 2004; R 2009) Protectors for Paired Conductor Communication Circuits (2005; Reprint Apr 2008) Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene and Rubber Insulating Tape (2008) Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables
UL 510
UL 83
1.2
Section 27 10 00, BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM, and Section 33 70 02.00 10, ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, UNDERGROUND apply to this section with additions and modifications specified herein. 1.3 DEFINITIONS
Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in this specification shall be as defined in TIA and IEEE referenced standards. 1.3.1 Campus Distributor (CD)
A distributor from which the campus backbone cabling emanates. SECTION 33 82 00 Page 3
W912HN-12-R-0003
(International expression for main cross-connect - (MC).) 1.3.2 Entrance Facility (EF) (Telecommunications)
An entrance to the building for both private and public network service cables (including antennae) including the entrance point at the building wall and continuing to the entrance room or space. 1.3.3 Entrance Room (ER) (Telecommunications)
A centralized space for telecommunications equipment that serves the occupants of a building. Equipment housed therein is considered distinct from a telecommunications room because of the nature of its complexity. 1.3.4 Building Distributor (BD)
A distributor in which the building backbone cables terminate and at which connections to the campus backbone cables may be made. (International expression for intermediate cross-connect - (IC).) 1.3.5 Pathway
A physical infrastructure utilized for the placement and routing of telecommunications cable. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The telecommunications outside plant consists of cable, conduit, etc. required to provide signal paths from the closest point of presence to the new facility, including free standing frames or backboards, interconnecting hardware, terminating cables, lightning and surge protection modules at the entrance facility. The work consists of providing, testing and making operational cabling, interconnecting hardware and lightning and surge protection necessary to form a complete outside plant telecommunications system for continuous use. 1.5 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: SD-02 Shop Drawings Telecommunications Outside Plant; G, RO Telecommunications Entrance Facility Drawings G, RO In addition to Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, provide shop drawings in accordance with paragraph SHOP DRAWINGS. SD-03 Product Data Wire and cable G, RO Cable splices, and connectors G, RO SECTION 33 82 00 Page 4
W912HN-12-R-0003
Closures G, RO Building protector assemblies G, RO Protector modules G, RO Spare Parts G, RO Submittals shall include the manufacturer's name, trade name, place of manufacture, and catalog model or number. Submittals shall also include applicable federal, military, industry, and technical society publication references. Should manufacturer's data require supplemental information for clarification, the supplemental information shall be submitted as specified in paragraph REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS and as required for certificates in Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES. SD-06 Test Reports Pre-installation tests G, RO Acceptance tests G, RO Outside Plant Test Plan G, RO SD-07 Certificates Telecommunications Contractor Qualifications Key Personnel Qualifications Minimum Manufacturer's Qualifications SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions Building protector assembly installation G, RO Cable tensions G, RO Fiber Optic Splices G, RO Submit instructions prior to installation. SD-09 Manufacturer's Field Reports Factory Reel Test Data G, RO SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data Telecommunications outside plant (OSP), Data Package 5 G, RO Commercial off-the-shelf manuals shall be provided for operation, installation, configuration, and maintenance of products provided as a part of the telecommunications outside plant (OSP). Submit operations and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 23, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein not later than 2 months prior to the date of beneficial occupancy. In addition to requirements of Data package 5, include the SECTION 33 82 00 Page 5
W912HN-12-R-0003
requirements of paragraphs TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTSIDE PLANT SHOP DRAWINGS and TELECOMMUNICATIONS ENTRANCE FACILITY DRAWINGS. SD-11 Closeout Submittals Record Documentation G, RO In addition to other requirements, provide in accordance with paragraph RECORD DOCUMENTATION. 1.6 1.6.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE Shop Drawings
Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown to ensure a coordinated installation. Wiring diagrams shall identify circuit terminals and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnection between each item of equipment. Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment devices. Submittals shall include the nameplate data, size, and capacity. Submittals shall also include applicable federal, military, industry, and technical society publication references. 1.6.1.1 Telecommunications Outside Plant Shop Drawings
Provide Outside Plant Design in accordance with TIA-758-A, RUS Bull 1751F-630 for aerial system design, and RUS Bull 1751F-643 for underground system design. Provide T0 shop drawings that show the physical and logical connections from the perspective of an entire campus, such as actual building locations, exterior pathways and campus backbone cabling on plan view drawings, major system nodes, and related connections on the logical system drawings in accordance with TIA/EIA-606-A. Drawings shall include wiring and schematic diagrams for fiber optic and copper cabling and splices, copper conductor gauge and pair count, fiber pair count and type, maintenance hole/hand-hole butterfly drawings, pathway duct and innerduct arrangement, associated construction materials, and any details required to demonstrate that cable system has been coordinated and will properly support the switching and transmission system identified in specification and drawings. Provide Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD) approved drawings of the telecommunications outside plant. Update existing telecommunication Outside Plant T0 drawings to include information modified, deleted or added as a result of this installation in accordance with TIA/EIA-606-A. The telecommunications outside plant (OSP) shop drawings shall be included in the operation and maintenance manuals. 1.6.1.2 Telecommunications Entrance Facility Drawings
Provide T3 drawings for EF Telecommunications as specified in the paragraph TELECOMMUNICATIONS SPACE DRAWINGS of Section 27 10 00, BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEMS. The telecommunications entrance facility shop drawings shall be included in the operation and maintenance manuals. 1.6.2 Telecommunications Qualifications
Work under this section shall be performed by and the equipment shall be provided by the approved telecommunications contractor and key personnel. SECTION 33 82 00 Page 6
W912HN-12-R-0003
Qualifications shall be provided for: the telecommunications system contractor, the telecommunications system installer, the supervisor (if different from the installer), and the cable splicing and terminating personnel. A minimum of 30 days prior to installation, submit documentation of the experience of the telecommunications contractor and of the key personnel. 1.6.2.1 Telecommunications Contractor Qualifications
The telecommunications contractor shall be a firm which is regularly and professionally engaged in the business of the applications, installation, and testing of the specified telecommunications systems and equipment. The telecommunications contractor shall demonstrate experience in providing successful telecommunications systems that include outside plant and broadband cabling within the past 3 years. Submit documentation for a minimum of three and a maximum of five successful telecommunication system installations for the telecommunications contractor. Each of the key personnel shall demonstrate experience in providing successful telecommunications systems in accordance with TIA-758-A within the past 3 years. 1.6.2.2 Key Personnel Qualifications
Provide key personnel who are regularly and professionally engaged in the business of the application, installation and testing of the specified telecommunications systems and equipment. There may be one key person or more key persons proposed for this solicitation depending upon how many of the key roles each has successfully provided. Each of the key personnel shall demonstrate experience in providing successful telecommunications systems within the past 3 years. Cable splicing and terminating personnel assigned to the installation of this system or any of its components shall have training in the proper techniques and have a minimum of 3 years experience in splicing and terminating the specified cables. Modular splices shall be performed by factory certified personnel or under direct supervision of factory trained personnel for products used. Supervisors and installers assigned to the installation of this system or any of its components shall have factory or factory approved certification from each equipment manufacturer indicating that they are qualified to install and test the provided products. Submit documentation for a minimum of three and a maximum of five successful telecommunication system installations for each of the key personnel. Documentation for each key person shall include at least two successful system installations provided that are equivalent in system size and in construction complexity to the telecommunications system proposed for this solicitation. Include specific experience in installing and testing telecommunications outside plant systems, including broadband cabling, and provide the names and locations of at least two project installations successfully completed using optical fiber and copper telecommunications cabling systems. All of the existing telecommunications system installations offered by the key persons as successful experience shall have been in successful full-time service for at least 18 months prior to the issuance date for this solicitation. Provide the name and role of the key person, the title, location, and completed installation date of the referenced project, the referenced project owner point of contact information including name, organization, title, and telephone SECTION 33 82 00 Page 7
W912HN-12-R-0003
number, and generally, the referenced project description including system size and construction complexity. Indicate that all key persons are currently employed by the telecommunications contractor, or have a commitment to the telecommunications contractor to work on this project. All key persons shall be employed by the telecommunications contractor at the date of issuance of this solicitation, or if not, have a commitment to the telecommunications contractor to work on this project by the date that the bid was due to the Contracting Officer. Note that only the key personnel approved by the Contracting Officer in the successful proposal shall do work on this solicitation's telecommunications system. Key personnel shall function in the same roles in this contract, as they functioned in the offered successful experience. Any substitutions for the telecommunications contractor's key personnel requires approval from The Contracting Officer. 1.6.2.3 Minimum Manufacturer's Qualifications
Cabling, equipment and hardware manufacturers shall have a minimum of 3 years experience in the manufacturing, assembly, and factory testing of components which comply with TIA-568-C.1, TIA-568-C.2, TIA-568-C.3 and TIA-758-A. In addition, cabling manufacturers shall have a minimum of 3 years experience in the manufacturing and factory testing of cabling which comply with ICEA S-87-640, ICEA S-98-688, and ICEA S-99-689. 1.6.3 Outside Plant Test Plan
Prepare and provide a complete and detailed test plan for field tests of the outside plant including a complete list of test equipment for the copper conductor and optical fiber cables, components, and accessories for approval by the Contracting Officer. Include a cut-over plan with procedures and schedules for relocation of facility station numbers without interrupting service to any active location. Submit the plan at least 30 days prior to tests for Contracting Officer approval. Provide outside plant testing and performance measurement criteria in accordance with TIA-568-C.1 and RUS Bull 1753F-201. Include procedures for certification, validation, and testing that includes fiber optic link performance criteria. 1.6.4 Standard Products
Provide materials and equipment that are standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship and shall be the manufacturer's latest standard design that has been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for at least 1 year prior to bid opening. The 1-year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 1-year period. Products supplied shall be specifically designed and manufactured for use with outside plant telecommunications systems. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.
SECTION 33 82 00
Page 8
W912HN-12-R-0003
1.6.4.1
Alternative Qualifications
Products having less than a 1-year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 3000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is provided. 1.6.4.2 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date
Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used, unless specified otherwise. 1.6.5 Regulatory Requirements
In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated. 1.6.5.1 Independent Testing Organization Certificate
In lieu of the label or listing, submit a certificate from an independent testing organization, competent to perform testing, and approved by the Contracting Officer. The certificate shall state that the item has been tested in accordance with the specified organization's test methods and that the item complies with the specified organization's reference standard. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Ship cable on reels in lengths as appropriate to avoid splicing and with a minimum overage of 10 percent. Radius of the reel drum shall not be smaller than the minimum bend radius of the cable. Wind cable on the reel so that unwinding can be done without kinking the cable. Two meters of cable at both ends of the cable shall be accessible for testing. Attach permanent label on each reel showing length, cable identification number, cable size, cable type, and date of manufacture. Provide water resistant label and the indelible writing on the labels. Apply end seals to each end of the cables to prevent moisture from entering the cable. Reels with cable shall be suitable for outside storage conditions when temperature ranges from minus 40 degrees C to plus 65 degrees C, with relative humidity from 0 to 100 percent. Equipment, other than cable, delivered and placed in storage shall be stored with protection from weather, humidity and temperature variation, dirt and dust, or other contaminants in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. 1.8 1.8.1 MAINTENANCE Record Documentation
Provide the activity responsible for telecommunications system maintenance and administration a single complete and accurate set of record documentation for the entire telecommunications system with respect to this project. Provide record documentation as specified in Section 27 10 00, BUILDING SECTION 33 82 00 Page 9
W912HN-12-R-0003
TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM. 1.8.2 Spare Parts
In addition to the requirements of Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA, provide a complete list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply, and a list of spare parts recommended for stocking. Spare parts shall be provided no later than the start of field testing. 1.9 WARRANTY
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract. PART 2 2.1 PRODUCTS MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Products supplied shall be specifically designed and manufactured for use with outside plant telecommunications systems. 2.2 2.2.1 TELECOMMUNICATIONS ENTRANCE FACILITY Building Protector Assemblies
Provide self-contained 5 pin units supplied with a field cable stub factory connected to protector socket blocks to terminate and accept protector modules for 100 pairs of outside cable. Assembly type shall match local NEC standards. Building protector assembly shall have interconnecting hardware for connection to interior cabling at full capacity. Provide manufacturers instructions for building protector assembly installation. Provide copper cable interconnecting hardware as specified in Section 27 10 00 BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM. 2.2.2 Protector Modules
Provide in accordance with UL 497 three-electrode gas tube or solid state type 5 pin rated for the application. Provide gas tube protection modules in accordance with RUS Bull 345-83 and shall be heavy duty, A>10kA, B>400, C>65A where A is the maximum single impulse discharge current, B is the impulse life and C is the AC discharge current in accordance with ANSI C62.61. The gas modules shall shunt high voltage to ground, fail short, and be equipped with an external spark gap and heat coils in accordance with UL 497. Provide the number of surge protection modules equal to the number of pairs of exterior cable of the building protector assembly. 2.2.3 Fiber Optic Terminations
Provide fiber optic cable terminations as specified in 27 10 00 BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM.
SECTION 33 82 00
Page 10
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.3 2.3.1
CLOSURES Copper Conductor Closures Cable Closures Aboveground: Provide aboveground closures constructed of ultraviolet resistant PVC and acceptable for stake mounting in accordance with RUS 1755.910. Closures shall be sized and contain a marker as indicated. Covers shall be secured to prevent unauthorized entry. In vault or manhole: Provide underground closure suitable to house a straight, butt, and branch splice in a protective housing into which can be poured an encapsulating compound. Closure shall be of suitable thermoplastic, thermoset, or stainless steel material supplying structural strength necessary to pass the mechanical and electrical requirements in a vault or manhole environment. Encapsulating compound shall be reenterable and shall not alter the chemical stability of the closure. Provide filled splice cases in accordance with RUS Bull 345-72.
2.3.1.1 a.
b.
2.3.2 2.3.2.1
Fiber Optic Closures In Vault or Manhole
Provide underground closure suitable to house splice organizer in a protective housing into which can be poured an encapsulating compound. Closure shall be of thermoplastic, thermoset, or stainless steel material supplying structural strength necessary to pass the mechanical and electrical requirements in a vault or manhole environment. Encapsulating compound shall be reenterable and shall not alter the chemical stability of the closure. 2.4 2.4.1 CABLE SPLICES, AND CONNECTORS Copper Cable Splices
Provide multi-pair, inline splices of a moisture resistant, two-wire insulation displacement connector held rigidly in place to assure maximum continuity in accordance with RUS Bull 1753F-401. Cables greater than 25 pairs shall be spliced using multipair splicing connectors, which accommodate 25 pairs of conductors at a time. Provide correct connector size to accommodate the cable gauge of the supplied cable. 2.4.2 Copper Cable Splice Connector
Provide splice connectors with a polycarbonate body and cap and a tin-plated brass contact element. Connector shall accommodate 22 to 26 AWG solid wire with a maximum insulation diameter of 0.065 inch. Fill connector with sealant grease to make a moisture resistant connection, in accordance with RUS Bull 1753F-401. 2.4.3 Fiber Optic Cable Splices
Provide fiber optic cable splices and splicing materials for fusion methods at locations shown on the construction drawings. The splice insertion loss shall be 0.3 dB maximum when measured in accordance with TIA-455-78-B using an Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR). Splices shall be designed for SECTION 33 82 00 Page 11
W912HN-12-R-0003
a return loss of 0.3 db max for single mode fiber when tested in accordance with TIA-455-107A. Physically protect each fiber optic splice by a splice kit specially designed for the splice. 2.4.4 Fiber Optic Splice Organizer
Provide splice organizer suitable for housing fiber optic splices in a neat and orderly fashion. Splice organizer shall allow for a minimum of 3 feet of fiber for each fiber within the cable to be neatly stored without kinks or twists. Splice organizer shall accommodate individual strain relief for each splice and allow for future maintenance or modification, without damage to the cable or splices. Provide splice organizer hardware, such as splice trays, protective glass shelves, and shield bond connectors in a splice organizer kit. 2.4.5 Shield Connectors
Provide connectors with a stable, low-impedance electrical connection between the cable shield and the bonding conductor in accordance with RUS Bull 345-65. 2.5 CONDUIT
Provide conduit as specified in Section 33 70 02.00 10, ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, UNDERGROUND. 2.6 PLASTIC INSULATING TAPE
UL 510. 2.7 2.7.1 WIRE AND CABLE Copper Conductor Cable
Solid copper conductors, covered with an extruded solid insulating compound. Insulated conductors shall be twisted into pairs which are then stranded or oscillated to form a cylindrical core. For special high frequency applications, the cable core shall be separated into compartments. Cable shall be completed by the application of a suitable core wrapping material, a corrugated copper or plastic coated aluminum shield, and an overall extruded jacket. Telecommunications contractor shall verify distances between splice points prior to ordering cable in specific cut lengths. Gauge of conductor shall determine the range of numbers of pairs specified; 19 gauge (6 to 400 pairs), 22 gauge (6 to 1200 pairs), 24 gauge (6 to 2100 pairs), and 26 gauge (6 to 3000 pairs). Copper conductor shall conform to the following: 2.7.1.1 Underground RUS 1755.390,
Provide filled cable meeting the requirements of ICEA S-99-689 , and RUS 1755.890. 2.7.1.2 Screen
Provide screen-compartmental core cable filled cable meeting the requirements of ICEA S-99-689 and RUS 1755.390.
SECTION 33 82 00
Page 12
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.7.2
Fiber Optic Cable
Provide single-mode, 8/125-um, 0.10 aperture 1310 nm fiber optic cable in accordance with TIA-492CAAA single-mode, 8/125-um, 0.10 aperture 1550 nm fiber optic cable in accordance with TIA-492E000 including any special requirements made necessary by a specialized design. Cabling shall met requirements of I3A Paragraph 3.15.4. Provide number of optical fibers as indicated. Fiber optic cable shall be specifically designed for outside use with loose buffer construction. Provide fiber optic color code in accordance with TIA/EIA-598-B 2.7.2.1 Strength Members
Provide non-metallic strength members with sufficient tensile strength for installation and residual rated loads to meet the applicable performance requirements in accordance with ICEA S-87-640. The strength member is included to serve as a cable core foundation to reduce strain on the fibers, and shall not serve as a pulling strength member. 2.7.2.2 Performance Requirements
Provide fiber optic cable with optical and mechanical performance requirements in accordance with ICEA S-87-640. 2.7.3 Grounding and Bonding Conductors
Provide grounding and bonding conductors in accordance with RUS 1755.200, TIA J-STD-607-A, IEEE C2, and NFPA 70. Solid bare copper wire meeting the requirements of ASTM B 1 for sizes No. 8 AWG and smaller and stranded bare copper wire meeting the requirements of ASTM B 8, for sizes No. 6 AWG and larger. Insulated conductors shall have 600-volt, Type TW insulation meeting the requirements of UL 83. 2.8 CABLE TAGS IN MANHOLES, HANDHOLES, AND VAULTS
Provide tags for each telecommunications cable or wire located in manholes, handholes, and vaults. Cable tags shall be polyethylene and labeled in accordance with TIA/EIA-606-A and local NEC standards. Handwritten labeling is unacceptable. 2.8.1 Polyethylene Cable Tags
Provide tags of polyethylene that have an average tensile strength of 3250 pounds per square inch; and that are 0.08 inch thick (minimum), non-corrosive non-conductive; resistive to acids, alkalis, organic solvents, and salt water; and distortion resistant to 170 degrees F. Provide 0.05 inch (minimum) thick black polyethylene tag holder. Provide a one-piece nylon, self-locking tie at each end of the cable tag. Ties shall have a minimum loop tensile strength of 175 pounds. The cable tags shall have black block letters, numbers, and symbols one inch high on a yellow background. Letters, numbers, and symbols shall not fall off or change positions regardless of the cable tags' orientation. 2.9 BURIED WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE
Provide fiber optic media marking and protection in accordance with TIA-590-A. Provide color, type and depth of tape as specified in paragraph BURIED WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE in Section 31 00 00, EARTHWORK.
SECTION 33 82 00
Page 13
W912HN-12-R-0003
2.10
GROUNDING BRAID
Provide grounding braid that provides low electrical impedance connections for dependable shield bonding in accordance with RUS 1755.200. Braid shall be made from flat tin-plated copper. 2.11 MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE
Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable. 2.12 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES
Provide laminated plastic nameplates in accordance with ASTM D 709 for each patch panel, protector assembly, rack, cabinet and other equipment or as indicated on the drawings. Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function and, when applicable, the position. Nameplates shall be melamine plastic, 0.125 inch thick, white with black center core. Surface shall be matte finish. Corners shall be square. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be one by 2.5 inches. Lettering shall be a minimum of 0.25 inch high normal block style. 2.13 2.13.1 TESTS, INSPECTIONS, AND VERIFICATIONS Factory Reel Test Data
Test 100 percent OTDR test of FO media at the factory in accordance with TIA-568-C.1 and TIA-568-C.3. Use TIA-526-7 for single mode fiber and TIA-526-14-A Method B for multi mode fiber measurements. Calibrate OTDR to show anomalies of 0.2 dB minimum. Enhanced performance filled OSP copper cables, referred to as Broadband Outside Plant (BBOSP), shall meet the requirements of ICEA S-99-689. Enhanced performance air core OSP copper cables shall meet the requirements of ICEA S-98-688. Submit test reports, including manufacture date for each cable reel and receive approval before delivery of cable to the project site. PART 3 3.1 EXECUTION INSTALLATION
Install all system components and appurtenances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and as indicated. Provide all necessary interconnections, services, and adjustments required for a complete and operable telecommunications system. 3.1.1 Contractor Damage
Promptly repair indicated utility lines or systems damaged during site preparation and construction. Damages to lines or systems not indicated, which are caused by Contractor operations, shall be treated as "Changes" under the terms of the Contract Clauses. When Contractor is advised in writing of the location of a nonindicated line or system, such notice shall provide that portion of the line or system with "indicated" status in determining liability for damages. In every event, immediately notify the Contracting Officer of damage.
SECTION 33 82 00
Page 14
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.1.2
Cable Inspection and Repair
Handle cable and wire provided in the construction of this project with care. Inspect cable reels for cuts, nicks or other damage. Damaged cable shall be replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer. Reel wraps shall remain intact on the reel until the cable is ready for placement. 3.1.3 Underground Duct
Provide underground duct and connections to existing manholes, and handholes as specified in Section 33 70 02.00 10, ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, UNDERGROUND with any additional requirements as specified herein. 3.1.4 Reconditioning of Surfaces
Provide reconditioning of surfaces as specified in Section 33 70 02.00 10, ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, UNDERGROUND. 3.1.5 Penetrations
Caulk and seal cable access penetrations in walls, ceilings and other parts of the building. Seal openings around electrical penetrations through fire resistance-rated wall, partitions, floors, or ceilings in accordance with Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING. 3.1.6 Cable Pulling
Test duct lines with a mandrel and swab out to remove foreign material before the pulling of cables. Avoid damage to cables in setting up pulling apparatus or in placing tools or hardware. Do not step on cables when entering or leaving the manhole. Do not place cables in ducts other than those shown without prior written approval of the Contracting Officer. Roll cable reels in the direction indicated by the arrows painted on the reel flanges. Set up cable reels on the same side of the manhole as the conduit section in which the cable is to be placed. Level the reel and bring into proper alignment with the conduit section so that the cable pays off from the top of the reel in a long smooth bend into the duct without twisting. Under no circumstances shall the cable be paid off from the bottom of a reel. Check the equipment set up prior to beginning the cable pulling to avoid an interruption once pulling has started. Use a cable feeder guide of suitable dimensions between cable reel and face of duct to protect cable and guide cable into the duct as it is paid off the reel. As cable is paid off the reel, lubricate and inspect cable for sheath defects. When defects are noticed, stop pulling operations and notify the Contracting Officer to determine required corrective action. Cable pulling shall also be stopped when reel binds or does not pay off freely. Rectify cause of binding before resuming pulling operations. Provide cable lubricants recommended by the cable manufacturer. Avoid bends in cables of small radii and twists that might cause damage. Do not bend cable and wire in a radius less than 10 times the outside diameter of the cable or wire. 3.1.6.1 Cable Tensions
Obtain from the cable manufacturer and provide to the Contracting Officer, the maximum allowable pulling tension. This tension shall not be exceeded.
SECTION 33 82 00
Page 15
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.1.6.2
Pulling Eyes
Equip cables 1.25 inches in diameter and larger with cable manufacturer's factory installed pulling-in eyes. Provide cables with diameter smaller than 1.25 inches with heat shrinkable type end caps or seals on cable ends when using cable pulling grips. Rings to prevent grip from slipping shall not be beaten into the cable sheath. Use a swivel of 3/4 inch links between pulling-in eyes or grips and pulling strand. 3.1.7 3.1.7.1 Cable Splicing Copper Conductor Splices
Perform splicing in accordance with requirements of RUS Bull 1753F-401 except that direct buried splices and twisted and soldered splices are not allowed. Exception does not apply for pairs assigned for carrier application. 3.1.7.2 Fiber Optic Splices
Fiber optic splicing shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation and shall exhibit an insertion loss not greater than 0.2 dB for fusion splices. 3.1.8 Surge Protection
All cables and conductors, except fiber optic cable, which serve as communication lines through off-premise lines, shall have surge protection installed at each end which meet the requirements of RUS Bull 1751F-815. 3.1.9 Grounding
Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with RUS 1755.200, TIA J-STD-607-A, IEEE C2, and NFPA 70. Ground exposed noncurrent carrying metallic parts of telephone equipment, cable sheaths, cable splices, and terminals. 3.1.9.1 Telecommunications Master Ground Bar (TMGB)
The TMGB is the hub of the basic telecommunications grounding system providing a common point of connection for ground from outside cable, CD, and equipment. Establish a TMGB for connection point for cable stub shields to connector blocks and CD protector assemblies as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS. 3.1.9.2 Incoming Cable Shields
Shields shall not be bonded across the splice to the cable stubs. Ground shields of incoming cables in the EF Telecommunications to the TMGB. 3.1.9.3 a. Campus Distributor Grounding Protection assemblies: Mount CD protector assemblies directly on the telecommunications backboard. Connect assemblies mounted on each vertical frame with No. 6 AWG copper conductor to provide a low resistance path to TMGB. TMGB connection: Connect TMGB to TGB with copper conductor with a total resistance of less than 0.01 ohms. SECTION 33 82 00 Page 16
b.
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.1.10
Cut-Over
All necessary transfers and cut-overs, shall be accomplished by the telecommunications contractor. 3.2 3.2.1 LABELING Labels
Provide labeling for new cabling and termination hardware located within the facility in accordance with TIA/EIA-606-A. Handwritten labeling is unacceptable. Stenciled lettering for cable and termination hardware shall be provided using laser printer. 3.2.2 Cable Tag Installation
Install cable tags for each telecommunications cable or wire located in manholes, handholes, and vaults including each splice. Tag new wire and cable provided under this contract and existing wire and cable which are indicated to have splices and terminations provided by this contract. The labeling of telecommunications cable tag identifiers shall be in accordance with TIA/EIA-606-A. Coordinate labeling with the Contracting Officer to meet the hospital IM standards. Do not provide handwritten letters. Install cable tags so that they are clearly visible without disturbing any cabling or wiring in the manholes, handholes, and vaults. 3.2.3 Termination Hardware
Label patch panels, distribution panels, connector blocks and protection modules using color coded labels with identifiers in accordance with TIA/EIA-606-A. 3.3 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING
Provide ferrous metallic enclosure finishes in accordance with the following procedures. Ensure that surfaces are dry and clean when the coating is applied. Coat joints and crevices. Prior to assembly, paint surfaces which will be concealed or inaccessible after assembly. Apply primer and finish coat in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.3.1 Cleaning
Clean surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 6/NACE No.3. 3.3.2 Priming
Prime with a two component polyamide epoxy primer which has a bisphenol-A base, a minimum of 60 percent solids by volume, and an ability to build up a minimum dry film thickness on a vertical surface of 5.0 mils. Apply in two coats to a total dry film thickness of 5 to 8 mils. 3.3.3 Finish Coat
Finish with a two component urethane consisting of saturated polyester polyol resin mixed with aliphatic isocyanate which has a minimum of 50 percent solids by volume. Apply to a minimum dry film thickness of 2 to 3 mils. Color shall be the manufacturer's standard. SECTION 33 82 00 Page 17
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.4
FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE MOUNTING
Provide number, location, and letter designation of nameplates as indicated. Fasten nameplates to the device with a minimum of two sheet-metal screws or two rivets. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Provide the Contracting Officer10 working days notice prior to each test. Provide labor, equipment, and incidentals required for testing. Correct defective material and workmanship disclosed as the results of the tests. Furnish a signed copy of the test results to the Contracting Officer within 3 working days after the tests for each segment of construction are completed. Perform testing as construction progresses and do not wait until all construction is complete before starting field tests. 3.5.1 Pre-Installation Tests
Perform the following tests on cable at the job site before it is removed from the cable reel. For cables with factory installed pulling eyes, these tests shall be performed at the factory and certified test results shall accompany the cable. 3.5.1.1 Cable Capacitance
Perform capacitance tests on at least 10 percent of the pairs within a cable to determine if cable capacitance is within the limits specified. 3.5.1.2 Loop Resistance
Perform DC-loop resistance on at least 10 percent of the pairs within a cable to determine if DC-loop resistance is within the manufacturer's calculated resistance. 3.5.1.3 Pre-Installation Test Results
Provide results of pre-installation tests to the Contracting Officer at least 5 working days before installation is to start. Results shall indicate reel number of the cable, manufacturer, size of cable, pairs tested, and recorded readings. When pre-installation tests indicate that cable does not meet specifications, remove cable from the job site. 3.5.2 Acceptance Tests
Perform acceptance testing in accordance with RUS Bull 1753F-201 and as further specified in this section. Provide personnel, equipment, instrumentation, and supplies necessary to perform required testing. Notification of any planned testing shall be given to the Contracting Officer at least 14 days prior to any test unless specified otherwise. Testing shall not proceed until after the Contractor has received written Contracting Officer's approval of the test plans as specified. Test plans shall define the tests required to ensure that the system meets technical, operational, and performance specifications. The test plans shall define milestones for the tests, equipment, personnel, facilities, and supplies required. The test plans shall identify the capabilities and functions to be tested. Provide test reports in booklet form showing all field tests performed, upon completion and testing of the installed system. Measurements shall be tabulated on a pair by pair or strand by strand basis. SECTION 33 82 00 Page 18
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.5.2.1
Copper Conductor Cable
Perform the following acceptance tests in accordance with TIA-758-A: a. b. c. d. e. f. 3.5.2.2 Wire map (pin to pin continuity) Continuity to remote end Crossed pairs Reversed pairs Split pairs Shorts between two or more conductors Fiber Optic Cable
Test fiber optic cable in accordance with TIA/EIA-455-B and as further specified in this section. Two optical tests shall be performed on all optical fibers: Optical Time Domain Reflectometry (OTDR) Test, and Attenuation Test. These tests shall be performed on the completed end-to-end spans which include the near-end pre-connectorized single fiber cable assembly, outside plant as specified, and the far-end pre-connectorized single fiber cable assembly. a. OTDR Test: The OTDR test shall be used to determine the adequacy of the cable installations by showing any irregularities, such as discontinuities, micro-bendings or improper splices for the cable span under test. Hard copy fiber signature records shall be obtained from the OTDR for each fiber in each span and shall be included in the test results. The OTDR test shall be measured in both directions. A reference length of fiber, 66 feet minimum, used as the delay line shall be placed before the new end connector and after the far end patch panel connectors for inspection of connector signature. Conduct OTDR test and provide calculation or interpretation of results in accordance with TIA-526-7 for single-mode fiber and TIA-526-14-A for multimode fiber. Splice losses shall not exceed 0.3 db. Attenuation Test: End-to-end attenuation measurements shall be made on all fibers, in both directions, using a 1550 nanometer light source at one end and the optical power meter on the other end to verify that the cable system attenuation requirements are met in accordance with TIA-526-7 for single-mode fiber optic cables. The measurement method shall be in accordance with TIA-455-78-B. Attenuation losses shall not exceed 0.5 db/km at 1310 nm and 1550 nm for single-mode fiber. Attenuation losses shall not exceed 5.0 db/km at 850 nm and 1.5 db/km at 1300 nm for multimode fiber. Bandwidth Test: The end-to-end bandwidth of all multimode fiber span links shall be measured by the frequency domain method. The bandwidth shall be measured in both directions on all fibers. The bandwidth measurements shall be in accordance with TIA TIA/EIA-455-204.
b.
c.
SECTION 33 82 00
Page 19
W912HN-12-R-0003
3.5.3
Soil Density Tests a. Determine soil-density relationships as specified for soil tests in Section 31 00 00, EARTHWORK.
SECTION 33 82 00
Page 20
WINN ARMY COMMUNITY HOSPITAL ADDITION/ALTERATION FY12-PN-72292-Hospital Addition/Alteration LEO A DALY Ft. Stewart, Georgia Ready-To-Advertise (RTA) Documents (100% Design)
ROOM CONTENTS REPORT
MASTER EQUIPMENT AND CASEWORK SCHEDULE_ED.xlsx Heat Gain BTU Treated Water Nitrous Oxide Drain / Waste
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
JSN A1010 A1030 A1066 A1070 A1080 A1107 A1132 A1200 A4015 A4995 A5025 A5030 A5075 A5080 A5106 A5109 A5110 A5120 A5135 A5145 A5155 A5170 A5180 A5180L A5200 A5207 A5210 A5215 A5220 A6030 A6045 A6046 A6105 A6105a A6105f A6110 C02C0 C02C0a C02D0a C04E0 C04F0 C04H0 C04J0 C04P0 C04P0a C05P0 C0040 C0041 CB020 CD040 CE040 CG040 CG050
Cat A C A A A A C A A A C A C A C A A A A A A A A A A A A A A D C C A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A
Quantity 4 20 34 4 8 5 42 7 4 14 4 2 55 53 39 14 2 2 3 130 1 2 20 9 20 2 2 2 2 4 2 65 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 3 2 2 4 2 4 4 4 1 1
Description Telecommunication Outlet Locker, 2 Person, Over/Under Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame, 36 x Required Mirror, Posture, Wall Mounted Rail System, Utility, Gas and Electric Rail, Accessory Mounoting, Length As Required Lift System, Overhead Clock, Elapsed Time, Electric Table, Diaper Changing, Wall Mounted Bench, Locker Room, Portable Bench, Stall, Shower, Built In Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps w/Glove Dispenser Grab Bar, 1-1/4" Dia, SS, 2 Wall, W/C Accessible Grab Bar, 1-1/4" Dia, SS, 2 Wall, Shower Use, 42" Window, Observation, One Way Shelf, Utility W/ Mop/Broom Holders, SS, Surf Mntd Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Costumer, Wall, Executive Rod, Shower Curtain, 1"Diameter, W/Curtain & Hooks Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain Dispenser, Toilet Tissue, SS, 2-Roll, Surface Mntd Bar, Towel, 1" Diameter, SS, Surface Mntd, Psych Bracket, Television, Wall Mounted, w/Adjust Arm Bracket, Television, Ceiling Mounted Bracket, Television, Wall Backing Machine, Vending Artwork, Mural, Wall Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Counter, Reception Control, Built-In Counter, Reception Control, Built-In Counter, Reception Control, Built-In Counter, Console, Comminications Cabinet, U/C/B, 1 Shelf, 1 Drawer, 1 DO, 36x24x22 Cabinet, U/C/B, 1 Shelf, 1 Drawer, 1 DO, 34x24x22 Cabinet, U/C/B, 4 Drawer, 34x24x22 Cabinet, U/C/B, 1 Shelf, 1 Drawer, 2 DO, 36x36x22 Cabinet, U/C/B, 1 Shelf, 2 Half DR, 2 DO, 36x36x22 Cabinet, U/C/B, 2 Half Drawer, 3 Drawer 36x36x22 Cabinet, U/C/B, 8 Half Drawer, 36x36x22 Cabinet, Sink, U/C/B, 2 Door, 36x36x22 Cabinet, Sink, U/C/B, 2 Door, 34x36x22 Cabinet, Sink, U/C/B, 2 Door, 36x48x22 Rail, Apron, 4x54x1 Rail, Apron, 4x60x1 Cabinet, W/H, 2 Shelf, 1 DO, Sloping Top, 38x24x13 Cabinet, W/H, 2 Shelf, 2 DO, Sloping Top, 38x36x13 Cabinet, W/H, 2 SH, 2 GDO, Sloping Top, 38x36x13 Cabinet, W/H, 2 SH, 2 SGDO, Sloping Top, 38x36x13 Cabinet, W/H, 2 SH, 2 SGDO, Sloping Top, 38x48x13
250
120
15
Page 1 of 5
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
JSN CS010 CS090 CS150 CS200 CT030 CT040 E0051b E0051c E0063 E0078 E0123 E0222 E0226 E0412a E0418a E0579a E0851 E0903 E0906 E0912 E0915 E0948 E0954 E0987 E1500 F0102 F0110 F0115 F0120 F0130 F0205 F0215 F0220 F0225 F0230 F0235 F0240 F0255 F0270 F0275 F0280 F0300 F0305 F0305a F0340 F0355 F0375 F0405 F0415 F0420 F0465 F0490 F0500 F0505
Cat A A A A A A C C C C C C C F F F C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C A C C
Quantity 2 1 2 2 5 9 1 1 3 16 15 22 2 1 1 1 4 4 2 8 2 24 4 1 6 4 16 3 1 2 89 8 16 8 2 2 1 6 2 49 20 5 76 3 21 2 1 1 17 40 6 1 3 3
Description Sink, SS, Single Compartment, 7.5x12x12 ID Sink, SS, Single Compartment, 7.5x19x16 ID Sink, SS, Single Compartment, 10x19x16 ID Sink, SS, Single Compartment, 12x28x16 ID Countertop, High Pressure Laminate Countertop, Solid Surface Workstation, Corner Work Surface, Wall Mtd, 72x48 Workstation, Corner Work Surface, Wall Mtd, 72x48 Workstation, L-Shaped w/Peninsula, Wall Mtd, 72x72 Workstation, L-Shaped w/Peninsula, Free Std, 78x72 Workstation, Straight, Free Standing, 72" W Workstation, Computer, O/H Cab, Wall Mtd, 48" W Workstation, Computer, O/H Cab, Wall Mtd, 72" W Nuese Station, Medium, Free Standing Nuese Station, Medium, Free Standing Workstation, Chemistry Lab, Minimal Display, Tackboard & Markerboard, Wall Mtd Locker, Supply, w/Shelves, Wall Mtd, 23"W x 20"D Locker, Supply, General, Wall Mtd, 23"W x 20"D Locker, Supply, Med Surg, Wall Mtd Locker, Supply, Medication, Wall Mtd, 23"W x 20" Cart, General Storage, Mobile, 42"H x 32"W x 22"D Cart, Emergency, Mobile, 66"H x 52"W x 22"D Cart, Closed, w/Totes, Mobile, 72"H x 48"W x 22"D Rail, MOD, W/MNTD, HX144XD Cabinet, Distribution, Mail Bookcase, 3 Shelf Bookcase, Open, 5 Shelf Bookcase, Executive, 3 Shelf, Wood Bookcase, Single Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Child's Chair, Conference Chair, Dining Room Chair, Drafting, Rotary Chair, Executive, Side Chair, Executive, Swivel Chair, Easy Chair, Rocking, High Back Chair, Swivel, High Back Chair, Swivel, Low Back Chair, Task, Swivel, With Arms Chair, Waiting Room, Single Chair, Waiting Room, Bariatric Stool, Self Adjusting Footstool, Straight Sofa, Upholstered Cabinet, Filling, Full Height, 4-5 Drawer Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Full Height, 5 Drawer Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Cabinet, Storage, 2 Door, 5 Shelf Cabinet, Keys Cart, Janitor's Bucket, Mop, With Wringer, 26 Quart
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 15 15
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 2 of 5
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
JSN F0600 F0650 F0690 F0710 F0715 F0725 F0740 F0755 F0760 F0775 F0795 F2000 F2005 F2010 F2015 F2020 F2100 F2250 F2300 F2310 F2420 F2540 F2550 F3025 F3030 F3050 F3070 F3200 F3230 F8010 K1552 K4665 L0100 L1350 L2320 L6000 M0430 M0500 M0507 M0510 M0515 M0515a M0550 M0750 M0755 M0760 M0765 M0800 M1100 M1110 M1620 M1801 M1802 M1805
Cat C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C A C C C A A A C C A C C C C C A C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C A C C C
Quantity 1 1 3 1 1 3 11 2 2 4 2 126 1 3 6 7 2 1 2 2 5 2 4 3 1 3 1 65 4 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 7 4 2 1 3 2 1 8 8 4 12 1 2 2 24 78 2 1
Description Credenza, Executive, Wood Desk, Executive, Wood Workstation, Computer, Enclosed, With Lock Table, Computer, With Print Shelf Carrel, Study Table Table, Occational, Executive, Wood Table, Occasional, Lamp, 20 x 27 x 27 Table, Conference, Wood Table, Child's Table, Work, 2 Drawer Table, Dining Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Basket, Wastepaper, Executive, Wood Basket, Wastepaper, Step-On Basket, Wastepaper, Metal/Plastic, 2 Swinging Doors Can Trash, 44 Gallon Lectern, Mobile, With Reading Light Camera, Portable, CCTV, With Recorder Rack, Magazine, Wall Mounted Rack, Pamphlet, Wall Mounted Lamp, Table, With Shade Shredder, Paper, Security Shredder, Paper, Heavy Duty Board, Bulletin, Wood Framed, 36 x 24 Board, Scheduling, Magnetic Whiteboard, Dry Erase Case, Display Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Rack, Hat / Coat, Wall Mounted Flags, Command & Staff Brewer, Coffee, Auto, Elect, 3 Burner, Front/Back Oven, Microwave, Consumer Microscope, Binocular Centrifuge, Table, Small, 3200 RPM, 6 Place Cabinet, Bio Safety, Class II/B1, F/S, Vert, 4ft Detector, Mercury Recorder / Player, Digital, Video, DVD Television, Color, 20" Diagonal Video Teleconferencing System TV/VCR Combination Television, Plasma Television, Flat Screen 50" Sampler, Air Particulate (Pollen) Flowmeter, Air, Connect w/50 PSI Supply Flowmeter, Oxygen, Low Flow Proportioner (Blender), Oxygen/Air Regulator, Vacuum Center, Infant Care Resuscitator, Bag-Mask, Hand Operated Resuscitator, Bag-Mask, Hand Op, Infant Holder, Chart, Patient, Wall or Door Mounted Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Work Station, Computer, Retractable, Wall Mounted Copier, Desk Top
120 120 120
1 7 20
120 120 120 120 115 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120
15 15 2 10 20 1 2 1 7 2 3 3 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
120
120 120 120
5 5 8
Page 3 of 5
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
JSN M1810 M1825 M1835 M1840 M1855 M2015 M2025 M2050 M2055 M2070 M2100 M2115 M3070 M3072 M3110 M3150 M4010 M4040 M4100 M4116 M4200 M4250 M4255 M4266 M4655 M4657 M4665 M4705 M7011 M7040 M7401 M7405 M7435 M7490 M7660 M7710 M7780 M7845 M7850 M7905 M7910 M8125 M8770 M8810 M8900 M8905 M8970 M9020 M9025 P2450 P3000 P3070 P3100 P4700
Cat C C C C C C A C C C C C C C A C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C A A A C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C A A A A A
Quantity 4 41 4 4 5 1 1 2 25 13 1 1 6 26 2 3 3 7 20 8 28 3 8 11 5 1 3 5 1 3 16 3 3 2 5 2 4 12 3 7 2 2 2 6 2 2 2 3 19 2 10 10 25 4
Description Copier, Floor Standing, Digital Printer, Computer Printer, Color Laser, Large Printer/Copier/Fax Combination Facsimile Machine Cabinet, Storage, Flammable, Freestanding Rack, Storage, Cylinder, Gas Shelving, Storage, 75"H X 36"W X 14"D Shelving, Storage, Wire, CRS, w/Adjustable Shelves Shelving, Storage, 77hx36wx18d Cart, Shelving, Storage, Mobile, SS Truck, Hand, 2 Wheel Hamper, Linen, Mobile, w/Lid Frame, Infectious Waste Bag w/Lid Cabinet, Warming, F/S, 2 Heated Compartment, Elect Distribution System, Medication, Automatic Scale, Infant, 0-35 Pounds Scale, Weighting, 300 Pound Capacity Sphygmomanometer, Aneroid, Wall Mounted Monitor, Vital Signs Otoscope/Ophthalmoscope, Wall Mounted Pump, Syringe, Infusion Stand, IV, Adjustable Pump, Volumetric, Infusion, Multiple Line Stretcher, Mobile, CRS, 9 Position Tabletop, Decontamination Stretcher, Recovery, Surgical Wheelchair, Patient Transport, Folding Bed, Platform, Without Visible Legs, Psychiatric Table, Overbed Light, Exam, Mobile, Spotlight, Mobile Stand Light, Exam, Ceiling Mounted Light, Overbed, Direct And Indirect Light, Surg, Ceiling Mtd, Dual, Unequal Dia Heads Defibrillator/Monitor/Recorder, Portable Electrocardiograph, 12 Lead, Portable Scanner, Document Monitor, Physiological, Bedside, 4 Channel Monitor, Physiological, Central, 8 Bed, Color Oximeter, Pulse Thermometer, Electronic Ergometer, Bicycle, Stationary Aspirator/Pressure Unit, General Purpose Stand, Mayo Carriage, Pail, CRS, Without Pail Pail, Utility, CRS, Without Carriage Warmer, Blood, High Volume Table, Exam, Pediatric, With Scale Table, Examination/Treatment, With Cabinet Valve, Mixing, Thermostatic Lavatory, Vitreous China, Straight Back Lavatory, Vitreous China, Under or Counter Top Mtd Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type Sink, Mop, Molded Stone, 10x36x24
120 120 120 120 120
15 3 9 9 5
120 120
15
120 120 120
2 1 1
115 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 125 120
2 2 2 6 2 2 2 3 4 2 3
115 120 115 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 120 120
15 1 5
Page 4 of 5
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
MASTER EQUIPMENT AND CASEWORK SCHEDULE_ED.xlsx Heat Gain BTU 5000 6097 Treated Water Nitrous Oxide Drain / Waste
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
JSN P5040 P5210 P6980 P8150 P9050 P9050 R2201 R4650 R4700 R6080 R6200 R7250 T0025 T0030 T8035 T8040 X3930 X4112 X4780
Cat A A A A A A A A A C C C C C C C C F C
Quantity 8 2 2 4 7 13 3 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1
Description Shower, Single, Hand-Held Shower, Safety, Freestanding, With Eye/Face Wash Sink, Scrub, SS, 1-3 Bay, With Knee Valve Uniral, Wall Hung, ADA Toilet, Wall Hung, Siphon Jet Toilet, Wall Hung, Siphon Jet, ADA Fountain, Water, CRS, Wall Mounted, 2 Level Ice Maker, Flaked, With Dispenser, 71x19x24 Ice Maker, Cubes, 250 Pound, 39x29x26 Refrigerator/Freezer, Biological, SS, 2 Door Refrigerator, U/C, or F/S, 5 Cu Ft Refrigerator/Freezer, 20 Cubic Feet Meter, Radiation Survey Radiation-Light Field Analyzer Radiometer, Laser Meter, Sound Level Illuminator, Film, Double, Wall Mounted, 20x29x6 Console, PACS, Remote View, 1k X 1k, 2 Monitors Radiographic Unit, Mobile, Battery, 100 mA, 100kVp
Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
120
115 115 115 220 120 120 120 220 120 120
5 13 11 15 15 2 2 9 10
Page 5 of 5
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
MASTER EQUIPMENT AND CASEWORK SCHEDULE_WACH.xlsx Heat Gain BTU Treated Water Nitrous Oxide Drain / Waste
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
JSN A0900 A1010 A1030 A1066 A1070 A1080 A1095 A1107 A1132 A1145 A1150 A4995 A5025 A5075 A5080 A5106 A5109 A5135 A5145 A5180 A5180U A5200 A5210 A5220 A6030 A6035 A6046 A6105b A6105g A6105p A6105q A6105r A6105t A6155 C02C0 C02D0 C02Q0 C03F0 C03L0 C03P0 C04E0 C04F0 C04F0A C04P0 C05P0 C0039 C0041 CB020 CE030 CE040 CS010 CS090 CS150 CS200 CS230 CT030 CT030A
Cat A A C A A A C A C C C A C C A C A A A A A A A A D A C A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A
Quantity 1 3 28 23 6 9 1 1 28 14 7 8 1 41 42 21 15 2 179 15 2 20 8 8 2 1 99 2 1 1 1 1 1 5 7 8 1 3 1 3 3 1 2 6 2 12 2 14 3 1 6 1 2 1 1 25 1
Description Relay Rack, Aluminum Telecommunication Outlet Locker, 2 Person, Over/Under Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame, 36 x Required Mirror, Posture, Wall Mounted Message Board, Digital Rail System, Utility, Gas and Electric Rail, Accessory Mounoting, Length As Required Shelving, Storage, Movable Aisle, Manual Shelving, File, Open, Patient Records Table, Diaper Changing, Wall Mounted Bench, Locker Room, Portable Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps w/Glove Dispenser Grab Bar, 1-1/4" Dia, SS, 2 Wall, W/C Accessible Shelf, Utility W/ Mop/Broom Holders, SS, Surf Mntd Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain Dispenser, Toilet Tissue, SS, 2-Roll, Surface Mntd Bracket, Television, Wall Mounted, w/Adjust Arm Bracket, Television, Wall Backing Machine, Vending Repository, Night, With Safe Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Counter, Reception Control, Built-In Counter, Reception Info Tech, Built-In Counter, Reception Control, Built-In Counter, Reception Control, Built-In Counter, Reception Control, Built-In Counter, Reception Control, Built-In Cage, Security, Heavy Duty Cabinet, U/C/B, 1 Shelf, 1 Drawer, 1 DO, 36x24x22 Cabinet, U/C/B, 4 Drawer, 36x24x22 Cabinet, Sink, U/C/B,1 Door, 36x24x22 Cabinet, U/C/B, 1 Shelf, 2 Half DR, 2 DO, 36x30x22 Cabinet, U/C/B, 1 Drawer, 3 Half DR, 1 DO, 30" W Cabinet, Sink, U/C/B, 2 Door, 36x30x22 Cabinet, U/C/B, 1 Shelf, 1 Drawer, 2 DO, 36x36x22 Cabinet, U/C/B, 1 Shelf, 2 Half DR, 2 DO, 36x36x22 Cabinet, U/C/B, 1 Shelf, 2 Half DR, 2 DO, 36x36x30 Cabinet, Sink, U/C/B, 2 Door, 36x36x22 Cabinet, Sink, U/C/B, 2 Door, 36x48x22 Rail, Apron, 4x48x1 Rail, Apron, 4x60x1 Cabinet, W/H, 2 Shelf, 1 DO, Sloping Top, 38x24x13 Cabinet, W/H, 2 SH, 2 GDO, Sloping Top, 38x30x13 Cabinet, W/H, 2 SH, 2 GDO, Sloping Top, 38x36x13 Sink, SS, Single Compartment, 7.5x12x12 ID Sink, SS, Single Compartment, 7.5x19x16 ID Sink, SS, Single Compartment, 10x19x16 ID Sink, SS, Single Compartment, 12x28x16 ID Sink, SS, Double Compartment, 10x14x16 ID Countertop, High Pressure Laminate Countertop, High Pressure Laminate
120
120
15
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Page 1 of 4
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
JSN E0051 E0051d-1 E0063 E0078 E0078a E0123 E0123a E0222 E0226 E0675b E0675b1 E0675d E0675e E0675f E0675g E0675h E0675i E0675j E0851 E0903 E0906 E0912 E0921 E0948 E0954 E1500 F0102 F0110 F0115 F0200 F0205 F0220 F0225 F0225a F0230 F0255 F0275 F0280 F0295 F0300 F0305 F0305a F0340 F0350 F0355 F0420 F0465 F0490 F0500 F0505 F0545 F0690 F0740 F0755 F0775 F0780 F0795 F0795r F0795S
Cat C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C A C C C C C C C C C C C
Quantity 22 2 10 36 12 69 3 14 3 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 13 4 4 8 1 12 2 8 3 56 14 49 195 49 206 3 8 2 174 26 4 7 122 10 13 9 6 149 9 1 2 2 2 6 17 7 5 6 37 7 18
Description Workstation, Corner Work Surface, Wall Mtd, 72x48 Workstation, L-Shaped w/Peninsula, Free Std, 216X78 Workstation, L-Shaped w/Peninsula, Wall Mtd, 72x72 Workstation, L-Shaped w/Peninsula, Free Std, 78x72 Workstation, L-Shaped w/Peninsula, Free Std, 72x72 Workstation, Straight, Free Standing, 72" W Workstation, Straight, Free Standing, 66" W Workstation, Computer, O/H Cab, Wall Mtd, 48" W Workstation, Computer, O/H Cab, Wall Mtd, 72" W Pharmacy Dispensing & Storage Medium Volume Pharmacy Dispensing & Storage Medium Volume_ADA Accessible Pharmacy Dispensing & Storage Medium Volume Pharmacy Dispensing & Storage Medium Volume Pharmacy Dispensing & Storage Medium Volume Pharmacy Dispensing & Storage Medium Volume Pharmacy Dispensing & Storage Medium Volume Pharmacy Dispensing & Storage Medium Volume Pharmacy Dispensing & Storage Medium Volume Display, Tackboard & Markerboard, Wall Mtd Locker, Supply, w/Shelves, Wall Mtd, 23"W x 20"D Locker, Supply, General, Wall Mtd, 23"W x 20"D Locker, Supply, Med Surg, Wall Mtd Transporter, Locker, Supply, 27"W x 25"D Cart, General Storage, Mobile, 42"H x 32"W x 22"D Cart, Emergency, Mobile, 66"H x 52"W x 22"D Rail, MOD, W/MNTD, HX144XD Cabinet, Distribution, Mail Bookcase, 3 Shelf Bookcase, Open, 5 Shelf Chair, Arm Writing Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Conference Chair, Dining Room Chair, Dining Room Bariatric Chair, Drafting, Rotary Chair, Easy Chair, Swivel, High Back Chair, Swivel, Low Back Chair, Stacking Chair, Task, Swivel, With Arms Chair, Waiting Room, Single Chair, Waiting Room, Single Bariatric Stool, Self Adjusting Stool, Step, Retractable Caster Footstool, Straight Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Cabinet, Storage, 2 Door, 5 Shelf Cabinet, Keys Cart, Janitor's Bucket, Mop, With Wringer, 26 Quart Cart, Library, Mobile Workstation, Computer, Enclosed, With Lock Table, Occasional, Lamp, 20 x 27 x 27 Table, Conference, Wood Table, Work, 2 Drawer Table, Work, 60W x 30D Table, Dining Table, Dining Table, Dining
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Page 2 of 4
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
JSN F0835 F2000 F2015 F2020 F2100 F2310 F2455 F2540 F2550 F3010 F3025 F3050 F3070 F3105 F3200 F3230 F3235 K1550 K1552 K2515 K3401 K4500 K4665 K8250 L1950 L8520 M0430 M0500 M0507 M0512a M0515 M0515a M0715 M0720 M0750 M0755 M0765 M1100 M1110 M1411 M1620 M1801 M1802 M1805 M1810 M1825 M1830 M1835 M1840 M1850 M1855 M1875 M2055 M2070 M2075 M3070 M3072 M4040
Cat C C C C C A C C C A A A C C C A C C C A A A C C A C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C A C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C
Quantity 2 250 11 3 8 9 13 4 4 2 6 6 1 1 122 6 2 1 6 1 1 1 6 1 1 1 14 6 8 3 12 9 1 2 5 6 6 2 1 1 24 203 3 1 6 166 8 4 15 1 7 4 38 2 2 3 13 4
Description Stand, Projection Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Basket, Wastepaper, Metal/Plastic, 2 Swinging Doors Can Trash, 44 Gallon Lectern, Mobile, With Reading Light Rack, Pamphlet, Wall Mounted Transcription Unit, Standalone Shredder, Paper, Security Shredder, Paper, Heavy Duty Board, Bulletin, 48 x 48 Board, Bulletin, Wood Framed, 36 x 24 Whiteboard, Dry Erase Case, Display Safe, F/S , Class 5 Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Rack, Hat / Coat, Wall Mounted Rack, Hat/Coat, Floor Standing Brewer, Coffee, Auto, Elect, 3 Burner, Side/Side Brewer, Coffee, Auto, Elect, 3 Burner, Front/Back Dishwasher, Household Hood, Exhaust, Non-Commercial Stove, Household, 4 Burner, w/Oven, Electric Oven, Microwave, Consumer Toaster, Pop-Up, 4 Slice, Electric Demineralizer, Water, Floor Mounted,1/2-3 GPM Shaker, Rotating, 12 Standard Tubes Recorder / Player, Digital, Video, DVD Television, Color, 20" Diagonal Video Teleconferencing System 55 - 60 " LED with VGA or HDMI cabling Television, Plasma Television, Flat Screen 50" Pulmonary Function Analyzer, Portable Analyzer, Pulmonary Function, w/Computer Flowmeter, Air, Connect w/50 PSI Supply Flowmeter, Oxygen, Low Flow Regulator, Vacuum Resuscitator, Bag-Mask, Hand Operated Resuscitator, Bag-Mask, Hand Op, Infant Phlebotomy Arm, Wheelchair Accessible Holder, Chart, Patient, Wall or Door Mounted Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Work Station, Computer, Retractable, Wall Mounted Copier, Desk Top Copier, Floor Standing, Digital Printer, Computer Printer, Label, Pharmacy Printer, Color Laser, Large Printer/Copier/Fax Combination Typewriter, Electric Facsimile Machine Board, Copy, Electronic Facsimile Shelving, Storage, Wire, CRS, w/Adjustable Shelves Shelving, Storage, 77hx36wx18d Shelving, Storage, Enclosed 87hx48wx12d Hamper, Linen, Mobile, w/Lid Frame, Infectious Waste Bag w/Lid Scale, Weighting, 300 Pound Capacity
120
10
120 120 120 120
4 1 7 20
Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
120 120 120 120 208 120 240 120 120 120 120 240 120 120 120 120 110
15 15 15 15 40 15 14 12 5 2 1 7.7 2 3 3 7 3 Yes Yes Yes Yes
120 120 120 120 120 115 120 120 120 120 120
5 5 8 15 3 5 9 9 1 5 7
Page 3 of 4
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
JSN M4100 M4116 M4200 M4255 M4266 M4655 M4801 M7260 M7265 M7401 M7405 M7660 M7710 M7770 M7780 M7905 M8330 M8770 M8810 M9025 M9100 P1965 P2100 P2450 P3000 P3070 P3100 P4700 P8150 P9050 R2201 R2201b R6200 R7250 X2105 X3930 X4112
Cat C C C C C C C C C C A C C C C C C C C C C A A A A A A A A A A C C C C F
Quantity 2 4 14 6 5 7 1 20 3 8 4 2 3 1 3 1 2 2 3 7 1 1 1 1 13 8 12 2 3 20 2 2 2 9 1 1 1
Description Sphygmomanometer, Aneroid, Wall Mounted Monitor, Vital Signs Otoscope/Ophthalmoscope, Wall Mounted Stand, IV, Adjustable Pump, Volumetric, Infusion, Multiple Line Stretcher, Mobile, CRS, 9 Position Commode Chair Counter/Dispenser, Pill/Tablet Counter, Pill/Tablet, Automated, Counter Mounted Light, Exam, Mobile, Spotlight, Mobile Stand Light, Exam, Ceiling Mounted Defibrillator/Monitor/Recorder, Portable Electrocardiograph, 12 Lead, Portable Computer, Holter Monitor Analysis System Scanner, Document Oximeter, Pulse Treadmill, Electric Aspirator/Pressure Unit, General Purpose Stand, Mayo Table, Examination/Treatment, With Cabinet Table, Procedure, Urological Eyewash, Eye/Face, Sink Mounted, Hands-free Disposal, Garbage, 2 HP Motor Valve, Mixing, Thermostatic Lavatory, Vitreous China, Straight Back Lavatory, Vitreous China, Under or Counter Top Mtd Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type Sink, Mop, Molded Stone, 10x36x24 Uniral, Wall Hung, ADA Toilet, Wall Hung, Siphon Jet Fountain, Water, CRS, Wall Mounted, 2 Level Fountain, Water, CRS, Wall Mounted, 2 Level Water Cooler Refrigerator, U/C, or F/S, 5 Cu Ft Refrigerator/Freezer, 20 Cubic Feet Scanner, Ultrasound, Cardiac (Echo) Illuminator, Film, Double, Wall Mounted, 20x29x6 Console, PACS, Remote View, 1k X 1k, 2 Monitors
120 120
2 1
115 115 115 120 120 120 120 120 125 110 120 115 120 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 220
15 1 2 2 2 2 13 2 2 20 3 5 12 12
115 115 120 120 120 220 120
5 5 15 15 12 2 9
Page 4 of 4
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
ROOM-BY-ROOM EQUIPMENT AND CASEWORK LIST_ED.xlsx Heat Gain BTU Treated Water Nitrous Oxide Drain / Waste
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. Quantity 1C51 LOBBY / BLDG CONNECTION F3070 C 1 F8010 C 1 1C59 CORRIDOR R2201 1C61 CORRIDOR A6046 1L02 VESTIBULE A6046
Description Case, Display Flags, Command & Staff
Fountain, Water, CRS, Wall Mounted, 2 Level
115
Artwork, Decorative, Artwork Decorative With Frame
Artwork, Decorative, With Frame
1X02 FLAMMABLE/ HAZARDOUS MATERIAL STORAGE M2015 C 1 Cabinet, Storage, Flammable, Freestanding P2450 A 1 Valve, Mixing, Thermostatic P5210 A 1 Shower, Safety, Freestanding, With Eye/Face Wash 1X03 INTERIOR GAS CYLINDER STORAGE M2025 A 1 M2115 C 1
Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Rack, Storage, Cylinder, Gas Truck, Hand, 2 Wheel
1X04 EMERGENCY RESPONSE KITS SUPPLY STORAGE KITS/ M2070 C 2 Shelving, Storage, 77hx36wx18d 1X05 MASS CASUALTY STORAGE M2055 C 2C51 CORRIDOR A6046 2C53 CORRIDOR A6046 2C57 CORRIDOR A6045 A6046 F2300 F2310 R2201
Shelving, Storage, Wire, CRS, w/Adjustable Shelves
C C C A A
1 2 1 1 1
Artwork, Mural, Wall Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Rack, Magazine, Wall Mounted Rack, Pamphlet, Wall Mounted Fountain, Water, CRS, Wall Mounted, 2 Level
115
Page 1 of 39
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Electrical
Column1
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. 1101 CLINIC WAITING A6046 C F0305 C F0305a C F0740 C F2300 C F2310 A F3200 C M0430 C M0515 C
Quantity 3 67 2 8 1 1 1 2 2
Description Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Chair, Waiting Room, Single Chair, Waiting Room, Bariatric Table, Occasional, Lamp, 20 x 27 x 27 Rack, Magazine, Wall Mounted Rack, Pamphlet, Wall Mounted Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Recorder / Player, Digital, Video, DVD Television, Plasma
120 120
2 3
1101A PATIENT EDUCATION KIOSK/ALCOVE A1010 A 1 1101B PUBLIC TELEPHONE AREA A1010 A A6030 D 1101C PEDIATRIC PLAYROOM A5215 A F0205 C F0215 C F0270 C F0760 C F2000 C M0430 M C M0500 C 1101D WHEELCHAIR STORAGE M4705 C 1102 RECEPTION CONTROL/ WALK-IN A6105 A CD040 A CT040 A F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C F2540 C F3200 C M1801 C M1825 C M1840 C
Telecommunication Outlet
1 2
Telecommunication Outlet Machine, Vending
120
15
1 2 4 1 1 1 1 1
Bracket, Television, Ceiling Mounted Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Child's Chair, Rocking, High Back Table, Child's Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Recorder / Player, Di i l Vid R d Pl Digital, Video, DVD Television, Color, 20" Diagonal
120 1 120
2 1
Wheelchair, Patient Transport, Folding
1 4 2 3 3 3 1 1 3 1 1
Countertop, Reception Control, Built-In Cabinet, W/H, 2 Shelf, 2 DO, Sloping Top, 38x36x13 Countertop, Solid Surface Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Shredder, Paper, Security Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer Printer/Copier/Fax Combination
120 120 120 120
7 5 3 9
Page 2 of 39
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Electrical
Column1
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. 1103 FEMALE TOILET, MULTIPLE A1070 A A4995 A A5075 C A5080 A A5109 A A5145 A A5200 A C0041 A CT040 A F2015 C P3070 A P9050 A P9050 A 1104 MALE TOILET, MULTIPLE A1070 A A4995 A A5075 C A5080 A A5109 A A5145 A A5200 A C0041 A CT040 A F2015 C P3070 A P8150 P 1 A P9050 A P9050 A 1105 EXAM/ SCREENING (TRIAGE) A1066 A A1132 C A5075 C A5080 A A5106 C A5145 A A5180L A E0222 C F0205 C F0300 C F2000 C F2010 C F3200 C M1620 A M1801 C M4010 C M4040 C M4116 C M4200 C M9020 C P3100 A
Quantity 1 1 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 2 2 1
Description Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame, 36 x Required Table, Diaper Changing, Wall Mounted Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Grab Bar, 1-1/4" Dia, SS, 2 Wall, W/C Accessible Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Dispenser, Toilet Tissue, SS, 2-Roll, Surface Mntd Rail, Apron, 4x60x1 Countertop, Solid Surface Basket, Wastepaper, Metal/Plastic, Basket Wastepaper Metal/Plastic 2 Swinging Doors Lavatory, Vitreous China, Under or Counter Top Mtd Toilet, Wall Hung, Siphon Jet Toilet, Wall Hung, Siphon Jet, ADA
Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
120
1 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1
Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame, 36 x Required Table, Diaper Changing, Wall Mounted Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Grab Bar, 1-1/4" Dia, SS, 2 Wall, W/C Accessible Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Dispenser, Toilet Tissue, SS, 2-Roll, Surface Mntd Rail, Apron, 4x60x1 Countertop, Solid Surface Basket, Wastepaper, Metal/Plastic, 2 Swinging Doors Lavatory, Vitreous China, Under or Counter Top Mtd Uniral, Wall Hung, ADA U i l W ll H Toilet, Wall Hung, Siphon Jet Toilet, Wall Hung, Siphon Jet, ADA
Yes
Yes Yes Y Yes Yes
Yes Yes Y Yes Yes
120
1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame Rail, Accessory Mounoting, Length As Required Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps w/Glove Dispenser Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain Workstation, Computer, O/H Cab, Wall Mtd, 48" W Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Task, Swivel, With Arms Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Basket, Wastepaper, Step-On Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Holder, Chart, Patient, Wall or Door Mounted Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Scale, Infant, 0-35 Pounds Scale, Weighting, 300 Pound Capacity Monitor, Vital Signs Otoscope/Ophthalmoscope, Wall Mounted Table, Exam, Pediatric, With Scale Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type
120
120 120 120 120 Yes Yes Yes
5 2 1 1
Page 3 of 39
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Electrical
Column1
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. 1106 EXAM/ SCREENING (TRIAGE) A1066 A A1132 C A5075 C A5080 A A5106 C A5145 A A5180L A E0222 C F0205 C F0300 C F2000 C F2010 C F3200 C M1620 A M1801 C M4010 C M4040 C M4116 C M4200 C M9020 C P3100 A 1107 EXAM/ SCREENING (TRIAGE) A1066 A A1132 C A5075 C A5080 A A A5106 C A5145 A A5180L A E0222 C F0205 C F0300 C F2000 C F2010 C F3200 C M1620 A M1801 C M4010 C M4040 C M4116 C M4200 C M9020 C P3100 A 1110 FAST TRACK TEAM CENTER E0418a F F0275 C F2000 C F3200 C M1801 C M1825 C
Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Description Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame Rail, Accessory Mounoting, Length As Required Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps w/Glove Dispenser Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain Workstation, Computer, O/H Cab, Wall Mtd, 48" W Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Task, Swivel, Chair Task Swivel With Arms Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Basket, Wastepaper, Step-On Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Holder, Chart, Patient, Wall or Door Mounted Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Scale, Infant, 0-35 Pounds Scale, Weighting, 300 Pound Capacity Monitor, Vital Signs Otoscope/Ophthalmoscope, Wall Mounted Table, Exam, Pediatric, With Scale Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type
120
120 120 120 120 Yes Yes Yes
5 2 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame Rail, Accessory Mounoting, Length As Required Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Di P T l SS S f M d Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps w/Glove Dispenser Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain Workstation, Computer, O/H Cab, Wall Mtd, 48" W Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Task, Swivel, With Arms Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Basket, Wastepaper, Step-On Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Holder, Chart, Patient, Wall or Door Mounted Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Scale, Infant, 0-35 Pounds Scale, Weighting, 300 Pound Capacity Monitor, Vital Signs Otoscope/Ophthalmoscope, Wall Mounted Table, Exam, Pediatric, With Scale Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type
120
120 120 120 120 Yes Yes Yes
5 2 1 1
1 2 2 1 2 1
Nuese Station, Medium, Free Standing Chair, Swivel, High Back Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120
15
120 120
5 3
Page 4 of 39
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Electrical
Column1
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. 1111 PATIENT TOILET A1066 A A4995 A A5075 C A5080 A A5109 A A5145 A A5200 A F2000 C P3000 A P9050 A
Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Description Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame Table, Diaper Changing, Wall Mounted Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Grab Bar, 1-1/4" Dia, SS, 2 Wall, W/C Accessible Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Dispenser, Toilet Tissue, SS, 2-Roll, Surface Mntd Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Lavatory, Vitreous China, Straight Back Toilet, Toilet Wall Hung, Siphon Jet ADA Hung Jet_ADA
Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
120
1112 EXAM EMERGENCY ROOM - FAST TRACK A1066 A 1 A1132 C 2 A5075 C 1 A5080 A 1 A5106 C 1 A5145 A 2 A5180 A 1 A6046 C 1 E0222 C 1 E0948 C 1 F0205 C 2 F0280 C 1 F0340 C 1 F2000 C 2 F3200 F C 1 M1620 A 1 M1801 C 1 M3072 C 1 M4100 C 1 M4200 C 1 M7401 C 1 M9025 C 1 P3100 A 1
Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame Rail, Accessory Mounoting, Length As Required Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps w/Glove Dispenser Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Workstation, Computer, O/H Cab, Wall Mtd, 48" W Cart, General Storage, Mobile, 42"H x 32"W x 22"D Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, Low Back Stool, Self Adjusting Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 1 " Di Cl k B 12" Diameter Holder, Chart, Patient, Wall or Door Mounted Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Frame, Infectious Waste Bag w/Lid Sphygmomanometer, Aneroid, Wall Mounted Otoscope/Ophthalmoscope, Wall Mounted Light, Exam, Mobile, Spotlight, Mobile Stand Table, Examination/Treatment, With Cabinet Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type
120
120 120 115 115 Yes Yes Yes
5 1 2 5
Page 5 of 39
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Electrical
Column1
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. Quantity 1114 EXAM EMERGENCY ROOM - FAST TRACK A1066 A 1 A1132 C 2 A5075 C 1 A5080 A 1 A5106 C 1 A5145 A 2 A5180 A 1 A6046 C 1 E0222 C 1 E0948 C 1 F0205 C 2 F0280 C 1 F0340 C 1 F2000 C 2 F3200 C 1 M1620 A 1 M1801 C 1 M3072 C 1 M4100 C 1 M4200 C 1 M7401 C 1 M9025 C 1 P3100 A 1 1115 EXAM EMERGENCY ROOM A1066 A A1132 A11 C A5075 C A5080 A A5106 C A5145 A A5180 A A6046 C E0222 C E0948 C F0205 C F0280 C F0340 C F2000 C F3200 C M1620 A M1801 C M3072 C M4100 C M4200 C M7401 C M9025 C P3100 A
Description Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame Rail, Accessory Mounoting, Length As Required Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps w/Glove Dispenser Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Workstation, Computer, O/H Cab, Wall Mtd, 48" W Cart, Cart General Storage Mobile 42"H x 32"W x 22"D Storage, Mobile, 42 H 32 W 22 D Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, Low Back Stool, Self Adjusting Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Holder, Chart, Patient, Wall or Door Mounted Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Frame, Infectious Waste Bag w/Lid Sphygmomanometer, Aneroid, Wall Mounted Otoscope/Ophthalmoscope, Wall Mounted Light, Exam, Mobile, Spotlight, Mobile Stand Table, Examination/Treatment, With Cabinet Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type
120
120 120 115 115 Yes Yes Yes
5 1 2 5
1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame Rail, Accessory M R il A Mounoting, L i Length A R h As Required i d Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps w/Glove Dispenser Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Workstation, Computer, O/H Cab, Wall Mtd, 48" W Cart, General Storage, Mobile, 42"H x 32"W x 22"D Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, Low Back Stool, Self Adjusting Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Holder, Chart, Patient, Wall or Door Mounted Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Frame, Infectious Waste Bag w/Lid Sphygmomanometer, Aneroid, Wall Mounted Otoscope/Ophthalmoscope, Wall Mounted Light, Exam, Mobile, Spotlight, Mobile Stand Table, Examination/Treatment, With Cabinet Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type
120
120 120 115 115 Yes Yes Yes
5 1 2 5
Page 6 of 39
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Electrical
Column1
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. Quantity 1116 EXAM EMERGENCY ROOM - FAST TRACK A1066 A 1 A1132 C 2 A5075 C 1 A5080 A 1 A5106 C 1 A5145 A 2 A5180 A 1 A6046 C 1 E0222 C 1 E0948 C 1 F0205 C 2 F0280 C 1 F0340 C 1 F2000 C 2 F3200 C 1 M1620 A 1 M1801 C 1 M3072 C 1 M4100 C 1 M4200 C 1 M7401 C 1 M9025 C 1 P3100 A 1 1117 EXAM EMERGENCY ROOM A1066 A A1132 A11 C A5075 C A5080 A A5106 C A5145 A A5180 A A6046 C E0222 C E0948 C F0205 C F0280 C F0340 C F2000 C F3200 C M1620 A M1801 C M3072 C M4100 C M4200 C M7401 C M9025 C P3100 A
120
120 120 115 115 Yes Yes Yes
5 1 2 5
1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120 115 115 Yes Yes Yes
5 1 2 5
Page 7 of 39
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Electrical
Column1
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. 1118 EXAM EMERGENCY ROOM A1066 A A1132 C A5075 C A5080 A A5106 C A5145 A A5180 A A6046 C E0222 C E0948 C F0205 C F0280 C F0340 C F2000 C F3200 C M1620 A M1801 C M3072 C M4100 C M4200 C M7401 C M9025 C P3100 A 1119 EXAM EMERGENCY ROOM A1066 A A1132 A11 C A5075 C A5080 A A5106 C A5145 A A5180 A A6046 C E0222 C E0948 C F0205 C F0280 C F0340 C F2000 C F3200 C M1620 A M1801 C M3072 C M4100 C M4200 C M7401 C M9025 C P3100 A
Quantity 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120 115 115 Yes Yes Yes
5 1 2 5
1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120 115 115 Yes Yes Yes
5 1 2 5
Page 8 of 39
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Electrical
Column1
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. 1121 EXAM EMERGENCY ROOM A1066 A A1132 C A5075 C A5080 A A5106 C A5145 A A5180L A A6046 C E0222 C E0948 C F0205 C F0280 C F0340 C F2000 C F3200 C M1620 A M1801 C M3072 C M4100 C M4200 C M7401 C M7845 C M9025 C P3100 A 1122 NURSE WORKROOM E0051c E 1 C E0851 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C F3200 C M1801 C M1840 C M7850 C
Quantity 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Description Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame Rail, Accessory Mounoting, Length As Required Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps w/Glove Dispenser Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Workstation, Computer, O/H Cab, Wall Mtd, 48" W Cart, Cart General Storage Mobile 42"H x 32"W x 22"D Storage, Mobile, 42 H 32 W 22 D Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, Low Back Stool, Self Adjusting Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Holder, Chart, Patient, Wall or Door Mounted Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Frame, Infectious Waste Bag w/Lid Sphygmomanometer, Aneroid, Wall Mounted Otoscope/Ophthalmoscope, Wall Mounted Light, Exam, Mobile, Spotlight, Mobile Stand Monitor, Physiological, Bedside, 4 Channel Table, Examination/Treatment, With Cabinet Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type
120
120 120 115 120 115 Yes Yes Yes
5 1 2 3 5
1 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 1
Workstation, Corner Work Surface, Wall Mtd, 72x48 W k i C W kS f W ll M d Display, Tackboard & Markerboard, Wall Mtd Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer/Copier/Fax Combination Monitor, Physiological, Central, 8 Bed, Color
120 1
120 120 120
5 9 4
Page 9 of 39
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Electrical
Column1
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. 1123 EXAM EMERGENCY ROOM A1066 A A1132 C A5075 C A5080 A A5106 C A5145 A A5180L A A6046 C E0222 C E0948 C F0205 C F0280 C F0340 C F2000 C F3200 C M1620 A M1801 C M3072 C M4100 C M4200 C M7401 C M7845 C M9025 C P3100 A 1124 CLEAN UTILITY E0903 E E0906 E0912 E1500 F2000
Quantity 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Description Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame Rail, Accessory Mounoting, Length As Required Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps w/Glove Dispenser Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Workstation, Computer, O/H Cab, Wall Mtd, 48" W Cart, Cart General Storage Mobile 42"H x 32"W x 22"D Storage, Mobile, 42 H 32 W 22 D Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, Low Back Stool, Self Adjusting Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Holder, Chart, Patient, Wall or Door Mounted Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Frame, Infectious Waste Bag w/Lid Sphygmomanometer, Aneroid, Wall Mounted Otoscope/Ophthalmoscope, Wall Mounted Light, Exam, Mobile, Spotlight, Mobile Stand Monitor, Physiological, Bedside, 4 Channel Table, Examination/Treatment, With Cabinet Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type
120
120 120 115 120 115 Yes Yes Yes
5 1 2 3 5
C C C C C
3 2 2 2 1
Locker, Supply, w/Shelves, W ll M d 23"W x 20"D L k S l Sh l Wall Mtd, "W "D Locker, Supply, General, Wall Mtd, 23"W x 20"D Locker, Supply, Med Surg, Wall Mtd Rail, MOD, W/MNTD, HX144XD Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal
Page 10 of 39
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Electrical
Column1
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. 1125 EXAM EMERGENCY ROOM A1066 A A1132 C A1200 A A5075 C A5080 A A5106 C A5145 A A5180L A A6046 C E0222 C E0948 C F0205 C F0280 C F0340 C F2000 C F3200 C M1620 A M1801 C M3072 C M4100 C M4200 C M7401 C M7845 C M9025 C P3100 A
Quantity 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Description Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame Rail, Accessory Mounoting, Length As Required Lift System, Overhead Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps w/Glove Dispenser Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Workstation, Computer, Workstation Computer O/H Cab Wall Mtd 48" W Cab, Mtd, 48 Cart, General Storage, Mobile, 42"H x 32"W x 22"D Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, Low Back Stool, Self Adjusting Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Holder, Chart, Patient, Wall or Door Mounted Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Frame, Infectious Waste Bag w/Lid Sphygmomanometer, Aneroid, Wall Mounted Otoscope/Ophthalmoscope, Wall Mounted Light, Exam, Mobile, Spotlight, Mobile Stand Monitor, Physiological, Bedside, 4 Channel Table, Examination/Treatment, With Cabinet Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type
120
120 120 115 120 115 Yes Yes Yes
5 1 2 3 5
1126 SUPPLIES/ SUPPLIES EQUIPMENT STORAGE M2055 C 8 1127 EXAM EMERGENCY ROOM A1066 A A1132 C A1200 A A5075 C A5080 A A5106 C A5145 A A5180L A A6046 C E0222 C E0948 C F0205 C F0280 C F0340 C F2000 C F3200 C M1620 A M1801 C M3072 C M4100 C M4200 C M7401 C M7845 C M9025 C P3100 A
1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame Rail, Accessory Mounoting, Length As Required Lift System, Overhead Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps w/Glove Dispenser Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Workstation, Computer, O/H Cab, Wall Mtd, 48" W Cart, General Storage, Mobile, 42"H x 32"W x 22"D Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, Low Back Stool, Self Adjusting Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Holder, Chart, Patient, Wall or Door Mounted Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Frame, Infectious Waste Bag w/Lid Sphygmomanometer, Aneroid, Wall Mounted Otoscope/Ophthalmoscope, Wall Mounted Light, Exam, Mobile, Spotlight, Mobile Stand Monitor, Physiological, Bedside, 4 Channel Table, Examination/Treatment, With Cabinet Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type
120
120 120 115 120 115 Yes Yes Yes Page 11 of 39
5 1 2 3 5
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Vent
ROOM-BY-ROOM EQUIPMENT AND CASEWORK LIST_ED.xlsx Heat Gain BTU 5000 5000 6097 Treated Water Nitrous Oxide Drain / Waste
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Electrical
Column1
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. Quantity 1128 MEDICATION PREPARATION STATION A5075 C 1 A5080 A 1 A5106 C 1 C02C0 A 1 C04H0 A 1 C04P0 A 1 CG040 A 1 CG050 A 1 CS090 A 1 CT030 A 1 F2000 C 1 F3200 C 1 M1801 C 1 M3150 C 1 R4650 A 1 R6200 C 1 1128A ICE MACHINE R4650 R4700
Description Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps w/Glove Dispenser Cabinet, U/C/B, 1 Shelf, 1 Drawer, 1 DO, 36x24x22 Cabinet, U/C/B, 2 Half Drawer, 3 Drawer 36x36x22 Cabinet, Sink, U/C/B, 2 Door, 36x36x22 Cabinet, W/H, 2 SH, 2 SGDO, Sloping Top, 38x36x13 Cabinet, W/H, 2 SH, 2 SGDO, Sloping Top, 38x48x13 Sink, SS, Single Compartment, 7.5x19x16 ID Countertop, Countertop High Pressure Laminate Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Distribution System, Medication, Automatic Ice Maker, Flaked, With Dispenser, 71x19x24 Refrigerator, U/C, or F/S, 5 Cu Ft
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
120 120 115 120
5 13 15
A A
1 1
Ice Maker, Flaked, With Dispenser, 71x19x24 Ice Maker, Cubes, 250 Pound, 39x29x26
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
115 115
13 11
1129 SECURED HOLDING ROOM A5120 A F2250 C M7011 C 1130 NURSE WORKROOM E0051b C E0851 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C F3200 C M1801 C M1840 C M7850 C
1 1 1
Window, Observation, One Way Camera, Portable, CCTV, With Recorder Bed, Platform, Without Visible Legs, Psychiatric
1 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 1
Workstation, Corner Work Surface, Wall Mtd, 72x48 Display, Tackboard & Markerboard, Wall Mtd Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer/Copier/Fax Combination Monitor, Physiological, Central, 8 Bed, Color
120
120 120 120
5 9 4
Page 12 of 39
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Electrical
Column1
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. Quantity 1132 ISOLATION EXAM, NEGATIVE PRESSURE A1066 A 1 A1132 C 2 A5075 C 1 A5080 A 1 A5106 C 1 A5145 A 2 A5180 A 1 A6046 C 1 E0222 C 1 E0948 C 1 F0280 C 1 F0340 C 1 F2000 C 2 F3200 C 1 M1620 A 1 M1801 C 1 M3072 C 1 M4200 C 1 M7401 C 1 M9025 C 1 P3100 A 1 1132A ISOLATION TOILET A1066 A A4995 A A5075 C A5080 A A A5109 A A5145 A A5200 A F2000 C P3000 A P9050 A
Description Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame Rail, Accessory Mounoting, Length As Required Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps w/Glove Dispenser Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Workstation, Computer, O/H Cab, Wall Mtd, 48" W Cart, Cart General Storage Mobile 42"H x 32"W x 22"D Storage, Mobile, 42 H 32 W 22 D Chair, Swivel, Low Back Stool, Self Adjusting Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Holder, Chart, Patient, Wall or Door Mounted Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Frame, Infectious Waste Bag w/Lid Otoscope/Ophthalmoscope, Wall Mounted Light, Exam, Mobile, Spotlight, Mobile Stand Table, Examination/Treatment, With Cabinet Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type
120
120 120 115 115 Yes Yes Yes
5 1 2 5
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame Table, Diaper Changing, Wall Mounted Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Di P T l SS S f M d Grab Bar, 1-1/4" Dia, SS, 2 Wall, W/C Accessible Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Dispenser, Toilet Tissue, SS, 2-Roll, Surface Mntd Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Lavatory, Vitreous China, Straight Back Toilet, Wall Hung, Siphon Jet_ADA
Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
120
Page 13 of 39
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Electrical
Column1
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. Quantity 1133 EXAM EMERGENCY ROOM - FAST TRACK A1066 A 1 A1132 C 2 A5075 C 1 A5080 A 1 A5106 C 1 A5145 A 2 A5180 A 1 A6046 C 1 E0222 C 1 E0948 C 1 F0205 C 2 F0280 C 1 F0340 C 1 F2000 C 2 F3200 C 1 M1620 A 1 M1801 C 1 M3072 C 1 M4100 C 1 M4200 C 1 M7401 C 1 M9025 C 1 P3100 A 1 1134 FAMILY CONSULTATION/ INTERVIEW A6046 C 2 F0255 F C 2 F0275 C 1 F0375 C 1 F0690 C 1 F0725 C 2 F2420 C 2 F3200 C 1 M1801 C 1 M1825 C 1
120
120 120 115 115 Yes Yes Yes
5 1 2 5
Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Chair, Easy Ch i E Chair, Swivel, High Back Sofa, Upholstered Workstation, Computer, Enclosed, With Lock Table, Occational, Executive, Wood Lamp, Table, With Shade Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120 120 120
1 5 3
Page 14 of 39
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Electrical
Column1
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. Quantity 1135 EXAM EMERGENCY ROOM - FAST TRACK A1066 A 1 A1132 C 2 A5075 C 1 A5080 A 1 A5106 C 1 A5145 A 2 A5180 A 1 A6046 C 1 E0222 C 1 E0948 C 1 F0205 C 2 F0280 C 1 F0340 C 1 F2000 C 2 F3200 C 1 M1620 A 1 M1801 C 1 M3072 C 1 M4100 C 1 M4200 C 1 M7401 C 1 M9025 C 1 P3100 A 1 1136 OB/GYN EXAM ROOM A1066 A A1132 A11 C A5075 C A5080 A A5106 C A5145 A A5180 A A6046 C E0222 C E0948 C F0205 C F0280 C F2000 C F3200 C M1620 A M1801 C M4040 C M4100 C M4200 C M7845 C M9025 C P3100 A
120
120 120 115 115 Yes Yes Yes
5 1 2 5
1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame Rail, Accessory M R il A Mounoting, L i Length A R h As Required i d Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps w/Glove Dispenser Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Workstation, Computer, O/H Cab, Wall Mtd, 48" W Cart, General Storage, Mobile, 42"H x 32"W x 22"D Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, Low Back Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Holder, Chart, Patient, Wall or Door Mounted Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Scale, Weighting, 300 Pound Capacity Sphygmomanometer, Aneroid, Wall Mounted Otoscope/Ophthalmoscope, Wall Mounted Monitor, Physiological, Bedside, 4 Channel Table, Examination/Treatment, With Cabinet Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type
120
120 120 120 115 Yes Yes Yes
5 1 3 5
Page 15 of 39
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Electrical
Column1
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. 1136A PATIENT TOILET A1066 A A4995 A A5075 C A5080 A A5109 A A5145 A A5200 A F2000 C P3000 A P9050 A
Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
120
1137 EXAM EMERGENCY ROOM - FAST TRACK A1066 A 1 A1132 C 2 A5075 C 1 A5080 A 1 A5106 C 1 A5145 A 2 A5180 A 1 A6046 C 1 E0222 C 1 E0948 C 1 F0205 C 2 F0280 C 1 F0340 C 1 F2000 C 2 F3200 F C 1 M1620 A 1 M1801 C 1 M3072 C 1 M4100 C 1 M4200 C 1 M7401 C 1 M9025 C 1 P3100 A 1 1138 SOILED UTILITY A5075 A5080 A5106 C02C0 C05P0 CS200 CT030 E0912 E1500 F2020 M3070 M3072
Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame Rail, Accessory Mounoting, Length As Required Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps w/Glove Dispenser Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Workstation, Computer, O/H Cab, Wall Mtd, 48" W Cart, General Storage, Mobile, 42"H x 32"W x 22"D Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, Low Back Stool, Self Adjusting Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 1 " Di Cl k B 12" Diameter Holder, Chart, Patient, Wall or Door Mounted Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Frame, Infectious Waste Bag w/Lid Sphygmomanometer, Aneroid, Wall Mounted Otoscope/Ophthalmoscope, Wall Mounted Light, Exam, Mobile, Spotlight, Mobile Stand Table, Examination/Treatment, With Cabinet Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type
120
120 120 115 115 Yes Yes Yes
5 1 2 5
C A C A A A A C C C C C
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps w/Glove Dispenser Cabinet, U/C/B, 1 Shelf, 1 Drawer, 1 DO, 36x24x22 Cabinet, Sink, U/C/B, 2 Door, 36x48x22 Sink, SS, Single Compartment, 12x28x16 ID Countertop, High Pressure Laminate Locker, Supply, Med Surg, Wall Mtd Rail, MOD, W/MNTD, HX144XD Can Trash, 44 Gallon Hamper, Linen, Mobile, w/Lid Frame, Infectious Waste Bag w/Lid
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 16 of 39
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Electrical
Column1
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. 1139 EXAM EMERGENCY ROOM A1066 A A1132 C A5075 C A5080 A A5106 C A5145 A A5180 A A6046 C E0222 C E0948 C F0205 C F0280 C F0340 C F2000 C F3200 C M1620 A M1801 C M3072 C M4100 C M4200 C M7401 C M9025 C P3100 A 1140 OB/GYN EXAM ROOM A1066 A A1132 A11 C A5075 C A5080 A A5106 C A5145 A A5180 A A6046 C E0222 C E0948 C F0205 C F0280 C F2000 C F3200 C M1620 A M1801 C M4040 C M4100 C M4200 C M7845 C M9025 C P3100 A
Quantity 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120 115 115 Yes Yes Yes
5 1 2 5
1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame Rail, Accessory M R il A Mounoting, L i Length A R h As Required i d Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps w/Glove Dispenser Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Workstation, Computer, O/H Cab, Wall Mtd, 48" W Cart, General Storage, Mobile, 42"H x 32"W x 22"D Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, Low Back Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Holder, Chart, Patient, Wall or Door Mounted Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Scale, Weighting, 300 Pound Capacity Sphygmomanometer, Aneroid, Wall Mounted Otoscope/Ophthalmoscope, Wall Mounted Monitor, Physiological, Bedside, 4 Channel Table, Examination/Treatment, With Cabinet Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type
120
120 120 120 115 Yes Yes Yes
5 1 3 5
Page 17 of 39
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Electrical
Column1
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. 1140A PATIENT TOILET A1066 A A4995 A A5075 C A5080 A A5109 A A5145 A A5200 A F2000 C P3000 A P9050 A 1141 CRASH CART ALCOVE E0954 C M1100 C M1110 C M7660 C M7905 C M8770 C 1142 OB/GYN EXAM ROOM A1066 A A1132 C A5075 C A5080 A A5106 C A5145 A 1 A A5180 A A6046 C E0222 C E0948 C F0205 C F0280 C F2000 C F3200 C M1620 A M1801 C M4040 C M4100 C M4200 C M7845 C M9025 C P3100 A
Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
120
1 1 1 1 1 1
Cart, Emergency, Mobile, 66"H x 52"W x 22"D Resuscitator, Bag-Mask, Hand Operated Resuscitator, Bag-Mask, Hand Op, Infant Defibrillator/Monitor/Recorder, Portable Oximeter, Pulse Aspirator/Pressure Unit, General Purpose
120 125 120
2 2 3
1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame Rail, Accessory Mounoting, Length As Required Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps w/Glove Dispenser Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted H k G D bl SS S f M d Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Workstation, Computer, O/H Cab, Wall Mtd, 48" W Cart, General Storage, Mobile, 42"H x 32"W x 22"D Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, Low Back Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Holder, Chart, Patient, Wall or Door Mounted Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Scale, Weighting, 300 Pound Capacity Sphygmomanometer, Aneroid, Wall Mounted Otoscope/Ophthalmoscope, Wall Mounted Monitor, Physiological, Bedside, 4 Channel Table, Examination/Treatment, With Cabinet Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type
120
120 120 120 115 Yes Yes Yes
5 1 3 5
Page 18 of 39
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Electrical
Column1
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. 1142A PATIENT TOILET A1066 A A4995 A A5075 C A5080 A A5109 A A5145 A A5200 A F2000 C P3000 A P9050 A 1143 SOILED UTILITY A5075 A5080 A5106 C04F0 C05P0 CS200 CT030 E0912 E1500 F2020 M3070 M3072
Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
120
C A C A A A A C C C C C
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1
Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps w/Glove Dispenser Cabinet, U/C/B, 1 Shelf, 2 Half DR, 2 DO, 36x36x22 Cabinet, Sink, U/C/B, 2 Door, 36x48x22 Sink, SS, Single Compartment, 12x28x16 ID Countertop, High Pressure Laminate Locker, Supply, Med Surg, Wall Mtd Rail, MOD, W/MNTD, HX144XD Can Trash, 44 Gallon Hamper, Linen, Mobile, w/Lid Frame, Infectious Waste Bag w/Lid
Yes
Yes
Yes
1146 DECONTAMINATION SUITE A5025 C A5075 C A5080 A A5106 C A5145 A E0954 C E0987 C F2020 C M0750 C M0755 C M0765 C M2050 C M2100 C M3070 C M3072 C M4255 C M4655 C M4657 C M7660 C M8810 C P3100 A P4700 A P5040 A X3930 C
2 1 1 4 12 1 1 4 1 1 1 2 1 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 6 1
Bench, Locker Room, Portable Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps w/Glove Dispenser Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Cart, Emergency, Mobile, 66"H x 52"W x 22"D Cart, Closed, w/Totes, Mobile, 72"H x 48"W x 22"D Can Trash, 44 Gallon Flowmeter, Air, Connect w/50 PSI Supply Flowmeter, Oxygen, Low Flow Regulator, Vacuum Shelving, Storage, 75"H X 36"W X 14"D Cart, Shelving, Storage, Mobile, SS Hamper, Linen, Mobile, w/Lid Frame, Infectious Waste Bag w/Lid Stand, IV, Adjustable Stretcher, Mobile, CRS, 9 Position Tabletop, Decontamination Defibrillator/Monitor/Recorder, Portable Stand, Mayo Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type Sink, Mop, Molded Stone, 10x36x24 Shower, Single, Hand-Held Illuminator, Film, Double, Wall Mounted, 20x29x6
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
120 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 220
Page 19 of 39
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Electrical
Column1
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. 1147 JANITOR CLOSET A5135 A F0500 C F0505 C P4700 A 1148 PATIENT TOILET A1066 A4995 A5075 A5080 A5109 A5145 A5200 F2000 P3000 P9050
Quantity 1 1 1 1
Description Shelf, Utility W/ Mop/Broom Holders, SS, Surf Mntd Cart, Janitor's Bucket, Mop, With Wringer, 26 Quart Sink, Mop, Molded Stone, 10x36x24
Yes
Yes
Yes
A A C A A A A C A A
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame Table, Diaper Changing, Wall Mounted Dispenser, Soap, Dispenser Soap Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Grab Bar, 1-1/4" Dia, SS, 2 Wall, W/C Accessible Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Dispenser, Toilet Tissue, SS, 2-Roll, Surface Mntd Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Lavatory, Vitreous China, Straight Back Toilet, Wall Hung, Siphon Jet
Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
120
1149 CRASH CART ALCOVE E0954 C M1100 C M1110 C M7660 C M7905 C M8770 C
1 1 1 1 1 1
Cart, Emergency, Mobile, 66"H x 52"W x 22"D Resuscitator, Bag-Mask, Hand Operated Resuscitator, Bag-Mask, Hand Op, Infant Defibrillator/Monitor/Recorder, Portable Oximeter, Pulse Aspirator/Pressure Unit, General Purpose
120 125 120
2 2 3
1150 11 AMBULANCE RECEPTION/ TEAM CENTER E0412a F 1 F0275 C 2 F2000 C 3 F3200 C 1 M1801 C 2 M1805 C 1 M1825 C 1 M1855 C 1 M7850 C 1 1151 LITTER STORAGE M4655
Nuese Station, Medium, Free Standing Chair, Swivel, High Back Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Copier, Desk Top Printer, Computer Facsimile Machine Monitor, Physiological, Central, 8 Bed, Color
120
15
120 120 120 120 120
5 8 3 5 4
Stretcher, Mobile, CRS, 9 Position
Page 20 of 39
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Electrical
Column1
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. 1152 AMBULANCE DISPATCH A6110 A E0226 C F0275 C F0405 C F0490 A F2000 C F3025 A F3030 A F3050 A F3200 C F3230 A M1801 C M1825 C 1153 MOBILE RAD UNIT ALCOVE X4780 C
Quantity 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Description Counter, Console, Comminications Workstation, Computer, O/H Cab, Wall Mtd, 72" W Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Full Height, 4-5 Drawer Cabinet, Keys Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Board, Bulletin, Wood Framed, 36 x 24 Board, Scheduling, Magnetic Whiteboard, Dry Erase Clock, Battery, 12 Clock Battery 12" Diameter Rack, Hat / Coat, Wall Mounted Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120
120 120
5 3
Radiographic Unit, Mobile, Battery, 100 mA, 100kVp
120
10
Page 21 of 39
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Electrical
Column1
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. Quantity 1154 MINOR RESUSCITATION ROOM A1107 A 1 A1200 A 1 A4015 A 2 A5075 C 2 A5080 A 2 A5106 C 3 A5145 A 1 A5180 A 1 C04E0 A 1 C04J0 A 1 C04P0 A 1 CE040 A 2 CS150 A 1 CT040 A 1 E0915 C 1 E0948 C 1 E1500 C 1 F0340 C 1 F0355 C 1 F2000 C 2 F3200 C 1 M0750 C 2 M0755 C 2 M0760 C 2 M0765 C 1 M1801 C 1 M1802 C 1 M3070 M C 1 M3072 C 1 M3110 A 1 M3150 C 1 M4100 C 1 M4116 C 1 M4200 C 1 M4255 C 2 M4266 C 4 M4655 C 1 M7490 A 1 M7660 C 1 M7710 C 1 M7845 C 1 M7905 C 1 M7910 C 1 M8810 C 1 M8900 C 1 M8905 C 1 M8970 C 1 P6980 A 1 X4112 F 1
Description Rail System, Utility, Gas and Electric Lift System, Overhead Clock, Elapsed Time, Electric Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps w/Glove Dispenser Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain Cabinet, U/C/B, 1 Shelf, 1 Drawer, 2 DO, 36x36x22 Cabinet, U/C/B, Cabinet U/C/B 8 Half Drawer 36x36x22 Drawer, Cabinet, Sink, U/C/B, 2 Door, 36x36x22 Cabinet, W/H, 2 SH, 2 GDO, Sloping Top, 38x36x13 Sink, SS, Single Compartment, 10x19x16 ID Countertop, Solid Surface Locker, Supply, Medication, Wall Mtd, 23"W x 20" Cart, General Storage, Mobile, 42"H x 32"W x 22"D Rail, MOD, W/MNTD, HX144XD Stool, Self Adjusting Footstool, Straight Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Flowmeter, Air, Connect w/50 PSI Supply Flowmeter, Oxygen, Low Flow Proportioner (Blender), Oxygen/Air Regulator, Vacuum Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Work Station, Computer, Retractable, Wall Mounted Hamper, Linen, Mobile, w/Lid H Li M bil Lid Frame, Infectious Waste Bag w/Lid Cabinet, Warming, F/S, 2 Heated Compartment, Elect Distribution System, Medication, Automatic Sphygmomanometer, Aneroid, Wall Mounted Monitor, Vital Signs Otoscope/Ophthalmoscope, Wall Mounted Stand, IV, Adjustable Pump, Volumetric, Infusion, Multiple Line Stretcher, Mobile, CRS, 9 Position Light, Surg, Ceiling Mtd, Dual, Unequal Dia Heads Defibrillator/Monitor/Recorder, Portable Electrocardiograph, 12 Lead, Portable Monitor, Physiological, Bedside, 4 Channel Oximeter, Pulse Thermometer, Electronic Stand, Mayo Carriage, Pail, CRS, Without Pail Pail, Utility, CRS, Without Carriage Warmer, Blood, High Volume Sink, Scrub, SS, 1-3 Bay, With Knee Valve Console, PACS, Remote View, 1k X 1k, 2 Monitors
250
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes Yes 120 120 120 120 120 120 5 5 15 2 1 Yes Yes
Yes Yes
120 120 120 120 125
6 2 2 3 2
Yes
Yes
Yes
115 120 120
15 2 9
Page 22 of 39
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Electrical
Column1
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. 1156 TRAUMA ROOM A1107 A A1200 A A4015 A A5075 C A5080 A A5106 C A5145 A A5180 A C04E0 A C04J0 A C04P0 A CE040 A CS150 A CT040 A E0903 C E0912 C E0915 C E0948 C E0954 C E1500 C F0340 C F0355 C F2000 C F3200 C M0750 C M0755 C M0760 C M0765 M C M0800 C M1801 C M1802 C M3070 C M3072 C M3110 A M3150 C M4100 C M4116 C M4200 C M4255 C M4266 C M4655 C M7490 A M7660 C M7710 C M7845 C M7905 C M7910 C M8810 C M8900 C M8905 C M8970 C P6980 A X4112 F
Quantity 1 1 2 2 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Description Rail System, Utility, Gas and Electric Lift System, Overhead Clock, Elapsed Time, Electric Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps w/Glove Dispenser Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain Cabinet, U/C/B, 1 Shelf, 1 Drawer, 2 DO, 36x36x22 Cabinet, U/C/B, Cabinet U/C/B 8 Half Drawer 36x36x22 Drawer, Cabinet, Sink, U/C/B, 2 Door, 36x36x22 Cabinet, W/H, 2 SH, 2 GDO, Sloping Top, 38x36x13 Sink, SS, Single Compartment, 10x19x16 ID Countertop, Solid Surface Locker, Supply, w/Shelves, Wall Mtd, 23"W x 20"D Locker, Supply, Med Surg, Wall Mtd Locker, Supply, Medication, Wall Mtd, 23"W x 20" Cart, General Storage, Mobile, 42"H x 32"W x 22"D Cart, Emergency, Mobile, 66"H x 52"W x 22"D Rail, MOD, W/MNTD, HX144XD Stool, Self Adjusting Footstool, Straight Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Flowmeter, Air, Connect w/50 PSI Supply Flowmeter, Oxygen, Low Flow Proportioner (Blender), Oxygen/Air Regulator, Vacuum R l V Center, Infant Care Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Work Station, Computer, Retractable, Wall Mounted Hamper, Linen, Mobile, w/Lid Frame, Infectious Waste Bag w/Lid Cabinet, Warming, F/S, 2 Heated Compartment, Elect Distribution System, Medication, Automatic Sphygmomanometer, Aneroid, Wall Mounted Monitor, Vital Signs Otoscope/Ophthalmoscope, Wall Mounted Stand, IV, Adjustable Pump, Volumetric, Infusion, Multiple Line Stretcher, Mobile, CRS, 9 Position Light, Surg, Ceiling Mtd, Dual, Unequal Dia Heads Defibrillator/Monitor/Recorder, Portable Electrocardiograph, 12 Lead, Portable Monitor, Physiological, Bedside, 4 Channel Oximeter, Pulse Thermometer, Electronic Stand, Mayo Carriage, Pail, CRS, Without Pail Pail, Utility, CRS, Without Carriage Warmer, Blood, High Volume Sink, Scrub, SS, 1-3 Bay, With Knee Valve Console, PACS, Remote View, 1k X 1k, 2 Monitors
250
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes Yes 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 7 5 5 15 2 1 Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Y Yes
120 120 120 120 125
6 2 2 3 2
Yes
Yes
Yes
115 120 120
15 2 9
Page 23 of 39
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Electrical
Column1
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. 1158 CHEST PAIN SUITE A1107 A A1200 A A5106 C A5180 A A5180L A E0948 C F0205 C F0340 C F2000 C M0750 C M0755 C M0765 C M3072 C M4116 C M4200 C M4250 C M4255 C M4266 C M4665 C M7040 C M7405 A M7435 A M7845 C M7905 C M8810 C 1160 LOCKER ROOM MALE ROOM, A1030 C A1080 A A5025 C F2000 C F3200 C 1160A SHOWER ROOM, MALE A5030 A A5075 C A5110 A A5145 A A5170 A A5207 A P5040 A 1162 LOCKER ROOM, FEMALE A1030 C A1080 A A5025 C F2000 C F3200 C
Quantity 3 3 3 1 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 9 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Description Rail System, Utility, Gas and Electric Lift System, Overhead Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps w/Glove Dispenser Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain Cart, General Storage, Mobile, 42"H x 32"W x 22"D Chair, Side With Arms Stool, Self Adjusting Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Flowmeter, Air, Flowmeter Air Connect w/50 PSI Supply Flowmeter, Oxygen, Low Flow Regulator, Vacuum Frame, Infectious Waste Bag w/Lid Monitor, Vital Signs Otoscope/Ophthalmoscope, Wall Mounted Pump, Syringe, Infusion Stand, IV, Adjustable Pump, Volumetric, Infusion, Multiple Line Stretcher, Recovery, Surgical Table, Overbed Light, Exam, Ceiling Mounted Light, Overbed, Direct And Indirect Monitor, Physiological, Bedside, 4 Channel Oximeter, Pulse Stand, Mayo
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
120 120 120
2 1 1
120 120 120 125
2 2 3 2
10 1 1 1 1
Locker, 2 Person, Over/Under Mirror, Posture, Wall Mounted Bench, Locker Room, Portable Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter
1 1 1 2 1 1 1
Bench, Stall, Shower, Built In Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Grab Bar, 1-1/4" Dia, SS, 2 Wall, Shower Use, 42" Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Rod, Shower Curtain, 1"Diameter, W/Curtain & Hooks Bar, Towel, 1" Diameter, SS, Surface Mntd, Psych Shower, Single, Hand-Held
Yes
Yes
Yes
10 1 1 1 1
Locker, 2 Person, Over/Under Mirror, Posture, Wall Mounted Bench, Locker Room, Portable Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter
Page 24 of 39
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Electrical
Column1
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. 1162A SHOWER ROOM, FEMALE A5030 A A5075 C A5110 A A5145 A A5170 A A5207 A P5040 A 1164 STAFF LOUNGE A1080 A5075 A5080 A5145 A5210 A5220 C02C0a C02D0a C04P0a CB020 CS010 CT030 F0225 F0795 F2015 F3025 F3050 F3200 F K1552 K4665 M0500 R2201 R7250
Quantity 1 1 1 2 1 1 1
Description Bench, Stall, Shower, Built In Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Grab Bar, 1-1/4" Dia, SS, 2 Wall, Shower Use, 42" Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Rod, Shower Curtain, 1"Diameter, W/Curtain & Hooks Bar, Towel, 1" Diameter, SS, Surface Mntd, Psych Shower, Single, Hand-Held
Yes
Yes
Yes
A C A A A A A A A A A A C C C A A C C C C A C
1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Mirror, Posture, Wall Mounted Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Bracket, Television, Wall Mounted, w/Adjust Arm Bracket, Television, Wall Backing Cabinet, U/C/B, 1 Shelf, 1 Drawer, 1 DO, 34x24x22 Cabinet, U/C/B, 4 Drawer, 34x24x22 Cabinet, Sink, U/C/B, 2 Door, 34x36x22 Cabinet, W/H, 2 Shelf, 1 DO, Sloping Top, 38x24x13 Sink, SS, Single Compartment, 7.5x12x12 ID Countertop, High Pressure Laminate Chair, Dining Room Table, Dining Basket, Wastepaper, Metal/Plastic, 2 Swinging Doors Board, Bulletin, Wood Framed, 36 x 24 Whiteboard, Dry Erase Clock, Battery, 1 " Di Cl k B 12" Diameter Brewer, Coffee, Auto, Elect, 3 Burner, Front/Back Oven, Microwave, Consumer Television, Color, 20" Diagonal Fountain, Water, CRS, Wall Mounted, 2 Level Refrigerator/Freezer, 20 Cubic Feet
Yes
Yes
Yes
120 120 120 115 120
15 15 1 5 15
1164A EXCHANGE VENDING AREA A1010 A A6030 D 1167 CONFERENCE/ CLASSROOM A5145 A F0115 C F0220 C F0300 C F0465 C F0690 C F0755 C F2000 C F2100 C F3200 C F3230 A M0430 C M0507 C M0515a C M1801 C
1 2
Telecommunication Outlet Machine, Vending
120
15
2 1 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Bookcase, Open, 5 Shelf Chair, Conference Chair, Task, Swivel, With Arms Cabinet, Storage, 2 Door, 5 Shelf Workstation, Computer, Enclosed, With Lock Table, Conference, Wood Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Lectern, Mobile, With Reading Light Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Rack, Hat / Coat, Wall Mounted Recorder / Player, Digital, Video, DVD Video Teleconferencing System Television, Flat Screen 50" Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor
120 120 120 120
2 7 3 5
Page 25 of 39
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Electrical
Column1
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. 1168 JANITOR CLOSET A5135 A F0500 C F0505 C P4700 A 1170 ADMINISTRATIVE CUBICLE E0123 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C M1801 C M1825 C
Quantity 1 1 1 1
Yes
Yes
Yes
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Workstation, Straight, Free Standing, 72" W Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, Chair Swivel High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120
120 120
5 3
1170A SECRETARY W/VISITOR WAITING A6046 C E0063 C F0275 C F0305 C F0420 C F2000 C F3200 C F3230 A M1801 C M1825 C 1171 STAFF TOILET A1066 A4995 A5075 A5080 A5109 A5145 A5200 F2000 P3000 P9050
1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Workstation, L-Shaped w/Peninsula, Wall Mtd, 72x72 Chair, Swivel, High Back Chair, Waiting Room, Single Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Rack, Hat / Coat, Wall Mounted Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120
120 120
5 3
A A C A A A A C A A
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame Table, Diaper Changing, Wall Mounted Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Grab Bar, 1-1/4" Dia, SS, 2 Wall, W/C Accessible Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Dispenser, Toilet Tissue, SS, 2-Roll, Surface Mntd Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Lavatory, Vitreous China, Straight Back Toilet, Wall Hung, Siphon Jet_ADA
Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
120
1172 PROVIDER WORK AREA E0123 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C M1801 C M1825 C
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Workstation, Straight, Free Standing, 72" W Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120
120 120
5 3
Page 26 of 39
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Electrical
Column1
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. 1173 STAFF TOILET A1066 A A4995 A A5075 C A5080 A A5109 A A5145 A A5200 A F2000 C P3000 A P9050 A 1174 PROVIDER WORK AREA E0123 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C M1801 C M1825 C
Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
120
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
1175 FORMS / LITERATURE STORAGE M2055 C 1176 COPY ROOM F0102 F 1 F0465 F0775 F2000 F2550 M1810 M1835 M1855 M7780 1177 NURSE MANAGER A5145 A6046 E0078 F0110 F0205 F0275 F0420 F2000 F3200 M1801 M1825
C C C C C C C C C
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Cabinet, Distribution, Mail C bi Di ib i M il Cabinet, Storage, 2 Door, 5 Shelf Table, Work, 2 Drawer Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Shredder, Paper, Heavy Duty Copier, Floor Standing, Digital Printer, Color Laser, Large Facsimile Machine Scanner, Document
120 120 120 120 120
20 15 9 5 2
A C C C C C C C C C C
2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Workstation, L-Shaped w/Peninsula, Free Std, 78x72 Bookcase, 3 Shelf Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120
120 120
5 3
Page 27 of 39
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Electrical
Column1
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. 1178 PROVIDER WORK AREA E0123 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C M1801 C M1825 C 1179 NCOIC OFFICE A5145 A6046 E0078 F0110 F0205 F0275 F0420 F2000 F3200 M1801 M1825
Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Description Workstation, Straight, Free Standing, 72" W Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120
120 120
5 3
2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
1180 PROVIDER WORK AREA E0123 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 F C F2000 C M1801 C M1825 C 1181 ADMINISTRATOR A5145 A6046 E0078 F0110 F0205 F0275 F0420 F2000 F3200 M1801 M1825
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Workstation, Straight, Free Standing, 72" W Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height C bi Filli L l H lf H i h Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120
120 120
5 3
2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
1182 WORK AREA PROVIDER / CONSULT E0123 C 1 F0205 C 1 F0275 C 1 F0420 C 1 F2000 C 1 M1801 C 1 M1825 C 1
120
120 120
5 3
Page 28 of 39
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Electrical
Column1
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. Quantity Description 1183 EMERGENCY SERVICES DIRECTOR, SYSTEM FURNITURE A5145 A 2 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted A6046 C 1 Artwork, Decorative, With Frame E0078 C 1 Workstation, L-Shaped w/Peninsula, Free Std, 78x72 F0110 C 1 Bookcase, 3 Shelf F0205 C 2 Chair, Side With Arms F0275 C 1 Chair, Swivel, High Back F0420 C 1 Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height F2000 C 1 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal F3200 C 1 Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter M1801 C 1 Computer, Microprocessing, Computer Microprocessing w/Flat Panel Monitor M1825 C 1 Printer, Computer 1184 WORK AREA PROVIDER / CONSULT E0123 C 1 F0205 C 1 F0275 C 1 F0420 C 1 F2000 C 1 M1801 C 1 M1825 C 1 1186 WORK AREA PROVIDER / CONSULT E0123 C 1 F0205 C 1 F0275 C 1 F0420 F C 1 F2000 C 1 M1801 C 1 M1825 C 1 1188 WORK AREA PROVIDER / CONSULT E0123 C 1 F0205 C 1 F0275 C 1 F0420 C 1 F2000 C 1 M1801 C 1 M1825 C 1 1190 EMERGENCY REFERENCE LIBRARY F0130 C 2 F0280 C 1 F0715 C 1
120
120 120
5 3
120
120 120
5 3
Workstation, Straight, Free Standing, 72" W Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height C bi Filli L l H lf H i h Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120
120 120
5 3
120
120 120
5 3
Bookcase, Single Chair, Swivel, Low Back Carrel, Study Table
Page 29 of 39
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Electrical
Column1
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. 2101 STAFF TOILET, UNISEX A1066 A A4995 A A5075 C A5080 A A5109 A A5145 A A5200 A F2000 C P3000 A P9050 A 2103 STAFF TOILET, UNISEX A1066 A A4995 A A5075 C A5080 A A5109 A A5145 A A5200 A F2000 C P3000 A P9050 A 2107 STAFF LOUNGE A1080 A5075 A A5080 A5145 A5210 A5220 C02C0a C02D0a C04P0a CB020 CS010 CT030 F0225 F0795 F2015 F3025 F3050 F3200 K1552 K4665 M0500 R7250
Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
120
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
120
A C A A A A A A A A A A C C C A A C C C C C
1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Mirror, Posture, Wall Mounted Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Di S Di bl Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Bracket, Television, Wall Mounted, w/Adjust Arm Bracket, Television, Wall Backing Cabinet, U/C/B, 1 Shelf, 1 Drawer, 1 DO, 34x24x22 Cabinet, U/C/B, 4 Drawer, 34x24x22 Cabinet, Sink, U/C/B, 2 Door, 34x36x22 Cabinet, W/H, 2 Shelf, 1 DO, Sloping Top, 38x24x13 Sink, SS, Single Compartment, 7.5x12x12 ID Countertop, High Pressure Laminate Chair, Dining Room Table, Dining Basket, Wastepaper, Metal/Plastic, 2 Swinging Doors Board, Bulletin, Wood Framed, 36 x 24 Whiteboard, Dry Erase Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Brewer, Coffee, Auto, Elect, 3 Burner, Front/Back Oven, Microwave, Consumer Television, Color, 20" Diagonal Refrigerator/Freezer, 20 Cubic Feet
Yes
Yes
Yes
120 120 120 120
15 15 1 15
2110 WEIGH-IN ALCOVE F2000 C M4040 C
1 1
Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Scale, Weighting, 300 Pound Capacity
Page 30 of 39
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Electrical
Column1
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. 2114 FIRST SERGEANT A5145 A A6046 C E0078 C F0110 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C F3200 C M1801 C M1825 C 2115 FRSA STORAGE M2070
Quantity 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
Description Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Workstation, L-Shaped w/Peninsula, Free Std, 78x72 Bookcase, 3 Shelf Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Computer, Microprocessing, Computer Microprocessing w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120
120 120
5 3
Shelving, Storage, 77hx36wx18d
2116 FAMILY READINESS SUPPORT ASSISTANT (FRSA) A5145 A 2 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted A6046 C 1 Artwork, Decorative, With Frame E0078 C 1 Workstation, L-Shaped w/Peninsula, Free Std, 78x72 F0110 C 1 Bookcase, 3 Shelf F0205 C 2 Chair, Side With Arms F0275 C 1 Chair, Swivel, High Back F0420 C 1 Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height F2000 C 1 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal F3200 C 1 Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter M1801 M1 1 C 1 Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor C Mi i Fl P lM i M1825 C 1 Printer, Computer 2118 MEDICAL COMPANY COMMANDER A5155 A 1 A6046 C 2 F0120 C 1 F0235 C 2 F0240 C 1 F0600 C 1 F0650 C 1 F0710 C 1 F0725 C 1 F2005 C 1 F2420 C 1 F3200 C 1 M1801 C 1 M1825 C 1
120
120 1 120
5 3
Costumer, Wall, Executive Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Bookcase, Executive, 3 Shelf, Wood Chair, Executive, Side Chair, Executive, Swivel Credenza, Executive, Wood Desk, Executive, Wood Table, Computer, With Print Shelf Table, Occational, Executive, Wood Basket, Wastepaper, Executive, Wood Lamp, Table, With Shade Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120 120 120
1 5 3
Page 31 of 39
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Electrical
Column1
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. Quantity 2121 TRAINING NCO / CAREER COUNSELOR A5145 A 2 A6046 C 1 E0078 C 1 F0110 C 1 F0205 C 2 F0275 C 1 F0420 C 1 F2000 C 1 F3200 C 1 M1801 C 1 M1825 C 1 2122 PT TESTING SPACE A1080 A F2000 C F3200 C M8125 C
120
120 120
5 3
4 2 1 2
Mirror, Posture, Wall Mounted Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Ergometer, Bicycle, Stationary
2123 INTERVIEW / CONSULT ROOM / DRUG SCREENING A5145 A 2 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted A6046 C 1 Artwork, Decorative, With Frame E0078 C 1 Workstation, L-Shaped w/Peninsula, Free Std, 78x72 F0110 C 1 Bookcase, 3 Shelf F0205 C 2 Chair, Side With Arms F0275 C 1 Chair, Swivel, High Back F0420 F C 1 Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height C bi Filli L l H lf H i h F2000 C 1 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal F3200 C 1 Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter M1801 C 1 Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor M1825 C 1 Printer, Computer 2124 FILE ROOM F0415
120
120 120
5 3
Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Full Height, 5 Drawer
2125 ORDERLY ROOM CLERKS E0123 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C M1801 C M1825 C 2125A ORDERLY ROOM CLERKS E0123 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C M1801 C M1825 C
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
Page 32 of 39
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Electrical
Column1
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. 2125B ORDERLY ROOM CLERKS E0123 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C M1801 C M1825 C 2125C SUPPLY SPECIALIST E0123 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C M1801 C M1825 C 2126 COPY ROOM F0102 F0465 F0775 F2000 F2550 M1810 M1835 M1855 M1 M7780 2128 STORAGE M2070
Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
C C C C C C C C C
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Cabinet, Distribution, Mail Cabinet, Storage, 2 Door, 5 Shelf Table, Work, 2 Drawer Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Shredder, Paper, Heavy Duty Copier, Floor Standing, Digital Printer, Color Laser, Large Facsimile Machine F i il M hi Scanner, Document
120 120 120 120 1 120
20 15 9 5 2
2130 CONFERENCE ROOM A5145 A F0115 C F0220 C F0300 C F0465 C F0690 C F0755 C F2000 C F2100 C F3200 C F3230 A M0430 C M0507 C M0515a C M1801 C
2 1 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Bookcase, Open, 5 Shelf Chair, Conference Chair, Task, Swivel, With Arms Cabinet, Storage, 2 Door, 5 Shelf Workstation, Computer, Enclosed, With Lock Table, Conference, Wood Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Lectern, Mobile, With Reading Light Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Rack, Hat / Coat, Wall Mounted Recorder / Player, Digital, Video, DVD Video Teleconferencing System Television, Flat Screen 50" Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor
120 120 120 120
2 7 3 5
Page 33 of 39
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Electrical
Column1
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. 2132 JANITOR CLOSET A5135 A F0500 C F0505 C P4700 A
Quantity 1 1 1 1
Yes
Yes
Yes
2140 INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE LABORATORY A5075 C 1 A5080 A 1 A5145 A 2 E0579a F 1 F0230 C 2 F2000 C 1 F2020 C 1 F3200 C 1 L0100 C 1 L1350 C 1 L2320 A 1 L6000 C 1 M0550 C 1 M1801 C 1 M1825 C 1 P2450 A 1 P5210 A 1 R6080 C 1 T0025 C 1 T0030 C 1 T8035 T C 1 T8040 C 1 2141 EQUIPMENT STORAGE M2055 C 2142 CHIEF, INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE A5145 A A6046 C E0078 C F0110 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C F3200 C M1801 C M1825 C 2143 FILE ROOM / REFERENCE F0415 C
Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Hook Garment Double SS Surface Mounted Workstation, Chemistry Lab, Minimal Chair, Drafting, Rotary Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Can Trash, 44 Gallon Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Microscope, Binocular Centrifuge, Table, Small, 3200 RPM, 6 Place Cabinet, Bio Safety, Class II/B1, F/S, Vert, 4ft Detector, Mercury Sampler, Air Particulate (Pollen) Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer Valve, Mixing, Thermostatic Shower, Safety, Freestanding, With Eye/Face Wash Refrigerator/Freezer, Biological, SS, 2 Door Meter, Radiation Survey Radiation-Light Field Analyzer Radiometer, Laser R di L Meter, Sound Level
Yes
Yes
Yes
120
120 120 115 120 120 120 120 Yes Yes Yes Yes 220 120
2 10 20 1 1 5 3
2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Workstation, L-Shaped w/Peninsula, Free Std, 78x72 Bookcase, 3 Shelf Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter 12 Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120
120 120
5 3
Page 34 of 39
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Electrical
Column1
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. 2144 INDUSTRIAL HYGIENIST A5145 A A6046 C E0078 C F0110 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C F3200 C M1801 C M1825 C 2145 TECH OFFICE A5145 A6046 E0123 F0205 F0275 F0420 F2000 F3200 M1801 M1825
Quantity 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
A C C C C C C C C C
2 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1
Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Workstation, Straight, Free Standing, 72" W Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120
120 120
5 3
2150 FILE STORAGE ROOM F0415 F 1 C 2151 PATIENT SAFETY A5145 A6046 E0078 F0110 F0205 F0275 F0415 F2000 F3200 M1801 M1825
Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Full Height, 5 Drawer C bi Filli L l F ll H i h D
2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Workstation, L-Shaped w/Peninsula, Free Std, 78x72 Bookcase, 3 Shelf Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Full Height, 5 Drawer Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120
120 120
5 3
2152 FILE / COPY ROOM F0102 C F0465 C F0775 C F2000 C F2550 C M1810 C M1835 C M1855 C M7780 C
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Cabinet, Distribution, Mail Cabinet, Storage, 2 Door, 5 Shelf Table, Work, 2 Drawer Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Shredder, Paper, Heavy Duty Copier, Floor Standing, Digital Printer, Color Laser, Large Facsimile Machine Scanner, Document
120 120 120 120 120
20 15 9 5 2
Page 35 of 39
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Electrical
Column1
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. Quantity 2153 CHIEF, QUALITY MANAGMENT A5145 A 2 A6046 C 1 E0078 C 1 F0110 C 1 F0205 C 2 F0275 C 1 F0420 C 1 F2000 C 1 F3200 C 1 M1801 C 1 M1825 C 1 2154 RN - OUTCOMES A5145 A6046 E0078 F0110 F0205 F0275 F0420 F2000 F3200 M1801 M1825
120
120 120
5 3
2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
2155 INFECTION CONTROL A5145 A A6046 C E0078 C F0110 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C F3200 C M1801 C M1825 C 2156 FEMALE PUBLIC TOILET A1070 A A4995 A A5075 C A5080 A A5109 A A5145 A A5200 A C0040 A CT040 A F2015 C P3070 A P9050 A P9050 A
2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
1 1 2 2 1 3 3 2 1 1 3 2 1
Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame, 36 x Required Table, Diaper Changing, Wall Mounted Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Grab Bar, 1-1/4" Dia, SS, 2 Wall, W/C Accessible Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Dispenser, Toilet Tissue, SS, 2-Roll, Surface Mntd Rail, Apron, 4x54x1 Countertop, Solid Surface Basket, Wastepaper, Metal/Plastic, 2 Swinging Doors Lavatory, Vitreous China, Under or Counter Top Mtd Toilet, Wall Hung, Siphon Jet Toilet, Wall Hung, Siphon Jet_ADA
Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
120
Page 36 of 39
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Electrical
Column1
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. 2158 MALE PUBLIC TOILET A1070 A A4995 A A5075 C A5080 A A5109 A A5145 A A5200 A C0040 A CT040 A F2015 C P3070 A P8150 A P9050 A P9050 A 2160 WAITING ROOM F0305 F0305a F0740 F3200 M0430 M0515
Quantity 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 3 2 1 1
Description Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame, 36 x Required Table, Diaper Changing, Wall Mounted Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Grab Bar, 1-1/4" Dia, SS, 2 Wall, W/C Accessible Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Dispenser, Toilet Tissue, SS, 2-Roll, Surface Mntd Rail, Apron, 4x54x1 Countertop, Solid Surface Basket, Wastepaper, Metal/Plastic, Basket Wastepaper Metal/Plastic 2 Swinging Doors Lavatory, Vitreous China, Under or Counter Top Mtd Uniral, Wall Hung, ADA Toilet, Wall Hung, Siphon Jet Toilet, Wall Hung, Siphon Jet_ADA
Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes
120
C C C C C C
7 1 1 1 1 1
Chair, Waiting Room, Single Chair, Waiting Room, Bariatric Table, Occasional, Lamp, 20 x 27 x 27 Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Recorder / Player, Digital, Video, DVD Television, Plasma
120 120
2 3
2162 PATIENT EDUCATION KIOSK/ALCOVE A1010 A 1 2170 CHILD PLAY OBSERVATION ROOM A5120 A 1 A5215 A 1 A6045 C 1 F0205 C 2 F0215 C 4 F0270 C 1 F0760 C 1 F2000 C 1 F3200 C 1 M0430 C 1 M0500 C 1 2171 FILE ROOM F0415 2171A COPY ROOM F0102 F0465 F0775 F2000 F2550 M1810 M1835 M1855 M7780
Window, Observation, One Way Bracket, Television, Ceiling Mounted Artwork, Mural, Wall Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Child's Chair, Rocking, High Back Table, Child's Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Recorder / Player, Digital, Video, DVD Television, Color, 20" Diagonal
120 120
2 1
C C C C C C C C C
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Cabinet, Distribution, Mail Cabinet, Storage, 2 Door, 5 Shelf Table, Work, 2 Drawer Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Shredder, Paper, Heavy Duty Copier, Floor Standing, Digital Printer, Color Laser, Large Facsimile Machine Scanner, Document Page 37 of 39
120 120 120 120 120
20 15 9 5 2
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Electrical
Column1
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. 2171B RECEPTION A6105a A6105f CT040 F0275 F0420 F2000 F2540 F3200 M1801 M1825 M1840
Log. Cat. A A A C C C C C C C C
Quantity 2 2 1 2 3 2 1 1 2 1 1
Description Counter, Reception Control, Built-In Counter, Reception Control, Built-In Countertop, Solid Surface Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Shredder, Paper, Security Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Printer Computer Printer/Copier/Fax Combination
120 120 120 120
7 5 3 9
2172 EARLY CHILDHOOD SPECIAL ED. A5145 A A6046 C E0063 C F0110 C F0255 C F0275 C F0420 C F0740 C F2000 C F2420 C F3200 C M1801 C M1825 C 2173 SPEECH THERAPIST OFFICE/EXAM A1066 A A1132 C A5075 C A5080 A A5106 C A5145 A A5180 A A6046 C E0078 C F0205 C F0275 C F2000 C F3200 C M0510 C M1620 A M1801 C M1825 C M4200 C P3100 A
2 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Workstation, L-Shaped w/Peninsula, Wall Mtd, 72x72 Bookcase, 3 Shelf Chair, Easy Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Table, Occasional, Lamp, 20 x 27 x 27 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Lamp, Table, With Shade Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120
120 120 120
1 5 3
1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame Rail, Accessory Mounoting, Length As Required Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps w/Glove Dispenser Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Workstation, L-Shaped w/Peninsula, Free Std, 78x72 Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, High Back Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter TV/VCR Combination Holder, Chart, Patient, Wall or Door Mounted Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer Otoscope/Ophthalmoscope, Wall Mounted Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type
120
120 120 120 120 Yes Yes Yes
2 5 3 1
Page 38 of 39
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Electrical
Column1
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. 2174 CLINICAL SOCIAL WORKER A5145 A A6046 C E0063 C F0110 C F0255 C F0275 C F0420 C F0740 C F2000 C F2420 C F3200 C M1801 C M1825 C 2175 STORAGE ROOM, SHELVING M2055 C 2176 PHYSICAL THERAPIST A1066 A A5075 C A5080 A A5145 A A5180 A A6046 C E0078 C F0115 F 11 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C F3200 C M1620 A M1801 C M1825 C P3100 A
Quantity 2 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Description Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Workstation, L-Shaped w/Peninsula, Wall Mtd, 72x72 Bookcase, 3 Shelf Chair, Easy Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Table, Occasional, Lamp, 20 x 27 x 27 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Lamp, Table, Lamp Table With Shade Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120
120 120 120
1 5 3
1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1
Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Workstation, L-Shaped w/Peninsula, Free Std, 78x72 Bookcase, Open, 5 Shelf B k O Sh lf Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Holder, Chart, Patient, Wall or Door Mounted Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type
120
120 120 Yes Yes Yes
5 3
Page 39 of 39
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Vent
ROOM-BY-ROOM EQUIPMENT AND CASEWORK LIST_WACH.xlsx Heat Gain BTU Treated Water Nitrous Oxide Drain / Waste
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. PX ROOM C04F0A A CT030A A
Quantity 2 1
Description Cabinet, U/C/B, 1 Shelf, 2 Half DR, 2 DO, 36x36x30 Countertop, High Pressure Laminate
1A01 INPATIENT MEDICAL RECORDS SUPERVISOR A5145 A 2 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted A6046 C 1 Artwork, Decorative, With Frame E0078 C 1 Workstation, L-Shaped w/Peninsula, Free Std, 78x72 F0110 C 1 Bookcase, 3 Shelf F0205 C 2 Chair, Side With Arms F0275 C 1 Chair, Swivel, High Back F0420 C 1 Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height F2000 C 1 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal F3200 C 1 Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter M1801 C 1 Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor M1825 C 1 Printer, Computer 1A02 INPATIENT RECORDS FILE ROOM A1145 C 4 Shelving, Storage, Movable Aisle, Manual F0350 C 2 Stool, Step, Retractable Caster 1A03 AMBULATORY SURGERY RECORDS A1145 C 4 Shelving, Storage, Movable Aisle, Manual F0350 C 1 Stool, Step, Retractable Caster 1A04 INPATIENT RECORDS RETIREMENT E0051 C 2 F0275 C 2 F0420 C 2 F0545 C 1 F2000 C 2 F3230 A 1 M1801 C 2 M1810 C 1 M1825 C 1 M1855 C 1 1A05 PHYSICIAN WORKROOM E0051 C E0851 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C F3200 C M1801 C M1840 C
120
120 120
5 3
Workstation, Corner Work Surface, Wall Mtd, 72x48 Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Cart, Library, Mobile Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Rack, Hat / Coat, Wall Mounted Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Copier, Floor Standing, Digital Printer, Computer Facsimile Machine
120
120 120 120 120
5 15 3 5
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
Workstation, Corner Work Surface, Wall Mtd, 72x48 Display, Tackboard & Markerboard, Wall Mtd Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer/Copier/Fax Combination
120
120 120
5 9
1A06 PATIENT BAGGAGE STORAGE A6155 A 5
Cage, Security, Heavy Duty
Page 1 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. 1A07 NCOIC OFFICE A5145 A A6046 C E0078 C F0110 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C F3200 C M1801 C M1825 C
Quantity 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Description Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Workstation, L-Shaped w/Peninsula, Free Std, 78x72 Bookcase, 3 Shelf Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120
120 120
5 3
1A08 CHIEF OF PATIENT ADMINISTRATION OFFICE A5145 A 2 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted A6046 C 1 Artwork, Decorative, With Frame E0078 C 1 Workstation, L-Shaped w/Peninsula, Free Std, 78x72 F0110 C 1 Bookcase, 3 Shelf F0205 C 2 Chair, Side With Arms F0275 C 1 Chair, Swivel, High Back F0420 C 1 Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height F2000 C 1 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal F3200 C 1 Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter M1801 C 1 Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor M1825 C 1 Printer, Computer 1A09 OUTPATIENT MEDICAL RECORDS SUPERVISOR A5145 A 2 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted A6046 C 1 Artwork, Decorative, With Frame E0078 C 1 Workstation, L-Shaped w/Peninsula, Free Std, 78x72 F0110 C 1 Bookcase, 3 Shelf F0205 C 2 Chair, Side With Arms F0275 C 1 Chair, Swivel, High Back F0420 C 1 Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height F2000 C 1 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal F3200 C 1 Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter M1801 C 1 Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor M1825 C 1 Printer, Computer 1A10 LEAD CLERK A5145 A6046 E0078 F0110 F0205 F0275 F0420 F2000 F3200 M1801 M1825
120
120 120
5 3
120
120 120
5 3
2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
Page 2 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. Quantity 1A12 RECORD CLERK CUBICLE E0123 C 1 F0205 C 1 F0275 C 1 F0420 C 2 F2000 C 1 M1801 C 1 M1825 C 1 1A14 RECORD CLERK CUBICLE E0123 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C M1801 C M1825 C 1A15 RECORD CLERK CUBICLE E0123 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C M1801 C M1825 C 1A16 MEDICAL RECORDS CLERK E0123 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C M1801 C M1825 C 1A17 RECORD CLERK CUBICLE E0123 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C M1801 C M1825 C
120
120 120
5 3
1 1 1 2 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
1 1 1 2 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
Page 3 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. Quantity 1A18 RECORD CLERK CUBICLE E0123 C 1 F0205 C 1 F0275 C 1 F0420 C 1 F2000 C 1 M1801 C 1 M1825 C 1 1A19 RECORD CLERK CUBICLE E0123 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C M1801 C M1825 C 1A20 MEDICAL RECORDS CLERK E0123 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C M1801 C M1825 C 1A21 RECORD CLERK CUBICLE E0123 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C M1801 C M1825 C 1A22 RECORD CLERK CUBICLE E0123 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C M1801 C M1825 C
120
120 120
5 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
Page 4 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. Quantity 1A23 RECORD CLERK CUBICLE E0123 C 1 F0205 C 1 F0275 C 1 F0420 C 1 F2000 C 1 M1801 C 1 M1825 C 1 1A24 MEDICAL RECORDS CLERK E0123 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C M1801 C M1825 C 1A25 CORRESPONDENCE CLERK E0123 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C M1801 C M1825 C 1A26 CORRESPONDENCE CLERK E0123 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C M1801 C M1825 C 1A27 CORRESPONDENCE CLERK E0123 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C M1801 C M1825 C
120
120 120
5 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
Page 5 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. 1A28 CODER E0123 F0205 F0275 F2000 F2455 M1801 M1825
Log. Cat. C C C C C C C
Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Description Workstation, Straight, Free Standing, 72" W Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, High Back Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Transcription Unit, Standalone Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120
120 120 120
1 5 3
1A29 CORRESPONDENCE CLERK E0123 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C M1801 C M1825 C 1A30 CORRESPONDENCE CLERK E0123 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C M1801 C M1825 C 1A31 CORRESPONDENCE CLERK E0123 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C M1801 C M1825 C 1A32 CODERS E0123 F0205 F0275 F2000 F2455 M1801 M1825
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
C C C C C C C
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Workstation, Straight, Free Standing, 72" W Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, High Back Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Transcription Unit, Standalone Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120
120 120 120
1 5 3
Page 6 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. 1A33 CODERS E0123 F0205 F0275 F2000 F2455 M1801 M1825 1A34 CODERS E0123 F0205 F0275 F2000 F2455 M1801 M1825 1A35 CODERS E0123 F0205 F0275 F2000 F2455 M1801 M1825 1A36 CODERS E0123 F0205 F0275 F2000 F2455 M1801 M1825 1A37 CODERS E0123 F0205 F0275 F2000 F2455 M1801 M1825
Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120 120
1 5 3
C C C C C C C
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120 120
1 5 3
C C C C C C C
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120 120
1 5 3
C C C C C C C
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120 120
1 5 3
C C C C C C C
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120 120
1 5 3
Page 7 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. 1A38 CODERS E0123 F0205 F0275 F2000 F2455 M1801 M1825 1A39 CODERS E0123 F0205 F0275 F2000 F2455 M1801 M1825 1A40 CODERS E0123 F0205 F0275 F2000 F2455 M1801 M1825 1A41 CODERS E0123 F0205 F0275 F2000 F2455 M1801 M1825 1A42 CODERS E0123 F0205 F0275 F2000 F2455 M1801 M1825
Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120 120
1 5 3
C C C C C C C
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120 120
1 5 3
C C C C C C C
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120 120
1 5 3
C C C C C C C
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120 120
1 5 3
C C C C C C C
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120 120
1 5 3
Page 8 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. 1A43 CODERS E0123 F0205 F0275 F2000 F2455 M1801 M1825
Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120 120
1 5 3
1A44 ADMINISTRATIVE ASSISTANT WITH VISITOR WAITING A5145 A 2 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted A6046 C 1 Artwork, Decorative, With Frame E0051 C 1 Workstation, Corner Work Surface, Wall Mtd, 72x48 F0110 C 1 Bookcase, 3 Shelf F0205 C 1 Chair, Side With Arms F0275 C 1 Chair, Swivel, High Back F2000 C 1 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal F3200 C 1 Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter M1801 C 1 Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor M1825 C 1 Printer, Computer 1A45 HEALTH SYSTEMS ASSISTANT E0123 C 1 F0205 C 1 F0275 C 1 F0420 C 1 F2000 C 1 M1801 C 1 M1825 C 1
120
120 120
5 3
120
120 120
5 3
1C01 RECORDS IN/OUT PROCESSING WAITING F0305 C 3 Chair, Waiting Room, Single F2300 C 1 Rack, Magazine, Wall Mounted F2310 A 1 Rack, Pamphlet, Wall Mounted F3200 C 1 Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter 1C02 RECORDS WINDOW A6105p A C0039 A CT030 A F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C F2540 C F3200 C M1801 C M1825 C M1840 C
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Counter, Reception Control, Built-In Rail, Apron, 4x48x1 Countertop, High Pressure Laminate Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Shredder, Paper, Security Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer Printer/Copier/Fax Combination
120 120 120 120
7 5 3 9
Page 9 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. 1C04 RECORDS WINDOW A6105q A F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C M1801 C
Quantity 1 1 1 1 1
Description Counter, Reception Control, Built-In Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor
120
1C05 OUTPATIENT RECORDS STORAGE A1145 C 5 Shelving, Storage, Movable Aisle, Manual F0350 C 5 Stool, Step, Retractable Caster 1C06 OUTPATIENT RECORDS RETIREMENT A1150 C 1 Shelving, File, Open, Patient Records E0226 C 2 Workstation, Computer, O/H Cab, Wall Mtd, 72" W F0205 C 2 Chair, Side With Arms F0275 C 2 Chair, Swivel, High Back F0420 C 2 Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height F0545 C 1 Cart, Library, Mobile F0755 C 1 Table, Conference, Wood F2000 C 2 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal M1801 C 2 Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor M1810 C 1 Copier, Floor Standing, Digital M1825 C 2 Printer, Computer M1855 C 1 Facsimile Machine 1C07 RECORDS FILE SHELVING A1150 C F0355 C 1C08 COPIERS/ STORAGE F0465 C F0775 C F2000 C F2550 C M1810 C M1835 C M1855 C M2075 C
120
120 120 120 120
5 15 3 5
5 1
Shelving, File, Open, Patient Records Footstool, Straight
1 2 2 1 1 1 1 2
Cabinet, Storage, 2 Door, 5 Shelf Table, Work, 2 Drawer Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Shredder, Paper, Heavy Duty Copier, Floor Standing, Digital Printer, Color Laser, Large Facsimile Machine Shelving, Storage, Enclosed 87hx48wx12d
120 120 120 120
20 15 9 5
Page 10 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. Quantity 1C09 STAFF TOILET, FEMALE A1070 A 1 A5075 C 1 A5080 A 1 A5109 A 1 A5145 A 2 A5200 A 2 C0039 A 1 CT030 A 1 F2015 C 1 P3070 A 1 P9050 A 1 P9050 A 1 1C10 STAFF TOILET, MALE A1070 A A5075 C A5080 A A5109 A A5145 A A5200 A C0039 A CT030 A F2015 C P3070 A P8150 A P9050 A 1C11 STAFF LOUNGE A1080 A A5075 C A5080 A A5145 A A5210 A A5220 A C02C0 A C02D0 A C04P0 A CB020 A CS010 A CT030 A F0225 C F0795 C F2015 C F3025 A F3050 A F3200 C K1552 C K4665 C M0500 C R7250 C
Description Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame, 36 x Required Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Grab Bar, 1-1/4" Dia, SS, 2 Wall, W/C Accessible Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Dispenser, Toilet Tissue, SS, 2-Roll, Surface Mntd Rail, Apron, 4x48x1 Countertop, High Pressure Laminate Basket, Wastepaper, Metal/Plastic, 2 Swinging Doors Lavatory, Vitreous China, Under or Counter Top Mtd Toilet, Wall Hung, Siphon Jet Toilet, Wall Hung, Siphon Jet, ADA
Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame, 36 x Required Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Grab Bar, 1-1/4" Dia, SS, 2 Wall, W/C Accessible Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Dispenser, Toilet Tissue, SS, 2-Roll, Surface Mntd Rail, Apron, 4x48x1 Countertop, High Pressure Laminate Basket, Wastepaper, Metal/Plastic, 2 Swinging Doors Lavatory, Vitreous China, Under or Counter Top Mtd Uniral, Wall Hung, ADA Toilet, Wall Hung, Siphon Jet, ADA
Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Mirror, Posture, Wall Mounted Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Bracket, Television, Wall Mounted, w/Adjust Arm Bracket, Television, Wall Backing Cabinet, U/C/B, 1 Shelf, 1 Drawer, 1 DO, 34x24x22 ADA Cabinet, U/C/B, 4 Drawer, 34x24x22 ADA Cabinet, Sink, U/C/B, 2 Door, 34x36x22 ADA Cabinet, W/H, 2 Shelf, 1 DO, Sloping Top, 38x24x13 Sink, SS, Single Compartment, 7.5x12x12 ID ADA Countertop, High Pressure Laminate ADA Chair, Dining Room Table, Dining Basket, Wastepaper, Metal/Plastic, 2 Swinging Doors Board, Bulletin, Wood Framed, 36 x 24 Whiteboard, Dry Erase Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Brewer, Coffee, Auto, Elect, 3 Burner, Front/Back Oven, Microwave, Consumer Television, Color, 20" Diagonal Refrigerator/Freezer, 20 Cubic Feet
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
120 120 120 120
15 15 1 15
Page 11 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. Quantity Description 1G05 MEDICAL INFORMATION SYSTEMS A0900 A 1 Relay Rack, Aluminum 1G05A RECORDS/AIR EVACUATION WORK AREA A1150 C 1 Shelving, File, Open, Patient Records E0226 C 1 Workstation, Computer, O/H Cab, Wall Mtd, 72" W F0205 C 1 Chair, Side With Arms F0275 C 1 Chair, Swivel, High Back F0420 C 1 Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height F2000 C 1 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal M1801 C 1 Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor M1825 C 1 Printer, Computer 1G05B AMBULATORY SURGERY RECORDS STORAGE A1145 C 1 Shelving, Storage, Movable Aisle, Manual F0350 C 1 Stool, Step, Retractable Caster 1G05C ADMISSIONS AND DISCHARGE WINDOW E0123a C 1 Workstation, Straight, Free Standing, 66" W F0205 C 2 Chair, Side With Arms F0275 C 1 Chair, Swivel, High Back F0420 C 1 Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height F2000 C 1 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal M1801 C 1 Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor M1825 C 1 Printer, Computer 1G05D ADMISSIONS AND DISCHARGE WINDOW E0123a C 1 Workstation, Straight, Free Standing, 66" W F0205 C 2 Chair, Side With Arms F0275 C 1 Chair, Swivel, High Back F0420 C 1 Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height F2000 C 1 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal M1801 C 1 Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor M1825 C 1 Printer, Computer 1G05E ADMISSIONS AND DISCHARGE WINDOW E0123a C 1 Workstation, Straight, Free Standing, 66" W F0205 C 2 Chair, Side With Arms F0275 C 1 Chair, Swivel, High Back F0420 C 1 Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height F2000 C 1 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal M1801 C 1 Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor M1825 C 1 Printer, Computer
120
120 120
5 3
120
120 120
5 3
120
120 120
5 3
120
120 120
5 3
Page 12 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. 1G06 A&D NCOIC OFFICE A5145 A A6046 C E0078a C F0110 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C F3200 C M1801 C M1825 C
Quantity 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
1G08 A&D SUPERVISOR OFFICE A5145 A A6046 C E0078a C F0110 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C F3200 C M1801 C M1825 C
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
1G15 PATIENT / FAMILY WAITING AREA A6046 C 1 F0305 C 3 F0305a C 1 F0740 C 1 F2300 C 1 F3200 C 1 1G16 COPY ROOM F0102 F0465 F0775 F2000 F2550 M1810 M1835 M1855 M7780
Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Chair, Waiting Room, Single Chair, Waiting Room, Single Bariatric Table, Occasional, Lamp, 20 x 27 x 27 Rack, Magazine, Wall Mounted Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter
C C C C C C C C C
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120 120 120 120 120
20 15 9 5 2
Page 13 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. Quantity 1G17 SUPPLY / STORAGE ROOM M2055 C 4 1H01 BLOOD DRAWING AREA A1066 A A5075 C A5080 A A5106 C A5145 A A5180U A C03P0 A C04E0 A CE040 A CS090 A CT030 A E0912 C E1500 C F2000 C F3200 C L8520 C M0755 C M0765 C M1411 C M1802 C M3072 C P1965 A P2450 A 1H13 MED TECH / WORK AREA E0123 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C M1801 C M1830 C 1H14 WAITING ROOM A6046 C F0305 C F0305a C F0740 C F2300 C F2310 A F3200 C M0430 C M0515 C
Description Shelving, Storage, Wire, CRS, w/Adjustable Shelves
1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps w/Glove Dispenser Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain Cabinet, Sink, U/C/B, 2 Door, 36x30x22 Cabinet, U/C/B, 1 Shelf, 1 Drawer, 2 DO, 36x36x22 Cabinet, W/H, 2 SH, 2 GDO, Sloping Top, 38x36x13 Sink, SS, Single Compartment, 7.5x19x16 ID Countertop, High Pressure Laminate Locker, Supply, Med Surg, Wall Mtd Rail, MOD, W/MNTD, HX144XD Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Shaker, Rotating, 12 Standard Tubes Flowmeter, Oxygen, Low Flow Regulator, Vacuum Phlebotomy Arm, Wheelchair Accessible Work Station, Computer, Retractable, Wall Mounted Frame, Infectious Waste Bag w/Lid Eyewash, Eye/Face, Sink Mounted, Hands-free Valve, Mixing, Thermostatic
Yes
Yes
Yes
120
5 Yes Yes
120 Yes Yes Yes Yes
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Workstation, Straight, Free Standing, 72" W Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Label, Pharmacy
120
120 115
5 5
1 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Chair, Waiting Room, Single Chair, Waiting Room, Single Bariatric Table, Occasional, Lamp, 20 x 27 x 27 Rack, Magazine, Wall Mounted Rack, Pamphlet, Wall Mounted Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Recorder / Player, Digital, Video, DVD Television, Plasma
120 120
2 3
Page 14 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. 1H16 RECEPTION A6105r A C0039 A CT030 A F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C F2540 C F3200 C M1801 C M1825 C M1840 C 1J02 (3) WORK STATIONS E0123 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C F3200 C M1801 C M1825 C 1J02A STAFF LOUNGE A1080 A A5075 C A5080 A A5145 A A5210 A A5220 A C02C0 A C02D0 A C04P0 A CB020 A CS010 A CT030 A F0225 C F0795 C F2015 C F3025 A F3050 A F3200 C K1552 C K4665 C M0500 C R7250 C
Quantity 1 4 1 2 3 2 1 1 2 1 1
Description Counter, Reception Control, Built-In Countertop, High Pressure Laminate Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Shredder, Paper, Security Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer Printer/Copier/Fax Combination
120 120 120 120
7 5 3 9
3 3 3 3 1 3 3
Workstation, Straight, Free Standing, 72" W Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120
120 120
5 3
1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
120 120 120 120
15 15 1 15
Page 15 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. 1J04 QA A5145 A6046 E0078 F0110 F0205 F0275 F0420 F2000 F3200 M1801 M1825
Log. Cat. A C C C C C C C C C C
Quantity 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
1J06 CHIEF OF PATHOLOGY OFFICE A5145 A 2 A6046 C 1 E0078 C 1 F0110 C 1 F0205 C 2 F0275 C 1 F0420 C 1 F2000 C 1 F3200 C 1 M1801 C 1 M1825 C 1 1J07 CLASSROOM A5145 F0115 F0220 F0300 F0690 F0755 F2000 F2100 F3200 F3230 M0507 M0515a M1801
120
120 120
5 3
A C C C C C C C C A C C C
2 1 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Bookcase, Open, 5 Shelf Chair, Conference Chair, Task, Swivel, With Arms Workstation, Computer, Enclosed, With Lock Table, Conference, Wood Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Lectern, Mobile, With Reading Light Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Rack, Hat / Coat, Wall Mounted Video Teleconferencing System Television, Flat Screen 50" Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor
120 240 120 120
4 7.7 3 5
2C02 INFO TECH SPECIALIST F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C M1801 C M1825 C
1 1 1 1 1 1
Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120 120
5 3
Page 16 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. Quantity 2C03 INFO TECH SPECIALIST E0123 C 1 F0205 C 1 F0275 C 1 F0420 C 2 F2000 C 1 M1801 C 1 M1825 C 1 2C05 INFO TECH SPECIALIST A6105g A E0123 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C M1801 C M1825 C 2C06 INFO TECH SPECIALIST E0123 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C M1801 C M1825 C 2C07 INFO TECH SPECIALIST E0123 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C M1801 C M1825 C
120
120 120
5 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Counter, Reception Info Tech, Built-In Workstation, Straight, Free Standing, 72" W Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120
120 120
5 3
1 1 1 2 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
2C08 INFO TECH SPECIALIST OFFICE A5145 A 2 A6046 C 1 E0078 C 1 F0110 C 1 F0205 C 2 F0275 C 1 F0420 C 1 F2000 C 1 F3200 C 1 M1801 C 1 M1825 C 1
120
120 120
5 3
Page 17 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. Quantity 2C09 INFO TECH SPECIALIST OFFICE A5145 A 2 A6046 C 1 E0078 C 1 F0110 C 1 F0205 C 2 F0275 C 1 F0420 C 1 F2000 C 1 F3200 C 1 M1801 C 1 M1825 C 1 2C10 INFO TECH SPECIALIST E0123 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C M1801 C M1825 C
120
120 120
5 3
1 1 1 2 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
2C11 INFO TECH SPECIALIST OFFICE A5145 A 2 A6046 C 1 E0078 C 1 F0110 C 1 F0205 C 2 F0275 C 1 F0420 C 1 F2000 C 1 F3200 C 1 M1801 C 1 M1825 C 1 2C12 INFO TECH SPECIALIST E0123 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C M1801 C M1825 C
120
120 120
5 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
Page 18 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. Quantity 2C20 CONFERENCE ROOM, LARGE F0115 C 1 F0220 C 16 F0295 C 2 F0300 C 1 F0465 C 1 F0690 C 1 F0755 C 2 F2000 C 1 F2100 C 1 F3200 C 1 F3230 A 1 M0430 C 1 M0507 C 1 M0515a C 2 M1801 C 1 M1875 C 1 2C21 CLASSROOM F0200 F0835 F2000 F2100 F3010 M0512a F3200 M0430 M0507 M0515a 2C22 CLASSROOM F0200 F0275 F0690 F0835 F2000 F2100 F3010 M0512a F3200 M0430 M0507 M0515a M1801 M1875
Description Bookcase, Open, 5 Shelf Chair, Conference Chair, Stacking Chair, Task, Swivel, With Arms Cabinet, Storage, 2 Door, 5 Shelf Workstation, Computer, Enclosed, With Lock Table, Conference, Wood Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Lectern, Mobile, With Reading Light Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Rack, Hat / Coat, Wall Mounted Recorder / Player, Digital, Video, DVD Video Teleconferencing System Television, Flat Screen 50" Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Board, Copy, Electronic Facsimile
120 120 240 120 120 120
4 2 7.7 3 5 7
C C C C A C C C C C
17 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Chair, Arm Writing Stand, Projection Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Lectern, Mobile, With Reading Light Board, Bulletin, 48 x 48 55 - 60 " LED with VGA or HDMI cabling Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Recorder / Player, Digital, Video, DVD Video Teleconferencing System Television, Flat Screen 50"
120 120 120 120 240 120
10 4 2 2 7.7 3
C C C C C C A C C C C C C C
32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Chair, Arm Writing Chair, Swivel, High Back Workstation, Computer, Enclosed, With Lock Stand, Projection Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Lectern, Mobile, With Reading Light Board, Bulletin, 48 x 48 55 - 60 " LED with VGA or HDMI cabling Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Recorder / Player, Digital, Video, DVD Video Teleconferencing System Television, Flat Screen 50" Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Board, Copy, Electronic Facsimile
120 120 120 120 240 120 120 120
10 4 2 2 7.7 3 5 7
Page 19 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. 2C23 EOC / CONFERENCE A6046 C F0115 C F0220 C F0295 C F0465 C F0690 C F0755 C F2000 C F2100 C F3200 C F3230 A M0430 C M0507 C M0515 C M0515a C M1801 C M1875 C 2C24 EOC STORAGE M2070 C 2C25 STAFF PTMS E0123 F0205 F0275 F0420 F2000 M1801 M1825 2C26 STAFF PTMS E0123 F0205 F0275 F0420 F2000 M1801 M1825 2C27 STAFF PTMS E0123 F0205 F0275 F0420 F2000 M1801 M1825
Quantity 2 1 9 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1
Description Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Bookcase, Open, 5 Shelf Chair, Conference Chair, Stacking Cabinet, Storage, 2 Door, 5 Shelf Workstation, Computer, Enclosed, With Lock Table, Conference, Wood Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Lectern, Mobile, With Reading Light Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Rack, Hat / Coat, Wall Mounted Recorder / Player, Digital, Video, DVD Video Teleconferencing System Television, Plasma Television, Flat Screen 50" Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Board, Copy, Electronic Facsimile
120 120 240 120 120 120 120
4 2 7.7 3 3 5 7
C C C C C C C
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
C C C C C C C
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
C C C C C C C
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
Page 20 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. 2C28 STAFF PTMS E0123 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C M1801 C M1825 C 2C29 NCOIC A5145 A6046 E0078 F0110 F0205 F0275 F0420 F2000 F3200 M1801 M1825 2C30 CHIEF, PTMS A5145 A6046 E0078 F0110 F0205 F0275 F0420 F2000 F3200 M1801 M1825 2C31 CHIEF PLANS A5145 A6046 E0063 F0110 F0205 F0275 F0420 F2000 F3200 M1801 M1825
Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Workstation, L-Shaped w/Peninsula, Wall Mtd, 72x72 Bookcase, 3 Shelf Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120
120 120
5 3
Page 21 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. 2C32 CHIEF, SECURITY A5145 A A6046 C E0078 C F0110 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C F3200 C M1801 C M1825 C 2C33 SIPERNET ROOM A5145 A A6046 C E0123 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C F3200 C M1801 C M1825 C 2C34 STAFF A5145 A6046 E0078a F0110 F0205 F0275 F0420 F2000 F3200 M1801 M1825
Quantity 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Workstation, Straight, Free Standing, 72" W Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120
120 120
5 3
2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
2C35 HOSP. EDU. WAITING F0305 C F0305a C F0740 C
4 2 2
Chair, Waiting Room, Single Chair, Waiting Room, Single Bariatric Table, Occasional, Lamp, 20 x 27 x 27
Page 22 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. Quantity 2C36 HOSPITAL EDU. STAFF E0123 C 1 F0205 C 1 F0275 C 1 F0420 C 1 F2000 C 1 M1801 C 1 M1825 C 1 2C37 HOSPITAL EDU. STAFF E0123 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C M1801 C M1825 C 2C38 HOSPITAL EDU. STAFF E0123 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C M1801 C M1825 C 2C39 CHIEF HOSP EDU. A5145 A A6046 C E0078 C F0110 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C F3200 C M1801 C M1825 C
120
120 120
5 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
Page 23 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. Quantity 2C40 PHOTO / ID BADGE ROOM A5145 A 2 A6046 C 1 E0078 C 1 F0110 C 1 F0205 C 2 F0275 C 1 F0420 C 1 F2000 C 1 F3200 C 1 M1801 C 1 M1825 C 1 2C41 STAFF W/SAFE & KEY CONTROL A5145 A 2 A6046 C 1 E0078 C 1 F0110 C 1 F0205 C 2 F0275 C 1 F0420 C 1 F0490 A 1 F2000 C 1 F3105 C 1 F3200 C 1 M1801 C 1 M1825 C 1
120
120 120
5 3
Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Workstation, L-Shaped w/Peninsula, Free Std, 78x72 Bookcase, 3 Shelf Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Cabinet, Keys Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Safe, F/S , Class 5 Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120
120 120
5 3
2C42 EQUIPMENT STORAGE & COPY ROOM F0102 C 1 Cabinet, Distribution, Mail F0465 C 1 Cabinet, Storage, 2 Door, 5 Shelf F0775 C 1 Table, Work, 2 Drawer F2000 C 1 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal F2550 C 1 Shredder, Paper, Heavy Duty M1810 C 1 Copier, Floor Standing, Digital M1835 C 1 Printer, Color Laser, Large M1855 C 1 Facsimile Machine M7780 C 1 Scanner, Document 2C46 WAITING ROOM A6046 C F0305 C F0740 C F2300 C F2310 A F3200 C M0430 C M0515 C
120 120 120 120 120
20 15 9 5 2
1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1
Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Chair, Waiting Room, Single Table, Occasional, Lamp, 20 x 27 x 27 Rack, Magazine, Wall Mounted Rack, Pamphlet, Wall Mounted Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Recorder / Player, Digital, Video, DVD Television, Plasma
120 120
2 3
Page 24 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. 2D43 INTERNAL AUDITOR A5145 A A6046 C E0078 C F0110 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C F3200 C M1801 C M1825 C 2D45 LEGAL OFFICE A5145 A6046 E0078a F0110 F0205 F0275 F0420 F2000 F3200 M1801 M1825
Quantity 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
CA01 PROVIDER OFFICE A5145 A A6046 C E0078 C F0115 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C F3200 C M1620 A M1801 C M1825 C
2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Workstation, L-Shaped w/Peninsula, Free Std, 78x72 Bookcase, Open, 5 Shelf Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Holder, Chart, Patient, Wall or Door Mounted Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120
120 120
5 3
Page 25 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. CA02 PROVIDER OFFICE A5145 A A6046 C E0078 C F0115 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C F3200 C M1620 A M1801 C M1825 C CA02A PROVIDER OFFICE A5145 A A6046 C E0078 C F0115 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C F3200 C M1801 C M1825 C CA03 STAFF TOILET A1066 A4995 A5075 A5080 A5109 A5145 A5200 F2000 P3000 P9050
Quantity 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1
Description Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Workstation, L-Shaped w/Peninsula, Free Std, 78x72 Bookcase, Open, 5 Shelf Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Holder, Chart, Patient, Wall or Door Mounted Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120
120 120
5 3
2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Workstation, L-Shaped w/Peninsula, Free Std, 78x72 Bookcase, Open, 5 Shelf Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120
120 120
5 3
A A C A A A A C A A
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Page 26 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. CA04 PROVIDER OFFICE A5145 A A6046 C E0078 C F0115 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C F3200 C M1620 A M1801 C M1825 C CA04A PROVIDER OFFICE A5145 A A6046 C E0078 C F0115 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C F3200 C M1801 C M1825 C CA05 STAFF TOILET A1066 A4995 A5075 A5080 A5109 A5145 A5200 F2000 P3000 P9050
Quantity 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Workstation, L-Shaped w/Peninsula, Free Std, 78x72 Bookcase, Open, 5 Shelf Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120
120 120
5 3
A A C A A A A C A A
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Page 27 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. CA06 PROVIDER OFFICE A5145 A A6046 C E0078 C F0115 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C F3200 C M1620 A M1801 C M1825 C
Quantity 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
CA18 OBSERVATION/ HYDRATION A1066 A 1 A1107 A 1 A5075 C 1 A5080 A 1 A5106 C 1 A5180 A 1 A6046 C 1 E0948 C 1 F0340 C 1 F0355 C 1 F2000 C 1 F3200 C 1 M0750 C 1 M0755 C 1 M0765 C 1 M4200 C 1 M4255 C 1 M4266 C 1 M4655 C 1 M7405 A 1 M8810 C 1 P3100 A 1
Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame Rail System, Utility, Gas and Electric Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps w/Glove Dispenser Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Cart, General Storage, Mobile, 42"H x 32"W x 22"D Stool, Self Adjusting Footstool, Straight Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Flowmeter, Air, Connect w/50 PSI Supply Flowmeter, Oxygen, Low Flow Regulator, Vacuum Otoscope/Ophthalmoscope, Wall Mounted Stand, IV, Adjustable Pump, Volumetric, Infusion, Multiple Line Stretcher, Mobile, CRS, 9 Position Light, Exam, Ceiling Mounted Stand, Mayo Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type
Yes Yes 120 1
Yes Yes
120 Yes Yes Yes
Page 28 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. CA23 EXAM RM A1066 A1132 A5075 A5080 A5106 A5145 A5180 A6046 E0222 E0948 F0205 F0280 F0340 F2000 F3200 M1620 M1801 M3072 M4200 M7401 M9025 P3100
Log. Cat. A C C A C A A C C C C C C C C A C C C C C A
Quantity 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Description Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame Rail, Accessory Mounoting, Length As Required Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps w/Glove Dispenser Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Workstation, Computer, O/H Cab, Wall Mtd, 48" W Cart, General Storage, Mobile, 42"H x 32"W x 22"D Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, Low Back Stool, Self Adjusting Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Holder, Chart, Patient, Wall or Door Mounted Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Frame, Infectious Waste Bag w/Lid Otoscope/Ophthalmoscope, Wall Mounted Light, Exam, Mobile, Spotlight, Mobile Stand Table, Examination/Treatment, With Cabinet Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type
120
120 120 115 115 Yes Yes Yes
5 1 2 5
CA27 CLEAN UTILITY E0903 C E0906 C E0912 C E0921 C E1500 C F2000 C CA31 GROUP RM A5145 A6046 E0051d-1 F0110 F0275 F0420 F2000 F3200 M1801 M1825
3 2 2 1 2 1
Locker, Supply, w/Shelves, Wall Mtd, 23"W x 20"D Locker, Supply, General, Wall Mtd, 23"W x 20"D Locker, Supply, Med Surg, Wall Mtd Transporter, Locker, Supply, 27"W x 25"D Rail, MOD, W/MNTD, HX144XD Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal
A C C C C C C C C C
3 2 1 2 3 2 3 1 3 3
Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Workstation, L-Shaped w/Peninsula, Free Std, 216X78 Bookcase, 3 Shelf Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120
120 120
5 3
Page 29 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. CA34 SOILED UTILITY A5075 C A5080 A A5106 C C04F0 A C05P0 A CS200 A CT030 A E0912 C E1500 C F2020 C M3070 C M3072 C CA38 GROUP RM A5145 A6046 E0051d-1 F0110 F0275 F0420 F2000 F3200 M1801 M1825
Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1
Description Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps w/Glove Dispenser Cabinet, U/C/B, 1 Shelf, 2 Half DR, 2 DO, 36x36x22 Cabinet, Sink, U/C/B, 2 Door, 36x48x22 Sink, SS, Single Compartment, 12x28x16 ID Countertop, High Pressure Laminate Locker, Supply, Med Surg, Wall Mtd Rail, MOD, W/MNTD, HX144XD Can Trash, 44 Gallon Hamper, Linen, Mobile, w/Lid Frame, Infectious Waste Bag w/Lid
Yes
Yes
Yes
A C C C C C C C C C
3 2 1 2 3 2 3 1 3 3
Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Workstation, L-Shaped w/Peninsula, Free Std, 216X78 Bookcase, 3 Shelf Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120
120 120
5 3
Page 30 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. CA44 TREATMENT ROOM A1132 C A5075 C A5080 A A5106 C A5145 A A5180 A A6046 C C03F0 A C03P0 A CE030 A CS150 A CT030 A E0906 C E0954 C E1500 C F0205 C F0340 C F2000 C F3200 C M0750 C M0755 C M0765 C M1100 C M1110 C M1620 A M1802 C M3070 C M3072 C M4116 C M4200 C M4255 C M4266 C M4655 C M7660 C M7710 C M7905 C M8770 C M8810 C
Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Description Rail, Accessory Mounoting, Length As Required Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps w/Glove Dispenser Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Cabinet, U/C/B, 1 Shelf, 2 Half DR, 2 DO, 36x30x22 Cabinet, Sink, U/C/B, 2 Door, 36x30x22 Cabinet, W/H, 2 SH, 2 GDO, Sloping Top, 38x30x13 Sink, SS, Single Compartment, 10x19x16 ID Countertop, High Pressure Laminate Locker, Supply, General, Wall Mtd, 23"W x 20"D Cart, Emergency, Mobile, 66"H x 52"W x 22"D Rail, MOD, W/MNTD, HX144XD Chair, Side With Arms Stool, Self Adjusting Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Flowmeter, Air, Connect w/50 PSI Supply Flowmeter, Oxygen, Low Flow Regulator, Vacuum Resuscitator, Bag-Mask, Hand Operated Resuscitator, Bag-Mask, Hand Op, Infant Holder, Chart, Patient, Wall or Door Mounted Work Station, Computer, Retractable, Wall Mounted Hamper, Linen, Mobile, w/Lid Frame, Infectious Waste Bag w/Lid Monitor, Vital Signs Otoscope/Ophthalmoscope, Wall Mounted Stand, IV, Adjustable Pump, Volumetric, Infusion, Multiple Line Stretcher, Mobile, CRS, 9 Position Defibrillator/Monitor/Recorder, Portable Electrocardiograph, 12 Lead, Portable Oximeter, Pulse Aspirator/Pressure Unit, General Purpose Stand, Mayo
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
120 120 120
5 2 1
120 120 125 120
2 2 2 3
Page 31 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. CA49 EXAM RM A1066 A1132 A5075 A5080 A5106 A5145 A5180 A6046 E0222 E0948 F0205 F0280 F0340 F2000 F3200 M1620 M1801 M3072 M4200 M7401 M9025 P3100
Log. Cat. A C C A C A A C C C C C C C C A C C C C C A
Quantity 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Description Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame Rail, Accessory Mounoting, Length As Required Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps w/Glove Dispenser Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Workstation, Computer, O/H Cab, Wall Mtd, 48" W Cart, General Storage, Mobile, 42"H x 32"W x 22"D Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, Low Back Stool, Self Adjusting Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Holder, Chart, Patient, Wall or Door Mounted Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Frame, Infectious Waste Bag w/Lid Otoscope/Ophthalmoscope, Wall Mounted Light, Exam, Mobile, Spotlight, Mobile Stand Table, Examination/Treatment, With Cabinet Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type
120
120 120 115 115 Yes Yes Yes
5 1 2 5
CA50 EXAM ROOM A1066 A1132 A5075 A5080 A5106 A5145 A5180 A6046 E0222 E0948 F0205 F0280 F0340 F2000 F3200 M1620 M1801 M3072 M4200 M7401 M9025 P3100
A C C A C A A C C C C C C C C A C C C C C A
1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame Rail, Accessory Mounoting, Length As Required Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps w/Glove Dispenser Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Workstation, Computer, O/H Cab, Wall Mtd, 48" W Cart, General Storage, Mobile, 42"H x 32"W x 22"D Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, Low Back Stool, Self Adjusting Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Holder, Chart, Patient, Wall or Door Mounted Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Frame, Infectious Waste Bag w/Lid Otoscope/Ophthalmoscope, Wall Mounted Light, Exam, Mobile, Spotlight, Mobile Stand Table, Examination/Treatment, With Cabinet Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type
120
120 120 115 115 Yes Yes Yes
5 1 2 5
Page 32 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. Quantity CA59 ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICES A5145 A 2 A6046 C 1 E0078a C 1 F0110 C 1 F0205 C 2 F0275 C 1 F0420 C 1 F2000 C 1 F3200 C 1 M1801 C 1 M1825 C 1 CA60 ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICES A5145 A A6046 C E0078 C F0110 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C F3200 C M1801 C M1825 C CA62 STAFF LOUNGE A1080 A A5075 C A5080 A A5145 A A5210 A A5220 A C02C0 A C02D0 A C04P0 A CB020 A CS010 A CT030 A F0225 C F0795 C F2015 C F3025 A F3050 A F3200 C K1552 C K4665 C M0500 C R7250 C
120
120 120
5 3
2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
120 120 120 120
15 15 1 15
Page 33 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. CA63 CONFERENCE A6046 C F0115 C F0220 C F0300 C F0465 C F0690 C F0755 C F2000 C F2100 C F3200 C M0430 C M0507 C M0515a C M1801 C CA64 NURSE OFFICE A5145 A6046 E0078 F0110 F0205 F0275 F0420 F2000 F3200 M1801 M1825
Quantity 2 1 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Description Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Bookcase, Open, 5 Shelf Chair, Conference Chair, Task, Swivel, With Arms Cabinet, Storage, 2 Door, 5 Shelf Workstation, Computer, Enclosed, With Lock Table, Conference, Wood Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Lectern, Mobile, With Reading Light Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Recorder / Player, Digital, Video, DVD Video Teleconferencing System Television, Flat Screen 50" Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor
120 120 240 120 120
4 2 7.7 3 5
2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
CA65 PATIENT TOILET A1066 A A4995 A A5075 C A5080 A A5109 A A5145 A A5200 A F2000 C P3000 A P9050 A CA71 WAITING AREA A6046 C F0305 C F0305a C F0740 C F2300 C F2310 A F3200 C M0430 C M0515 C
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
4 20 1 2 1 1 1 1 1
120 120
2 3
Page 34 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. Quantity CA71A PATIENT EDUCATION KIOSK A1010 A 1 CA71B PATIENT CHECK-IN KIOSK A1010 A
Description Telecommunication Outlet
CA73 ADULT SCREENING ALCOVE A1132 C 1 A5106 C 1 A5145 A 1 E0222 C 1 F0205 C 1 F0300 C 1 F2000 C 1 F3200 C 1 M1620 A 1 M1801 C 1 M4040 C 1 M4116 C 1
Rail, Accessory Mounoting, Length As Required Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps w/Glove Dispenser Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Workstation, Computer, O/H Cab, Wall Mtd, 48" W Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Task, Swivel, With Arms Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Holder, Chart, Patient, Wall or Door Mounted Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Scale, Weighting, 300 Pound Capacity Monitor, Vital Signs
120
120 120
5 2
CA74 ISOLATION EXAM, NEGATIVE PRESSURE A1066 A 1 Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame A1132 C 2 Rail, Accessory Mounoting, Length As Required A5075 C 1 Dispenser, Soap, Disposable A5080 A 1 Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted A5106 C 1 Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps w/Glove Dispenser A5145 A 2 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted A5180 A 1 Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain E0222 C 1 Workstation, Computer, O/H Cab, Wall Mtd, 48" W E0948 C 1 Cart, General Storage, Mobile, 42"H x 32"W x 22"D F0205 C 1 Chair, Side With Arms F0280 C 1 Chair, Swivel, Low Back F0340 C 1 Stool, Self Adjusting F2000 C 2 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal F3200 C 1 Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter M1620 A 1 Holder, Chart, Patient, Wall or Door Mounted M1801 C 1 Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor M3072 C 1 Frame, Infectious Waste Bag w/Lid M4200 C 1 Otoscope/Ophthalmoscope, Wall Mounted M7401 C 1 Light, Exam, Mobile, Spotlight, Mobile Stand M9025 C 1 Table, Examination/Treatment, With Cabinet P3100 A 1 Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type
120
120 120 115 115 Yes Yes Yes
5 1 2 5
Page 35 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. CA74A ISOLATION TOILET A1066 A A4995 A A5075 C A5080 A A5109 A A5145 A A5200 A F2000 C P3000 A P9050 A CB06 COPY/STORAGE F0102 C F0465 C F0775 C F2000 C F2550 C M1810 C M1835 C M1855 C M7780 C CB20 NURSE WORK E0051 F0275 F0420 F2000 F3200 M1801 M1840 CB25 NURSE WORK E0051 F0275 F0420 F2000 F3200 M1801 M1840 CB38 Room P3000 CB44 Room P3000
Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Description Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame Table, Diaper Changing, Wall Mounted Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Grab Bar, 1-1/4" Dia, SS, 2 Wall, W/C Accessible Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Dispenser, Toilet Tissue, SS, 2-Roll, Surface Mntd Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Lavatory, Vitreous China, Straight Back Toilet, Wall Hung, Siphon Jet_ADA
Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120 120 120 120 120
20 15 9 5 2
C C C C C C C
3 3 1 3 1 3 2
Workstation, Corner Work Surface, Wall Mtd, 72x48 Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer/Copier/Fax Combination
120
120 120
5 9
C C C C C C C
3 3 1 3 1 3 2
Workstation, Corner Work Surface, Wall Mtd, 72x48 Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer/Copier/Fax Combination
120
120 120
5 9
Lavatory, Vitreous China, Straight Back
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lavatory, Vitreous China, Straight Back
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 36 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. CB45 STRESS A1066 A5075 A5080 A5145 E0222 E0954 F0205 F0280 F2000 F3200 M0720 M1100 M1620 M1801 M7660 M7710 M8330 M8770 P3100 X2105 X4112 CB46 EKG A1066 A1132 A5075 A5080 A5106 A5145 A5180 E0912 E1500 F2000 F3200 M1620 M3070 M3072 M4655 M7710 P3100
Log. Cat. A C A A C C C C C C C C A C C C C C A C F
Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Description Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Workstation, Computer, O/H Cab, Wall Mtd, 48" W Cart, Emergency, Mobile, 66"H x 52"W x 22"D Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, Low Back Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Analyzer, Pulmonary Function, w/Computer Resuscitator, Bag-Mask, Hand Operated Holder, Chart, Patient, Wall or Door Mounted Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Defibrillator/Monitor/Recorder, Portable Electrocardiograph, 12 Lead, Portable Treadmill, Electric Aspirator/Pressure Unit, General Purpose Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type Scanner, Ultrasound, Cardiac (Echo) Console, PACS, Remote View, 1k X 1k, 2 Monitors
120
110 120 120 120 110 120 Yes Yes Yes 120 120
3 5 2 2 20 3 12 9
A C C A C A A C C C C A C C C C A
1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame Rail, Accessory Mounoting, Length As Required Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps w/Glove Dispenser Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain Locker, Supply, Med Surg, Wall Mtd Rail, MOD, W/MNTD, HX144XD Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Holder, Chart, Patient, Wall or Door Mounted Hamper, Linen, Mobile, w/Lid Frame, Infectious Waste Bag w/Lid Stretcher, Mobile, CRS, 9 Position Electrocardiograph, 12 Lead, Portable Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type
120 Yes Yes Yes
Page 37 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. CB47 RT TECH & PULMO A1066 A A5075 C A5080 A E0123 C E0222 C E0851 C F0205 C F0275 C F0280 C F0420 C F2000 C F3200 C M0715 C M0720 C M1801 C M1840 C M8330 C P3000 A CB48 (2) WORKSTATIONS E0123 C E0851 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C F3200 C M1801 C M1840 C CB49 HOLT A1132 A5145 A5180 E0222 E0948 F0205 F0280 F2000 F3200 M1801 M4200 M4655 M7770
Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1
Description Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Workstation, Straight, Free Standing, 72" W Workstation, Computer, O/H Cab, Wall Mtd, 48" W Display, Tackboard & Markerboard, Wall Mtd Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, High Back Chair, Swivel, Low Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Pulmonary Function Analyzer, Portable Analyzer, Pulmonary Function, w/Computer Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer/Copier/Fax Combination Treadmill, Electric Lavatory, Vitreous China, Straight Back
120 120
2 1
120 110 120 120 110 Yes Yes Yes
7 3 5 9 20
2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2
Workstation, Straight, Free Standing, 72" W Display, Tackboard & Markerboard, Wall Mtd Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer/Copier/Fax Combination
120
120 120
5 9
C A A C C C C C C C C C C
2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1
Rail, Accessory Mounoting, Length As Required Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain Workstation, Computer, O/H Cab, Wall Mtd, 48" W Cart, General Storage, Mobile, 42"H x 32"W x 22"D Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, Low Back Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Otoscope/Ophthalmoscope, Wall Mounted Stretcher, Mobile, CRS, 9 Position Computer, Holter Monitor Analysis System
120
120 120 120
5 1 13
Page 38 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. CB55 STAFF TOILET A1066 A A5075 C A5080 A A5109 A A5200 A P3000 A P9050 A
Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Description Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Grab Bar, 1-1/4" Dia, SS, 2 Wall, W/C Accessible Dispenser, Toilet Tissue, SS, 2-Roll, Surface Mntd Lavatory, Vitreous China, Straight Back Toilet, Wall Hung, Siphon Jet_ADA
Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
CC45 ADULT SCREENING ALCOVE A1132 C 1 A5106 C 1 A5145 A 1 E0222 C 1 F0205 C 1 F0300 C 1 F2000 C 1 F3200 C 1 M1620 A 1 M1801 C 1 M4040 C 1 M4116 C 1 CC46 ALLERGY/IMMUN STOR. A1066 A A5075 C A5080 A F2000 C F3200 C M2055 C P3100 A R7250 C CC47 ALLERGY EXAM RM. A1132 C A5106 C A5180 A E0948 C F0340 C F0355 C F2000 C M0750 C M0755 C M0765 C M1620 A M4200 C M4255 C M4266 C M4655 C M7405 A
Rail, Accessory Mounoting, Length As Required Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps w/Glove Dispenser Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Workstation, Computer, O/H Cab, Wall Mtd, 48" W Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Task, Swivel, With Arms Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Holder, Chart, Patient, Wall or Door Mounted Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Scale, Weighting, 300 Pound Capacity Monitor, Vital Signs
120
120 120
5 2
2 2 2 2 1 3 2 2
Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Shelving, Storage, Wire, CRS, w/Adjustable Shelves Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type Refrigerator/Freezer, 20 Cubic Feet
Yes
Yes
Yes 120 15
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Rail, Accessory Mounoting, Length As Required Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps w/Glove Dispenser Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain Cart, General Storage, Mobile, 42"H x 32"W x 22"D Stool, Self Adjusting Footstool, Straight Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Flowmeter, Air, Connect w/50 PSI Supply Flowmeter, Oxygen, Low Flow Regulator, Vacuum Holder, Chart, Patient, Wall or Door Mounted Otoscope/Ophthalmoscope, Wall Mounted Stand, IV, Adjustable Pump, Volumetric, Infusion, Multiple Line Stretcher, Mobile, CRS, 9 Position Light, Exam, Ceiling Mounted
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
120
120
Page 39 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. CC48 IMMUNIZATION A1132 C A5106 C A5180 A A6046 C E0948 C F0340 C F0355 C F2000 C M0750 C M0755 C M0765 C M1620 A M4200 C M4255 C M4266 C M4655 C M7405 A CC49 EXAM ROOM A1132 A5106 A5180 E0948 F0340 F0355 F2000 M0750 M0755 M0765 M1620 M4200 M4255 M4266 M4655
Quantity 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Description Rail, Accessory Mounoting, Length As Required Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps w/Glove Dispenser Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Cart, General Storage, Mobile, 42"H x 32"W x 22"D Stool, Self Adjusting Footstool, Straight Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Flowmeter, Air, Connect w/50 PSI Supply Flowmeter, Oxygen, Low Flow Regulator, Vacuum Holder, Chart, Patient, Wall or Door Mounted Otoscope/Ophthalmoscope, Wall Mounted Stand, IV, Adjustable Pump, Volumetric, Infusion, Multiple Line Stretcher, Mobile, CRS, 9 Position Light, Exam, Ceiling Mounted
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
120
120
C C A C C C C C C C A C C C C
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Rail, Accessory Mounoting, Length As Required Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps w/Glove Dispenser Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain Cart, General Storage, Mobile, 42"H x 32"W x 22"D Stool, Self Adjusting Footstool, Straight Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Flowmeter, Air, Connect w/50 PSI Supply Flowmeter, Oxygen, Low Flow Regulator, Vacuum Holder, Chart, Patient, Wall or Door Mounted Otoscope/Ophthalmoscope, Wall Mounted Stand, IV, Adjustable Pump, Volumetric, Infusion, Multiple Line Stretcher, Mobile, CRS, 9 Position
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
120
CC50 RECEPTION/ CONTROL OUTPATIENT A6105b A 1 Counter, Reception Control, Built-In C03P0 A 1 Cabinet, Sink, U/C/B, 2 Door, 36x30x22 C04E0 A 1 Cabinet, U/C/B, 1 Shelf, 1 Drawer, 2 DO, 36x36x22 C0039 A 1 Rail, Apron, 4x48x1 CT030 A 2 Countertop, High Pressure Laminate F0275 C 3 Chair, Swivel, High Back F0420 C 3 Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height F2000 C 3 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal F2540 C 1 Shredder, Paper, Security F3200 C 1 Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter M1801 C 3 Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor M1825 C 2 Printer, Computer M1840 C 1 Printer/Copier/Fax Combination
120 120 120 120
7 5 3 9
Page 40 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. Quantity CC51 ALLERGY/IMMUN RECEPTION A6105b A 1 C03F0 A 1 C04E0 A 1 C0039 A 1 CT030 A 2 F0275 C 3 F0420 C 3 F2000 C 3 F2540 C 1 F3200 C 1 M1801 C 3 M1825 C 2 M1840 C 1 CC52 ALLERGY/IMMUN WAITING A6046 C 3 F0305 C 15 F0305a C 1 F0740 C 3 F2300 C 1 F2310 A 1 F3200 C 1 M0430 C 1 M0515 C 1 CC71 STAFF LOUNGE A1080 A A5075 C A5080 A A5145 A A5210 A A5220 A C02C0 A C02D0 A C04P0 A CB020 A CS010 A CT030 A F0225 C F0795 C F2015 C F3025 A F3050 A F3200 C K1552 C K4665 C M0500 C R7250 C
Description Counter, Reception Control, Built-In Cabinet, U/C/B, 1 Shelf, 2 Half DR, 2 DO, 36x30x22 Cabinet, U/C/B, 1 Shelf, 1 Drawer, 2 DO, 36x36x22 Rail, Apron, 4x48x1 Countertop, High Pressure Laminate Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Shredder, Paper, Security Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer Printer/Copier/Fax Combination
120 120 120 120
7 5 3 9
120 120
2 3
1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
120 120 120 120
15 15 1 15
Page 41 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. Quantity Description CC72 STAFF LOCKER / CHANGING ROOM A1030 C 10 Locker, 2 Person, Over/Under A1080 A 1 Mirror, Posture, Wall Mounted A5025 C 1 Bench, Locker Room, Portable F2000 C 1 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal F3200 C 1 Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter CC72A STAFF TOILET A1066 A5075 A5080 A5109 A5145 A5200 F2000 P3000 P9050
A C A A A A C A A
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Grab Bar, 1-1/4" Dia, SS, 2 Wall, W/C Accessible Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Dispenser, Toilet Tissue, SS, 2-Roll, Surface Mntd Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Lavatory, Vitreous China, Straight Back Toilet, Wall Hung, Siphon Jet_ADA
Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
CC73 STORAGE / FILES ROOM, SHELVING M2055 C 4 Shelving, Storage, Wire, CRS, w/Adjustable Shelves CD15 ADULT SCREENING ALCOVE A1132 C 1 A5106 C 1 A5145 A 1 E0222 C 1 F0205 C 1 F0300 C 1 F2000 C 1 F3200 C 1 M1620 A 1 M1801 C 1 M4040 C 1 M4100 C 1 M4116 C 1 CD44 CHIEF. OFC. A5145 A6046 E0051 F0115 F0205 F0275 F0420 F2000 F3200 M1620 M1801 M1825
Rail, Accessory Mounoting, Length As Required Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps w/Glove Dispenser Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Workstation, Computer, O/H Cab, Wall Mtd, 48" W Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Task, Swivel, With Arms Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Holder, Chart, Patient, Wall or Door Mounted Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Scale, Weighting, 300 Pound Capacity Sphygmomanometer, Aneroid, Wall Mounted Monitor, Vital Signs
120
120 120
5 2
A C C C C C C C C A C C
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Workstation, Corner Work Surface, Wall Mtd, 72x48 Bookcase, Open, 5 Shelf Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Holder, Chart, Patient, Wall or Door Mounted Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120
120 120
5 3
Page 42 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. CD45 NCO. OFC. A5145 A A6046 C E0051 C F0110 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C F3200 C M1801 C M1825 C CD46 NURSE E0123 E0851 F0275 F0420 F2000 M1801 M1825 CD47 NURSE E0123 F0275 F0420 F2000 M1801 M1825 CD48 NURSE E0123 E0851 F0275 F0420 F2000 F3200 M1801 M1825 CD49 PHARM D E0123 E0851 F0275 F0420 F2000 M1801 M1825
Quantity 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Description Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Workstation, Corner Work Surface, Wall Mtd, 72x48 Bookcase, 3 Shelf Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120
120 120
5 3
C C C C C C C
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Workstation, Straight, Free Standing, 72" W Display, Tackboard & Markerboard, Wall Mtd Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120
120 120
5 3
C C C C C C
1 1 1 1 1 1
Workstation, Straight, Free Standing, 72" W Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120
120 120
5 3
C C C C C C C C
1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
Workstation, Straight, Free Standing, 72" W Display, Tackboard & Markerboard, Wall Mtd Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120
120 120
5 3
C C C C C C C
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Workstation, Straight, Free Standing, 72" W Display, Tackboard & Markerboard, Wall Mtd Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120
120 120
5 3
Page 43 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. CD50 PHARM D E0123 F0275 F0420 F2000 M1801 M1825 CD51 PHARM D E0123 E0851 F0275 F0420 F2000 F3200 M1801 M1825
Log. Cat. C C C C C C
Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1
Description Workstation, Straight, Free Standing, 72" W Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120
120 120
5 3
C C C C C C C C
1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
Workstation, Straight, Free Standing, 72" W Display, Tackboard & Markerboard, Wall Mtd Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120
120 120
5 3
CD52 PROV. OFC. A5145 A6046 E0078a F0115 F0205 F0275 F0420 F2000 F3200 M1620 M1801 M1825 CD53 NCOIC. OFC. A5145 A6046 E0078 F0110 F0205 F0275 F0420 F2000 F3200 M1801 M1825 CD63 STOR. M2055
A C C C C C C C C A C C
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Workstation, L-Shaped w/Peninsula, Free Std, 72x72 Bookcase, Open, 5 Shelf Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Holder, Chart, Patient, Wall or Door Mounted Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120
120 120
5 3
2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
Page 44 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. Quantity CD70 UROLOGY PROCEDURE A1132 C 1 A5075 C 1 A5080 A 1 A5106 C 1 A5180 A 1 C02Q0 A 1 C03L0 A 1 CE030 A 1 CS150 A 1 CT030 A 1 E0903 C 1 E1500 C 1 F0205 C 1 F0340 C 1 F0355 C 1 F3200 C 1 M1802 C 1 M3072 C 1 M4100 C 1 M4200 C 1 M4255 C 1 M4800 C 1 M4801 C 1 M7401 C 1 M8810 C 1 M9100 C 1 X3930 C 1 CD71 PATIENT TOILET A1066 A A5075 C A5080 A A5109 A A5145 A A5200 A F2000 C P3000 A P9050 A CE02 WAITING AREA F0305 C F0305a C F0740 C F2300 C F2310 A F3200 C M0430 C M0515 C
Description Rail, Accessory Mounoting, Length As Required Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps w/Glove Dispenser Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain Cabinet, Sink, U/C/B,1 Door, 36x24x22 Cabinet, U/C/B, 1 Drawer, 3 Half DR, 1 DO, 30" W Cabinet, W/H, 2 SH, 2 GDO, Sloping Top, 38x30x13 Sink, SS, Single Compartment, 10x19x16 ID Countertop, High Pressure Laminate Locker, Supply, w/Shelves, Wall Mtd, 23"W x 20"D Rail, MOD, W/MNTD, HX144XD Chair, Side With Arms Stool, Self Adjusting Footstool, Straight Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Work Station, Computer, Retractable, Wall Mounted Frame, Infectious Waste Bag w/Lid Sphygmomanometer, Aneroid, Wall Mounted Otoscope/Ophthalmoscope, Wall Mounted Stand, IV, Adjustable Urodynamic Measurement System w/Video Commode Chair Light, Exam, Mobile, Spotlight, Mobile Stand Stand, Mayo Table, Procedure, Urological Illuminator, Film, Double, Wall Mounted, 20x29x6
Yes
Yes
Yes
120 120 120 115 120 220
5 1 15 2 12 2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Grab Bar, 1-1/4" Dia, SS, 2 Wall, W/C Accessible Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Dispenser, Toilet Tissue, SS, 2-Roll, Surface Mntd Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Lavatory, Vitreous China, Straight Back Toilet, Wall Hung, Siphon Jet_ADA
Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
49 2 2 1 1 1 1 1
Chair, Waiting Room, Single Chair, Waiting Room, Single Bariatric Table, Occasional, Lamp, 20 x 27 x 27 Rack, Magazine, Wall Mounted Rack, Pamphlet, Wall Mounted Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Recorder / Player, Digital, Video, DVD Television, Plasma
120 120
2 3
Page 45 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. Quantity CE03 DISPENSING AND STORAGE A1095 C 1 A5075 C 1 A5080 A 1 A5106 C 1 E0675b C 6 E0675b1 C 1 E0675d C 1 E0675e C 1 E0675f C 1 E0675g C 1 E0675h C 1 E0675i C 1 E0675j C 1 F0230 C 7 F0280 C 4 F2000 C 17 F2020 C 2 L1950 A 1 M1801 C 11 M1825 C 14 M1830 C 7 M1850 C 1 M1855 C 1 M3072 C 1 M7260 C 20 M7265 C 3 P3000 A 1 R6200 C 2 CE04 DEDICATED JANITORS' CLOSET A5135 A 1 F0500 C 1 F0505 C 1 P4700 A 1
Description Message Board, Digital Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps w/Glove Dispenser Pharmacy Dispensing & Storage Medium Volume Pharmacy Dispensing & Storage Medium Volume_ADA Accessible Pharmacy Dispensing & Storage Medium Volume Pharmacy Dispensing & Storage Medium Volume Pharmacy Dispensing & Storage Medium Volume Pharmacy Dispensing & Storage Medium Volume Pharmacy Dispensing & Storage Medium Volume Pharmacy Dispensing & Storage Medium Volume Pharmacy Dispensing & Storage Medium Volume Chair, Drafting, Rotary Chair, Swivel, Low Back Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Can Trash, 44 Gallon Demineralizer, Water, Floor Mounted,1/2-3 GPM Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer Printer, Label, Pharmacy Typewriter, Electric Facsimile Machine Frame, Infectious Waste Bag w/Lid Counter/Dispenser, Pill/Tablet Counter, Pill/Tablet, Automated, Counter Mounted Lavatory, Vitreous China, Straight Back Refrigerator, U/C, or F/S, 5 Cu Ft
120
120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120 120 120 115 120 120 115 115 Yes Yes Yes 120
12 5 3 5 1 5 15 1 15
Shelf, Utility W/ Mop/Broom Holders, SS, Surf Mntd Cart, Janitor's Bucket, Mop, With Wringer, 26 Quart Sink, Mop, Molded Stone, 10x36x24
Yes
Yes
Yes
CE06 ASSISTANT CHIEF / SUPERVISORY PHARMACIST A5145 A 2 Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted A6046 C 1 Artwork, Decorative, With Frame E0078a C 1 Workstation, L-Shaped w/Peninsula, Free Std, 72x72 F0110 C 1 Bookcase, 3 Shelf F0205 C 2 Chair, Side With Arms F0275 C 1 Chair, Swivel, High Back F0420 C 1 Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height F2000 C 1 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal F3200 C 1 Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter M1801 C 1 Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor M1825 C 1 Printer, Computer
120
120 120
5 3
Page 46 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. Quantity CE07 SENIOR PHARMACY TECH A5145 A 2 A6046 C 1 E0078a C 1 F0110 C 1 F0205 C 2 F0275 C 1 F0420 C 1 F2000 C 1 F3200 C 1 M1801 C 1 M1825 C 1 CE11 CLINICAL PHARMACIST E0051 C F0205 C F0275 C F2000 C M1801 C M1825 C CE12 CLINICAL PHARMACIST E0051 C F0205 C F0275 C F2000 C M1801 C M1825 C
120
120 120
5 3
1 1 1 1 1 1
Workstation, Corner Work Surface, Wall Mtd, 72x48 Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, High Back Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120
120 120
5 3
1 1 1 1 1 1
Workstation, Corner Work Surface, Wall Mtd, 72x48 Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, High Back Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120
120 120
5 3
CE13 CLINICAL PHARMACIST TECH E0123 C 1 F0205 C 1 F0275 C 1 F0420 C 1 F2000 C 1 M1801 C 1 M1825 C 1 CE14 PHARMACIST WORK AREA E0051 C E0851 C F0205 C F0275 C F2000 C M1801 C M1840 C
120
120 120
5 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Workstation, Corner Work Surface, Wall Mtd, 72x48 Display, Tackboard & Markerboard, Wall Mtd Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, High Back Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer/Copier/Fax Combination
120
120 120
5 9
Page 47 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. Quantity CE15 PHARMACIST WORK AREA E0051 C 1 E0851 C 1 F0205 C 1 F0275 C 1 F2000 C 1 M1801 C 1 M1840 C 1 CE16 PHARMACIST WORK AREA E0051 C E0851 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C F3200 C M1801 C M1840 C CE17 STAFF TOILET A1066 A4995 A5075 A5080 A5109 A5145 A5200 F2000 P3000 P9050
Description Workstation, Corner Work Surface, Wall Mtd, 72x48 Display, Tackboard & Markerboard, Wall Mtd Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, High Back Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer/Copier/Fax Combination
120
120 120
5 9
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Workstation, Corner Work Surface, Wall Mtd, 72x48 Display, Tackboard & Markerboard, Wall Mtd Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer/Copier/Fax Combination
120
120 120
5 9
A A C A A A A C A A
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
CE18 FEMALE TOILET A1070 A A4995 A A5075 C A5080 A A5109 A A5145 A A5200 A C0041 A CT030 A F2015 C P3070 A P9050 A P9050 A
2 1 2 2 1 3 3 1 1 1 2 2 1
Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame, 36 x Required Table, Diaper Changing, Wall Mounted Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Grab Bar, 1-1/4" Dia, SS, 2 Wall, W/C Accessible Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Dispenser, Toilet Tissue, SS, 2-Roll, Surface Mntd Rail, Apron, 4x60x1 Countertop, High Pressure Laminate Basket, Wastepaper, Metal/Plastic, 2 Swinging Doors Lavatory, Vitreous China, Under or Counter Top Mtd Toilet, Wall Hung, Siphon Jet Toilet, Wall Hung, Siphon Jet, ADA
Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Page 48 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. CF02 INSURANCE CLERK A5145 A A6046 C E0063 C F0110 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C F3200 C M1801 C M1825 C CF03 INSURANCE CLERK A5145 A A6046 C E0063 C F0110 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C F3200 C M1801 C M1825 C CF04 INSURANCE CLERK A5145 A A6046 C E0063 C F0110 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C F3200 C M1801 C M1825 C CF05 BILLING CLERK A5145 A6046 E0063 F0110 F0205 F0275 F0420 F2000 F3200 M1801 M1825
Quantity 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Description Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Workstation, L-Shaped w/Peninsula, Wall Mtd, 72x72 Bookcase, 3 Shelf Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120
120 120
5 3
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
Page 49 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. Quantity CF06 SUPPLY / STORAGE ROOM M2055 C 3 CF07 CHIEF OFFICE A5145 A6046 E0078 F0110 F0205 F0275 F0420 F2000 F3200 M1801 M1825
Description Shelving, Storage, Wire, CRS, w/Adjustable Shelves
2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
CF08 FINANCIAL CLERK E0123 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C M1801 C M1825 C CF09 INSURANCE CLERK A5145 A A6046 C E0078 C F0110 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C F3200 C M1801 C M1825 C CF10 INSURANCE CLERK A5145 A A6046 C E0078 C F0110 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C F3200 C M1801 C M1825 C
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
Page 50 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. Quantity CF11 WORK AREA, TREASURER A6035 A 1 A6105t A 1 C0039 A 1 CT030 A 1 E0123 C 1 F0230 C 1 F0275 C 1 F2000 C 1 F3200 C 1 M1801 C 1 M1805 C 1 M1825 C 1 CF12 BUSINESS OFFICE WAITING AREA A6046 C 1 F0305 C 4 F0740 C 2 F2300 C 1 F2310 A 1 F3200 C 1 M0430 C 1 M0515 C 1 CF15 MALE TOILET A1070 A4995 A5075 A5080 A5109 A5145 A5200 C0041 CT030 F2015 P3070 P8150 P9050 P9050
Description Repository, Night, With Safe Counter, Reception Control, Built-In Rail, Apron, 4x48x1 Countertop, High Pressure Laminate Workstation, Straight, Free Standing, 72" W Chair, Drafting, Rotary Chair, Swivel, High Back Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Copier, Desk Top Printer, Computer
120
120 120 120
5 8 3
Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Chair, Waiting Room, Single Table, Occasional, Lamp, 20 x 27 x 27 Rack, Magazine, Wall Mounted Rack, Pamphlet, Wall Mounted Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Recorder / Player, Digital, Video, DVD Television, Plasma
120 120
2 3
A A C A A A A A A C A A A A
2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1
Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame, 36 x Required Table, Diaper Changing, Wall Mounted Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Grab Bar, 1-1/4" Dia, SS, 2 Wall, W/C Accessible Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Dispenser, Toilet Tissue, SS, 2-Roll, Surface Mntd Rail, Apron, 4x60x1 Countertop, High Pressure Laminate Basket, Wastepaper, Metal/Plastic, 2 Swinging Doors Lavatory, Vitreous China, Under or Counter Top Mtd Uniral, Wall Hung, ADA Toilet, Wall Hung, Siphon Jet Toilet, Wall Hung, Siphon Jet, ADA
Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Page 51 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. CF22 OFFICE A5145 A6046 E0078a F0110 F0205 F0275 F0420 F2000 F3200 M1801 M1825 CF23 OFFICE A5145 A6046 E0078a F0110 F0205 F0275 F0420 F2000 F3200 M1801 M1825 CF24 OFFICE A5145 A6046 E0078a F0110 F0205 F0275 F0420 F2000 F3200 M1801 M1825
Log. Cat. A C C C C C C C C C C
Quantity 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
CF25 WAITING AREA A6046 C F0305 C F0305a C F0740 C F2300 C F2310 A F3200 C M0430 C M0515 C
3 7 1 2 1 1 1 1 1
120 120
2 3
Page 52 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. CF26 EXAM RM A1132 A5075 A5080 A5106 A5145 A5180 A6046 E0222 E0948 F0205 F0280 F0340 F2000 F3200 M1620 M1801 M3072 M4200 M7401 M9025 P3100 CF27 EXAM RM A1066 A1132 A5075 A5080 A5106 A5145 A5180 A6046 E0222 E0948 F0205 F0280 F0340 F2000 F3200 M1620 M1801 M3072 M4200 M7401 M9025 P3100
Log. Cat. C C A C A A C C C C C C C C A C C C C C A
Quantity 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Description Rail, Accessory Mounoting, Length As Required Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps w/Glove Dispenser Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Workstation, Computer, O/H Cab, Wall Mtd, 48" W Cart, General Storage, Mobile, 42"H x 32"W x 22"D Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, Low Back Stool, Self Adjusting Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Holder, Chart, Patient, Wall or Door Mounted Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Frame, Infectious Waste Bag w/Lid Otoscope/Ophthalmoscope, Wall Mounted Light, Exam, Mobile, Spotlight, Mobile Stand Table, Examination/Treatment, With Cabinet Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type
120
120 120 115 115 Yes Yes Yes
5 1 2 5
A C C A C A A C C C C C C C C A C C C C C A
1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame Rail, Accessory Mounoting, Length As Required Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps w/Glove Dispenser Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Workstation, Computer, O/H Cab, Wall Mtd, 48" W Cart, General Storage, Mobile, 42"H x 32"W x 22"D Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, Low Back Stool, Self Adjusting Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Holder, Chart, Patient, Wall or Door Mounted Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Frame, Infectious Waste Bag w/Lid Otoscope/Ophthalmoscope, Wall Mounted Light, Exam, Mobile, Spotlight, Mobile Stand Table, Examination/Treatment, With Cabinet Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type
120
120 120 115 115 Yes Yes Yes
5 1 2 5
Page 53 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. CF28 EXAM RM A1132 A5080 A5106 A5145 A5180 A6046 E0222 E0948 F0205 F0280 F0340 F2000 F3200 M1620 M1801 M3072 M4200 M7401 M9025 P3100 CF29 STORAGE M2055
Log. Cat. C A C A A C C C C C C C C A C C C C C A
Quantity 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Description Rail, Accessory Mounoting, Length As Required Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Waste Disposal Unit, Sharps w/Glove Dispenser Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Track, Cubicle, Surface Mounted, With Curtain Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Workstation, Computer, O/H Cab, Wall Mtd, 48" W Cart, General Storage, Mobile, 42"H x 32"W x 22"D Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, Low Back Stool, Self Adjusting Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Holder, Chart, Patient, Wall or Door Mounted Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Frame, Infectious Waste Bag w/Lid Otoscope/Ophthalmoscope, Wall Mounted Light, Exam, Mobile, Spotlight, Mobile Stand Table, Examination/Treatment, With Cabinet Lavatory, Vitreous China, Slab Type
120
120 120 115 115 Yes Yes Yes
5 1 2 5
CF30 STAFF TOILET A1066 A4995 A5075 A5080 A5109 A5145 A5200 F2000 P3000 P9050
A A C A A A A C A A
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Page 54 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. CF31 STAFF LOUNGE A1080 A A5075 C A5080 A A5145 A A5210 A A5220 A C02C0 A C02D0 A C04P0 A CB020 A CS010 A CT030 A F0225 C F0795 C F2015 C F3025 A F3050 A F3200 C K1552 C M0500 C R7250 C CF33 OFFICE E0051 F0110 F0205 F0275 F0420 F2000 M1801 M1825
Quantity 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Description Mirror, Posture, Wall Mounted Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Bracket, Television, Wall Mounted, w/Adjust Arm Bracket, Television, Wall Backing Cabinet, U/C/B, 1 Shelf, 1 Drawer, 1 DO, 34x24x22 ADA Cabinet, U/C/B, 4 Drawer, 34x24x22 ADA Cabinet, Sink, U/C/B, 2 Door, 34x36x22 ADA Cabinet, W/H, 2 Shelf, 1 DO, Sloping Top, 38x24x13 Sink, SS, Single Compartment, 7.5x12x12 ID ADA Countertop, High Pressure Laminate ADA Chair, Dining Room Table, Dining Basket, Wastepaper, Metal/Plastic, 2 Swinging Doors Board, Bulletin, Wood Framed, 36 x 24 Whiteboard, Dry Erase Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Brewer, Coffee, Auto, Elect, 3 Burner, Front/Back Television, Color, 20" Diagonal Refrigerator/Freezer, 20 Cubic Feet
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
120 120 120
15 1 15
C C C C C C C C
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Workstation, Corner Work Surface, Wall Mtd, 72x48 Bookcase, 3 Shelf Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120
120 120
5 3
CF34 PAD CONFERENCE F0115 C F0220 C F0295 C F0300 C F0465 C F0690 C F0755 C F2000 C F2100 C F3200 C F3230 A M0430 C M0507 C M0515a C M1801 C M1875 C
1 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Bookcase, Open, 5 Shelf Chair, Conference Chair, Stacking Chair, Task, Swivel, With Arms Cabinet, Storage, 2 Door, 5 Shelf Workstation, Computer, Enclosed, With Lock Table, Conference, Wood Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Lectern, Mobile, With Reading Light Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Rack, Hat / Coat, Wall Mounted Recorder / Player, Digital, Video, DVD Video Teleconferencing System Television, Flat Screen 50" Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Board, Copy, Electronic Facsimile
120 120 240 120 120 120
4 2 7.7 3 5 7
Page 55 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. IG04 OPEN OFFICE E0063 C F0205 C F0275 C F2000 C F3200 C M1801 C M1825 C
Quantity 4 4 4 4 2 4 4
Description Workstation, L-Shaped w/Peninsula, Wall Mtd, 72x72 Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, High Back Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120
120 120
5 3
LC02 FORMS/LITERATURE STORAGE M2055 C 4 LC03 CLASSROOM STORAGE M2055 C LC04 DEMO KITCHEN A5075 C A5080 A C02C0 A C02D0 A C05P0 A CB020 A CS230 A CT030 A F0225 C F0795 C F2015 C F3200 C K1550 C K2515 A K3401 A K4500 A K4665 C K8250 C P2100 A R7250 C
1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Cabinet, U/C/B, 1 Shelf, 1 Drawer, 1 DO, 36x24x22 Cabinet, U/C/B, 4 Drawer, 36x24x22 Cabinet, Sink, U/C/B, 2 Door, 36x48x22 Cabinet, W/H, 2 Shelf, 1 DO, Sloping Top, 38x24x13 Sink, SS, Double Compartment, 10x14x16 ID Countertop, High Pressure Laminate Chair, Dining Room Table, Dining Basket, Wastepaper, Metal/Plastic, 2 Swinging Doors Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Brewer, Coffee, Auto, Elect, 3 Burner, Side/Side Dishwasher, Household Hood, Exhaust, Non-Commercial , Household, 4 Burner, w/Oven, Electric Oven, Microwave, Consumer Toaster, Pop-Up, 4 Slice, Electric Disposal, Garbage, 2 HP Motor Refrigerator/Freezer, 20 Cubic Feet
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
120 120 120 208 120 240 220 120
15 15 15 40 15 14 12 15
LC05 PATIENT EDUCATION CLASSROOM F0115 C 1 Bookcase, Open, 5 Shelf F0280 C 12 Chair, Swivel, Low Back F0465 C 1 Cabinet, Storage, 2 Door, 5 Shelf F0780 C 6 Table, Work, 60W x 30D F2000 C 1 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal F2100 C 1 Lectern, Mobile, With Reading Light M0515a C 1 55 - 60 " LED with VGA or HDMI cabling F3200 C 1 Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter M0507 C 1 Video Teleconferencing System M0515a C 1 Television, Flat Screen 50"
120 120 240 120
4 2 7.7 3
Page 56 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. LC07 WAITING ROOM A6046 C F0305 C F0305a C F0740 C F2300 C F2310 A F3200 C M0430 C M0515 C
Quantity 2 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Description Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Chair, Waiting Room, Single Chair, Waiting Room, Single Bariatric Table, Occasional, Lamp, 20 x 27 x 27 Rack, Magazine, Wall Mounted Rack, Pamphlet, Wall Mounted Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Recorder / Player, Digital, Video, DVD Television, Plasma
120 120
2 3
LC08 NUTRITION CARE SGT / COST ACCOUNTANT E0123 C 1 Workstation, Straight, Free Standing, 72" W F0205 C 1 Chair, Side With Arms F0275 C 1 Chair, Swivel, High Back F0420 C 1 Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height F2000 C 1 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal M1801 C 1 Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor M1825 C 1 Printer, Computer LC09 MANAGEMENT ASSISTANT E0123 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C M1801 C M1825 C LC10 MANAGEMENT ASSISTANT E0123 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C M1801 C M1825 C LC11 DIETITIAN OFFICE A5145 A A6046 C E0078 C F0110 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C F3200 C M1801 C M1825 C
120
120 120
5 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
Page 57 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. Quantity LC12 HEIGHT/WEIGHT SCREENING E0222 C 1 F0205 C 1 F0275 C 1 F2000 C 1 F3200 C 1 M1801 C 1 M4040 C 1 LC13 DIETITIAN OFFICE A5145 A A6046 C E0078 C F0110 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C F3200 C M1801 C M1825 C LC14 DIETITIAN OFFICE A5145 A A6046 C E0078 C F0110 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C F3200 C M1801 C M1825 C LE01 COST ACCOUNTANT A5145 A A6046 C E0078a C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C F3200 C M1801 C M1825 C
Description Workstation, Computer, O/H Cab, Wall Mtd, 48" W Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, High Back Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Scale, Weighting, 300 Pound Capacity
120
120
2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Workstation, L-Shaped w/Peninsula, Free Std, 72x72 Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120
120 120
5 3
Page 58 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. LE02 NCOIC OFFICE A5145 A A6046 C E0078 C F0110 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C F3200 C M1801 C M1825 C LE03 CHIEF, FOOD SERVICE A5145 A A6046 C E0078 C F0110 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C F3200 C M1801 C M1825 C LE09 EXPEDITING M2055
Quantity 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
LE30B HOME COOKING STATION Lavatory - Rectangular 1 LE30C PIZZA AND OVERSEAS STATION Lavatory - Rectangular 2 LE30D SALAD STATION Lavatory - Rectangular LE31 DINING ROOM F0225 C F0225a C F0795 C F0795r C F0795S C
19" x 17"
19" x 17"
19" x 17"
30 1 3 3 4
Chair, Dining Room Chair, Dining Room Bariatric Table, Dining Table, Dining Table, Dining
Page 59 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. LE35 CORRIDOR A6046 C F0225 C F0795 C F0795S C F3070 C F3235 C R2201 A LE40 DINING ROOM A5210 A A5220 A A6046 C F0225 C F0225a C F0795 C F0795r C F0795S C M0515 C LE40A CONDIMENT STAND CT030 A LF04 JANITOR CLOSET A5135 A F0500 C F0505 C P4700 A LF10 SHIFT SUPERVISOR E0123 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C M1801 C M1825 C
Quantity 1 12 2 2 1 2 2
Description Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Chair, Dining Room Table, Dining Table, Dining Case, Display Rack, Hat/Coat, Floor Standing Fountain, Water, CRS, Wall Mounted, 2 Level
Yes
Yes
115
2 2 4 132 2 24 4 12 2
Bracket, Television, Wall Mounted, w/Adjust Arm Bracket, Television, Wall Backing Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Chair, Dining Room Chair, Dining Room Bariatric Table, Dining Table, Dining Table, Dining Television, Plasma
120
Countertop, High Pressure Laminate
1 1 1 1
Shelf, Utility W/ Mop/Broom Holders, SS, Surf Mntd Cart, Janitor's Bucket, Mop, With Wringer, 26 Quart Sink, Mop, Molded Stone, 10x36x24
Yes
Yes
Yes
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
Page 60 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. Quantity LF12 EXECUTIVE ASSISTANT A6046 C 1 E0063 C 1 F0110 C 1 F0255 C 2 F0275 C 1 F0420 C 1 F2000 C 1 F3200 C 1 F3230 A 1 M1801 C 1 M1825 C 1 LF13 INPATIENT CLINICAL DIETETICS A5145 A 2 A6046 C 1 E0078 C 1 F0110 C 1 F0205 C 2 F0275 C 1 F0420 C 1 F2000 C 1 F3200 C 1 M1801 C 1 M1825 C 1 LF14 TRAINING CUBICLE E0123 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C M1801 C M1825 C LF15 NCO NUTRITION CARE E0123 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C M1801 C M1825 C
Description Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Workstation, L-Shaped w/Peninsula, Wall Mtd, 72x72 Bookcase, 3 Shelf Chair, Easy Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Rack, Hat / Coat, Wall Mounted Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120
120 120
5 3
120
120 120
5 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
Page 61 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. LF16 DIET TECHS E0123 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C M1801 C M1825 C LF17 STORAGE, CATERING M2055 C LF18 CASHIER A5145 A6046 E0051 F0110 F0205 F0275 F0420 F2000 F3200 M1801 M1825
Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Artwork, Decorative, With Frame Workstation, Corner Work Surface, Wall Mtd, 72x48 Bookcase, 3 Shelf Chair, Side With Arms Chair, Swivel, High Back Cabinet, Filling, Lateral, Half Height Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Computer, Microprocessing, w/Flat Panel Monitor Printer, Computer
120
120 120
5 3
LF19 OPERATIONS MANAGER A5145 A A6046 C E0078 C F0110 C F0205 C F0275 C F0420 C F2000 C F3200 C M1801 C M1825 C
2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
120
120 120
5 3
Page 62 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. LF20 STAFF LOUNGE A1080 A A5075 C A5080 A A5145 A A5210 A A5220 A C02C0 A C02D0 A C04P0 A CB020 A CS010 A CT030 A F0225 C F0795 C F2015 C F3025 A F3050 A F3200 C K1552 C K4665 C M0500 C R7250 C
Quantity 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 8 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Description Mirror, Posture, Wall Mounted Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Bracket, Television, Wall Mounted, w/Adjust Arm Bracket, Television, Wall Backing Cabinet, U/C/B, 1 Shelf, 1 Drawer, 1 DO, 36x24x22 Cabinet, U/C/B, 4 Drawer, 36x24x22 Cabinet, Sink, U/C/B, 2 Door, 36x36x22 Cabinet, W/H, 2 Shelf, 1 DO, Sloping Top, 38x24x13 Sink, SS, Single Compartment, 7.5x12x12 ID Countertop, High Pressure Laminate Chair, Dining Room Table, Dining Basket, Wastepaper, Metal/Plastic, 2 Swinging Doors Board, Bulletin, Wood Framed, 36 x 24 Whiteboard, Dry Erase Clock, Battery, 12" Diameter Brewer, Coffee, Auto, Elect, 3 Burner, Front/Back Oven, Microwave, Consumer Television, Color, 20" Diagonal Refrigerator/Freezer, 20 Cubic Feet
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
120 120 120 120
15 15 1 15
LF21 PERSONAL PROPERTY LOCKERS, FEMALE A1030 C 9 Locker, 2 Person, Over/Under A1080 A 1 Mirror, Posture, Wall Mounted F2000 C 1 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal LF22 PERSONAL PROPERTY LOCKERS, MALE A1030 C 9 Locker, 2 Person, Over/Under A1080 A 1 Mirror, Posture, Wall Mounted F2000 C 1 Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal LF23 STAFF TOILET, FEMALE A1066 A A5075 C A5080 A A5109 A A5145 A A5200 A C0039 A CT030 A F2000 C P3070 A P9050 A
1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1
Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Grab Bar, 1-1/4" Dia, SS, 2 Wall, W/C Accessible Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Dispenser, Toilet Tissue, SS, 2-Roll, Surface Mntd Rail, Apron, 4x48x1 Countertop, High Pressure Laminate Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Lavatory, Vitreous China, Under or Counter Top Mtd Toilet, Wall Hung, Siphon Jet_ADA
Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Page 63 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent
Steam Return
Medical Vac
Medical Air
Cold Water
Hot Water
Dental Air
Draw No.
Spec. Ref.
Oral Evac
Gas Evac
Nitrogen
J.S.N. Log. Cat. LF24 STAFF TOILET, MALE A1066 A A5075 C A5080 A A5109 A A5145 A A5200 A C0039 A CT030 A F2000 C P3070 A P8150 A P9050 A
Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Description Mirror, Float Glass, With SS Frame Dispenser, Soap, Disposable Dispenser, Paper Towel, SS, Surface Mounted Grab Bar, 1-1/4" Dia, SS, 2 Wall, W/C Accessible Hook, Garment, Double, SS, Surface Mounted Dispenser, Toilet Tissue, SS, 2-Roll, Surface Mntd Rail, Apron, 4x48x1 Countertop, High Pressure Laminate Basket, Wastepaper, Round, Metal Lavatory, Vitreous China, Under or Counter Top Mtd Uniral, Wall Hung, ADA Toilet, Wall Hung, Siphon Jet_ADA
Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Page 64 of 64
Remarks
Oxygen
Lab Air
Steam
Amps
Volts
Vent

Vol 4

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Vol 4

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

US Army Corps of Engineers Savannah District

Fort Stewart Georgia

This page was intentionally left blank for duplex printing.

Winn Army Community Hospital Addition/Alteration

DIVISION 04 - MASONRY 04 20 00 MASONRY

Winn Army Community Hospital Addition/Alteration

METAL LADDERS METAL RAILINGS WELDED STEEL BAR GRATING

Winn Army Community Hospital Addition/Alteration

Winn Army Community Hospital Addition/Alteration

Winn Army Community Hospital Addition/Alteration

DIVISION 34 - TRANSPORTATION 34 71 13.19 *4 DELETED

-- End of Project Table of Contents --

PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 5

This page was intentionally left blank for duplex printing.

Winn Army Community Hospital Addition/Alteration

Winn Army Community Hospital Addition/Alteration

Winn Army Community Hospital Addition/Alteration

Winn Army Community Hospital Addition/Alteration

Winn Army Community Hospital Addition/Alteration

ACG Certified Commissioning Agent

ACG Certified Commissioning Agent ACG Certified Commissioning Agent

NEBB Qualified Commissioning Administrator NEBB Qualified Commissioning Administrator

Winn Army Community Hospital Addition/Alteration

Winn Army Community Hospital Addition/Alteration

PRODUCTS TEST EQUIPMENT

Winn Army Community Hospital Addition/Alteration

Winn Army Community Hospital Addition/Alteration

Winn Army Community Hospital Addition/Alteration

Winn Army Community Hospital Addition/Alteration

Winn Army Community Hospital Addition/Alteration

Winn Army Community Hospital Addition/Alteration

Winn Army Community Hospital Addition/Alteration

Winn Army Community Hospital Addition/Alteration

APPENDIX A PRE-FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST CHECKLISTS

Winn Army Community Hospital Addition/Alteration

Winn Army Community Hospital Addition/Alteration

Winn Army Community Hospital Addition/Alteration

Winn Army Community Hospital Addition/Alteration

Winn Army Community Hospital Addition/Alteration

Winn Army Community Hospital Addition/Alteration

Winn Army Community Hospital Addition/Alteration

Winn Army Community Hospital Addition/Alteration

Winn Army Community Hospital Addition/Alteration

Winn Army Community Hospital Addition/Alteration

Winn Army Community Hospital Addition/Alteration

Winn Army Community Hospital Addition/Alteration

___ ___ ___

___ ___ ___

___ ___ ___

___ ___ ___

___ ___ ___

___ ___ ___

___ ___ ___

___ ___ ___

Winn Army Community Hospital Addition/Alteration

Winn Army Community Hospital Addition/Alteration

APPENDIX B FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTS CHECKLISTS

Winn Army Community Hospital Addition/Alteration

Winn Army Community Hospital Addition/Alteration

Winn Army Community Hospital Addition/Alteration

Winn Army Community Hospital Addition/Alteration

Winn Army Community Hospital Addition/Alteration

_ _ ___

_ _ ___

_ _ ___

_ _ ___

_ _ ___

_ _ ___

_ _ ___

_ _ ___